Geotech
Uploaded by
Benigno JoelGeotech
Uploaded by
Benigno JoelGeotechnical
Design Manual
M 46-03.14
June 2021
Environmental and Regional Operations
Construction Division
Geotechnical Office
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Information: This material can be made available in an alternate
format by emailing the Office of Equal Opportunity at [email protected] or by calling toll free,
855-362-4ADA(4232). Persons who are deaf or hard of hearing may make a request by calling the
Washington State Relay at 711.
Title VI Notice to Public: It is the Washington State Department of Transportation’s (WSDOT) policy to
assure that no person shall, on the grounds of race, color, national origin or sex, as provided by Title VI of
the Civil Rights Act of 1964, be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be otherwise
discriminated against under any of its programs and activities. Any person who believes his/her Title VI
protection has been violated, may file a complaint with WSDOT’s Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO). For
additional information regarding Title VI complaint procedures and/or information regarding our non-
discrimination obligations, please contact OEO’s Title VI Coordinator at 360-705-7090.
Contents
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Scope of Geotechnical Design, Construction, and Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Role of Offices Providing In-House Geotechnical Design, Construction, and
Maintenance Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Geotechnical Support within the WSDOT Project Management Process (PMP) . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4 Geotechnical Report Review Process, Certification and Approval Requirements . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5 Reports Produced by Consultants or other Agencies for WSDOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.6 Geotechnical Consultant Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.7 Geotechnical Information Provided to Bidders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.8 Sample Retention and Chain of Custody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.9 Geotechnical Design Policies and their Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.10 Geotechnical Construction Support Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.11 Geotechnical Construction Submittal Review Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.12 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Appendix 1-A Preliminary Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work . . . . . . . 1-A-1
Appendix 1-B Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-B-1
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Preliminary Project Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 Development of the Subsurface Exploration Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 Development of the Laboratory Testing Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.5 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Appendix 2-A Field Exploration Request Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-A-1
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 3 Field Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Activities and Policies – Before Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-3 Activities and Policies – During Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-4 Activities and Policies – After Exploration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-5 Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-7 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Appendix 3-A Daily Drill Report Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Appendix 3-B Portable Penetrometer Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Appendix 3-C Field Investigation Best Management Practices for Erosion and
Spill Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Appendix 3-D Department of Natural Resources Memorandum of Understanding:
Drilling Operations – State Owned Aquatic Lands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Appendix 3-E Geotechnical Field Investigation and Contaminated Drilling Waste
Management Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Appendix 3-F State Materials Laboratory Sample- Handling Policy for
Contaminated and Potentially Contaminated Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Appendix 3-G WSDOT Well Tracking Database Information to be Tracked . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Soil Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 Rock Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Appendix 4-A Test Boring Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A-1
Page 4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 The Geologic Stratum as the Basis for Property Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 Influence of Existing and Future Conditions on Soil and Rock Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 Methods of Determining Soil and Rock Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.5 In-Situ Field Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.6 Laboratory Testing of Soil and Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.7 Back-Analysis Based on Known Performance or Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.8 Engineering Properties of Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.9 Engineering Properties of Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.10 Determination and Use of Soil Cohesion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.11 Final Selection of Design Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.12 Selection of Design Properties for Engineered Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.13 Properties of Predominant Geologic Units in Washington . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.14 Application of the Observational Method to Adjust Design Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.15 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Chapter 6 Seismic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-1 Seismic Design Responsibility and Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Geotechnical Seismic Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-3 Seismic Hazard and Site Ground Motion Response Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-4 Seismic Geologic Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-5 Input for Structural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6-7 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-A-1
Appendix 6-B High Resolution Seismic Acceleration Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-B-1
Chapter 7 Slope Stability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Slope Stability Analysis . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.4 Resistance Factors and Safety Factors for Slope Stability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.5 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 5
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 8 Foundation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Overall Design Process for Structure Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.3 Data Needed for Foundation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.4 Foundation Selection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.5 Overview of LRFD for Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.6 LRFD Loads, Load Groups and Limit States to be Considered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.7 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.8 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Service Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.9 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Strength Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.10 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Extreme Event Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.11 Spread Footing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.12 Driven Pile Foundation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.13 Drilled Shaft Foundation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8.14 Micropiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.15 Proprietary Foundation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.16 Detention Vaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.17 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Appendix 8-A Approved Proprietary Foundation Systems (Vacant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-A-1
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Drill Shaft
Design Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-B-1
Chapter 9 Embankments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Overview and Data Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.3 Stability Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.4 Settlement Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9.5 Construction Considerations and PS&E Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-A-1
Page 6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Overview and Data Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Overall Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3 Soil Cut Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.4 Use of Excavated Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.5 Special Considerations for Loess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.6 PS&E Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.7 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Appendix 10-A Washington State Department of Transportation Loess Slope
Design Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-A-1
Chapter 11 Ground Improvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Ground Improvement
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Chapter 12 Rock Cut Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Rock Cut Stability Analysis . 12-1
12.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Chapter 13 Landslide Analysis and Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Landslide Analysis . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Chapter 14 Unstable Rockslope Analysis and Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Unstable Rockslope
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 7
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15-1 Introduction and Design Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15-2 Overview of Wall Classifications and Design Process for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15-3 Required Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15-4 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15-5 Wall Type Specific Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15-6 Standard Plan Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
15-7 Temporary Cut Slopes and Shoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15-8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70
15-9 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-74
Appendix 15-A Preapproved Proprietary Wall and Reinforced Slope General
Design Requirements and Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-A-1
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and
Construction Review Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-B-1
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements . 15-C-1
Appendix 15-D Preapproved Proprietary Wall Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-D-1
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-E-1
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-F-1
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-G-1
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-H-1
Appendix 15-I Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Eureka einforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-I-1
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-J-1
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar ARES Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-K-1
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar MESA Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-L-1
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-M-1
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for SSL Concrete Panel Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-N-1
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-O-1
Page 8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Contents
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Allan Block Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-P-1
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-Q-1
Appendix 15-R Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Lock and Load Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-R-1
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for KeyGrid Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-S-1
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Basalite GEOWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-T-1
Chapter 16 Geosynthetic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2 Development of Design Parameters for Geosynthetic Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.3 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts,
and Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.2 Foundation Design Requirements for Cantilever Signals, Strain Poles, Cantilever Signs,
Sign Bridges, and Luminaires - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
17.3 Noise Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
17.4 Culverts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
17.5 Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
17.6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Chapter 18 Geotechnical Design for Marine Structure Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.2 Design Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.3 Load and Resistance Factors for Marine Structures Subject to Ship Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.4 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Chapter 19 Infiltration Facility Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.2 Geotechnical Investigation and Design for Infiltration Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.3 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 9
June 2021
Contents
Chapter 20 Unstable Slope Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20.2 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Chapter 21 Materials Source Investigation and Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.2 Material Source Geotechnical Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.3 Materials Source Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for
Design-Build Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22-2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22-3 Purpose and Content of the Geotechnical Reports Included in the Contract Documents . . 22-6
22-4 Geotechnical and Other Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
22-5 Geotechnical RFP Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
22-6 Geotechnical Investigation During RFP Advertisement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
22-7 Geotechnical Support for Design-Build Projects During RFP Advertisement and
Post-Award . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
22-8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
22-9 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Appendix 22-A Example Supplemental Geotechnical Boring Program ITP Language . 22-A-1
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23.1 Overview and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23.2 Report Certification and General Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23.3 Geotechnical Office Report Content Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
23.4 Information to Be Provided in the Geotechnical Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21
23.5 Consultant Geotechnical Reports and Documentation Produced on Behalf of WSDOT . . 23-24
23.6 Summary of Geotechnical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-25
Appendix 23-A PS&E Review Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-A-1
Appendix 23-B Typical Design Cross-Section for a Deep Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-B-1
Page 10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
1 .1 Scope of Geotechnical Design, Construction, and
Maintenance Support
The focus of geotechnical design, construction, and maintenance support within the
context of WSDOT is to ensure that the soil or rock beneath the ground surface can
support the loads and conditions placed on it by transportation facilities. Typical
geotechnical activities include the following:
• subsurface field investigations
• geologic site characterization, laboratory testing of soil and rock
• structure foundation and retaining wall design
• soil cut and fill stability design
• subsurface ground improvement
• seismic site characterization and design
• rock slope design
• unstable slope management
• unstable slope (e.g., rock fall, landslides, debris flow, etc.) mitigation
• infiltration, subsurface drainage and related hydrogeologic design
• material source (pits and quarries) evaluation
• long-term site monitoring for geotechnical engineering purposes
• support to Regional construction staff regarding geotechnical issues and
contractor claims
• support to Regional maintenance staff as geotechnical problems (e.g., landslides,
rock fall, earthquake or flood damage, etc.) arise on transportation facilities
throughout the state
A geotechnical investigation is conducted on all projects that involve significant
grading quantities (including state owned materials source development), unstable
ground, foundations for structures, and ground water impacts (including infiltration).
The goal of the geotechnical investigation is to preserve the safety of the public
who use the facility, as well as to preserve the economic investment by the
State of Washington.
As defined in this manual, geotechnical engineering is inclusive of all the aspects
of design and construction support as described above, and includes the disciplines
of foundation engineering and engineering geology. Geotechnical engineering
shall be conducted by engineers or engineering geologists who possess adequate
geotechnical training and experience. Geotechnical engineering shall be conducted
in accordance with regionally or nationally accepted geotechnical practice, and the
geotechnical engineering practice as defined by this manual. Geotechnical engineering
shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of, a person licensed to perform
such work in the state of Washington, who is qualified by education or experience
in this technical specialty of engineering per WAC 196-27A. For work that does or
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-1
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
does not require certification by a professional engineer, but does require certification
by a licensed engineering geologist (LEG), such work also shall be performed by,
or under the direct supervision of, a person licensed to perform such work in the state
of Washington, who is qualified by education or experience in this technical specialty
per WAC 308-15.
1.1.1 Geotechnical Design Objectives for Project Definition Phase
For the project definition phase, the geotechnical recommendations provided will
be at the conceptual/feasibility level, for the purpose of developing a project estimate
to establish the transportation construction program to be approved by the legislature.
The investigation for this phase usually consists of a field reconnaissance by the
geotechnical designer and a review of the existing records, geologic maps, and
so forth. For projects that lack significant geotechnical information or are complex,
test pits/borings may be completed and/or geophysical investigation performed
at critical locations for development of the project definition with approval of the
State Geotechnical Engineer.
A key role of the geotechnical designer in this stage of a project is to identify potential
fatal flaws with the project, potential constructability issues, and geotechnical
hazards such as earthquake sources and faults, liquefaction, landslides, rockfall,
and soft ground, for example. The geotechnical designer shall provide conceptual
hazard avoidance or mitigation plans to address all the identified geotechnical
issues. An assessment of the effect geotechnical issues have on construction staging
and project constructability must be made at this time. Future geotechnical design
services needed in terms of time, cost, and the need for special permits to perform
the geotechnical investigation (critical areas ordinances), are determined at this time.
This preliminary geotechnical information is intended to inform where significant
modifications to the preliminary design should be considered prior to advancing to the
design stage and where significant cost impacts may be realized, such as relocation of
the alignment, horizontal and vertical alignment changes, addition or elimination of
structures, etc. Geologic/geotechnical input during this initial project phase is critical
for complex projects.
1.1.2 Geotechnical Design Objectives for Project Design Phase
It is in this phase that the Region office, or civil consultant, refines and defines the
project’s alignment, sets profiles and grade, and identifies specific project elements
to be addressed by specialty groups within WSDOT, or other consultants. Once
the preliminary project elements and alignments for the project are established, the
geotechnical designer will assess feasible cut and fill slopes to enable the Region
or civil consultant to establish the right-of-way needs for the project. Where walls may
be needed, using approximate wall locations and heights identified by the Region,
an assessment of feasible wall types is performed by the geotechnical designer,
primarily to establish right-of-way and easement needs (as is true for slopes).
The Region will identify potential locations for infiltration/detention facilities, and
the geotechnical designer shall begin investigating and assessing if the selected sites
are suitable for infiltration. The geotechnical data and analysis needed to assess
infiltration/detention facility size and feasibility, including the seasonal ground water
measurements necessary to meet the requirements in the Highway Runoff Manual
Page 1-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
(HRM) are also obtained. Sizing of the infiltration/detention facilities is conducted
at this time to make sure enough right-of-way is available to address the project
storm-water requirements.
Conceptual and/or more detailed preliminary bridge foundation design, for example,
Type, Size, & Location (TS&L), if required, may be conducted during this phase,
if it was not conducted during project definition, to evaluate bridge alternatives and
develop a more accurate estimate of cost.
Before the end of this phase, the geotechnical data necessary to allow future
completion of the PS&E level design work is gathered (final geometric data, test hole
data, and so forth.)
1.1.3 Geotechnical Design Objectives for PS&E Development Phase
It is in this phase that final design of all geotechnical project features is accomplished.
Recommendations for these designs, as well as special provisions and plan details
to incorporate the geotechnical design recommendations in the PS&E, are provided
in the geotechnical reports and memorandums prepared by the geotechnical
designer. This manual, AASHTO Specifications, and WSDOT’s various engineering
publications provide specific design requirements for this phase of design. Detailed
recommendations for the staging and constructability of the project geotechnical
features are also provided.
1.2 Role of Offices Providing In-House Geotechnical Design,
Construction, and Maintenance Support
1.2.1 Lead Role for WSDOT Regarding Geotechnical Policy and Design
Based on an executive level policy decision initiated in 1980, formally implemented
in 1983, and later formally documented in the Design Manual M 22-01, geotechnical
design, construction support, and maintenance support functions are centralized as
a Headquarters function. As a result of this executive decision, the Headquarters
(HQ) Materials Laboratory was directed to begin obtaining staff with specialized
geotechnical expertise and to maintain that specialized expertise. The regions were
directed to retain the Region Materials Engineer position, and that Region Materials
staff be trained in the area of soils to the degree possible to be able to function as an
effective liaison with the HQ Materials Laboratory geotechnical personnel. However,
the major geotechnical work (see Section 1.2.2) is to be conducted by the HQ’s staff,
based on this executive policy.
The Geotechnical Office, within the Construction Division, hereinafter referred
to as the Geotechnical Office, is the State’s expert for all geotechnical design and
construction work. The Geotechnical Office provides direct geotechnical design,
technical oversight for all consultant geotechnical design, and quality verification on
design-build projects.
How the geotechnical design will be accomplished will be identified in the Project
Management Plan (PMP) at the initiation of a project. The PMP will include the
initial scope, schedule and budget of the geotechnical design work. As the project
develops, scope schedule and budget may be revised through the change management
plan. The PMP will also include how the project manager, Region Materials Lab and
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-3
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
the Geotechnical Office will work together to provide the oversight and expertise
necessary to retain a strong owner role, thus ensuring a geotechnical design product
that is consistent with WSDOT policy and developed in the best interest of the state.
The Geotechnical Office provides the lead regarding the development and
implementation of geotechnical design policy for WSDOT. The State Geotechnical
Engineer is the final approval authority for geotechnical policy, and for geotechnical
investigations and designs conducted statewide for WSDOT projects. Geotechnical
policies are contained in the Design Manual (e.g., Chapters 610, 630, and 730), the
Standard Plans, the Standard Specifications, and in General Special Provisions in
addition to this Geotechnical Design Manual. The State Geotechnical Engineer is also
the final approval authority regarding geotechnical designs conducted by others (e.g.,
local agencies, developers, etc.) that result in modification to transportation facilities
that are under the jurisdiction of WSDOT or otherwise impact WSDOT facilities. For
cases where geotechnical design is being conducted by others on behalf of WSDOT,
such as by consultants working directly for WSDOT and geotechnical consultants
working for design-builders, where this GDM states that approval of the WSDOT State
Geotechnical Engineer is required, that approval authority is not transferrable to the
designer of record (e.g., for a design-builder). Where this GDM states that approval by
the State Geotechnical Engineer is required, these are WSDOT design policy issues,
not designer of record design decisions. See Section 22.6 for additional discussion on
this issue as it applies to design-build contracts.
The functional structure of the Geotechnical Office is provided in Figure 1-1.
State Geotechnical Engineer
Foundation Engineering Section Engineering Geology Section
Foundation Foundation Foundation Engineering Unstable
Design Unit Design Unit Design Unit Geology Slope – Pit
Design Unit and Quarry
- GIS Unit
Geotechnical Geotechnical
Division Division
Technician Laboratory and Engineering
and Clerical Instrumentation Geology
Support Support Design Unit
Geotechnical Geotechnical Field
Consultant Liaison, Construction Exploration
Innovative Support Unit
Contracting, and
Project Development
Functional Organization of the WSDOT Geotechnical Office
Figure 1-1
Page 1-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
1.2.2 Geotechnical Functions Delegated to the Regions
Some geotechnical functions have been delegated to the Region Materials Engineers
(RME), as described in the Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 610. In general, the
RME functions as the initial point of contact for all geotechnical work, with the
exception of Bridge Office, Washington State Ferries (WSF), and Urban Corridors
Office (UCO) projects. If the geotechnical work required is relatively straightforward
(in that the ground is stable and relatively firm, bedrock is not involved, the design
is not complicated by high ground water or seepage, and the design of the project
geotechnical elements does not require specialized geotechnical design expertise),
the RME takes the lead in conducting the geotechnical work. If this is not the case,
the RME asks for the involvement and services of the Geotechnical Office. The
Geotechnical Office responds to and provides recommendations directly to the
WSDOT Office responsible for the project, but always keeps the RME informed.
For structural projects (bridges and tunnels, for example), the Bridge and Structures
Office works directly with the Geotechnical Office. For WSF projects, the Terminal
Engineering Office works directly with the RME or the Geotechnical Office,
depending on the nature of the project. For UCO projects, the Geotechnical Office
handles all geotechnical work.
General guidelines and requirements regarding coordination of geotechnical work are
provided in the Design Manual M 22-01 Section 610.04. Figure 1-2 illustrates the
division of geotechnical design responsibility between the region materials offices
and the Geotechnical Office and is consistent with the Design Manual. The Region
Materials Engineers (RME) and their staff, and the Geotechnical Office personnel
should communicate on a regular basis as projects requiring geotechnical input
develop. The RME should be viewed as the Geotechnical Office's representative in
the region. The RME’s function as the initial point of contact for geotechnical work
in their respective regions in that the RME will be evaluating the projects included
in the construction program within their respective regions at the beginning of the
design phase for those projects, and deciding if the nature of the work included in those
projects will require Geotechnical Office involvement and design support. Similarly,
during the project definition phase, the RME functions as the initial point of contact
regarding geotechnical issues. If it appears the nature of the geotechnical issues that
need to be addressed to develop an accurate project definition will require Geotechnical
Office assistance, the RME is responsible to contact the Geotechnical Office to obtain
geotechnical input for the project. Figure 1-2 should be used as a guide for this
purpose for project definition, design, and PS&E development, but some judgment will
be required, as specific projects and/or conditions may not completely fit the project
categories listed in Figure 1-2. The RME office and the Geotechnical Office must view
themselves as a team to get the geotechnical work accomplished from project inception
to completion of the construction. If the RME is not sure if Geotechnical Office
involvement is needed, the RME and Geotechnical Office should discuss the project
needs together.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-5
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
For geotechnical work that is clearly the responsibility of the RME to complete based
on Figure 1-2, the RME should complete the geotechnical subsurface site investigation
plan, perform the design, and complete the region soils report. For those regions that
do not have the resources (i.e., drill crews) to carry out the geotechnical subsurface
site investigation, the RME submits the plan to the State Geotechnical Engineer, or
the individual delegated to act on behalf of the State Geotechnical Engineer. In this
case, the subsurface site investigation is carried out by the Geotechnical Office's Field
Exploration Unit. If the results of the site investigation demonstrate that the project
geotechnical design is still a RME responsibility, the data from the site investigation
will be provided to the RME and the RME will complete the geotechnical design and
report. If the subsurface conditions are such that HQ involvement is required, the
Geotechnical Office will discuss the design responsibility with the RME. If, due to the
nature of the project or the potential subsurface conditions, it is not clear if the design
will be a HQ or region responsibility, the RME should contact the Geotechnical Office
for assistance in planning, and if necessary to carry out, the geotechnical investigation
and design.
With regard to division of work between the Geotechnical Office and the RME,
Figure 1-2 indicates that HQ involvement is required if the soils appear to be soft
or unstable. As a general guide, granular soils classified as loose or very loose
(i.e., N ≤ 10 blows/ft) and clays classified as very soft to stiff (N ≤ 15 blows/ft) should
be considered potentially unstable, especially if they are wet or are exhibiting signs
of instability such as cracking or slumping. When such soils are encountered by the
RME, whether or not the work should be retained by the RME should be discussed
with the Geotechnical Office to determine of more detailed input from HQ regarding
the stability of the soils encountered is needed.
Page 1-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
Project Development and/or
Maintenance
Through RME to HQ Geotech. Office
Field Investigation Joint Field Investigation by Region Field Investigation by
by Region and Geotech. Office Geotech. Office
Typical Projects: Typical Projects: Typical Projects:
• Resurfacing • Minor Cuts/Fills • Bridge Structures
• Minor Cuts/Fills <10 ft, with Potentially • Major Bldg. Found.
<10 ft, with no Unstable Soil • Ferry Terminals
Unstable Soil • Walls <10 ft and • Landslides
• Walls <10 ft and rockeries < 5 ft on • All Rock Cuts
Rockeries < 5 ft, Potentially Unstable or • Minor Cuts/Fills
Except Wall on Soft Soil <10 ft, with Unstable
Steep Slope or on • Maint. Bldg’s, Rest Soil (includes all
Soft Soil Areas, & Park & Ride wetlands)
• Maint. Bldg’s, Rest Lots, with Potentially •Major Cuts/Fills
Areas, & Park & Ride unstable Soil > 10 ft (most soils)
Lots, with no • Pits & Quarries (field • Walls >10 ft,
unstable Soil investigation only) Rockeries >5 ft, and
• Culverts <3 ft dia. • Signs, Signals, & all Geosynthetic and
• Signs, Signals, & Luminaires which Special Design Walls
Luminaires with Need Special • Walls on Steep
“standard” foundation Foundation Slopes, with Heavy
•Pits & Quarries •Sliver cuts/fills > 10 ft or Surcharges, or on
• Pavement and culverts/arches > 3 ft in Soft Soil
Structure Coring, pH dense to very dense soils • Culverts >3 ft dia.
•Infiltration ponds with •Infiltration ponds with Infiltration ponds with
slopes < 10 ft high, potentially unstable soil, slopes > 10 ft high, or any
in gently sloping areas or located on sloping ground pond in soft soil, or where
not in soft or unstable soils seepage could cause instability
Region soil report or memo by HQ Geotechnical Report or
RME Memo
HQ Review and concurrence CC to RME
To Appropriate
Design/Construction Office
Geotechnical Design Workflow and Division of Responsibility
Figure 1-2
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-7
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
1.2.3 Coordination between HQ’s and Region Regarding Emergency Response
The need for emergency geotechnical response is primarily the result of slope failure,
rockfall events, flooding, or earthquakes. For the case of slope failure (including
retaining walls) and rockfall events, and slope failure caused by flooding or
earthquakes, the following process should be used:
1. Once the failure occurs, Region Maintenance conducts an initial evaluation of
the site.
2. If there is any question as to the stability of the affected slope and the potential for
future slope movement or rockfall, the Region Maintenance Office should contact
the Regional Materials Engineer (RME).
3. The RME performs a site review as soon as possible to assess the magnitude of the
problem, and to determine if Geotechnical Office assistance is needed. To save
time, the RME may, at the RME’s discretion, skip the RME field review and
transfer the field review and all design responsibilities fully to the Geotechnical
Office, if it is obvious that HQ involvement will be needed. If it is determined
that a detailed geotechnical evaluation by the Geotechnical Office is not needed
(e.g., conditions are not geologically complex, the failure is limited in extent, and
the risk of continued slope movement or instability is low, and slope stabilization
methods are not required), the RME provides recommendations to complete the
cleanup and facility repair.
4. If it is determined that there is a real threat of continued slope movement,
instability, or rockfall, there are geological complexities at the site that will
require a more detailed geotechnical analysis to assess the potential threat,
or if an engineered slope stability mitigation may be required, the RME
immediately contacts the Geotechnical Office to complete the initial evaluation.
This contact may initially take the form of a phone call and/or e-mail with photos,
and as soon as possible a joint site review, if the Geotechnical Office feels it
is warranted.
5. The Geotechnical Office specialist(s) responds as soon as possible and comes
to site to make an initial assessment. The specialist provides the Region (on site)
with that assessment and the risk(s) associated with that assessment. The
assessment includes evaluation of the cause(s) of the instability, the potential
for future instability, whether or not the threat of future instability is immediate,
the potential threat to public and worker safety, and the need for slope
stabilization measures.
6. The Region (typically a project office) should use the field recommendations
provided by the Geotechnical Office specialist to begin developing a scope
of work and cost estimate to complete the emergency work concurrently with
Geotechnical Office management review of the field recommendations, and will
immediately contact the region if any changes in the recommendations are needed
as a result of the technical review of the recommendations.
Page 1-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
7. Based on the assessment and recommendations, the Region evaluates risk(s)
and cost to mitigate the problem. The Region then makes a decision to either
immediately repair the slope and facility, opening up the facility to the public,
or to close, maintain closure, or otherwise limit facility public access. If the risk
is too high to immediately repair the facility and/or open it up to full public access,
the Region requests the Geotechnical Office for a more complete evaluation and
stabilization recommendation.
8. Once stabilization recommendations are developed, the slope is stabilized, and
the facility is reopened. During the stabilization construction activities, the point
of contact to address any problems that occur and to review the acceptability
of the finished stabilization measures is the office which developed the
stabilization recommendations.
9. Since multiple activities conducted by several offices must occur simultaneously
to address an emergency slope problem, frequent stakeholder meetings
or conference calls should be conducted throughout the duration of the emergency
project (design and construction) to keep all stakeholders informed and to make
intermediate decisions as needed. These stakeholder meetings or conference calls
should occur at key junctures in the development of the project, or as needed based
on the specific needs and duration of the project.
Flood or seismic events can also result in emergency conditions that need geotechnical
evaluation. Other than the slope stability issues addressed above, such events can
affect the integrity of bridges and other structures. In these situations, other than
keeping the RME informed of the situation, the process for geotechnical evaluation
primarily involves the Bridge Office. If the structure is under the jurisdiction of WSF,
then WSF would be responsible to initiate the geotechnical investigation instead of
the Bridge Office. In these cases, the process is generally as follows:
1. Once the failure or structure distress occurs and becomes known, the Bridge
Office (or WSF for marine and terminal work) conducts an initial evaluation of
the structure.
2. If there is damage or potential damage to the structure foundation, the Bridge
Office or WSF contacts the Geotechnical Office to conduct an initial evaluation
to assess the problem, identify potential risks to the structure and the public,
and develop preliminary solutions. The HQ Geotechnical Office should notify
the RME regarding the problem at this point, and discuss with the RME any
involvement the Region Materials Office may need to have.
3. Based on this initial evaluation, the Bridge Office, in concert with the Region,
or WSF in the case of marine or terminal facilities, determines whether or not
to restrict public access, or to close the facility, and whether or not to proceed with
a more complete geotechnical investigation to develop a repair or replacement for
the structure foundation.
4. If it is determined that a more complete geotechnical investigation is needed,
the Geotechnical Office proceeds with the investigation and develops
design recommendations.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-9
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
1.3 Geotechnical Support within the WSDOT Project Management
Process (PMP)
By Executive Order E1032.00, all phases of WSDOT capital transportation
projects are to be delivered according to the principles and practices of the Project
Management Process (PMP). In general, the PMP includes five main steps. These
steps are “Initiate and Align,” “Plan the Work,” “Endorse the Plan,” “Work the Plan,”
and “Transition and Closure.”
Prior to or during the initiate-and-align step, the project manager should contact
the RME to determine if the nature of the project could require Geotechnical Office
involvement. If it appears that Geotechnical Office involvement may be required,
the RME should make arrangements to have a Geotechnical Office representative
included in PMP activities. Note that at this point, detailed project site data will
likely not be available. Therefore, this determination by the RME will likely need
to be made based on conceptual project data, and possibly a project site review. This
determination must be made early in the project development process. For example,
if the project is defined for PMP to include the development of the project definition
(see Section 1.1.1), this determination must be made at the beginning of the project
definition phase. If the project is defined instead to include only the project design and
PS&E development phases (see Sections 1.1.2 and 1.1.3), this determination must be
made at the beginning of the project design phase, as the office responsible for the
geotechnical design work should be included in the planning for the project.
1.3.1 Initiate and Align
Assuming geotechnical design services will be needed to complete the project,
during the "Initiate and Align" step, the individual/office responsible to provide
geotechnical support (i.e., either the Geotechnical Office, the RME Office, or both)
should be included in the project team by the project manager. Once included in
the team, the geotechnical PMP team member (in general, this individual is also the
geotechnical designer for the project) should, as a minimum, participate in the “Initiate
and Align” efforts to provide input regarding roles and responsibilities, boundaries, and
measures of success.
1.3.2 Plan the Work
During the “Plan the Work” step, the geotechnical PMP team member should
provide input to the team regarding the project specific Work Breakdown Structure
(WBS) developed from the Master Deliverables List (MDL), and the input necessary
to develop the project budget and schedule. This would include a detailed analysis
of how long it will take to perform the geotechnical tasks needed to complete
the project, any individual task dependencies that affect task sequencing and
the interrelationship between the geotechnical tasks and tasks to be completed
by other team members, and how much it will cost to complete those tasks. It is the
responsibility of the geotechnical PMP team member to coordinate the resource
needs for the subject project with the resource needs of other projects that require
geotechnical input, so that the proposed project delivery schedule can be achieved.
The geotechnical PMP team member will also coordinate with the project team and
with the Geotechnical Office management regarding the decision to use geotechnical
consultants, if required to achieve the desired project schedule milestones. The
Page 1-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
geotechnical PMP team member also provides technical oversight of and coordination
with any geotechnical consultants being used for the project.
The geotechnical PMP team member should also provide input to the team regarding
potential risks or changes in the geotechnical area that could affect project schedule,
budget, or scope, and provide a strategy to deal with those risks or changes. Examples
of geotechnical risk include potential difficulties in getting drilling permits or right-
of-entry, uncertainties in the scope of the geotechnical investigation required due
to unknown subsurface conditions, mitigation of unstable ground, liquefaction or other
seismic hazards, etc.
The geotechnical PMP team member should also provide the team with a plan
regarding how geotechnical investigation and design quality, as well as how the
accuracy of geotechnical design schedule and budget, will be assured.
1.3.3 Endorse the Plan
Once the work has been planned, the next step is to “Endorse the Plan.” In this step,
the geotechnical aspects of the Project Management Plan should be endorsed by the
management of the office responsible to carry out the geotechnical work (e.g., if the
Geotechnical Office is responsible for completing geotechnical work for the project,
the Geotechnical Office management should endorse the plan). Note: The Project
Management Plan must be reviewed and endorsed by Region Management.
1.3.4 Work the Plan
In the “Work the Plan” step, the geotechnical PMP team member will track the
schedule and budget for the geotechnical work as it progresses, keeping the project
team informed regarding the progress of the geotechnical work as identified in the
project Communication Plan. If changes in the geotechnical schedule and/or budget
are likely due to unanticipated problems, scope changes, or other inaccuracies in the
geotechnical schedule or budget, the geotechnical PMP team member is responsible to
inform the project team as far in advance as possible so that adjustments can be made.
The frequency of reporting to the team on the progress of the work is identified
in the Communication Plan and should be decided based on the needs of the project,
recognizing that excessive progress reporting can, in itself, impact the schedule
and budget for the work due to the time it takes to develop the interim reports.
As problems or changes occur in the project, the geotechnical PMP team member
assists the project team to address those problems or changes.
In general for this step, the geotechnical PMP team member completes, or arranges for
the completion, of the geotechnical report for the project, and assists the team in the
development of contract documents needed to construct the project. In the case of
design-build projects, see Chapter 22 regarding the deliverables needed.
1.3.5 Transition and Closure
The geotechnical PMP team member should coordinate with the project team
regarding the "Transition and Closure" activities that require geotechnical input and
assistance. This may include documenting the geotechnical design decisions made,
and identifying construction contract specifications that need to be reevaluated
at a later time, should the project PS&E be put on the shelf until adequate funding
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-11
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
is available. The geotechnical PMP team member should also make the geotechnical
project file ready for long-term storage, making sure that if another geotechnical
designer must work on the project, that the calculations and logic for the decisions
made are easy to follow.
1.3.6 Application of the PMP to Construction
If possible, the geotechnical PMP team member should continue to provide
geotechnical support to the project through construction, functioning as the
Geotechnical Advisor for the construction project, to minimize any transition issues
between the design and construction phases. The Geotechnical Advisor would
become part of the construction project team in the initiate and align step, and
would participate with the team to define roles and responsibilities, boundaries, and
Measures of Success, assist in planning for risk and/or change, assist in the quality
assurance and control of the project geotechnical features, and help the project team
to manage risks and change as they occur.
1.3.7 Master Deliverables to be Considered
The geotechnical PMP team member will need to provide information regarding
the geotechnical deliverables and tasks in the Master Deliverables List (MDL) (see
Table 1-1) to the project team for consideration in developing the project schedule.
For many deliverables, the region Project Office will need to provide information
before the geotechnical work can begin. The master deliverables provided in Table 1-1
are current as of August 2006. Note that scoping (termed "Project Definition" in
Section 1.1.1), Design, and PS & E are combined into one phase, "Preconstruction",
in the MDL.
All tasks and subtasks under WBS Code PC-21 in Table 1-1 are used to accomplish
the geotechnical work needed to complete the project definition (see Section 1.1.1).
Regarding “Preliminary Site Data” (WBS Code PC-21.01), this information should be
provided by the Project Office to the RME to be consistent with the process described
in Sections 1.2.2 and 1.3. Refer to the Design Manual M 22-01, Section 610.04 for
specifics regarding what information is to be submitted. Note that for the bigger, more
complex projects where some limited field explorations may be needed, this task would
also require the project office to obtain, or to make arrangements to obtain, drilling
permits and right-of-entry. Supplying the necessary site data and permits should be
considered a predecessor task to MDL task PC-21.03.
If it appears that Geotechnical Office involvement may be required, the RME should
make arrangements to have a Geotechnical Office representative included in the
geotechnical work to complete the project definition as discussed previously. Each
office that is involved provides input data for these deliverables in terms of time
and cost to complete the task, and the deliverables themselves. If both offices are
involved, the Project Office will need to add the cost required to accomplish the work
from both offices to obtain the total cost for each task.
Regarding the schedule to complete PC-21.03, the RME and Geotechnical Office
efforts can, in general, be conducted concurrently. Regarding the “Conceptual
Geotechnical Report,” up to two reports may need to be produced, one for the RME
work and one for the Geotechnical Office work, if both offices need to be involved
Page 1-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
in this project phase for the given project. This deliverable should contain the cost
estimate, schedule, and scope of work to complete the final project design through
PS&E, and should discuss the potential geotechnical risk issues that need to be
addressed to construct the project, to establish the scope and budget to construct the
overall project.
WBS Work
Code Task Name Task Description Op
PC-18.03 Discipline Reports - Earth Environmental Procedures Manual Section 420 Earth 0136
(Geology & Soils) (Geology & Soils)
PC-20.03 Materials Source Report A report on a specific WSDOT material source that verifies 0156
the quality and quantity of the material requested
PC-21 Geotechnical Evaluations Development of Geotechnical reports for project.
PC-21.01 Preliminary Site Data Project design office is to provide a project description 0140
and location of work to be performed to Region Materials
Engineer. See Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 610.
PC-21.02 Environmental Permit for Field exploration may require permits to complete. Permits 0138
Field Exploration need to be provided by the Project Office to Geotechnical
Office/Region Materials Office to enable required field work
to be started.
PC-21.03 Conceptual Geotechnical RME/Geotechnical Office will provide recommendations 0140
Report at the conceptual / feasibility level. Some soil borings may
be drilled at this time depending upon project scope and
available information.
PC-21.04 Project Site Data Site information provided to RME by the project design 0140
office (specific to the type of project) to initiate geotechnical
work on a project during the design and PS&E phases. See
Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 610.
PC-21.05 RME Geotech Report(s) Region Geotechnical Report containing geotechnical 0140
recommendations and information applicable to the project.
There is a possibility of multiple reports, depending upon the
scope and complexity of the project.
PC-21.06 HQ Geotechnical Report(s) HQ Geotechnical Report containing geotechnical 0140
recommendations and information applicable to the project.
There is a possibility of multiple reports, depending upon the
scope and complexity of the project.
PC-37.02 Summary of Geotechnical Geotechnical Office and/or Region Materials prepares 0140
Conditions summary of geotechnical conditions for inclusion into the
PS&E as Appendix B.
PC-43.03 Project Geotechnical Printing of pertinent geotechnical reports for sale to 0140
Documentation Package prospective bidders. Prepared by Geotechnical Office and/or
Region Materials and printed by HQ Printing Services.
Geotechnical Items in Master Deliverables List (MDL)
Table 1-1
WBS codes PC-21.04, PC-21.05, PC-21.06 and WBS codes PC-37.02 and PC-43.03)
in Table 1-1 are used to accomplish the geotechnical work to complete the project
design and final PS&E (see Sections 1.1.2 and 1.1.3). Regarding “Project Site Data”
(WSB code PC-21.04), the Project Office provides the site data to the office designated
to take the lead (i.e., the Geotechnical Office, the RME, or both) regarding the
geotechnical work, as determined during the “Initiate and Align” step for the project.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-13
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
Refer to the Design Manual M 22-01 Section 610.04 for specifics regarding the
information to be submitted. This task would also require the project office to obtain,
or to make arrangements to obtain, drilling permits and right-of-entry, if the necessary
permits were not obtained in WBS code PC-21.02 or if they need to be amended.
Supplying the necessary site data and permits should be considered a predecessor task
to MDL tasks PC-21.05 and PC-21.06. The RME and Geotechnical Office efforts can,
in general, be conducted concurrently. Note that WBS Codes PC-21.05 and PC-21.06
must be completed before WBS Codes PC-37.02 and PC-43.03.
1.4 Geotechnical Report Review Process, Certification and
Approval Requirements
The following sections provide minimum requirements to insure the quality of the
geotechnical work conducted by or for WSDOT.
The following terms are used herein:
Quality Control (QC) -- QC is performed by the individual performing the work
while the work is being performed and includes all activities performed to control
the level of quality produced in the end product. It consists of self-checking to
ensure that work is completed in conformance with this manual and standards of
practice. It includes checking for errors, omissions, and making sure that all the
project elements work together coherently.
Quality Assurance (QA) -- Is performed by a person’s supervisor or another
individual not involved in the technical details. It is a system of external review
and audit procedures conducted as an independent objective review by a third
party to assess the effectiveness of the QC program and the quality, completeness,
accuracy, and precision of the work being performed, and that it is consistent with
design standards.
Quality Verification (QV) – Is performed prior to releasing geotechnical work
products to their intended recipients for geotechnical work performed internal
to WSDOT. For work performed outside WSDOT (e.g., consultants), this step is
performed by WSDOT prior to acceptance of the final work products. The purpose
of this step in the quality process is to verify that the QC/QA process used by the
designer was effective for producing a geotechnical work product of acceptable
quality that meets design standards. If, through conducting the QV it appears that
the QC/QA process was not fully followed or if it appears that design standards
may not have been met, QV may include a more detailed review of the design,
including, as needed, comparative QV geotechnical analyses, to help identify the
specific concerns.
All individuals, regardless if they are WSDOT staff or not, who are involved in
geotechnical design are responsible for QC self-checking of their work. Each
individual shall check their own work for compliance with this manual, standards
of practice, errors, and omissions. Individuals are to correct their work before
sending their work to the next individual(s) in the process of producing final
geotechnical products.
The following sections define and describe the Quality Control/Quality Assurance
(QC/QA) process that should be used.
Page 1-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
1.4.1 Quality Control/Quality Assurance/Quality Verification for Geotechnical
Work Produced by the RME’s
The RME is fully responsible for the QC/QA of the geotechnical work they perform.
The RME completes their geotechnical recommendations, certifies them as described
in Section 1.4.3, and sends them to the Geotechnical Office for QV review and
concurrence. If the Geotechnical Office finds the recommendations are not consistent
with department policy or a significant error appears to have occurred (i.e., the QC/QA
process appears to have not been followed), the Geotechnical Office may require that
the RME produce an amendment to the recommendations.
1.4.2 Quality Control/Quality Assurance/Quality Verification for Geotechnical
WorkProduced by the Geotechnical Office
Geotechnical Project Managers (GPM) not only have a QC role for their own work,
they also have a QA role for the work of geotechnical design staff, support staff, and
peers who may be assisting them with portions of their projects. The GPM is tasked
with ensuring that the geotechnical work for their project is complete, thorough,
accurate, and error free. To accomplish this task, the GPM shall perform QA review
of the work that is performed by others in support of the project. If there are issues
with the work that is performed, the GPM is responsible to ensure that the issue is
resolved by working with the other individuals on the team and their supervisors.
If necessary, the GPM will escalate issues upward through the supervisory chain to
achieve successful resolution.
It is expected that GPM’s will seek QA review from their supervisors, peers, or from
other subject matter experts within the Office to ensure that the work they perform
is of the highest quality. A peer review process or subject-matter-expert review is
encouraged for unusual or highly technical project elements. After supervisory,
peer, or subject-matter-expert review is completed, QV review will be performed
by senior staff and the State Geotechnical Engineer prior to work being released to
office customers.
For emergency projects or projects requiring preliminary information to keep moving
forward, QC, QA, and QV reviews shall not be neglected.
Field Exploration Plans
The GPM is responsible for developing the field exploration plan (See Section 2.3).
Before these plans are implemented, the project manager’s supervisor is responsible
to provide quality assurance for these plans to make sure they are complete, that they
consider the available existing data, and that they meet the standards applicable to
the structure or facility to be designed. For highly complex project plans, the State
Geotechnical Engineer should be consulted for QV.
Boring Logs
For boring logs, the Field Exploration Inspector is responsible to make sure that the
draft electronic field boring logs as entered are free of errors and consistent with
the handwritten field logs (QC). To make sure that the inspector sees the final draft
electronic field boring logs, the office staff in the Geotechnical Office will produce
a PDF of each log sent in by the inspector and e-mail them back to the inspector for
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-15
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
review. The inspector will provide any comments to correct errors in the electronic
logs back to the office staff, with a copy to the inspector’s supervisor to ensure that the
log review process has been followed and done correctly, for production of the final
field logs and confirm that they have been reviewed. The geotechnical project manager
is responsible to perform a QA check of the final draft edited boring logs produced by
the technical staff.
Laboratory Testing
Once the drilling is completed, the GPM is responsible to develop the laboratory
testing plan (see Section 2.4). Once the geotechnical project manager who is
assigned the project has received the draft field logs, has selected soil and rock
samples for testing, and if rock core is obtained, has reviewed the rock cores, and
quality assurance of the laboratory testing plan has been conducted, the laboratory
evaluation begins. Laboratory testing of soil and rock shall meet the quality control
requirements in Section 5.6.1, and as applicable the AASHTO accreditation program
requirements. Once the laboratory technicians have completed the specified testing
and documentation and have checked their own work for errors, the supervisor in
charge of the laboratory shall check the test results and reports for errors and incorrect
interpretations and document that the data has been reviewed – once determined to
be free of errors and omissions, the laboratory data are provided to the geotechnical
project manager for use in the project, and also provided to the staff responsible
to produce final draft edited boring logs based on the laboratory test results. The
geotechnical project manager is responsible to check the laboratory test results
for accuracy.
Geotechnical Reports and Memorandums
For geotechnical reports produced by the Geotechnical Office, senior-level review is
required at the following key project junctures:
• The letter/memo transmitting the estimate of the scope of work and estimated costs
for the geotechnical services needed,
• The subsurface investigation plan,
• The laboratory testing plan, and
• The draft/final geotechnical report.
Typically, three levels of review are conducted at each of these project junctures:
• a detailed review by the immediate supervisor (who is licensed) and at other
intermediate times as needed to guide the design (including a detailed review
of the draft report and supporting calculations, and a spot check of the boring logs
and laboratory test data),
• A detailed review by the Chief Foundation Engineer or Chief Engineering
Geologist of the final geotechnical product (e.g., geotechnical report, design
memorandum, or Summary of Geotechnical Conditions) and a spot check of the
calculations and other supporting information, and
• A spot check review and review for consistency with design policy and standards
of practice by the State Geotechnical Engineer.
Page 1-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
The State Geotechnical Engineer may delegate final review authority to the chief or
senior level. For the subsurface investigation and laboratory testing plans, formal
review by the State Geotechnical Engineer is generally not required. A minimum
of one level of review by a licensed professional with the necessary geotechnical or
engineering geology experience must be conducted in all cases, however. Licensed
professionals performing design shall seek peer review and shall obtain the State
Geotechnical Engineer’s approval, or the review and approval of the individual to
whom final review authority has been delegated by the State Geotechnical Engineer,
prior to issuing design recommendations. “Design recommendations” include those
that are considered final, and those that are considered preliminary if the preliminary
recommendations will result in significant design effort being expended by those who
use the recommendations to perform their designs, or if they could otherwise end
up being treated as final recommendations. For those design recommendations that
are clearly identified as being preliminary and subject to change, and for which all
parties receiving those recommendations fully understand that the recommendations
are subject to change and are only to be used for preliminary alternative and scope
development purposes (with the exception of EIS discipline reports, critical area
ordinance reports, or similar documents), final review authority is delegated to the
Chief Foundation Engineer and Chief Engineering Geologist level.
Some projects require significant input by both engineering geologists and foundation
engineers (e.g., landslides contained within a bigger interchange or line project,
bridges or walls founded on soils or rock in which the site geology is very complex,
retaining walls used to stabilize landslides, drainage or infiltration designs where
the groundwater regime is complex, etc.). In such cases, a foundation engineer/
engineering geologist team (i.e., one individual from each Section of the Geotechnical
Office) should perform the design, and as a minimum, senior-level review by the
Chief Foundation Engineer and the Chief Engineering Geologist, in addition to a spot
check review and review for consistency with design policy and standards of practice
by the State Geotechnical Engineer, shall be conducted at each of the key project
junctures identified above.
1.4.3 Report Certification
In general, the individual who did the design, if he/she possesses a PE or LEG, and the
first line reviewer who is licensed, will stamp the report, as required by the applicable
RCW’s and WAC’s. If the second line supervisor/manager, or above (e.g., the State
Geotechnical Engineer, Chief Foundation Engineer, or Chief Engineering Geologist),
through the review process, requires that changes be made in the design and/or
recommendations provided in the report, otherwise provides significant input into
the design, or is the primary reviewer of the report, consistent with the definition of
direct supervision in WAC 196-23 and WAC 308-15-070, the second line supervisor/
manager, or above, will also stamp the report/memorandum. For reports produced
by the Engineering Geology Section that require a Professional Engineer’s stamp,
and which have been produced and reviewed by individuals that do not possess a
Professional Engineer’s license, the State Geotechnical Engineer, or the licensed
professional engineer delegated to act on behalf of the State Geotechnical Engineer,
will provide a detailed review of the design and report, consistent with the definition
of direct supervision in WAC 196-23, and stamp the report. For plan sheets in
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-17
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
construction contracts, the first line manager/supervisor, or above, who has functioned
as the primary reviewer of the geotechnical work as defined above will stamp the
plans, but only if the plan sheets fully and accurately reflect the recommendations
provided in the geotechnical report upon which the plan sheets are based.
1.4.4 Approval of Reports Produced by the Geotechnical Office
The State Geotechnical Engineer, or the individual delegated to act on behalf of the
State Geotechnical Engineer, must sign the geotechnical report or memorandum,
as the designated approval authority for WSDOT regarding geotechnical design
(this includes engineering geology reports). The signature of the approval authority
indicates that the report or memorandum is in compliance with WSDOT geotechnical
standards and policies. This policy also applies to design recommendations that are
sent out informally to other offices (e.g., the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office,
Washington State Ferries Offices, Region Project Engineer Offices, etc.) for their use
in design and PS&E development prior to issuance of the final geotechnical report for
the project or project element.
1 .5 Reports Produced by Consultants or other Agencies for WSDOT
The Geotechnical Office reviews and accepts all geotechnical reports and design
letters/memorandums produced for WSDOT projects, consistent with the division of
geotechnical work as described in Section 1.2.2. However, the consultant/other agency
producing the report shall take full responsibility for the accuracy of the report and its
engineering recommendations.
The Geotechnical Project Manager assigned the project being designed by a
consultant is responsible to develop the scope of work for the consultant task
assignment, or for consultants hired through the region project office, to work with
the region to develop the scope of work. The geotechnical project manager is then
responsible to:
• work with the consultant to make sure that the geotechnical work is carried out in
accordance with the scope of work,
• work with the consultant (and region project office as needed) to address any
changes in scope of work that occur during the life of the project,
• to verify that the work is carried out in accordance with department geotechnical
policies, and
• to provide an overall quality verification (QV) evaluation of the adequacy of the
geotechnical work with regard to WSDOT’s geotechnical policies.
As a minimum, the geotechnical project manager should review the consultant’s
work and recommendations regarding the subsurface investigation plan, and for the
draft/final geotechnical report. If there are questions about the adequacy/accuracy
of the design, the geotechnical project manager should also request and spot check
the consultant’s geotechnical calculations. However, the geotechnical consultant is
responsible for QC/QA for their design and report. The consultant liaison for the
Geotechnical Office is only responsible to assist the geotechnical project manager with
setting up the consultant task assignment and other consultant administration tasks
during the life of the task assignment. See Section 1.6 for a more complete description
of geotechnical consultant administration.
Page 1-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
For reports or design letters/memorandums that cover only the level of geotechnical
work that is clearly region responsibility per Section 1.2.2, the RME reviews
and accepts the report or design letter/memorandum, but still forwards a copy of
the consultant report to the Geotechnical Office for concurrence, consistent with
Section 1.2.2 for regional soils reports. Acceptance of the report or design letter/
memorandum produced by consultants or other agencies shall not be considered to
constitute acceptance of professional responsibility on the part of WSDOT, as well as
the reviewer, for the contents and recommendations contained therein, consistent with
professional responsibility as prescribed by law. Acceptance only indicates that the
contractual obligations under which the report or design letter/memorandum have been
met and that the contents and recommendations appear to meet the applicable WSDOT,
regional, and national standards of practice.
Geotechnical reports produced by consultants shall be certified in accordance with the
principles described above in Section 1.4.1 and 1.4.3, and as required by the applicable
RCW’s and WAC’s. Note that this review and acceptance process and associated
considerations also apply to reports produced by consultants for developers building
facilities that impact WSDOT facilities.
For geotechnical reports and documents produced by Design-Builders, see Chapter 22.
1 .6 Geotechnical Consultant Administration
This section addresses geotechnical consultants working directly for the Geotechnical
Office, and geotechnical consultants working for a prime consultant through a region,
or other WSDOT office, contract. Geotechnical consultants are used to handle peak
load work, or to obtain specialized expertise not contained within the Geotechnical
Office. If a geotechnical consultant is needed, the first choice is to utilize a consultant
working directly for the Geotechnical Office, as the communication lines are more
straightforward than would be the case if the geotechnical consultant is working for
a prime consultant, who in turn is working for another office in WSDOT. This is
illustrated in Figures 1-3 and 1-4.
In general, consultants working directly for the Geotechnical Office will do so through
an on-call master agreement in which the consultant is assigned project specific
tasks. Through these tasks, the consultant is typically responsible to develop the
detailed geotechnical investigation plan, perform the testing and design, and produce
a geotechnical report. For these assignments, the consultant is viewed as an extension
of the Geotechnical Office staff and is therefore subject to the same standards of
design and review as in-house Office staff. The review and certification process for
consultant geotechnical work mirrors that for in-house geotechnical work, as described
in Section 1.5, except that the final certification of the report is done by the consultant
rather than WSDOT staff, with WSDOT functioning in a review capacity. Frequent
communication between the Geotechnical Office staff and the consultant is essential
to a successful project. For this contractual scenario, the Geotechnical Office is
responsible to oversee and administer the consultant agreement and task assignments.
If it is determined by the Region or other WSDOT office that a general civil or
structural consultant is needed to handle the design work normally handled by
that WSDOT office, the Geotechnical Office and Region Materials Office shall
be contacted prior to sub-consulting the geotechnical portion of the project. Both
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-19
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
the Region Materials Office and Geotechnical Office may have staff available
to perform the geotechnical design for the project. If it is determined that a
geotechnical subconsultant is needed, the Geotechnical Office will need to assist in
the development of the geotechnical scope and estimate for the project, so that the
consultant contract is appropriate. A typical consultant scope of work for preliminary
design is provided in Appendix 1-A, and a typical consultant scope of work to
complete the geotechnical work for a PS&E level design is provided in Appendix 1-B.
These typical scopes of work for geotechnical subconsultants may need adjustment
or augmentation to adapt them to the specific project. A team meeting between the
consultant team, the Region or other WSDOT Office (depending on whose project it
is), and the Geotechnical Office is conducted early in the project to develop technical
communication lines and relationships. Good proactive communication between all
members of the project team is crucial to the success of the project due to the complex
consultant-client relationships (see Figure 1-4).
Geotech.
Consultant
Structural
Consultant
Bridge
Office
Region PE
Office Geotech.
Division
Region
Management
WSDOT
Management
Consultant-client
WSDOT Consultant Relationship for
Consultants Working Directly for relationship
the or Office
Geotechnical
Legislature employee-employer
and People Figure 1-3
relationship
of WA
Informal relationship
Page 1-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
Geotech.
Subconsultant
A/E Prime Structural
Consultant Subconsult.
Bridge
Office
Region
Consultant Region PE Geotech.
Liaison Office Division
Office
Region
Management
HQ
Consultant WSDOT
Liaison Management
Office
Consultant-client
relationship or
Legislature employee-employer
and People relationship
of WA
Informal relationship
WSDOT-Consultant Relationship for Consultants Working
for a Prime Consultant for Other WSDOT Offices
Figure 1-4
1 .7 Geotechnical Information Provided to Bidders
1.7.1 Final Geotechnical Project Documentation
The Final Geotechnical Project Documentation for a project shall consist of all
geotechnical reports and memorandums, in their entirety, produced by WSDOT or
consultants that are pertinent to the final PS&E for the project. Outdated or otherwise
superseded geotechnical reports and memorandums should not be included in the
Final Geotechnical Project Documentation. In such cases where a small portion of
a geotechnical report has been superseded, the entire report should be included with
the superseded text clearly identified along with the superseding document. Reports
produced by the RME are generally kept under separate cover, but are included in the
final publication package as described below.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-21
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
1.7.2 Final Geotechnical Documentation Publication
Once a project PS&E is near completion, the Final Geotechnical Project
Documentation is to be published for the use of prospective bidders. Materials
Source Reports should also be included as part of the package published for bidders.
The Region Project Development Office (or Terminal Engineering Department for
Washington State Ferries) is responsible to notify the Geotechnical Office at least 12
to 14 weeks in advance of the Ad or Shelf Date when the final project geotechnical
documentation is due in the Region (or Washington State Ferries), and which projects
require final project geotechnical documentation. The Region Project Development
Office (or Terminal Engineering Department for the Washington State Ferries) will
also identify at that time who they have designated to receive the report to handle or
continue the publication process. In general, it is desirable that the final geotechnical
documentation be available for printing 10 weeks prior to the Ad or Shelf Date, but
absolutely must be available no later than two Fridays prior to the Ad or Shelf date.
This compiled geotechnical documentation package is typically sent to the Region
Project Engineer Office (or Terminal Engineering Office for Washington State
Ferries projects) by the Geotechnical Office. When transmitting the final project
geotechnical documentation, the Geotechnical Office will specifically identify the
geotechnical documentation as final for the project and as camera-ready. Likewise,
the Region Materials Office will concurrently send a camera-ready final copy of any
Region-generated reports (e.g., the Region Soils Report), as applicable, to the Region
Project Engineer Office to be included as part of the geotechnical documentation for
the project.
1.7.3 Geotechnical Information to be Included as Part of the Contract
Geotechnical information included as part of the contract (as an appendix) for
design-bid-build projects will generally consist of the final project boring logs, and,
as appropriate for the project, a Summary of Geotechnical Conditions. Both of these
items are, in general, provided by the Geotechnical Office. If a Region Soils Report
has been produced by the RME, the RME must provide the final boring logs and
may be required to complete portions of the Summary of Geotechnical Conditions to
include the information provided in the Region Soils Report. Note that Chapter 22
covers what geotechnical information is to be included in the Request for Proposals for
design-build projects.
All boring logs used as the basis for the geotechnical design for the project should
be included in an appendix to the contract. A legend sheet that defines the terms and
symbols used in the boring logs shall always be included with the boring logs. The
Geotechnical Office will provide a legend for logs they have produced. Consultants
shall also provide a legend along with their logs in their geotechnical reports. The
locations of all boring logs included with the contract should be shown on the contract
plan sheets.
Based on specific project needs, other types of geotechnical data may also need to be
included in the contract documents. Such additional data may include geophysical test
results, and subsurface profiles and cross-sections for specific geotechnical project
features. The goal of such data is to provide potential bidders a more complete picture
of the conditions as necessary for accurate bidding, when that information cannot be
conveyed by the boring logs alone.
Page 1-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
A “Summary of Geotechnical Conditions,” provided by the Geotechnical Office for
most projects that contain significant geotechnical features, should also be included
in the contract with the boring logs. This Summary of Geotechnical Conditions”
is generally a 1 to 2 page document (see Chapter 23) that briefly summarizes the
subsurface and ground water conditions for key areas of the project where foundations,
cuts, fills, etc., are to be constructed. This document also describes the impact of these
subsurface conditions on the construction of these foundations, cuts, fills, etc., to
provide a common basis for interpretation of the conditions and bidding.
1 .8 Sample Retention and Chain of Custody
In general, there are three types of samples obtained by the Geotechnical Office and
geotechnical consultants: disturbed soil samples (includes sack samples from test
pits), undisturbed soil samples, and rock cores. Disturbed soil samples are typically
used for soil classification purposes, though on occasion they may be used for
more sophisticated testing. Undisturbed soil samples are primarily used for more
sophisticated testing, though they may also be used for evaluation of detailed soil
structure. Undisturbed samples typically degrade significantly and are not useful for
testing purposes after about 3 to 6 months. Disturbed and undisturbed soil samples
that have not been tested by the Geotechnical Office or Consultant will be retained
for a minimum of 90 days after the geotechnical report is completed, after which time
they will be disposed. Prior to disposal, the Consultant shall contact the Geotechnical
Office so that they may take possession of the samples, if they choose to do so.
Rock core is generally retained until after the construction project is complete and
it is clear that claims related to the rock are not forthcoming. After construction,
the core will be disposed. Rock core obtained by consultants shall be delivered to
the Geotechnical Office as part of the deliverables associated with the Geotechnical
Report. Subject to prior approval of the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer, rock
core may be disposed prior to project construction if it is determined that the risk of
claims related to rock quality issues is sufficiently low, if the rock core is degraded
and therefore not useful for visual inspection or testing, or possibly other reasons
that cause the risk of early core disposal to be low. In all cases, whether or not
early disposal of the core is conducted, all rock core shall be photographed at high
resolution and in color correct light, to provide a permanent record of the core.
All samples of soil or rock that are obtained on behalf of WSDOT by consultants and
transported to the State Materials Laboratory Geotechnical Office shall become the
property of WSDOT.
1 .9 Geotechnical Design Policies and their Basis
Technical policies and design requirements provided in this manual have been derived
from national standards such as those produced by AASHTO. FHWA and other
nationally recognized geotechnical design manuals and publications have been used
in the Geotechnical Design Manual to address areas not specifically covered by the
AASHTO manuals. The following manuals, listed in hierarchical order, shall be the
primary source of geotechnical design policy for WSDOT:
1. This Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM)
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-23
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
2. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design
3. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, most current edition plus interims
4. AASHTO Standard Practice for Conducting Geotechnical Subsurface
Investigations, R 13-03, 2007
5. AASHTO Manual on Subsurface Investigations (1988)
If a publication date is shown, that version shall be used to supplement the
geotechnical design policies provided in this GDM. If no date is shown, the most
current version, including interim publications of the referenced manuals, as of
the GDM publication date shall be used. This is not a comprehensive list; other
publications are referenced in this GDM and shall be used where so directed herein.
FHWA geotechnical design manuals, or other nationally recognized design manuals,
are considered secondary relative this GDM and to the AASHTO manuals listed above
for establishing WSDOT geotechnical design policy.
Where justified by research or local experience, the design policies and requirements
provided in the GDM deviate from the AASHTO and FHWA design specifications and
guidelines, and shall supersede the requirements and guidelines within the AASHTO
and FHWA manuals.
For foundation and wall design, the load and resistance factor design (LRFD)
approach shall be used, to be consistent with WSDOT Bridge Office structural design
policy. For aspects of foundation and wall design that have not yet been developed in
the LRFD format, allowable stress (ASD) or load factor design (LFD) will be used
until such time the LRFD approach has been developed. Therefore, for those aspects
of foundation and wall design for which the LRFD approach is available, alternative
ASD or LFD design formats are not presented in this manual.
In the chapters that follow, as well as within this chapter, and in the referenced
AASHTO Manuals, the terms, and their definitions, provided in Table 1-2 are used
to convey geotechnical policy.
Term Definition
Shall The associated provisions must be used. There is no acceptable alternative.
Should The associated provisions must be used unless strong justification is available and
based on well-established regional or national practice, and if supported by widely
accepted research results.
May The associated provisions are recommended, but alternative methods or
approaches that are consistent with the intent of the provisions are acceptable.
Evaluate, evaluated, The associated issue must be evaluated or addressed through detailed analysis
address, or addressed and the results documented.
Consider, considered The associated recommended provisions must be evaluated, and the reasons and
analyses used to decide whether or not to implement the recommended provisions
must be documented.
Geotechnical designer The geotechnical engineer or engineering geologist who has been given
responsibility to coordinate and complete the geotechnical design activities for
the project
Terms Used to Convey Geotechnical Policy
Table 1-2
Page 1-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
With regard to “should” in Table 1-2, “strong justification” relates to the veracity and
consistency of the information used to justify the alternative approach or procedures,
and how the data are to be interpreted or the analysis methodology is to be used based
on widely accepted design codes, regional practices, manuals, published research
results, etc. In order to meet the requirement for “well established regional or national
practice”, the practice must be demonstrably relevant to the specific project conditions
and applications in question. To meet the requirement for “well-established”, the
practice must be defined in regionally or nationally accepted design manuals, text
books, or codes of practice. Examples that meet these requirements are as follows:
1. FHWA engineering manuals.
2. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
3. Widely accepted text books.
4. Practices that have been widely and successfully used by the geotechnical design
firms in the region, provided they are applicable to the project conditions and
applications in question, and provided that each of the following are convincingly
demonstrated: details of the practice, long-term success, soil/rock conditions, and
applicability.
In order to meet the requirement for “widely accepted research” the research must be
published in a peer-reviewed national or international engineering journal, such as
the ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering; the Canadian
Geotechnical Journal; or Ground Improvement. Furthermore, the research must be
demonstrably relevant to the project-specific conditions and applications in question.
What would not be considered widely accepted research includes, for example,
conference articles (while sometimes peer reviewed, such peer reviews are usually
not thorough or rigorous); PhD theses; trade magazine articles; and any article,
even if peer reviewed, that directly conflicts with the design requirements of this
Geotechnical Design Manual and other documents referenced by this manual.
Justification to deviate from the policies and design requirements outlined in this
manual shall not rely solely on “engineering judgment”. Furthermore, strong
justification must consider all the available data that applies to the site and design, not
just portions of it.
1 .10 Geotechnical Construction Support Policies
1.10.1 Division of Responsibilities for Construction Support of Design-Bid-
Build Projects
The division of responsibilities between the Geotechnical Office and the Region
Materials Office for response to geotechnical construction problems for design-bid-
build projects is generally consistent with Section 1.2, which means that the RME, at
least theoretically, functions as the clearing house to address geotechnical construction
problems. The division of work shown in Figure 1-2 applies to construction assistance
as well. However, it must also be recognized that most geotechnical construction
problems need to be addressed quickly to prevent construction contract impacts. To
minimize delays in getting geotechnical construction problems addressed, if it is
obvious that HQ input will be required anyway (e.g., foundation construction issues,
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-25
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
retaining wall geotechnical construction problems, shoring wall stability or excessive
deformation problems, rockslope construction issues, etc.) the Region Project Office
should contact the Geotechnical Office directly. In that case, the Geotechnical Office
should keep the RME informed as to the request and the nature of the problem as soon
as practical. Typically, a construction project geotechnical advisor will be assigned
to the project and is the first point of contact for assistance from the Geotechnical
Office. For construction emergencies, such as slope failures, the process described
in Section 1.2.3 should be followed, except that the Region Project Office functions
as the maintenance office in that process.
There are some types of geotechnical construction issues for which the RME should
always provide the first response. These include, for example:
• Evaluation of fill compaction problems;
• Evaluation of material source and borrow problems;
• Pavement subgrade problems; and
• Evaluation of the soil at the base of spread footing excavations to check for
consistency with boring logs.
For the specific issues identified above, the RME will enlist the help of the
Geotechnical Office if complications arise.
For evaluation of differing site conditions claims, the Geotechnical Office should
always provide the geotechnical evaluation and will work directly with the HQ
Construction Office to provide the geotechnical support they need.
Note that for consultant designed projects, the Geotechnical Office may request that
the designer of record (i.e., the consultant) get involved to recommend a solution to
WSDOT regarding the problem.
1.10.2 Division of Responsibilities for Construction Support of Design-Build Projects
For design-build projects, the first responder for geotechnical construction problems is
the geotechnical designer of record for the design-builder. The next point of contact,
if action on behalf of the contracting agency (i.e., WSDOT) is required in accordance
with the contract RFP, is the geotechnical advisor assigned to the project from the
Geotechnical Office. If it turns out that the RME should provide a response or if the
RME could provide a more rapid response, considering the nature of the problem, the
geotechnical advisor will contact the RME to enlist their assistance.
1.10.3 Geotechnical Office Roles and Communication Protocols for
Construction Support
Geotechnical Office support to HQ Construction, Region Construction, and Region
Project offices must always be technical in nature, leaving construction administration
issues to the construction offices the Geotechnical Office is supporting. Since the
technical support the Geotechnical Office provides could affect the construction
contract, it is extremely important to contact HQ Construction as soon as possible
to let them know of the situation, in addition to the specific regional offices being
supported. Direct communication and directions to the contractor should be avoided,
unless the boundaries of such communication have been approved in advance by the
Region Project Office and as appropriate, HQ Construction. Any communication
Page 1-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
in writing, including e-mail correspondence, must be written in a way that
communicates only technical issues and does not compromise WSDOT’s ability to
effectively administer the contract. This is especially important if potential contractor
claims are involved.
If potential contractor claims are involved in the construction problem, the
Geotechnical Office role is to provide assistance to the HQ Construction Office. For
example, with changed conditions claims, the Geotechnical Office’s professional
evaluation of the situation should focus on determining and describing the
geotechnical conditions observed during construction in comparison to what was
expected based on the data available at time of bidding. The Geotechnical Office is
not to determine or even imply the merits of the contractor’s claim. HQ Construction
will do that.
Evaluations of contractor claims, as well as geotechnical recommendations for the
redesign of a geotechnical element in a contract, must be put in a formal written
format suitable for sealing as discussed in Section 1.4.1. E-mail should not be used
as a communication vehicle for this type of information. Furthermore, the State
Geotechnical Engineer, or the individual delegated to act on behalf of the State
Geotechnical Engineer, must review and approve such documents before they are
distributed. Memorandums that provide an evaluation of a contractor claim should
be addressed to the HQ Construction Office, and a copy shall not be sent to the
Region Project Engineer in this case. The HQ Construction Office will forward
the Geotechnical Office response to the Region Project Engineer with their final
determination of the validity of the claim. If a claim evaluation is not involved and
only technical recommendations in support of a contract redesign are being provided,
address the letter to the HQ Construction Office, with a copy to the Region Project
Office and others as necessary (e.g., the Bridge Office). If the resulting change
order will be within the Region authority to approve, the memorandum should be
addressed to the Region Project Office with a copy to HQ Construction and the Region
Operations or Construction Office.
1 .11 Geotechnical Construction Submittal Review Policies
Most construction contract submittals include information that both the Bridge and
Structures Office and the Geotechnical Office must review. Blasting plan and rock
slope submittals (e.g., rock bolting) are an exception to this, in that their technical
review are purely a Geotechnical Office function.
For construction submittals that involve structures or support of structures or bridge
approach fills, policies on coordination of submittal review are as follows:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-27
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
1.11.1 Proprietary Retaining Walls
• All pre-approved wall manufacturer submittals required by the contract shall
be reviewed by the Bridge Office. The Bridge Office shall send a copy of the
submittal to the Geotechnical Office for review when the submittal is distributed
to the appropriate Bridge Office Design Unit. Details of specifically what will be
reviewed are provided in Appendix 15B.
• The Geotechnical Office shall respond directly to the Construction Support
Unit of the Bridge Office with their submittal review comments. The Bridge
Office Construction Support Unit is responsible for the response back to the
Region Project Engineer, and shall attach or include Geotechnical Office
comments verbatim.
• After both the Bridge Office Design Unit and the Geotechnical Office have
submitted their comments back to the Bridge Office Construction Support Unit,
they will be circulated to the Bridge Office Wall Specialist for this review for
completeness and consistency.
• Returns for Corrections (RFC’s) and Change Order Notifications will require that a
copy of the submittal go to the HQ Construction Office.
• Proprietary retaining walls that have been completely detailed in the Contract Plans
and Special Provisions (including manufacturer shop plans) need not come to the
Bridge Office for review. The Region’s Project Engineer’s Office is responsible for
the review of the contractor’s walls in accordance with the contract documents.
1.11.2 Other Construction Submittals (Non-Proprietary walls, Excavation and
Shoring, Soldier Piles, Ground Anchors, Shafts, Piles, Ground Improvement, etc.)
• Geosynthetic shoring walls without structural facing do not require Bridge Office
review. These walls shall be sent directly to the Geotechnical Office for their
review. To provide consistency in the review process, the review comments should
be sent back to the Bridge Office Construction Support Unit in the same manner as
any other submittal for forwarding to the region project engineer.
• The Bridge Office Construction Support Unit will determine the need for
geotechnical input when reviewing contractor shoring submittals. If geotechnical
input is needed, the Construction Support Unit will coordinate with the
Geotechnical Office to obtain review comments and will submit the compiled
comments from both offices to the region project office.
• For all other construction submittals with geotechnical items received by the
Bridge Office, the Bridge Office Construction Support Unit will send a copy of
the submittal to the Geotechnical Office for review. The Geotechnical Office
shall respond directly to the Construction Support Unit of the Bridge Office with
their submittal review comments. The Bridge Office Construction Support Unit is
responsible for the response back to the region project engineer, and shall attach or
include Geotechnical Office comments verbatim. Returns for Corrections (RFC’s)
and Change Order Notifications will require that a copy of the submittal go to the
HQ Construction Office.
Page 1-28 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 1 Geotechnical Operations and Administration
• The geotechnical designer’s main emphasis in review of the shaft submittals is to
ensure that the proposed construction procedure will result in a shaft that meets
the assumptions used during the design phase. Casing limits, construction joints,
shaft diameter(s), and surface casing installation, as well as, backfilling are areas
that typically need review. For soldier piles, substitution of another pile section or
possible over-stressing of the pile anchor stressing should be checked. These items
will generally be flagged by the geotechnical designer.
• The Bridge Office shall in general be the clearinghouse for transmittals of
submittal reviews back to the region project engineer. The Geotechnical Office
will return comments to the Bridge Office only, except when previously agreed to
respond separately.
1-12 References
AASHTO, 2012, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials, Sixth Edition, Washington, D.C., USA.
(Note: Most current edition shall be used)
AASHTO, 2011, AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design,
Second Edition, LRFDSEIS-2, Washington DC, USA. (Note: Most current edition
shall be used)
AASHTO, 2007, Standard Practice for Conducting Geotechnical Subsurface
Investigations, R 13-03, Washington DC, USA.
AASHTO, 1988, Manual on Subsurface Investigations, First Edition, MSI-1,
Washington, DC, USA.
Design Manual M 22-01, 2012, (Note: Most current edition shall be used)
WAC 196-27A Rules of Professional Conduct and Practice
WAC 196-23 Stamping and Seals
WAC 308-15 Geologist Licensing Services
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-29
October 2013
Geotechnical Operations and Administration Chapter 1
Page 1-30 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-A-1
October 2013
Preliminary Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work Appendix 1-A
Prepare a report that Provides Preliminary Geotechnical Recommendations
The CONSULTANT shall identify critical design elements and provide a basis for
geotechnical recommendations. As a minimum the CONSULTANT shall address or
identify the following:
1. Locations of potential cuts, fills, soft compressible soils, soils susceptible
to liquefaction, landslides, and faults close to or at the site.
2. Preliminary maximum cut and fill slope inclinations shall be recommended
to ensure overall stability for cut slopes, embankments, structures, and to provide
a basis for right-of-way acquisition.
3. For structures, suitable foundation types shall be identified. The report shall also
indicate whether the foundation bearing capacities are anticipated to be low,
indicating marginal bearing conditions, or high, indicating good to excellent
bearing conditions.
4. Feasible retaining wall types shall be discussed.
5. The report shall include available site maps, cross sections, end areas, and
subsurface profiles, and the available subsurface information.
The CONSULTANT shall prepare a Draft Preliminary Geotechnical Recommendations
Report for the project. The CONSULTANT shall prepare three copies of the Draft
Geotechnical Report and submit them to the STATE for review and comment. The
STATE will review the Geotechnical Report and provide written comments within
three weeks. The CONSULTANT shall respond to comments from the project team
and WSDOT, revise the draft report, and submit three (3) copies of the final report.
Additional Draft reports may be requested by the STATE prior to completing the
FINAL report until the STATE’s review comments are adequately addressed.
Instructions for Preparation of the Scope of Work for Project Specific Application
The Preliminary Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work is to be used
when the civil engineering portion of the project is not defined before consultant
services are requested. In general, new soil borings are not required for conceptual-
level recommendations except where subsurface information is not available within the
project limits and if project elements are geotechnically complex. The Geotechnical
Office is available to assist in the determination of whether or not borings are required.
If the Region and the Geotechnical Office determine that borings are required to
adequately develop preliminary recommendations, the Geotechnical Office will
provide an additional section to be included in the scope of work for the drilling of new
borings.
The Geotechnical Office should be contacted to provide a cost estimate for the work
anticipated. The Geotechnical Office estimate should be used to complete negotiations
with the consultant. At the Region’s request, the Geotechnical Office can review the
consultant’s estimate and provided guidance for negotiation.
Once preliminary geotechnical recommendations are provided, the prime Consultant
or Region can define the civil engineering portion of the project. Once the civil
engineering portion is defined, a supplement can be prepared to have the Geotechnical
Consultant provide detailed PS&E level recommendations. The Geotechnical
Engineering Services Scope of Work should be used for the supplement.
Page 1-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-B-1
October 2013
Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level Design Appendix 1-B
Site Review
The CONSULTANT shall perform an on-site geologic reconnaissance of the
project. The CONSULTANT shall determine general site conditions, access for
exploration, and condition of existing transportation features.
Project Geology
The CONSULTANT shall summarize the regional geology and geology of the
project limits. The CONSULTANT shall review the site seismicity and provide
recommendations for suitable response spectra and the design acceleration.
Geotechnical hazards shall be assessed and the potential impacts to the project
shall be discussed. Recommendations for mitigating the hazards shall be provided
at the STATE’s request. Liquefaction potential shall be assessed and liquefaction
mitigation methods shall be provided at the STATE’s request.
Field Exploration
The CONSULTANT shall, in consultation and coordination with the STATE, plan
and conduct a subsurface investigation program utilizing exploratory borings,
test pits, geophysical methods, and insitu tests to provide information relative
to soil, groundwater, and other geologic conditions along the project alignment.
The CONSULTANT shall develop an exploration plan showing the locations of
existing information, the locations for new explorations, the anticipated depths and
sampling requirements for the borings, and field instrumentation requirements.
Existing subsurface information shall be fully utilized and considered when
preparing the field exploration plan. The CONSULTANT shall submit the plan to
the region project engineer and the Geotechnical Office for review and approval.
Upon approval, the CONSULTANT shall stake all boring locations in the field.
The STATE will provide all traffic control for the field exploration. The
CONSULTANT shall obtain utility locates prior to field investigations requiring
digging or boring and shall field locate the borings or test pits relative to station, offset,
and elevation.
The __________ shall perform the field investigation, and the _______________ shall
secure Right of Entry for the field exploration.
If the STATE will perform all subsurface exploration drilling and taking of cores, the
CONSULTANT shall provide a Drilling Inspector to obtain samples, and keep records.
The STATE will commence drilling or coring operations as soon as practical after
approval of the CONSULTANT’s drilling plan.
All soil samples from drilling operations will become the property of the
CONSULTANT. The CONSULTANT shall retain the samples for a period of 90
days after submittal of the final geotechnical report, at which time the samples may
be disposed of unless the STATE requests that they be made available for pick-up at
the CONSULTANT’s office. All rock cores from drilling operations will become the
property of the STATE and shall be delivered to the Geotechnical Office with, or prior
to, the final geotechnical report. The CONSULTANT shall provide logs for the borings
and test pits. The logs shall be edited based on laboratory or field tests in accordance
with WSDOT Soil And Rock Classification Guidelines.
Page 1-B-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 1-B Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level Design
The results of the field exploration and all of the equipment used shall be summarized.
Down hole hammers or wire-line operated hammers shall not be used for Standard
Penetration Tests (SPT). Boring logs with station, offset, elevation, groundwater
elevations, uncorrected SPT test results with blows per 6 inches shall be provided.
Soil units encountered in the field exploration shall be described and their extent and
limits shall be identified. Soils profiles shall be developed and shown for all structures
or significant cut and fill slopes. Plan views shall be prepared that show the actual
locations of the borings in relation to project elements.
Testing
The CONSULTANT shall conduct field and laboratory tests in general accordance
with appropriate American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) and WSDOT
standards, including Standard Penetration Tests (SPT’s), natural moisture content,
grain size analysis, Atterberg limits, moisture/density (Proctor) relationships,
resilient modulus for use in pavement design, pH, and resistivity and specialized
geotechnical tests such as triaxial tests, direct shear tests, point load tests, and soil
consolidation. All test results shall be included in the Geotechnical Report.
Instrumentation
The CONSULTANT shall provide the STATE with recommendations for field
instrumentation to be installed in the exploratory borings of the project to monitor
water levels and slope movements during both design and construction. If
necessary, the CONSULTANT shall provide the STATE with recommendations
for instrumentation for construction control of the project, e.g., monitoring
slope movement, wall movement, pore pressure, settlement, and settlement
rates. Included shall be the recommended instrument types, locations,
installation requirements, zones of influence, and critical readings or levels.
The CONSULTANT shall coordinate with the Geotechnical Office to ensure
that recommended instruments are compatible with STATE readout/recording
devices. During design, all instruments shall be installed and monitored by the
CONSULTANT. The STATE shall monitor all instrumentation during construction
or if long term monitoring is required.
Engineering Analysis
The CONSULTANT shall perform necessary geotechnical engineering analysis
to identify critical design elements and provide a basis for geotechnical
recommendations. Descriptions of the analysis and/or calculations shall be
provided at the STATE’s request. Comprehensive geotechnical engineering
design recommendations shall be provided for preparation of project PS&E
documents. The recommendations shall be detailed and complete for use by
STATE engineering personnel or other CONSULTANTs in design of structures, cut
slopes, fill slopes, embankments, drainage facilities, rock fall control, and landslide
correction. As a minimum the CONSULTANT shall address the following:
1. Overall stability for cut slopes, embankments, and structures shall be assessed.
For structures, minimum foundation widths, embedments, over-excavation, and
ground improvement shall be addressed to satisfy overall stability requirements.
Maximum cut and fill slope inclinations shall be recommended. Any mitigating
measures needed to obtain the required level of safety for slopes shall be fully
developed for the PS&E.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-B-3
October 2013
Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level Design Appendix 1-B
2. For structures, suitable foundation types shall be assessed and alternate
foundation types recommended. For spread footings, allowable bearing
capacity and settlement shall be provided. For seismic design of spread
footings, ultimate bearing capacity and shear modulus values shall be provided
for strain levels of 0.2% and 0.02%. For piles and shafts, ultimate capacity
figures shall be developed that show the capacity in relation to tip elevation
for both compression and tension. Settlement shall be assessed and group
reduction factors shall be recommended. Downdrag and lateral squeeze shall be
reviewed. Parameters for P-y curve development using L-Pile or COM624 shall
be provided. Minimum tip elevations, casing requirements, and estimates of
overdrive shall be provided. For piles with maximum driving resistances of 300
tons or more, wave equation analysis shall be performed to assess driveability,
pile stress, and hammer requirements.
3. Suitable retaining wall types shall be recommended. For all walls (including
standard, preapproved proprietary, and non-preapproved proprietary walls),
bearing capacity, settlement, construction considerations, and external stability
shall be addressed. For non-standard, non-proprietary walls, internal stability
shall be addressed.
4. Earthwork recommendations shall be provided including subgrade preparation,
material requirements, compaction criteria, and settlement estimates. In areas
where compressible soils are encountered, overexcavation, staged construction,
instrumentation, settlement, and creep characteristics and estimates shall
be addressed as well as details of any mitigating measures needed to keep
embankment performance within project constraints.
5. At stream crossings, evaluation of alternatives and recommendations shall
be provided for extending the existing culvert, pipe jacking a new culvert,
installing a bottomless culvert, or constructing of a bridge structure. Pipe
bedding, subgrade preparation, bearing capacity, and settlement shall be
addressed. For pipe jacking, jacking pit construction shall be assessed along
with the potential for caving soils.
6. General drainage, groundwater, pH, and resistivity values as they apply to the
project.
7. For signals, illumination, and sign structures, allowable lateral bearing capacity
shall be evaluated. Where poor soils are present design recommendations
for special design foundations shall be prepared. These shall address bearing
capacity, lateral capacity, rotational capacity, settlement, and construction of the
foundations.
8. Where possible, design recommendations shall be provided in tabular or
graphical form.
Page 1-B-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 1-B Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level Design
Construction Considerations
Construction considerations shall be addressed. Temporary slopes and shoring
limits shall be identified for estimating purposes. Advisory Special Provisions shall
be prepared for elements that may encounter difficult ground conditions or that
may require non-typical construction methods. Over-excavation recommendations
and backfill requirements shall be discussed and details prepared for the PS&E.
Construction staging requirements, where applicable, shall be addressed. Wet
weather construction and temporary construction water control shall be discussed.
State Standards
Whenever possible, the CONSULTANT’s recommendations shall provide for
the use of WSDOT standard material, construction methods, and test procedures
as given in the current Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal
Construction. The CONSULTANT shall follow AASHTO Guide Specifications in
design except where STATE design methods are applicable. State design methods
are provided in the Design Manual, Bridge Design Manual, Construction Manual,
Hydraulics Manual, and Standard Plans.
Report
The CONSULTANT shall prepare a Draft Geotechnical Report for the project
summarizing the Geotechnical recommendations for the areas of significant
CONSULTANT work as discussed under Geotechnical Consultant Engineering
Services above.
Prior to Draft report submittal, the CONSULTANT shall meet with the Geotechnical
Office to discuss the recommendations, assumptions, and design methodology used in
preparation of the report. After the meeting, the CONSULTANT shall incorporate or
address WSDOT’s comments in the Draft Report. The CONSULTANT shall prepare
three copies of the Draft Geotechnical Report and submit them to the STATE for
review and comment. The STATE will review the Geotechnical Report and provide
written comments within three weeks. The CONSULTANT shall respond to comments
from the project team and WSDOT, revise the draft report, and submit ten (10) copies
of the final geotechnical report. In addition, the CONSULTANT shall provide one
unbound, camera ready copy of the report so that the report can be reproduced with
the bid documents. Additional Draft reports may be requested by the STATE prior
to completing the FINAL report until the STATE’s review comments are adequately
addressed.
Special Provisions and Plans
Where elements of geotechnical complexity are identified, the CONSULTANT
in cooperation and coordination with the STATE shall develop or modify Special
Provisions as appropriate to meet the project construction requirements. Wherever
possible, the CONSULTANT shall utilize existing STATE specifications. All
recommended Special Provisions shall be included in the geotechnical report as an
appendix. All details necessary for design and construction of the project elements
shall be included in the Geotechnical Report such as earth pressure diagrams, over-
excavation details, wall details, and staged construction details. Details developed
by the geotechnical engineer shall be provided in electronic form to the STATE or
other CONSULTANTs for incorporation into the PS&E.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 1-B-5
October 2013
Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work for PS&E-Level Design Appendix 1-B
Instructions for Preparation of the Scope of Work for Project Specific Application
The Geotechnical Engineering Services Scope of Work is to be used when the
civil engineering portion of the project is well defined before consultant services are
requested. The following elements of the project should be well defined or guidelines
should be available as to what is acceptable to WSDOT:
1. Right of way
2. Wetland boundaries and limits
3. Roadway alignments and roadway sections
4. Retaining wall locations, profiles, cross sections, and aesthetic requirements
5. Structure preliminary plans
There are fill-ins that need to be completed to designate who will perform the drilling
and secure Right of Entry. Region Materials should be contacted to determine
availability for drilling prior to completing the fill-in.
The Geotechnical Office should be contacted to provide a cost estimate for the work
anticipated. The Geotechnical Office estimate should be used to complete negotiations
with the consultant. At the Region’s request, the Geotechnical Office can review the
consultant’s estimate and provided guidance for negotiation.
Page 1-B-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
2 .1 Overview
This chapter addresses geotechnical planning for projects that involve significant
grading or foundations for structures, from the project definition or conceptual phase
through the project design phase to preparation for the PS&E development phase.
Final design for the PS&E development will be covered in other chapters of this
manual specific to each project element.
The design objectives of the different phases of a project and guidance on the general
level of geotechnical investigation for each phase were discussed in Chapter 1. The
Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 510 and Chapter 1 provide guidance concerning
the roles and responsibilities of the Region Materials Engineer and the Geotechnical
Office, as well as information on initiating geotechnical work, scheduling and site
data and permits needed for each stage of a project. Geotechnical design for WSDOT
projects is generally provided by the Region Materials Engineer and the Geotechnical
Office or geotechnical consultants working either on behalf of these groups or as part
of a consultant design team.
This chapter includes general guidelines for geotechnical investigations conducted for
project definition and design phases (see Sections 1.1.1 and 1.1.2), and preparation
of the subsurface exploration plan for the PS&E phase. Specific information on the
number and types of explorations for PS&E level design is provided in the chapters
for the specific design elements.
To assure success of a project, it is important for the geotechnical designer to become
involved in the project at an early stage. The usual process starts with studying the
preliminary project plans, gathering existing site data, determining the critical features
of the project, and visiting the site, preferably with the project and structural engineer.
Good communication throughout the project between the geotechnical designer, the
structural designer, and the region project engineer is essential.
2 .2 Preliminary Project Planning
2.2.1 Overview
The goal in the initial planning stages is to develop an efficient investigation plan
and to identify any potential fatal flaws that could impact design or construction
as soon in the project as possible. An effort should be made to maximize the amount
of information obtained during each phase of the investigation process and minimize
the number of site visits required to obtain information.
For larger projects, it may be beneficial to conduct the field exploration in a phased
sequence, consisting of a reconnaissance investigation and a preliminary subsurface
investigation during the project definition phase and more detailed exploration
conducted during the project design and PS&E development phases. If the
subsurface exploration can be conducted in phases, it allows information obtained
in the preliminary phase to be used in planning the exploration program for the
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-1
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
detailed design phase. This can be cost effective in maximizing the efficiency of the
explorations in the subsequent phases. That is, the likely depths of the test borings
are known, problem soil layers can be identified and sampled in subsequent phases,
and the lab testing program can be planned with greater efficiency.
The location of the site will play a part in the way the investigation is planned.
For projects where mobilization costs for drilling equipment are high, the number
of subsurface investigation phases should be minimized, even on fairly large projects.
The studies and activities performed during the planning stage should be documented.
A list of references should be developed, citing nearby explorations, notes from
field visits and conversations with design engineers and construction engineers from
nearby projects. Any critical issues that are identified during the planning stages
should be documented, such as geohazards that are identified. At a minimum, enough
documentation should be maintained so that another engineer picking up the project
would not have to go through the same search for information.
2.2.2 Office Review
The geotechnical designer should become completely familiar with the proposed
project elements by studying the preliminary plans provided by the region project
design office. Location and size of structures, embankments and cuts should
be determined. Discuss with the structural designers the amount of flexibility
in the location of structures and determine the approximate magnitude of the loads
to be transmitted.
Site exploration begins by identifying the major geologic processes that have affected
the project site. Soils deposited by a particular geologic process assume characteristic
topographic features or landforms that can be readily identified by the geotechnical
designer. A landform contains soils with generally similar engineering properties
and typically extends irregularly over wide areas of a project alignment. Early
identification of landforms is used to optimize the subsurface exploration program.
Many of the soils in the state of Washington fall into geologic provinces with distinct
soil types typical of the province. For example much of the Puget Sound lowland
has been glaciated, and the soils are typically related to glacial processes. Eastern
Washington geology generally consists of basalt flows capped by glacial flood and
loess deposits.
The general geology of a project may also give indications of soil conditions that may
or may not be encountered in test borings, for instance boulders and large cobbles
in glacially deposited or glacial flood deposits, buried trees in debris flow deposits,
or relatively fresh rock encountered in residual soils deposits in the coast range.
One of the objects of the office review is to plan site reconnaissance and prepare
a conceptual plan for subsurface exploration.
Page 2-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
2 .2 .2 .1 Site Geology and Seismicity
Topographic Maps – Topographic maps are generally readily available at a scale
of 1:24,000 (7.5 minute) for the all of Washington State. These maps are prepared
by the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS). The maps provide information on the overall
topography of the site including drainage patterns, slope inclinations, wetlands and
general accessibility for field exploration. Used in conjunction with geologic maps
and aerial photos, easily recognized geologic features can sometimes be identified.
The headscarps and hummocky terrain of landslides can often be identified from
topographic maps.
Geologic Maps – The Department of Natural Resources (DNR) Division of Geology
and Earth Resource has geologic map coverage of most of the state at 1:100,000
scale. The maps show the distribution of the basic geologic units and provide a brief
description of each deposit and rock type including depositional environment and
relative age. The maps also include a list of references that may provide more
information on a particular area.
The DNR also has published maps showing the extent of geohazards in selected
areas of the state. These maps give an indication of the potential problem areas.
The maps showing slope stability and liquefiable soils are particularly useful. The
DNR has published liquefaction susceptibility maps for several areas in the Puget
Sound Region. These maps give a general indication of the extent of liquefiable soils
in the region.
Geologic maps are also available from the USGS. Coverage of Washington is not
complete, but the maps are readily available from USGS and may be available from
the DNR Library. Seismic acceleration maps are also available from the USGS
and can be found on their website. The peak ground acceleration map provided
in Chapter 6 has been adapted from the USGS maps.
Some local agencies have developed geohazard maps depicting flood plains or areas
of steep slopes. These maps are available from the individual cities and counties.
Aerial Photos – Aerial photos along the state route alignments can generally
be obtained from the WSDOT Geographic Services Office in Tumwater. Aerial
photos can be one of the most useful sources of information for planning the
subsurface exploration program. When used with a general understanding of the
geology of the site and limited subsurface information, the extent of geologic deposits
on the site can often be determined. Using stereo-pairs of photos can greatly enhance
the interpretation of landforms.
The identification of a landform as a dune, terrace deposit, alluvial fan, esker,
moraine, or other type of deposit often permits the general subsurface conditions
to be established within given limits and thus yields the initial appraisal of the
situation. Drainage patterns can also aid in the identification of soil type and in the
structural characteristics of the underlying rock. The maximum amount of information
will be obtained when aerial photos are used in conjunction with field investigations
that can verify and correct interpretations.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-3
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
Landslides are often recognizable in aerial photos by slide formed features
or conditions, including hillside scars; disturbed or disrupted soil and vegetation
patterns; distinctive changes in slope or drainage patterns; irregular, hummucky
surfaces; small undrained depressions; step-like terraces; and steep hillside scarps.
Although one of the more difficult features to evaluate, vegetation is often indicative
of subsurface conditions. The relationship between vegetation soil type, moisture
content, topography and other pertinent factors may be important and any variations
should be checked in the field.
Aerial photos may be available in both black and white or in color. Color photographs
are generally preferred because objects are easier to identify when they appear in their
natural color. Fine details and small objects can be identified more positively than
on black and white photographs at the same scale and the cause of tonal variations
is more readily established.
Aerial photos from different years can give an indication of the history and previous
use of the site. A complete set of air photos from the oldest available to the most
recent can give an indication of the previous site use, as well as significant changes
in topography or landforms due to the more rapid geologic processes such as stream
channel migration, beach erosion, landslides, or rockfall.
Remote Sensing – Satellite imagery such as Landsat can often be used for regional
interpretations of geologic features and drainage patterns. The AASHTO Manual
on Subsurface Investigations (1988) provides a more detailed discussion on the
types and availability of satellite imagery. LiDAR (Light Detection And Ranging)
mapping uses a laser to measure distances to specific points and is capable
of rapidly generating digital elevation data similar to that obtained by traditional
photogrammetry techniques. The equipment can be mounted in a small plane
or helicopter and can produce accurate digital topographic maps of the terrain
beneath the path of the aircraft. One of the advantages of LiDAR is that vegetation
can be removed from the database to reveal a “bare earth” model. Landforms that
are typically obscured by western Washington’s heavy vegetation are often apparent
on the “bare earth” view. Similar technology using land based equipment is also
becoming available. These techniques are being more widely used for mapping
river morphology and flood plains, and geologic hazard such as landslides and
may be available from local agencies
Soil Surveys – Agricultural soil surveys in the United States have been conducted
by the Department of Agriculture (USDA) in conjunction with state agencies since
the early 1900’s. The results of the surveys are presented in the form of reports and
maps which commonly cover a complete county. The reports, in general, contain
a description of the aerial extent, physiography, relief, drainage patterns, climate,
and vegetation, as well as the soil deposits of the area covered. The maps show the
extent and derivation of the various deposits. The surveys give some information
on the slope inclination and erosion hazards that may be common. The reports also
provide engineering classifications of the near surface soil and sometimes information
on the suitability of the soils for various construction uses as well as an indication
of the general drainage characteristics.
Page 2-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
The surveys are regional in aspect and only provide information on the top several feet
of soil. They should not be used for more than providing some preliminary
soil information.
Other Sources – WSDOT’s unstable slope data base should be reviewed for any
historic problems with slope instability or rock fall problems.
Hydrogeologic surveys can provide regional information on the presence and depth
of groundwater. Both the DNR and USGS have completed hydrogeologic surveys
in parts of Washington.
Scientific articles and reports on geology in Washington may also be available,
through the DNR and university libraries.
2 .2 .2 .2 Previous Site Exploration Data
Most highway transportation projects are on or near existing alignments, and
previous subsurface information might be available. For WSDOT projects the
Geotechnical Office maintains files at the Materials Lab in Tumwater. Files are
generally available for existing bridges, retaining walls, or significant cuts and
embankments. Materials reports and source reports that were prepared for alignment
studies might also be available either from the Geotechnical Office or the Region
Materials Engineer.
Water well records are available from the Department of Ecology. Many logs can
be obtained from their website. The soil descriptions are generally not very reliable;
however, information on groundwater levels and presence of bedrock can be obtained
from them.
The City of Seattle has developed an existing boring database in conjunction with the
University of Washington. The database includes borings completed for local agency
projects as well as data provided by consultants. The database is available on-line
and includes a map showing exploration locations along with PDF images of the
boring logs.
2 .2 .2 .3 Previous Site Use
Environmental Impact Statements (EIS) will probably have been completed and will
indicate the most recent land use of the area. Note that a review of land use records
or reports that describe previous site uses, especially those that could identify the
potential for hazardous waste will be contained in a separate report produced by the
Environmental Affairs Office (EAO) or their consultant.
Note that identification of potential hazardous subsurface materials could affect
the subsurface investigation approach for the geotechnical design. This issue may
need to be considered, therefore, in the planning for the geotechnical subsurface
investigation. The geotechnical investigation approach will also need to be adjusted
during the subsurface investigation if potentially hazardous materials are retrieved
during the subsurface investigation, both for crew safety purposes and to comply
with environmental regulations.
If, during the office review or during subsequent subsurface investigation potentially
hazardous materials are discovered, the EAO should be notified. The EAO will
investigate the potential for hazardous waste, defining its nature and extent, and how
to address it for the project.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-5
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
Other site uses may also affect the site investigation approach and possibly the timing
of the investigation. Especially important is whether or not the site is historically
or archeologically significant, and whether or not there is potential for artifacts
to be discovered at the site. The investigation for this type of previous site use should
be conducted prior to beginning the geotechnical site investigation. In general, the
region project office is responsible for making sure that this investigation is carried out.
While the geotechnical designer is not responsible to specifically carry out a detailed
investigation regarding the potential to encounter hazardous subsurface materials
or archeological artifacts, the geotechnical designer is responsible to know whether
or not such investigations have taken place, to communicate this information to the
Field Exploration Manager (FEM), and to adjust the geotechnical site exploration
program accordingly.
2 .2 .2 .4 Construction Records
Many WSDOT projects consist of improvement or replacement of existing alignments
or facilities. Construction records and existing geotechnical or materials reports are
often available from WSDOT files. Headquarters Final Records has the most complete
collection of construction records.
Generally the Region Materials Engineer will be the primary contact to obtain any
construction records from the Region Project offices. The Geotechnical Office also
has some construction records. All three offices should be contacted for available
construction records.
Consultation with WSDOT project engineers who may have completed work
on similar structures in the same general area should be utilized to gain general
information on the soil, foundation, and groundwater conditions. Previous experience
may also reveal acceptable foundation conditions for the problems at hand.
Many of the county and city agencies also maintain records of investigations
and construction, and these are generally available through each agency.
2.2.3 Site Reconnaissance
2 .2 .3 .1 General
Before the site reconnaissance is performed, the geotechnical designer should
have performed the office review as described in Section 2.2.2, as well as given
some thought to the field exploration plan. The review of available data should be
done prior to the field reconnaissance to establish what to look for at the site. The
field reconnaissance should also be done with the preliminary plans in hand. Cross
sections rovided with the preliminary plans should be field checked. The cross
sections are often generated by photogrammetry and may not accurately represent
the existing ground surface. If available, the project design engineer, structural
engineer and field exploration supervisor should also participate in the site visit.
Note the location, type and depth of any existing structures or abandoned foundations
that may infringe on the new structure. Inspect any nearby structures to determine
their performance. If settlement or lateral movement is suspected, obtain the
original structure plans and arrange to have the structure surveyed using the original
benchmark, if possible.
Page 2-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
For water crossings, inspect structure footings and the stream banks up and down
stream for evidence of scour. Riprap present around the bridge foundation may
indicate a past scour problem, could impact the location of test borings and will need
to be dealt with during construction. Take note of the streambed material. Often large
cobbles and boulders are exposed in the stream bed, but not encountered in the borings
or noted on the boring logs. The boulders are an indication of unexpected subsurface
obstructions to deep foundation installation.
Relate site conditions to proposed boring locations. Check access for exploration
equipment and make an initial determination of what type of equipment might
be best suited to the site conditions. If site preparation is necessary, note the type
of equipment, such as a bulldozer, that may be needed for drilling equipment access.
Note potential problems with utilities such as overhead and underground power,
site access, private property or other obstructions. While utility clearances will need
to be obtained before the subsurface exploration begins, the locations will influence
where explorations can be located. Note any water sources that could be used during
drilling. Also note traffic control needs to accomplish the field exploration program,
considering the practical aspects of the proposed drilling plan with regard to impact
to the public. If borings are to be located in a stream bed, the reconnaissance
should note the size of the barge best suited for the job, details of anchoring, depth
of water, locations for launching the barge, etc. Notes should be made as to which
type of drilling is best suited to the site. Also note potential problems with borings
such as shallow groundwater table, loose or heaving sands, cobbles and boulders,
etc. Availability of water, if coring or mud rotary methods are anticipated, should
be determined. Special sampling equipment needed, such as undisturbed sampling
equipment, should be noted. This evaluation of field investigation logistics
should be done with the assistance of the geotechnical field exploration manager
or supervisors to take advantage of their expertise in working with geotechnical
exploration equipment and in conducting a geotechnical field investigation
(see Section 3.2).
Right of Entry on WSDOT projects is generally obtained through the project office.
However, note proximity of residences and buildings for possible difficulties due
to noise and other disturbances during the subsurface exploration. Local residents
can often provide some information on the history of the site.
Compare the topography of the site with that shown on maps and try to confirm the
assumptions made during the office review concerning the site geology. Observe and
note natural occurring exposures such as river banks, natural escarpments, quarries,
highway or railway cuts and rock outcrops. Measure the inclination of any existing
steep slopes. Note and describe the type and amount of fill that has been placed
on the site.
Note the extent of any existing unstable slopes or erosion features. For unstable
slopes or landslides note the length and width of the area affected. Note any other
indications of instability such as pistol butting of trees, hummocky terrain or springs.
Note types of vegetation present. Full investigation of these issues will require review
of the site conditions well above and below the facility alignment, and may extend
on to private property. Right of entry may be needed in such cases to complete the site
reconnaissance. If steep slopes must be accessed to fully investigate the site, safety
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-7
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
issues will need to be addressed before attempting to access the area, or alternative
means of getting into the position to make the necessary observations should be
considered (e.g., a man-lift, or use of a helicopter).
Note the presence of any wetland or other surface water.
Hand holes or probes may be useful to obtain information on depth of soft soils.
Photographs are valuable records of the site visit and should be labeled with
the approximate stationing, direction of view, date, and a brief title. Photos
should be obtained of all the site features listed above and of the probable
exploration locations.
A record of the field visit should be kept and included in the project file. Measures
should be taken to permanently archive any photographs taken. The record should
list and describe significant site features as discussed above along with approximate
stationing. An example field reconnaissance report form is included in the FHWA Soil
and Foundations Workshop Manual (Samtani and Nowatzki, 2006).
Special site reconnaissance requirements for investigation of rock slopes are provided,
by reference, in Chapter 12.
2 .3 Development of the Subsurface Exploration Plan
2.3.1 General Considerations for Preparation of the Exploration Plan
If the site reconnaissance is performed as part of a project definition phase
investigation, the results will be used to develop the project definition conceptual level
geotechnical report in accordance with Chapter 23. Otherwise, the site reconnaissance
and office review results are used to develop the project design and/or PS&E phase
field investigation.
A description of the site data needed for each type of project is provided in the
Design Manual Chapters 510 and 1130. The sections that follow expand on the
considerations required for the preparation of the subsurface exploration plan.
Development of exploration plans for geotechnical baseline reports is covered
in Chapter 22.
2.3.2 Criteria for Development
The goal of the geotechnical investigation program is to obtain the engineering
properties of the soil or rock and to define the aerial extent, depth, and thickness
of each identifiable soil/rock stratum, within a depth that could affect the design of the
structure, fill, cut, landslide, or other project element, dependent on the size and nature
of the element. Typical properties and conditions to be evaluated include permeability,
compressibility, shear strength, the location of groundwater and the presence and
magnitude of artesian pressures, if present. Regarding the determination of properties
for design, the focus of the exploration and testing program should be on the geologic
unit/stratum, and the number of measurements of each critical design property in
each unit/stratum to have a reasonable degree of confidence in the property measured
(see Chapter 5). The geotechnical investigation at the PS&E level should be adequate
to fully define the subsurface conditions for design and construction purposes, and
shall be consistent with the national standards of practice identified in this manual
Page 2-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
and as specifically augmented in this manual, subject to adjustment based on the
variability of the site conditions and the potential impact of site condition variability
as determined based on the judgment of an experienced geotechnical engineer or
engineering geologist.
The type, location, size and depth of the explorations and testing are dependent upon
the nature and size of the project and on the degree of complexity and critical nature
of the subsurface conditions. In general, it is justifiable to spend additional money
on explorations and related testing and engineering beyond the standards as identified
in this manual as long as sufficient savings can be realized in the project construction
costs. Consideration should be given to the small cost of a boring in relation to the
foundation cost. A test boring will typically cost less than one driven pile. Yet the
knowledge gained from the boring may permit a more efficient design that may allow
elimination of one or more piles for that structure.
Consideration should be given to how sensitive the structure or embankment
is to variations in subsurface conditions when planning the geotechnical investigation.
Embankments can generally tolerate several inches of settlement while a structure
may be limited to less than one inch. Embankment loads are spread over a wide area
while structure loads are concentrated.
Some consideration should be given to the amount of risk that unknown soil conditions
could bring to the project (e.g., what is the risk to the constructability and functioning
of the facility if detailed subsurface information at a specific location is not obtained?).
There are times when soil conditions may be understood fairly well for the
geotechnical design, but that unknown soil conditions could affect the cost of the
project. Generally if rock is encountered at the foundation grade in a boring at a pier
location, the location and quality of the rock should be explored at the other side of the
pier. If rock may fall off towards the river, make sure the borings explore the rock
contact on the front side of the footing.
Specific requirements for boring spacing, depth, and sampling frequency are provided
in Chapter 8 for foundations and hydraulic structures, Chapter 9 for embankments,
Chapter 10 for cuts, Chapter 15 for walls, Chapter 17 for noise walls, signal and
sign foundations, culverts, and buildings, and by reference to other documents/
manuals in Chapters 11, 12, 13, and 19 for ground improvement, rock cuts,
landslides and infiltration facilities, respectively. While engineering judgment will
need to be applied by a licensed and experienced geotechnical professional to adapt
the exploration program to the foundation types and depths needed and to the
variability in the subsurface conditions observed, the intent of specific requirements
provided in the chapters identified above regarding the minimum level of exploration
needed should be carried out.
The specific exploration requirements identified in the chapters identified above
should be used only as a first step in estimating the number of borings for a particular
design, as actual boring spacings will depend upon the project type and geologic
environment. In areas underlain by heterogeneous soil deposits and/or rock formations,
it will probably be necessary to drill more frequently and/or deeper than the minimum
guidelines provided in these chapters to capture variations in soil and/or rock type
and to assess consistency across the site area. Even the best and most detailed
subsurface exploration programs may not identify every important subsurface problem
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-9
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
condition if conditions are highly variable. The goal of the subsurface exploration
program, however, is to reduce the risk of such problems to an acceptable minimum.
In a laterally homogeneous area, drilling or advancing a large number of borings may
be redundant, since each sample tested would exhibit similar engineering properties.
Furthermore, in areas where soil or rock conditions are known to be very favorable
to the construction and performance of the foundation type likely to be used (e.g.,
footings on very dense soil, and groundwater is deep enough to not be a factor),
obtaining fewer borings than specified in the chapters identified above may be justified.
Test borings are typically the primary means used to obtain the needed subsurface
information and samples for laboratory testing. However, other means of obtaining
subsurface data should be considered to provide a more complete picture of the
subsurface conditions and to help reduce exploration costs.
Cone probes can be a rapid and cost effective means to reduce the number
of conventional borings, yet provide additional data that cannot be obtained
from conventional test hole drilling and sampling. Cone data can be especially
effective in defining the finer stratigraphy of geologic units, to obtain pore pressure
measurements and in-situ permeability and shear wave velocities, as well as obtain
data that can be directly correlated to a variety of soil properties. However, the
cone is not very useful in dense to very dense soils or soils with larger gravels and
cobbles (due to inability to penetrate such soils). The cone can be especially useful
in comparison to conventional borings when heaving sands are present. If cone probes
are used to supplement a subsurface exploration program, some conventional test hole
data are necessary to correlate readings from the probe to physical samples of the soil
(since the cone is not capable of retrieving physical soil samples, as well as to obtain
soil samples for laboratory measurement of soil properties.
Similarly, in-situ testing devices such as the pressuremeter and vane shear can
be conducted to supplement conventional test hole drilling to obtain specific in-situ
properties. For example, the pressuremeter is useful for obtaining in-situ soil stiffness
properties that can be used to more accurately assess settlement or lateral load
response of foundations. Shear vane testing can be useful to obtain in-situ undrained
shear strength of soft cohesive soils. See FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular
5 (Sabatini, et al., 2002) for additional information on these types of in-situ tests and
their use.
Geophysical techniques should also be considered to fill in the gaps between test
holes and to potentially reduce the cost of the geotechnical subsurface investigation.
Geophysical techniques are especially useful for defining geologic stratigraphy, and
can be useful to identify buried erosion channels, detailed rock surface location, overall
rock quality, buried obstructions or cavities, etc., as well as to define certain properties.
Geophysical testing should be used in combination with information from direct
methods of exploration, such as SPT, CPT, etc. to establish stratification of the
subsurface materials, the profile of the top of bedrock and bedrock quality, depth
to groundwater, limits of types of soil deposits, the presence of voids, anomalous
deposits, buried pipes, and depths of existing foundations. Geophysical tests
shall be selected and conducted in accordance with available ASTM standards.
For those cases where ASTM standards are not available, other widely accepted
detailed guidelines, such as Sabatini, et al. (2002), AASHTO Manual on Subsurface
Page 2-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
Investigations (1988), Arman, et al. (1997) and Campanella (1994), and Sirles (2006)
should be used.
Geophysical testing offers some notable advantages and some disadvantages that
should be considered before the technique is recommended for a specific application.
The advantages are summarized as follows:
• Many geophysical tests are noninvasive and thus, offer, significant benefits
in cases where conventional drilling, testing and sampling are difficult
(e.g. deposits of gravel, talus deposits) or where potentially contaminated
subsurface soils may occur.
• In general, geophysical testing covers a relatively large area, thus providing the
opportunity to generally characterize large areas in order to optimize the locations
and types of in-situ testing and sampling. Geophysical methods are particularly
well suited to projects that have large longitudinal extent compared to lateral
extent (such as for new highway construction).
• Geophysical measurement assesses the characteristics of soil and rock at very
small strains, typically on the order of 0.001%, thus providing information
on truly elastic properties, which are used to evaluate service limit states.
• For the purpose of obtaining subsurface information, geophysical methods are
relatively inexpensive when considering cost relative to the large areas over
which information can be obtained.
Some of the disadvantages of geophysical methods include:
• Most methods work best for situations in which there is a large difference
in stiffness or conductivity between adjacent subsurface units.
• It is difficult to develop good stratigraphic profiling if the general stratigraphy
consists of hard material over soft material or resistive material over
conductive material.
• Results are generally interpreted qualitatively and, therefore, only an experienced
engineer or geologist familiar with the particular testing method can obtain
useful results.
• Specialized equipment is required (compared to more conventional subsurface
exploration tools).
• Since evaluation is performed at very low strains (or no strain at all), information
regarding ultimate strength for evaluation of strength limit states is only obtained
by correlation.
There are a number of different geophysical in-situ tests that can be used for
stratigraphic information and determination of engineering properties. These methods
can be combined with each other and/or combined with the in-situ tests presented in
Section 5.4 to provide additional resolution and accuracy. ASTM D 6429, “Standard
Guide for Selecting Surface Geophysical Methods” provides additional guidance on
selection of suitable methods.
Sampling requirements will depend on the type of soil or rock encountered and the
nature of the project element to be designed and the properties necessary for the
geotechnical design of that project element. Properties needed for design, and how
those properties can best be obtained, should be identified as part of the geotechnical
investigation planning process. For example, if soft to stiff cohesive soils are present,
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-11
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
an adequate number of undisturbed samples will need to be obtained to perform the
laboratory shear strength and consolidation testing to define the shear strength and
compressibility properties needed for design, considering the potential variability
of these properties in each geologic unit, as well as to account for problem samples
that are discovered to not be usable for testing. The degree of sample disturbance
acceptable should also be considered, as well as the ability of the specific sampling
technique to retain the high quality undisturbed soils needed (see Chapter 3
regarding sampling techniques). The disturbed sampling technique selected to obtain
representative samples for classification and characterization will depend on the size
of the bigger particles anticipated. For example, SPT sampling is generally not suitable
for soils that contain a large percentage of medium to coarse gravel – in such cases,
a Becker hammer sampler may be more appropriate. If the gravelly soils of interest
are close enough to the surface, it may be possible to obtain more representative
bag samples through test pit techniques. For large projects where shaft foundations
are anticipated, and if permits and access can be obtained far enough in advance
of when the final design is due, larger diameter augers could be used to install test
shafts to evaluate the soils and evaluate shaft constructability. If detailed stratigraphy
is needed, for example, to identify potential unstable zones or surfaces, Shelby tube
samples or triple tube coring techniques can be used to get a continuous soil or rock
sample for visual assessment.
Field instrumentation planning is also crucial to the development of a complete
field exploration program. Ground water measurement in terms of its location,
pieziometric head, extent across the site, gradient, and connection to surface water
features is typically important for most geotechnical designs, and its measurement
should always be a part of any geotechnical investigation planning effort. Elimination
of ground water measurement from the geotechnical investigation plan must
be justified by strong evidence that there is no groundwater present within the
depths of interest, or that the presence of ground water will have no effect on the
geotechnical design of the project element or its construction. Note that measurement
of ground water in the drilled hole at the time of drilling is generally not considered
to be adequate for ground water measurement. In granular soil with medium to high
permeability, reliable groundwater levels can sometimes be obtained in the drilled
hole. At a minimum, groundwater levels should be obtained at completion of drilling
after the water level has stabilized and 12 hours after drilling is completed. However,
since the presence of drilling fluids and the time required for ground water levels
to reach equilibrium after drilling can be significant, measurements of ground
water at time of drilling can be misleading. It is generally necessary to install some
type of piezometer to make such measurements. The extent of the ground water
measurement program shall be capable of evaluating both design and constructability
needs (note that this does not mean that the piezometers need to be available for
use during construction of the project element, but only means that constructability
issues can be assessed). Seasonal or tidal variations in the ground water levels should
also be assessed to the extent feasible given the project design schedule. Continuous
monitoring of groundwater can be achieved by using electrical piezometers such
as vibrating wire type in conjunction with digital data loggers. Additional
information on ground water monitoring as part of the field investigation is provided
in Mayne, et al. (2002).
Page 2-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
Other field instrumentation may be needed as part of a geotechnical investigation
for certain situations. For example, where instability is anticipated, inclinometers
placed at strategic locations to define the potential failure surface should be installed.
The inclinometer should be installed deep enough to be firmly fixed in stable
soil. For forensic analysis of existing structures, tilt meters and/or extensometers
can be useful for determining the direction and location of structure movement.
Setting up survey control of key points on the structure as part of the geotechnical
investigation can also be of use in some cases.
2.3.3 Preparing the Exploration Plan
It is important to be confident of the accuracy of the site data provided by the office
requesting the geotechnical services, and to clearly understand the scope of services
being requested. The office requesting the geotechnical services should also clearly
understand what affect approximations in the site data could have on the geotechnical
design, and the need to go back later and redo some of the geotechnical work
if the impact of such approximations on the geotechnical design is significant. Any
geotechnical concerns that are likely to develop, or the need for contingencies, should
also be communicated at this time. Communication between the geotechnical designer
and the project office is essential throughout the geotechnical investigation. The
geotechnical designer is defined as the geotechnical engineer or engineering geologist
who has been given responsibility to coordinate and complete the geotechnical
design activities for the project. Early communication of potential complications due
to geotechnical concerns will result in more cost effective and constructible designs.
Any impact to project schedule resulting from the geotechnical investigation as
it progresses should also be communicated to the project office promptly. It is the
geotechnical designer’s responsibility to make sure that this communication
takes place.
Once the geotechnical investigation plan has been developed and approved
(see Chapter 1), a proposed budget for field exploration, laboratory testing and
engineering should be developed and provided to the project office. The basis of this
budget, including a description of the scope of work as the geotechnical designer
understands it, the date and source of the site data upon which the geotechnical
investigation plan was based, and the potential for changes to the plan that could occur
once some of the geotechnical subsurface data becomes available must be clearly
documented in the letter transmitting the geotechnical project budget.
The proposed locations of the borings should have been checked for accessibility
during the site reconnaissance (normally, the drilling supervisor will check for this).
It may be necessary to shift the locations of some explorations due to local conditions,
such as utilities, encountering obstacles such as boulders during drilling, or changes
in engineering plans. The revised locations of these holes should be carefully plotted
on the layout by the drill inspector, and the reason for the shift should be noted
on the field log. Some tolerance in location of the explorations should be expected
and communicated to the drill crew. The amount of tolerance will depend on the
topography at the site, the expected soil conditions, stage of exploration, and type
of structure. For example, for explorations made during the project definition phase
or for cut slope design, exact locations might not be critical. On the other hand, if the
test boring is being made to define the rock contact beneath a spread footing, moving
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-13
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
the boring 10 feet might be too much. If the location of the exploration is critical,
it may be justified to mobilize a different type of drill rig. Costs incurred during
construction because of differing site conditions are generally much greater than the
cost of an additional mobilization.
Communication between the geotechnical designer and the drilling inspector during
the field exploration is also crucial. The drilling inspector should be briefed as to what
subsurface conditions to expect and should contact the geotechnical designer if any
significant changes are encountered. It may be necessary to adjust the sampling
intervals of depth of explorations or add explorations, if the subsurface conditions
are different than expected. If it becomes apparent that such changes that will
significantly impact the project budget or schedule, it is important to immediately
contact the project office to discuss the situation with them, and come to an agreement
on the best course of action, but without impacting the progress of the field crews
in accomplishing the work.
The information needed on the drilling request form should be as complete as possible
to make efficient use of the exploration crew’s time. They need to know how to get
to the site, where to drill, what equipment to take, and what difficulties to expect. The
drill crew’s time should be spent in drilling and sampling and not in sending back for
more equipment.
A copy of the WSDOT Field Exploration Request Form is attached in Appendix 2-A.
Other examples are available in the National Highway Institute (NHI) Course manuals.
Below is a partial list of information to be included on the field exploration request
by the geotechnical designer. Other information should be included as appropriate.
Field Exploration Check List:
• Type of explorations required.
• Sequence of drilling to allow for adjustment in the plan. For example, explorations
in areas where soil conditions are unknown or problem soils are expected
to be present should be performed in the first stages of the program, to allow
for adjustment in sampling intervals or additional explorations to be added.
• Expected soil conditions. Attach field logs from nearby explorations, if available.
• Sampling intervals and types of samples to be obtained.
• Instrumentation and procedures for installation.
• Criteria for ending borings - depth, refusal, thickness of bearing layer, etc.
If at all possible, the depth of all explorations should be estimated prior to doing
the fieldwork. However, that is not always practical in situations where no previous
subsurface information is available and some criteria should be stated on the
exploration plan. A criteria recommended for typical use is to have a minimum
of 30 feet of material with blow counts of 30 blows per foot or greater,
or a minimum of 10 feet into bedrock, and for deep foundations, the boring depth
should be at least as deep as the estimated foundation depth plus 20 feet. Note that
without communication between the geotechnical designer and drilling inspector,
these criteria can sometimes result in borings that are drilled deeper than necessary.
• Coordination of drilling inspector and geotechnical designer regarding when and
at what stages of the field exploration communication should take place.
Page 2-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 2 Project Geotechnical Planning
The field exploration supervisor is responsible to obtain the following information,
either through field review of the investigation plan, or with the help of the
appropriate Region offices:
• Equipment required and access needs
• Known permits required and regulations
• Known utilities
• Special traffic control requirements
• Cost of field exploration services.
Coordination between the field exploration supervisor and the geotechnical designer
is necessary to implement the field investigation program, to make sure that there are
no logistical problems with the plan implementation.
2.4 Development of the Laboratory Testing Plan
The laboratory testing plan shall be developed in accordance with Section 5.6.2. The
laboratory testing plan includes classification and index testing, and soil/rock property
tests that can be used directly to assess design parameters. The development of the
testing plan shall address the properties needed for geotechnical design, and shall
consider the in-situ (field) test data available such that the results from both field and
laboratory testing can complement one another to provide a consistent and complete
assessment of the properties of the soil and rock strata encountered.
For soil classification/index testing, the plan shall consider the following:
• Enough samples shall be selected in each soil stratum to assess the consistency
of each soil stratum,
• When samples are available from more than one test hole for a given soil stratum,
samples from more than one test hole should be tested to verify spatial consistency
of the soil properties,
• For soil samples with a significant fines content, Atterberg limits tests should
at least be attempted to determine the plasticity of the fines.
For performance level laboratory tests, the plan shall consider the following:
• Availability of samples suitable for testing – note that the field exploration plan
should address the laboratory sample needs,
• The number of performance tests for each property required for the geotechnical
design needed to assess the potential variability in the property within a given
geologic stratum, though it is recognized that it will generally not be possible
to obtain enough test results to develop meaningful statistics for the property,
• The laboratory testing should be conducted in a way that best represents the in-
situ conditions from which the tested samples were taken, and the stresses and
moisture conditions to which the soil/rock being characterized through the tests
will be subjected based on the geotechnical design anticipated,
• Minimization of sample disturbance, when testing is conducted
on undisturbed samples,
• Classification/index testing to be conducted on the samples subjected
to performance level tests.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-15
October 2013
Project Geotechnical Planning Chapter 2
The laboratory testing plan shall identify the following information and
testing requirements:
• All tests shall be clearly identified as to the location within the borings from
which samples to be tested will be taken.
• The specific test procedures to be used shall be identified, including any special
sample preparation requirements and specific testing parameters, such as stress
levels. If the test procedures have options, the specific options to be used shall
be specified.
• The classification/index tests to be conducted on each sample subjected to
performance level testing.
2 .5 References
Arman, A., Samtani, N., Castelli, R., Munfakh, G., 1997, Subsurface Investigations:
Training Course in Geotechnical and Foundation Engineering. Report No. FHWA-
HI-97-021. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation.
Campanella, R.G. 1994. “Field Methods for Dynamic Geotechnical Testing: An
Overview of Capabilities and Needs.” Dynamic Geotechnical Testing II, Special
Technical Publication No. 1213, ASTM, Philadelphia, PA, pp. 3-23.
Mayne, P. W., Christopher, B.R., and DeJong, J., 2002, Subsurface Investigations –
Geotechnical Site Characterization, Publication No. FHWA NHI-01-031, National
Highway Institute, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, 300 pp.
Sabatini, P.J, Bachus, R.C, Mayne, P.W., Schneider, J.A., Zettler, T.E. (2002),
Geotechnical Engineering Circular 5 (GEC5) - Evaluation of Soil and Rock Properties.
Report No FHWA-IF-02-034. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Samtani, N. C., and Nowatzki, E. A., 2006. Soils and Foundations Workshop Reference
Manual, Volumes 1 and 2. Washington, DC, National Highway Institute Publication
NHI-06-088 and NHI-06-089, Federal Highway Administration, 1056 pp.
Sirles, P. C., 2006. Use of Geophysics for Transportation Projects – A Synthesis
of Highway Practice, NCHRP Synthesis 357, Transportation Research Board,
Washington, DC, 108 pp.
Page 2-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 2-A Field Exploration Request Form
FIELD EXPLORATION REQUEST
DATE: REVIEWED BY: ___________________
REGION: SR: C .S .: JOB No .:
PROJECT NAME:
PROJ . CONTACT: PHONE:
PROJECT TYPE:
CENTERLINE STRUCTURE LANDSLIDE PIT/QUARRY
NUMBER OF TEST BORINGS:
ESTIMATED DRILL FOOTAGE:
TYPE OF TEST HOLE:
STANDARD TEST HOLE
CPT
STANDARD TEST HOLE AND CPT
OTHER
INSITU TESTING: FREQUENCY OF TESTING:
VANE SHEAR
CPT PORE PRESSURE DISAPATION
CPT SEISMIC VELOCITY
OTHER
INSTRUMENTATION:
OPEN STANDPIPE PIEZO PNEUMATIC PIEZO
SLOPE INCLINOMETER OTHER
SAMPLING FREQUENCY:
STANDARD SPT AT 5 FOOT INTERVALS
WSDOT UNDISTURBED SAMPLES
SHELBY TUBE UNDISTURBED SAMPLES
LONGYEAR UNDISTURBED SAMPLES
PISTON SAMPLER UNDISTURBED SAMPLES
CONTINUOUS SAMPLING
OTHER
Special Instructions
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 2-A-1
October 2013
Field Exploration Request Form Appendix 2-A
Page 2-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
3-1 Overview
This chapter addresses subsurface exploration activities performed as part of a
geotechnical investigation. Subsurface explorations may include:
• Performing geotechnical soil borings
• Excavating test pits
• Performing field testing (e.g., Standard Penetration Testing (SPT), cone penetration
tests, downhole seismic testing, etc.)
• Installing standpipe piezometers (i.e. observation wells) or vibrating wire piezometers
• Other geotechnical instrumentation such as slope inclinometers.
This chapter is organized by activities and policies involved prior to, during, and after
exploration. Also addressed, through appendices included with this chapter, are best
management practices (BMPs) for erosion and spill prevention during geotechnical field
investigations, as well as other potential impacts to the natural environment in the vicinity
of the geotechnical investigation site (Appendices 3-C and 3-D), and the handling, and
disposing of, contaminated and potentially contaminated materials/samples obtained
during the geotechnical field investigation (Appendices 3-E and 3-F). Appendix 3-G
provides a listing of the information required to track wells as defined in RCW 18.104.020
and WAC 173-160-111 and which is included in the WSDOT database of well
installations. This is information that shall be submitted to WSDOT for any “well” installed
on WSDOT property or in connection with WSDOT Projects, regardless of who installs it.
3-2 Activities and Policies – Before Exploration
3-2.1 Field Exploration Plan Development and Permissions
A geotechnical field exploration plan should be formulated as described in Chapter 2.
The Geotechnical Project Manager (GPM) assigned to the project is responsible to
coordinate with the Region or Washington State Ferries (WSF) Project Office (PO)
to prepare the way for the field exploration crews to implement the field exploration
program. The GPM also functions as the primary liaison between the Region,
Megaprograms, or WSF and the Field Exploration Manager (FEM), to keep the FEM
informed as the Region or WSF completes the necessary preparations to begin
implementation of the field exploration plan.
Specifically, the GPM should do the following before submitting the final field exploration
request to the FEM:
1. Make sure senior Geotechnical Office management agrees with the proposed
exploration plan (see Section 1-4).
2. Make sure that the Project Office has provided adequate site data to locate test
holes and key project features on paper and in the field.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-1
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
3. Make sure that the project office has asked for (preferably obtained) an
environmental assessment of the site to determine whether or not there is potential
to encounter hazardous subsurface materials. The GPM is responsible to have a
basic knowledge of previous site use as well.
4. Make sure that the project office has asked for (preferably obtained) an
archeological assessment of the site to determine if there is potential to encounter
Native American or other artifacts.
5. Coordinate with the project office to make sure any right-of-entry’s needed are
obtained for the proposed drilling.
6. Coordinate with the project office to make sure the necessary permits are obtained
(especially with regard to wetlands and other environmentally sensitive areas).
7. Coordinate with the Field Exploration Supervisor (FES) who will be assigned to the
project, and the project office, to conduct a joint field review to evaluate access and
other issues related to setting up and finalizing the field exploration program.
8. Act as the liaison between the Field Exploration Manager (FEM) and the project
office to make sure the FEM knows when all the tasks have been completed
and to inform the FEM of the results so that the exploration program can be
properly estimated.
To obtain permits and right-of-entry, a preliminary field exploration plan will likely be
needed by the Region (or WSF) before the final exploration plan is completed and turned
in. Therefore, the development of the field exploration plan may require a somewhat
iterative process. Once enough field exploration plan details have been developed, the
GPM should request that those who will be directly negotiating with local owners to
obtain right-of entry (if needed) invite the FEM or FES to assist in those negotiations. This
generally makes the negotiations go much smoother.
If the GPM recognizes, either through an environmental assessment or through general
knowledge of the previous site use, that there is a potential to encounter hazardous
materials during the geotechnical field exploration, it is important that the GPM make the
FEM aware of this as soon as possible in the development of the exploration plan. This
will enable the FEM to be prepared to meet the requirements as specified in Appendices
3-C and 3-D, as well as to initiate procedures provided in Appendices 3-E and 3-F.
The potential to encounter hazardous subsurface materials can completely change the
approach, cost, and scheduling for the site exploration activities.
A preliminary field exploration plan is also needed for use as the basis for conducting
the joint field review mentioned above. This field review should be used to determine
how each individual exploration site will be accessed, the type of drill equipment best
suited for the site, areas for utility locates, required traffic control, and to identify any
permit, right-of-entry, and environmental issues. Adjustments to the specific locations
of exploration points can be made as needed during the field review to address the
above issues.
Page 3-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
During the field review, the FES will stake the borings if they have not already been
located and if right-of-entry (if needed) has been obtained. The FES should also assess
the traffic control needs for the exploration work at this time. The FES will coordinate
directly with the Maintenance Office for traffic control. After staking borings, the FES
is responsible for calling all utility locates a minimum of 48 hours prior to the start
of explorations.
The final field exploration plan shall be developed as described in Chapter 2. The plan
should include provisions and costs to decommission installed wells. Once the final field
exploration plan has been completed, the FEM will provide a cost estimate to the GPM
to complete the field exploration plan. Once the expenditure for the field exploration
has been authorized, the GPM must then notify the FEM to commence with the field
exploration. Once the exploration plan has been executed, any subsequent requests
to modify the plan should be provided in writing by the GPM to the FES. The FES will
respond with an updated estimate and schedule for requested plan change.
If the geotechnical design is to be conducted by a geotechnical consultant, the WSDOT
GPM who is overseeing the consultant task assignment or agreement is responsible to
make sure that the consultant accomplishes the tasks described above and to assist in the
coordination between the consultant and the FEM. If the consultant needs changes to the
field exploration plan, the GPM is responsible to provide input to the FES or FEM as to
the acceptability of the changes. The FES or FEM is not to act on the requested changes
to the field exploration plan without input from the GPM.
While the GPM is responsible to coordinate between the project office and the FEM or
FES regarding permits, the project office is ultimately responsible to perform or provide
right-of-entry, hazardous materials assessment and archeological evaluation for the site,
and to provide adequate site data to locate the exploration points for exploration plan
development and for location in the field.
Currently, WSDOT has a five-year General Hydraulic Project Approval (HPA) for
performing geotechnical exploration in both marine and fresh waters statewide. Once
again the FEM or FES should be involved early in the process to define all technical
questions for each project. For all barge projects, the drilling shall be in compliance with
the provisions described in the general HPA from the Washington Department of Fish &
Wildlife (WDFW).
The FEM (or as delegated to a FES) will assign the project to a drill inspector(s) and a
drill crew. The drill inspector will then initiate a meeting with the GPM to discuss the
objectives and any particulars of the exploration plan. Either the FES or the drill inspector
should notify the GPM of the anticipated start date of the requested work.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-3
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
3-2.2 Department of Ecology Requirements for Wells
Well definitions, and submittal, construction, protection, and decommissioning
requirements as specified in RCW 18.104 and WAC 173-160 shall be followed.
In accordance with RCW 18.104.020 and WAC 173-160-111, a well is defined as a water
well, resource protection well, dewatering well, and geotechnical soil boring. Specifically,
RCW 18.104.020(8) defines “geotechnical soil boring” or “boring” as “a well drilled for
the purpose of obtaining soil samples or information to ascertain structural properties of
the subsurface”.
A “resource protection well” is defined as “a cased boring intended or used to collect
subsurface information or to determine the existence or migration of pollutants within an
underground formation. Resource protection wells include monitoring wells, observation wells,
piezometers, spill response wells, remediation wells, environmental investigation wells, vapor
extraction wells, ground source heat pump boring, grounding wells, and instrumentation wells.”
Note that these definitions of a well do not apply to “excavations made for the purpose of …
inserting any device or instrument less than 10 feet in depth into the soil for the sole purpose of
performing soil or water testing or analysis or establishing soil moisture content as long as there
is no withdrawal of water in any quantity other than as necessary to perform the intended
testing or analysis.”
Reports required for wells by the Washington State Department of Ecology (hereinafter
referred to as Ecology) in accordance with the RCWs and WACs include Notice of Intent
(NOI) and water well reports for both the construction and decommissioning of wells.
The following sections provide the most relevant RCWs and WACs for wells. The WACs
and RCWs identified herein are not intended to be an exhaustive list. Other RCWs and
WACs may also be applicable.
3-2.2.1 RCWs and WACs for Geotechnical Soil Borings
Given the definition of “well” provided above, the following RCWs and WACs are
applicable to geotechnical borings:
WAC 173-160-101: General standards that apply to all water wells
RCW 18.104.050: Reports of well construction or decommissioning
WAC 173-160-141: Requirements regarding water well reports
RCW 18.104.048: Prior notice of well construction, reconstruction, or decommissioning
WAC 173-160-151: Prior notice to the Department of Ecology and fees regarding well
construction, reconstruction, and decommissioning
WAC 173-160-181: Requirements for preserving the natural barriers to groundwater
movement between aquifers
WAC 173-160-191: Design and construction requirements for completing wells
WAC 173-160-311: Well tagging requirements
WAC 173-160-381: Standards for decommissioning a well
WAC 173-160-420: General construction requirements for resource protection wells
WAC 173-160-460: Decommissioning process for resource protection wells
Page 3-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
For a geotechnical boring, an NOI as described in WAC 173-160-151 shall be provided
to Ecology, with a copy to the WSDOT Geotechnical Office, at least 72 hours prior to
drilling the boring. If the boring is not left open or cased after it is drilled, the well report(s)
developed in accordance with WAC 173-160-141 for both conducting the boring and
its decommissioning can be provided at the same time. In this case, a well tag (i.e., per
WAC 173-160-311) is not required.
For a geotechnical boring that is not decommissioned immediately after the boring is
completed, but is left open or cased after it is drilled to provide opportunity to monitor
ground water, movements, or access for future testing (i.e., a resource protection well
as previously defined), a NOI as described in WAC 173-160-151 shall be provided to
Ecology, with a copy to the WSDOT Geotechnical Office, at least 72 hours prior to drilling
the boring. A well report describing the well construction shall be provided to Ecology
after the boring is complete in accordance with WAC 173-160-141.
Resource protection wells shall be physically identified with a well identification tag
provided by Ecology in accordance with WAC 173-160-311 and WAC 173-160-420.
The well identification tag must be placed in a secure, visible location. Per WAC 173-
160-311 and WAC 173-160-420, the well tag shall be permanently attached to the
outer well casing or other prominent well feature and be visible above land surface.
3-2.2.2 Definition and Responsibilities of the Well Contractor and
Well Owner
RCW 18.104.020 defines the “well contractor” as “any person, firm, partnership,
copartnership, corporation, association, or other entity, licensed and bonded under
chapter 18.27 RCW, engaged in the business of constructing water wells.” RCW
18.104.020 also applies this definition to resource protection well contractors.
Wells, as defined in RCW 18.104.020 and WAC 173-160-111, which includes
geotechnical borings and resource protection wells, shall be drilled by a licensed resource
protection well operator as specified in RCW 18.104.095, RCW 18.104.097, and WAC
173-162. A resource protection well operator with a training license (i.e., as specified in
RCW 18.104.097) may operate the drilling rig to conduct the well construction, including
geotechnical borings, under the supervision of a licensed operator as allowed in that
RCW. Licenses shall be kept current as specified in RCW 18.104.100.
RCW 18.104.020 defines the “well owner” as the “person, firm, partnership, co-
partnership, corporation, association, other entity, or any combination of these, who
owns the property on which the well is or will be constructed or has the right to the
well by means of an easement, covenant, or other enforceable legal instrument for the
purpose of benefiting from the well.” In general, responsibilities of the well owner include
making sure that NOIs, well reports, and fees are properly submitted to Ecology in a
timely manner, that the well is protected from damage and contamination, and that it is
properly decommissioned.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-5
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
As applied to the various situations in which wells are constructed on WSDOT right-of-
way or other property where WSDOT may be considered the “well owner” as defined
under RCW 18.104.020 by WSDOT or other entities, the application of this definition and
the associated responsibilities are as follows:
• For all wells that are constructed by WSDOT drill crews (including headquarters crews
and NW Region crews), and private sector contract drill crews hired by WSDOT,
WSDOT will fulfill the responsibilities of the well owner, making sure that NOIs, well
reports, and fees are properly submitted to Ecology in a timely manner, that the well is
protected from damage and contamination, and that it is properly decommissioned.
• For all wells constructed by consultants and their subcontracted drill crews, the
consultant shall be responsible to make sure that, for each well, survey coordinates,
NOIs, well reports, and fees are properly submitted to the Ecology in a timely manner
and to make sure that a copy of those documents are provided to the WSDOT
Geotechnical Office for its records. WSDOT will maintain primary responsibility to
make sure that the well is protected from damage and contamination, and that it is
properly decommissioned.
• For all wells constructed by design-build contractors, the design-builder shall be
responsible to submit NOIs, well reports, and fees to Ecology, to make sure wells are
properly tagged, and shall be responsible to make sure that the well is protected from
damage and contamination and that it is properly decommissioned. In addition, for
each well, the design-builder shall submit copies of survey coordinates, the NOIs, and
well reports submitted to Ecology to the WSDOT Geotechnical Office for its records.
WSDOT, as the well owner, will provide oversight to make sure that the design-
builder carries out its responsibilities regarding wells.
• For all wells as defined above constructed by another agency or private sector
developer within WSDOT right-of-way, the responsibility for the wells shall be as
defined in the Subterranean Monitoring Permit (see also the WSDOT Development
Services Manual, Section 5.4.05). The developer, or other agency, shall be responsible
to submit, for each well, survey coordinates, NOIs, well reports, and fees to Ecology,
to make sure wells are properly tagged, and shall be responsible to make sure
that the well is protected from damage and contamination and that it is properly
decommissioned. In addition, the other agency or private developer shall submit
a copy of the survey coordinates, NOIs and well reports submitted to Ecology to
the WSDOT Geotechnical Office for its records. WSDOT, as the well owner, will
provide oversight to make sure that the other agency or private sector developer
carries out its responsibilities regarding wells.
• For land purchased by WSDOT that contains wells, WSDOT becomes the owner of
the wells and is responsible to protect the wells from contamination and damage.
WSDOT becomes responsible to decommission the wells, unless WSDOT requires
the previous landowner to decommission the wells through the purchase agreement.
If the prior landowner is required to decommission the wells, it shall provide the
required decommissioning notices and reports to Ecology, with copies to WSDOT.
Protection of wells between well construction and decommissioning shall meet the
requirements in WAC 173-160-101 and WAC 173-160-420.
Page 3-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
3-2.2.3 Submittal and Tracking Requirements for Wells
WSDOT will maintain a database of all well installations on WSDOT property made
by WSDOT, its contract drill crews, consultants, design-builders, other agencies, and
private sector developers. Consultants, design-builders, and other agencies shall provide
pertinent information as listed in Appendix 3-G for the database in addition to the
following documents for each installed well:
• A copy of all NOIs submitted Ecology, both for constructing the well and its
decommissioning
• A copy of the well report submitted to Ecology, both for constructing the well and for
its decommissioning
The above documents will be stored by the WSDOT Geotechnical Office, and a link to
these documents will be included in the database for easy retrieval.
3-3 Activities and Policies – During Exploration
The drill inspector will maintain regular contact with the GPM. The drill inspector
shall contact the GPM, for example, when unanticipated conditions or difficulties are
encountered, significant schedule delays are anticipated, and prior to terminating the
exploration and installing instrumentation. The driller is required to complete a daily drill
report at the end of each workday. This is also required of any contract driller working
for WSDOT. The drilling inspector is also required to complete a daily inspector’s report
at the end of each workday. At the completion of each workweek these reports shall
be turned in to the FES and put in the project file. Examples for both the daily drill
and inspector reports that show the minimum required documentation are included in
Appendix 3-A.
Exploration activities during drilling must adhere to the Geotechnical Office’s Best
Management Practices to mitigate for sediment/erosion control and spill prevention (see
Appendix 3-C).
Methods for advancing geotechnical borings should be in accordance with the following
ASTM standards:
• D6151-97(2003) Standard Practice for Using Hollow-Stem Augers for Geotechnical
Exploration and Soil Sampling
• D5876-95(2000) Standard Guide for Use of Direct Rotary Wireline Casing
Advancement Drilling Methods for Geoenvironmental Exploration and Installation of
Subsurface Water-Quality Monitoring Devices
• D2113-99 Standard Practice for Rock Core Drilling and Sampling of Rock for Site
Investigation
Hollow-stem augers are not to be used for assessment of liquefaction potential; wet
rotary methods should be used. Further, care must be exercised during drilling with
hollow-stem augers to mitigate for heave and loosening of saturated, liquefiable soils.
Sampling of subsurface materials should be in accordance with the following ASTM
standards:
• D1586-99 Standard Test Method for Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling
of Soils
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-7
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
• D3550-01 Standard Practice for Thick Wall, Ring-Lined, Split Barrel, Drive Sampling
of Soils
• D1587-00 Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils for
Geotechnical Purposes
• D4823-95(2003)e1 Standard Guide for Core Sampling Submerged,
Unconsolidated Sediments
In addition to the methods described above for sampling for soft, fine-grained sediments,
WSDOT utilizes a thick-walled sampler referred to as the Washington undisturbed
sampler. This sampler is lined with 2-inch (I.D.) extrudible brass tubes. The sampler is
intended for stiffer fine-grained deposits than what would be suitable for Shelby tubes.
Down-the-hole hammers are not allowed for use in performing Standard Penetration
Tests.
Samples should be handled in accordance with the following ASTM standards:
• D4220-95(2000) Standard Practices for Preserving and Transporting Soil Samples
• D5079-02 Standard Practices for Preserving and Transporting Rock Core Samples
Disturbed soil samples should be placed in watertight plastic bags. For moisture- critical
geotechnical issues, a portion of the sample should be placed in a moisture tin and sealed
with tape. Extreme care must be exercised when handling and transporting undisturbed
samples of soft/loose soil; undisturbed samples must also be kept from freezing. Rock
cores of soft/weak rock should be wrapped in plastic to preserve in situ moisture
conditions. Rock cores should be placed in core boxes from highest to lowest elevation
and from left to right. Coring intervals should be clearly labeled and separated. Core
breaks made to fit the core in the box must be clearly marked on the core. All soil and
rock samples should be removed from the drill site at the end each day of drilling and
transported to the laboratory as soon as possible.
In situ testing methods commonly employed in geotechnical investigations should be in
accordance with the following ASTM standards:
• D2573-01 Standard Test Method for Field Vane Shear Test in Cohesive Soil
• D5778-95(2000) Standard Test Method for Performing Electronic Friction Cone and
Piezocone Penetration Testing of Soils
Groundwater monitoring and in situ characterization methods commonly employed in
geotechnical investigations should be in accordance with the following ASTM standards:
• D5092-02 Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Ground Water Monitoring
Wells in Aquifers
• D4750-87(2001) Standard Test Method for Determining Subsurface Liquid Levels
in a Borehole or Monitoring Well (Observation Well)
• D4044-96(2002) Standard Test Method for (Field Procedure) for Instantaneous
Change in Head (Slug) Tests for Determining Hydraulic Properties of Aquifers
Additional information on ground water investigation and monitoring is provided in
Mayne, et al. (2002).
Page 3-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
As described herein, the term “piezometer” includes the use of open standpipe
piezometers and pore pressure transducers (pneumatic or vibrating wire). RCW
18.104.020/WAC 173.160.111 defines these as observation or monitoring wells,
and when pressure transducers are used, as an instrumentation well. As a minimum,
groundwater levels should be measured/recorded prior to the daily commencement of
drilling activities and upon completion of piezometer installation. Subsequent monitoring
is at the discretion of the GPM. Prior to constructing a piezometer, the boring should
be thoroughly purged of drill fluids using clean, potable water. The GPM should provide
design input on the construction of the piezometer, specifically regarding the screened
interval and seals. Piezometers shall be constructed in accordance with Ecology
regulations (RCW 18.104/WAC 173.160) governing water wells. Following completion
of the piezometer, the piezometer should be repeatedly surged or bailed to develop
the well screen and optimize hydraulic connectivity with the formation. Furthermore,
the piezometer should be sealed within the aquifer of interest, not hydraulically linking
multiple aquifers.
Slope inclinometers are routinely employed for slope stability investigations. The
installation and monitoring of slope inclinometers should be in accordance with the
following ASTM Standard:
• D6230-98 Standard Test Method for Monitoring Ground Movement Using Probe-
Type Inclinometers
Explorations using hand equipment such as augers and drive probes may also be useful
for some geotechnical investigations, such as to define lateral and vertical extent of
soft/loose, near-surface deposits. The WSDOT portable penetrometer consists of 1.75
inch diameter rod which tapers to a rounded 0.5 inch tip over a 4.5 inch length, and
which is driven in the ground with a 35 lb weight dropped from a 25.5 inch height.
Detailed procedures for portable penetrometer testing are provided in Appendix 3-B.
Standard Penetration Test correlations for the WSDOT portable penetrometer (PP) are
approximated as follows:
Soil Type SPT Correlation
Clay # PP blows/4
Silt # PP blows/3
Sand/Gravel # PP blows/2
The excavation of test pits can provide valuable subsurface information not determinable
or well characterized by test borings. Extreme care should be exercised around open
excavations, and access within them should adhere to Washington Administrative
Code (WAC) sections 296-155-655 and 296-155-657. Prior to de- mobilizing, the drill
inspector should ensure location information (e.g., station, offset, elevation and/or state
plane coordinates) of all the explorations are recorded on the field logs. If exact location
information is unavailable upon completion of field activities, a sketch of each exploration
location should be made indicating relationship to observable features (i.e., bridge/
structure, mile post, etc.). This information should be provided with the field logs to the
GPM. In addition to providing field logs for all explorations, required documentation
for test pits should include a scale drawing of the excavation and photographs of the
excavated faces. Sampling methods and in situ measurement devices such as pocket
penetrometers should also be documented. Detailed requirements for boring logs are
provided in Chapter 4.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-9
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
3-4 Activities and Policies – After Exploration
3-4.1 Field Notes, Finished Log, and Sample Handling
Upon completion, the drilling inspector shall transmit recovered samples to the State
Materials Lab and provide both the original copy of the field notes and a finished log for
all explorations to the GPM. If the samples to be transmitted to the lab are known to be
contaminated or are potentially contaminated, the procedures provided in Appendices 3-E
and 3-F shall be followed.
Upon completion of the subsurface explorations, a finished well report that meets the
requirements of WAC 173-160-141 shall be submitted to Ecology within 30 days of
completion of the last boring for the project or the end of the calendar year, whichever
occurs first.
3-4.2 Well Protection and Decommissioning Requirements
The primary goals of the policies and procedures outlined in this section are to ensure
proper protection of wells in service, timely decommissioning of all wells, decrease
the potential for incomplete documentation of well installation and decommissioning
with Ecology, and increase the degree to which complete documentation is verified
with Ecology.
Protection of wells between well construction and decommissioning shall meet the
requirements in WAC 173-160-101 and WAC 173-160-420. With assistance from
the FES in charge of the well installations, the GPM should coordinate with the local
WSDOT maintenance office to make sure they are aware of any wells located within
their jurisdiction.
RCW 18.104.020 defines “decommission” as “filling or plugging a well so that it will not
produce water, serve as a channel for movement of water or pollution, or allow the entry
of pollutants into the well or aquifers”. Well decommissioning shall be carried out in
accordance with WAC 173-160-420 and WAC 173-160-460 (see Section 3-2.2). The
GPM will make the request for decommissioning to the FEM, updating the original
field exploration request as needed (initial estimate will be in the original estimate for
the drilling). The GPM is responsible to coordinate the well decommissioning with the
Region Project Office, and for wells preserved for longer term monitoring, also with the
Geotechnical Design and Project Development Engineer.
The timing of decommissioning is determined as follows:
Design-Bid-Build – For these projects, decommissioning of wells is scheduled by the
assigned GPM when the project reaches final PS&E review, or sooner, if possible. The
GPM is responsible for reaching out to the Project Office, informing them of the need to
decommission and making appropriate arrangements with the FEM. In addition to less
formal notification to the Project Office (email, etc.), a comment indicating the need for
well decommissioning should also be provided as part of PS&E review. If the geotechnical
design work is conducted by either a HQ or region consultant, the WSDOT staff
assigned to review the consultant’s work will make sure any wells installed are properly
decommissioned. Ideally, well decommissioning should be included in the consultant’s
scope of work, but if not the HQ GPM will do the coordination with the FEM to make
sure the wells get decommissioned.
Page 3-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Design Build – For these projects, for wells installed during project development, the
GPM is responsible for informing the WSDOT Project Office during final review of the
RFP of the need to decommission prior to RFP advertisement. For wells installed by the
Design-Builder, the Design-Builder shall decommission the wells prior to contract physical
completion. The GPM should make sure that specifications requiring decommissioning by
the Design-Builder are included in the RFP.
For either type of project (i.e., Design-Bid-Build or Design-Build), if the GPM feels that
the well(s) should be maintained for long-term monitoring through project construction
(e.g., for landslides or ground water monitoring), the GPM shall notify the WSDOT FEM
and the Geotechnical Design and Project Development Engineer so that the well can
be tracked for future decommissioning. The GPM is also responsible for informing the
WSDOT Project Office of the need for special provisions or RFP language to handle
both the protection-in-place of the wells and their decommissioning. In addition, the
locations of wells to be protected will be clearly shown on the project plans. Standard
Specification language is already in place to require the Contractor to protect the wells
and not disturb them as a result of any construction activity. Decommissioning of these
wells should occur at or about Contract Physical Completion, unless other arrangements
are made to leave the wells in place longer term, and will be triggered by the Construction
Project Engineer notifying the Geotechnical Office. If left in place longer term, the GPM
is responsible to request and arrange for the proper decommissioning of the wells and all
Ecology reporting requirements.
Historic Wells – During project development, construction, or maintenance activities,
previously installed, historic wells may be encountered. During project development,
the GPM should attempt to locate and positively identify all such wells, determine
whether or not they have been properly decommissioned, that records for those wells are
available, and that those records have been submitted to Ecology. If the well has not been
decommissioned, or if the records for the well are lacking, the GPM should work with the
FES to make sure that the well is properly decommissioned. If the region Project Office
discovers the historic wells, the GPM assigned to the project should be notified as soon
as practical.
At least 72 hours prior to well decommissioning, a NOI as described in WAC 173-160-
151 shall be provided to Ecology. Once the decommissioning is completed, a well report
documenting the decommissioning shall be submitted to Ecology in accordance with
WAC 173-160-141 and WAC 173-160-420. In both cases, a copy of the NOI and well
report for decommissioning shall be retained by the WSDOT Geotechnical Office for its
records if drilled by state forces or its drilling contractors, or shall be submitted to the
WSDOT Geotechnical Office for its records if drilled by others (e.g., consultants, design-
build contractors, other governmental agencies, developers).
3-5 Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Calibration
Calibration to determine specific hammer system efficiencies shall be developed in
general accordance with ASTM D4633 for dynamic analysis of driven piles or other
accepted procedure. In general, hammers should be tested annually, and may be tested
on a project specific basis if deemed necessary and staff are available to do the testing.
Measured hammer efficiencies for WSDOT drilling equipment can be obtained by
contacting the WSDOT Geotechnical Office.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-11
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
3-6 References
Mayne, P. W., Christopher, B.R., and DeJong, J., 2002, Subsurface Investigations –
Geotechnical Site Characterization, Publication No. FHWA NHI-01-031, National Highway
Institute, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, 300 pp.
3-7 Appendices
Appendix 3-A Daily Drill Report Form
Appendix 3-B Portable Penetrometer Test Procedures
Appendix 3-C Field Investigation Best Management Practices for Erosion and Spill
Prevention
Appendix 3-D Department of Natural Resources Memorandum of Understanding:
Drilling Operations – State Owned Aquatic Lands
Appendix 3-E Geotechnical Field Investigation and Contaminated Drilling Waste
Management Procedures
Appendix 3-F State Materials Laboratory Sample- Handling Policy for Contaminated
and Potentially Contaminated Samples
Appendix 3-G WSDOT Well Tracking Database Information to be Tracked
Page 3-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Appendix 3-A Daily Drill Report Form
Daily Drill Report
SR CS Date
Project Project No.
Drill Drill No.
Structure Line Landslide Materials Source
Hole No Size Angle From To Soil Rock Total
Item Hours Item Hours
Mobilization and Demobilization Water Haul: Mileage
On Site Moving/Rigging Equipment Downtime
Drill Site Preparation Explain:
Soil Drilling Standby for Hole Survey and Other Delays
Rock Drilling Explain:
Reaming Hole Installation of Instrumentation
Placing and Removing Casing Type:
Hole Stabilization Special Testing
Install and Maintain Water System Type:
Water Delay Travel Time
Expendables
Core Boxes Piezo Pipe Slope Incl Cement Bentonite Additives
Other
Support Equipment No. Job Yard O Serv.
Remarks
Reg. OT Comp Total
Inspector 0
Driller 0
Helper 0
Shift Start Shift Finish Service Codes
DOT Form 350-152
Revised 07/2012
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-13
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Appendix 3-B Portable Penetrometer Test Procedures
Background
The WSDOT portable penetrometer (PP) is a field test used in highway and small
foundation design. The test may be used in both cohesive (clay) and cohesionless (sands &
gravels) soils. The test values (i.e., blow count per foot of penetration) are dependent upon
the effective overburden pressure of granular soils and shear strength of cohesionless
soils. However, since all equations and correlations related to use of blow count values are
approximate, sound engineering judgment is necessary for accurate interpretation of the
test results.
The PP test is a derivative of the Standard Penetration Test (SPT), the most widely
used method for determining soil conditions in the world. The SPT is both a dynamic
penetration test and a method of obtaining disturbed samples. For the SPT test, a split-
spoon sampler attached to drill steel is driven downward by the impact of a falling weight
on the steel. In the SPT test, a 140 lb. weight falls a distance of 30 inches per blow. In
the PP test method, a 35 lb weight falls an approximate distance of 25.5 inches. In the
SPT test, as a split-spoon sampler is driven downward, it fills with disturbed soil. In the
PP test, no sample is obtained as a solid, cone-shaped tip is driven downward by a falling
weight. However, the PP method requires excavation of a test hole, and samples should
be obtained with each change in soil strata.
Equipment
Performance of portable penetrometer testing requires two groups of equipment. The
first group is associated with preparation of a drilled borehole, backhoe test pit, or hand-
excavated test hole. This group includes the tools used to dig the hole, with a hand auger
employed most frequently in a PP test application. A list of equipment used for excavation
of a test hole with a hand auger follows:
• Shovel with pointed end for breaking up turf and vegetation at the surface.
• Posthole digger for assistance in establishing the test hole excavated using the hand
auger.
• Hand auger to include: auger, pipe extensions (± 3 feet lengths), and handle.
• Steel bar to loosen up hard pack soil and assist in the removal of rock or gravel from
the test hole.
• Tarp for collecting representative samples of soil strata.
• Field notebook and pencil for recording location of test holes, numbers and
descriptions of distinct soil layers encountered, and other information relative to a
review of site characteristics and conditions.
• Sample bags with ties for preservation of samples of material encountered with
changes of soil strata.
• Marker for writing on sample bags or tags to delineate test hole and depth of sample
collection.
• Pocket or rag tape to be used to locate the test hole relative to some reference point,
grid, or proposed alignment and for measurement of depth below surface of distinct
soil strata and depth of exploration.
Page 3-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
The PP device and accessories form the second group of equipment required for
geotechnical investigation of proposed highway or small foundation designs. A list of the
equipment necessary for this group follows:
• Portable penetrometer to include cone-shaped tip; drill rod sections (A-rod - 1.75 in.
pipe OD & 22.5 in. lengths); falling weight section (length of bar for sliding weight up
and down); the 35-lb weight; and the coupling devices used for connecting the tip –
drill rod sections – falling weight section – falling weight stop.
• Pipe wrenches (2) used to loosen connections when breaking down the portable
penetrometer.
• Lathe or another “straight-edge” useful for establishing a surface reference elevation.
• Construction crayon or marker used for marking three 6 inch intervals on the
penetrometer in order to clearly delineate displacement as the penetrometer is driven
into the ground.
• Rags to wipe down equipment, removing moisture and dirt, prior to packing away
equipment.
Test Procedure
1. Using a shovel or other hand tool, strip away sod or surface vegetation and set aside
for future restoration of the location. Using a posthole digger or a 6 in diameter
or greater hand auger, dig down approximately 2 feet, noting the depth of topsoil,
subsoil, and other changes in soil strata. Describe soil conditions such as color,
texture, and moisture content of the soils encountered in the bore log. Collect
samples for lab soil classification, grain size determination, or Atterberg limits
determination.
2. Assemble the PP device for evaluation of soils near the surface. Use threaded
coupling devices to connect the cone-shaped tip, drill rod sections, and falling
weight slide section.
3. Measure the distance from the bottom of the test hole to the surface and record.
From the tip of the penetrometer, measure this distance on the body of the testing
device and annotate a reference line on the body of the device. From this line
measure and mark three intervals, each 6 inches in length.
4. Lift up the PP device and place the tip at the bottom of the test hole. Insure that the
bottom or base line mark lines up with the approximate ground surface. Place a lathe
or other straight edge on the ground surface so that any downward displacement of
the PP device may be measured accurately.
5. Lift the 35 lb weight up and lower it down on to the upper, slide portion of the
testing device. Screw on the threaded stop at the upper end of the slide section.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-15
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
6. Performance of PP testing requires a minimum of two people. One person should
be responsible for steadying the PP device in the test hole, counting the number of
times the weight drops, and watching the reference line in order to stop the process
every time the device is displaced downward a total of 6 inches. The second person
is responsible for raising and dropping the weight in as smooth and controlled
manner as possible. Raising the weight upward of fifty times per 6 inch interval can
prove to be a workout. Additional personnel can be employed to relieve the person
responsible for lifting the weight and assist in the manual work requirements of test
hole excavation.
7. For each “blow”, the 35 lb weight drops a distance of approximately 25.5 in. The
number of blows required to drive the cone penetrometer through three 6 inch
intervals is recorded. The count for the initial 6 inch interval is noted but isn’t used
to compute a test value because it reflects the seating of the PP device. The sum
of the blows for the last two 6 inch intervals is recorded. This sum of the blows
represents the blow count for that 1 foot interval below the surface.
8. Upon completion of PP testing at a specific depth, the device is unseated by
thrusting the weight against the stop at the end of the slide. Repeating this action
should loosen the tip and permit removal of the device from the test hole.
9. Employ the hand auger to remove material “disturbed” by the action of the PP. Place
this affected material on the tarp and obtain a sample for lab testing. Associate PP
test results with material sampled from the proper test hole and elevation.
10. Continue advancing the auger into the soil, emptying soil and repeating the
procedure until the desired depth is reached. Advances from one PP test to the
next lower level test are usually in 2 feet increments. Monitor the condition and
properties of the soil, noting any changes in strata. Obtain samples as necessary.
11. To prepare the PP device for the next test at a lower test hole level, remove the
weight stop, 35 1b weight, and slide section to permit the attachment of additional
drill rod sections. Re-attach the slide section to the penetrometer. Measure the
distance from the bottom of the test hole to the surface. Mark this distance on the
body of the testing device by measuring from the tip and annotating a base line
corresponding to the distance on the PP device.
12. With assistance, lift the PP into the test hole, properly seat it in the center of the
hole, and insure that the base line corresponds with the ground surface.
13. Lift the weight up and onto the slide section and screw in the threaded stop at the
top end of the slide.
14. Perform PP test procedure and sampling as described previously.
15. Monitor changes in soil strata as the hand auger advances downward in the
test hole. In general, sample only when there are obvious changes in soil strata.
Use engineering judgment to guide whether additional sampling and testing are
warranted. As the degree of geologic complexity increases, the degree of sampling
and testing increases as well.
Page 3-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Figures 3-B-1 through 3-B-8 illustrate the equipment and procedures used for conducting
the Portable Penetrometer test.
Figure 3-B-1
Perform a field reconnaissance of the site of the geotechnical investigation. Insure that the proposed design is
Figure
Figure
3C-1.
tied to 3C-1.
an Perform
Perform
established a afield reconnaissance
fieldsystem,
coordinate reconnaissance
of the site of
ofthe
thegeotechnical
geotechnicalinvestigation.
of the sitemonument.
datum, or permanent investigation.
Insure
Insure that the proposed design is tied to an established coordinate system, datum, or or
that the proposed design is tied to an established coordinate system, datum, permanent
permanent
monument.
monument.
Figure 3-B-2
Figure 3C-2. Hand augers used in conjunction with the PP test.
Hand augers used in conjunction with the PP test.
Figure 3C-2. Hand augers used in conjunction with the PP test.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-17
June 2021 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page 3-C-4 June 2006
Page 3-C-4
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Figure 3-B-3
FigurePorta-Pen
3C-3. equipment.
Porta-PenClockwise
equipment. from the top left: tape
Clockwise measure
from above
the top cone-shaped
left: tips (2);above
tape measure 22.5-inch
cone-
lengths (9); threaded coupling devices used to connect PP components (10); threaded coupler used to stop
shaped
Figure tips
Figure
3C-3.
weight (2); 22.5-inch
3C-3. Porta-Pen
Porta-Pen
(1); falling-weight lengths
equipment. (9);
slide section threaded
equipment.
Clockwise
above coupling
pipeClockwise
from the
wrenches devices
from
(2); toplb.left:
35 the used
toptape
weight; to
left: connect
andmeasure PP
tape measure
threaded above components
couplingcone-
above cone-
devices
(10); used
shaped threaded
tips
shaped(2);
with coupler
tips
22.5-inch
small cone used
(2); tips toshown).
22.5-inch
lengths
(not stop weight
lengths
(9); (1);threaded
threaded
(9); falling-weight
coupling coupling
devices slide section
devices
used to used above
connect pipe
to connect
PP wrenches
components
PP components
(2); 35 lb.
(10); threadedweight;
(10); threaded and threaded
coupler coupler
used to used coupling
stop weight devices
to stop (1);
weight used with
falling-weight small
(1); falling-weight cone
slide section tips (not
slide section shown).
above pipe above
wrenches
pipe wrenches
(2); 35 lb.
(2);weight;
35 lb. weight;
and threaded
and threaded
couplingcoupling
devices devices
used with used
smallwithconesmalltipscone
(nottips
shown).
(not shown).
Figure 3-B-4
Figure 3C-4. The vicinity of the test hole is cleared of vegetation using a shovel or posthole
digger. Figure
Figure Left photo
3C-4. 3C-4.
The shows
The using
vicinity of thethe
vicinity ofauger
test the to
holetest advance
is cleared ofthe
hole is clearedhole
oftovegetation
vegetation the desired
using depth
a using
shovela or. posthole
Rightorphoto
shovel posthole
The vicinity of the test hole is cleared of vegetation using a shovel or posthole digger. Left photo shows
shows
digger. placing
digger.
Left
using
soil
thephotoLeft
auger
on
to
the
shows
photo
advance
tarp
using
shows prior
the
the hole to
to
using
augersampling.
thethetoauger
advance
desired to advance
depth. the hole
Right the
phototoshows
the
holedesired
to thesoil
placing desired
depth . depth
on the Right
tarp .photo
prior Right photo
showsto sampling.
placing
shows placing
soil on the
soiltarp
on theprior
tarpto prior
sampling.
to sampling.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
WSDOTWSDOT
Geotechnical
Geotechnical
Design Design Page
ManualManual 3-C-5 June 2006
June 2006
Page 3-18 Page 3-C-5 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
Page 3-C-5
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Figure 3-B-5
Photo of PP device in the
PPprocess of being
theassembled. The threaded coupling devices
The on the left side of the
FigureFigure
3C-5. 3C-5.
Photo
box are used of
Photo
PP of
to connectdevice device
in the in
process
the cone-shaped
process
tip toof
of being
being
lengths
assembled.
assembled.
forming the bodyThe threaded
of the
threaded
coupling
penetrometer.
coupling
The lengths
devicesdevices
theon
onforming the
leftthe leftofof
side
body side
theof
the boxtheare
box are
used
penetrometer toused
are to
connect
then connect to the cone-shaped
the cone-shaped
connected the section tipwhich
on tip
thetoweight
to lengths lengths
forming forming
slides. the the
body of the penetrometer. The lengths forming the body of the
body of the penetrometer. The lengths forming the body of the penetrometer are then connected penetrometer are then connected
to the to the section
section on which on which the weight
the weight slides.slides.
Figure 3-B-6
FigureFigure
3C-6. 3C-6.
Marking
Marking Marking
a base line aline
on the
a base baseonline
body theon
ofthe the of
body
the of
penetrometer.
body thewillpenetrometer.
This line up with
penetrometer. This
the will
This top will
ofline
the upline
test upInthe
hole.
with with the
top of the test
addition,
top of the test
alsohole. In
mark threeaddition,
also mark three 6 inch intervals, measured from this base line, toline, to
also mark
6 inch intervals, three
measured 6
from inch intervals,
this base measured
line, to track from
the downward this base
displacement
whenhole. In addition,
the falling weight is applied.
track
track the the downward
downward displacement
displacement when when the falling
the falling weightweight is applied.
is applied.
WSDOT WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical DesignDesign Manual
Manual June 2006
June 2006
Page 3-C-6
Page 3-C-6
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-19
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Figure 3-B-7
FigurePP3C-7.
testing inPP testingLathe
progress. in progress. Lathe
is used to mark is used
the surface to mark
of the theexcavation.
test hole surface Inofthis
theinstance,
test hole
one
Figure 3C-7.InPP
person
excavation. is
thistesting
steadying the in progress.
equipment,
instance, one person Lathe
another is is used tothe
lifting and
is steadying mark
dropping the the surface
35 lb
equipment, weight, of theistest
and
another a third is holeand
observing
lifting
downward displacement and counting blows.
excavation. In this instance, one person is steadying the equipment,
dropping the 35 lb weight, and a third is observing downward displacement and counting another is lifting and blows.
dropping the 35 lb weight, and a third is observing downward displacement and counting blows.
Figure 3-B-8
Figure 3C-8. This PP testing can be tiring. Photo shows another person providing relief for the
Figure 3C-8.
fallingThis ThiscanPP
PP testing
weight task. be testing canshows
tiring. Photo be tiring.
anotherPhoto
person shows
providinganother person
relief for the fallingproviding
weight task. relief for the
falling weight task.
Page 3-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
June 2021
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page 3-C-7 June 2006
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Appendix 3-C Field Investigation Best Management
Practices for Erosion and Spill Prevention
The Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) is dedicated to protecting
the environment when conducting field exploration projects. This memo outlines the
erosion/sediment control and spill prevention best management practices (BMPs) that will
be followed for all drilling activities.
The two distinct scenarios for drilling include pavement and vegetated areas. The variety
of erosion and sediment control BMPs may vary between the two scenarios, but the
philosophy of minimizing site disturbance, reducing waste materials, trapping sediment,
and stabilizing the site, remains the same.
Disturbance Minimizing BMPs:
• Select the smallest rig capable for the job
• Use elevated scaffolding for driller and assistant when necessary
Waste Reduction BMPs:
• Re-circulate drilling slurry
• Minimize volume of water for drilling
Sediment Trapping BMPs:
• Baffled mud tub (sealed with bentonite to prevent fluid loss)
• Polyacrylamide (PAM) for flocculation (must meet ANSI/NSF Standard 60)
• Silt fence (trenched, below drill, and on contour)
• Sand bag barrier (washed gravel, below drill, two rows high, and on contour)
• Straw bale barrier (trenched, staked, below drill, and on contour)
• Catch basin insert (pre-fabricated type, above or below grate)
• Storage of slurry in locked drums
Site Stabilization BMPs:
• Seed with pasture grass
• Straw mulch (2” maximum for seeded areas)
All BMPs will be installed and a thorough inspection for sensitive areas (wetlands,
streams, aquifer recharge, etc.) and stormwater conveyances will be conducted, prior to
starting drilling activities. At no time shall drilling slurry or cuttings be allowed to enter
Water Bodies of the State of Washington.
When sensitive resources or conveyances to these areas exist, all slurry and cuttings
will be stored in lockable drums and disposed of off-site. If not, the slurry will slowly be
infiltrated into the ground using surrounding vegetated areas and the cuttings will be
stored and disposed of off-site.
Removal of sediment control BMPs will be performed immediately after drilling is
completed. Place trapped sediment with cuttings in drums. If significant soil disturbance
occurs during drilling, the BMPs will be left in place until the site is stabilized with grass
or mulch.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-21
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
The drill crew will have a copy of the HPA, issued by WDFW on-site for all work adjacent
to or over water. The General HPAs are available on the HPA webpage (https://wsdot.
wa.gov/environment/technical/permits-approvals/hydraulic-project-approval). The
Supervisor will discuss the HPA permit provision requirements with the crew prior to each
project, which include BMPs to protect fish habitat, water quality, and riparian vegetation.
All of the provisions in each HPA will be strictly followed until the completion of said
project. The previously defined erosion/ sediment control philosophy and BMPs will be
implemented in these conditions
The approach to protecting surface and ground water is focused on prevention. The
drill shaft will be filled with bentonite clay to prevent mixing of aquifers and eliminating
the route for surface contaminants. In addition, the following Spill Prevention Control &
Countermeasures (SPCC) BMPs will be used when applicable:
Minimize Risk:
• Visually inspect equipment for leaks or worn hoses on a daily basis
• Fix equipment leaks as soon as possible to minimize cleanup
• Use proper equipment to transfer materials
• Reduce the overall volume of fuel and chemicals on site
• Remove as many sources of spills as possible from the site when not working
(evenings/weekends)
• Use environmentally-friendly chemicals whenever possible
• Store all chemicals with lids closed and keep containers under cover
• Have secondary containment devices underneath potential spill sources when
applicable (e.g. 5 gallon bucket)
Maximize Response:
• Each drilling operation will have at least one emergency spill response kit on site at
all times
• Know who to call in case of emergency spill
If an incidental spill (less than 1 gallon/small equipment leak) occurs, immediately collect
contaminated soil and store it in label storage drum. Do not mix soils with different
contaminants together. Report spill to your supervisor, as they are aware of reporting
requirements.
If a major spill (more than 1 gallon) to water occurs, control the source of the leak if
possible and contact the Washington State Emergency Management Division (800-258-
5990) and the National Response Center (800-424-8802). If a major spill to soil occurs
and there is immediate risk to human health and/or the environment, control the source
of the leak if possible and contact Ecology (800-407-7170). Then contact your supervisor,
as they are aware of reporting requirements.
Page 3-22 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Appendix 3-D Department of Natural Resources
Memorandum of Understanding: Drilling
Operations – State Owned Aquatic Lands
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-23
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Page 3-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-25
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Page 3-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-27
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Page 3-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Appendix 3-E Geotechnical Field Investigation and
Contaminated Drilling Waste Management
Procedures
Requirements for handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials encountered
during geotechnical drilling are provided at the following website: https://wsdot.wa.gov/
environment/technical/disciplines/hazardous-materials/investigation-sampling-document
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-29
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Appendix 3-F State Materials Laboratory Sample-
Handling Policy for Contaminated and
Potentially Contaminated Samples
On a project level, if any contaminated sites are brought to the attention of the (GPM),
he/she shall immediately notify and forward all contaminant information to the Structural
Materials Testing Engineer (SMTE) of the State Materials Laboratory (SML) and the Field
Exploration Manager (FEM). Similarly, if the FEM, FE Supervisor, or FE crew is made
aware of or suspects the presence of contaminants on a project, they shall immediately
notify the GPM and the SMTE. This information shall include the project number, project
name, location, boring (if applicable), and the types and scale of the contamination.
The SMTE shall pass this information to the SML geotechnical lab employees. Three
situations are anticipated with regard to contaminated or potentially contaminated
samples. The sample handling and disposal protocol applicable to the situation shall
be followed. These situations, and the protocols associated with those situations, are
described in the sections that follow.
Situation 1: Contaminated Soils Encountered in the Field
Soils (or rock) encountered in the field known or suspected to be contaminated shall
not be submitted to the lab for standard sample processing and testing. In the event
suspected or known contaminated soils/rock are encountered in the field, the following
protocol shall be followed:
1. The FE crew shall immediately stop drilling/sampling operations and call the FEM,
Supervisor and GPM for direction.
2. The FEM and/or GPM shall then contact the Environmental Services Office (ESO)
for direction.
3. Utilizing appropriate PPE, any samples suspected or known to be contaminated shall
be marked as contaminated and placed in the contaminated holding area or drum,
as directed by the ESO. Labeling should be in the form of a single (~4”) strip of black
and yellow striped tape and be placed on all samples (across the baggie, or over the
cap of a Shelby tube). All drill cuttings and fluids from the boring shall also be placed
in sealed drums. All samples from a suspected contaminated boring should be kept
together until they have been cleared for testing.
4. If the ESO determines that a suitable secure and offsite storage area is not available
or not necessary, they may direct the suspected/known contaminated materials
to be transported to the SML for disposal characterization. The FEM or GPM shall
then notify the SMTE that suspected/known contaminated samples are being
transported to the SML.
5. The FEM shall establish a secure area outside of the main SML building, where the
FE crew shall place the samples while they await disposal characterization by the
ESO. The FEM shall then notify the ESO of the receipt of samples and request their
direction on disposition.
Page 3-30 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
6. Once analytical test results have been obtained, the ESO will direct the soil/rock
samples and cuttings to be disposed of properly (protocols for what this entails
shall be provided by the ESO) or make them available for geotechnical testing if
contamination test(s) indicate they are suitable for geotechnical testing.
7. The samples shall not have geotechnical testing performed on them without being
cleared to be tested by the ESO and Safety Office. The ESO/Safety Office shall
determine the appropriate safety level for any subsequent testing/handling to be
performed by SML employees. It is understood that at this time, only soils/rock not
exceeding regulatory cleanup levels, and that have been cleared by the ESO Office,
shall be suitable for geotechnical testing to be performed at the SML. Samples not
cleared for testing at the SML should not enter the building.
8. Samples cleared for geotechnical testing by the ESO/Safety Office shall be labelled
with additional green tape prior to delivery to the SML, indicating that the samples
have been cleared for testing but extra precaution should be used. The black and
yellow tape shall remain on the samples.
Situation 2: Screened Samples - Known Contaminants Exist in a Boring, but Samples are
Screened in the Field and Deemed Safe for Geotechnical Testing
1. All samples from a contaminated boring should be kept together until they have
been cleared for testing.
2. Upon direction from the ESO, samples that have been retained at a secure offsite
location and confirmed to not exceed regulatory cleanup levels through analytical
testing may be transmitted to the SML for geotechnical testing. Prior to transmitting
the samples to the SML for geotechnical testing, the ESO shall notify the FEM,
who in turn will notify the GPM and SMTE, that the soil samples are marginally
contaminated and that they may be safely processed for geotechnical testing using
appropriate PPE.
3. All such contaminated samples shall be properly labeled before being taken to
the SML.
4. Labeling should be in the form of a single (~4”) strip of green tape placed on all
samples (across the baggie, core box, or over the cap of a Shelby tube), indicating
that the sample has been cleared for testing but extra precaution should be used.
5. All lab employees handling such marked samples shall use proper PPE and be at a
heightened awareness for the possibility of contaminants to exist in these samples.
6. PPE for marginally contaminated materials includes latex/rubber gloves, eye
protection, and other equipment or handling methods as deemed necessary by the
ESO (which will vary based on the types of contaminants encountered).
7. Once cleared samples have been tested by the SML Soils Lab, at the direction of the
GPM they may be disposed of in the same manner as non-contaminated soils.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-31
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Situation 3: Unexpected Contaminated Samples Discovered in the SML
If samples inadvertently make it to the SML that are suspected by lab personnel to be
contaminated, lab personnel shall immediately secure all samples from the entire boring in
an airtight container, label the container as having suspected contaminated samples, and
notify the SMTE and the FEM, who shall then contact the ESO for direction.
If any tests have been performed on a sample and contamination is suspected after the
fact, the SMTE and FEM should be notified immediately to determine how to proceed.
Any equipment that came into contact with the contaminated sample should be identified
and addressed (segregated, cleaned) according to ESO recommendations.
Detailing proper disposal for samples determined by ESO to be contaminated and not
suitable for geotechnical testing is deemed outside the scope of this protocol. The ESO
will convey the disposal requirements to the FEM or, in his absence, the FE Supervisors,
and the FE personnel shall follow those disposal procedures accordingly.
Page 3-32 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Field Investigation Chapter 3
Appendix 3-G WSDOT Well Tracking Database
Information to be Tracked
Table 3-G-1 Well Data to be Tracked.
Field Name Definition
WellTrackingDetail ID An auto incremented number that serves as the primary key for the
WellTrackingDetail table.
ECYRegionName Ecology Region Name
WSDOTRegionName The textual description of the geographic and administrative areas of
responsibility of the Washington State Department of Transportation
within the State of Washington as described in the Chart Of Accounts.
COUNTY The name of a political and administrative division of a state, providing
certain local governmental services. This name does not include the
word ‘County’.
ControlSectionNumber A code that identifies a location, either a Roadway Segment, state
owned facility or Ferry, established for the purpose of tracking project
costs with the location’s associated tax base.
TownshipNumber The numeric designation that identifies a unit of survey of the public
lands. Townships run north and south. In Washington Township
numbers range from 1 north in Clark and Skamania counties to 40
North across our northern border: 1N-41N
RangeNumber Ranges run east and west and Range numbers go from 16 West in
Clallam County to 45 East along the Idaho border: 1E-47E or 1W-16W
SectionNumber The full designation of a location based on the US Public Land Survey
System in the format of Township, Township Direction, Range, Range
Direction, Section. Each Township is divided into a grid of 36 sections.
Each section is approximately 1 mile square. About 5% of the townships
use section numbers greater than 36 (37-50).
SectionQuarter Each section is divided into four 1/4 sections. They are defined by their
quadrant name.
NW - Northwest quadrant
NE - the Northeast quadrant
SW - the Southwest quadrant
SE - the Southeast quadrant.
SectionQuarterQuarter Each Quarter is divided into four 40-acre parts called a Quarter-
Quarter. They are defined by their quadrant name. NW is for the
Northwest quadrant of the Northwest quadrant, NE for the Northeast
quadrant of the Northeast quadrant, SW for the Southwest quadrant
of the Southwest quadrant, and SE for the Southeast quadrant of the
Southeast quadrant.
DrillerFirstName The first name of a WA State licensed well operator
DrillerLastName The last name of a WA State licensed well operator
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14 Page 3-33
June 2021
Chapter 3 Field Investigation
Table 3-G-1 Well Data to be Tracked.
Field Name Definition
DrillerLicenseNumber Alfa numeric License number driller is required to be licensed with the
Washington state Department of Ecology to provide well construction
DecommissionCardNumber Decommission Card Number - NOI number for a well decommission
DecommissionLicenseNumber Alfa numeric License number driller is required to be licensed with the
Washington state Department of Ecology to provide well decomission
WorkOrderNumber The number that identifies the central collection point or cost center
for managing costs associated with projects.
It identifies a written order authorizing work to be performed on
a Work Item Phase. It is the first 6 characters of the Job Number.
WorkOrderDescription The title of the Work Order authorizing work to be accomplished on the
Work Item. This field is reporting from TRAINS and cannot be modified
in CPMS.
Phase Phase
Group Group
StateRouteNumber The Number assigned to the State Route and enacted into law
Page 3-34 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.14
June 2021
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4 .1 Overview
The detailed description and classification of soil and rock are an essential part of the
geologic interpretation process and the geotechnical information developed to support
design and construction. The description and classification of soil and rock includes
consideration of the physical characteristics and engineering properties of the material.
The soil and rock descriptions that are contained on the field logs should be based on
factual information. Interpretive information should not be included on the field logs,
but provided elsewhere, such as in the text of geological, and geotechnical reports.
This chapter provides standards for describing and logging soil and rock.
The Unified Soil Classification System, as outlined in ASTM 2488 – “Standard
Practices for Description of Soils (Visual – Manual Procedure)”, provides a
conventional system for classifying soils. However, it alone does not provide adequate
descriptive terminology and criteria for identifying soils for engineering purposes.
Therefore, the ASTM Standard has been modified to account for these additional
descriptive terms and criteria. It is not intended to replace the standard but to improve
upon it, and make it better understood.
There are numerous rock classification systems, but none of these is universally used.
This chapter provides a composite of those classification systems that incorporates the
significant descriptive terminology relevant to geotechnical design and construction.
An important facet of soil and rock classification is the determination of what
constitutes “rock”, as opposed to extremely weathered, partially cemented, or altered
material that approaches soil in its character and engineering characteristics. Extremely
soft or decomposed rock that is friable (easily crumbled), and can be reduced to gravel
size or smaller by normal hand pressure, should be classified as a soil.
4.2 Soil Classification
Soil classification, for engineering purposes, is based on the distribution and behavior
of the fine-grained and coarse-grained soil constituents. Soil descriptions that are
contained on the field exploration logs are based on modified procedures as outlined
in ASTM 2488. The visual - manual procedure provided in this standard utilizes
visual observation and simple field index tests to identify the characteristics of the soil
constituents. Definitions for the various soil constituents can be found in Table 4-1.
In addition, soil properties that address angularity, consistency/relative density, color,
moisture, structure, etc. have been defined.
Soils are divided into four broad categories. These soil categories are coarse-grained
soils, fine-grained inorganic soils, organic soils, and peat. The first step in identifying
soil is to make a determination regarding which of the four broad categories the soil
belongs. The definitions for these broad categories are as follows:
• Coarse Grained Soils: Soils that contain 50 % or less of soil particles passing a
0.0030 in. (0.075 mm) opening.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-1
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
• Fine Grained Inorganic Soils: Soils that contain more than 50 % of soil particles
passing a 0.0030 in. (0.075 mm) opening.
• Fine Grained Organic Soils: Soils that contain enough organic particles to influence
the soil properties.
• Peat: Soils that are composed primarily of vegetative tissue in various stages
of decomposition that has a fibrous to amorphous texture, usually dark brown
to black, and an organic odor are designated as a highly organic soil called peat.
Once a soil has been identified as a peat (group symbol PT), the soil should not
be subjected to any further identification procedures.
Soil
Description
Constituent
Boulder Particles of rock that will not pass through a 12 in. opening.
Particles of rock that will pass through a 12 in. opening, but will not pass
Cobble
through a 3 in. opening.
Particles of rock that will pass through a 3 in. opening, but will not pass a
Gravel
0.19 in. (4.75 mm) opening.
Particles of rock that will pass through a 0.19 in. (4.75 mm) opening, but
Sand
will not pass a 0.003 in. (0.075 mm) opening.
Soil that will pass through a 0.003 in. (0.075 mm) opening that is non-
Silt plastic or very slightly plastic and exhibits little or no strength when
air-dried.
Soil that will pass through a 0.003 in. (0.075 mm) opening that can be
Clay made to exhibit plasticity (putty-like properties) within a range of water
contents, and exhibits considerable strength when air-dried.
Soil that contains enough organic particles to influence the soil
Organic Soil
properties.
Soil that is composed primarily of vegetable tissue in various stages of
Peat decomposition usually with an organic odor, a dark brown to black color,
a spongy consistency, and a texture ranging from fibrous to amorphous.
Soil Constituent Definition
Table 4-1
4.2.1 Coarse Grained Soils
Coarse grained soils are classified as either a gravel or a sand, depending on whether
or not the percentage of the coarse grains are larger or smaller than a 0.19 in. (4.75
mm) opening. A soil is defined as a gravel when the estimated percentage of the gravel
size particles is greater than the sand size particles. A soil is defined as a sand when the
estimated percentage of the sand size particles are greater than the gravel size particles.
If the soil is classified as a gravel, it is then identified as either clean or dirty. Dirty
means that the gravel contains an appreciable (greater than 10 %) amount of material
that passes a 0.003 in. (0.075 mm) opening (fines), and clean means that the gravel
is essentially free of fines (less than 10 %). The use of the terms clean and dirty are
for distinction purposes only and should not be utilized in the description contained
on the field log.
Page 4-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
If the gravel is clean then gradation criteria apply, and the gravel is classified as either
well graded (GW) or poorly graded (GP). Well graded is defined as a soil that has a
wide range of particle sizes and a substantial amount of the intermediate particle sizes.
Poorly graded is defined as a soil that consists predominately of one particle size
(uniformly graded), or has a wide range of particle sizes with some sizes obviously
missing (gap graded). Once the grading determination has been made, the classification
can be further refined by estimating the percentage of the sand size particles present
in the sample.
If the gravel is dirty then it will be important to determine whether the fines are either
silt or clay. If the fines are determined to be silt then the gravel will be classified
as a silty gravel (GM). If the fines are determined to be clay then the gravel will
be classified as a clayey gravel (GC). Once the determination has been made whether
the fines are silt or clay, the classification can be further refined by estimating the
percentage of sand size particles present in the sample.
If the soil is classified as a sand, the same criteria that were applied to gravels are
used - clean or dirty. If the sand is clean, the gradation a criterion is examined
in terms of well-graded sand (SW) versus poorly graded sand (SP). Once the grading
determination has been made, the classification can be further refined by estimating the
percentage of gravel size particles present in the sample. If the sand is dirty, then it will
be important to determine whether the fines are silt or clay. If the fines are determined
to be silt, then the sand will be classified as a silty sand (SM); conversely, if the fines
are determined to be clay, then the sand will be classified as a clayey sand (SC). Once
the determination has been made whether the fines are silt or clay the classification can
be further refined by estimating the percentage of gravel size particles present in the
sample. Table 4-2 should be used when identifying coarse grained soils.
The coarse-grained soil classification as outlined in Table 4-2 does not take into
account the presence of cobbles and boulders within the soil mass. When cobbles and/
or boulders are detected, either visually within a test pit or as indicated by drilling
action/core recovery, they should be reported on the field logs after the main soil
description. The descriptor to be used should be as follows:
with cobbles - when only cobbles are present
with boulders - when only boulders are present
with cobbles and boulders - when both cobbles and boulders are present
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-3
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
Group
Fines Grading Silt or Clay Sand or Gravel Description
Symbol
<10% Well Graded GW < 15% Sand Well graded GRAVEL
< 10% Well Graded GW ≥ 15% Sand Well graded GRAVEL with sand
< 10% Poorly Graded GP < 15% Sand Poorly graded GRAVEL
< 10% Poorly Graded GP ≥ 15% Sand Poorly graded GRAVEL with sand
Gravel
> 10% Silt GM < 15% Sand Silty GRAVEL
> 10% Silt GM ≥ 15% Sand Silty GRAVEL with sand
> 10% Clay GP < 15% Sand Clayey GRAVEL
> 10% Clay GP ≥ 15% Sand Clayey GRAVEL with sand
< 10% Well Graded SW < 15% Gravel Well graded SAND
< 10% Well Graded SW ≥ 15% Gravel Well graded SAND with gravel
< 10% Poorly Graded SP < 15% Gravel Poorly graded SAND
< 10% Poorly Graded SP ≥ 15% Gravel Poorly graded SAND with gravel
Sand
> 10% Silt SM < 15% Gravel Silty SAND
> 10% Silt SM ≥ 15% Gravel Silty SAND with gravel
> 10% Clay SC < 15% Gravel Clayey SAND
> 10% Clay SC ≥ 15% Gravel Clayey SAND with gravel
Field Description of Coarse Grained Soil Classification
Table 4-2
4.2.2 Fine-Grained Inorganic Soils
Fine-grained inorganic soils are classified into four basic groups based on physical
characteristics of dry strength, dilatancy, toughness, and plasticity. These physical
characteristics are summarized in Table 4-3. The index tests used to determine these
physical characteristics are described in ASTM 2488. Soils that appear to be similar
can be grouped together. To accomplish this, one sample is completely described,
and the other samples in the group are identified as similar to the completely
described sample.
When describing and identifying similar soil samples, it is generally not necessary
to follow all of the procedures for index testing as outlined in ASTM 2488 for
those samples.
Soil Group Dry Strength Dilantancy Toughness Plasticity
Silt (ML) None to Low Slow to Rapid Low Non-plastic
Elastic Silt (MH) Low to Medium None to Slow Low to Medium Low to Medium
Lean Clay (CL) Medium to High None to Slow Medium Medium
High to
Fat Clay (CH) None High High
Very High
Field Identification of Fine Grained Inorganic Soils
Table 4-3
Page 4-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
Once the major soil group has been determined, fine grained inorganic soils can
be further described by estimating the percentages of fines, sand and gravel contained
in the field sample. Tables 4-4 through 4-7 should be used in describing fine-grained
inorganic soils.
4.2.3 Organic Fine Grained Soils
If the soil contains enough organic particles to influence the soil properties, it should be
identified as an organic fine-grained soil. Organic soils (OL/OH) usually have a dark
brown to black color and may have an organic odor. Often, organic soils will change
colors, for example black to brown, when exposed to the air. Organic soils will not
have a high toughness or plasticity. The thread for the toughness test will be spongy.
It will be difficult to differentiate between an organic silt and an organic clay. Once
it has been determined that the soil is a organic fine grained soil, the soil can be further
described by estimating the percentage of fines, sand, and gravel in the field sample.
Table 4-8 should be used in describing an organic fine-grained soil.
Fines Coarseness Sand or Gravel Description
> 70% < 15% Plus 0.075 mm SILT
> 70% 15 to 25 % Plus 0.075 mm % Sand > % Gravel SILT with Sand
> 70 % 15 to 25 % Plus 0.075 mm % Sand < % Gravel SILT with Gravel
< 70% % Sand > % Gravel < 15 % Gravel Sandy SILT
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel > 15% Gravel Sandy SILT with gravel
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel < 15 % Sand Gravelly SILT
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel > 15 % Sand Gravelly SILT with Sand
Field Descriptions of Silt Group (ML) Soils
Table 4-4
Fines Coarseness Sand or Gravel Description
< 15 % Plus
> 70 % Elastic SILT
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand > % Gravel Elastic SILT with Sand
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand < % Gravel Elastic SILT with Gravel
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel < 15 % Gravel Sandy Elastic SILT
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel > 15 % Gravel Sandy Elastic SILT with Gravel
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel < 15 % Sand Gravelly Elastic SILT
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel > 15 % Sand Gravelly Elastic SILT with Sand
Field Descriptions of Elastic Silt (MH) Group Soils
Table 4-5
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-5
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
Fines Coarseness Sand or Gravel Description
< 15 % Plus
> 70 % Lean CLAY
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand > % Gravel Lean CLAY with Sand
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand < % Gravel Lean CLAY with Gravel
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel < 15 % Gravel Sandy Lean CLAY
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel > 15 % Gravel Sandy Lean CLAY with Gravel
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel < 15 % Sand Gravelly Lean CLAY
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel > 15 % Sand Gravelly Lean CLAY with Sand
Field Descriptions of Lean Clay Group (CL) Soils
Table 4-6
Fines Coarseness Sand or Gravel Description
> 70 % < 15 % Plus 0.003 in. (0.075 mm) Fat CLAY
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand > % Gravel Fat CLAY with Sand
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand < % Gravel Fat CLAY with Gravel
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel < 15 % Gravel Sandy Fat CLAY
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel > 15 % Gravel Sandy Fat CLAY with Gravel
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel < 15 % Sand Gravelly Fat CLAY
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel > 15 % Sand Gravelly Fat CLAY with Sand
Field Description of Fat Clay Group (CH) Soils
Table 4-7
Fines Coarseness Sand or Gravel Description
< 15 % Plus
> 70 % ORGANIC SOIL
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand > % Gravel ORGANIC SOIL with Sand
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
15 to 25 % Plus
> 70 % % Sand < % Gravel ORGANIC SOIL with Gravel
0.003 in. (0.075 mm)
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel < 15 % Gravel Sandy ORGANIC SOIL
Sandy ORGANIC SOIL with
< 70 % % Sand > % Gravel > 15 % Gravel
Gravel
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel < 15 % Sand Gravelly ORGANIC SOIL
Gravelly ORGANIC SOIL with
< 70 % % Sand < % Gravel > 15 % Sand
Sand
Field Description of Organic Fine Grained Soil (OL/OH) Group
Table 4-8
Page 4-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4.2.4 Angularity
The field description of angularity of the coarse size particles of a soil (gravel, cobbles
and sand) should conform to the criteria as outlined in Table 4-9.
Description Criteria
Coarse grained particles have sharp edges and relatively plane sides with
Angular
unpolished surfaces
Coarse grained particles are similar to angular description but have rounded
Subangular
edges
Coarse grained particles have nearly plane sides but have well rounded
Subrounded
corners and edges
Rounded Coarse grained particles have smoothly curved sides and no edges
Criteria for the Field Description of Angularity
Table 4-9
4.2.5 Consistency and Relative Density
An important index property of cohesive (plastic) soils is its consistency, and
is expressed by terms such as very soft, soft, medium stiff, stiff, very stiff, hard,
and very hard. Similarly, a significant index property of cohesionless (non-plastic)
soils is its relative density, which is expressed by terms such as very loose, loose,
medium dense, dense, and very dense. The standard penetration test (ASTM 1586)
is an in-situ field test that is widely used to define cohesive soil consistency, and
cohesionless soil density. Tables 4-10 and 4-11 should be used to describe consistency,
or relative density.
SPT N SPT N
Consistency Relative Density
(Blows/Foot) (Blows/Foot)
0 to 1 Very Soft 0 to 4 Very Loose
2 to 4 Soft 5 to 10 Loose
5 to 8 Medium Stiff 11 to 24 Medium Dense
9 to 15 Stiff 25 to 50 Dense
16 to 30 Very Stiff Over 50 Very Dense
31 to 60 Hard
Relative Density of
Over 60 Very Hard Cohesionless Soils
Table 4-11
Consistency of Cohesive Soils
Table 4-10
4.2.6 Color
Soil color is not in itself a specific engineering property, but may be an indicator of
other significant geologic processes that may be occurring within the soil mass. Color
may also aid in the subsurface correlation of soil units. Soil color should be determined
in the field at their natural moisture content. The predominant color of the soil should
be based on the Munsell Soil Color Charts.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-7
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
4.2.7 Moisture
A visual estimation of the relative moisture content of the soil should be made during
the field classification. The field moisture content of the soil should be based on the
criteria outlined in Table 4-12.
Moisture Description Criteria
Dry Absence of moisture; dusty, dry to the touch
Moist Damp but no visible water
Wet Visible free water
Criteria for Describing Moisture Condition
Table 4-12
4.2.8 Structure
Soils often contain depositional or physical features that are referred to as soil
structure. These features should be described following the criteria as outlined in
Table 4-13.
Description Criteria
Alternating layers of varying material or color with layers at least 0.25 in.
Stratified
thick; note thickness and inclination.
Alternating layers of varying material or color with layers less than 0.25 in.
Laminated
thick; note thickness and inclination
Fissured Breaks along definite planes of fracture with little resistance to fracturing.
Slickensided Fracture planes appear polished or glossy, sometimes striated.
Cohesive soil that can be broken down into smaller angular lumps which
Blocky
resists further breakdown.
Soil structure is broken and mixed. Infers that material has moved
Disrupted
substantially - landslide debris.
Homogeneous Same color and appearance throughout.
Criteria for Describing Soil Structure
Table 4-13
4.2.9 HCl Reaction
Calcium carbonate is a common cementing agent in soils. To test for the presence
of this cementing agent the soil sample should be tested with dilute hydrochloric acid
(HCL). The reaction of the soil sample with HCL should be reported in accordance
with the criteria outlined in Table 4-14.
HCL Reaction Description Criteria
No HCL Reaction No visible reaction
Weak HCL Reaction Some reaction with bubbles forming slowly
Strong HCL Reaction Violent reaction with bubbles forming immediately
Soil Reaction to Hydrochloric Acid
Table 4-14
Page 4-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4.2.10 Test Hole Logging
The protocol for field logging the test hole is to describe the soil properties in the
following order:
Soil Description ⇒ Angularity ⇒ Density ⇒ Color ⇒ Moisture ⇒ Structure ⇒ HCL Reaction
Some examples of this field logging protocol are as follows:
• Well graded Gravel, with cobbles and boulders, sub-rounded, very dense, light
brown, wet, homogeneous, no HCL reaction.
• Sandy SILT, medium dense, light gray, moist, laminated, no HCL reaction
• Fat CLAY with sand, medium stiff, dark gray, wet, blocky, no HCL reaction
4.3 Rock Classification
Rock classification for engineering purposes consists of two basic assessments;
one based on the intact properties of the rock, and the other based on the in situ
(engineering) features of the rock mass.
• Intact properties – This assessment is based on the character of the intact rock
(hand specimens and rock core) in terms of its genetic origin, mineralogical make-
up, texture, and degree of chemical alteration and/or physical weathering.
• In situ properties – This assessment is based on the engineering characteristics
(orientation, spacing, etc.) of the bounding discontinuities (bedding, joints,
foliation planes, shear zones, faults etc.) within the rockmass.
Both assessments are essential engineering characterization of the rock mass, and
are the basis for rock slope design and excavation, foundation design on rock, rock
anchorage, and characterizing rock quarries.
4.3.1 Intact Properties
Rocks are divided into three general categories based on genetic origin. These
categories are igneous rocks, sedimentary rocks, and metamorphic rocks.
4.3.1.1 Igneous Rocks
Igneous rocks are those rocks that have been formed by the solidification of molten
or partially molten material. Typically, they are classified based on mineralogy and
genetic occurrence (intrusive or extrusive). See Table 4-15 for examples. Texture is the
most conspicuous feature (key indicator) of genetic origin (see Table 4-16).
In general, coarser grained igneous rocks are intrusive having been formed (solidified)
before the molten material has reached the surface; while the finer grained igneous
rocks are extrusive and have formed (solidified) after the molten material has reached
the surface. Although this generality is true in most cases, it must be stressed that there
is no clear line between the two.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-9
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
A special, but common, class of igneous rock is pyroclastic rocks (See Table 4-17).
These rocks have been derived from volcanic material that has been explosively or
aerially ejected from a volcanic vent.
Intrusive Common Accessory Extrusive
Primary Minerals
(Coarse-grained) Minerals (Fine Grained)
Plagioclase, Mica,
Granite Quartz, K-feldspar Rhyolite
Amphibole, Pyroxene
Hornblende,
Quartz Diorite Quartz Plagioclase Dacite
Pyroxene, Mica
Mica, Amphibole,
Diorite Plagioclase Andesite
Pyroxene
Gabbro Plagioclase, Pyroxene Amphibole Basalt
Common Igneous Rocks
Table 4-15
Texture Grain Size Genetic Origin
Pegmatitic Very large; diameters greater than 0.8 in. Intrusive
Phaneritic Can be seen with the naked eye Intrusive or Extrusive
Porphyritic Grained of two widely different sizes Intrusive or Extrusive
Aphanitic Cannot be seen with the naked eye Extrusive or Intrusive
Glassy No grains present Extrusive
Igneous Rock Textures
Table 4-16
Table 4-16 should be used only as an aid in determining the possible genetic origin
(intrusive versus extrusive) of the igneous rock. For grain size determination and
descriptors use Table 4-23.
Rock Name Characteristics
Pyroclastic Pyroclastic rock whose average pyroclast size exceeds 2.5 inches and
Breccia in which angular pyroclasts predominate.
Pyroclastic rock whose average pyroclast size exceeds 2.5 inches and
Agglomerate
in which rounded pyroclasts predominate.
Lapilli Tuff Pyroclastic rock whose average pyroclast size is 0.08 to 2.5 inches.
Ash Tuff Pyroclastic rock whose average pyroclast size is less than 0.08 inches.
Pryoclastic Rocks
Table 4-17
Page 4-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
Some extrusive volcanic rocks contain small sub-rounded to rounded cavities
(vesicles) formed by the expansion of gas or steam during the solidification process
of the rock. The occurrence of these vesicles are to be reported using an estimate of
the relative area that the vesicles occupy in relationship to the total area of the sample
and the designation as outlined in Table 4-18.
Designation Percentage (by volume) of Total Sample
Slightly Vesicular 5 to 10 Percent
Moderately Vesicular 10 to 25 Percent
Highly Vesicular 25 to 50 Percent
Scoriaceous Greater than 50 Percent
Degree of Vesicularity
Table 4-18
4.3.1.2 Sedimentary Rocks
Sedimentary rocks are formed from preexisting rocks. They are formed by the
deposition and lithification of sediments such as gravels, sands, silts, and clays;
or rocks formed by the chemical precipitation from solutions (rock salt), or from
secretion of organisms (limestone). As indicated above sedimentary rocks are
classified based on whether they are derived from clastic sediments or from chemical
precipitates/ organisms. See Tables 4-19 and 4-20 for their classification.
Rock Name Original Sediment
Conglomerate Sand, Gravel, Cobbles, and Boulders
Sandstone Sand
Siltstone Silt
Claystone Clay
Shale Laminated Clay and Silt
Clastic Sedimentary Rocks
Table 4-19
Rock Name Primary Mineral
Limestone Calcite
Dolomite Dolomite
Chert Quartz
Non-Clastic Sedimentary Rocks
Table 4-20
4.3.1.3 Metamorphic Rocks
Metamorphic rocks are those rocks that have been formed from pre-existing rocks
when mineral in the rocks have been re-crystallized to form new minerals in response
to changes in temperature and/or pressure. Metamorphic rocks are classified based
on two general categories; foliated and non-foliated metamorphic rocks. Foliated
metamorphic rocks contain laminated structure resulting from the segregation
of different minerals into layers parallel to schistosity. Non-foliated metamorphic rocks
are generally re-crystallized and equigranular.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-11
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
Rock Name Texture Formed From Primary Minerals
Slate Platy, fine grained Shale, Claystone Quartz, Mica
Platy, fine grained Shale, Claystone, Fine Quartz, Mica
Phyllite
with silky sheen grained pyroclastic
Medium grained, Sedimentary and Mica, Quartz, Feldspar,
Schist
with irregular layers Igneous Rocks Amphibole
Layered, medium Sedimentary and Mica, Quartz, Feldspar,
Gneiss
to coarse grained Igneous Rocks Amphibole
Foliated Metamorphic Rocks
Table 4-21
Rock Name Texture Formed From Primary Minerals
Greenstone Crystalline Volcanics, Intermediate - Mica, Hornblende,
Mafic Igneous Epidote
Marble Crystalline Limestone, Calcite, Dolomite
Dolomite
Quartzite Crystalline Sandstone, Chert Quartz
Amphibolite Crystalline Mafic Igneous, Calcium - Hornblende, Plagioclase
Iron Bearing Sediments
Non-Foliated Metamorphic Rocks
Table 4-22
4.3.1.4 Rock Color
Rock color is not in itself a specific engineering property, but may be an indicator
of the influence of other significant geologic processes that may be occurring in the
rock mass (e.g. fracture flow of water, weathering, alteration, etc.). Color may also
aid in the subsurface correlation of rock units. The color of the rock is based on the
Geological Society of America Rock Color Charts. Rock color should be determined
as soon as the core has been recovered from the test hole.
4.3.1.5 Grain Size
Grain size is defined as the size of the particles or mineral crystals that make up the
intact portion of the rockmass. The description of grain size should follow the criteria
as set forth in Table 4-23.
Grain Size Description Criteria
Less than Few crystal boundaries/ grains distinguishable in the
Fine grained
0.04 inches field or with a hand lens.
0.04 to Most crystal boundaries/ grains distinguishable with the
Medium grained
0.2 inches aid of a hand lens.
Greater than Most crystal boundaries/ grains distinguishable with the
Coarse grained
0.2 inches naked eye.
Grain Size
Table 4-23
Page 4-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4.3.1.6 Weathered State of Rock
Weathering is the process of mechanical and/or chemical degradation of the rock
mass through exposure to the elements (e.g. rain, wind, ground water, ice, change
in temperature etc.). In general, the strength of the rock tends to decrease as the degree
of weathering increases. In the earliest stages of weathering only discoloration and
slight change in texture occur. As the weathering of the rock advances significant
changes occur in the physical properties of the rock mass, until ultimately the rock
is decomposed to soil.
The classification of the weathered state of the rock mass is based on six
weathering classes (See Table 4-24) developed by the International Society
of Rock Mechanics (ISRM).
Term Description Grade
Fresh No visible signs of rock material weathering; perhaps slight I
discoloration in major discontinuity surfaces.
Slightly Discoloration indicates weathering of rock material and discontinuity II
Weathered surfaces. All the rock material may be discolored by weathering, and
may be somewhat weaker externally than in its fresh condition.
Moderately Less than half of the rock material is decomposed and/or III
Weathered disintegrated to soil. Fresh or discolored rock is present either as a
continuous framework or as corestones.
Highly More than half of the rock material is decomposed and/or IV
Weathered disintegrated to soil. Fresh or discolored rock is present either as
discontinuous framework or as corestone.
Completely All rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated to soil. The V
Weathered original mass structure is still largely intact.
Residual All rock material is converted to soil. The mass structure and VI
Soil material fabric is destroyed. There is a large change in volume, but
the soil has not been significantly transported.
Weathered State of Rock
Table 4-24
Alteration is the process that applies specifically to the changes in the chemical
or mineral composition of the rock due to hydrothermal or metamorphic activities.
Alteration may occur in zones or pockets, and can be found at depths far below that
of normal weathering. Alteration does not strictly infer that there is a degradation of the
rockmass or an associated loss in strength.
Where there has been a degradation of the rockmass due to alteration, Table 4-24 may
be used to describe the alteration by simply substituting the word “altered” for the
word “weathered” for Grade II through Grade V.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-13
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
4.3.1.6 Relative Rock Strength
Rock strength is controlled by many factors including degree of induration,
cementation, crystal bonding, degree of weathering or alteration, etc. Determination
of relative rock strength can be estimated by simple field tests, which can be refined,
if required, through laboratory testing. The relative rock strength should be determined
based on the ISRM method outlined in Table 4-25. Due to the potential for variable
rock conditions, multiple relative strength designations may be required for each
core run.
Uniaxial
Grade Description Field Identification Compressive
Strength (Approx)
Extremely
R0 Indented by thumbnail 0.04 to 0.15 ksi
Weak Rock
Specimen crumbles under sharp blow with
Very Weak
R1 point of geological hammer, and can be cut 0.15 to 3.6 ksi
Rock
with a pocket knife.
Moderately Shallow cuts or scrapes can be made in a
R2 specimen with a pocket knife. Geological 3.6 to 7.3 ksi
Weak Rock hammer point indents deeply with firm blow.
Specimen cannot be scraped or cut with a
Moderately
R3 pocket knife, shallow indentation can be made 7.3 to 15 ksi
Strong Rock
under firm blows from a hammer point.
Specimen breaks with one firm blow from the
R4 Strong Rock 15 to 29 ksi
hammer end of a geological hammer.
Very Strong Specimen requires many blows of a geological
R5 Greater than 29 ksi
Rock hammer to break intact sample.
Relative Rock Strength
Table 4-25
4.3.1.7 Slaking
Slaking is defined as the disintegration of a rock under conditions of wetting and
drying, or when exposed to air. This behavior is related primarily to the chemical
composition of the rock. It can be identified in the field if samples shrink and
crack, or otherwise degrade upon drying, or being exposed to air for several hours.
If degradation of the rock sample occurs, and slaking is suspected; an air-dried sample
may be placed in clean water to observe a reaction. The greater the tendency for
slaking, the more rapid the reaction will be when immersed in water. This tendency
should be expressed on the field logs as “potential for slaking”, and can be confirmed
through laboratory testing.
Page 4-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4.3.2 In Situ Properties
The in-situ properties of a rock mass are based on the engineering properties of the
bounding structure within the rockmass. Structure refers to large-scale (megascopic)
planar features which separate intact rock blocks, and impact the overall strength,
permeability, and breakage characteristics of the rock mass. Common planar
features within the rockmass include joints, bedding, and faults; collectively called
discontinuities. These common planar features are defined as follows:
Joints – Joints are fractures within the rockmass along which there has
been no identifiable displacement.
Bedding – Bedding is the regular layering in sedimentary rocks marking the
boundaries of small lithological units or beds.
Faults – Faults are fractures or fracture zones within the rockmass along which
there has been significant shear displacement of the sides relative to each other. The
presence of gouge and/ or slickensides may be indicators of movement.
When defining the in-situ properties of these planar features (discontinuities) within the
rockmass, the recovered rock core from the borehole is examined, and the following
information recorded:
• Discontinuity Spacing
• Discontinuity Condition
• Core Recovery
• Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
• Fractures Frequency (FF)
• Voids
4.3.2.1 Discontinuity Spacing
Discontinuity spacing is the distance between natural discontinuities as measured
along the borehole. An evaluation of discontinuity spacing within each core run should
be made, and reported on the field logs in conformance with the criteria set forth
in Table 4-26. Mechanical breaks caused by drilling or handling should not be included
in the discontinuity spacing evaluation.
Description Spacing of Discontinuity
Very Widely Spaced Greater than 10 feet
Widely Spaced 3 feet to 10 feet
Moderately Spaced 1 feet to 3 feet
Closely Spaced 2 inches to 12 inches
Very Closely Spaced Less than 2 inches
Discontinuity Spacing
Table 4-26
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-15
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
4.3.2.2 Discontinuity Condition
The surface properties of discontinuities, in terms of roughness, wall hardness, and /
or gouge thickness, affects the shear strength of the discontinuity. An assessment of
the discontinuities within each core run should be made, and reported on the field logs
in conformance with the descriptions and conditions set forth in Table 4-27.
Condition Description
Excellent Condition Very rough surfaces, no separation, hard discontinuity wall.
Slightly rough surfaces, separation less than 0.05 inches, hard
Good Condition
discontinuity wall.
Slightly rough surface, separation greater than 0.05 inches, soft
Fair Condition
discontinuity wall.
Slickensided surfaces, or soft gouge less than 0.2 inches thick, or
Poor Condition
open discontinuities 0.05 to 0.2 inches.
Soft gouge greater than 0.2 inches, or open discontinuities greater
Very Poor Condition
than 0.2 inches.
Discontinuity Condition
Table 4-27
4.3.2.3 Core Recovery (CR)
Core recovery is defined as the ratio of core recovered to the run length expressed
as a percentage. Therefore:
Core Recovery (%) = 100 × Length of Core Recovered
Length of Core Run
These values should be recorded on the field logs on a core run by core run basis.
4.3.2.4 Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
The RQD provides a subjective estimate of rock mass quality based on a modified
core recovery percentage from a double or triple tube diamond core barrel. The RQD
is defined as the percentage of rock core recovered in intact pieces of 4 inches or more
in length in the length of a core run, generally 6 feet in length. Therefore:
RQD (%) = 100 × Length of Core in pieces > 4 inches
Length of Core Barrel
Mechanical breaks caused by drilling or handling should not be included in the RQD
calculation. Vertical fractures in the core should not be utilized in the RQD calculation.
4.3.2.5 Fracture Frequency (FF)
Fracture frequency is defined as the number of natural fractures per unit of length
of core recovered. The fracture frequency is measured for each core run, and recorded
on the field logs as fractures per foot. Mechanical breaks caused by drilling or handling
should not be included in the fracture frequency count. In addition, vertical fractures
in the core should not be utilized in the fracture frequency determination.
Page 4-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 4 Soil and Rock Classification and Logging
4.3.2.6 Voids
Voids are defined as relatively large open spaces within the rockmass caused
by chemical dissolution or the action of subterranean water within the rockmass.
In addition, voids can be a result of subsurface mining activities. Voids, when
encountered, should be recorded on the field logs. Attempts should be made
to determine the size of the void by drilling action, water loss, etc.
4.3.3 Test Hole Logging
The protocol for field logging the test hole is to first describe the intact properties if the
rockmass followed by the description of the in-situ properties:
[Intact Properties] Rock Name ⇒ Rock Color ⇒ Grain Size ⇒ Weathered
State ⇒ Relative Rock Strength. then [ In-situ Properties] Discontinuity
Spacing ⇒ Discontinuity Condition ⇒ Core Recovery ⇒ RQD ⇒ Fracture
Frequency.
Some examples of this field logging protocol are as follows:
Diorite, medium light grey (N6), medium grained, slightly weathered, moderately
strong rock (R3). [Intact Properties] Discontinuities are widely spaced, and in fair
condition. CR = 100%, RQD = 80%, FF = 2. [In-situ Properties]
Basalt, highly vesicular, dark grey (N3), very fined grained, slightly weathered,
fresh, strong rock (R4). [Intact Properties] Discontinuities are closely spaced, and
in poor condition. CR = 65%, RQD = 40%, FF = 20. [In-situ Properties]
SILTSTONE, medium dark grey (N4), very fine grained, slightly weathered, very
weak rock (R1), potential for slaking. [Intact Properties] Discontinuities are
widely spaced, and in fair condition. CR = 100%, RQD = 100%, FF = 1. [In-situ
Properties]
The standard legend for WSDOT boring logs is provided in Appendix 4-A.
4 .4 References
Munsell Soil Color Charts, 2000, GretagMacbeth, New Windsor, NY.
Geological Society of America, 1991, Rock Color Charts, Boulder, CO.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-17
October 2013
Soil and Rock Classification and Logging Chapter 4
Page 4-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 4-A Test Boring Legend
Washington State
Department of Transportation
Boring and Test Pit Legend Page 1 of 2
Sampler Symbols Soil Density Modifiers
Standard Penetration Test Gravel, Sand & Non-plastic Silt Elastic Silts and Clay
Non-Standard Sized SPT SPT
Blows/ft Density Blows/ft Consistency
Penetration Test
0-4 Very Loose 0-1 Very Soft
Shelby Tube 5-10 Loose 2-4 Soft
Piston Sample 11-24 Medium Dense 5-8 Medium Stiff
25-50 Dense 9-15 Stiff
Washington Undisturbed >50 Very Dense 16-30 Very Stiff
31-60 Hard
Vane Shear Test (REF) Refusal
>60 Very Hard
Core
Becker Hammer
Angularity of Gravel & Cobbles
Angular Coarse particles have sharp edges and relatively
Bag Sample plane sides with unpolished surfaces.
Subangular Coarse grained particles are similar to angular
but have rounded edges.
Well Symbols Subrounded Coarse grained particles have nearly plane sides
but have well rounded corners and edges.
Cement Surface Seal
Rounded Coarse grained particles have smoothly curved
Piezometer Pipe in sides and no edges.
Granular Bentonite Seal
Piezometer Pipe in Sand Soil Moisture Modifiers
Dry Absence of moisture; dusty, dry to touch
Well Screen in Sand
Moist Damp but no visible water
Granular Bentonite Seal Wet Visible free water
Inclinometer Casing or PVC Pipe
in Cement Bentonite Grout Soil Structure
Sand Stratified Alternating layers of varying material or color at
least 6mm thick; note thickness and inclination.
Vibe Wire in Grout Laminated Alternating layers of varying material or color less
than 6mm thick; note thickness and inclination.
Miscellaneous, noted on boring log Fissured Breaks along definite planes of fracture with little
resistance to fracturing.
Slickensided Fracture planes appear polished or glossy,
Laboratory Testing Codes sometimes striated.
UU Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial Blocky Cohesive soil that can be broken down into smaller
CU Consolidated Undrained Triaxial angular lumps which resist further breakdown.
CD Consolidated Drained Triaxial Disrupted Soil structure is broken and mixed. Infers that
UC Unconfined Compression Test material has moved substantially - landslide debris.
DS Direct Shear Test Homogeneous Same color and appearance throughout.
CN Consolidation Test
GS Grain Size Distribution
MC Moisture Content
SG Specific Gravity HCL Reaction
OR Organic Content No HCL Reaction No visible reaction.
DN Density
AL Atterberg Limits Weak HCL Reaction Some reaction with bubbles forming slowly.
PT Point Load Compressive Test Strong HCL Reaction Violent reaction with bubbles forming immediately.
SL Slake Test
DG Degradation
LA LA Abrasion Degree of Vesicularity of Pyroclastic Rocks
HT Hydrometer Test
RS Ring Shear Test Slightly Vesicular 5 to 10 percent of total
LOI Loss on Ignition Moderately Vesicular 10 to 25 percent of total
CSS Cyclic Simple Shear
DSS Direct Simple Shear Highly Vesicular 25 to 50 percent of total
RSM Resilient Modulus Scoriaceous Greater than 50 percent of total
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 4-A-1
October 2013
Test Boring Legend Appendix 4-A
Washington State
Department of Transportation
Boring and Test Pit Legend Page 2 of 2
Grain Size
Fine Grained < 0.04 in Few crystal boundaries/grains are distinguishable in the field or with hand lens.
Medium Grained 0.04 to 0.2 in Most crystal boundaries/grains are distinguishable with the aid of a hand lens.
Coarse Grained > 0.2 in Most crystal boundaries/grains are distinguishable with the naked eye.
Weathered State
Term Description Grade
Fresh No visible sign of rock material weathering; perhaps slight discoloration in major I
discontinuity surfaces.
Slightly Discoloration indicates weathering of rock material and discontinuity surfaces. All the rock material II
Weathered may be discolored by weathering and may be somewhat weaker externally than its fresh condition.
Moderately Less than half of the rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated to soil. Fresh or discolored
rock is present either as a continuous framework or as core stones. III
Weathered
Highly More than half of the rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated to soil. Fresh or discolored
Weathered rock is present either as discontinuous framework or as core stone. IV
Completely All rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated to soil. The original mass structure is
Weathered still largely intact. V
Residual All rock material is converted to soil. The mass structure and material fabric is destroyed. There is a
Soil large change in volume, but the soil has not been significantly transported. VI
Relative Rock Strength
Grade Description Field Identification Uniaxial Compressive
Strength approx
R1 Very Specimen crumbles under sharp blow from point of geological hammer, 0.15 to 3.6 ksi
Weak and can be cut with a pocket knife.
R2 Moderately Shallow cuts or scrapes can be made in a specimen with a pocket knife. 3.6 to 7.3 ksi
Weak Geological hammer point indents deeply with firm blow.
R3 Moderately Specimen cannot be scraped or cut with a pocket knife, shallow indentation 7.3 to 15 ksi
Strong can be made under firm blows from a hammer.
R4 Strong Specimen breaks with one firm blow from the hammer end of a geological 15 to 29 ksi
hammer.
Very Specimen requires many blows of a geological hammer to break intact sample. Greater than 29 ksi
R5
Strong
Discontinuities
Spacing Condition
Very Widely Greater than 10 ft Excellent Very rough surfaces, no separation, hard discontinuity wall
Widely 3 ft to 10 ft Good Slightly rough surfaces, separation less than 0.05 in, hard
Moderately 1 ft to 3 ft discontinuity wall.
Closely 2 inches to 12 inches Fair Slightly rough surfaces, separation greater than 0.05 in,
soft discontinuity wall.
Very Closely Less than 2 inches
Poor Slickensided surfaces, or soft gouge less than 0.2 in thick, or open
RQD (%) discontinuities 0.05 to 0.2 in.
100(length of core in pieces > 100mm)
Very Poor Soft gouge greater than 0.2 in thick, or open discontinuities
Length of core run greater than 0.2 in.
Fracture Frequency (FF) is the average number of fractures Datum:
per 1 ft of core. This does not include mechanical breaks NAD 83/91 HARN = North American Datum of 1983/1991
caused by drilling or handling. High Accuracy Reference Network
NAVD88 = North American Vertical Datum of 1988
SPN (ft) = State Plane North (ft)
SPS (ft) = State Plane South (ft)
Page 4-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
5 .1 Overview
The purpose of this chapter is to identify, either by reference or explicitly herein,
appropriate methods of soil and rock property assessment, and how to use that soil
and rock property data to establish the final soil and rock parameters to be used for
geotechnical design. The final properties to be used for design should be based on the
results from the field investigation, the field testing, and the laboratory testing, used
separately or in combination. Site performance data should also be used if available
to help determine the final geotechnical properties for design. The geotechnical
designer’s responsibility is to determine which parameters are critical to the design of
the project and then determine those parameters to an acceptable level of accuracy. See
Chapter 2, and the individual chapters that cover each geotechnical design subject area,
for further information on what information to obtain and how to plan for obtaining
that information.
5 .2 The Geologic Stratum as the Basis for Property Characterization
The development of soil and rock properties for geotechnical design purposes begins
with developing/defining the geologic strata present at the site in question. Therefore,
the focus of geotechnical design property assessment and final selection shall
be on the individual geologic strata identified at the project site. A geologic stratum
is characterized as having the same geologic depositional history, stress history, and
degree of disturbance, and generally has similarities throughout the stratum in terms
of density, source material, stress history, hydrogeology, and macrostructure. The
properties of each stratum shall be consistent with the stratum’s geologic depositional
and stress history, and macrostructure. Note that geologic units/formations identified
in geologic maps may contain multiple geologic strata as defined in this GDM.
Once the geologic strata are defined, Engineering Stratagraphic Units (ESU’s) are
developed for the purpose of defining zones within the subsurface profile with similar
properties for design. If there are multiple geologic strata as previously defined that
have approximately the same engineering properties, multiple geologic strata may
be grouped into a single ESU to simplify the design. However, soil and rock properties
for design should not be averaged across multiple geologic strata except as noted later
in this section, or unless averaging the properties results in an insignificant difference
in the design outcome. If it is not clear that averaging the properties together will have
an insignificant difference in the design outcome, the most conservative value of the
property in question for the strata grouped together into one ESU should be used for
design, or the strata should not be grouped together into one ESU.
The properties of a given geologic stratum at a project site may vary significantly
from point to point within the stratum. In some cases, a measured property value may
be closer in magnitude to the measured property value in an adjacent geologic stratum
than to the measured properties at another point within the same stratum. It should
also be recognized that some properties (e.g., undrained shear strength in normally
consolidated clays) may vary as a function of a stratum dimension (e.g., depth
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-1
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
below the top of the stratum). Where the property within the stratum varies in this
manner, the design parameters shall be developed taking this variation into account,
which may result in multiple values of the property within the stratum and therefore
multiple ESU’s within the stratum.
Since ESU’s are defined as zones of soil or rock with consistent engineering properties,
properties of ESU’s shall not be averaged together, except as noted in the following
sentences. For design methods that require a very simplified stratigraphy be used,
to create the simplified stratigraphy, a weighted average of the properties from each
ESU based on the design ESU thickness should be used to estimate the properties
of the simplified ESU for the design method in question. An example of this approach
is provided in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article C3.10.3.1,
in particular Table 1 of that article. However, there is a significant risk that weaker
materials, seams, layers, or structures (e.g., fractures, fissures, slickensides) within
a stratum or ESU will dominate the performance of the geotechnical structure being
designed, the design properties selected shall reflect the weakest aspects of the
stratum or ESU rather than taking a weighted average.
5 .3 Influence of Existing and Future Conditions on Soil and
Rock Properties
Many soil properties used for design are not intrinsic to the soil type, but vary
depending on conditions. In-situ stresses, changes in stresses, the presence of water,
rate and direction of loading, and time can all affect the behavior of soils. Prior
to evaluating the properties of a given soil, it is important to determine the existing
conditions as well as how conditions may change over the life of the project. Future
construction such as new embankments may place new surcharge loads on the soil
profile or the groundwater table could be raised or lowered. Often it is necessary
to determine how subsurface conditions or even the materials themselves will change
over the design life of the facility that is constructed. Normally consolidated clays
can gain strength with increases in effective stress, and overconsolidated clays may
lose strength with time when exposed in cuts, unloaded, or exposed to water. Some
construction materials such as weak rock may lose strength due to weathering within
the design life of the embankment. These long-term effects shall be considered when
selecting properties to use for design.
5 .4 Methods of Determining Soil and Rock Properties
Subsurface soil or rock properties are generally determined using one or more of the
following methods:
• in-situ testing during the field exploration program;
• laboratory testing, and
• back-analysis based on site performance data
The two most common in-situ test methods for use in soil are the Standard Penetration
Test, (SPT) and the cone penetrometer test (CPT). Section 5.4 describes these tests as
well as other in-situ tests. The laboratory testing program generally consists of index
tests to obtain general information or to use with correlations to estimate design
properties, and performance tests to directly measure specific engineering properties.
Page 5-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Back-analysis is used to tie the soil or rock properties to the quantifiable performance
of the slope, embankment, wall, or foundation (see Section 5.7).
The detailed measurement and interpretation of soil and rock properties shall be
consistent with the guidelines provided in FHWA-IF-02-034, Evaluation of Soil and
Rock Properties, Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 5 (Sabatini, et al., 2002),
except as specifically indicated herein.
5 .5 In-Situ Field Testing
Standards and details regarding field tests such as the Standard Penetration Test
(SPT), the Cone Penetrometer Test (CPT), the vane shear test, and other tests and
their use provided in Sabatini et al. (2002) should be followed, except as specifically
noted herein. Regarding Standard Penetration Tests (SPT), the N-values obtained
in the field depend on the equipment used and the skill of the operator, and shall
be corrected before they are used in design so that they are consistent with the design
method and correlations being used. Many of the correlations developed to determine
soil properties are based on N60-values.
SPT N values shall be corrected for hammer efficiency, if applicable to the design
method or correlation being used, using the following relationship.
N60 = (ER/60%) N (5-1)
Where:
N = uncorrected SPT value (blows/ft)
N60 = SPT blow count corrected for hammer efficiency (blows/ft)
ER = Hammer efficiency expressed as percent of theoretical free
fall energy delivered by the hammer system actually used.
The following values for ER may be assumed if hammer specific data are not available:
ER = 60% for conventional drop hammer using rope and cathead
ER = 80% for automatic trip hammer
Hammer efficiency (ER) for specific hammer systems used in local practice may be
used in lieu of the values provided. If used, specific hammer system efficiencies shall
be developed in general accordance with ASTM D-4633 for dynamic analysis of
driven piles or other accepted procedure. See Chapter 3 for additional information on
ER, including specific measurements conducted for WSDOT drilling equipment.
Corrections for rod length, hole size, and use of a liner may also be made
if appropriate. In general, these are only significant in unusual cases or where
there is significant variation from standard procedures. These corrections may be
significant for evaluation of liquefaction. Information on these additional corrections
may be found in: “Proceedings of the NCEER Workshop on Evaluation of
Liquefaction Resistance of Soils”; Publication Number: MCEER-97-0022; T.L. Youd,
I.M. Idriss (1997).
N-values are also affected by overburden pressure, and shall be corrected for that
effect, if applicable to the design method or correlation being used. N values corrected
for both overburden and the efficiency of the field procedures used shall be designated
as N160. The overburden correction equation that should be used is:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-3
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Page 5-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
of the actual geologic conditions present at the test location is required in order to
choose the correct analysis procedure, e.g., whether the aquifer is leaky, unconfined,
or bounded, etc.
5.5.2 Packer Permeability Tests
Packer permeability tests can be used to measure the hydraulic conductivity of a
specific soil or rock unit. The information obtained is used primarily in seepage
studies. This test is conducted by inserting the packer units to the desired test location
after the boring has been properly cleaned out. The packers are expanded to seal off
the zone being tested, and water is injected into the borehole under constant pressure.
Measurements of the flow rate are taken at regular time intervals. Upon completion
of testing at a particular depth, the packers are lowered to a new test depth. Test
depths should be determined from cores and geophysical logs of the borehole, prior
to hydraulic conductivity testing. Note that if the packer test is performed in soil
borings, casing must be installed. See Mayne et al. (2002) for additional information
on this type of test.
5.5.3 Seepage Tests
Three types of seepage tests are commonly used: falling head, rising head
and constant water level methods. In general, either the rising or falling level
methods should be used if the hydraulic conductivity is low enough to permit
accurate determination of the water level. In the falling head method, the borehole
or piezometer is filled with water that is allowed to seep into the soil. The rate of drop
of the water surface in the casing is monitored. The rising head method consists
of bailing the water out of the borehole and observing the rate of rise until the change
becomes negligible. The constant water level method is used if soil is too permeable
to allow accurate measurement of the rising or falling water level. General guidance
on these types of tests is provided in Mayne et al. (2002).
Boreholes (or in subsequently installed piezometers) in which seepage tests are to be
performed should be drilled using only clear water as the drilling fluid. This precludes
the formation of a mud cake on the walls of the hole or clogging of the soil pores with
drilling mud. The tests can be performed intermittently as the borehole is advanced.
In general, the rising head test is preferred because there is less chance of clogging soil
pores with suspended sediment.
Data from seepage tests only reflect the hydraulic conditions near the borehole. In
addition the actual area of seepage at the base of the borehole may not be accurately
known. During the rising head test, there is the danger of the soil at the bottom of the
borehole becoming loosened or “quick” if too great a gradient is imposed. However,
seepage tests can be used in soils with lower hydraulic conductivities than is generally
considered suitable for pumping tests and if large volumes of water do not require
disposal. Also note that if the test is conducted inside the piezometer, the hydraulic
conductivity measured from this could be influenced by the material placed inside the
borehole around the screened pipe.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-5
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
5.5.4 Slug Tests
These tests are easy to perform and can be performed in a borehole in which a
screened pipe is installed. Two types of slug tests are commonly used, falling head
and rising head. Falling head slug tests are conducted by lowering a solid object
such as a weighted plastic cylinder into the borehole causing an instantaneous
water level rise. As the water level gradually returns to static, the rate is recorded. A
rising head slug test can then be performed by suddenly removing the slug, causing
an instantaneous lowering of the water level. By monitoring the rate of rise or fall
of the water level in the borehole, an estimate of the hydraulic conductivity can
be determined. For this test, the method prescribed in ASTM D 4044 should be used.
However slug tests are not very reliable and may underestimate hydraulic conductivity
by one or two orders of magnitude, particularly if the test well has been inadequately
developed prior to testing. The test data will not provide an indication of the accuracy
of the computed value unless a pumping test is done in conjunction with the slug test.
Because the slug tests are short duration, they reflect hydraulic properties of the soil
immediately surrounding the well intake.
5.4.5 Piezocone Tests
Details of the equipment and methodology used to conduct the piezocone test
are provided in Sabatini et al. (2002). Piezocone data can be useful to estimate
the hydraulic conductivity of silts and clays from interpretation of the coefficient
of horizontal consolidation, ch, obtained from the piezocone measurements. The
procedure involves pushing the cone to the desired depth, followed by recording pore
pressures while the cone is held stationary. The test is usually run until 50 percent
of the excess pore pressure has dissipated (t50). This requires knowledge of the initial
in situ pore pressure at the test location. Dissipation tests are generally effective
in silts and clays where large excess pore pressures are generated during insertion of
the cone. Hydraulic conductivity can be estimated using various correlations with t50
and coefficient of horizontal consolidation (ch), (see Lunne et al. (1997), and Sabatini
et al. (2002)). Estimation of hydraulic conductivity from CPT tests is subject to a
large amount of uncertainty, and should be used only as a preliminary estimate
of permeability.
5.5.6 Flood Tests
Flood tests or pilot infiltration tests are not always feasible, and in general are
only used where unusual site conditions are encountered that are poorly modeled
by correlation to soil gradation characteristics, and there is plenty of water available
to conduct the test. The key to the success of this type of test is the estimate of the
hydraulic gradient during the test, recognizing that the test hydraulic gradient could
be much higher than the hydraulic gradient that is likely in service for the facility being
designed. For more information, see the Highway Runoff Manual (2004).
5 .6 Laboratory Testing of Soil and Rock
Laboratory testing is a fundamental element of a geotechnical investigation. The
ultimate purpose of laboratory testing is to utilize repeatable procedures to refine
the visual observations and field testing conducted as part of the subsurface field
exploration program, and to determine how the soil or rock will behave under
Page 5-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
the imposed conditions. The ideal laboratory program will provide sufficient data
to complete an economical design without incurring excessive tests and costs.
Depending on the project issues, testing may range from simple soil classification
testing to complex strength and deformation testing.
5.6.1 Quality Control for Laboratory Testing
Improper storage, transportation and handling of samples can significantly alter the
material properties and result in misleading test results. The requirements provided
in Chapter 3 regarding these issues shall be followed.
Laboratories conducting geotechnical testing shall be either AASHTO accredited
or fulfill the requirements of AASHTO R18 for qualifying testers and calibrating/
verifications of testing equipment for those tests being performed. In addition, the
following guidelines (Mayne et al., 1997) for laboratory testing of soils should
be followed:
1. Protect samples to prevent moisture loss and structural disturbance.
2. Carefully handle samples during extrusion of samples; samples must be extruded
properly and supported upon their exit from the tube.
3. Avoid long-term storage of soil samples in Shelby tubes.
4. Properly number and identify samples.
5. Store samples in properly controlled environments.
6. Visually examine and identify soil samples after removal of smear from the
sample surface.
7. Use pocket penetrometer or miniature vane only for an indication of strength.
8. Carefully select “representative” specimens for testing.
9. Have a sufficient number of samples to select from.
10. Always consult the field logs for proper selection of specimens.
11. Recognize disturbances caused by sampling, the presence of cuttings, drilling mud
or other foreign matter and avoid during selection of specimens.
12. Do not depend solely on the visual identification of soils for classification.
13. Always perform organic content tests when classifying soils as peat or organic.
Visual classifications of organic soils may be very misleading.
14. Do not dry soils in overheated or underheated ovens.
15. Discard old worn-out equipment; old screens for example, particularly fine (< No.
40) mesh ones need to be inspected and replaced often, worn compaction mold or
compaction hammers (an error in the volume of a compaction mold is amplified
30x when translated to unit volume) should be checked and replaced if needed.
16. Performance of Atterberg limits requires carefully adjusted drop height of the
Liquid Limit machine and proper rolling of Plastic Limit specimens.
17. Do not use tap water for tests where distilled water is specified.
18. Properly cure stabilization test specimens.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-7
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
19. Never assume that all samples are saturated as received.
20. Saturation must be performed using properly staged back pressures.
21. Use properly fitted o-rings, membranes, etc. in triaxial or permeability tests.
22. Evenly trim the ends and sides of undisturbed samples.
23. Be careful to identify slickensides and natural fissures. Report slickensides and
natural fissures.
24. Also do not mistakenly identify failures due to slickensides as shear failures.
25. Do not use unconfined compression test results (stress-strain curves) to determine
elastic modulus values.
26. Incremental loading of consolidation tests should only be performed after the
completion of each primary stage.
27. Use proper loading rate for strength tests.
28. Do not guesstimate e-log p curves from accelerated, incomplete consolidation tests.
29. Avoid “Reconstructing” soil specimens, disturbed by sampling or handling, for
undisturbed testing.
30. Correctly label laboratory test specimens.
31. Do not take shortcut: such as using non-standard equipment or non-standard
test procedures.
32. Periodically calibrate all testing equipment and maintain calibration records.
33. Always test a sufficient number of samples to obtain representative results in
variable material.
5.6.2 Developing the Testing Plan
The amount of laboratory testing required for a project will vary depending
on availability of preexisting data, the character of the soils and the requirements
of the project. Laboratory tests should be selected to provide the desired and necessary
data as economically as possible. Specific geotechnical information requirements are
provided in the GDM chapters that address design of specific types of geotechnical
features. Laboratory testing should be performed on both representative and critical
test specimens obtained from geologic layers across the site. Critical areas correspond
to locations where the results of the laboratory tests could result in a significant change
in the proposed design. In general, a few carefully conducted tests on samples selected
to cover the range of soil properties with the results correlated by classification and
index tests is the most efficient use of resources.
The following should be considered when developing a testing program:
• Project type (bridge, embankment, rehabilitation, buildings, etc.)
• Size of the project
• Loads to be imposed on the foundation soils
• Types of loads (i.e., static, dynamic, etc.)
• Whether long-term conditions or short-term conditions are in view
Page 5-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
• Critical tolerances for the project (e.g., settlement limitations)
• Vertical and horizontal variations in the soil profile as determined from boring logs
and visual identification of soil types in the laboratory
• Known or suspected peculiarities of soils at the project location (i.e., swelling soils,
collapsible soils, organics, etc.)
• Presence of visually observed intrusions, slickensides, fissures, concretions, etc.
in sample – how will it affect results
• Project schedules and budgets
• Input property data needed for specific design procedures
Details regarding specific types of laboratory tests and their use are provided
in Sabatini et al. (2002). Specifics regarding what is required in a laboratory testing
plan is provided in Section 2.4.
5 .7 Back-Analysis Based on Known Performance or Failure
Back-analysis to determine engineering properties of soil or rock is most often used
with geotechnical failures. When failures occur, back analysis can be used to model the
conditions, and loads which resulted in failure. Back-analysis can also be used in some
situations where failure has not occurred but the geotechnical performance can be
quantified (e.g., deformations). Back-analysis is a quantitative approach to adjust soil
or rock properties to match measureable site performance.
To successfully carry out this approach, it is important to define the site geometry
and stratigraphy, geologic history of the subsurface strata to be encountered, loading
conditions, ground water conditions, and measurable soil properties. Since there are
typically a number of variables to consider in most back-analyses (e.g., soil shear
strength and unit weight of each stratum/ESU, the stratigraphy itself, the groundwater
regime, the failure or deformation mechanism, the amount of deformation that has
occurred, the location of the failure surface, the loading that occurred at the time
the observed behavior occurred, etc.), all of the variables need to be defined before
conducting the back-analysis so that the parameter of interest can be determined in a
meaningful way.
Transient loading such as construction equipment live load shall not be included in the
back-analysis, unless the transient load clearly caused failure (i.e., slope failed while
equipment was on slope). If transient loads are included in the back-analysis, the rate
of loading and its effect on the soil properties shall be addressed in the analysis.
To that end, the parameters used for the back-analysis shall be determined in a way
that is consistent with the requirements provided in this manual. The back-analysis is
then used to adjust the parameter of interest so that predicted behavior is consistent
with the observed behavior. The observed behavior must be measurable in some
way so that consistency between the observed and predicted behavior is quantifiably
recognizable. If the behavior/performance is not quantifiable, then back-analysis will
not be meaningful for determining or verifying design parameters.
If a back-analysis is to be conducted, the considerations and recommendations
provided by Duncan and Stark (1992) shall be used. While the Duncan and Stark paper
was written with regard to application to back-analysis of slope failures, the principles
provided are generally applicable to other back-analysis situations.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-9
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
5.7.1 Back-Analysis of Slopes
With landslides or slope failures, if the factor of safety for the slope is to be used as the
performance measurement, a slope factor of safety of 1.0 shall be used, and shall
accurately model the failure surface geometry and failure mechanism (Turner and
Schuster 1996). It is important to determine or estimate the conditions that initiated
the slope failure to successfully back-analyze the slope failure. See Stark, et al. (2011)
for the principles that should be used to conduct slope failure back-analyses and a
detailed example.
For first time slides, and slides in which the total historical deformation is relatively
small, it shall be recognized that the shear strength estimated from the back-analysis
is the mobilized shear strength at time of failure, not necessarily the residual shear
strength, as the full development of residual strength conditions depends on the
amount of deformation that has occurred along the slide failure surface (Hussain et al.
2010, Stark et al. 2011). In first time slides, the back-calculated shear strength is likely
to be closer to the fully softened shear strength than the residual shear strength.
Laboratory shear strength testing to measure the residual shear strength of the deposit
should also be conducted and used in combination with the back-analyzed parameters
for design purposes.
5.7.2 Back-Analysis of Soil Settlement Resulting from Changes in Loading
For embankment settlement, the performance measurement to be used is typically the
magnitude of settlement measured, the rate at which the settlement occurred, or both.
Pore pressure changes that occurred during embankment placement may also be used
to help assess the rate of strength gain in soft compressible soils. If the embankment
is reinforced with geosynthetic, strain in the geosynthetic should also be measured and
used for back-analysis purposes. Monitoring of fill settlement and pore pressure in the
soil during construction allows the soil properties and prediction of the rate of future
settlement to be refined. For structures such as bridges that experience unacceptable
settlement or retaining walls that have excessive deflection, the engineering properties
of the soils can be determined if the magnitudes of the loads and structural details are
known. As with slope stability analysis, the stratigraphy of the subsurface soil must
be adequately known, including the history of the groundwater level at the site.
5.7.3 Back-Analysis of Foundations
Essentially, use of foundation load tests to measure foundation bearing resistance and
deflection characteristics is a form of back-analysis, when such data is used to estimate
soil properties, enabling the prediction of foundation performance in adjacent areas
where the same soil or rock strata are encountered, but the thickness of the strata/
ESU’s are different.
5.7.4 Use of Numerical Modeling for Back-Analysis
Numerical models typically have many degrees of freedom, and high quality input data
is usually required to use such a complex tool for this purpose. If numerical models
are used, they shall have gone through a calibration process for a similar situation.
Approval by the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer is required for use of numerical
modeling techniques for the purpose of back-analysis to estimate soil or rock
properties. Approval will be based on the adequacy of the numerical model calibration,
Page 5-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
how well the performance to be modeled is defined and quantified, and how well the
variables/input parameters in the model are defined and measured such that a unique
value of the parameter of interest can be accurately estimated.
5 .8 Engineering Properties of Soil
5.8.1 Laboratory Index Property Testing
Laboratory index property testing is mainly used to classify soils, though in some
cases, they can also be used with correlations to estimate specific soil design
properties. Index tests include soil gradation and plasticity indices. For soils with
greater than 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve, a decision will need to be made
regarding the full soil gradation curve and whether a hydrometer test in addition
to sieve testing of the coarser particles (AASHTO T88) is necessary, or if a coarse
gradation is sufficient (AASHTO T27). The full gradation range (AASHTO T88) will
be needed in the following situations:
• Lateral load analysis of deep foundations using strain wedge theory
• Liquefaction analysis
• Infiltration design, or other analyses that require the determination
of hydraulic conductivities
• Other analyses that require a d10 size, coefficient of uniformity, etc.
Classification using the coarse sieving only (AASHTO T27) may be adequate for
design of MSE walls, general earthwork, footing foundations, gravity walls, and
noise walls. These end use needs shall be considered when planning the laboratory
investigation for a project.
5.8.2 Laboratory Performance Testing
Laboratory performance testing is mainly used to estimate strength, compressibility,
and permeability characteristics of soil and rock. For rock, the focus of laboratory
performance testing is typically on the shear strength of the intact rock, or on the
shear strength of specific discontinuities (i.e., joint/seam) within the rock mass. See
Section 5.9 for additional discussion on rock properties. Soil shear strength may
be determined on either undisturbed specimens of finer grained soil (undisturbed
specimens of granular soils are very difficult, if not impossible, to get), or disturbed
or remolded specimens of fine or coarse grained soil. There are a variety of shear
strength tests that can be conducted, and the specific type of test selected depends
on the specific application. See Sabatini et al. (2002) for specific guidance on the types
of shear strength tests needed for various applications, as well as the chapters in the
GDM that cover specific geotechnical design topics.
Disturbed soil shear strength testing is less commonly performed, and is primarily
used as supplementary information when performing back-analysis of existing slopes,
or for fill material and construction quality assurance when a minimum shear strength
is required. It is difficult to obtain very accurate shear strength values of soils in natural
deposits through shear strength testing of disturbed (remolded) specimens, since the
in-situ density and soil structure is quite difficult to accurately recreate, especially
considering the specific in-situ density may not be known. The accuracy of this
technique in this case must be recognized when interpreting the results. However,
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-11
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
for estimating the shear strength of compacted backfill, more accurate results can
be obtained, since the soil placement method, as well as the in-situ density and
moisture content, can be recreated in the laboratory with some degree of confidence.
The key in the latter case is the specimen size allowed by the testing device, as in many
cases, compacted fills have a significant percentage of gravel sized particles, requiring
fairly large test specimens and test apparatus (i.e., minimum 3 to 4 inch diameter,
or narrowest dimension specimens of 3 to 4 inches).
Typically, a disturbed sample of the granular backfill material (or native material
in the case of obtaining supplementary information for back-analysis of existing
slopes) is sieved to remove particles that are too large for the testing device and test
standard, and is compacted into a mold to simulate the final density and moisture
condition of the material. The specimens may or may not be saturated after compacting
them and placing them in the shear testing device, depending on the condition that
is to be simulated. In general, a drained test is conducted, or if it is saturated, the pore
pressure during shearing can be measured (possible for triaxial testing; generally
not possible for direct shear testing) to obtained drained shear strength parameters.
Otherwise, the test is run slow enough to be assured that the specimen is fully drained
during shearing (note that estimating the testing rate to assure drainage can be
difficult). Multiple specimens using at least three confining pressures should be tested
to obtain a shear strength envelope. See Sabatini et al. (2002) for additional details.
Tests to evaluate compressibility or permeability of existing subsurface deposits
must be conducted on undisturbed specimens, and the less disturbance the better.
See Sabatini et al. (2002) for additional requirements regarding these and other types
of laboratory performance tests that should be followed.
The hydraulic conductivity of a soil is influenced by the particle size and gradation, the
void ratio, mineral composition, and soil fabric. In general the hydraulic conductivity,
or permeability, increases with increasing grain size; however, the size and shape
of the voids also have a significant influence. The smaller the voids are, the lower the
permeability. Mineral composition and soil fabric have little effect on the permeability
of gravel, sand, and non-plastic silt, but are important for plastic silts and clays.
Therefore, relationships between particle size and permeability are available for
coarse-grained materials, some of which are presented in the Correlations subsection
(Section 5.6.2). In general, for clays, the lower the ion exchange capacity of the soil,
the higher the permeability. Likewise, the more flocculated (open) the structure, the
higher the permeability.
The methods commonly used to determine the hydraulic conductivity in the laboratory
include, the constant head test, the falling head test, and direct or indirect methods
during a consolidation test. The laboratory tests for determining the hydraulic
conductivity are generally considered quite unreliable. Even with considerable
attention to test procedures and equipment design, tests may only provide values
within an order of magnitude of actual conditions. Some of the factors for this are:
• The soil in-situ is generally stratified and this is difficult to duplicate in
the laboratory.
• The horizontal value of k is usually needed, but testing is usually done on tube
samples with vertical values obtained.
Page 5-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
• In sand, the horizontal and vertical values of k are significantly different, often
on the order of kh = 10 to 100kv.
• The small size of laboratory samples leads to boundary condition effects.
• Saturated steady-state soil conditions are used for testing, but partially saturated
soil water flow often exists in the field.
• On low permeability soils, the time necessary to complete the tests causes
evaporation and equipment leaks to be significant factors.
• The hydraulic gradient in the laboratory is often 5 or more to reduce testing time,
whereas in the field it is more likely in the range of 0.1 to 2.
The hydraulic conductivity is expected to vary across the site; however, it is important
to differentiate errors from actual field variations. When determining the hydraulic
conductivity, the field and laboratory values should be tabulated along with the other
known data such as sample location, soil type, grain-size distribution, Atterberg
limits, water content, stress conditions, gradients, and test methods. Once this table
is constructed, it will be much easier to group like soil types and k values to delineate
distinct areas within the site, and eliminate potentially erroneous data.
5.8.3 Correlations to Estimate Engineering Properties of Soil
Correlations that relate in-situ index test results such as the SPT or CPT or laboratory
soil index testing may be used in lieu of or in conjunction with performance laboratory
testing and back-analysis of site performance data to estimate input parameters for
the design of the geotechnical elements of a project. Since properties estimated
from correlations tend to have greater variability than measurement using laboratory
performance data (see Phoon et al., 1995), properties estimated from correlation to
in-situ field index testing or laboratory index testing should be based on multiple
measurements within each geologic unit (if the geologic unit is large enough to obtain
multiple measurements). A minimum of 3 to 5 measurements should be obtained from
each geologic unit as the basis for estimating design properties.
The drained friction angle of granular deposits estimated from SPT measurements
shall be determined based on the correlation provided in Table 5-1.
N160 from SPT φ
(blows/ft) (ο)
<4 25-30
4 27-32
10 30-35
30 35-40
50 38-43
Correlation of SPT N values to drained friction
angle of granular soils (modified after Bowles, 1977
as reported in AASHTO 2012)
Table 5-1
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-13
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
The correlation used is modified after Bowles (1977). The correlation of Peck, Hanson
and Thornburn (1974) falls within the ranges specified. Experience should be used
to select specific values within the ranges. In general, finer materials, materials with
significant silt-sized material, and materials in which the particles are rounded to sub-
rounded will fall in the lower portion of the range. Coarser materials with less then 5%
fines, and materials in which the particles are sub-angular to angular will fall in the
upper portion of the range.
Care should be exercised when using other correlations of SPT results to soil
parameters. Some published correlations are based on corrected values (N160) and
some are based on uncorrected values (N). The designer shall ascertain the basis of
the correlation and use either N160 or N as appropriate. Care shall also be exercised
when using SPT blow counts to estimate soil shear strength for soils with gravel,
cobbles, or boulders. Gravels, cobbles, or boulders could cause the SPT blow counts to
be unrealistically high.
Correlations for other soil properties (other than as specifically addressed above
for the soil friction angle) as provided in Sabatini et al. (2002) may be used if the
correlation is widely accepted and if the accuracy of the correlation is known.
However, such correlations shall not be extrapolated to estimate properties beyond
the range of the empirical data used to establish the correlation. Care shall also
be exercised when using correlations near the extremities of the empirical basis for
the correlations, and the resulting additional uncertainty in the estimated properties
shall be addressed in the design in which those properties are used. Local geologic
formation-specific correlations may be used if well established by: (1) data comparing
the prediction from the correlation to measured high quality laboratory performance
data, or (2) back-analysis from full-scale performance of geotechnical elements
affected by the geologic formation in question.
Regarding soil hydraulic conductivity, the correlations provided in the
Highway Runoff Manual, should be used.
5 .9 Engineering Properties of Rock
Engineering properties of rock are controlled by the discontinuities within the rock
mass and the properties of the intact rock. Therefore, engineering properties for rock
must account for the properties of the intact rock and for the properties of the rock
mass as a whole, specifically considering the discontinuities within the rock mass.
A combination of laboratory testing of small samples, empirical analysis, and field
observations should be employed to determine the requisite engineering properties.
Rock properties can be divided into two categories: intact rock properties and rock
mass properties. Intact rock properties are determined from laboratory tests on
small samples typically obtained from coring, outcrops or exposures along existing
cuts. Common engineering properties typically obtained from laboratory tests
include specific gravity, point load strength, compressive strength, tensile strength,
shear strength, modulus, and slake durability. Rock mass properties are determined
by visual examination and description of discontinuities within the rock mass
following the suggested methodology of the International Society of Rock Mechanics
(ISRM 1978), and how these discontinuities will affect the behavior of the rock mass
when subjected to the proposed construction and loading.
Page 5-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Point load tests should be calibrated to unconfined compression strength test results
on the same rock type . Point load tests shall not be used for weak to extremely rock
(R0, R1, and R2 rock) with uniaxial compressive strength less than 3600 psi (25 MPa).
The methodology and related considerations provided by Sabatini et al. (2002)
should be used to assess the design properties for the intact rock and the rock mass as a
whole. However, the portion of Sabatini et al. (2002) that addresses the determination
of fractured rock mass shear strength parameters (Hoek and Brown 1988) using
the Rock Mechanics Rating (RMR) system is outdated. The original work by Hoek
and Brown has been updated and is described in Hoek et al. (2002). The updated
method uses a Geological Strength Index (GSI) to characterize the rock mass for
the purpose of estimating shear strength parameters, and has been developed based
on re-examination of hundreds of tunnel and slope stability analyses in which both
the 1988 and 2002 criteria were used and compared to field results. While the 1988
method has been more widely published in national (e.g., FHWA) design manuals
than has the updated approach provided in Hoek et al. (2002), considering that the
original developers of the method have recognized the short-comings of the 1988
method and have reassessed t through comparison to actual rock slope stability data,
WSDOT considers the Hoek, et al. (2002) to be the most accurate methodology.
Therefore the Hoek et al. (2002) method should be used for fractured rock mass shear
strength determination. Note that this method is only to be used for fractured rock
masses in which the stability of the rock slope, or rock surrounding the foundation
is not structurally controlled. See Chapter 12 for additional requirements regarding the
assessment of rock mass properties.
Some design methods were specifically developed using the older Hoek and Brown
(1988) RMR method, such as the design of spread footings on rock in the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design manual (specifically Article 10.6.3.2). In such cases, the older
Hoek and Brown method shall be used until such time that the design procedure has
been updated to use the newer GSI index method.
5 .10 Determination and Use of Soil Cohesion
Soil cohesion is defined as shear strength resulting from inter-particle attraction effect
that is independent of normal stress but varies considerably with water content and rate
of loading (Bowles 1979).
The use of cohesion due to inter-particle attraction, such as occurs in clays and clayey
silts, for design shall be considered cautiously for long-term design and in general
shall not be fully relied upon for long-term loading, unless local experience indicates
that a particular value of cohesion in a given geologic unit can be relied upon (note:
evidence of that local experience, such as results from previous back-analyses that
demonstrate good long-term performance can be reliably achieved, shall be included
in the calculation package). If cohesion is used in such cases, it shall be a conservative
lower bound value. It is especially important to not rely upon cohesive shear strength
if displacement in the soil has occurred in the past or potentially could occur in the
future, in fractured or fissured soil, or if moisture content changes over time could
occur. In these cases, a drained cohesion value near zero shall be used. For short-term
applications, such as in temporary cuts or walls, or during seismic loading, some soil
cohesion may be considered for use in design, provided that potential displacement
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-15
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
and water content changes are adequately controlled or taken into account. To justify
the use of cohesion where structures (e.g., anchored walls) are used to restrain
or prevent soil deformation, a deformation analysis of the restraining system shall
be conducted to demonstrate that the deformation will be adequately controlled.
Apparent cohesion is defined as the cohesion that results from surface tension due
to moisture in unsaturated, but not dry, soils, primarily in sands and non-plastic silts.
Apparent cohesion shall not be relied upon for the design of permanent works. For
temporary works, apparent cohesion may only be used if the moisture content of the
soils can be preserved or controlled and the magnitude of the apparent cohesion is
conservatively assessed.
For sands and gravels with 10% fines or less by weight, cohesion shall not be relied
upon for both short-term and long-term design situations, as in most cases, most
of the cohesion that may be present is apparent cohesion, which is not a reliable source
of shear strength.
5 .11 Final Selection of Design Values
5.11.1 Overview
After the field and laboratory testing is completed, the geotechnical designer shall
review the quality and consistency of the data, and shall determine if the results are
consistent with expectations. Once the lab and field data have been collected, the
process of final material property selection begins. At this stage, the geotechnical
designer generally has several sources of data consisting of that obtained in the
field, laboratory test results, and correlations from index testing. In addition, the
geotechnical designer may have results of back- analyses, or have experience based
on other projects in the area or in similar soil/rock conditions. Therefore, if the
results are not consistent with each other or previous experience, the reasons for the
differences shall be evaluated, poor data eliminated and trends in data identified.
At this stage it may be necessary to conduct additional performance tests to try
to resolve discrepancies.
As stated in Section 5.1, the focus of geotechnical design property assessment and
final selection is on the individual geologic strata identified at the project site. A
geologic stratum is characterized as having the same geologic depositional history,
stress history, and degree of disturbance, and generally has similarities throughout
the stratum in its density, source material, stress history, and hydrogeology. All of the
information that has been obtained up to this point including preliminary office and
field reconnaissance, boring logs, CPT soundings etc., and laboratory data are used to
determine soil and rock engineering properties of interest and develop a subsurface
model of the site to be used for design. Data from different sources of field and lab
tests, from site geological characterization of the site subsurface conditions, from
visual observations obtained from the site reconnaissance, from historical experience
with the subsurface conditions at or near the site, and from the results of back- analyses
shall be compared to determine the engineering properties for the various geologic
units encountered throughout the site. If soil/rock data from nearby sites in the same
or similar geologic unit are considered, site specific test data shall have priority in
the selection of design parameters relative to non-site specific historical data for the
geologic unit in question at the site.
Page 5-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Often, results from a single test (e.g. SPT N-values) may show significant scatter
across a site for a given soil/rock unit. Perhaps data obtained from a particular soil
unit for a specific property from two different tests (e.g. field vane shear tests and
lab UU tests) do not agree. The validity and reliability of the data and its usefulness
in selecting final design parameters shall be evaluated.
After a review of data reliability, a review of the variability of the selected parameters
shall be carried out. Variability can manifest itself in two ways: 1) the inherent in-situ
variability of a particular parameter due to the variability of the soil unit itself, and
2) the variability associated with estimating the parameter from the various testing
methods. From this step, final selection of design parameters can commence, and
from there completion of the subsurface profile.
5.11.2 Data Reliability and Variability
Inconsistencies in data shall be examined to determine possible causes and assess
any mitigation procedures that may be warranted to correct, exclude, or downplay
the significance of any suspect data. The following procedures provide a step-
by-step method for analyzing data and resolving inconsistencies as outlined
by Sabatini et al. (2002):
1) Data Validation – Assess the field and the laboratory test results to determine
whether the reported test results are accurate and are recorded correctly for the
appropriate material. For lab tests on undisturbed samples consider the effects
of sample disturbance on the quality of the data. For index tests (e.g. grain size,
compaction) make sure that the sample accurately represents the in-situ condition.
Disregard or downplay potentially questionable results (e.g., test results that
are potentially invalid due to sample disturbance, affected by recording errors,
affected by procedural errors, etc.).
2) Historical Comparison – Assess results with respect to anticipated results
based on site and/or regional testing and geologic history. If the new results are
inconsistent with other site or regional data, it will be necessary to assess whether
the new data is anomalous or whether the new site conditions differ from those
from which previous data was collected. For example, an alluvial deposit might
be expected to consist of medium dense silty sand with SPT blow counts of
30 or less. If much higher blow counts are recorded and the Standard Penetration
tests were performed correctly, the reason could be the deposit is actually dense
(and therefore higher friction angles can be assumed), or gravel may be present and
is influencing the SPT data. Most likely it is the second case, and the engineering
properties should probably be adjusted to account for this. But if consideration
had not been given as to what to expect, values for properties might be used that
could result in an unconservative design. If the reason for the difference between
the new site specific test data and the historical data from nearby sites is not clear,
then the site specific test data shall be given priority with regard to final selection
of design parameters.
3) Performance Comparison – Assess results with respect to historic performance
of structures at the site or within similar soils as described in Setion 5.7. Compare
the results from the back-analyses to the properties determined from field and lab
testing for the project site. The newly collected data should be correlated with the
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-17
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
parameters determined from observation of measurable performance and the field
and lab tests performed for the previous project.
4) Correlation Calibration – If feasible, develop site-specific correlations using
the new field and lab data. Assess whether this correlation is within the range
of variability typically associated with the correlation based on previous historic
data used to develop the generic correlation.
5) Assess Influence of Test Complexity – Assess results from the perspective
of the tests themselves. Some tests may be easy to run and calibrate, but
provide data of a “general” nature, while other tests are complex and subject
to operator influence, yet provide “specific” test results. When comparing results
from different tests consider which tests have proven to give more accurate
or reliable results in the past, or more accurately approximate anticipated actual
field conditions. For example, results of field vane shear tests may be used
to determine undrained shear strength for deep clays instead of laboratory UU
tests because of the differences in stress states between the field and lab samples,
and disturbance resulting from the sampling and test specimen preparation. It may
be found that certain tests consistently provide high or low values compared
to anticipated results.
The result of these five steps is to determine whether or not the data obtained for the
particular tests in question is valid. Where it is indicated that test results are invalid
or questionable as determined through the five step process described above, the
results should be downplayed or thrown out. If the test results are proven to be valid,
the conclusion can be drawn that the soil unit itself and its corresponding engineering
properties are variable (vertically, aerially, or both).
The next step is to determine the amount of variability that can be expected for a given
engineering property in a particular geologic unit, and how that variability should
influence the selection of the final design value. Sabatini et al. (2002) list several
techniques that can be used:
1) Experience – In some cases the geotechnical designer may have accumulated
extensive experience in the region such that it is possible to accurately select
an average, typical or design value for the selected property, as well as the
appropriate variability for the property.
2) Statistics – If a geotechnical designer has extensive experience in a region, or
there has been extensive testing by others with published or available results, there
may be sufficient data to formally establish the average value and the variability
(mean and standard deviation) for the specific property. See Sabatini et al. (2002)
and Phoon et al. (1995) for information on the variability associated with various
engineering properties.
3) Establish Best-Case and Worst-Case Scenarios – Based on the experience of the
geotechnical designer, it may be possible to establish upper and lower bounds
along with the average for a given property.
Page 5-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
5.11.3 Time Dependent Considerations
Properties of soil and rock can change over time (see Section 5.3). Examples of time
dependent changes include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Material degradation due to weathering, moisture changes, etc.,
• Changes in properties such shear strength due to deformation,
• Changes resulting from short or long-term stress changes (e.g., removal of load due
to excavation causing rebound)
When selecting soil and rock properties for design, the potential for these changes
to occur during the life of the facility shall be addressed in the final selection of soil
and rock properties. For example, if conducting a back analysis of a slope failure,
especially if it is a first time slope failure, the back-analysis will determine the
mobilized shear strength at the time the failure initiated and therefore may result
in a value that is greater than the residual shear strength measured in laboratory testing
or determined from correlations. The back-analyzed shear strength may therefore
be greater than the shear strength along the post failure shear surface as well as the
long-term shear strength that could occur in the future. In such cases, the shear strength
that is representative of the long-term condition, i.e., the residual shear strength
determined from the laboratory tests and correlations, should be selected for design.
5.11.4 Final Property Selection
Recognizing the variability discussed in the previous section, depending on the
amount of variability estimated or measured, the potential impact of that variability
(or uncertainty) on the level of safety in the design shall be assessed. If the impact
of this uncertainty is likely to be significant, parametric analyses shall be conducted,
or more data could be obtained to help reduce the uncertainty. Since the sources
of data that could be considered may include measured laboratory data, field test data,
performance data (i.e., from back-analyses), and other previous experience with the
geologic unit(s) in question, it will not be possible to statistically combine all this data
together to determine the most likely property value. Engineering judgment based
on experience, combined with parametric analyses as needed, will be needed to make
this final assessment and design property determination. At that point, a decision must
be made as to whether the final design value selected should reflect the interpreted
average value for the property, or a value that is somewhere between the most likely
average value and the most conservative estimate of the property. However, the desire
for design safety must be balanced with the cost effectiveness and constructability
of the design. In some cases, being too conservative with the design could result
in an un-constructible design (e.g., the use of very conservative design parameters
could result in a pile foundation that must be driven deep into a very dense soil unit
that in reality is too dense to penetrate with available equipment).
Note that in Chapter 8, where reliability theory was used to establish load and
resistance factors, the factors were developed assuming that mean values for the
design properties are used. However, even in those cases, design values that are more
conservative than the mean may still be appropriate, especially if there is a significant
amount of uncertainty in the assessment of the design properties due, for example,
to highly variable site conditions, lack of high quality data to assess property values,
or due to widely divergent property values from the different methods used to assess
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-19
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
properties within a given geologic unit. The consequence of failure should also bear
on the determination of a design parameter. Depending on the availability of soil or
rock property data and the variability of the geologic strata under consideration, it
may not be possible to reliably estimate the average value of the properties needed for
design. In such cases, the geotechnical designer will have no choice but to use a more
conservative selection of design parameters to mitigate the additional risks created
by potential variability or the paucity of relevant data. Note that for those resistance
factors that were determined based on calibration by fitting to allowable stress design,
consideration for potentially using an average property value is not relevant, and
property selection should be based on the considerations discussed previously, which
in most cases the property values shall be selected conservatively to be consistent
with past practice.
The process and examples to make the final determination of properties to be used
for design provided by Sabatini et al. (2002) shall be followed, subject to the specific
requirements in the GDM. Local experience with certain engineered and naturally
occurring geologic units encountered in the state of Washington is summarized in
Sections 5.12 and 5.13. The final selection of design properties for the engineered
and naturally occurring geologic units described in these two GDM sections shall be
consistent with the experience cited in these two GDM sections.
The documentation required to justify the selection of design parameters is specified
in Section 23.3.2.
5.11.5 Development of the Subsurface Profile
While Section 5.8 generally follows a sequential order, it is important to understand
that the selection of design values and production of a subsurface profile is more of
an iterative process. The development of design property values should begin and end
with the development of the subsurface profile. Test results and boring logs will likely
be revisited several times as the data are developed and analyzed before the relation of
the subsurface units to each other and their engineering properties are finalized.
The ultimate goal of a subsurface investigation is to develop a working model that
depicts major subsurface ESU's exhibiting distinct engineering characteristics. The
end product is the subsurface profile, a two dimensional or, if necessary, a three
dimensional depiction of the site stratigraphy. The following steps outline the creation
of the subsurface profile:
1) Complete the field and lab work and incorporate the data into the preliminary logs.
2) Lay out the logs relative to their respective field locations and compare and
match up the different soil and rock units at adjacent boring locations, if possible.
However, caution should be exercised when attempting to connect units in adjacent
borings, as the stratigraphy commonly is not linear or continuous between borings.
Field descriptions and engineering properties will aid in the comparisons.
3) Group, or possibly split up, the subsurface geologic strata based on engineering
properties to create ESU's.
4) Create cross sections by plotting borings at their respective elevations and positions
horizontal to one another with appropriate scales. If appropriate, two cross sections
should be developed that are at right angles to each other so that lateral trends
in stratigraphy can be evaluated when a site contains both lateral and transverse
extents (i.e. a building or large embankment).
Page 5-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
5) Analyze the profile to see how it compares with expected results and knowledge
of geologic (depositional) history. Have anomalies and unexpected results
encountered during exploration and testing been adequately addressed during the
process? Make sure that all of the subsurface features and properties pertinent to
design have been addressed.
5 .12 Selection of Design Properties for Engineered Materials
This section provides guidelines for the selection of properties that are commonly
used on WSDOT projects such as engineered fills. The engineering properties are
based primarily on gradation and compaction requirements, with consideration
of the geologic source of the fill material typical for the specific project location. For
materials such as common borrow where the gradation specification is fairly broad, a
wider range of properties will need to be considered.
Common Borrow – Per the WSDOT Standard Specifications, common borrow
may be virtually any soil or aggregate either naturally occurring or processed which
is substantially free of organics or other deleterious material, and is non-plastic. The
specification allows for the use of more plastic common borrow when approved by the
engineer. On WSDOT projects this material will generally be placed at 90 percent
(Method B) or 95 percent (Method C) of Standard Proctor compaction. Because
of the variability of the materials that may be used as common borrow, the estimation
of an internal friction angle and unit weight should be based on the actual material
used. A range of values for the different material properties is given in Table 5-2.
Lower range values should be used for finer grained materials compacted to Method
B specifications. In general during design, the specific source of borrow is not known.
Therefore, it is not prudent to select a design friction angle that is near or above
the upper end of the range unless the geotechnical designer has specific knowledge
of the source(s) likely to be used, or unless quality assurance shear strength testing
is conducted during construction. Depending on location, common borrow will may
have a fines content sufficient to be moisture sensitive. This moisture sensitivity may
affect the design property selection if it is likely that placement conditions are likely
to be marginal due to the timing of construction.
Select Borrow – The requirements for select borrow ensure that the mixture will be
granular and contain at least a minimal amount of gravel-size material. The materials
are likely to be poorly graded sand and contain enough fines to be moderately
moisture sensitive (the specification allows up to 10 percent fines). Select Borrow is
not an all weather material. Triaxial or direct shear strength testing on material that
meets Select Borrow gradation requirements indicates that drained friction angles of
38 to 45 degrees are likely when the soil is well compacted. Even in it loosest state,
shear strength testing of relatively clean sands meeting Select Borrow requirements has
indicated values of 30 to 35 degrees. However, these values are highly dependent on
the geologic source of the material. Surficial deposits that particles which have been
minimally transported/reworked (i.e. colluvium, some glacial deposits) can have more
subangular to angular soil particles and hence, high shear strength values. Windblown,
beach, or alluvial sands that have been rounded through significant transport could
have significantly lower shear strength values. Left-overs from processed materials
(e.g., scalpings) could also have relative low friction angles depending on the
uniformity of the material and the degree of rounding in the soil particles. A range
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-21
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
of values for shear strength and unit weight based on previous experience for well
compacted Select Borrow is provided in Table 5-2. In general, during design the
specific source of borrow is not known. Therefore, it is not prudent to select a design
friction angle that is near or above the upper end of the range unless the geotechnical
designer has specific knowledge of the source(s) likely to be used or unless quality
assurance shear strength testing is conducted during construction. Select Borrow with
significant fines content may sometimes be modeled as having a temporary or apparent
cohesion value from 50 to 200 psf, subject to the requirements for the use of cohesion
as specified in Section 5.10. If a cohesion value is used, the friction angle should be
reduced so as not to increase the overall strength of the material. For long-term
analysis, all the borrow material should be modeled with no cohesive strength.
Gravel Borrow – The gravel borrow specification should ensure a reasonably
well graded sand and gravel mix. Because the fines content is under 7 percent, the
material is only slightly moisture sensitive. However, in very wet conditions, material
with lower fines content should be used. Larger diameter triaxial shear strength
testing performed on well graded mixtures of gravel with sand that meet the Gravel
Borrow specification indicate that very high internal angles of friction are possible,
approaching 50 degrees, and that shear strength values less than 40 degrees are not
likely. However, lower shear strength values are possible for Gravel Borrow from
naturally occurring materials obtained from non-glacially derived sources such as
wind blown or alluvial deposits. In many cases, processed materials are used for
Gravel Borrow, and in general, this processed material has been crushed, resulting
in rather angular particles and very high soil friction angles. Its unit weight can
approach that of concrete if very well graded. A range of values for shear strength
and unit weight based on previous experience is provided in Table 5-2. In general
during design the specific source of borrow is not known. Therefore, it is not prudent
to select a design friction angle that is near or above the upper end of the range unless
the geotechnical designer has specific knowledge of the source(s) likely to be used or
unless quality assurance shear strength testing is conducted during construction.
Gravel Backfill for Walls – Gravel backfill for walls is a free draining material
that is generally used to facilitate drainage behind retaining walls. This material has
similarities to Gravel Borrow, but generally contains fewer fines and is freer draining.
Gravel backfill for Walls is likely to be a processed material and if crushed is likely to
have a very high soil friction angle. A likely range of material properties is provided
in Table 5-2.
WSDOT Standard Soil Type (USCS φ Cohesion Total Unit
Material
Specification classification) (degrees) (psf) Weight (pcf)
Common Borrow 9-03.14(3) ML, SM, GM 30 to 34 0 115 to 130
Select Borrow 9-03.14(2) GP, GP-GM, SP, SP-SM 34 to 38 0 120 to 135
Gravel Borrow 9-03.14(1) GW, GW-GM, SW, 36 to 40 0 130 to 145
SW-SM
Gravel Backfill for Walls 9-03.12(2) GW, GP, SW, SP 36 to 40 0 125 to 135
Presumptive Design Property Ranges for Compacted Borrow and Other
WSDOT Standard Specification Materials
Table 5-2
Rock Embankment – Embankment material is considered rock embankment if 25
percent of the material is over 4 inches in diameter. Compactive effort is based on
Page 5-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
a method specification. Because of the nature of the material, compaction testing
is generally not feasible. The specification allows for a broad range of material and
properties such that the internal friction angle and unit weight can vary considerably
based on the amount and type of rock in the fill. Rock excavated from cuts consisting
of siltstone, sandstone and claystone may break down during the compaction process,
resulting in less coarse material. Also, if the rock is weak, failure may occur through
the rock fragments rather than around them. In these types of materials, the strength
parameters may resemble those of earth embankments. For existing embankments, the
soft rock may continue to weather with time, if the embankment materials continue to
become wet. For embankments constructed of sound rock, the strength parameters may
be much higher. For compacted earth embankments with sound rock, internal friction
angles of up to 45 degrees may be reasonable. Unit weights for rock embankments
generally range from 130 to 140 pcf.
Quarry Spalls and Rip Rap – Quarry spalls, light loose rip rap and heavy loose
rip rap created from shot rock are often used as fill material below the water table
or in shear keys in slope stability and landslide mitigation applications. WSDOT
Standard Specification Section 9-13 provides minimum requirements for degradation
and specific gravity for these materials. Therefore sound rock must be used for these
applications. For design purposes, typical values of 105 to 120 pcf for the unit weight
(this considers the large amount of void space due to the coarse open gradation of
this type of material) and internal angles of friction of about 40 to 45 degrees should
be used.
Wood Fiber – Wood fiber fills have been used by WSDOT for over 30 years in fill
heights up to about 40 feet. The wood fiber has generally been used as light-weight
fill material over soft soil to improve embankment stability. Wood fiber has also been
used in emergency repair because rain and wet weather does not affect the placement
and compaction of the embankment. Only fresh wood fiber should be used to prolong
the life of the fill, and the maximum particle size should be 6 inches or less. The wood
fiber is generally compacted in lifts of about 12 inches with two passes of a track dozer.
Presumptive design values of 50 pcf for unit weight and an internal angle of friction of
about 40 degrees may be used for the design of the wood fiber fills (Allen et al., 1993).
To mitigate the effects of leachate, the amount of water entering the wood should be
minimized. Generally topsoil caps of about 2 feet in thickness are used. The pavement
section should be a minimum of 2 feet (a thicker section may be needed depending on
the depth of wood fiber fill). Wood fiber fill will experience creep settlement for several
years and some pavement distress should be expected during that period. Additional
information on the properties and durability of wood fiber fill is provided in Kilian and
Ferry (1993).
Geofoam – Geofoam has been used as lightweight fill on WSDOT projects since
1995. Geofoam ranges in unit weight from about 1 to 2 pcf. Geofoam constructed
from expanded polystyrene (EPS) is manufactured according to ASTM standards for
minimum density (ASTM C 303), compressive strength (ASTM D 1621) and water
absorption (ASTM C 272). Type I and II are generally used in highway applications.
Bales of recycled industrial polystyrene waste are also available. These bales have
been used to construct temporary haul roads over soft soil. However, these bales
should not be used in permanent applications.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-23
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
5 .13 Properties of Predominant Geologic Units in Washington
This section contains a brief discussion of soil and rock types common to Washington
state that have specific engineering properties that need consideration.
5.13.1 Loess
Loess is a windblown (eolian) soil consisting mostly of silt with minor amounts of
sand and clay (Higgins et al., 1987). Due to its method of deposition, loess has an
open (honeycomb) structure with very high void ratios. The clay component of loess
plays a pivotal role because it acts as a binder (along with calcium carbonate in certain
deposits) holding the structure together. However, upon wetting, either the water
soluble calcium carbonate bonds dissolve or the large negative pore pressures within
the clay that are holding the soil together are reduced and the soil can undergo shear
failures and/or settlements.
Loess deposits encompass a large portion of southeastern Washington. Loess
typically overlies portions of the Columbia River Basalt Group and is usually most
pronounced at the tops of low hills and plateaus where erosion has been minimal
(Joseph, 1990). Washington loess has been classified into four geologic units: Palouse
Loess, Walla Walla Loess, Ritzville Loess, and Nez Perce Loess. However, these
classifications hold little relevance to engineering behavior. For engineering purposes
loess can generally be classified into three categories based on grain size: clayey loess,
silty loess, and sandy loess (see Chapter 10).
Typical index and performance properties measured in loess are provided in Table
5-3, based on the research results provided in Report WA-RD 145.2 (Higgins and
Fragazy, 1988). Density values typically increase from west to east across the state
with corresponding increase in clay content. Higgins and Fragaszy observed that
densities determined from Shelby tube samples in loess generally result in artificially
high values due to disturbance of the open soil structure and subsequent densification.
Studies of shear strength on loess have indicated that friction angles are usually fairly
constant for a given deposit and are typically within the range of 27 to 29 degrees
using CU tests. These studies have also indicated that cohesion values can be quite
variable and depend on the degree of consolidation, moisture content and amount of
clay binder. Research has shown that at low confining pressures, loess can lose all
shear strength upon wetting.
Type of Liquid Plasticity Angle of Internal
Dry Density (pcf)
Loess Limit Index Friction (o)
Clayey 33 to 49 11 to 27 70 to 90, with maximum of
Silty 14 to 32 0 to 11 up to 95 to 98 (generally 27 to 29 from CU tests
Sandy Nonplastic Nonplastic increases with clay content)
Typical Measured Properties For Loess Deposits in Washington State
Table 5-3
Page 5-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
The possibility of wetting induced settlements shall be considered for any structure
supported on loess by performing collapse tests. Collapse tests are usually performed
as either single ring (ASTM D 5333) or double ring tests. Double ring tests have the
advantage in that potential collapse can be estimated for any stress level. However,
two identical samples must be obtained for testing. Single ring tests have the
advantage in that they more closely simulate actual collapse conditions and thus give a
more accurate estimate of collapse potential. However, collapse potential can only be
estimated for a particular stress level, so care must be taken to choose an appropriate
stress level for sample inundation during a test. When designing foundations in loess,
it is important to consider long term conditions regarding possible changes in moisture
content throughout the design life of the project. Proper drainage design is crucial to
keeping as much water as possible from infiltrating into the soil around the structure.
A possible mitigation technique could include overexcavation and recompaction to
reduce or eliminate the potential for collapse settlement.
Loess typically has low values of permeability and infiltration rates. When designing
stormwater management facilities in loess, detention ponds should generally be
designed for very low infiltration rates.
Application of the properties of loess to cut slope stability is discussed in Chapter 10.
5.13.2 Peat/Organic Soils
Peats and organic soils are characterized by very low strength, very high
compressibility (normally or slightly under-consolidated), low hydraulic conductivity,
and having very important time-consolidation effects. Often associated with wetlands,
ponds and near the margins of shallow lakes, these soils pose special challenges for
the design of engineering transportation projects. Deep deposits (+100 feet in some
cases) with very high water content, highly compressibility, low strength and local high
groundwater conditions require careful consideration regarding settlement and stability
of earth fill embankments, support for bridge foundations, and locating culverts.
The internal structure of peat, either fibrous or granular, affects its capacity for
retaining and releasing water and influences its strength and performance. With
natural water content often ranging from 200-600 percent (over 100 for organic
silts and sands) and wet unit weight ranging from 70 to 90 pcf, it can experience
considerable shrinkage (>50%) it dries. Rewetting usually cannot restore its original
volume or moisture content. Under certain conditions, dried peat will oxidize and
virtually disappear. Undisturbed sampling for laboratory testing is difficult. Field
vane testing is frequently used to evaluate in place shear strength, though in very
fibrous peats, reliable shear strength data is difficult to obtain even with the field
vane shear test. Initial undisturbed values of 100 to 400 psf are not uncommon but
remolded (residual) strengths can be 30 to 50 % less (Schmertmann, 1967). Vane shear
strength, however, is a function of both vane size and peat moisture content. Usually,
the lower the moisture of the peat and the greater its depth, the higher is its strength.
Strength increases significantly when peat is consolidated, and peak strength only
develops after large deformation has taken place. Due to the large amount of strain
that can occur when embankment loads are placed on peats and organic soils, residual
strengths may control the design.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-25
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Vertical settlement is also a major concern for constructing on organic soils. The
amount of foundation settlement and the length of time for it to occur are usually
estimated from conventional laboratory consolidation tests. Secondary compression
can be quite large for peats and must always be evaluated when estimating long-term
settlement. Based on experience in Washington State, compression index values based
on vertical strain (Ccε) typically range from 0.1 to 0.3 for organic silts and clays, and
are generally above 0.3 to 0.4 for peats. The coefficient of secondary compression (Cαε)
is typically equal to 0.05Ccε to 0.06Ccε for organic silts and peats, respectively.
5.13.3 Glacial Deposits
Till – Till is an unsorted and unstratified accumulation of glacial sediment deposited
directly by glacial ice. Till is a heterogeneous mixture of different sized material with
particle sizes ranging in size from clay to boulders. Although the matrix proportions
of silt and clay vary from place to place, the matrix generally consists of silty sand
or sandy silt (Troost and Booth, 2003). Tills in Washington are deposited by either
continental glaciers or alpine glaciers. Many of the tills in Washington, especially
those associated with continental glaciers, have been overridden by the advancing
continental ice sheet and are highly over consolidated, but not all tills have been
consolidated by glacial ice. Tills deposited by alpine glaciers are most commonly
found in and along the valley margins of the Olympic Mountains and Cascade Range,
and are commonly not over consolidated.
Glacial till is often found near the surface in the Puget Sound Lowland area. The Puget
Sound Lowland is a north-south trending trough bordered by the Cascade Mountains
to the east and the Olympic Mountains to the west. The most recent glaciation, the
Vashon Stade of the Fraser Glaciation occupied the Puget Sound region between
roughly 18,000 to 13,000 years ago. Glacial till deposited by this glaciation extends as
far south as the Olympia area.
Till that has been glacially overridden generally has very high unit weights and very
high soil strength even when predominantly fine grained. Because if its inherent
strength and density, it provides good bearing resistance, has very small strain under
applied loads, and exhibits good stand up times even in very steep slopes. Typicall
properties for glacially overridden tills range from 40 to 45 degrees for internal
friction angle with cohesion values of 100 to 1,000 psf. Unit weights used for design
are typically in the range of 130 to 140 pcf for glacially overridden till. The cohesion
component of the shear strength can typically be relied upon due to the relatively high
fines content of this geologic unit combined with its heavily overconsolidated nature
and locked in stress history. Furthermore, very steep, high exposures of till in the Puget
Sound region have demonstrated long-term stability that cannot be explained without
the presence of significant soil cohesion, verifying the reliability of this soil cohesion.
However, where these till units are exposed, the upper 2 to 5 feet is often weathered
and is typically medium dense to dense. The glacial till generally grades to dense to
very dense below the weathered zone. This upper weathered zone, when located on
steep slopes, has often been the source of slope instability and debris flows during wet
weather. Glacial till that is exposed as a result of excavation, slope instability, or other
removal of overlying material will degrade and lose strength with weathering. If the till
unit is capped with a younger deposit and had been previously weathered, weathered
till zones can be present at depth as well.
Page 5-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
The dense nature of glacially overriden till tends to make excavation and pile
installation difficult. It is not uncommon to have to rip till with a dozer or utilize
large excavation equipment. Permeability in till is relatively low because of the fines
content and the density. However, localized pockets and seams of sand with higher
permeability that may also be water bearing are occasional encountered in till units.
These localized pockets and seams may contribute slope stability problems.
Till that has not been glacially overridden and over consolidated should be treated
as normally consolidated materials consistent with the till’s grain size distribution.
Accordingly, tills that tend to be finer grained will exhibit lower strength and higher
strain than tills which are skewed toward the coarser fraction.
Wet weather construction in till is often difficult because of the relatively high fines
content of till soils. When the moisture content is more than a few percent above the
optimum moisture content and the till is disturbed or unconfined, till soils become
muddy and unstable, and operation of equipment on these soils can become difficult.
Within till cobble and boulder-sized material can be encountered at any time.
Boulders in till deposits can range from a foot or two in diameter to tens of feet. In
some areas cobble, boulders, and cobble/boulder mixtures can be nested together,
making excavation very difficult.
Outwash – Outwash is a general term for sorted sediment that has been transported
and deposited by glacial meltwater, usually in a braided stream environment.
Typically, the sediment becomes finer grained with increasing distance from the
glacier terminus.
Outwash tends to be more coarse grained and cleaner (fewer fines) than till. When it
has been overridden by advancing ice, its strength properties are similar to till, but the
cohesion is much lower due to a lack of fines, causing this material to have greater
difficulty standing without raveling in a vertical cut, and in general can more easily
cave in open excavations or drilled holes. Typically, the shear strength of glacially
overridden (advance) outwash ranges from 40 to 45 degrees, with near zero cohesion
for clean deposits. Since it contains less fines, it is more likely to have relatively high
permeability and be water bearing. In very clean deposits, non-displacement type piles
(e.g., H-piles) can “run” despite the very dense nature of the material.
Outwash that has not been glacially overridden may be indistinguishable from alluvial
deposits. When normally consolidated outwash is encountered it exhibits strengths,
densities, and other physical properties that are consistent with alluvium, with friction
angles generally less than 40 degrees and little or no cohesion.
Within outwash, cobble and boulder-sized material can be encountered at any time.
Boulders in outwash deposits can range from a foot or two in diameter to tens of feet.
In some areas cobbles, boulders, and cobble/boulder mixtures can be nested together,
making excavation very difficult.
Glacial Marine Drift (GMD) – Drift is a collective term used to describe all types
of glacial sedimentary deposits, regardless of the size or amount of sorting. The term
includes all sediment that is transported by a glacier, whether it is deposited directly
by a glacier or indirectly by running water that originates from a glacier. In the Pacific
Northwest, practitioners have commonly referred to fine-grained glacial sediments
deposited in marine water as Glacial Marine Drift, or sometimes just Marine Drift.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-27
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
In addition to sand and fine-grained materials, glacial marine drift contains variable
amounts of clastic debris from melting icebergs, floating ice, and gravity currents.
Most commonly glacial marine drift consists of poorly graded granular material
within a clayey matrix. Composition varies from gravelly, silty sand with a trace of
clay to silty sand and silty clay with varying percentages of sand and gravel. Because
of the marine environment, it can contain shell and wood fragments, and occasional
cobbles and boulders.
In and around Bellingham, the glacial marine drift typically consists of unsorted,
unstratified silt and clay with varying amounts of sand, gravel, cobbles and occasional
boulders, with small percentages of shells and wood. It is typically found at the
surface or below Holocene age deposits. The upper portion of this unit, sometimes to
about 15 feet of depth, can be quite stiff as a result of desiccation or partial ice contact
in upland areas. This stiffer desiccated zone typically grades from medium stiff to
very soft with depth. The entire glaciomarine drift profile can be stiff when only a thin
section of the drift mantles bedrock at shallow depths. Conversely, the entire profile
is typically soft in the Blaine area and can be soft when in low, perennially saturated
areas. This geologic unit can be very thick (150 feet or more).
The properties of this unit are extremely variable, varying as a function of location,
depth, loading history, saturation and other factors. The soft to medium stiff
glaciomarine drift typically has very low shear strength, very low permeability and
high compressibility. Based on vane shear and laboratory testing of this unit, the soft
portion of this unit below the stiff crust typically has undrained shear strengths of
approximately 500 to 1000 psf, and can be as low as 200 to 300 psf. The upper stiff
crust is typically stronger, and may be capable of supporting lightly loaded footing
supported structures. Atterberg limits testing will typically classify the softer material
as a low plasticity clay; although, it can range to high plasticity. Consolidation
parameters are variable, with the compression index (CC) in the range of 0.06 to over
0.2. Time rates of consolidation can also be quite variable.
Wet weather construction in glaciomarine drift is very difficult because of the
relatively high clay content of these soils. When the moisture content of these soils is
more than a few percent above the optimum moisture content, they become muddy
and unstable, and operation of equipment can become very difficult. Localized
sandy and gravelly layers in the drift can be saturated and are capable of producing
significant amounts of water in cuts.
Glaciolacustrine – Glaciolacustrine deposits form in glacial meltwater lakes that
may occur during both advancing and recessional glacial episodes. Glaciolacustrine
deposits are commonly stratified and tend to be fine grained, typically consisting of
silt and clay and often with sand laminae. Glaciolacustrine deposits accumulated
during glacial advances may be overridden by the ice, causing the deposits to be
highly overconsolidated and typically very stiff to hard. An example of glacially
overridden undisturbed laminated silt/clay deposits is provided in Figure 5-1.
When not glacially overridden, such as during the last glacial recessional period,
glaciolacustrine deposits may behave similarly to other normally consolidated
lacustrine deposits.
Page 5-28 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Example of Glacially Overridden Laminated Clay Exposed in Highway Excavation
on Beacon Hill Near The Intersection SR-5 and SR-90
Figure 5-1
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-29
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Fine-grained, glacially overridden deposits are widespread in the Puget Sound region,
and have been encountered on projects in the Seattle area in the vicinity of SR-5, SR-
90, SR-99, SR-405, and SR-520. These fine-grained deposits may be glaciolacustrine
in origin associated with one of the more than six continental glaciations that have
inundated the region during the Pleistocene. In the Seattle area, the most recent
(Vashon Stade) of these advance glaciolacustrine units are named the Lawton Clay.
This deposit can be more than 150 feet thick in the Seattle area (Troost and Booth,
2003). Additionally, fine-grained bedded units may be associated with interglacial
periods (i.e., Olympia Beds) that may be somewhat similar in initial appearance to
glaciolacustrine deposits. The widespread presence in the Seattle area of both glacial
and interglacial, fine-grained, overconsolidated deposits has led many geotechnical
practitioners to refer to any such deposit as “Seattle clay”, often irrespective of its
age or origin. Collectively, these fine-grained overconsolidated deposits are often a
primary material affecting engineering design in the Seattle area.
Extensive disturbance of these fine-grained, overconsolidated deposits is commonly
observed, evidenced by fracturing and slickensides. A slickenside is a condition in
which relative movement has occurred along the fracture, and is discernible by its
shiny and commonly striated fracture surface. More extreme disturbance may involve
disoriented/transported blocks within a matrix of intensely sheared and fractured
silt and clay.
There are a variety of causes that may lead to post-depositional disturbance of
these glaciolacustrine deposits. Vertical stresses and subsequent dewatering and
consolidation through ice loading can induce fracturing, sometimes producing
predictable fracture sets/networks. Lateral stresses induced by ice movement/flow can
cause considerable deformation, shearing and translational movements (sometimes
termed “shoving”) within the underlying sediments, a process referred to as
glaciotectonics (e.g., Figure 5-2). Following deglaciation, stress relief associated with
unloading, isostacy, exhumation, and erosion can induce further fracturing within
the sediments. Another post-depositional disturbance mechanism causing extensive
fracturing and disturbance of these deposits is landsliding on exposed slopes that
occurred between glacial episodes and following the last glaciation. Figure 5-3 shows
a tilted laminated clay block that was overridden and smeared by a subsequent glacial
advance. Figure 5-4 shows a deep (approximately 40 feet) test pit exposing layers of
weathered clay, water-bearing gravel, and unweathered clay, illustrating the highly
variable structure and depositional environment that can occur in these reconsolidated
landslide deposits. These reconsolidated landslide deposits, in particular, can become
highly unstable when exposed in excavations or natural slopes. Ground motions and
crustal deformation induced by regionally active tectonic processes are another source
of disturbance to these deposits.
Page 5-30 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Figure 5-2(a)
Exposure Near the East End of Sr-520 Illustrating Fractured and Sheared
Structure Within Glacially Overridden Clay Deposit Believed to be Due
to Glaciotectonics (a) Overview of Exposure, (b) Close-Up Showing
Clay Structure
Figure 5-2(b)
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-31
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Example on Beacon Hill of Highly Disturbed Glacially Overconsolidated Clay
Associated with a Paleolandslide Deposit; Note Near-Vertical Orientation of
Laminae/Bedding Within the Landslide Block
Figure 5-3
Page 5-32 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Test Pit on Beacon Hill Showing Depositional Sequence Within a Glacially
Overconsolidated Clay, Paleolandslide Deposit
Figure 5-4
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-33
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
One of the most important geotechnical characteristics of these fine-grained
overconsolidated deposits is that they generally have high in situ lateral stresses.
Relaxation of these locked in stresses have created significant slope stability problems
in both open and shored excavations. As excavations are completed, these deposits
experience a lateral elastic rebound, which leads to their internal weakening. The
failure mechanism is thought to consist of shear movement and/or tensional opening
along pre-existing fractures. Depending on the extent of disturbance, failure surfaces/
zones may need to shear along existing fractures and through intact clay blocks to
fully develop. Linkage of fractures and subsequent hydrostatic pressure buildup
within them can then further displace larger blocks/masses. With movement comes a
drastic reduction in shear strength (often to a residual state) within these larger blocks/
masses, which then lead to progressive slope failures. Such instability occurred in
the downtown Seattle area when cuts were made within these deposits to construct
Interstate 5 and Interstate 90. Fine, water-bearing sand laminae within the silts and
clays often further exacerbate instability in exposures, not only in open cuts, but also
in the form of caving in relatively small diameter shaft excavations.
Based on considerable experience, the long-term design of project geotechnical
elements affected by these fine-grained overconsolidated deposits should be based
on residual strength parameters. However, exceptions to this are provided in the
paragraphs that follow.
For these deposits, the relationship between the residual friction angle and the
plasticity index as reported in NAVFAC DM7 generally works well for estimating the
residual shear strength (see Figure 5-5). The Stark and Hussain (2013) correlations for
residual strength (see Figure 5-6) also work well for these deposits. In practice, shear
strength values that have been estimated based on back-analysis of landslides and cut
slope failures in this region are in the range of 13 to 17 degrees.
Correlation Between Residual Shear Strength of Overconsolidated Clays and
Plasticity Index (After NAVFAC, 1971)
Figure 5-5
Page 5-34 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Correlation Between Residual Shear Strength of Overconsolidated Clays and
Plasticity Index, Clay Fraction Cf, and Effective Normal Stress (After Stark and
Hussain 2013)
Figure 5-6
Correlations with index soil properties such as the plasticity index, such as shown
in Figure 5-5, or such as provided in Stark and Hussain (2013) in Figure 5-6, can be
used to estimate the residual shear strength of soil. Laboratory tests on the site specific
soils should be conducted, if possible, to measure the residual friction angle. When
laboratory shear strength tests are conducted to determine the residual friction angle,
high displacement tests such as the ring shear test should be used.
Designing for residual shear strength of the clay is a reasonable and safe approach in
these fine-grained glacially consolidated soils, and is the default approach in post-
depositionally disturbed deposits of fine-grained glacially consolidated soil, though
there may be limited cases where a slightly higher shear strength could be used for
design. For example, the glacially overridden clay deposits described earlier (e.g.,
figures 5-2 through 5-4) have been broken up enough to warrant the use of residual
shear strength in most cases. If more detailed investigation is conducted (e.g.,
through back-analysis of previous slope failures or marginally stable slopes at the
site in question, extensive laboratory shear strength testing, other possible testing
or evaluation techniques, and consideration of site geological history of the strata in
question) and demonstrates the shear strength of the existing deposit is greater than
its residual value, higher design shear strengths may be justified, provided that any
potential future deformation of the clay strata is prevented. In no case, however, in
these glaciolacustrine deposits that have been post-depositionally disturbed due to
phenomenon such as landsliding, glacial shoving, and shearing due to fault activity,
shall a shear strength greater than the fully softened shear strength be used for design,
even if future deformation of the clay deposit can be fully restrained. This applies to
both temporary and permanent designs.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-35
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Note that the fully softened friction angle for clays is defined in Mesri and Shahien
(2003) as:
“The fully softened strength envelope (often defined for stiff clays and shales by peak
strength of reconstituted normally consolidated specimens) ….”
In essence, this fully softened shear strength reflects the strength of an
overconsolidated clay that has been disturbed, but the “plate-shaped” clay particles
have not been fully aligned. This is in contrast to the situation in which a clay has
been sufficiently sheared to reach a state of residual strength, such as along a landslide
failure surface or along slickensides, in which all the clay particles have been aligned,
producing the lowest possible shear strength.
Stark and Hussain (2013) provide recommended correlations to estimate the fully
softened shear strength (see Figure 5-7) that should be used to estimate the fully
softened shear strength, if laboratory site specific shear strength test data are not
available. Alternatively, laboratory testing could be conducted to establish the fully
softened shear strength. Guidelines regarding the type of laboratory testing required
are provided in Stark, et al. (2005), and additional considerations for laboratory
testing are provided in Stark and Hussain (2013).
Correlation Between Fully Softened Shear Strength of Overconsolidated Clays
and Plasticity Index (After Stark and Hussain 2013)
Figure 5-7
Intact deposits of glacially overridden clays and clayey silts (i.e., those not subjected
to the geologic disturbance processes described previously) may be designed for shear
strengths approaching their peak values provided that (1) the clay has not been subject
to deformation resulting from previous construction or erosion that caused unloading
of the clay, or (2) the clay is deep enough to not be affected and will not be subject to
unloading and deformation in the planned construction. Structures (e.g., tieback walls)
designed to restrain the clay to prevent deformation may be used in combination with
Page 5-36 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
shear strengths near their peak values if previous construction that could potentially
have caused removal/unloading of the clay has not occurred prior to the construction
of the restraining structure. Otherwise, residual shear strength should be used for
design within the clay. Intact glacially overridden clay that is deep enough below the
final ground surface to not be affected by potential unloading may be designed for
shear strength near its peak value.
As with most fine grained soils, wet weather construction in overconsolidated silt/clay
is generally difficult. When the moisture content of these soils is more than a few
percent above the optimum moisture content, they become muddy and unstable, and
operation of equipment on these soils can become difficult.
Groundwater modeling of these glacially overridden clays can be very complex.
Where below the groundwater surface, these clays may visually appear moist or dry.
However, even with that appearance these clays can be saturated. Because they are
fine grained and highly compact, water generally does not freely flow from these soils.
More freely flowing ground water may be present in these deposits in localized or thin
sand or gravel seams (e.g., Figure 5-4), between laminations in the clay, and within
fissures in the clay, whereas the intact portions of the clay appear to be moist. The
water within these fissures and sand or gravel seams is often hydraulically connected,
having a similar effect with regard to stresses and stability as occurs in fractured rock
masses that contain water. Due to the nature of the clay and the tendency of the clay
surfaces within boreholes to become smeared during drilling, standard standpipe
piezometers may take a very long time to stabilize adequately to get accurate water
level readings – electrical piezometers, such as vibrating wire, should be used to get
more accurate water level readings within a reasonable period of time.
Even though this geologic deposit is generally fine-grained, due to the highly
overconsolidated nature of this deposit, settlement can generally be considered elastic
in nature, and settlement, for the most part, occurs as the load is applied. This makes
placement of spread footings on this deposit feasible if designed for relatively low
bearing stress, and provided the footing is not placed on a slope that could allow an
overall stability failure due to the footing load (see Chapter 8).
For additional discussion on geotechnical characterization and design in glacially
overconsolidated clays, see Mesri and Shahien (2003) and Stark, et al. (2005).
5.13.4 Colluvium and Talus
Colluvium is a general term used to describe soil and rock material that has been
transported through rainwash, sheetwash and downslope creep that collect on or at
the base of slopes. Colluvium is typified by poorly sorted mixtures of soil and rock
particles ranging in size from clay to large boulders. Talus is a gravitationally derived
deposit that forms downslope of steep rock slopes, comprised of a generally loose
assemblage of coarse, angular rock fragments of varied size and shape. Talus is
commonly collectively referred with the term colluvium.
Colluvium is a very common deposit, encompassing upwards of 90 percent of the
ground surface in mountainous areas. Colluvial deposits are typically shallow (less
than about 25 to 30 feet thick), with thickness increasing towards the base of slopes.
Colluvium commonly directly overlies bedrock on unglaciated slopes and intermixes
with alluvial material in stream bottoms.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-37
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Subsurface investigations in colluvium using drilling equipment are often
complicated by because of the heterogeneity of the deposit and possible presence
of cobbles boulders. In addition, site access and safety issues also can pose
problems. Test pits and trenches offer alternatives to conventional drilling that may
provide better results. Subsurface investigations in talus can be especially difficult.
Engineering properties of talus are extremely difficult to determine in the laboratory
or in situ. A useful method for determining shear strength properties in both colluvium
and talus is to analyze an existing slope failure. For talus, this may be the only way
to estimate shear strength parameters. Talus deposits can be highly compressible
because of the presence of large void spaces. Colluvial and talus slopes are generally
marginally stable. In fact, talus slopes are usually inclined at the angle of repose of the
constituent material. Cut slopes in colluvium often result in steepened slopes beyond
the angle of repose, resulting in instability. Slope instability is often manifested by
individual rocks dislodging from the slope face and rolling downslope. While the
slope remains steeper than the angle of repose, a continuous and progressive failure
will occur.
Construction in colluvium is usually difficult because of the typical heterogeneity of
deposits and corresponding unfavorable characteristics such as particle size, strength
variations and large void spaces. In addition, there is the possibility of long-term creep
movement. Large settlements are also possible in talus. Foundations for structures in
talus should extend through the deposit and bear on more competent material. Slope
failures in colluvium are most often caused by infiltration of water from intense
rainfall. Modifications to natural slopes in the form of cut slopes, construction of
drainage ditches, and impropery channelized stormwater are ways that water can
infiltrate into a colluvial soil and initiate a slope failure. Careful consideration must
be given to the design of drainage facilities to prevent saturation of colluvial deposits.
5.13.5 Columbia River Sand
These sands are located in the Vancouver area, and both up and down river along
the Columbia River west of the Cascades. These sands may have been deposited by
backwaters from the glacial Lake Missoula catastrophic floods. The sands are poorly
graded and range from loose to medium dense. The sand is susceptible to liquefaction
if located below the water table. The sands do not provide a significant amount of
frictional resistance for piles, and non-displacement piles may tend to run in these
deposits. Based on the observed stability of slopes in this formation, soil friction
angles of 28o to 32o should be expected.
5.13.6 Columbia Basin Basalts
The basalt flows that dominate the Columbia Basin were erupted into a structural
and topographic low between the northern Rocky Mountains and the rising Cascade
Range. During periods between the flows, erosion took place and tuffs, sandstones,
and conglomerates were deposited on top of basalt flows (Thorsen, 1989). In some
areas lake beds formed. The resulting drainage systems and lakes were responsible for
the extensive layer of sediments between, interfingering with, and overlying the basalt
flows. These interbedded sediments are generally thicker in areas peripheral to the
flows, especially in and along the western margin of the basin. During the interludes
between flows, deep saprolites formed on some flow surfaces. Present topographic
Page 5-38 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
relief on the basin has been provided largely by a series of east-west trending
anticlinal folds, by the cutting of catastrophic glacial meltwater floods, and by the
Columbia River system.
The most obvious evidence of bedrock slope failures in the basin is the presence of
basalt talus slopes fringing the river canyons and abandoned channels. Such talus are
generally standing at near the angle of repose.
Bedrock failures are most commonly in the form of very large slumps, slump flows,
and translational landslides, controlled by weak interbeds or palagonite zones between
flows. Most of these are ancient failures and occur in areas of regional tilting or are
associated with anticlinal ridges. The final triggering, in many cases, appears to have
been oversteepening of slopes or removal of toe support.
Along I-82, SR-12, and SR-410 on the western margin of the province and in a
structural basin near Pasco, layers of weak sediments interfinger with basalt flows.
Some of these sediments are compact enough to be considered siltstone or sandstone
and are rich in montmorillionite. Slumps and translation failures are common in some
places along planes sloping as little as 8 degrees. Most landslides are associated with
pre-existing failure surfaces developed by folding and or ancient landslides. In the
Spokane and Grande Ronde areas thick sections of sediments make up a major part of
the landslide complexes.
5.13.7 Latah Formation
Much of Eastern Washington is underlain with thick sequences of basaltic flow rock.
These flows spread out over a vast area that now comprises what is commonly known
as the Columbia Plateau physiographic province (see Section 5.9.6). Consisting of
extrusive volcanic rocks, they make up the Columbia River Basalt Group (Griggs,
1959). This geologic unit includes numerous basalt formations, each of which includes
several individual flows that are commonly separated from one another by sedimentary
lacustrine deposits (Smith et al., 1989). In the Spokane area, these sedimentary rock
units are called the Latah Formation.
Most of the sedimentary layers between the basalt flows range from claystone to
fine-grained sandstone in which very finely laminated siltstone is predominant. The
fresh rock ranges in color from various shades of gray to almost white, tan and rust.
Because of its generally poorly indurated state, the Latah rarely outcrops. It erodes
rapidly and therefore is usually covered with colluvium or in steeper terrain, it is
hidden under the rubble of overlying basaltic rocks.
The main engineering concern for the Latah Formation is its potential for rapid
deterioration by softening and eroding when exposed to water and cyclic wetting
and drying (Hosterman, 1969). The landslide potential of this geologic unit is also of
great engineering concern. While its undisturbed state can often justify relatively high
bearing resistance, foundation bearing surfaces need to be protected from precipitation
and groundwater. Construction drainage is important and should be planned in
advance of excavating. Bearing surface protection measures often include mud slabs
or gravel blankets.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-39
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
In the Spokane area, landslide deposits fringe many of the buttes (Thorsen, 1989).
Disoriented blocks of basalt lie in a matrix of disturbed silts. The Latah Formation
typically has low permeability. The basalt above it is often highly fractured, and joints
commonly fill with water. Although this source of groundwater may be limited, when
it is present, and the excavation extends through the Latah-basalt contact, the Latah
will often erode (pipe) back under the basalt causing potential instability. The Latah is
also susceptible to surface erosion if left exposed in steep cuts. Shotcrete is often used
to provide a protective coating for excavation surfaces. Fiber-reinforced shotcrete and
soil nailing are frequently used for temporary excavation shoring.
The Latah Formation has been the cause of a number of landslides in northeast
Washington and in Idaho. Measured long-term shear strengths have been observed
to be in the range of 14 to 17 degrees. It is especially critical to consider the long-
term strength of this formation when cutting into this formation or adding load on
this formation.
5.13.8 Coastal Range Siltstone/Claystone
The Coast Range, or Willapa Hills, are situated between the Olympic Mountains
to the north and the Columbia River to the south. Thick sequences of Tertiary
sedimentary and volcanic rocks are present. The rocks are not intensely deformed
but have been subjected to compressional tectonism and have been somewhat folded
and faulted (Lasmanis, 1991). The Willapa Hills have rounded topography, deep
weathering profiles, and typically thick residual soil development. The interbedded
sandstone and fine-grained sedimentary formations are encountered in highway
cuts. The material from these cuts has been used in embankments. Some of the
rock excavated from these cuts will slake when exposed to air and water and cause
settlement of the embankment, instability and pavement distortion.
Locally thick clayey residual soils are present and extensive areas are underlain by
sedimentary and volcanic rocks that are inherently weak. Tuffaceous siltstone and
tilted sedimentary rocks with weak interbeds are common. The volcanic units are
generally altered and or mechanically weak as a result of brecciation. Large and small-
scale deep-seated and shallow landsliding are widespread geomorphic processes in
this province. The dominant forms of landsliding are translational landslides,
earthflows or slump-earthflows, and debris flows (Thorsen, 1989). Many of these
are made up of both soil and bedrock. Reactivation of landslide in some areas can be
traced to stream cutting along the toe of a slide.
5.13.9 Troutdale Formation
The Troutdale Formation consists of poorly to moderately consolidated and weakly
lithified silt, sand and gravel deposited by the ancestral Columbia River. These
deposits can be divided into two general parts; a lower gravel section containing
cobbles, and upper section that contains volcanic glass sands. The formation is
typically a terrestrial deposit found in and proximal to the present-day flood plain
of the Columbia River and the Portland Basin. The granular components of the
formation are typically well-rounded as a result of the depositional environment
and are occasionally weakly cemented. Occasional boulders have been found in this
formation. Excavation for drilled shafts and soldier piles in these soils can be very
difficult because of the boulders and cemented sands.
Page 5-40 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Slope stability issues have been observed in the Troutdale Formation. Significant
landslides have occurred in this unit in the Kelso area. Wet weather construction can
be difficult if the soils have significant fines content. As described above, when the
moisture content of soil with relatively high fines content rises a few percent above
optimum, the soils become muddy and unstable. Permeability in this geologic unit
varies based on the fines content or presence of lenses or layers of cemented and/or
fine-grained material.
5.13.10 Marine Basalts - Crescent Formation
The Crescent Formation basalts were erupted close to the North American shoreline
in a marine setting during Eocene time (Lasmanis, 1991). The formation consists
mostly of thick submarine basalt flows, which commonly formed as pillow lavas.
The Crescent Formation was deposited upon continentally derived marine sediments
and is locally interbedded with sedimentary rocks. The Crescent Formation extends
from the Willapa Hills area to the Olympic Peninsula. During the middle Eocene,
the Crescent Formation was deformed during accretion to North America. The
pillow basalts have extensive zones of palagonite and interstitial clay. Along the
Olympic Peninsula the basalts are generally highly fractured and are often moderately
weathered to decomposed.
The properties of the marine basalts are variable and depend on the amount of
fracturing, mineralogy, alteration and weathering. Borrow from cut sections is
generally suitable for use in embankments; however, it may not be suitable for use
as riprap or quarry spalls because of degradation and slaking characteristics. All
marine basalts should be tested for degradation before use as riprap or quarry spalls
in permanent applications.
5.13.11 Mélange Rocks on Olympic Peninsula
During the middle Miocene, convergence of the Juan de Fuca plate with the North
American plate accelerated to the point that sedimentary, volcanic, and metamorphic
rocks along the west flank of the Olympics were broken, jumbled, and chaotically
mixed to form a mélange (Thorsen, 1989). This formation is known as the Hoh rock
assemblage. Hoh mélange rocks are exposed along 45 miles of the western coast.
Successive accretionary packages of sediments within the core of the mountains are
composed of folded and faulted Hoh and Ozette mélange rock. Typical of mélange
mixtures, which have been broken, sheared and jumbled together by tectonic collision,
the Hoh includes a wide range of rock types. Resistant sandstone and conglomerated
sequences are extensively exposed in headlands and terraces along the Olympic coast.
The mélange rocks may include pillow basalt, deep ocean clay and submarine fan
deposits. Slopes in tilted sedimentary rocks that have been extensively altered and/or
contain weak interbeds have been undercut by wave action in places along the Strait
of Juan de Fuca. Slump flows or bedding plane block glides form along the interbeds.
Because of the variability of the mélange rocks and the potential for failure planes,
caution should be used when designing cuts. A robust field exploration program is
essential to determine the geometry and properties of the soil and rock layers.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-41
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
5.14 Application of the Observational Method to Adjust Design
Properties
The observational method as described by Peck (1969) and Wu (2008) may be used
to adjust design parameters based on measured performance during construction. This
approach may be used in the following ways:
• Planning during design that measurements will be taken and observations will be
made during construction to verify the design assumptions used, or
• To address unexpected performance during construction.
The application of the observational method includes the following elements
(Peck, 1969):
1. “Exploration sufficient to establish at least the general nature, pattern and
properties of the deposits, but not necessarily in detail.
2. Assessment of the most probable conditions and the most unfavorable conceivable
deviations from these conditions. In this assessment geology often plays a
major role.
3. Establishment of the design based on a working hypothesis of behavior anticipated
under the most probable conditions.
4. Selection of quantities to be observed as construction proceeds and calculation of
their anticipated values on the basis of the working hypothesis.
5. Calculation of values of the same quantities under the most unfavorable conditions
compatible with the available data concerning the subsurface conditions.
6. Selection in advance of a course of action or modification of design for every
foreseeable significant deviation of the observational findings from those predicted
on the basis of the working hypothesis.
7. Measurement of quantities to be observed and evaluation of actual conditions.
8. Modification of design to suit actual conditions.”
If the observational method is to be used as part of the design process, the design
shall meet the requirements of this manual, adjusting the design as needed during
construction to be consistent with the performance observed.
5 .15 References
AASHTO, 2012, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, Sixth Edition, Washington, D.C., USA. (Note:
Most current edition shall be used)
ASTM, 2010, Standard D1621, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties
of Rigid Cellular Plastics.l
ASTM, 2010, Standard D4043, Selection of Aquifer Test Method in Determining
Hydraulic Properties by Well Techniques.
ASTM, 2010, Standard D4044, Standard Test Method for Field Procedure for
Instantaneous Change in Head (Slug) Tests for Determining Hydraulic Properties
of Aquifers.
Page 5-42 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
ASTM, 2008, Standard D4050, Standard Test Method for (Field Procedure) for
Withdrawal and Injection Well Tests for Determining Hydraulic Properties of Aquifer
Systems.
ASTM, 2003, Standard D5333, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Collapse
Potential of Soils.
ASTM, 2010, Standard D4633, Standard Test Method for Energy Measurement for
Dynamic Penetrometers.
Allen, T. M., Kilian, A. P., 1993, “Use of Wood Fiber and Geotextile Reinforcement
to Build Embankment Across Soft Ground,” Transportation Research Board Record
1422.
Bowles, J. E., 1979, Physical and Geotechnical Properties of Soils,
McGraw-Hill, Inc.
Duncan, J. M., and Stark, T. D., 1992, “Soil Strengths from Back Analysis of Slope
Failures,” Stability and Performance of Slopes and Embankments-II Proceedings,
Berkeley, CA, pp. 890-904.
Dunn, I. S., Anderson, L. R., Kiefer, F. W., 1980, Fundamentals of Geotechnical
Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Griggs, A.B., 1976, U.S. Geological Service Bulletin 1413, “The Columbia River
Basalt Group in the Spokane Quadrangle, Washington, Idaho, and Montana”.
Higgins, J. D., Fragazy, R. J., Martin, T. L., 1987, Engineering Design in Loess Soils
of Southeastern Washington, WA-RD 145.1.
Higgins, J. D., Fragazy, R. J.,1988, Design Guide for Cut Slopes in Loess
of Southeastern Washington, WA-RD 145.2.
Hoek, E., and Brown, E.T. 1988. “The Hoek-Brown Failure Criterion – a 1988
Update.” Proceedings, 15th Canadian Rock Mechanics Symposium, Toronto, Canada.
Hoek, E., Carranza-Torres, C., and Corkum, B., 2002, “Hoek-Brown Criterion – 2002
Edition,” Proceedings NARMS-TAC Conference, Toronto, 2002, 1, pp. 267-273.
Holtz, R. D. & Kovacs, W. D., 1981, An Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering,
Prentice-Hall, Inc.
Hosterman, John W., 1969, U.S. Geological Survey Bulletin 1270, “Clay Deposits
of Spokane Co. WA”.
Hussain, M., Start, T. D., and Akhtar, K., 2010, “Back-Analysis Procedure
for Landslides,” Proceedings of the International Conference on Geotechnical
Engineering, Lahore, Pakistan, Pakistan Geotechnical Engineering Society, pp.
159-166.
International Society of Rock Mechanics (ISRM), 1978, Suggested methods for the
quantitative description of discontinuities in rock masses, International Journal of Rock
Mechanics and Mining Sciences, pp. 319-368.
Joseph, N. L., 1990, Geologic Map of the Spokane 1:100,000 Quadrangle,
Washington – Idaho, Washington Division of Geology and Earth Resources, Open File
Report 90-17.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-43
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Kilian, A. P., Ferry, C. D., 1993, Long Term Performance of Wood Fiber Fills,
Transportation Research Board Record 1422.
Lasmanis, R., 1991, The Geology of Washington: Rocks and Minerals, v. 66, No. 4.
Lunne, et al., 1997, Cone Penetration Testing in Geotechnical Practice, E & FN Spon,
London.
Mayne, P. W., Christopher, B.R., and DeJong, J., 2002, Subsurface Investigations –
Geotechnical Site Characterization, Publication No. FHWA NHI-01-031, National
Highway Institute, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, 300 pp.
Mesri, G., and Shahien, M. 2003, “Residual Shear Strength Mobilized in First Time
Slope Failures,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering,
Vol. 129, No. 1, pp. 12-31.
Meyerhoff, G. G., Journal of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Division, American
Society of Civil Engineers, January, 1956.
NAVFAC, 1971, Design Manual: Soil Mechanics, Foundations, and Earth
Structures, DM-7.
Peck, R. B., 1969, “Ninth Rankine Lecture: Advantages and Limitations of the
Observational Method in Applied Soil Mechanics,”Geotechnique, No. 19, Vol. 2, pp.
171-187.
Peck, R. B., Hanson, W. E. and Thornburn, T. H., 1974, Foundation Engineering, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Phoon, K.-K., Kulhawy, F. H., Grigoriu, M. D., 1995, “Reliability-Based Design
of Foundations for Transmission Line Structures,” Report TR-105000, Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA.
Sabatini, P. J., Bachus, R. C., Mayne, P. W., Schneider, T. E., Zettler, T. E., FHWA-
IF-02-034, 2002, Evaluation of soil and rock properties, Geotechnical Engineering
Circular No. 5.
Schmertmann, J. H., 1967, Research Bulletin No. 121A, Florida Department
of Transportation; University of Florida.
Smith, G. A., Bjornstad, B.N., Fecht, K.R., 1989, Geologic Society of America
Special Paper 239, “Neogene Terrestrial Sedimentation On and Adjacent to the
Columbia Plateau, WA, OR, and ID”.
Stark, T. D.; Choi, Hangeok; and McCone, Sean, 2005, “Drained shear strength
parameters for analysis of landslides,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 131, No. 5, pp. 575-588.
Stark, T.D. and Hussain, M., 2013. "Drained Shear Strength Correlations for
Slope Stability Analyses," ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering, Vol. 139, No. 6, pp. 853-862.
Stark, T.D., Newman, E. J., de la Pena, G., and Hillebrandt, D., 2011. "Fill
Placement on Slopes Underlain by Franciscan Mélange," Journal of Geotechnical
and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 137, No. 3, pp. 263-272.
Page 5-44 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 5 Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock
Thorsen, G. W., 1989, Landslide Provinces in Washington, Engineering Geology
in Washington, Washington Division of Geology and Earth Resources, Bulletin 78
Troost, K.G. and Booth D.B. (2003), Quaternary and Engineering Geology of the
Central and Southern Puget Sound Lowland. Professional Engineering Practices
Liasion Program, University of Washington, May 1-3, 2003.
Turner, A. K., and Schuster, R. L., editors, 1996, Landslides Investigation and
Mitigation, Transportation Research Board, TRB Special Report 247, National
Academy Press, Washington, DC, 673 pp.
WSDOT Highway Runoff Manual M 31-16, March 2004.
WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction
M 41-10, 2004.
Wu, T.H., 2008, “2008 Peck Lecture: The Observational Method: Case History and
Models,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 137,
No. 10, pp. 862-873.
Youd, T.L. and I.M. Idriss. 1997. Proceedings of the NCEER Workshop on Evaluation
of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils; Publication No. MCEER-97-0022.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 5-45
October 2013
Engineering Properties of Soil and Rock Chapter 5
Page 5-46 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-1 Seismic Design Responsibility and Policy
6-1.1 Responsibility of the Geotechnical Designer
The geotechnical designer is responsible for providing geotechnical/seismic input
parameters to the structural engineers for their use in structural design of the
transportation infrastructure (e.g., bridges, retaining walls, ferry terminals, etc.). Specific
elements to be addressed by the geotechnical designer include the design ground motion
parameters, site response, geotechnical design parameters, and geologic hazards. The
geotechnical designer is also responsible for providing input for evaluation of soil-
structure interaction (foundation response to seismic loading), earthquake-induced earth
pressures on retaining walls, and an assessment of the impacts of geologic hazards on
the structures.
6-1.2 Geotechnical Seismic Design Policies
6-1.2.1 Seismic Performance Objectives
In general, the AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Design
Specifications is followed for structure classification of bridges, except that the
designation “other” is replaced with “normal” in the WSDOT Bridge Design Manual LRFD
(BDM) M 23-50.
In keeping with the current seismic design approaches employed both nationally and
internationally, geotechnical seismic design shall be consistent with the philosophy
identified in the WSDOT BDM for structure seismic design which defines the structure
performance objectives for the Safety Evaluation Earthquake (SEE) and the Functional
Evaluation Earthquake (FEE). For the SEE, the performance objective requires that
the structure be designed for non-collapse due to earthquake shaking and geologic
hazards associated with a design seismic event so that loss of life and serious injury
due to structure collapse are minimized. This is the primary performance objective
for bridges classified as “normal”. This performance objective shall be achieved at a
seismic hazard level that is consistent with the seismic hazard level required in the
AASHTO specifications (e.g., 7 percent probability of exceedance in 75 years for other
structures, which is an approximate return period of 1,000 years). Geotechnical design
associated with structures shall be consistent with this performance objective and design
hazard level.
For the FEE, the performance objective requires minimal to no earthquake damage and
that the structure remain in full service after the earthquake. For bridges classified as
“essential” or “critical”, a two level seismic design is required: the SEE as defined above,
except that the damage due to the earthquake is limited to minimal to moderate and
limited service for the structure is expected after the earthquake, and the Functional
Evaluation Earthquake (FEE). This FEE performance objective shall be achieved at a
hazard level of 30 percent probability of exceedance in 75 years (or 210-year return
period). Geotechnical design associated with structures shall also be consistent with
this performance objective and design hazard level for essential and critical bridges. See
the BDM Chapter 4, for additional details regarding the performance objectives and
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-1
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
associated design requirements. See GDM Section 6-3.1 for requirements to assess the
hazard level.
Bridge approach embankments and fills through which cut-and-cover tunnels are
constructed should be designed to remain stable during the design seismic event because
of the potential to contribute to collapse or inadequate performance of the structure
should they fail or deform excessively. The aerial extent of approach embankment
(and embankment surrounding cut-and-cover tunnels) seismic design and mitigation (if
necessary) should be such that the structure is protected against instability or loading
conditions that could result in collapse or inadequate performance. The typical distance of
evaluation and mitigation is within 100 feet of the abutment or tunnel wall, but the actual
distance should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. Instability or other seismic hazards
such as liquefaction, lateral spread, downdrag, and settlement may require mitigation
near the abutment or tunnel wall to ensure that the structure is not compromised during
a design seismic event. The geotechnical designer should evaluate the potential for
differential settlement between mitigated and non mitigated soils. Additional measures
may be required to limit differential settlements to tolerable levels both for static and
seismic conditions. For “normal” bridges, the seismic stability of the bridge approach
embankment in the lateral direction may not be required if instability in the lateral
direction will not significantly damage the bridge and will not cause a life safety issue.
The bridge interior pier foundations should also be designed to be adequately stable with
regard to liquefaction, lateral spreading, flow failure, and other seismic effects to prevent
bridge collapse for “normal” bridges when considering the FEE and which otherwise could
compromise the functioning of essential and critical bridges for both the SEE and FEE
hazard levels.
All retaining walls and abutment walls, including reinforced slopes steeper than 0.5H:1V,
which shall be considered to be a wall (see Section 15-5.6), shall be evaluated and
designed for seismic stability internally and externally (i.e. sliding, eccentricity, and bearing
capacity), with the exception of walls that meet the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual
“No Seismic Analysis” provisions in AASHTO Article 11.5.4.2. Noise walls, as well as
reinforced slopes steeper than 1.2H:1V, shall also be evaluated for seismic stability.
With regard to seismic overall slope stability (often referred to as global stability) involving
a retaining wall/reinforced slope as defined above, or noise wall, the geotechnical
designer shall evaluate the impacts of failure due to seismic loading, as well as for
liquefied conditions after shaking. If the wall seismic global stability does not meet the
requirements in Sections 6-4.2 and 6-4.3, collapse of the wall/reinforced slope or noise
wall shall be considered likely and assumed to cause loss of life or severe injury to the
public if the following are true:
• The maximum wall/reinforced slope height is greater than 10 feet in height and
• The wall/reinforced slope is close enough to the traveled way such that collapse of
the wall/reinforced slope or the slope that it supports will cause an abrupt elevation
change within part or all of the traveled way, or will result in debris from the collapsed
wall and the material that it supports being deposited on part or all of the traveled
way, or other adjacent facility/structure.
If the above two bullets are true, the stability of the wall/reinforced slope or noise wall
shall be improved such that the life safety of the public is preserved. If the maximum wall/
reinforced slope or noise wall or noise wall height is less than 10 ft, but the second bullet
Page 6-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
is still true, the potential for wall/reinforced slope collapse shall be evaluated to assess
the severity of the impact to the traveled way and to the potential for life safety issues
to occur. Similarly, if the wall height is greater than 10 ft, but it is not near the traveled
way as defined above, the potential for wall/reinforced slope or noise wall collapse shall
be evaluated to assess the severity of the impact to the public and the potential for life
safety issues to occur. In either of these cases, if it is determined that failure of the wall
will compromise the life safety of the public, the stability of the wall/reinforced slope or
noise wall shall be improved such that the life safety of the public is preserved.
Note that the policy to stabilize retaining walls/reinforced slopes and noise walls for
overall stability due to design seismic events may not be practical for walls/reinforced
slopes or noise walls placed on marginally stable landslide areas or otherwise marginally
stable slopes. In general, if the placement of a wall/reinforced slope within a marginally
stable slope (i.e., marginally stable for static conditions) has only a minor effect on the
seismic stability of the landslide or slope, or if the wall/reinforced slope has a relatively
low risk of causing loss of life or severe injury to the traveling public if collapse occurs,
the requirement of the wall/reinforced slope and slope above and/or below the structure
to meet minimum seismic overall stability requirements may be waived, subject to the
approval of the State Geotechnical Engineer. The State Geotechnical Engineer will
assess the impact and potential risks caused by wall and slope seismic instability or poor
performance, and the magnitude of the effect the presence of the wall/reinforced slope
could have on the stability of the overall slope during the design seismic event. The
effect on the corridor in addition to the portion of the corridor being addressed by the
project will be considered. In general, if the presence of the wall/reinforced slope could
decrease the overall slope stability factor of safety by more than 0.05, the requirement to
meet minimum seismic overall slope stability requirements will not be waived. However,
this requirement may be waived by the State Geotechnical Engineer if the seismic slope
stability safety factor for the existing slope (for the design earthquake ground motion) is
significantly less than 0.9, subject to the evaluation of the impacts described above.
Cut slopes in soil and rock, fill slopes, and embankments should be evaluated for
instability due to design seismic events and associated geologic hazards. Instability
associated with cuts and fills is usually not mitigated due to the high cost of applying
such a design policy uniformly to all slopes statewide. However, slopes that could cause
collapse of an adjacent structure (e.g., a bridge, building, or pipeline) if failure due to
seismic loading occurs, shall be stabilized.
6-1.2.2 Liquefaction Mitigation for Bridge Widenings
Bridge widenings require special considerations, as the existing bridge to be widened may
not be adequately stabilized to resist the forces imparted to the bridge due to liquefaction
effects such as downdrag and lateral spreading loads/deformations. See BDM Section 4.3
for bridge widening seismic design and existing bridge seismic retrofit policies.
To assess the effect of liquefaction induced foundation loading and deformation on the
existing and widened bridge stability, the geotechnical engineer provides the structural
engineer with the following:
• depth and extent of soil that is likely to liquefy for the applicable hazard level (i.e.,
for the SEE for normal bridges, and the SEE and FEE hazard levels for essential and
critical bridges,
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-3
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
• liquefaction induced downdrag loads and settlement,
• p-y curve parameters for the soil in both a liquefied and not liquefied state,
• the lateral spreading soil deformation profile (i.e., free field displacements), and
• the lateral loads acting on the foundation elements if flow failure is likely.
With this information, the structural designer can then determine the seismic stability
of the existing bridge and bridge widening, and the need for structural strengthening of
the existing bridge. If that is not feasible, the geotechnical engineer assesses the need for
ground improvement to prevent the liquefaction from occurring. If ground improvement is
needed, the geotechnical engineer also provides a ground improvement design.
Note that the foundation loads caused by flow failure are affected by the foundation
details and therefore may require some design iteration between the geotechnical and
structural designer.
Details on the liquefaction analysis, mitigation needed if the bridge cannot be designed to
resist the forces and soil deformation anticipated, and the input the geotechnical designer
provides to the structural designer regarding liquefaction and its effect, are provided in
Sections 6-4.2 and 6-5 of this GDM.
6-1.2.3 Maximum Considered Depth for Liquefaction
When evaluating liquefaction potential and its impacts to transportation facilities, the
maximum considered liquefaction depth below the natural ground surface shall be limited
to 80 feet. However, for sites that contain exceptionally loose soils that are apparently
highly susceptible to liquefaction to greater depths, effective stress analysis techniques
may be used to evaluate the potential for deeper liquefaction and the potential impacts of
that liquefaction. The reasons for this depth limitation are as follows:
Limits of Simplified Procedures – The simplified procedures most commonly used
to assess liquefaction potential are based on historical databases of liquefied sites
with shallow liquefaction (i.e., in general, less than 50 feet). Thus, these empirical
methodologies have not been calibrated to evaluate deep liquefaction. In addition,
the simplified equation used to estimate the earthquake induced cyclic shear stress
ratio (CSR) is based on a stress reduction coefficient, rd, which is highly variable at
depth. For example, at shallow depth (15 feet), rd ranges from about 0.94 to 0.98. As
depth increases, rd becomes more variable ranging, for example, from 0.40 to 0.80 at
a depth of 65 feet. The uncertainty regarding the coefficient rd and lack of verification
of the simplified procedures used to predict liquefaction at depth, as well as some of
the simplifying assumptions and empiricism within the simplified method with regard
to the calculation of liquefaction resistance (i.e., the cyclic resistance ratio CRR), limit
the depth at which these simplified procedures should be used. Therefore, simplified
empirical methods to predict liquefaction at depths greater than 50 to 60 feet should
be based on a site response analysis to obtain an appropriate, site-specific stress
reduction profile, provided that sufficient subsurface data are available and that
variability in the input ground motions is considered.
Page 6-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-5
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Until the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge Seismic Design are fully adopted in
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, the seismic design provisions in the Guide
Specifications regarding foundation design, liquefaction assessment, earthquake hazard
assessment, and ground response analysis shall be considered to supersede the parallel
seismic provisions in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
With regard to seismic hazard levels, the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications are based on the
2002 USGS website hazard model at a return period of 975 years (i.e., a probability of
exceedance of approximately 7 percent in 75 years). The GDM and BDM seismic design
requirements have been updated to use the 2014 USGS website hazard model at a
probability of exceedance of 7 percent in 75 years and shall be considered to supersede
the AASHTO specifications. Note that the USGS website refers to this hazard level as 5%
in 50 years.
For seismic design of new buildings and non-roadway infrastructure, the International
Building Code (IBC) (International Code Council), most current version should be used.
FHWA geotechnical design manuals, or other nationally recognized design manuals, are
considered secondary relative to this WSDOT GDM and the AASHTO manuals (and for
buildings, the IBC) listed above regarding WSDOT geotechnical seismic design policy,
and may be used to supplement the WSDOT GDM, WSDOT BDM, and AASHTO design
specifications.
A brief description of these additional references is as follows:
FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 3 (Kavazanjian, et al., 2011) – This
FHWA document provides design guidance for geotechnical earthquake engineering
for highways. Specifically, this document provides guidance on earthquake
fundamentals, seismic hazard analysis, ground motion characterization, site
characterization, seismic site response analysis, seismic slope stability, liquefaction,
and seismic design of foundations and retaining walls. The document also includes
design examples for typical geotechnical earthquake engineering analyses.
FHWA LRFD Seismic Analysis and Design of Bridges Reference Manual (Marsh et al.,
2014) – This manual adapts and updates FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular
No. 3 to be applicable to LRFD for Bridges and their foundations. This manual includes
both geotechnical and structural design.
Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering Textbook – The textbook titled Geotechnical
Earthquake Engineering (Kramer, 1996) provides a wealth of information to
geotechnical engineers for seismic design. The textbook includes a comprehensive
summary of seismic hazards, seismology and earthquakes, strong ground motion,
seismic hazard analysis, wave propagation, dynamic soil properties, ground response
analysis, design ground motions, liquefaction, seismic slope stability, seismic design of
retaining walls, and ground improvement.
Page 6-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
In addition, the following website may be accessed to obtain detailed ground motion data
that will be needed for design:
United States Geological Survey (USGS) Website – The USGS National Hazard
Mapping Project website https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/hazmaps is a valuable
source for information regarding the mapping seismic hazard in the United States,
and specifically on the details of the hazard model underlying the 2014 mapping. The
website also includes a Unified Hazard Tool which allows the user to extract hazard
curves and deaggregations for various return periods of interest for the 2008 and
2014 seismic hazard maps. This tool can be found at the following address:
https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/interactive
The results of the hazards analysis using the 2002 USGS website hazard model at a
probability of exceedance of 5 percent in 50 years are the same as those from the
AASHTO hazard analysis maps. However, the USGS has updated their hazards maps,
and the new 2014 hazard maps and deaggregation data shall be used for seismic
design (see USGS website for update and figures later in this GDM chapter).
Geotechnical seismic design is a rapidly developing sub-discipline within the broader
context of the geotechnical engineering discipline, and new resources such as technical
journal articles, as well as academic and government agency research reports, are
becoming available to the geotechnical engineer. It is important when using these other
resources, as well as those noted above, that a review be performed to confirm that
the guidance represents the current state of knowledge and that the methods have
received adequate independent review. Where new methods not given in the AASHTO
Specifications or herein (i.e., Chapter 6) are proposed in the subject literature, use of the
new method(s) shall be approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer for use in the project
under consideration.
6-2 Geotechnical Seismic Design Considerations
6-2.1 Overview
The geotechnical designer has four broad options available for seismic design. They are:
• Use specification/code based hazard (Section 6-3.1) with specification/code based
ground motion response (Section 6-3.2.1), also referred to as the General Procedure
• Use specification/code based hazard (Section 6-3.1) with site specific ground motion
response (Section 6-3.2.2 and Appendix 6-A)
• Use site specific hazard (Section 6-3.1 and Appendix 6-A) with specification/code
based ground motion response (Section 6-3.2.1)
• Use site specific hazard (Section 6-3.1 and Appendix 6-A) with site specific ground
motion response (Section 6-3.2.2 and Appendix 6-A)
Geotechnical parameters required for seismic design depend upon the type and
importance of the structure, the geologic conditions at the site, and the type of analysis
to be completed. For most structures, specification based design criteria appropriate
for the site’s soil conditions may be all that is required. Unusual, critical, or essential
structures may require more detailed structural analysis, requiring additional geotechnical
parameters. Finally, site conditions may require detailed geotechnical evaluation to
quantify geologic hazards.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-7
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-2.2 Site Characterization and Development of Seismic Design Parameters
As with any geotechnical investigation, the goal is to characterize the site soil conditions
and determine how those conditions will affect the structures or features constructed
when seismic events occur. In order to make this assessment, the geotechnical designer
should review and discuss the project with the structural engineer, as seismic design is a
cooperative effort between the geotechnical and structural engineering disciplines. The
geotechnical designer should do the following as a minimum:
• Identify, in coordination with the structural designer, structural characteristics
(e.g., fundamental frequency/period), anticipated method(s) of structural analysis,
performance criteria (e.g., collapse prevention, allowable horizontal displacements,
limiting settlements, target load and resistance factors, components requiring seismic
design, etc.) and design hazard levels (e.g., 7 percent PE in 75 years or 30 percent in
75 years).
• Identify, in coordination with the structural engineer, what type of ground motion
parameters are required for design (e.g., response spectra or time histories), and their
point of application (e.g., mudline, bottom of pile cap, or depth of pile fixity).
• Identify, in coordination with the structural engineer, how foundation stiffness will be
modeled and provide appropriate soil stiffness properties or soil/ foundation springs.
• Identify potential geologic hazards, areas of concern (e.g. soft soils), and potential
variability of local geology.
• Identify potential for large scale site effects (e.g., basin, topographic, and near
fault effects).
• Identify, in coordination with the structural designer, the method by which risk-
compatible ground motion parameters will be established (specification/code,
deterministic, probabilistic, or a hybrid).
• Identify engineering analyses to be performed (e.g. site specific seismic response
analysis, liquefaction susceptibility, lateral spreading/slope stability assessments).
• Identify engineering properties required for these analyses.
• Determine methods to obtain parameters and assess the validity of such methods for
the material type.
• Determine the number of tests/samples needed and appropriate locations to obtain
them.
It is assumed that the basic geotechnical investigations required for nonseismic (gravity
load) design have been or will be conducted as described in Chapters 2, 5 and the
individual project element chapters (e.g., Chapter 8 for foundations, Chapter 15 for
retaining walls, etc.). Typically, the subsurface data required for seismic design is obtained
concurrently with the data required for design of the project (i.e., additional exploration
for seismic design over and above what is required for nonseismic foundation design is
typically not necessary). However, the exploration program may need to be adjusted to
obtain the necessary parameters for seismic design. For instance, a seismic cone might
be used in conjunction with a CPT if shear wave velocity data is required. Likewise, if
liquefaction potential is a significant issue, mud rotary drilling with SPT sampling should
be used. In this case, preference shall be given to drill rigs furnished with automatic SPT
hammers that have been recently (i.e., within the past 6 months) calibrated for hammer
energy. Hollow-stem auger drilling and non-standard samplers (e.g., down-the-hole or
Page 6-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
wire-line hammers) shall not be used to collect data used in liquefaction analysis and
mitigation design, other than to obtain samples for gradation.
The goal of the site characterization for seismic design is to develop the subsurface profile
and soil property information needed for seismic analyses. Soil parameters generally
required for seismic design include:
• Dynamic shear modulus at small strains or shear wave velocity;
• Shear modulus and material damping characteristics as a function of shear strain;
• Cyclic and post-cyclic shear strength parameters (peak and residual);
• Consolidation parameters such as the Compression Index or Percent Volumetric Strain
resulting from pore pressure dissipation after cyclic loading, and
• Liquefaction resistance parameters.
Table 6-1 provides a summary of site characterization needs and testing considerations
for geotechnical/seismic design.
Chapter 5 covers the requirements for using the results from the field investigation,
the field testing, and the laboratory testing program separately or in combination to
establish properties for static design. Many of these requirements are also applicable for
seismic design.
For routine designs, in-situ field measurements or laboratory testing for parameters
such as the dynamic shear modulus at small strains, shear modulus and damping ratio
characteristics versus shear strain, and residual shear strength are generally not obtained.
Instead, correlations based on index properties may be used in lieu of in-situ or laboratory
measurements for routine design to estimate these values. However, if a site specific
ground motion response analysis is conducted, field measurements of the shear wave
velocity Vs should be obtained.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-9
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Table 6-1 Summary of Site Characterization Needs and Testing Considerations for Seismic Design
(Adapted From Sabatini, et al., 2002)
Geotechnical Engineering
Issues Evaluations Required Information for Analyses Field Testing Laboratory Testing
Site •source •subsurface profile (soil, groundwater, •SPT •Atterberg limits
Response characterization depth to rock) •CPT •grain size
and ground •shear wave velocity •seismic cone distribution
motion •shear modulus for low strains •specific gravity
•geophysical
attenuation
•relationship of shear modulus with testing (shear •moisture
•site response increasing shear strain, OCR, and PI wave velocity) content
spectra
•equivalent viscous damping ratio •piezometer •unit weight
•time history with increasing shear strain, OCR, •resonant column
and PI •cyclic direct
•Poisson’s ratio simple shear test
•unit weight •torsional simple
•relative density shear test
•seismicity (design earthquakes •cyclic triaxial
- source, distance, magnitude, tests
recurrence)
Geologic •liquefaction •subsurface profile (soil, groundwater, •SPT •grain size
Hazards susceptibility rock) •CPT distribution
Evaluation •liquefaction •shear strength (peak and residual) •seismic cone •Atterberg Limits
(e.g., triggering •unit weights •specific gravity
•Becker
liquefaction, •liquefaction •grain size distribution penetration test •organic content
lateral induced
spreading, •plasticity characteristics •vane shear test •moisture
settlement content
slope •relative density •piezometers
•settlement of dry •unit weight
stability, •penetration resistance •geophysical
sands
faulting) •shear wave velocity testing (shear •soil shear
•lateral spreading wave velocity) strength tests
and flow failure •seismicity (PGA, design earthquakes,
deaggregation data, ground motion (static and cyclic)
•slope stability •post-cyclic
time histories)
and deformations volumetric strain
•site topography
Input for •soil stiffness for •subsurface profile (soil, groundwater, •CPT •grain size
Structural shallow rock) •SPT distribution
Design •foundations (e.g., •shear strength (peak and residual) •seismic cone •Atterberg limits
springs) •coefficient of horizontal subgrade •piezometers •specific gravity
•P-Y data for deep reaction •geophysical •moisture
foundations •seismic horizontal earth pressure testing (shear content
•down-drag on coefficients wave velocity, •unit weight
deep foundations •shear modulus for low strains or resistivity, •resonant column
•residual strength shear wave velocity natural gamma) •cyclic direct
•lateral earth •relationship of shear modulus with •vane shear test simple shear test
pressures increasing shear strain •pressuremeter •triaxial tests
•lateral spreading/ •unit weight (static and cyclic)
slope movement •Poisson’s ratio •torsional shear
loading •seismicity (PGA, design earthquake, test
•post earthquake response spectrum, ground motion •direct shear
settlement time histories) interface tests
•Kinematic •site topography
soil-structure •Interface shear strength
interaction
Page 6-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
If correlations are used to obtain seismic soil design properties, and site- or region-
specific relationships are not available, then the following correlations should be used:
• Table 6-2, which presents correlations for estimating initial shear modulus based on
relative density, penetration resistance or void ratio.
• Shear modulus reduction and equivalent viscous damping ratio equations by Darendeli
(2001) as provided in equations 6-1 through 6-7, applicable to all soils except peats
and gravels.
• For gravels, shear modulus reduction and viscous damping relationships provided in
Rollins, et al. (1998).
• For peats, shear modulus reduction and viscous damping relationships provided in
Kramer (1996, 2000).
• Figures 6-1 through 6-3, which present charts for estimating equivalent undrained
residual shear strength for liquefied soils as a function of SPT blowcounts. These
figures primarily apply to sands and silty sands. It is recommended that all these
figures be checked to estimate residual strength and averaged using a weighting
scheme. Table 6-3 presents an example of a weighting scheme as recommended
by Kramer (2007). Designers using these correlations should familiarize themselves
with how the correlations were developed, assumptions used, and any limitations
of the correlations as discussed in the source documents for the correlations before
selecting a final weighting scheme to use for a given project. Alternate correlations
based on CPT data may also be considered. For silts, laboratory testing using cyclic
simple shear or cyclic triaxial testing should be conducted (see GDM Section 6-4.2.6).
Designers are encouraged to develop region or project specific correlations for these
seismic design properties. Other well accepted correlations in peer reviewed publications
may be used, subject to the approval of the State Geotechnical Engineer.
Regarding Figure 6-3, two curves are provided, one in which void redistribution is likely,
and one in which void redistribution is not likely. Void redistribution becomes more likely
if a relatively thick liquefiable layer is capped by relatively impermeable layer. Sufficient
thickness of a saturated liquefiable layer is necessary to generate enough water for void
redistribution to occur, and need capping by a relatively impermeable layer to prevent
pore pressures from dissipating, allowing localized loosening near the top of the confined
liquefiable layer. Engineering judgment will need to be applied to determine which curve
in Figure 6-3 to use.
When using the above correlations, the potential effects of variations between the
dynamic property from the correlation and the dynamic property for the particular
soil should be considered in the analysis. The published correlations were developed
by evaluating the response of a range of soil types; however, for any specific soil, the
behavior of any specific soil can depart from the average, falling either above or below the
average. These differences can affect the predicted response of the soil. For this reason
sensitivity studies should be conducted to evaluate the potential effects of property
variation on the design prediction.
For those cases where a single value of the property can be used with the knowledge that
the design is not very sensitive to variations in the property being considered, a sensitivity
analysis may not be required.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-11
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Table 6-2 Correlations for Estimating Initial Shear Modulus (Adapted from Kavazanjian, et al., 2011)
Reference Correlation Units (1) Limitations
Seed et al. (1984) Gmax = 220 (K2)max (σ’m)½ kPa (K2)max is about 30 for very loose
(K2)max = 20(N1)601/3 sands and 75 for very dense
sands; about 80 to 180 for dense
well graded gravels; Limited to
cohesionless soils
Imai and Tonouchi (1982) Gmax = 15,560 N600.68 kPa Limited to cohesionless soils
Hardin (1978) Gmax = (6.25/0.3+eo1.3)(Paσ’m)0.5OCRk kPa(1)(3) Limited to cohesive soils Pa =
atmospheric pressure
Jamiolkowski, et al.. (1991) Gmax = 6.25/(eo1.3)(Paσ’m)0.5OCRk kPa(1)(3) Limited to cohesive soils Pa =
atmospheric pressure
Mayne and Rix (1993) Gmax = 99.5(Pa)0.305(qc)0.695/(e0)1.13 kPa(2) Limited to cohesive soils Pa =
atmospheric pressure
Notes:
(1) 1 kPa = 20.885 psf
(2) Pa and qc in kPa
(3) The parameter k is related to the plasticity index, PI, as follows:
PI k
0 0
20 0.18
40 0.30
60 0.41
80 0.48
>100 0.50
Modulus Reduction Curve (Darendeli, 2001) – The modulus reduction curve for soil, as a
function of shear strain, should be calculated as shown in Equations 6-1 and 6-2.
G 1 (6-1)
= a
Gmax ⎛γ ⎞
1 + ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝γr ⎠
where,
G = shear modulus at shear strain γ, in the same units as Gmax
γ = shear strain (%), and
a = 0.92
γr is defined in Equation 6-2 as:
r 1 2 PI OCR 0' 3
4 (6-2)
where,
2rrPI
r 1 r= 0.0352; 1
1OCR PI =0.3246;
00 0
4 ' ' ' 4 4 4
PI
2 PI
12 2=
3
OCR
OCR
0.0010;0' OCR
= 0.3483 (from regression),
3 3 3
OCR = overconsolidation ratio for soil
σ′0 = effective vertical stress, in atmospheres, and
PI = plastic index, in %
Page 6-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
1 2 3 4
φOCR
1 == 0.0352; φ2 = 0.0010;
overconsolidation φ3 for
ratio soil φ4 = 0.3483 (from regression),
= 0.3246;
OCR
where,
where,
Seismic Design σ′0
= overconsolidation ratio for soil
= effective vertical stress, in atmospheres, and Chapter 6
φPI
φ1110
σ′ === effective
0.0352; φφvertical
0.0352;index,
plastic 2
22
=
= 0.0010;
0.0010;
in % φφ
stress, 3
33
=in
= 0.3246; φφ
atmospheres,
0.3246; 4
44
=
= 0.3483
and
0.3483 (from
(from regression),
regression),
PI
OCR
OCR = = plastic index, in %ratio
overconsolidation
overconsolidation ratio for
for soil
soil
Damping
Damping Curve(Darendelli,
Curve (Darendeli, 2001)2001) ––TheThe damping
dampingratioratio for
forsoil,
soil,asasa afunction
functionofofshear
σ′
Damping
strain, == effective
σ′000 should
Curve effective
be
vertical
vertical
(Darendelli,
calculated as
stress,
stress,
2001)
shown – in
in
The
in
atmospheres,
atmospheres,
damping
Equations
and
and
ratio
6-3 for
throughsoil, as
6-7. a function of
shear
PI
PI strain,==should beindex,
plastic
plastic calculated
index, in
in %% as shown in Equations 6-3 through 6-7.
shear strain, should be calculated as shown in Equations 6-3 through 6-7.
Initial
Initial
Damping
Damping step: Compute
step:
Curve
CurveCompute closed-form
closed-form
(Darendelli,
(Darendelli, 2001)
2001)expression
expression
–– The forfor
The damping
dampingMasing
Masing
ratio Damping
Damping
for soil,
ratioDamping
for for
soil, as
as aaafunction
for a==1.0
1.0 (standard
function of
of
Initial step:
hyperbolic
(standard Compute
backbone
hyperbolic closed-form
curve):
backbone expression
curve): for Masing for a = 1.0
shearstrain,
shear
(standard strain, shouldbe
should
hyperbolic be calculated
calculated
backbone asshown
as
curve):shownin inEquations
Equations6-3 6-3through
through6-7. 6-7.
Initialstep: step:Compute
Computeclosed-form closed-form expression foraa==1.0 (6-3)
Initial ⎡ expression ⎛ γ for +for Masing
γ Masing
r ⎞
Dampingfor
⎤ Damping 1.0
(standard
(standard hyperbolic
hyperbolic backbone backbone curve): ⎡⎢
curve):γ - γ ln ⎜
⎛γ +γ ⎞ ⎟ ⎤⎥
100 ⎢ γ - γ r ln⎜⎜⎜⎝ γ r r ⎟⎟⎟⎠ ⎥
r
DMasing, a =1(γ) [%] = = 100 4 γ −2 (6-3)
DMasing, a =1(γ) [%] = = π ⎡⎢⎢⎡4 γ⎛⎝⎛22γγ ++rγγr ⎞⎠⎞ − 2⎤⎥⎤ (6-3)
π ⎢⎢ γγ --γγrrrγln γ+⎜⎜⎜⎜γ r r ⎟⎟⎟⎟ ⎥⎥⎥
ln
100⎢⎣⎢
100 ⎢
γ + ⎝⎝γ rγγrrr ⎠⎠ ⎥⎥⎦⎥
DDMasing, =1(γ)
=1(γ) [%]
[%] == == ⎢ 4 4 −−22⎥⎦⎥⎥ (6-3)
(6-3)
π ⎣⎢⎢
Masing,aaa
Masing, r
222
For other values of a (e.g., a = 0.92, π γ γ
⎢ asasused
⎢0.92, to calculate⎥⎥G):
ForFor other other values
values of of a (e.g.,
a (e.g., a= a =0.92,
⎢⎣⎢⎣ as used γγused
++γγtorrrtocalculate
calculateG):
⎥⎥
G):
DMasing, a (γ) [%] = c1(Dmasing, a=1) + c2(Dmasing, a=1)2 ⎦+⎦ c3(Dmasing, a=1)3 (6-4)
DMasing, a (γ) [%] = c1(Dmasing, a=1) + c2(Dmasing, a=1)2 + c3(Dmasing, a=1)3 (6-4)(6-4)
For
For other
other values
values of of aa (e.g.,
(e.g., aa == 0.92, 0.92, as as usedused to to calculate
calculate G): G):
Where,
Where,
cD1Masing, (γ)[%][%]==c+c111(D (Dmasing, ))++cc222(D (D 2masing, a=1))222++cc3(D (Dmasing, 333
a=1)) (6-4)
Where,
D Masing,=
Masing, aaa(γ)0.2523 1.8618a
masing,
masing,a=1 –a=11.1143a
a=1 masing,a=1
masing, a=1 33 masing, a=1
masing,a=1 (6-4)
cc1 c1 === 0.2523 0.2523 + + 1.8618a
1.8618a
– 0.0095 – 0.0710a + 0.0805a – – 1.1143a
1.1143a 2 2 2
2
ccWhere,
Where,
23
c 2 =
== – – 0.0095
0.0095
0.0003 –0.0002a
0.0710a
–+0.0710a +0.0005a
+ –0.0805a 0.0805a 2 2 2
cc1311c3 === 0.0003 0.2523
0.0003
0.2523 1.8618a
++ 0.0002a
1.8618a
+ 0.0002a – 0.0005a 1.1143a
1.1143a222
–– 0.0005a 2
Finalc step: Compute damping ratio +as0.0805a function 222 of shear strain:
Final == ––0.0095
c222step: Compute 0.0095damping––0.0710a
0.0710a
ratio +as0.0805afunction
0.1
of shear strain:
cDc333(γ ) = == 0.0003
0.0003 ++ 0.0002a
0.0002a ⎛ G ⎞
–– 0.0005a
0.0005a 2
2 2
(6-5)
Final step: min D +
Compute bD Madamping ( γ ) ⎜
⎛⎜ ratio ⎟ 0.1
G ⎞⎟as function of shear strain:
D ( γ ) = D + bD
sin g
(γ )⎜ G
⎝ratio ⎟ (6-5)
Finalstep:
Final step:Compute
Compute
min damping
damping
Ma sin g ⎜ratio as⎟⎠ function
maxas functionof ofshear
shearstrain:
strain:
Where: ⎝ Gmax ⎠000..11.1 (6-5)
Where: ⎛⎛ G G ⎞⎞ (6-5)
(6-5)
= DD((γγ))== D Dmin + bDMa sinsinggg((γγ))⎜⎜⎜⎜φ8
min + bDMa ⎟⎟φ
Dmin = φ6min ( + φ7 × PIMasin × OCR⎝φ⎝G ) Gmax σ⎟⎠'0'⎟⎠φ99 × (1 + φ10 ln( freq) )
×max
DWhere:
Where: (
min = φ6 + φ7 × PI × OCR
b = φ11 + φ12 × ln( N )
Where,
) 8
× σ 0 × (1 + φ10 ln( freq) )
max (6-6)
(6-6)
(6-7)
= D
Where:
Dmin min =
min = ((
b = φ11 + φ12 × ln( N )
φφ 666
+
+ φφ777
×× PI
PI × × OCR
OCR ))
φφφ888 × σ '' φ' φ999 × (1 + φ ln( freq ) )
× σ 000
φ
× ( 1 + φ 10
1010 ln( freq ) ) (6-7)
(6-6)
(6-6)
(6-6)
Where:
freq = frequency of loading, in Hz
= bb==φφ11 ++φφ1212frequency
××ln(ln(NN)) (6-7)
freq
N 1111 == 12 number ofof loading,
loading cycles in Hz (6-7)
(6-7)
NφWhere:
Where:
Where:
== number0.8005; of loading cycles φ7 = 0.0129;
6
freq
φφfreq =
== frequency
0.8005;
frequency
-0.1069;
68freq = frequency of loading, in Hz
of
of loading,
loading, in
in HzHz φ 7 = 0.0129;
φφN8 N =
N =
== number
-0.1069;
number
number
-0.2889; of
of loading
loading
of loading cycles cycles
cycles φ10= 0.2919;
9
φφφ69611 = = =
0.6329;
6φ6 = 0.8005; -0.2889;
0.8005;
0.8005;
φ = -0.0057 φφφ10 = 0.2919;
0.0129;
777= 0.0129;
12
φφ81188φ= =
0.6329;
=
= 0.0129;
-0.1069;
φ
-0.1069;
12 = -0.0057
7
φφ999φ = = -0.2889;
-0.2889;
= -0.1069;
Model Weighting Factor φφ1010==0.2919;
10 0.2919;
8 Model Weighting Factor
φφ11 11φ
11
== 0.6329;
0.6329;
= -0.2889;
φ
φ 12
12
12
== -0.0057
-0.0057
Idriss 0.2
9
Idriss 0.2
φ10 = 0.2919;Olson-Stark 0.2
Model
Model
Olson-Stark Weighting
Weighting
0.2 Factor
Factor
Idriss-Boulanger
φ11 = 0.6329; 0.2
Idriss
Idriss
Idriss-Boulanger 0.2
0.2
0.2
φ12 = -0.0057 Hybrid 0.4
Olson-Stark
Olson-Stark
Hybrid 0.2
0.2
0.4
Weighting Factors for Residual
Idriss-Boulanger
Idriss-Boulanger 0.2
0.2
Table 6-3 Weighting
Weighting Factors for Residual
Factors for Strength
Residual
Strength
Hybrid
Hybrid Estimation (Kramer, 0.4 2007)
0.4
Estimation (Kramer,
Strength Estimation 2007)
(Kramer, 2007)
Table 6-3
ModelWeighting Table
WeightingFactors 6-3
Weighting
Factors Factor
forResidual
for Residual
Page 6-12 Strength WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
Strength Estimation
Idriss Estimation (Kramer,
(Kramer,
0.2 2007)
2007)
Page 6-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Table 6-3
Table 6-3
Olson-Stark 0.2 December 2013
Page 6-12
Page6-12
Page 6-12 Idriss-Boulanger 0.2
WSDOT Geotechnical
WSDOTGeotechnical
WSDOT Design
GeotechnicalDesign Manual
DesignManual
Manual MM 46-03.09
M46-03.09
46-03.09
December
December
December 2013
2013
2013
Hybrid 0.4
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-13
July 2019
Chapter 6 Estimation of Residual Strength from SPT Resistance Seismic Design
(Idriss and Boulanger, 2007)
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-1 Estimation of Residual Strength Ratio from SPT Resistance (Olson and Stark, 2002)
Normalized SPT Blowcount, (N1)60
Estimation of Residual Strength Ratio from SPT Resistance
(Olson and Stark, 2002)
Figure 6-2 Estimation of Residual Strength Ratio from SPT Resistance (Idriss and Boulanger, 2007)
Figure 6-2
Page 6-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Page 6-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design
Seismic Design Chapter 66
Chapter
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Figure 6-3 Estimation of Residual Strength Ratio from SPT Resistance (Idriss and Boulanger, 2007)
Estimation
Estimation of
of Residual
Residual Strength
Strength Ratio
Ratio from
from SPT
SPT
Resistance (Idriss and Boulanger, 2007)
Resistance (Idriss and Boulanger, 2007)
Figure
Figure 6-3
6-3
Figure Estimation of Residual Strength Ratio from SPT Vertical Effective
Figure 6-4
6-4 Variation
Variation of
of Residual
Residual Strength Ratio
Ratio with
Strength(Idriss
Resistance with
and
SPT
SPT Resistance
Resistance
Boulanger,
and
and Initial
2007) Initial Vertical Effective
Stress
Stress Using
Using Kramer-Wang
Kramer-Wang Model (Kramer,
ModelFigure
(Kramer, 2007)
2007)
6-3
Variation
Variation of
of Residual
Residual Strength
Strength Ratio
Ratio with
with SPT
SPT Resistance
Resistance and
and
Initial
Initial Vertical Effective Stress Using Kramer-Wang Model (Kramer, 2007)
Vertical Effective Stress Using Kramer-Wang Model (Kramer, 2007)
Figure
Figure 6-4
6-4
Variation of Residual Strength Ratio with SPT Resistance and
Initial Vertical Effective Stress Using Kramer-Wang Model (Kramer, 2007)
Figure 6-4
WSDOT
WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical Design
Design Manual
Manual M
M 46-03.09
46-03.09 Page
Page 6-17
6-17
December 2013
December 2013
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-15
Geotechnical
January 2019 Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-15
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 6-17
July 2019
December 2013
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-2.3 Information for Structural Design
The geotechnical designer shall recommend a design earthquake ground motion based
on the SEE for normal bridges and both the SEE and FEE for essential and critical
bridges, and shall evaluate geologic hazards for the project. For code based ground
motion analysis, the geotechnical designer shall provide the Site Class B/C boundary
spectral accelerations at periods of 0.2 and 1.0 seconds, the PGA, the site class, and site
coefficients for the PGA and spectral accelerations to account for the effect of the site
class on the design accelerations.
In addition, the geotechnical designer should evaluate the site and soil conditions to the
extent necessary to provide the following input for structural design, with consideration
to the structure classification (i.e., normal, essential, or critical bridges) and the hazard
level required (i.e., SEE for normal bridges, and both SEE and FEE for essential and
critical bridges):
• Foundation spring values for dynamic loading (lateral and vertical), as well as
geotechnical parameters for evaluation of sliding resistance applicable to the
foundation design. If liquefaction is possible, spring values for liquefied conditions
should also be provided (primarily applies to deep foundations, as in general, shallow
footings are not used over liquefied soils).
• Earthquake induced earth pressures (active and passive) for retaining structures and
below grade walls, and other geotechnical parameters, such as sliding resistance,
needed to complete the seismic design of the wall.
• If requested by the structural designer, passive soil springs to use to model the
abutment fill resistance to seismic motion of the bridge.
• Impacts of seismic geologic hazards including fault rupture, liquefaction, lateral
spreading, flow failure, and slope instability on the structure, including estimated loads
and deformations acting on the structure due to the effects of the geologic hazard.
• If requested by the structural designer, for long bridges, potential for incoherent
ground motion effects.
• Options to mitigate seismic geologic hazards, such as ground improvement. Note
that seismic soil properties used for design should reflect the presence of the soil
improvement.
Page 6-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
6-3 Seismic Hazard and Site Ground Motion Response Requirements
For most projects, design code/specification based seismic hazard and ground motion
response (referred to as the “General Procedure” in the AASHTO Guide Specifications
for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design) are appropriate and shall be used, except that the 2014
seismic hazard data and maps described previously shall be used instead of the 2002
hazard information provided in the AASHTO Specifications. However, a site specific
hazard or ground motion response analysis is required in situations for which the General
Procedure is not applicable, and may also be considered for situations in which the
General Procedure is applicable.
6-3.1 Determination of Seismic Hazard Level
All transportation structures (e.g., bridges, pedestrian bridges, walls, , etc.) classified as
“other” or “normal” (i.e., not critical or essential) are designed for the SEE (see Section
6-1.2.1) based on a hazard level of 7 percent PE in 75 years (i.e., an approximately
1,000 year return period). For essential or critical bridges, a two level seismic hazard
design is required: the Safety Evaluation Earthquake (SEE) and the Functional Evaluation
Earthquake (FEE). In this case, the SEE hazard level is as defined above. The FEE is
based on a hazard level of 30 percent probability of exceedance in 75 years (or 210-year
return period).
For buildings on terminal structures, the design hazard level shall be consistent with IBC
requirements, which uses a risk adjusted 2,475 year event as its basis (MCER).
The AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design shall be used for WSDOT
transportation facilities for code/specification based seismic hazard evaluation, except
that Figures 6-5, 6-6, and 6-7 shall be used to estimate the PGA, 0.2 sec. spectral
acceleration (Ss), and 1.0 sec. spectral acceleration values (S1), respectively, for the
SEE. By definition for Figures 6-5, 6-6, and 6-7, PGA, SS and S1 are for the Site Class
B/C boundary (very hard or very dense soil or soft rock) conditions. The PGA contours
in Figure 6-5, in addition Ss and S1 in Figures 6-6 and 6-7, are based on information
published by the USGS National Seismic Hazards Mapping Project (USGS, 2014) and
supersede the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design. Interpolation between contours in Figures
6-5, 6-6, and 6-7 should be used when establishing the PGA for the Site Class B/C
boundary for a project. High resolution images of these three acceleration maps are
provided in Appendix 6-B.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-17
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Figure 6-5 Peak Horizontal Acceleration (%G) for 7% Probability of Exceedance in 75 Years for Site
Chapter 6 Class B/C Boundary (Adapted From USGS 2014) Seismic Design
Peak Horizontal Acceleration (%G) for 7% Probability of Exceedance in 75 Years for Site Class B/C
Boundary (Adapted From USGS 2014)
Figure 6-5
Page 6-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Figure 6-6 Horizontal Spectral Acceleration at 0.2 Second Period (%g) for 7% Probability of
Exceedance in 75 Years with 5% of Critical Damping for Site Class B/C Boundary
Seismic Design
(Adapted from USGS 2014) Chapter 6
Horizontal Spectral Acceleration at 0.2 Second Period (%g) for 7% Probability of Exceedance in
75 Years with 5% of Critical Damping for Site Class B/C Boundary (Adapted from AASHTO 2014)
Figure 6-6
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-19
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Figure 6-7 Horizontal Spectral Acceleration at 1.0 Second Period (%g) for 7% Probability of
Exceedance in 75 Years With 5% of Critical Damping for Site Class B/C Boundary
Chapter 6 (Adapted from USGS 2014) Seismic Design
Horizontal Spectral Acceleration
To obtain at 1.0
the PGA, 0.2 sec.Second
spectralPeriod (%g) for
acceleration (Ss),7%
andProbability of Exceedance
1.0 sec. spectral accelerationin 75
Years With 5% of Critical Damping for Site Class B/C Boundary (Adapted from AASHTO 2014)
values (S ) for the FEE i.e., 30 percent probability of exceedance in 75 years (or 210-year
1 Figure 6-7
return period), go to the USGS website at:
https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/interactive
When a transportation structure (e.g., bridges, walls, and WSF terminal structures such
as docks, etc.) is designated as critical or essential by WSDOT, a more stringent seismic
hazard level may be required by the State Bridge Engineer. If a different hazard level than
that specified herein and in the AASHTO LRFD Seismic design specifications is selected,
the most current seismic hazard maps from the USGS National Seismic Hazards Mapping
Project should be used, unless a site specific seismic hazard analysis is conducted, subject
to the approval of the State Bridge Engineer and State Geotechnical Engineer.
Page 6-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
A site specific hazard analysis should be considered in the following situations:
• A more accurate assessment of hazard level is desired, or
• Information about one or more active seismic sources for the site has become
available since the USGS Seismic Hazard Maps specified herein (USGS 2014) were
developed, and the new seismic source information may result in a significant change
of the seismic hazard at the site.
If the site is located within 6 miles of a known active fault capable of producing a
magnitude 5 or greater earthquake and near fault effects are not adequately modeled in
the development of ground motion maps used, directivity and directionality effects shall
be addressed as described in Article 3.4.3.1 of the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD
Seismic Bridge Design and its commentary.
If a site specific hazard analysis is conducted, it shall be conducted in accordance with
AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design and GDM Appendix 6-A.
If a site specific probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA) is conducted, it shall be
conducted in a manner to generate a uniform-hazard acceleration response spectrum
considering a 7 percent probability of exceedance in 75 years for spectral values over the
entire period range of interest. This analysis shall follow the same basic approach as used
by the USGS in developing seismic hazards maps for AASHTO and for the 2014 maps
included in this GDM chapter. In this approach it is necessary to establish the following:
• The contributing seismic sources,
• A magnitude fault-rupture-length or source area relation for each contributing fault or
source area to estimate an upper-bound earthquake magnitude for each source zone,
• Median ground motion attenuation equations for acceleration response spectral
values and their associated standard deviations,
• A magnitude-recurrence relation for each source zone, and
• Weighting factors, with justification, for all branches of logic trees used to establish
ground shaking hazards.
AASHTO allows site-specific ground motion hazard levels to be based on a deterministic
seismic hazard analysis (DSHA) in regions of known active faults, provided that
deterministic spectrum is no less than two-thirds of the probabilistic spectrum (see
AASHTO Article 3.10.2.2). This requires that:
• The ground motion hazard at a particular site is largely from known faults (e.g.,
“random” seismicity is not a significant contributor to the hazard), and
• The recurrence interval for large earthquakes on the known faults are generally
less than the return period corresponding to the specified seismic hazard level (e.g.,
the earthquake recurrence interval is less than a return period of 1,000 years that
corresponds to a seismic hazard level of 7 percent probability of exceedance in
75 years).
Currently, these conditions are generally not met for sites in Washington State. Approval
by the State Geotechnical Engineer and State Bridge Engineer is required before DSHA-
based ground motion hazard level is used on a WSDOT project.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-21
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Where use of a deterministic spectrum is appropriate, the spectrum shall be either:
• The envelope of a median spectra calculated for characteristic maximum magnitude
earthquakes on known active faults; or
• The deterministic spectra for each fault, and in the absence of a clearly controlling
spectrum, each spectrum should be used.
Uncertainties in source modeling and parameter values shall be taken into consideration
in the PSHA and DSHA. Detailed documentation of seismic hazard analysis shall be
provided.
For buildings, restrooms, and shelters, specification based seismic design parameters
required by the most current version of the International Building Code (IBC) shall be
used. For covered pedestrian walkways, the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or
AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design shall be used.
The seismic design requirements of the IBC are based on a hazard level of 2 percent
PE in 50 years which has been risk adjusted. The 2 percent PE in 50 years hazard level
corresponds to the maximum considered earthquake (MCE), and the risk adjusted
earthquake (MCER) corresponds to 1 percent probability of collapse in 50 years. The
IBC identifies procedures to develop a maximum considered earthquake acceleration
response spectrum, at the ground surface by adjusting Site Class B/C boundary spectra
for local site conditions, similar to the methods used by AASHTO except that the
probability of exceedance is lower (i.e., 2 percent in 50 years versus 7 percent in 75
years). However, the IBC defines the design response spectrum as two-thirds of the
value of the maximum considered earthquake acceleration response spectrum. As is true
for transportation structures, for critical or unique structures, for sites characterized as
soil profile Type F (thick sequence of soft soils in the IBC) or liquefiable soils, or for soil
conditions that do not adequately match the specification based soil profile types, site
specific response analysis may be required as discussed in Appendix 6-A.
6-3.2 Site Ground Motion Response Analysis
6-3.2.1 General Procedure
The AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge Seismic Design require that site
effects be included in determining seismic loads for design of bridges. Article 3.4.1 of the
AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge Seismic Design (also Article 3.10.4.1 of
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications) provide requirements for developing a
design response spectrum when using the General Procedure. When conducting a seismic
design based on the General Procedure, the site response spectrum shall be developed
in accordance with the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge Seismic Design,
except that the USGS 2014 deaggregation/ground motions as depicted in Figures 6-5,
6-6, and 6-7 shall be used to establish the PGA, Ss, and S1 accelerations used as input.
With regard to characterization of the site subsurface conditions, Tables 6-4, 6-5, and 6-6
shall be used as input to establish the site seismic response spectrum instead of the site
coefficients provided in the AASHTO specifications.
Page 6-22 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
The guide specifications characterize all subsurface conditions with six Site Classes (A
through F). The site soil coefficients for PGA (Fpga), SS (Fa), and S1 (Fv) provided in the
Guide Specifications are updated herein for use with the 2014 seismic acceleration maps.
Site soil coefficients for five of the Site Classes (A through E) are provided in Tables 6-4,
6-5, and 6-6. Code/specification based response spectra that include the effect of ground
motion amplification or de-amplification from the soil/rock stratigraphy at the site can
be developed from the PGA, SS, S1 and the Site-Class based site coefficients Fpga, Fa, and
Fv. Note that the site class should be determined considering the soils up to the ground
surface, not just soil below the foundations.
The geotechnical designer shall determine the appropriate site coefficient (Fpga for PGA,
Fa for SS, and Fv for S1) to construct the code/specification based response spectrum for
the specific site subsurface conditions.
Table 6-4 Values of Site Coefficient, Fpga, for Peak Ground Acceleration
Mapped Peak Ground Acceleration Coefficient (PGA)
Site Class PGA ≤ 0.10 PGA = 0.2 PGA = 0.3 PGA = 0.4 PGA = 0.5 PGA ≥ 0.6
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
C 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
D 1.6 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.1
E 2.4 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1
F * * * * * *
* Site-specific response geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis should be considered.
Note: Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of PGA.
Table 6-5 Values of Site Coefficient, Fa, for 0.2-sec Period Spectral Acceleration
Mapped Spectral Acceleration Coefficient at Period 0.2 sec (Ss)
Site Class Ss ≤ 0.25 Ss = 0.50 Ss = 0.75 Ss = 1.00 Ss = 1.25 Ss ≥ 1.50
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
C 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
D 1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0
E 2.4 1.7 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.9
F * * * * * *
* Site-specific response geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis should be considered,
Note: Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of Ss.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-23
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Table 6-6 Values of Site Coefficient, Fv, for 1.0-sec Period Spectral Acceleration
Mapped Spectral Acceleration Coefficient at Period 1.0 sec (S1)
Site Class S1 ≤ 0.1 S1 = 0.2 S1 = 0.3 S1 = 0.4 S1 = 0.5 S1 ≥ 0.6
A 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
B 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
C 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.4
D 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7
E 4.2 3.3 2.8 2.4 2.2 2.0
F * * * * * *
* Site-specific response geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis should be considered,
Note: Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of S1.
6-3.2.2 Site Specific Ground Motion Response Analysis
When to Conduct: A site specific ground motion response analysis shall be performed in
the following situations:
• The facility is identified as critical or essential,
• Sites where geologic conditions are likely to result in un-conservative spectral
acceleration values if the generalized code response spectra is used (e.g., within the
upper 100 ft a sharp change in impedance between subsurface strata is present,
etc.), or
• Site subsurface conditions are classified as Site Class F, and in some cases Site Class E
as identified in Table 6-5.
There may be other reasons why the general procedure cannot be used, such as the
situation where the spectral acceleration coefficient at 1.0 second is greater than the
spectral acceleration coefficient at 0.2 second. In such cases, a site specific ground
motion analysis should be conducted. A site specific ground motion response analysis
should also be considered for sites where:
• the effects of liquefaction on the ground motion response could be overly
conservative.
• basin effects could have a strong impact on the ground motion. However, the current
(2014) acceleration maps partially consider basin effects. Whether or not basin effects
should be considered for a particular site will be determined on a case by case basis as
directed by the State Geotechnical Engineer and State Bridge Engineer.
Note that where the response spectrum is developed using a site-specific hazard analysis,
a site specific ground motion response analysis, or both, the AASHTO specifications
require that the spectrum not be lower than two-thirds of the response spectrum at the
ground surface determined using the general procedure as specified in the AASHTO
Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, Article 3.4.1. For this comparison,
the general procedure response spectrum is adjusted by the site coefficients (e.g., Fpga)
in Tables 6-4, 6-5, and 6-6 in the region of 0.5TF to 2TF of the spectrum, where TF is
the bridge fundamental period. For other analyses such as liquefaction assessment and
retaining wall design, the free field acceleration at the ground surface determined from
a site specific analysis should not be less than two-thirds of the PGA multiplied by the
specification based site coefficient Fpga.
Page 6-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
No site coefficients are available for Site Class F and in some cases Site Class E. In these
cases, a site specific ground response analysis shall be conducted (see the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Bridge Seismic Design for additional details on site conditions
that are considered to be included in Site Class F). Furthermore, there are no site
coefficients for liquefiable soils. No consensus currently exists regarding the appropriate
site coefficients for these cases. When estimating the minimum ground surface response
spectrum using two-thirds of the response spectrum from the specification based
procedures provided in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design
and as provided herein, unless directed otherwise by the State Geotechnical Engineer and
the State Bridge Engineer, the following approach shall be used:
• For liquefiable sites, use the specification based site coefficient for soil conditions
without any modifications for liquefaction. This approach is believed to be
conservative for higher frequency motions (i.e., TF < 1.0 sec).
• If a site specific ground response analysis is conducted, the response spectrum shall
not be lower than two-thirds of the non-liquefied specification based spectrum,
unless specifically approved by the State Bridge and Geotechnical Engineers to go
lower. When accepting a spectrum lower than the specification based spectrum, the
uncertainties in the analysis method should be carefully reviewed, particularly for
longer periods (i.e., T > 1.0 sec.) where increases in the spectral ordinate may occur.
Because of this, for structures that are characterized as having a fundamental period,
TF, greater than 1.0 sec., a site specific ground response analysis shall be conducted if
liquefiable soils are determined to be present.
Sites that contain a strong impedance contrast, i.e., a boundary between adjacent
layers with shear wave velocities that differ by a factor of 2 or more are not specifically
considered in the site soil coefficients and a site- specific seismic ground response
analysis should be conducted. The strong impedance contrast can occur where a thin soil
profile (e.g., < 20 to 30 feet) overlies rock or where layers of soft and stiff soils occur.
How to Conduct: Input ground motion (i.e., acceleration time histories) selection and
processing (e.g., matching through scaling with consideration to a target spectrum) for
site specific ground motion response analyses should be conducted using procedures
provided in Kramer et al. (2012). A WSDOT website link to the ground motion selection
and processing tool cited in that reference (i.e., a modified version of SigmaSpectra with a
ground motion database developed for Washington) is as follows:
http://www.wsdot.wa.gov/Business/MaterialsLab/GeotechnicalServices.htm
Additional background and guidance on the subject of input ground motion selection and
processing to produce a site specific base rock spectrum for conducting a site specific
ground motion response analysis is provided in Kramer (1996), Bommer and Acevedo
(2004), NEHRP (2011), and Kavazanjian, et al. (2011).
Once the input (i.e., base rock) ground motions are established, the frequency domain
site specific response spectra needed for structure design (also commonly referred to as
a site response analysis) is developed based on the requirements in Appendix 6-A.5. For
the more complex sites or structures, a nonlinear time history analysis may be necessary.
Appendix 6-A.6 provides requirements for conducting time history analysis to obtain the
needed ground motions for structure design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-25
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
See Appendix 6-A for additional requirements and guidance regarding site specific
ground response analyses, including requirements for time history analyses. Matasovic
and Hashash (2012) also provide a good overview of the process used to conduct site
specific ground motion response analysis from development of input ground motions to
development of the structure design response spectra.
6-3.3 Need for Peer Review of Site Specific Hazard and Ground Motion
Response Analyses
If a site specific hazard analysis is conducted, it shall be independently peer reviewed
in all cases by someone with expertise in site specific seismic hazard analyses. When
the site specific hazard analysis is conducted by a consultant working for the State or a
design-builder, the peer reviewer shall not be a staff member of the consultant(s) doing
the engineering design for the project, even if not part of the specific team within those
consultants doing the project design. The expert peer reviewer must be completely
independent of the design team consultant(s).
A site specific ground motion response analysis to establish a response spectrum that is
lower than two-thirds of the specification based spectrum shall be approved by the State
Geotechnical and Bridge Engineers. If the site specific response analysis is conducted
for this purpose, the site specific analysis shall be independently peer reviewed. The
peer reviewer shall meet the same requirements as described in the previous paragraph,
except that their expertise must be in the site specific ground motion response analysis
technique used to conduct the analysis.
6-3.4 IBC for Site Response
The IBC, Sections 1613 through 1615, provides procedures to estimate the earthquake
loads for the design of buildings and similar structures. Earthquake loads per the IBC are
defined by acceleration response spectra, which can be determined through the use of
the IBC general response spectrum procedures or through site-specific procedures. The
intent of the IBC MCE is to reasonably account for the maximum possible earthquake at a
site, to preserve life safety and prevent collapse of the building.
The general response spectrum per the IBC utilizes mapped Maximum Considered
Earthquake (MCE) spectral response accelerations at short periods (Ss) and at 1-second
(S1) to define the seismic hazard at a specific location in the United States.
The IBC uses the six site classes, Site Class A through Site Class F, to account for the
effects of soil conditions on site response. The geotechnical designer shall identify
the appropriate Site Class for the site. Note that the site class should be determined
considering the soils up to the ground surface, not just soil below the foundations.
Once the Site Class and mapped values of Ss and S1 are determined, values of the Site
Coefficients Fa and Fv (site response modification factors) can be determined. The Site
Coefficients and the mapped spectral accelerations Ss and S1 can then be used to define
the MCE and design response spectra. The PGA at the ground surface may be estimated
as 0.4 of the 0.2 sec design spectral acceleration.
Page 6-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
For sites where Site Class F soils are present, the IBC requires that a site-specific
geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analysis be completed (see
Appendix 6-A). Dynamic site response analysis may not be required for liquefiable soil
sites for structures with predominant periods of vibration less than 0.5 seconds.
6-3.5 Determination of As for Geotechnical Seismic Design
The ground acceleration As is determined by multiplying the PGA from Figure 6-8, which
provides the ground acceleration for Class B/C rock/soil conditions, by its site coefficient
Fpga (Table 6-4) to determine As for other site classes. As determined in this manner
is used for assessing the potential for liquefaction and for the estimation of seismic
earth pressures and inertial forces for retaining wall and slope design. For liquefaction
assessment and retaining wall and slope design, the site coefficient presented in Table
6-4 shall be used, unless a site specific evaluation of ground response conducted in
accordance with these AASHTO Guide specifications and Section 6-3 and Appendix 6-A
is performed. Note that the site class should be determined considering the soils up to
the ground surface, not just soil below the foundations.
6-3.6 Earthquake Magnitude
Assessment of liquefaction and lateral spreading require an estimate of the earthquake
magnitude. The magnitude should be assessed using the seismic deaggregation data
for the site, available through the USGS national seismic hazard website (earthquake.
usgs.gov/hazards/) as discussed in Appendix 6-A. The deaggregation used shall be for
a seismic hazard level consistent with the hazard level used for the structure for which
the liquefaction analysis is being conducted (typically, a probability of exceedance of 5
percent in 50 years in accordance with the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design). Additional discussion and guidance regarding the selection of earthquake
magnitude values are provided in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge
Seismic Design.
6-4 Seismic Geologic Hazards
The geotechnical designer shall evaluate seismic geologic hazards including fault rupture,
liquefaction, lateral spreading, ground settlement, and slope instability. The potential
effects associated with seismic geologic hazards shall be evaluated by the geotechnical
designer.
6-4.1 Fault Rupture
Washington State is recognized as a seismically active region; however, only a relatively
small number of active faults have been identified within the state. Thick sequences of
recent geologic deposits, heavy vegetation, and the limited amount of instrumentally
recorded events on identified faults are some of the factors that contribute to the
difficulty in identifying active faults in Washington State. Considerable research is
ongoing throughout Washington State to identify and characterize the seismicity of active
faults, and new technology makes it likely that additional surface faults will be identified
in the near future. The best source of fault information that can be considered for design
is the USGS at the following website: https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/qfaults
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-27
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
The potential impacts of fault rupture include abrupt, large, differential ground
movements and associated damage to structures that might straddle a fault, such as a
bridge. Until the recent application of advanced mapping techniques (e.g., LIDAR and
aeromagnetics) in combination with trenching and age dating of apparent ground offsets,
little information was available regarding the potential for ground surface fault rupture
hazard in Washington State.
In view of the advances that will likely be made in the area of fault identification, the
potential for fault rupture should be evaluated and taken into consideration in the
planning and design of new facilities. These evaluations should incorporate the latest
information identifying potential Holocene ground deformation.
6-4.2 Liquefaction
Liquefaction has been one of the most significant causes of damage to bridge structures
during past earthquakes (ATC-MCEER Joint Venture, 2002). Liquefaction can damage
bridges and structures in many ways including:
• Modifying the nature of ground motion;
• Bearing failure of shallow foundations founded above liquefied soil;
• Changes in the lateral soil reaction for deep foundations;
• Liquefaction induced ground settlement;
• Lateral spreading of liquefied ground;
• Large displacements associated with low frequency ground motion;
• Increased earth pressures on subsurface structures;
• Floating of buoyant, buried structures; and
• Retaining wall failure.
Liquefaction refers to the significant loss of strength and stiffness resulting from the
generation of excess pore water pressure in saturated, predominantly cohesionless
soils. Kramer (1996) provides a detailed description of liquefaction including the types
of liquefaction phenomena, evaluation of liquefaction susceptibility, and the effects of
liquefaction.
All of the following general conditions are necessary for liquefaction to occur:
• The presence of groundwater, resulting in a saturated or nearly saturated soil.
• Predominantly cohesionless soil that has the right gradation and composition.
Liquefaction has occurred in soils ranging from low plasticity silts to gravels. Clean or
silty sands and non-plastic silts are most susceptible to liquefaction.
• A sustained ground motion that is large enough and acting over a long enough period
of time to develop excess pore-water pressure, equal to the effective overburden
stress, thereby significantly reducing effective stress and soil strength,
• The state of the soil is characterized by a density that is low enough for the soil to
exhibit contractive behavior when sheared undrained under the initial effective
overburden stress.
Page 6-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Methods used to assess the potential for liquefaction range from empirically based
design methods to complex numerical, effective stress methods that can model the
time-dependent generation of pore-water pressure and its effect on soil strength and
deformation. Furthermore, dynamic soil tests such as cyclic simple shear or cyclic triaxial
tests can be used to assess liquefaction susceptibility and behavior to guide input for
liquefaction analysis and design.
Liquefaction hazard assessment includes identifying soils susceptible to liquefaction,
evaluating whether the design earthquake loading will initiate liquefaction, and estimating
the potential effects of liquefaction on the planned facility. Liquefaction hazard
assessment is required in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design
if the site Seismic Design Category (SDC) is classified as SDC C or D, and the soil is
identified as being potentially susceptible to liquefaction (see Section 6-4.2.1). The SDC
is defined on the basis of the site-adjusted spectral acceleration at 1 second (i.e., SD1 =
Fv S1) where SDC C is defined as 0.30 ≤SD1 < 0.5 and SDC D is defined as SD1 ≥ 0.50.
Where loose to very loose, saturated sands are within the subsurface profile such that
liquefaction could impact the stability of the structure, the potential for liquefaction in
SDC B (0.15 ≤ SD1 < 0.3) should also be considered as discussed in the AASHTO Guide
Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
To determine the location of soils that are adequately saturated for liquefaction to occur,
the seasonally averaged groundwater elevation should be used. Groundwater fluctuations
caused by tidal action or seasonal variations will cause the soil to be saturated only during
a limited period of time, significantly reducing the risk that liquefaction could occur within
the zone of fluctuation.
For sites that require an assessment of liquefaction, the potential effects of liquefaction
on soils and foundations shall be evaluated. The assessment shall consider the following
effects of liquefaction:
• Loss in strength in the liquefied layer(s) with consideration of potential for void
redistribution due to the presence of impervious layers within or bounding a
liquefiable layer
• Liquefaction-induced ground settlement, including downdrag on deep foundation
elements
• Slope instability induced by flow failures or lateral spreading
During liquefaction, pore-water pressure build-up occurs, resulting in loss of strength and
then settlement as the excess pore-water pressures dissipate after the earthquake. The
potential effects of strength loss and settlement include:
• Slope Instability Due to Flow Failure or Lateral Spreading – The strength loss
associated with pore-water pressure build-up can lead to slope instability. Generally,
if the factor of safety against liquefaction is less than approximately 1.2 to 1.3, a
potential for pore-water pressure build-up will occur, and the effects of this build-up
shall be assessed. If the soil liquefies, slope stability is determined using the residual
strength of the soil to assess the potential for flow failure. The residual strength of
liquefied soils can be estimated using empirical methods. Loss of soil resistance can
allow abutment soils to move laterally, resulting in bridge substructure distortion and
unacceptable deformations and moments in the superstructure. See Section 6-4.3.1
for additional requirements to assess flow failure and lateral spreading.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-29
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
• Reduced foundation bearing resistance – The residual strength of liquefied soil is
often a fraction of nonliquefied strength. This loss in strength can result in large
displacements or bearing failure. For this reason spread footing foundations are not
recommended where liquefiable soils exist unless the spread footing is located below
the maximum depth of liquefaction or soil improvement techniques are used to
mitigate the effects of liquefaction.
• Reduced soil stiffness and loss of lateral support for deep foundations – This loss
in strength can change the lateral response characteristics of piles and shafts under
lateral load.
Vertical ground settlement will occur as excess pore-water pressures induced by
liquefaction dissipate, resulting in downdrag loads on and loss of vertical support for
deep foundations. If liquefaction-induced downdrag loads can occur, the downdrag loads
shall be assessed as specified in Sections 6-5.3 and 8-12.2.7, and in Article 3.11.8 in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
The effects of liquefaction will depend in large part on the amount of soil that liquefies
and the location of the liquefied soil with respect to the foundation. On sloping ground,
lateral flow, spreading, and slope instability can occur even on gentle slopes on relatively
thin layers of liquefiable soils, whereas the effects of thin liquefied layer on the lateral
response of piles or shafts (without lateral ground movement) may be negligible. Likewise,
a thin liquefied layer at the ground surface results in essentially no downdrag loads,
whereas the same liquefied layer deeper in the soil profile could result in large downdrag
loads. Given these potential variations, the site investigation techniques that can identify
relatively thin layers should be used part of the liquefaction assessment.
The following sections provide requirements for liquefaction hazard assessment and its
mitigation.
6-4.2.1 Methods to Evaluate Potential Susceptibility of Soil to Liquefaction
Evaluation of liquefaction potential shall be completed based on soil characterization
using in-situ testing such as Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) and Cone Penetration Tests
(CPT). Liquefaction potential may also be evaluated using shear wave velocity (Vs) testing
and Becker Penetration Tests (BPT) for soils that are difficult to test using SPT and CPT
methods, such as gravelly soils (see Andrus and Stokoe 2000); however, these methods
are not preferred and are used less frequently than SPT or CPT methods. If the CPT
method is used, SPT sampling and soil gradation testing shall still be conducted to obtain
information on soil gradation parameters for liquefaction susceptibility assessment and to
provide a comparison to CPT based analysis.
Simplified screening criteria to assess the potential liquefaction susceptibility of sands
and silts based on soil gradation and plasticity indices should be used. In general, gravelly
sands through low plasticity silts should be considered potentially liquefiable, provided
they are saturated and very loose to medium dense.
If a more refined analysis of liquefaction potential is needed, laboratory cyclic triaxial
shear or cyclic simple shear testing may be used to evaluate liquefaction susceptibility
and initiation in lieu of empirical soil gradation/PI/density criteria, in accordance with
Section 6-4.2.6.
Page 6-30 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Preliminary Screening – A detailed evaluation of liquefaction potential is required if all of
the following conditions occur at a site, and the site Seismic Design Category is classified
as SDC C or D:
• The estimated maximum groundwater elevation at the site is determined to be within
50 feet of the existing ground surface or proposed finished grade, whichever is lower.
• The subsurface profile is characterized in the upper 75 feet as having low plasticity
silts, sand, or gravelly sand with a measured SPT resistance, corrected for overburden
depth and hammer energy (N160), of 25 blows/ft or less, or a cone tip resistance
qciN of 150 or less, or a geologic unit is present at the site that has been observed to
liquefy in past earthquakes. For low plasticity silts and clays, the soil is considered
liquefiable as defined by the Bray and Sancio (2006) or Boulanger and Idriss
(2006) criteria.
For loose to very loose sand sites [e.g., (N1)60, < 10 bpf or qc1N, < 75], a potential exists
for liquefaction in SDC B, if the acceleration coefficient, As (i.e., PGA × Fpga), is 0.15 or
higher. The potential for and consequences of liquefaction for these sites will depend
on the dominant magnitude for the seismic hazard and just how loose the soil is. As
the magnitude decreases, the liquefaction resistance of the soil increases due to the
limited number of earthquake loading cycles. Generally, if the magnitude is 6 or less, the
potential for liquefaction, even in these very loose soils, is either very low or the extent
of liquefaction is very limited. Nevertheless, a liquefaction assessment should be made if
loose to very loose sands are present to a sufficient extent to impact bridge stability and
As is greater than or equal to 0.15. These loose to very loose sands are likely to be present
in hydraulically placed fills and alluvial or estuarine deposits near rivers and waterfronts.
See Idriss and Boulanger (2008) for additional information that relates liquefaction
susceptibility to the depositional environment and geologic age of the deposit.
If the site meets the conditions described above, a detailed assessment of liquefaction
potential shall be conducted. If all conditions are met except that the water table depth
is greater than 50 feet but less than 75 feet, a liquefaction evaluation should still be
considered, and if deep foundations are used, the foundation tips shall be located below
the bottom of the liquefiable soil, or adequately above the liquefiable zone such that the
impact of the liquefaction does not cause bridge or wall collapse.
Liquefaction Susceptibility of Silts – Liquefaction susceptibility of silts should be
evaluated using the criteria developed by Bray and Sancio (2006) or Boulanger and Idriss
(2006) if laboratory cyclic triaxial or cyclic simple shear tests are not conducted. The
Modified Chinese Criteria (Finn, et al., 1994) that has been in use in the past has been
found to be unconservative based on laboratory and field observations (Boulanger and
Idriss, 2006). Therefore, the new criteria proposed by Bray and Sancio or Boulanger and
Idriss are recommended. According to the Bray and Sancio criteria, fine-grained soils are
considered susceptible to liquefaction if:
• The soil has a water content(wc) to liquid limit (LL) ratio of 0.85 or more; and
• The soil has a plasticity index (PI) of less than 12.
For fine grained soils that are outside of these ranges of plasticity, cyclic softening
resulting from seismic shaking may need to be considered. According to the Boulanger
and Idriss (2006) criterion, fine grained soils are considered susceptible to liquefaction
if the soil has a PI of less than 7. Since there is a significant difference in the screening
criteria for liquefaction of silts in the current literature, for soils that are marginally
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-31
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
susceptible or not susceptible to liquefaction, cyclic triaxial or simple shear laboratory
testing of undisturbed samples is recommended to assess whether or not the silt is
susceptible to liquefaction, rather than relying solely on the screening criteria.
Liquefaction Susceptibility of Gravels – Other than through correlation to shear wave
velocity as described in Andrus and Stokoe (2000), no specific guidance regarding
susceptibility of gravels to liquefaction is currently available. The primary reason
why gravels may not liquefy is that their high permeability frequently precludes the
development of undrained conditions during and after earthquake loading. When
bounded by lower permeability layers, however, gravels should be considered susceptible
to liquefaction and their liquefaction potential evaluated. A gravel that contains sufficient
sand to reduce its permeability to a level near that of the sand, even if not bounded by
lower permeability layers, should also be considered susceptible to liquefaction and its
liquefaction potential evaluated as such. Becker hammer testing and sampling, or sonic
coring, could be useful for obtaining a representative sample of the sandy gravel that can
be used to get an accurate soil gradation for assessing liquefaction potential. Downhole
suspension logging (suspension logging in a mud rotary hole, not cased boring) should also
be considered in such soils, as high quality Vs testing can overcome the variation in SPT
test results caused by the presence of gravels.
6-4.2.2 Determination of Whether or Not a Soil will Liquefy
The most common method of assessing liquefaction involves the use of empirical
methods (i.e., Simplified Procedures). These methods provide an estimate of liquefaction
potential based on SPT blowcounts, CPT cone tip resistance, BPT blowcounts, or shear
wave velocity. This type of analysis shall be conducted as a baseline evaluation, even
when more rigorous methods are used. More rigorous, nonlinear, dynamic, effective
stress computer models may be used for site conditions or situations that are not
modeled well by the simplified methods, subject to the approval of the State Geotechnical
Engineer. For situations where simplified (empirical) procedures are not allowed (e.g., to
assess liquefaction at depths greater than 50 to 80 ft as described in Section 6-1.2.3),
these more rigorous computer models should be used, and independent peer review, as
described in Section 6-3, of the results from these more rigorous computer models shall
be conducted.
Simplified Procedures – Procedures that should be used for evaluating liquefaction
susceptibility using SPT, CPT, Vs, and BPT criteria are provided in Youd et al. (2001). Youd
et al. summarize the consensus of the profession up to year 2000 regarding the use of
the simplified (i.e., empirical) methods. Since the publication of this consensus paper,
various other modifications to the consensus approach have been introduced, including
those by Cetin et al. (2004), Moss et al. (2006), Boulanger and Idriss (2006, 2014), and
Idriss and Boulanger (2008). These more recent modifications to these methods account
for additions to the database on liquefaction, as well as refinements in the interpretation
of case history data. The updated methods potentially offer improved estimates of
liquefaction potential, and should be considered for use. National Academies of Sciences,
Engineering, and Medicine (2016) provides the most recent consensus report on
liquefaction and should be consulted to obtain the most up to date consensus guidance
on this subject.
Page 6-32 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
and Idriss and Boulanger (2008). These more recent modifications to these methods
account for additions to the database on liquefaction, as well as refinements in the Chapter 6
Seismic Design
interpretation of case history data. The updated methods potentially offer improved
estimates of liquefaction potential, and should be considered for use.
The simplified procedures are based on comparing the cyclic resistance ratio (CRR) of a
Thesoil
simplified
layer (i.e.,procedures are based
the cyclic shear stressonrequired
comparing the cyclic
to cause resistance
liquefaction) to ratio (CRR)
the earthquake
of ainduced
soil layer (i.e.,
cyclic the cyclic
shear shear(CSR).
stress ratio stressThe
required
CRR istoacause
functionliquefaction)
of the soilto the density as
relative
earthquake
representedinduced
by ancyclic
indexshear stress
property ratio (CSR).
measure Theblowcount),
(e.g., SPT CRR is a functionthe fines ofcontent
the soilof the
soil taken
relative intoasaccount
density through
represented by antheindex
soil index property
property measure used, the SPT
(e.g., in-situ vertical effective
blowcount),
thestress as represented
fines content by ataken
of the soil factor Kσ,account
into an earthquake
throughmagnitude
the soil index scaling factor,used,
property and possibly
the
other
in-situ factorseffective
vertical related to the geologic
stress historyby
as represented ofathe soil.KThe
factor soilearthquake
σ , an index properties are
magnitude
used factor,
scaling to estimate liquefaction
and possibly otherresistance basedto
factors related ontheempirical
geologic charts
historyrelating
of thethe resistance
soil. The
soilavailable to specific
index properties index
are usedproperties
to estimate(i.e., SPT, CPT, resistance
liquefaction BPT or shear wave
based onvelocity
empiricalvalues)
andrelating
charts corrected thetoresistance
an equivalent magnitude
available of 7.5
to specific usingproperties
index a magnitude (i.e.,scaling factor.
SPT, CPT, The
BPT
earthquake
or shear magnitude
wave velocity is used
values) andtocorrected
empiricallytoaccount for themagnitude
an equivalent duration ofofshaking
7.5 usingor a
number of cycles.
magnitude scaling factor. The earthquake magnitude is used to empirically account for
the duration of shaking or number of cycles.
The basic form of the simplified procedures used to calculate the earthquake induced CSR
Thefor
basic form of theMethod
the Simplified simplified
is asprocedures used to calculate
shown in Equation 6-8: the earthquake induced
CSR for the Simplified Method is as shown in Equation 6-8:
A σo rd (6-8)
CSR = 0.65 max (6-8)
g σo′ MSF
where,
Where
Amax = peak ground acceleration accounting for site amplification effects
Amax
g =
= peak ground
acceleration dueacceleration
to gravity accounting for site amplification effects
g σ =
= acceleration due to gravity
initial total vertical stress at depth being evaluated
o
σo σ ′ =
= initial
initial total vertical
effective stress at
vertical stress atdepth
depthbeing
beingevaluated
evaluated
o
σo′r =
= initial effective vertical
stress reduction coefficient stress at depth being evaluated
d
rd MSF =
= stress reduction
magnitude coefficient
scaling factor
Seismic Design MSF = magnitude scaling factor Chapter 6
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 6-31
December 2013 Note that Amax is the PGA times the acceleration due to gravity, since the PGA is actually
Note
an that Amax is the
acceleration PGA times
coefficient, andthe acceleration
Amax /g is equal due
to Ato gravity, since the PGA is
s.
actually an acceleration coefficient, and Amax/g is equal to As.
TheThe factor of safety against liquefaction is defined by Equation 6-9:
factor of safety against liquefaction is defined by Equation 6-9:
FSliq = CRR/CSR (6-9)(6-9)
The SPT procedure has been most widely used and has the advantage of providing soil
samples
The SPTforprocedure
gradation and Atterberg
has been mostlimits
widelytesting. Thehas
used and CPTtheprovides theof
advantage most detailed
providing soil
soilsamples
stratigraphy, is less expensive, can provide shear wave velocity measurements,
for gradation and Atterberg limits testing. The CPT provides the most detailed and
is more reproducible.
soil stratigraphy, If theexpensive,
is less CPT is used, soil samples
can provide shearshall
wavebevelocity
obtained using the SPTand
measurements,
or other
is moremethods so that Ifdetailed
reproducible. the CPTgradational
is used, soiland plasticity
samples shallanalyses can be
be obtained conducted.
using the SPT or
Theother
use of both SPT and CPT procedures can provide a detailed liquefaction
methods so that detailed gradational and plasticity analyses can be conducted. The
assessment
use of bothforSPT
a site.
and CPT procedures can provide a detailed liquefaction assessment for
a site.
Where SPT data is used, sampling and testing shall be conducted in accordance with
Chapter 3. In addition:
Where SPT data is used, sampling and testing shall be conducted in accordance with
• Chapter
Correction
3. Infactors for borehole diameter, rod length, hammer type, and sampler
addition:
liners shall be used, where appropriate.
• Correction factors for borehole diameter, rod length, hammer type, and sampler liners
• Whereshallgravels
be used,orwhere
cobbles are present, the use of short interval adjusted SPT N
appropriate.
values may be effective for estimating the N values for the portions of the sample
• Where gravels or cobbles are present, the use of short interval adjusted SPT N values
not affected by gravels or cobbles.
may be effective for estimating the N values for the portions of the sample not
• Blowcounts
affected byobtained
gravels when sampling using Dames and Moore or modified
or cobbles.
California samplers or non-standard hammer weights and drop heights, including
wireline
Geotechnical Design andM downhole
Manual 46-03.12 hammers, shall not be used for liquefaction evaluations. Page 6-33
July 2019
As discussed in Section 6.1.2.2, the limitations of the simplified procedures should
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
• Blowcounts obtained when sampling using Dames and Moore or modified California
samplers or non-standard hammer weights and drop heights, including wireline and
downhole hammers, shall not be used for liquefaction evaluations.
As discussed in Section 6-1.2.2, the limitations of the simplified procedures should be
recognized. The simplified procedures were developed from empirical evaluations of field
observations. Most of the case history data was collected from level to gently sloping
terrain underlain by Holocene-age alluvial or fluvial sediment at depths less than 50 feet.
Therefore, the simplified procedures are most directly applicable to these site conditions.
Caution should be used for evaluating liquefaction potential at depths greater than
50 feet using the simplified procedures. In addition, the simplified procedures estimate
the earthquake induced cyclic shear stress ratio based on a coefficient, rd, that is highly
variable at depth as discussed in Section 6-1.2.2.
As an alternative to the use of the rd factor, to improve the assessment of liquefaction
potential, especially at greater depths, if soft or loose soils are present, equivalent linear
or nonlinear site specific, one dimensional ground response analyses may be conducted
to determine the maximum earthquake induced shear stresses at depth in the Simplified
Method. For example, the linear total stress computer programs ProShake (EduPro
Civil Systems, 1999), Shake2000 (Ordoñez, 2000), or DEEPSOIL (Hashash, et al., 2016)
may be used for this purpose. Consideration should be given to the consistency of site
specific analyses with the procedures used to develop the liquefaction resistance curves.
A minimum of seven time histories (see Section 6-3.2.2 and Appendix 6-A) should be
used to conduct these analyses to obtain a reasonably stable mean rd value as a function
of depth.
Nonlinear Effective Stress Methods – An alternative to the simplified procedures for
evaluating liquefaction susceptibility is to complete a nonlinear, effective stress site
response analysis utilizing a computer code capable of modeling pore water pressure
generation and dissipation. This is a more rigorous analysis that requires additional
parameters to describe the stress-strain behavior and pore pressure generation
characteristics of the soil.
The advantages with this method of analysis include the ability to assess liquefaction
potential at all depths, including those greater than 50 feet, and the effects of liquefaction
and large shear strains on the ground motion. In addition, pore-water redistribution during
and following shaking can be modeled, seismically induced deformation can be estimated,
and the timing of liquefaction and its effects on ground motion at and below the ground
surface can be assessed.
Several one-dimensional non-linear, effective stress analysis programs are available
for estimating liquefaction susceptibility at depth, and these methods are being used
more frequently by geotechnical designers. However, a great deal of caution needs to
be exercised with these programs, as there has been little verification of the ability of
these programs to predict liquefaction at depths greater than 50 feet. This limitation
is partly the result of the very few well documented sites with pore-water pressure
measurements during liquefaction, either at shallow or deep depths, and partly the result
of the one-dimensional approximation. For this reason greater reliance must be placed on
observed response from laboratory testing or centrifuge modeling when developing the
soil and pore pressure models used in the effective stress analysis method. The success
of the effective stress model is, therefore, tied in part to the ability of the laboratory or
centrifuge modeling to replicate field conditions.
Page 6-34 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
A key issue that can affect the results obtained from nonlinear effective stress analyses
is whether or not, or how well, the pore pressure model used addresses soil dilation
during shearing. Even if good pore pressure data from laboratory liquefaction testing
is available, the models used in some effective stress analysis methods may not be
sufficient to adequately model dilation during shearing of liquefied soils. This limitation
may result in unconservative predictions of ground response when a deep layer liquefies
early during ground shaking. The inability to transfer energy through the liquefied layer
could result in “shielding” of upper layers from strong ground shaking, potentially leading
to an unconservative site response (see Anderson, et al. 2011 for additional explanation
and guidance regarding effective stress modeling). See Appendix 6-A for additional
considerations regarding modeling accuracies.
Two-dimensional effective stress analysis models can overcome some of these
deficiencies, provided that a good soil and pore pressure model is used (e.g., the UBC
sand model) – see Appendix 6-A. However, they are even more complex to use and
certainly not for novice designers.
It should also be recognized that the results of nonlinear effective stress analyses can
be quite sensitive to soil parameters that are often not as well established as those used
in equivalent linear analyses. Therefore, it is incumbent upon the user to calibrate the
model, evaluate the sensitivity of its results to any uncertain parameters or modeling
assumptions, and consider that sensitivity in the interpretation of the results. Therefore,
the geotechnical designer shall provide documentation that their model has been
validated and calibrated with field data, centrifuge data, and/or extensive sensitivity
analyses.
Analysis results from nonlinear effective stress analyses shall not be considered sufficient
justification to conclude that the upper 40 to 50 feet of soil will not liquefy as a result
of the ground motion dampening effect (i.e., shielding, or loss of energy) caused by
deeper liquefiable layers. However, the empirical liquefaction analyses identified in this
section may be used to justify that soil layers and lenses within the upper 65 feet of soil
will not liquefy. This soil/pore pressure model deficiency for nonlinear effective stress
methodologies could be crudely and conservatively addressed by selectively modifying
soil parameters and/or turning off the pore pressure generation in given layers to bracket
the response.
Due to the highly specialized nature of these more sophisticated liquefaction assessment
approaches, approval by the State Geotechnical Engineer is required to use nonlinear
effective stress methods for liquefaction evaluation, and independent peer review as
described in Section 6-3 shall be conducted.
6-4.2.3 Minimum Factor of Safety Against Liquefaction
Liquefaction hazards assessment and the development of hazard mitigation measures
shall be conducted if the factor of safety against liquefaction (Equation 6-9) is less than
1.2 or if the soil is determined to be liquefiable for the return period of interest (e.g.,
975 years) using the performance based approach as described by Kramer and Mayfield
(2007) and Kramer (2007). Note that for silts and low plasticity clays, a factor of safety
is not calculated – the basis for determining whether or not liquefaction will occur is
through cyclic simple shear or cyclic triaxial testing, or just whether or not the liquefaction
susceptibility criteria are met. The hazard level used for this analysis shall be consistent
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-35
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
with the hazard level selected for the structure for which the liquefaction analysis is being
conducted (typically, a probability of exceedance of 7 percent in 75 years in accordance
with the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design). While performance
based techniques can be accomplished using the WSLIQ software (Kramer, 2007), the
performance based option (as well as the multi-hazard option) in that software uses the
2002 USGS ground motions and has not been updated to include more recent ground
motion data that would be consistent with the ground motions used to produce the
2014 USGS seismic maps. Until that software is updated to use the new ground motion
database, the multi-hazard and performance based options in WSLIQ shall not be
used. Liquefaction hazards to be assessed include settlement and related effects, and
liquefaction induced instability (e.g., flow failure or lateral spreading), and the effects of
liquefaction on foundations.
6-4.2.4 Liquefaction Induced Settlement
Both dry and saturated deposits of loose granular soils tend to densify and settle during
and/or following earthquake shaking. Settlement of unsaturated granular deposits is
discussed in Section 6-4.4. Settlement of saturated granular deposits due to liquefaction
shall be estimated using techniques based on the Simplified Procedure, or if nonlinear
effective stress models are used to assess liquefaction in accordance with Section 6-4.4.2,
such methods may also be used to estimate liquefaction settlement.
If the Simplified Procedure is used to evaluate liquefaction potential, liquefaction
induced ground settlement of saturated granular deposits should be estimated using
the procedures by Tokimatsu and Seed (1987) or Ishihara and Yoshimine (1992). The
Tokimatsu and Seed (1987) procedure estimates the volumetric strain as a function of
earthquake induced CSR and corrected SPT blowcounts. The Ishihara and Yoshimine
(1992) procedure estimates the volumetric strain as a function of factor of safety against
liquefaction, relative density, and corrected SPT blowcounts or normalized CPT tip
resistance. Updated procedures for estimating liquefaction settlement using CPT data
are also provided in Zhang, et al. (2002). Example charts used to estimate liquefaction
induced settlement using the Tokimatsu and Seed procedure and the Ishihara and
Yoshimine procedure are presented as Figures 6-8 and 6-9, respectively.
If a more refined analysis of liquefaction induced settlement is needed, laboratory cyclic
triaxial shear or cyclic simple shear testing may be used to evaluate the liquefaction
induced vertical settlement in lieu of empirical SPT or CPT based criteria, in accordance
with Section 6-4.2.6.
The empirically based analyses should be conducted as a baseline evaluation, even when
laboratory volumetric strain test results are obtained and used for design, to qualitatively
check the reasonableness of the laboratory test results.
Page 6-36 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Figure 6-8 Liquefaction Induced Settlement Estimated Using the Tokimatsu and Seed procedure
(Tokimatsu and Seed, 1987)
Figure 6-9 Liquefaction Induced Settlement Estimated Using the Ishihara and Yoshimine procedure
(Ishihara and Yoshimine, 1992)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-37
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-4.2.5 Residual Strength Parameters
Liquefaction induced instability is strongly influenced by the residual strength of the
liquefied soil. Instability occurs when the shear stresses required to maintain equilibrium
exceed the residual strength of the soil deposit. Evaluation of residual strength of a
liquefied soil deposit is one of the most difficult problems in geotechnical practice
(Kramer, 1996). A variety of empirical methods are available to estimate the residual
strength of liquefied soils. The empirical relationships provided in Figures 6-1 through
6-3 and Table 6-3 shall be used to estimate residual strength of liquefied soil unless
soil specific laboratory performance tests are conducted as described below. These
procedures for estimating the residual strength of a liquefied soil deposit are based on
an empirical relationship between residual undrained shear strength and equivalent
clean sand SPT blowcounts or CPT qc1n values, using the results of back- calculation of
the apparent shear strengths from case histories of large displacement flow slides. The
significant level of uncertainty in these estimates of residual strength should be taken into
account in design and evaluation of calculation results. See Section 6-2.2 for additional
requirements regarding this issue.
If a more refined analysis of residual strength is needed, laboratory cyclic triaxial shear
or cyclic simple shear testing may be used to evaluate the residual strength in lieu of
empirical SPT or CPT based criteria, in accordance with Section 6-4.2.6.
The empirically based analyses should be conducted as a baseline evaluation, even
when laboratory residual shear strength test results are obtained and used for design, to
qualitatively check the reasonableness of the laboratory test results. The final residual
shear strength value selected should also consider the shear strain level in the soil that
can be tolerated by the structure or slope impacted by the reduced shear strength in the
soil (i.e., how much lateral deformation can the structure tolerate?). Numerical modeling
techniques may be used to determine the soil shear strain level that results in the
maximum tolerable lateral deformation of the structure being designed.
6-4.2.6 Assessment of Liquefaction Potential and Effects Using Laboratory
Test Data
If a more refined analysis of liquefaction potential, liquefaction induced settlement, or
residual strength of liquefied soil is needed, laboratory cyclic simple shear or cyclic triaxial
shear testing may be used in lieu of empirical soil gradation/PI/density (i.e., SPT or CPT
based) criteria, if high quality undisturbed samples can be obtained. Laboratory cyclic
simple shear or cyclic triaxial shear testing may also be used to evaluate liquefaction
susceptibility of and effects on sandy soils from reconstituted soil samples. However,
due to the difficulties in creating soil test specimens that are representative of the actual
in-situ soil, liquefaction testing of reconstituted soil may be conducted only if approved
by the State Geotechnical Engineer. Requests to test reconstituted soil specimens will be
evaluated based on how well the proposed specimen preparation procedure mimics the
in-situ soil conditions and geologic history.
The number of cycles, and either the cyclic stress ratios (stress-controlled testing) or
cyclic shear strain (strain-controlled testing) used during the cyclic testing to liquefy or
to attempt to liquefy the soil, should cover the range of the number of cycles and cyclic
loading anticipated for the earthquake/ground motion being modeled. Testing to more
than one stress or strain ratio should be done to fully capture the range of stress or
Page 6-38 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
strain ratios that could occur. Preliminary calculations or computer analyses to estimate
the likely cyclic stresses and/or strains anticipated should be conducted to help provide
a basis for selection of the cyclic loading levels to be used for the testing. The vertical
confining stress should be consistent with the in-situ vertical effective stress estimated at
the location where the soil sample was obtained. Therefore Ko-consolidation is required in
triaxial tests.
Defining liquefaction in these laboratory tests can be somewhat problematic.
Theoretically, initial liquefaction is defined as being achieved once the excess pore
pressure ratio in the specimen, ru, is at 100 percent. The assessment of whether or not
this has been achieved in the laboratory tested specimen depends on how the pore
pressure is measured in the specimen, and the type of soil contained in the specimen.
As the soil gets siltier, the possibility that the soil will exhibit fully liquefied behavior (i.e.,
initial liquefaction) at a measured pore pressure in the specimen of significantly less than
100 percent increases. A more practical approach that should be used in this case is to
use a strain based definition to identify the occurrence of enough cyclic softening to
consider the soil to have reached a failure state caused by liquefaction. Typically, if the
soil reaches shear strains during cyclic loading of 3 percent or more, the soil, for practical
purposes, may be considered to have achieved a state equivalent to initial liquefaction.
Note that if the testing is carried out well beyond initial liquefaction, cyclic triaxial testing
is not recommended. In that case, necking of the specimen can occur, making the cyclic
triaxial test results not representative of field conditions.
For the purpose of estimating liquefaction induced settlement, after the cyclic shearing is
completed, with the vertical stress left on the specimen, the vertical strain is measured as
the excess pore pressure is allowed to dissipate.
Note that once initial liquefaction has been achieved, volumetric strains are not just
affected by the excess pore pressure generated through cyclic loading, but are also
affected by damage to the soil skeleton as cyclic loading continues. Therefore, to obtain a
more accurate estimate of post liquefaction settlement, the specimen should be cyclically
loaded to the degree anticipated in the field, which may mean continuing cyclic loading
after initial liquefaction is achieved.
If the test results are to be used with simplified ground motion modeling techniques (e.g.,
specification based ground response analysis or total stress site specific ground motion
analysis), volumetric strain should be measured only for fully liquefied conditions. If
effective stress ground motion analysis (e.g., DEEPSOIL) is conducted, volumetric strain
measurements should be conducted at the cyclic stress ratio and number of loading
cycles predicted by the effective stress analysis for the earthquake being modeled at the
location in the soil profile being modeled, whether or not that combination results in a
fully liquefied state. Vertical settlement prediction should be made by using the laboratory
test data to develop a relationship between the measured volumetric strain and either
the shear strain in the lab test specimens or the excess pore pressure measured in the
specimens, and correlating the predicted shear strain or excess pore pressure profile
predicted from the effective stress analysis to the laboratory test results to estimate
settlement from volumetric strain; however, the shear strain approach is preferred.
To obtain the liquefied residual strength, after the cyclic shearing is completed, the drain
lines in the test should be left closed, and the sample sheared statically. If the test results
are to be used with simplified ground motion modeling techniques (e.g., specification
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-39
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
based ground response analysis or total stress site specific ground motion analysis),
residual strength should be measured only for fully liquefied conditions. If effective stress
ground motion analysis (e.g., DEEPSOIL) is conducted, residual shear strength testing
should be conducted at the cyclic stress ratio and number of loading cycles predicted by
the effective stress analysis for the earthquake being modeled at the location in the soil
profile being modeled, whether or not that combination results in a fully liquefied state.
See Kramer (1996), Seed. et al. (2003), and Idriss and Boulanger (2008) for additional
details and cautions regarding laboratory evaluation of liquefaction potential and
its effects.
6-4.2.7 Combining Seismic Inertial Loading with Analyses Using Liquefied
Soil Strength
The number of loading cycles required to initiate liquefaction, and hence the time at
which liquefaction is triggered, tends to vary with the relative density and composition
of the soil (i.e., denser soils require more cycles of loading to cause initial liquefaction).
Whether or not the geologic hazards that result from liquefaction (e.g., lateral soil
displacement such as flow failure and lateral spreading, reduced soil stiffness and
strength, and settlement/downdrag) are concurrent with the strongest portion of the
design earthquake ground motion depends on the duration of the motion and the
resistance of the soil to liquefaction. For short duration ground motions and/ or relatively
dense soils, liquefaction may be triggered near the end of shaking. In this case, the
structure of interest is unlikely to be subjected to high inertial forces after the soil has
reached a liquefied state, and the evaluation of the peak inertial demands on the structure
can be essentially decoupled from evaluation of the deformation demands associated
with soil liquefaction. However, for long-duration motions (which are usually associated
with large magnitude earthquakes such as a subduction zone earthquake as described
in GDM Appendix 6-A) and/or very loose soils, liquefaction may be triggered earlier in
the motion, and the structure may be subjected to strong shaking while the soil is in a
liquefied state.
There is currently no consensus on how to specifically address this issue of timing of
seismic acceleration and the development of initial liquefaction and its combined impact
on the structure. More rigorous analyses, such as by using nonlinear, effective stress
methods, are typically needed to analytically assess this timing issue. Nonlinear, effective
stress methods can account for the build-up in pore-water pressure and the degradation
of soil stiffness and strength in liquefiable layers. Use of these more rigorous approaches
requires considerable skill in terms of selecting model parameters, particularly the pore
pressure model. The complexity of the more rigorous approaches is such that approval
by the State Geotechnical Engineer to use these approaches is mandatory, and an
independent peer reviewer with expertise in nonlinear, effective stress modeling shall be
used to review the specific methods used, the development of the input data, how the
methods are applied, and the resulting impacts.
While flow failure due to liquefaction is not really affected by inertial forces acting on
the soil mass (see Section 6-4.3.1), it is possible that lateral forces on a structure and its
foundations due to flow failure may be concurrent with the structure inertial forces if
the earthquake duration is long enough (e.g., a subduction zone earthquake). Likewise,
for lateral spreading, since seismic inertial forces are acting on the soil during the
development of lateral spreading (see Section 6-4.3.1), logically, inertial forces may also
Page 6-40 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
be acting on the structure itself concurrently with the development of lateral forces on
the structure foundation.
However, there are several factors that may affect the magnitude of the structural inertial
loads, if any, acting on the foundation. Brandenberg, et al. (2007a and b) provide examples
from centrifuge modeling regarding the combined effect of lateral spreading and seismic
structural inertial forces on foundation loads and some considerations for assessing these
inertial forces. They found that the total load on the foundation was approximately 40
percent higher on average than the loads caused by the lateral spreading alone. However,
the structural column used in this testing did not develop any plastic hinging, which, had
it occurred could have resulted in structural inertial loads transmitted to the foundation
that could have been as low as one-fourth of what was measured in this testing. Another
factor that could affect the potential combination of lateral spreading and structural
inertia loads is how close the foundation is to the initiation point (i.e., downslope end)
for the lateral spreading, as it takes time for the lateral spread to propagate upslope and
develop to its full extent.
The current AASHTO Guide Specifications for seismic design do allow the lateral
spreading forces to be decoupled from bridge seismic inertial forces. However, the
potential for some combined effect of lateral spread forces with structural inertial loads
should be considered if the structure is likely to be subjected to strong shaking while the
soil is in a liquefied state, especially if the foundation is located near the toe of the lateral
spread or flow failure. In lieu of more sophisticated analyses such as dynamic- stress
deformation analyses, for sites where more than 20 percent of the hazard contributing
to the peak ground acceleration is from an earthquake with a magnitude of 7.5 or more
(i.e., a long duration earthquake where there is potential for strong motion to occur after
liquefaction induced lateral ground movement has initiated), it should be assumed that
the lateral spreading/flow failure forces on the foundations are combined with 25 percent
of the structure inertial forces, or the plastic hinge force, whichever is less.
This timing issue also affects liquefaction-induced settlement and downdrag, in that
settlement and downdrag do not generally occur until the pore pressures induced by
ground shaking begin to dissipate after shaking ceases. Therefore, a de-coupled analysis is
appropriate when considering liquefaction downdrag loads.
When considering the effect of liquefaction on the resistance of the soil to structure
foundation loads both in the axial (vertical) and lateral (horizontal) directions, two
analyses should be conducted to address the timing issue. For sites where liquefaction
occurs around structure foundations, structures should be analyzed and designed in two
configurations as follows:
• Nonliquefied Configuration – The structure should be analyzed and designed,
assuming no liquefaction occurs using the ground response spectrum appropriate for
the site soil conditions in a nonliquefied state, i.e., using P-Y curves derived from static
soil properties.
• Liquefied Configuration – The structure as designed in nonliquefied configuration
above should be reanalyzed assuming that the layer has liquefied and the liquefied
soil provides the appropriate residual resistance for lateral and axial deep foundation
response analyses consistent with liquefied soil conditions (i.e., modified P-Y curves,
modulus of subgrade reaction, T-Z curves, axial soil frictional resistance). The design
spectrum should be the same as that used in nonliquefied configuration. However,
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-41
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
this analysis does not include the lateral forces applied to the structure due to
liquefaction induced lateral spreading or flow failure, except as noted earlier in this
section with regard to large magnitude, long duration earthquakes.
With the approval of the State Bridge and State Geotechnical Engineers, a site-specific
response spectrum (for site specific spectral analysis) or nonlinear time histories
developed near the ground surface (for nonlinear structural analysis) that account for
the modifications in spectral content from the liquefying soil may be developed. The
modified response spectrum, and associated time histories, resulting from the site-
specific analyses at the ground surface shall not be less than two-thirds of the spectrum
(i.e., as applied to the spectral ordinates within the entire spectrum) developed using
the general procedure described in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Bridge
Seismic Design, Article 3.4.1, modified by the site coefficients in Section 6-3.2 of this
chapter. If the soil and bedrock conditions are classified as Site Class F, however, there is
no AASHTO general procedure spectrum. In that case, the reduced response spectrum,
and associated time histories, that account for the effects of liquefaction shall not be
less than two-thirds of the site specific response spectrum developed from an equivalent
linear or nonlinear total stress analysis (i.e., nonliquefied conditions), or alternatively a Site
Class E response spectrum could be used for this purpose instead of the equivalent total
stress analysis.
Designing structures for these two configurations should produce conservative results.
Typically, the nonliquefied configuration will control the loads applied to the structure
and therefore is used to determine the loads within the structure, whereas the liquefied
configuration will control the maximum deformations in the structure and is therefore
used to design the structure for deformation. In some cases, this approach may be more
conservative than necessary, and the designer may use a more refined analysis to assess
the combined effect of strong shaking and liquefaction impacts, considering that both
effects may not act simultaneously. However, Youd and Carter (2005) suggest that at
periods greater than 1 second, it is possible for liquefaction to result in higher spectral
accelerations than occur for equivalent nonliquefied cases, all other conditions being
equal. Site-specific ground motion response evaluations may be needed to evaluate
this potential.
6-4.3 Seismic Slope Instability and Deformation
Slope instability can occur during earthquakes due to inertial effects associated with
ground accelerations or due to weakening of the soil induced by the seismic shear
strain. Inertial slope instability is caused by temporary exceedance of the soil strength
by dynamic earthquake stresses. In general, the soil strength remains unaffected by
the earthquake shaking in this case. Weakening instability is the result of soil becoming
progressively weaker as shaking occurs such that the shear strength becomes insufficient
to maintain a stable slope.
Seismic slope instability analysis is conducted to assess the impact of instability and slope
deformation on structures (e.g., bridges, tunnels, and walls, including reinforced slopes
steeper than 1.2H:1V and noise walls). However, in accordance with Section 6-1.2, slopes
that do not impact such structures are generally not mitigated for seismic slope instability.
The scope of this section is limited to the assessment of seismic slope instability. The
impact of this slope instability on the seismic design of foundations and walls is addressed
Page 6-42 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
in Sections 6-5.3 and 6-5.4 for foundations and Sections 15-4.10 through 15-4.12
for walls.
6-4.3.1 Weakening Instability due to Seismic Loading
Weakening instability occurs due to liquefaction or seismic shear strain induced
weakening of sensitive fine grained soils. With regard to liquefaction induced weakening
instability, earthquake ground motion induces stress and strain in the soil, resulting in
pore pressure generation and liquefaction in saturated soil. As the soil strength decreases
toward its liquefied residual value, two types of slope instability can occur: flow failure,
and lateral spreading. These various types of weakening instability are described in the
subsections that follow. How the impact of weakening instability due to liquefaction is
addressed for design of structures is specified in Section 6-5.4.
Weakening Instability not Related to Liquefaction – This type of weakening instability
depends on the sensitivity of the soil to the shear strain induced by the earthquake
ground motion. Sensitive silts and clays fall into this category. For seismic stability
design in this scenario, the stability shall be assessed with consideration to the lowest
shear strength that is likely to occur during and after shaking. For example, glacially
overconsolidated clays will exhibit a significant drop in strength to a residual value as
deformation takes place (e.g., see Section 5-13.3). A seismic slope deformation analysis
should be conducted to assess this potential. Since it is likely that most of the strong
motion will have subsided by the time the deformation required to drop the soil to its
residual strength has occurred, the seismic slope stability analysis typically does not
need to include inertial forces due to seismic acceleration when seismic stability is
evaluated using the residual shear strength of the sensitive silt or clay soil. However, if
the deformation analysis shows that enough deformation to drop the soil shear strength
to near its residual value can occur before strong motion ceases, then the slope stability
analysis shall include seismic inertial forces in combination with the residual shear
strength. For silts and clays with low to moderate sensitivity, a strength reduction of 10 to
15 percent to account for cyclic degradation is reasonable for earthquake magnitudes of
7.0 or more (Kavazanjian, et al. 2011). For clays with high sensitivity, cyclic shear strength
tests should be conducted to assess the rate of strength reduction.
For this type of weakening instability, the minimum level of safety specified in Section
6-4.3.2 shall be met, considering the weakened state of the soil during and after shaking.
Assessment of the impact of this type of instability on structures is addressed in Section
6-5.3 for foundations and Sections 15-4.10 through 15-4.12 for walls.
Liquefaction Induced Flow Failure – Liquefaction can lead to catastrophic flow failures
driven by static shearing stresses that lead to large deformation or flow. Such failures
are similar to debris flows and are characterized by sudden initiation, rapid failure, and
the large distances over which the failed materials move (Kramer, 1996). Flow failures
typically occur near the end of strong shaking or shortly after shaking. However, delayed
flow failures caused by post-earthquake redistribution of pore water pressures can
occur—particularly if liquefiable soils are capped by relatively impermeable layers.
The potential for liquefaction induced flow failures should be evaluated using
conventional limit equilibrium slope stability analyses (see Section 6-4.3), using residual
undrained shear strength parameters for the liquefied soil, and decoupling the analysis
from all seismic inertial forces (i.e., performed with kh and kv equal to zero). If the limit
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-43
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
equilibrium factor of safety, FS, is less than 1.05, flow failure shall be considered likely.
In these instances, the magnitude of deformation is usually too large to be acceptable for
design of bridges or structures, and some form of mitigation will likely be needed. The
exception is where the liquefied material and any overlying crust flow past the structure
and the structure and its foundation system can resist the imposed loads. Where the
factor of safety for this decoupled analysis is greater than 1.05 for liquefied conditions,
deformation and stability shall be evaluated using a lateral spreading analysis (see the
subsection “Lateral Spreading,” especially regarding cautions in conducting these types
of analyses).
Residual strength values to be used in the flow failure analysis may be determined from
empirical relationships (See Section 6-4.2.5) or from laboratory test results. If laboratory
test results are used to assess the residual strength of the soil that is predicted to liquefy
and potentially cause a flow failure, the shearing resistance may be very strain dependent.
As a default, the laboratory mobilized residual strength value used should be picked at a
strain of 2 percent, assuming the residual strength value is determined from laboratory
testing as described in Section 6-4.2.6. A higher strain value may be used for this purpose,
subject to the approval of the State Geotechnical Engineer and State Bridge Engineer, if
it is known that the affected structure can tolerate a relatively large lateral deformation
without collapse. Alternatively, numerical modeling may be conducted to develop the
relationship between soil shear strain and slope deformation, picking a mobilized residual
strength value that corresponds to the maximum deformation that the affected structure
can tolerate.
With regard to flow failure prediction, even though there is a possibility that seismic
inertial forces may be concurrent with the liquefied conditions (i.e., in long duration
earthquakes), it is the static stresses that drive the flow failure and the deformations
that result from the failure. The dynamic stresses present have little impact on this type
of slope failure. Therefore, slope stability analyses conducted to assess the potential for
flow failure resulting from liquefaction, and to estimate the forces that are applied to the
foundation due to the movement of the soil mass into the structure, should be conducted
without seismic inertial forces (i.e., kh and kv acting on the soil mass are set equal to zero).
Lateral Spreading – In contrast to flow failures, lateral spreading can occur when the
shear strength of the liquefied soil is incrementally exceeded by the inertial forces induced
during an earthquake or when soil stiffness degrades sufficiently to produce substantial
permanent strain in the soil. The result of lateral spreading is typically horizontal
movement of non-liquefied soils located above liquefied soils, in addition to the liquefied
soils themselves. Lateral spreading analysis is by definition a coupled analysis (i.e., directly
considers the effect of seismic acceleration), in contrast to a flow failure analysis, which is
a decoupled seismic stability analysis.
If the factor of safety for slope stability from the flow failure analysis, assuming residual
strengths in all layers expected to experience liquefied conditions, is 1.05 or greater, a
lateral spreading/deformation analysis shall be conducted. If the liquefied layer(s) are
discontinuous, the slope factor of safety may be high enough that lateral spreading does
not need to be considered. This analysis also does not need to be conducted if the depth
below the natural ground surface to the upper boundary of the liquefied layers is greater
than 50 ft.
Page 6-44 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
The potential for liquefaction induced lateral spreading on gently sloping sites or where
the site is located near a free face shall be evaluated using one or more of the following
empirical relationships:
• Youd et al. (2002)
• Kramer and Baska (2007)
• Zhang et al. (2004)
These procedures use empirical relationships based on case histories of lateral spreading
and/or laboratory cyclic shear test results. Input into these models include earthquake
magnitude, source-to-site distance, site geometry/slope, cumulative thickness of
saturated soil layers and their characteristics (e.g., SPT N values, average fines content,
average grain size). These empirical procedures provide a useful approximation of
the potential magnitude of deformation that is calibrated against lateral spreading
deformations observed in actual earthquakes. It should be noted, however, that the
dataset used to develop these lateral spreading correlations is very limited for the upper
end of earthquake magnitude (e.g., Mw > 8). Therefore, the potential for error in the
estimate is greater for these very large magnitude earethquakes. In addition to the cited
references for each method, see Kramer (2007) for details on how to carry out these
methods. Kramer (2007) provides recommendations on the use of these methods which
should be followed.
More complex analyses such as the Newmark time history analysis and dynamic stress
deformation models, such as provided in two-dimensional, nonlinear effective stress
computer programs (e.g., PLAXIS and FLAC), may also be used to estimate lateral
spreading deformations. However, these analysis procedures have not been calibrated to
observed performance with regard to lateral movements caused by liquefaction, and there
are many complexities with regard to development of input parameters and application of
the method to realistic conditions.
The Newmark time history analysis procedure is described in Anderson, et al. (2008) and
Kavezanjian, et al. (2011). If a Newmark time history analysis is conducted to obtain an
estimate of lateral spreading displacement, the number of cycles to initiate liquefaction
for the time histories selected for analysis needs to be considered when selecting a
yield acceleration to apply to the various portions of the time history. Initially, the yield
acceleration will be high, as the soil will not have liquefied (i.e., non- liquefied soil strength
parameters should be used to determine the yield acceleration). As the soil excess pore
pressure begins to build up with additional loading cycles, the yield acceleration will begin
to decrease. Once initial liquefaction or cyclic softening occurs, the residual strength is
then used to determine the yield acceleration. Note that if the yield acceleration applied
to the entire acceleration time history is based on residual strength consistent with
liquefied conditions, the estimated lateral deformation will likely be overly conservative.
To address this issue, an effective stress ground motion analysis (e.g., DEEPSOIL)
should be conducted to estimate the build up of pore pressure and the development of
liquefaction as the earthquake shaking continues to obtain an improved estimate of the
drop in soil shear strength and yield acceleration as a function of time.
Simplified charts based on Newmark-type analyses shall not be used for estimating
deformation resulting from lateral spreading. These simplified Newmark type analyses
have some empirical basis built in with regard to estimation of deformation. However,
they are not directly applicable to lateral spreading, as they were not developed for soil
that weakens during earthquake shaking, as is the case for soil liquefaction.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-45
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
If the more rigorous approaches are used, the empirically based analyses shall still be
conducted to provide a baseline of comparison, to qualitatively check the reasonableness
of the estimates from the more rigorous procedures. The more rigorous approaches
should be used to evaluate the effect of various input parameters on deformation. See
Youd, et al. (2002), Kramer (1996, 2007), Seed, et al. (2003) and Dickenson, et al. (2002)
for additional background on the assessment of slope deformations resulting from
lateral spreading.
A related issue is how far away the free face must be before lateral spreading need not
be considered. Lateral spreading has been observed up to about 1,000 ft from the free
face in past earthquakes (Youd, et al., 2002). Available case history data also indicate
that deformations at L/H ratios greater than 20, where L is the distance from the free
face or channel and H is the height of the free face of channel slope, are typically
reduced to less than 20 percent of the lateral deformation at the free face (Idriss and
Boulanger, 2008). Detailed analysis of the Youd, et al. database indicates that only two
of 97 cases had observable lateral spreading deformation at L/H ratios as large as 50 to
70. If lateral spreading calculations using these empirical procedures are conducted at
distances greater than 1,000 ft from the free face or L/H ratios greater than 20, additional
evaluation of lateral spreading deformation using more complex or rigorous approaches
should also be conducted.
At locations close to the free face (e.g., L/H < 5), displacement mechanisms more closely
related to localized instabilities such as slumping could become more dominant. This
should be considered when estimating displacements close to the free face.
6-4.3.2 Slope Instability Due to Inertial Effects
Even if the soil does not weaken as earthquake shaking progresses, instability can still
occur due to the additional inertial forces acting on the soil mass during shaking. Inertial
slope instability is caused by temporary exceedance of the soil strength by dynamic
earthquake stresses.
Pseudo-static slope stability analyses shall be used to evaluate the seismic stability
of slopes and embankments. The pseudo-static analysis consists of conventional limit
equilibrium static slope stability analysis as described in Chapter 7 completed with
horizontal and vertical pseudo-static acceleration coefficients (kh and kv) that act upon
the critical failure mass. Kramer (1996) provides a detailed summary of pseudo-static
analysis procedures.
For earthquake induced slope instability, with or without soil strength loss resulting from
deformation induced by earthquake shaking (e.g., weakening instability due to strength
loss in clays), the target factor of safety for the pseudo-static slope stability analysis is
1.1. When bridge foundations or retaining walls are involved, the LRFD approach shall
be used, in which case a resistance factor of 0.9 shall be used for slope stability. Note
that available slope stability programs produce a single factor of safety, FS. The specified
resistance factor of 0.9 for slope stability is essentially the inverse of the FS that should be
targeted in the slope stability program, which in this case is 1.1, making 0.9 the maximum
resistance factor to be obtained when conducting pseudo-static slope stability analyses. If
liquefaction effects dominate the stability of the slope and its deformation response (i.e.,
flow failure or lateral spreading occur), the procedures provided in Section 6-4.3.1 shall
be used.
Page 6-46 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Unless a more detailed deformation analysis is conducted, a default horizontal pseudo-
static coefficient, kh, of 0.5As and a vertical pseudo-static coefficient, kv, equal to
zero shall be used when seismic (i.e., pseudo-static) stability of slopes is evaluated, not
considering liquefaction. This value of kh assumes that limited deformation of the slope
during earthquake shaking is acceptable (i.e., 1 to 2 inches) and considers some wave
scattering effects.
Due to the fact that the soil is treated as a rigid body in pseudo-static limit equilibrium
analyses, and that the seismic inertial force is proportional to the square of the failure
surface radius whereas the resistance is proportional to just the radius, the tendency is for
the failure surface to move deeper and farther uphill relative to the static failure surface
when seismic inertial loading is added. That is, the pseudo-static analysis assumes that
the kh value applies uniformly to the entire failure mass regardless of how big the failure
mass becomes. Since the soil mass is far from rigid, this can be an overly conservative
assumption, in that the average value of kh for the failure mass will likely decrease relative
to the input value of kh used for the stability assessment due to wave scattering effects.
The default value of kh should be increased to near 1.0 As if a structure within or at the
toe of the potentially unstable slope cannot tolerate any deformation. If slope movement
can be tolerated, a reduced value of kh applied to the slope in the stability analysis may be
used by accounting for both wave scattering (i.e., height) effects and deformation effects
through a more detailed deformation based analysis. See Anderson, et al. (2008) and
Kavezanjiam, et al. (2011) for the specific procedures to do this.
Deformation analyses should be employed where an estimate of the magnitude of
seismically induced slope deformation is required, or to reduce kh for pseudo-static
slope stability analysis below the default value of 0.5As as described above. Acceptable
methods of estimating the magnitude of seismically induced slope deformation are
as provided in Anderson, et al. (2008) and Kavezanjian, et al. (2011), and include
Newmark sliding block (time history) analysis as well as simplified procedures developed
from Newmark analyses and numerical modeling. For global and sliding seismic
stability analyses for walls, the procedures provided in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications should be used (specifically see Articles 11.6.5.2, 11.6.5.3, and
Appendix A11).
6-4.4 Settlement of Dry Sand
Seismically induced settlement of unsaturated granular soils (dry sands) is well
documented. Factors that affect the magnitude of settlement include the density and
thickness of the soil deposit and the magnitude of seismic loading. The most common
means of estimating the magnitude of dry sand settlement are through empirical
relationships based on procedures similar to the Simplified Procedure for evaluating
liquefaction susceptibility. The procedures provided by Tokimatsu and Seed (1987) for
dry sand settlement should be used. The Tokimatsu and Seed approach estimates the
volumetric strain as a function of cyclic shear strain and relative density or normalized
SPT N values. The step by step procedure is provided in FHWA Geotechnical Engineering
Circular No. 3 (Kavazanjian, et al., 2011).
Since settlement of dry sand will occur during earthquake shaking with downdrag forces
likely to develop before the strongest shaking occurs, the axial forces caused by this
phenomenon should be combined with the full spectral ground motion applied to the
structure.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-47
July 2019
Since settlement of dry sand will occur during earthquake shaking with downdrag
Chapter 6 forces likely to develop before the strongest shaking occurs, the axial forces caused byDesign
Seismic
this phenomenon should be combined with the full spectral ground motion applied to
6-5 the structure.
Input for Structural Design
6 .5 Input
6-5.1forFoundation
StructuralSprings
Design
6.5.1 Foundation Springs
Structural dynamic response analyses incorporate the foundation stiffness into the
dynamicdynamic
Structural model ofresponse
the structure to capture
analyses the effects
incorporate of soil structure
the foundation stiffnessinteraction.
into the The
dynamic model of the structure to capture the effects of soil structure interaction.using
foundation stiffness is typically represented as a system of equivalent springs The
foundation stiffness is typically represented as a system of equivalent springs using a
a foundation stiffness matrix. The typical foundation stiffness matrix incorporates
set of six primary
a foundation stiffnesssprings
matrix.toThe
describe
typicalstiffness with stiffness
foundation respect to threeincorporates
matrix translationalaand
set three
of sixrotational components
primary springs of motion.
to describe Springs
stiffness withthat describe
respect the translational
to three coupling of horizontal
and
translation and rocking modes of deformation may also be used.
three rotational components of motion. Springs that describe the coupling of horizontal
translation and parameters
The primary rocking modes of deformation
for calculating may also spring
the individual be used.stiffness values are the
Thefoundation type (shallow
primary parameters for spread footings
calculating or deep foundations),
the individual foundation
spring stiffness geometry,
values are the
dynamic type
foundation soil shear modulus,
(shallow spreadand Poisson’s
footings Ratio.
or deep foundations), foundation geometry,
dynamic soil shear modulus, and Poisson’s Ratio.
6-5.1.1 Shallow Foundations
6 .5 .1 .1 Shallow Foundations
For evaluating shallow foundation springs, the WSDOT Bridge and Structures Office
Forrequires
evaluating shallow
values foundation
for the springs,
dynamic shear the WSDOT
modulus, Bridgeratio,
G, Poisson’s and and
Structures
the unit weight of
Office
the foundation soils. The maximum, or low-strain, shear modulus G0 canand
requires values for the dynamic shear modulus, G, Poisson’s ratio, the
be estimated
unitusing
weight of the
index foundation
properties soils.
and the The maximum,
correlations or low-strain,
presented shear
in Table 6-2. modulus G0the
Alternatively,
canmaximum
be estimated
shear modulus can be calculated using Equation 6-10 below, Table
using index properties and the correlations presented in 6-2. wave
if the shear
Alternatively, the maximum shear modulus can be calculated using Equation 6-10
velocity is known:
below, if the shear wave velocity is known:
γ (6-10)
G0 = (Vs)2 (6-10)
g
Where:
Where:
G0G == low
low strain,
strain, maximum
maximum dynamic
dynamic shear shear modulus
modulus
0
γ γ =
= soil
soil unit
unit weight
weight
VsV == shear wave velocity
shear wave velocity
s
g g =
= acceleration
acceleration duedue to gravity
to gravity
Page 6-46 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
The maximum dynamic shear modulus December
is associated with small shear strains 2013
(typically
less than 0.0001 percent). As the seismic ground motion level increases, the shear strain
level increases, and dynamic shear modulus decreases. If the specification based general
procedure described in Section 6-3 is used, the effective shear modulus, G, should be
calculated in accordance with Table 4-7 in FEMA 356 (ASCE 2000), reproduced below as
Table 6-7 for convenience. Note that SXS/2.5 in the table is essentially equivalent to As
(i.e., PGAxFpga). This table reflects the dependence of G on both the shear strain induced
by the ground motion and on the soil type (i.e., G drops off more rapidly as shear strain
increases for softer or looser soils).
This table must be used with some caution, particularly where abrupt variations in
soil profile occur below the base of the foundation. If the soil conditions within two
foundation widths (vertically) of the bottom of the foundation depart significantly from
the average conditions identified for the specific site class, a more rigorous method
may be required. The more rigorous method may involve conducting one- dimensional
equivalent linear ground response analyses using a program such as SHAKE to estimate
the average effective shear strains within the zone affecting foundation response.
Page 6-48 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Table 6-7 Effective Shear Modulus Ratio (G/G0)
(After ASCE 2000)
Effective Peak Acceleration, SXS/2.5
Site Class SXS/2.5 = 0 SXS/2.5 = 0.1 SXS/2.5 = 0.4 SXS/2.5 = 0.8
A 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
B 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90
C 1.00 0.95 0.75 0.60
D 1.00 0.90 0.50 0.10
E 1.00 0.60 0.05 *
F * * * *
Notes: Use straight-line interpolation for intermediate values of Sxs/2.5.
* Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed.
Alternatively, site specific measurements of shear modulus may be obtained. Measured
values of shear modulus may be obtained from laboratory tests, such as the cyclic triaxial,
cyclic simple shear, or resonant column tests, or they may be obtained from in- situ field
testing. If the specification based general procedure is used to estimate ground motion
response, the laboratory or in-situ field test results may be used to calculate G0. Then
the table from FEMA 356 (ASCE, 2000) reproduced above can be used to determine
G/G0. However, caution should be exercised when using laboratory testing to obtain
this parameter due to the strong dependency of this parameter on sample disturbance.
Furthermore, the low-strain modulus developed from lab test should be adjusted for soil
age if the footing is placed on native soil. The age adjustment can result in an increase
in the lab modulus by a factor of 1.5 or more, depending on the quality of the laboratory
sample and the age of the native soil deposit. The age adjustment is not required if
engineered fill will be located within two foundation widths of the footing base. The
preferred approach is to measure the shear wave velocity, Vs, through in-situ testing in the
field, to obtain G0.
If a detailed site specific ground response analysis is conducted, either Figures 6-1 and
6-2 may be used to estimate G in consideration of the shear strains predicted through
the site specific analysis (the effective shear strain, equal to 65 percent of the peak
shear strain, should be used for this analysis), or laboratory test results may be used to
determine the relationship between G/G0 and shear strain.
Poisson’s Ratio, v, should be estimated based on soil type, relative density/consistency of
the soils, and correlation charts such as those presented in Chapter 5 or in the textbook,
Foundation Analysis and Design (Bowles, 1996). Poisson’s Ratio may also be obtained from
field measurements of p- and s-wave velocities.
Once G and v are determined, the foundation stiffness values should be calculated as
shown in FEMA 356 (ASCE, 2000).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-49
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-5.1.2 Deep Foundations
Lateral soil springs for deep foundations shall be determined in accordance with
Chapter 8. However, if soil liquefaction is likely to occur, then the effect of liquefaction
on both the shape and the magnitude of the P-Y curves provided in this section shall be
followed.
Available models used to estimate P-Y curves for liquefied soil vary considerably, which
may affect the accuracy of the predicted behavior during liquefaction. Typical approaches
that have been used in the past to address the effect of liquefaction on P-Y curves include
the following:
1. Use the soft clay P-Y model, using the undrained residual strength as the cohesive
strength for development of the P-Y curve as suggested by Wang and Reese (1998);
2. Use the static sand P-Y curve model, but with the peak shear strength reduced by
a p-multiplier as recommended by Brandenberg, et al. (2007b) and Boulanger, et al.
(2003);
3. Assume that the liquefied soil provides no resistance to lateral movement; and
4. Liquefied sand model as developed by Rollins, et al. (2005a, 2005b), and as applied
in deep foundation lateral load analysis computer programs such as LPile (Isenhower
and Wang 2015).
These approaches are conceptually illustrated in Figure 6-10.
Weaver, et al. (2005) and Rollins, et al. (2005a) provided comparisons between the various
methods for developing P-Y parameters for liquefied soil and the measured lateral load
response of a full scale pile foundation in liquefied soil (i.e., liquefied using blast loading).
They concluded that none of the simplified methods that utilize adjusted soil parameters
applied to static P-Y clay or sand models (i.e., approaches 1 and 2 identified above)
accurately predicted the measured lateral pile response to load due to the difference
in curve shape for static versus liquefied conditions (i.e., convex, or strain softening P-Y
curves that will result from approaches 1 and 2, versus concave, or strain hardening,
shape that will result from approach 4, respectively). Since the strain softening model is
rather steeply increasing as a function of displacement at lower stress levels, the use of
that model could be unconservative for moderate earthquakes in that there is not enough
load to get past the steeper portion of the P-Y curve. They also found that the third
approach (i.e., assume the liquefied soil has no shear strength), was overly conservative.
The concave, or strain hardening, shape most accurately modeled the observed behavior
of the piles tested in liquefied conditions (Weaver, et al. 2005; Rollins, et al. 2005a).
Rollins, et al. (2005) also concluded that group reduction factors for lateral pile resistance
can be neglected in fully liquefied sand (i.e., Ru > 0.9), and that group reduction effects
reestablish quickly as pore pressures dissipate. Furthermore, they observed that group
reduction factors were applicable in soil that is not fully liquefied.
Therefore, the expressions developed by Rollins, et al. (2005a, 2005b) and
contained within LPile (Isenhower and Wang 2015) should be used to develop liquefied
soil P-Y curves.
Page 6-50 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Figure 6-10 Conceptual P-Y Curve Models For Liquefied Conditions
In general, if the liquefied P-Y curves result in foundation lateral deformations that are
less than approximately 2 inches near the foundation top for the liquefied state, the
liquefied P-Y curves should be further evaluated to make sure the parameters selected to
create the liquefied P-Y curves represent realistic behavior in liquefied soil.
For pile or shaft groups, for fully liquefied conditions, P-Y curve reduction factors to
account for foundation element spacing and location within the group may be set at 1.0.
For partially liquefied conditions, the group reduction factors shall be consistent with the
group reduction factors used for static loading.
6-5.2 Earthquake Induced Earth Pressures on Retaining Structures
The procedures specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall be used
to determine earth pressures acting on retaining walls during a seismic event. Due to the
high rate of loading that occurs during seismic loading, the use of undrained strength
parameters in the slope stability analysis may be considered for soils other than clean
coarse grained sands and gravels and sensitive silts and clays that could weaken during
shaking.
6-5.3 Earthquake Induced Slope Failure Loads on Structures
If the pseudo-static slope stability analysis conducted in accordance with Section 6-4.3.2
results in a safety factor of less than 1.1 (or a resistance factor that is greater than 0.9
for LRFD), the slope shall be stabilized or the structure shall be designed to resist the
slide force. For earthquake induced slope failure loads applied to structure foundations
and bridge abutments, the lateral force applied to the structure is the force needed to
restore the slope level of safety to the required minimum value. But this assumes that
the structure and its foundations can be designed to resist the slide loading and the
deformation required to mobilize the necessary resistance. If the structural designer
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-51
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
determines that the structure cannot resist the slide load and the deformation it causes,
then the slope shall be stabilized to restore its level of safety to the required minimum
values (i.e., FS > 1.1 or a resistance factor of 0.9 or less). See Section 8-6.5.2 for
procedures to estimate the slide force on a foundation element.
Landslides and slope instability induced by seismic loading not induced by liquefaction
should be considered to be concurrent with the structure seismic loading. Therefore,
the structure seismic loads and the seismically induced landslide/slope instability forces
should be coupled. Also note that when foundation elements are located within a mass
that becomes unstable during seismic loading, the potential for soil below the foundation
to move away from the foundation, thereby reducing its lateral support, shall be
considered.
6-5.4 Lateral Spread and Flow Failure Loads on Structures Due to
Liquefaction
Short of doing a rigorous dynamic stress-deformation analysis, there are two different
approaches to estimate the lateral spread/flow failure induced load on deep foundations
systems— displacement based approach and a force based approach. Displacement based
approaches are more prevalent in the United States. A force based approach has been
specified in the Japanese codes and is based on case histories from past earthquakes,
especially the pile foundation failures observed during the 1995 Kobe earthquake.
Overviews of both approaches are presented below.
6-5.4.1 Displacement Based Approach
The recommended displacement based approach for evaluating the impact of liquefaction
induced lateral spreading and flow failure loads on deep foundation systems is presented
in, Guidelines on Foundation Loading and Deformation Due to Liquefaction Induced Lateral
Spreading (Caltrans 2012) located at www.dot.ca.gov/research/structures/peer_lifeline_
program/docs/guidelines_on_ foundation_loading_jan2012.pdf and, as applied for
WSDOT projects, Design Procedure for Bridge Foundations Subject to Liquefaction-Induced
Lateral Spreading (Arduino, et al. 2017) located at:
www.wsdot.wa.gov/research/reports/fullreports/874-2.pdf
Additional background on the Caltrans procedure is provided in Ashford, et al. (2011). This
procedure provides methods to evaluate deep foundation systems that partially restrain
the ground movement caused by lateral spreading/flow failure (restrained case), and those
foundation systems in which the ground can freely flow around them (unrestrained case).
In general, the restrained case is used for bridge abutments, and the unrestrained case is
used for interior bridge piers. However, to make a final determination, the spacing of the
foundation elements, their stiffness as well as the stiffness of the superstructure, and the
overall geometry of the structure may need to be considered.
To be consistent with the design provisions in this GDM, the Caltrans procedure shall be
modified as follows:
• Assessment of liquefaction potential shall be in accordance with Section 6-4.2.2.
• Determination of liquefied residual strengths shall be in accordance with
Section 6-4.2.5.
Page 6-52 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
• Lateral spread deformations shall be estimated using methods provided in
Section 6-4.3.1.
• The combination of seismic inertial loading and kinematic loading from lateral
spreading or flow failure shall be in accordance with Section 6-4.2.7.
• Deep foundation springs shall be determined using Section 6-5.1.2.
6-5.4.2 Force Based Approaches
A force based approach to assess lateral spreading induced loads on deep foundations
is specified in the Japanese codes. The method is based on back-calculations from pile
foundation failures caused by lateral spreading (see Yokoyama, et al., 1997 for background
on this method) The pressures on pile foundations are simply specified as follows:
• The liquefied soil exerts a pressure equal to 30 percent of the total overburden
pressure (lateral earth pressure coefficient of 0.30 applied to the total vertical stress).
• The nonliquefied “crust” above the liquefied layer that moves with the liquefied layer
is equal to the passive pressure of the nonliquefied layer soil moving against the
foundation as later flow occurs.
• In both cases, the width of the pressure acting on the foundations is applied to the full
foundation group width supporting the bridge pier. However, nothing was discussed
in Yokoyama, et al. (1997) regarding the maximum center-center spacing of foundation
elements that would result in the force being based in the full foundation group
width. For a single foundation element supporting a bridge pier (e.g., a caisson or large
diameter shaft), the width over which this lateral pressure is applied may be assumed
to be the foundation width.
• Non-liquefied crustal layers exert full passive pressure on the foundation system.
Data from simulated earthquake loading of model piles in liquefiable sands in centrifuge
tests indicate that the Japanese Force Method is an adequate design method (Finn, et al.,
2004) and therefore may be used to estimate lateral spreading and flow failure forces on
bridge foundations.
6-5.4.3 Dynamic Stress-Deformation Approaches
Seismically induced slope deformations and their effect on foundations can be estimated
through a variety of dynamic stress-deformation computer models such as PLAXIS,
DYNAFLOW, FLAC, and OpenSees. These methods can account for varying geometry,
soil behavior, and pore pressure response during seismic loading and the impact of these
deformations on foundation loading. The accuracy of these models is highly dependent
upon the quality of the input parameters and the level of model validation performed by
the user for similar applications.
In general, dynamic stress deformation models should not be used for routine design due
to their complexity, and due to the sensitivity of deformation estimates to the constitutive
model selected and the accuracy of the input parameters. If dynamic stress deformation
models are used, they should be validated for the particular application. Dynamic
stress-deformation models shall not be used for design on WSDOT projects without the
approval of the State Geotechnical Engineer. Furthermore, independent peer review as
specified in Section 6-3 shall be conducted.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-53
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
6-5.5 Downdrag Loads on Structures Due to Liquefaction
Downdrag loads on foundations shall be determined in accordance with Article 3.11.8 of
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, GDM Chapter 8, and as specified herein.
The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 3.11.8, recommend the use of the
nonliquefied skin friction in the layers above the liquefied zone that do not liquefy but
will settle, and a skin friction value as low as the residual strength within the soil layers
that do liquefy, to calculate downdrag loads for the extreme event limit state. In general,
vertical settlement and downdrag cannot occur until the pore pressures generated by the
earthquake ground motion begin to dissipate after the earthquake shaking ceases. At this
point, the liquefied soil strength will be near its minimum residual strength. At some point
after the pore pressures begin to dissipate, and after some liquefaction settlement has
already occurred, the soil strength will begin to increase from its minimum residual value.
Therefore, the actual shear strength of soil along the sides of the foundation elements in
the liquefied zone(s) may be higher than the residual shear strength corresponding to fully
liquefied conditions, but still significantly lower than the nonliquefied soil shear strength.
Very little guidance on the selection of soil shear strength to calculate downdrag loads
due to liquefaction is available; therefore some engineering judgment may be required to
select a soil strength to calculate downdrag loads due to liquefaction.
The neutral plane theory approach to assessing downdrag due to liquefaction may
also be used, subject to the approval of the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer. See
Muhunthan et al. (2017) for guidance.
6-5.6 Mitigation Alternatives
The two basic options to mitigate the lateral spread induced loads on the foundation
system are to design the structure to accommodate the loads or improve the ground such
that the hazard does not occur.
Structural Options (design to accommodate imposed loads) – See Sections 6-5.4.1
(displacement based approach) and 6-5.4.2 (force based approach) for more details on
the specific analysis procedures. Once the forces and/or displacements caused by the
lateral spreading have been estimated, the structural designer should use those estimates
to analyze the effect of those forces and/or displacements will have on the structure to
determine if designing the structure to tolerate the deformation and/or lateral loading is
structurally feasible and economical.
Ground Improvement – It is often cost prohibitive to design the bridge foundation system
to resist the loads and displacements imposed by liquefaction induced lateral loads,
especially if the depth of liquefaction extends more than about 20 feet below the ground
surface and if a non-liquefied crust is part of the failure mass. Ground improvement to
mitigate the liquefaction hazard is the likely alternative if it is not practical to design the
foundation system to accommodate the lateral loads.
The primary ground improvement techniques to mitigate liquefaction fall into three
general categories, namely densification, altering the soil composition, and enhanced
drainage. A general discussion regarding these ground improvement approaches is
provided below. Chapter 11, Ground Improvement, should be reviewed for a more
detailed discussion regarding the use of these techniques.
Page 6-54 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Densification and Reinforcement – Ground improvement by densification consists
of sufficiently compacting the soil such that it is no longer susceptible to liquefaction
during a design seismic event. Densification techniques include vibro-compaction, vibro-
flotation, vibro-replacement (stone columns), deep dynamic compaction, blasting, and
compaction grouting. Vibro-replacement and compaction grouting also reinforce the soil
by creating columns of stone and grout, respectively. The primary parameters for selection
include grain size distribution of the soils being improved, depth to groundwater, depth
of improvement required, proximity to settlement/ vibration sensitive infrastructure, and
access constraints.
For those soils in which densification techniques may not be fully effective to densify the
soil adequately to prevent liquefaction, the reinforcement aspect of those methods may
still be used when estimating composite shear strength and settlement characteristics
of the improved soil volume. See Chapter 11 for details and references that should be
consulted for guidance in establishing composite properties for the improved soil volume.
If the soil is reinforced with vertical structural inclusions (e.g., drilled shafts, driven piles,
but not including the structure foundation elements) but not adequately densified to
prevent the soil from liquefying, the design of the ground improvement method should
consider both the shear and moment resistance of the reinforcement elements. For
vertical inclusions that are typically not intended to have significant bending resistance
(e.g., stone columns, compaction grout columns, etc.), the requirement to resist
the potential bending stresses caused by lateral ground movement may be waived,
considering only shear resistance of the improved soil plus inclusions, if all three of the
following conditions are met:
• The width and depth of the improved soil volume are equal to or greater than the
requirements provided in Figure 6-11,
• three or more rows of reinforcement elements to resist the forces contributing to
slope failure or lateral spreading are used, and
• the reinforcement elements are spaced center-to-center at less than 5 times the
reinforcement element diameter or 10 feet, whichever is less.
The effect of any lateral or vertical deformation of the vertical inclusions on the structure
the improved ground supports shall be taken into account in the design of the supported
structure.
Figure 6-11 shows the improved soil volume as centered around the wall base or
foundation. However, it is acceptable to shift the soil improvement volume to work
around site constraints, provided that the edge of the improved soil volume is located at
least 5 feet outside of the wall or foundation being protected. Greater than 5 feet may be
needed to insure stability of the foundation, prevent severe differential settlement due
to the liquefaction, and to account for any pore pressure redistribution that may occur
during or after liquefaction initiation.
For the case where a “collar” of improved soil is placed outside and around the
foundation, bridge abutment or other structure to be protected from the instability that
liquefaction can cause, assume “B” in Figure 6-11 is equal to zero (i.e., the minimum width
of improved ground is equal to D + 15 feet, but no greater than “Z”).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-55
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
If the soil is of the type that can be densified through the use of stone columns,
If the soil is of the type that can be densified through the use of stone columns,
compaction grout columns, or some other means to improve the soil such that it is no
compaction grout columns, or some other means to improve the soil such that it is no
longer susceptible to liquefaction within the improved soil volume, Figure 6-11 should
longer susceptible to liquefaction within the improved soil volume, Figure 6-18 should
also be used to establish the minimum dimensions of the improved soil.
also be used to establish the minimum dimensions of the improved soil.
IfIfititisisdesired
desiredtotouse
usedimensions
dimensionsofofthe theground
groundimprovement
improvementthat thatare
areless
lessthan
thanthethe
minimums illustrated in Figure 6-11, more sophisticated analyses
minimums illustrated in Figure 6-18, more sophisticated analyses to determine the to determine theeffect
effect
ofofusing
usingreduced
reducedground
groundimprovement
improvementdimensions
dimensionsshould
shouldbe beconducted
conducted(e.g.,
(e.g.,effective
effective
stress two dimensional analyses such as FLAC). The objectives of these
stress two dimensional analyses such as FLAC). The objectives of these analyses include analyses include
preventionofofsoil
prevention soilshear
shearfailure
failureand
andexcessive
excessivedifferential
differentialsettlement
settlementduring
duringliquefaction.
liquefaction.
The amount of differential settlement allowable for this limit state
The amount of differential settlement allowable for this limit state will depend on will depend onthethe
toleranceofofthe
tolerance thestructure
structurebeing
beingprotected
protectedtotosuch
suchmovement
movementwithout
withoutcollapse.
collapse.Use Useofof
smaller ground improvement area dimensions shall be approved
smaller ground improvement area dimensions shall be approved of the WSDOT State of the WSDOT State
GeotechnicalEngineer
Geotechnical Engineerandandshall
shallbe
beindependently
independentlypeer
peerreviewed
reviewedininaccordance
accordancewith with
Section
Section 6-3. 6-3.
Anotherreinforcement
Another reinforcementtechnique
techniquethat
thatmay
maybebeused
usedtotomitigate
mitigatethe
theinstability
instabilitycaused
causedby by
liquefactionisisthe
liquefaction theuse
useofofgeosynthetic
geosyntheticreinforcement
reinforcementasasa abase
basereinforcement
reinforcementlayer.
layer.InIn
this case, the reinforcement is designed as described in Chapter 9, but the liquefied
this case, the reinforcement is designed as described in Chapter 9, but the liquefied shear shear
strengthisisused
strength usedtotoconduct
conductthe
theembankment
embankmentbasebasereinforcement
reinforcementdesign.
design.
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Figure
Figure6-11
6-11 Minimum
MinimumDimensions
Dimensionsfor
forSoil
SoilImprovement
ImprovementVolume
VolumeBelow
BelowFoundations
Foundations
and
andWalls
Walls
B
Critical Failure surface
> 5 ft > 5 ft
1 1
2 2
D
Liquefiable
Soil
Z
> 15 ft
Minimum dimensions
of improved soil
Min. width > B +(D + 15 ft) and no less than width required for
shear resistance needed to get FS > 1.1 for critical failure surface,
but no greater than Z
Min. depth of ground improvement below foundation or wall base > D + 15 ft,
but no greater than Z.
Dense or very stiff, non-liquefiable soil or rock
Minimum Dimensions for Soil Improvement Volume Below Foundations and Walls
Figure 6-18
Altering Soil Composition – Altering the composition of the soil typically refers
to changing the soil matrix so that it is no longer susceptible to liquefaction. Example
Page6-56
6-56
ground improvement techniques include permeationGeotechnical
grouting (either chemical
DesignManual
Manual MM46-03.12
46-03.12
Page Geotechnical Design
or micro-fine cement), jet grouting, and deep soil mixing. These types of ground July2019
January 2019
improvement are typically more costly than the densification/reinforcement techniques,
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Altering Soil Composition – Altering the composition of the soil typically refers to
changing the soil matrix so that it is no longer susceptible to liquefaction. Example
ground improvement techniques include permeation grouting (either chemical or micro-
fine cement), jet grouting, and deep soil mixing. These types of ground improvement
are typically more costly than the densification/reinforcement techniques, but may be
the most effective techniques if access is limited, construction induced vibrations must
be kept to a minimum, and/or the improved ground has secondary functions, such as a
seepage barrier or shoring wall.
Drainage Enhancements – By improving the drainage properties of soils susceptible to
liquefaction, it may be possible to prevent the build-up of excess pore water pressures,
and thus liquefaction. However, drainage improvement is not considered adequately
reliable by WSDOT to prevent excess pore water pressure buildup due to liquefaction for
the following reasons:
• The drainage path time for pore pressure to dissipate may be too long,
• There is a potential for drainage structures to become clogged during installation and
in service, and
• With drainage enhancements some settlement is still likely.
Therefore, drainage enhancements shall not be used as a means to mitigate liquefaction.
However, drainage enhancements may provide some potential benefits with densification
and reinforcement techniques such as stone columns.
6-6 References
AASHTO, 2017. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Eighth Edition.
AASHTO, 2011, AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, Second
Edition.
Anderson, D. E., Lam, P., Martin, G., and Wang, J., 2008, Seismic Analysis and Design
of Retaining Walls, Buried Structures, Slopes, and Embankments, NCHRP Report 611,
Transportation Research Board, Washington, DC, 137 pp.
Anderson, D. E., Shin, S., and Kramer, S.L., 2011, “Nonlinear, Effective Stress Ground
Motion Response Analysis Following AASHTO Specifications for Load and Resistance
Factor Design Seismic Bridge Design,” Transportation Research Record No. 2251,
Transportation Research Board, Washington, D.C., pp. 144-154, DOI: 10.3141/2251-15.
Andrus, R. D., and Stokoe II, K. H., 2000, “Liquefaction Resistance of Soils from Shear-
Wave Velocity,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 126(11), pp.
1015-1025.
Arduino, P., McGann, C. R., and Ghofrani, A., 2017, Design Procedure for Bridge Foundations
Subject to Liquefaction-Induced Lateral Spreading, Washington State Department of
Transportation , Report WA-RD 874.2, 70 pp.
ASCE, 2000, Prestandard and Commentary for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings,
FEMA 356, 518 pp.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-57
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Ashford, S. A., Boulanger, R. W., and Brandenberg, S. J., 2011, Recommended Design
Practice for Pile Foundations in Laterally Spreading Ground, PEER Report 2011/04, Berkeley,
CA, 68 pp.
ATC-MCEER Joint Venture, 2002. Comprehensive Specification for the Seismic Design
of Bridges, NCHRP Report 472, National Cooperative Highway Research Program,
Washington DC.
Atwater, Brian F., 1996. Coastal Evidence for Great Earthquakes in Western Washington.
Assessing Earthquake Hazards and Reducing Risk in the Pacific Northwest, USGS
Professional Paper 1560 Vol. 1: pp. 77-90.
Bakun, W.H., Haugerud, R.A., Hopper, M.G., and Ludwin, R.S., 2002. “The December 1872
Washington State Earthquake.” Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, Vol. 92,
No. 8, pp. 3239-3258.
Bommer, J. J., and Acevedo, A. B., 2004, The Use of Real Earthquake Accelerograms as
Input to Dynamic Analysis, Journal of Earthquake Engineering, Vol. 8, Special Issue 1,
Imperial College Press, pp. 43-91.
Ashford, S. A., Boulanger, R. W., and Brandenberg, S. J., 2011, Recommended Design
Practice for Pile Foundations in Laterally Spreading Ground, PEER Report 2011/04,
Berkeley, CA, 68 pp.
Baker, J.W., 2013, An Introduction to Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis, White Paper 2,
No. 1, 79 pp.
Boulanger, R.W. and Idriss, I.M., 2006, “Liquefaction Susceptibility Criteria for Silts and
Clays,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE Vol. 132, No. 11,
Nov., pp. 1413-1426.
Boulanger, R.W. and Idriss, I.M., 2014, CPT and SPT Liquefaction Triggering Procedures,
Report No. UCD/CGM-14/01, Center for Geotechnical Modeling, Univ. California at
Davis, 138 pp.
Boulanger, R. W., Kutter, B. L., Brandenberg, S. J., Singh, P., and Chang, D., 2003, Pile
Foundations in Liquefied and Laterally Spreading Ground During Earthquakes: Centrifuge
Experiments & Analyses, College of Engineering, University of California at Davis, 205 pp.
Bowles, J.E., 1996. Foundation Analysis and Design, Fifth Edition. The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc., New York.
Brandenberg, S. J., Boulanger, R. W., Kutter, B. L., and Chang, D., 2007b, “Static Pushover
Analyses of Pile Groups in Liquefied and Laterally Spreading Ground in Centrifuge
Tests,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 133, No. 9,
pp. 1055-1066.
Bray, J. D., and Sancio, R. B., 2006, “Assessment of the Liquefaction Susceptibility of Fine
Grained Soils, ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 132,
No. 9, pp. 1165-1177.
Caltrans, 2012, Guidelines on Foundation Loading and Deformation Due to Liquefaction
Induced Lateral Spreading, Sacramento, CA, 44 pp. (http://www.dot.ca. gov/research/
structures/peer_lifeline_program/docs/guidelines_on_foundation_loading_jan2012.pdf).
Page 6-58 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Cetin, K.O., Seed, R.B., Der Kiureghian, A., Tokimatsu, K. Harder, L.F., Kayen, R.E., and
Moss, R.E.S., 2004. “Standard Penetration Test-Based Probabilistic and Deterministic
Assessment of Seismic Soil Liquefaction Potential,” Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 130, No. 12, Dec., pp. 1314-1340.
Dickenson, S. E., McCullough, N. J., Barkau, M. G., and Wavra, B. J., 2002, Assessment and
Mitigation of Liquefaction Hazards to Bridge Approach Embankments in Oregon, Final Report
SPR 361, FHWA-OR-RD-03-04, 210 pp.
Discussion and Closure of “Response of 0.6 m Cast-in-Steel-Shell Pile in Liquefied Soil
under Lateral Loading by Thomas J. Weaver, Scott A. Ashford, and Kyle M. Rollins, 2005,
ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 131, No. 1, pp. 94-
102”, ASCE 2006, pp. 1238-1241.
Dobry, R., Taboada, V, and Liu., L., 1995. “Centrifuge modeling of liquefaction effects
during earthquakes.” Proc. 1st Intl. Conf. On Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering,
K. Ishihara, ed., Tokyo, Japan, Vol. 3, pp. 1291-1324.
Darendeli, M., 2001, Development of a New Family of Normalized Modulus Reduction and
Material Damping Curves, Ph.D. Dissertation, Department. of Civil Engineering, University
of Texas, Austin, 362 pp.
EduPro Civil Systems, Inc., 1999. ProShake Version 1.10, Computer Software. Electrical
Power Research Institute (EPRI), 1993. Guidelines for Site Specific Ground Motions. Palo
Alto, CA. Electrical Power Research Institute, November-TR-102293.
Isenhower, W. M., and Wang, S.-T., 2015, Technical Manual for LPile, Version 8, Ensoft, Inc.,
238 pp.
Finn, W.D. Liam, Ledbetter, R.H. and Wu, G., 1994. “Liquefaction in Silty Soils: Design and
Analysis.” Ground Failures Under Seismic Conditions, Geotechnical Special Publication 44.
ASCE, New York, New York, pp. 51-76.
Finn, W.D. Liam and Fujita, N., 2004. “Behavior of Piles in Liquefiable Soils during
Earthquakes: Analysis and Design Issues.” Proceedings: Fifth International Conference on
Case Histories in Geotechnical Engineering, New York, New York, April 13-17, 2004.
Goter, S.K., 1994. Earthquakes in Washington and Oregon; 1872-1993, 1994, USGS
Open-File Report No. 94-226A.
Hashash, Y.M.A., Musgrove, M.I., Harmon, J.A., Groholski, D.R., Phillips, C.A., and Park, D.
(2016) “DEEPSOIL 6.1, User Manual”. Urbana, IL, Board of Trustees of University of Illinois
at Urbana-Champaign, http://deepsoil.cee.illinois.edu.
International Code Council, Inc., 2006. 2006 International Building Code. Country Club
Hills, IL.
Idriss, I. M., and Boulanger, R. W., 2007, “Residual Shear Strength of Liquefied Soils,”
Proceedings of the 27th USSD Annual Meeting and Conference, Modernization and
Optimization of Existing Dams and Reservoirs.
Idriss, I. M., and Boulanger, R. W., 2008, Soil Liquefaction During Earthquakes, Earthquake
Engineering Research Institute (EERI), MNO-12, 226 pp.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-59
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Imai, T. and Tonouchi, K., 1982, “Correlation of N-Value with S-Wave Velocity and Shear
Modulus,” Proc. 2nd European Symposium on Penetration Testing, Amsterdam, The
Netherlands, pp. 67-72.
Ishihara, K., and Yoshimine, M., 1992. “Evaluation of settlements in sand deposits
following liquefaction during earthquakes.” Soils and Foundations, JSSMFE, Vol. 32, No. 1,
March, pp. 173-188.
Jamiolkowski, M., D.C.F. LoPresti, and M. Manassero, 1991, “Evaluation of Relative
Density and Shear Strength of Sands from Cone Penetration Test and Flat Dilatometer
Test,” Soil Behavior and Soft Ground Construction (GSP 119), American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston, Va., pp. 201–238.
Jibson R. and Jibson M., 2003. Java Program for using Newmark’s Method and Simplified
Decoupled Analysis to Model Slope Deformations During Earthquakes. Computer Software.
USGS Open File Report 03-005.
Johnson, S.Y., Dadisman, S.V., Childs, J.R., and Stanley, W.D., 1999. “Active Tectonics of
the Seattle Fault and Central Puget Sound, Washington: Implications for Earthquake
Hazards.” Geological Society of America Bulletin, Vol. 111, No. 7, pp. 1042-1053.
Kaklamanos, J., Bradley, B. A., Thompson, E. M., and Baise, L. G., 2013, “Critical
parameters affecting bias and variability in site response analyses using KiK-net downhole
array data,” Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America, 103: pp. 1733-1749.
Kaklamanos, J., L. G. Baise, E. M. Thompson, and L. Dorfmann, 2015, “Comparison of
1D linear, equivalent-linear, and nonlinear site response models at six KiK-net validation
sites,” Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering, 69, pp. 207-219.
Kavazanjian, E., Wang, J.-N. J., Martin, G. R., Shamsabadi, A., Lam, I. (P.), Dickenson, S.
E., and Hung, C. J., 2011, Geotechnical Engineering Circular #3, LRFD Seismic Analysis
and Design of Transportation Geotechnical Features and Structural Foundations. Report No.
FHWA-NHI-11-032.
Kim, B. and Y. M. A. Hashash, 2013, “Site Response Analysis Using Downhole Array
Recordings during the March 2011 Tohoku-Oki Earthquake and the Effect of Long-
Duration Ground Motions,” Earthquake Spectra, 29: S37-S54.
Kim, Byungmin. Hashash, Youssef, M. A., Stewart, J. P., Rathje, E. M., Harmon, J. A.,
Musgrove, M. I., Campbell, K. W., and Silva, W. J., 2016, “Relative Differences between
Nonlinear and Equivalent-Linear 1-D Site Response Analyses,” Earthquake Spectra.
Kramer, S.L., 1996 U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, D.C. Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering. Prentice- Hall, Inc., Upper Saddle
River, NJ.
Kramer, S.L., 1996, Dynamic Response of Peats, WA-RD 412.1, 55 pp.
Kramer, S.L., 2000, “Dynamic Response of Mercer Slough Peat,” ASCE Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 126, No. 6, pp. 504-510.
Kramer, S. L., 2007. Evaluation of Liquefaction Hazards in Washington State, Washington
State Department of Transportation, Report WA-RD 668.1, 312 pp.
Page 6-60 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Kramer, S.L., Arduino, P., and Sideras, S.S., 2012, Earthquake Ground Motion Selection,
WA-RD 791.1, 60 pp.
Kramer, S.L. and Baska, D.A., 2007. “Estimation of permanent displacements due to lateral
spreading,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE
Kramer, S.L. and Paulsen, S.B., 2004. “Practical Use of Geotechnical Site Response
Models.” PEER Lifelines Program Workshop on the Uncertainties in Nonlinear Soil Properties
and the Impact on Modeling Dynamic Soil Response. Berkeley, CA. March 18-19, 2004.
Kramer, S.L. and Mayfield, R. T., 2007, “Return Period of Soil Liquefaction,” ASCE Journal
of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 133, No. 7, pp. 802-813.
Kwok A.O.L., Stewart J.P., Hashash Y.M.A., Matasovic N., Pyke R., Wang Z., Yang Z.,
2007, “Use of exact solutions of wave propagation problems to guide implementation
of nonlinear, time-domain ground response analysis routines,” ASCE, J. Geotech. Eng.,
133(11), pp. 1385-1398.
Lee, M. and Finn, W., 1978. DESRA-2, Dynamic Effective Stress Response Analysis of Soil
Deposits with Energy Transmitting Boundary Including Assessment of Liquefaction Potential.
Soil Mechanics Series No. 38, Dept. of Civil Engineering, University of British Columbia,
Vancouver, B.C.
Marsh, M. L., Buckle, I. G., Kavazanjian, E., 2014, LRFD Seismic Analysis and Design
of Bridges Reference Manual, NHI Course 130093 and 130093A, Report No. FHWA
NHI-15-004, Federal Highway Administration, 608 pp.
Matasović, Neven, and Ordóñez, Gustovo, 2007, D-MOD2000, GeoMotions, LLC,
Computer Software.
Matasović, Neven, and Hashash, Youssef, 2012, Practices and Procedures for Site-Specific
Evaluations of Earthquake Ground Motions, NCHRP Synthesis 428, Transportation Research
Board, Washington, D.C., 89 pp.
Mayne, P.W. and Rix, G.J., 1993, “Gmax-qc Relationships for Clays,” Geotechnical Testing
Journal, ASTM, Vol. 16, No. 1, pp. 54-60.
McGuire, R.K., 2004. Seismic Hazard and Risk Analysis. Monograph MNO-10, Earthquake
Engineering Research Institute, Oakland, CA. 221 pp.
Moss, R.E.S., Seed, R.B., Kayen, R.E., Stewart, J.P., Der Kiureghian, A. and Cetin, K.O.,
2006. “CPT-Based Probabilistic and Deterministic Assessment of In Situ Seismic Soil
Liquefaction Potential,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE,
Vol. 132, No. 8, Aug., pp. 1032-1051.
Muhunthan, B., Vijayathasan, N. V., and Abbasi, B., 2017, Liquefaction-Induced Downdrag
on Drilled Shafts, Washington State Department of Transportation , Report WA-RD 865.1,
162 pp.
National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine. 2016. State of the Art and
Practice in the Assessment of Earthquake-Induced Soil Liquefaction and Its Consequences.
Washington, DC: The National Academies Press. doi: 1017226/23474.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-61
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
NEHRP, 2011, Selecting and Scaling Earthquake Ground Motions for Performing
Response-History Analyses, NIST GCR 11-917-15, 256 pp.
Olson, S.M. and Stark, T.D., 2002. “Liquefied Strength Ratio from Liquefaction Flow
Failure Case Histories,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 39, No. 3, June, pp 629-647.
Ordoñez, G.A., 2000. Shake 2000, Computer Software.
Phillips C., Hashash, Y.M.A., 2009, “Damping formulation for nonlinear 1D site response
analyses,” Soil Dyn. Earthquake Eng., 29(7), pp. 1143-1158.
Rollins, K.M., Evans, M.D., Springman-Allison, S.M, and Norrish, R.M., 1998, “Shear
Modulus and Damping Relationships for Gravels,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 24, No. 5, pp. __.
Rollins, K. M., Gerber, T. M., Lane, J. D., and Ashford, S. A., 2005a, “Lateral Resistance
of a Full-Scale Pile Group in Liquefied Sand,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 131, No. 1, pp. 115-125.
Rollins, K. M.; Hales, L. J.; and Ashford, S. A. 2005b. “p-y Curves for Large Diameter Shafts
in Liquefied Sands from Blast Liquefaction Tests,” Seismic Performance and Simulation
of Pile Foundations in Liquefied and Laterally Spreading Ground, Geotechnical Special
Publication No. 145, ASCE, pp. 11-23.
Sabatini, P.J., Bachus, R.C., Mayne, P.W., Schneider, J.A., and Zettler, T.E., 2002.
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 5, Evaluation of Soil and Rock Properties, Report No.
FHWA-IF-02-034. U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, D.C.
Satake, Kenji, et al., 1996. “Time and Size of a Giant Earthquake in Cascadia Inferred from
Japanese Tsunami Records of January 1700.” Nature, Vol. 379, pp. 247-248.
Seed, R. B., Cetin, K. O., Moss, R. E. S., Kammerer, A. M., Pestana, J. M., Riemer, M. F.,
Sancio, R. B., Bray, J. D., Kayen, R. E., Faris, A., 2003, Recent Advances in Soil Liquefaction
Engineering: A unified and Consistent Framework, Earthquake Engineering Research Center,
Univ. of CA Berkeley, Report No. EERC 2003-06, 71 pp.
Seed. H.B., Wong, R.T., Idriss, I.M. and Tokimatsu, K., 1984, “Moduli and Damping Factors
for Dynamic Analyses of Cohesionless Soils,” Report No. UCB/EERC- 84/14, Earthquake
Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, California.
Stewart, J.P., Archuleta, R.J., and Power, M.S., 2008, Earthquake Spectra, Special Issue on
the Next Generation Attenuation Project, 24(1), EERI.
Tokimatsu, K. and Seed, H.B., 1987. “Evaluation of Settlement in Sands Due to Earthquake
Shaking.” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, Vol. 113, No. 8, August 1987.
United States Geological Survey (USGS), 2002. Earthquake Hazards Program. Website link:
www.eqhazmaps.usgs.gov
United States Geological Survey (USGS), 2017, Illustration of Seismic Source Zones in the
Pacific Northwest, https://geomaps.wr.usgs.gov/pacnw/pacnweq/pdf/subd_eqpg.pdf
Vucetic, M. and Dobry, R. (1991). Effect of Soil Plasticity on Cyclic Response. Journal of
Geotechnical Engineering, Vo. 117, No. 1, pp. 89-107.
Page 6-62 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Design Chapter 6
Washington State Department of Transportation, 2012, LRFD Bridge Design Manual
Publication Number M 23-50.
Washington State Department of Transportation, 2012, Design Manual, Publication
Number M 22-01.
Weaver, T. J., Ashford, S. A., and Rollins, K. M., 2005, “Response of a 0.6 m Cast-in-
Steel-Shell Pile in Liquefied Soil Under Lateral Loading,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 131, No. 1, pp. 94-102.
Yelin, T.S., Tarr, A.C., Michael, J.A., and Weaver, C.S., 1994. Washington and Oregon
Earthquake History and Hazards. USGS, Open File Report 94-226B.
Yokoyame, K., Tamura, K., and Matsuo, O, 1997, “Design Methods of Bridge Foundations
against Soil Liquefaction-induced Ground Flow,” Second Italy-Japan Workshop on Seismic
Design and Retrofit of Bridges, Rome, Italy, pp. 1-23.
Youd, T.L.; Idriss, I.M.; Andrus, R.D.; Arango, I.; Castro, G.; Christian, J.T.; Dobry, R.; Finn,
W.D.; Harder, L.; Hynes, M.E.; Ishihara, K.; Koester, J.P.; Liao,
S.S.C.; Marcuson, W.F.; Martin, G.R.; Mitchell, J.K.; Moriwaki, Y.; Power, M.S.; Robertson,
P.K.; Seed, R.B. and Stokoe, K.H., 2001. “Liquefaction Resistance of Soils: Summary Report
from the 1996 NCEER and 1998 NCEER/NSF Workshops on Evaluation of Liquefaction
Resistance of Soils.” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering,
Vol. 127, No. 10, pp. 817-833.
Youd, T.L.; Hansen, C.M. and Bartlett, S.F., 2002. “Revised Multilinear Regression
Equations for Prediction of Lateral Spread Displacement.”. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical
and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 128, No. 12, pp. 1007-1017.
Youd, T.L. and Carter, B.L., 2005. “Influence of Soil Softening and Liquefaction on Spectral
Acceleration,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 131,
No. 7, pp. 811-825.
Zhang, G., Robertson, P. K., & Brachman, R. W. I, 2002, “Estimating Liquefaction-Induced
Ground Settlements from CPT for Level Ground,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal, 39(5),
pp. 1168-1180.
Zhang, G., Robertson, P. K., & Brachman, R. W. I.,2004, Estimating Liquefaction- Induced
Lateral Displacements Using the Standard Penetration Test or Cone Penetration
Test, ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 130, No. 8,
pp. 861-871.
6-7 Appendices
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
Appendix 6-B High Resolution Seismic Acceleration Maps
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-63
July 2019
Chapter 6 Seismic Design
Page 6-64 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site
Response
Site specific seismic hazard and response analyses shall be conducted in accordance with
Section 6-3 and the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design. When
site specific hazard characterization is conducted, it shall be conducted using the design
hazard levels specified in Section 6-3.1.
6-A.1 Background Information for Performing Site Specific Analysis
Washington State is located in a seismically active region. The seismicity varies
throughout the state, with the seismic hazard generally more severe in Western
Washington and less severe in Eastern Washington. Earthquakes as large as magnitude
8 to 9 are considered possible off the coast of Washington State. The regional tectonic
and geologic conditions in Washington State combine to create a unique seismic setting,
where some earthquakes occur on faults, but more commonly historic earthquakes have
been associated with large broad fault zones located deep beneath the earth’s surface.
The potential for surface faulting exists, and as discussed in this appendix a number of
surface faults have been identified as being potential sources of seismic ground shaking;
however, surface vegetation and terrain have made it particularly difficult to locate
surface faults. In view of this complexity, a clear understanding of the regional tectonic
setting and the recognized seismic source zones is essential for characterizing the seismic
hazard at a specific site in Washington State.
6-A.1.1 Regional Tectonics
Washington State is located at the convergent continental boundary known as the
Cascadia Subduction Zone (CSZ). The CSZ lies at the boundary between two crustal
tectonic plates, where the offshore Juan de Fuca plate moves northeastward, converging
with and subducting beneath the continental North American plate. The CSZ extends
from mid-Vancouver Island to Northern California. The interaction of these two plates
results in three potential seismic source zones as depicted on Figure 6-A-1. These three
seismic source zones are: (1) the shallow crustal source zone, (2) the deep CSZ Benioff
or intraplate source zone, and (3) the CSZ interplate or interface source zone (i.e., the
Cascadia Subduction Zone).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-1
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
Seismic Design Appendix 6-A
Figure 6-A-1 The Three Potential Seismic Source Zones Present in the Pacific
Northwest (USGS 2017)
6-A.1.2 The Three
Seismic Source ZonesPotential Seismic Source Zones
Present in the Pacific Northwest (USGS 2017)
Figure 6-A-1 as a minimum, the following source
If conducting a site specific hazard characterization,
zones should be evaluated (all reported magnitudes are moment magnitudes):
6-A.1.2 Seismic Source Zones
Shallow Crustala Source
If conducting Zone hazard
site specific – The shallow crustal source
characterization, as a zone is usedthe
minimum, tofollowing
characterize
shallow crustalshould
source zones earthquake activity within
be evaluated the North
(all reported American
magnitudes arePlate throughout
moment magnitudes):
Washington State. Shallow crustal earthquakes typically occur at depths ranging up to
Shallow
12 Crustal
miles. The Source
shallow Zone
crustal – The
source zoneshallow crustal source
is characterized zonecapable
as being is used of
to generating
earthquakes up to about magnitude 7.5. Large shallow crustal earthquakes arePlate
characterize shallow crustal earthquake activity within the North American typically
throughout Washington State. Shallow
followed by a sequence of aftershocks. crustal earthquakes typically occur at depths
ranging up to 12 miles. The shallow crustal source zone is characterized as being
Crustal
capableseismicity is generally
of generating characterized
earthquakes using
up to about two types7.5.
magnitude of models: known crustal
Large shallow fault
source modelsare
earthquakes (such as thefollowed
typically Seattle Fault
by azone, South
sequence ofWhidbey Island fault system, and the
aftershocks.
Tacoma fault), and seismicity-based background sources (which are based on historical
Crustal seismicity is generally characterized using two types of models: known fault
data from earthquakes on unidentified or uncharacterized faults).
source models (such as the Seattle Fault zone, South Whidbey Island fault system,
and the Tacoma fault), and seismicity-based background sources (which are based on
historical data from earthquakes on unidentified or uncharacterized faults).
The largest known earthquakes associated with the shallow crustal source zone in
Page 6-A-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
Washington State include an event on the Seattle Fault about 900 AD and the 1872
July 2019
Page 6-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response Appendix 6-A
The largest known earthquakes associated with the shallow crustal source zone in
Washington State include an event on the Seattle Fault about 900 AD and the 1872
North Cascades earthquake. The Seattle Fault event was believed to have been
magnitude 7 or greater (Johnson, 1999), and the 1872 North Cascades earthquake is
estimated to have been between magnitudes 6.8 and 7.4. The location of the 1872 North
Cascades earthquake is uncertain; however, recent research suggests the earthquake’s
intensity center was near the south end of Lake Chelan (Bakun et al, 2002). Other large,
notable shallow earthquakes in and around the state include the 1936 Milton-Freewater,
Oregon earthquake (magnitude 6.1) and the North Idaho earthquake (magnitude 5.5)
(Goter, 1994).
Benioff Source Zone – CSZ Benioff source zone earthquakes are also referred to as
intraplate, intraslab, or deep subcrustal earthquakes. Benioff zone earthquakes occur
within the subducting Juan de Fuca Plate between depths of 20 and 40 miles and
typically have no large aftershocks. Extensive faulting results as the Juan de Fuca Plate
is forced below the North American plate and into the upper mantle. Benioff zone
earthquakes primarily contribute to the seismic hazard within Western Washington.
The Olympia 1949 (M = 7.1), the Seattle 1965 (M = 6.5), and the Nisqually 2001 (M
= 6.8) earthquakes are considered to be Benioff zone earthquakes. The Benioff zone
is characterized as being capable of generating earthquakes up to magnitude 7.5. The
recurrence interval for large earthquakes originating from the Benioff source zone is
believed to be shorter than for the shallow crustal and CSZ interplate source zones—
anecdotally, Benioff zone earthquakes in Western Washington occur every 15 to 35
years or so, based on recent history. The deep focal depth of these earthquakes tends to
dampen the shaking intensity when compared to shallow crustal earthquakes of similar
magnitudes.
CSZ Interplate Source Zone – The Cascadia Subduction Zone (CSZ) is an approximately
650-mile long thrust fault that extends along the Pacific Coast from mid-Vancouver
Island to Northern California. CSZ interplate earthquakes result from rupture of all or
a portion of the convergent boundary between the subducting Juan de Fuca plate and
the overriding North American plate. The fault surfaces approximately 50 to 75 miles off
the Washington coast. The width of the seismogenic portion of the CSZ interplate fault
is approximately 50 to 60 miles wide and varies along its length. As the fault becomes
deeper, materials being faulted become ductile and the fault is unable to store mechanical
stresses.
The CSZ is considered as being capable of generating earthquakes of magnitude 8 to
magnitude 9. No earthquakes on the CSZ have been instrumentally recorded; however,
through the geologic record and historical records of tsunamis in Japan, it is believed that
the most recent CSZ event occurred in the year 1700 (Atwater, 1996 and Satake, et al,
1996). Recurrence intervals for CSZ interplate earthquakes are thought to be on the order
of 400 to 600 years. Paleogeologic evidence suggests five to seven interplate earthquakes
may have been generated along the CSZ over the last 3,500 years at irregular intervals.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-3
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
6-A.2 Design Earthquake Magnitude
In addition to identifying the site’s source zones, the design earthquake(s) produced by
the source zones must be characterized for use in evaluating seismic geologic hazards
such as liquefaction and lateral spreading. Typically, design earthquake(s) are defined by a
specific magnitude, source-to-site distance, and ground motion characteristics.
The following guidelines should be used for determining a site’s design earthquake(s):
The design earthquake should consider hazard-compatible events occurring on crustal
and subduction-related sources.
More than one design earthquake may be appropriate depending upon the source
zones that contribute to the site’s seismic hazard and the impact that these
earthquakes may have on site response.
The design earthquake should be consistent with the design hazard level prescribed in
Section 6-3.1.
The USGS interactive deaggregation tool (https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/
interactive/) provides a summary of contribution to seismic hazard for earthquakes of
various magnitudes and source to site distances for a given hazard level and may be
used to evaluate relative contribution to ground motion from seismic sources. Since this
chapter has been updated to require the use of the 2014 maps and associated data, it
is required to use the 2014 deaggregation data. Note that magnitudes presented in the
deaggregation data represent contribution to a specified hazard level and should not
simply be averaged for input into analyses such as liquefaction and lateral spreading.
Instead, the deaggregation data should be used to assess the relative contribution to the
probabilistic hazard from the various source zones. If any source zone contributes more
than about 10 percent of the total hazard, design earthquakes representative from each
of those source zones should be used for analyses.
For liquefaction or lateral spreading analysis, one of the following approaches should be
used to account for the earthquake magnitude, in order of preference:
Use all earthquake magnitudes applicable at the specific site (from the deggregation)
using the multiple scenario or performance based approaches for liquefaction
assessment as described by Kramer and Mayfield (2007) and Kramer (2007). The
hazard level used for this analysis shall be consistent with the hazard level selected
for the structure for which the liquefaction analysis is being conducted (typically, a
probability of exceedance of 7 percent in 75 years in accordance with the AASHTO
Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design). While performance based
techniques can be accomplished using the WSLIQ software (Kramer, 2007), the
performance based option in that software uses the 2002 USGS ground motions
and has not been updated to include more recent ground motion data that would
be consistent with the ground motions used to produce the 2014 USGS seismic
maps. Until that software is updated to use the new ground motion database, the
performance based option in WSLIQ shall not be used.
Page 6-A-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response Appendix 6-A
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-5
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
When PSHA or DSHA are performed for a site, the following information shall be included
as a minimum in project documentation and reports:
Overview of seismic sources considered in analysis
Summary of seismic source parameters including length/boundaries, source type,
slip rate, segmentation, maximum magnitude, recurrence models and relationships
used, source depth and geometry. This summary should include the rationale behind
selection of source parameters.
Assumptions underlying the analysis should be summarized in either a table (DSHA)
or in a logic tree (PSHA)
The 2014 USGS probabilistic hazard maps as published herein essentially account for
regional seismicity and attenuation relationships, recurrence rates, maximum magnitude
of events on known faults or source zones, and the location of the site with respect to the
faults or source zones. The USGS data is sufficient for most sites, and more sophisticated
seismic hazard analyses are generally not required; the exceptions may be to capture
the effects of sources not included in the USGS model, to assess near field or directivity
influences, or to incorporate topographic impacts or basin effects.
The 2014 USGS hazard maps only capture the effects of near- fault motions (i.e., ground
motion directivity or pulse effects) or bedrock topography (i.e., so called basin effects) in
a limited manner. These effects modify ground motions, particularly at certain periods,
for sites located near active faults (typically with 6 miles) or for sites where significant
changes in bedrock topography occurs. For specific requirements regarding near fault
effects, see the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
6-A.4 Selection of Attenuation Relationships
Attenuation relationships describe the decay of earthquake energy as it travels from the
seismic source to the project site. Many of the newer published relationships are capable
of accommodating site soil conditions as well as varying source parameters (e.g., fault
type, location relative to the fault, near-field effects, etc.) In addition, during the past 10
years, specific attenuation relationships have been developed for Cascadia subduction
zone sources. For both deterministic and probabilistic hazard assessments, attenuation
relationships used in analysis should be selected based on applicability to both the
site conditions and the type of seismic source under consideration. Rationale for the
selection of and assumptions underlying the use of attenuation relationships for hazard
characterization shall be clearly documented.
If deterministic methods are used to develop design spectra, the spectral ordinates should
be developed using a range of ground motion attenuation relationships consistent with
the source mechanisms. At least three to four attenuation relationships should be used.
Page 6-A-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response Appendix 6-A
6-A.5 Site Specific Ground Response Analysis
6-A.5.1 Design/Computer Models
Site specific ground response analyses are most commonly done using one-dimensional
equivalent-linear or non linear procedures. A one dimensional analysis is generally based
on the assumption that soils and ground surface are laterally uniform and horizontal
and that ground surface motions can be modeled by vertically propagating shear wave
through laterally uniform soils. The influence of vertical motions, surface waves, laterally
non-uniform soil conditions, incoherence and spatial variation of ground motions are
not accounted for in conventional, one-dimensional analyses (Kavazanjian, et al., 2011).
A variety of site response computer models are available to geotechnical designers for
dynamic site response analyses. In general, there are three classes of dynamic ground
response models: 1) one dimensional equivalent linear, 2) one dimensional nonlinear, and
3) multi-dimension models. See Matasović and Hashash (2012) for a good overview of the
types of models available for site specific ground response analysis, their advantages, and
their limitations.
One-Dimensional Equivalent Linear Models – One-dimensional equivalent linear site
response computer codes, such as ProShake (EduPro Civil Systems, 1999) or Shake2000
(Ordoñez, 2000), and DEEPSOIL (Hashash, et al. 2016) use an iterative total stress
approach to estimate the nonlinear, inelastic behavior of soils. These programs use
an average shear modulus and material damping over the entire cycle of loading to
approximate the hysteresis loop.
The equivalent linear model provides reasonable results for small strains (less than about
1 to 2 percent) (Kramer and Paulsen, 2004). A-priori thresholds to evaluate differences
between analyses and determine if a nonlinear analysis is needed (or if an equivalent
linear analysis is acceptable) are provided in Kim et al. (2016). Additional information
on the use and comparison of equivalent linear and nonlinear models is provided in
Kaklamanos, et al. (2013, 2015), and Kim and Hashash (2013).
One-Dimensional Nonlinear Models – One-dimensional, nonlinear computer codes,
such as D-MOD 2000, DESRA, and DEEPSOIL use direct numerical integration of the
incremental equation of motion in small time steps and account for the nonlinear soil
behavior through use of constitutive soil models. Depending upon the constitutive
model used, these programs can model pore water pressure buildup and permanent
deformations. The accuracy of nonlinear models depends on the proper selection of
parameters used by constitutive soil model and the ability of the constitutive model to
represent the response of the soil to ground shaking.
Another issue that can affect the accuracy of the model is how the G/Gmax and damping
relations are modeled and the ability of the design model to adapt those relations to site
specific data. Additionally, the proper selection of a Rayleigh damping value can have
a significant effect on the modeling results. In general, a value of 1 to 2% is needed to
maintain numerical stability. It should be recognized that the Rayleigh damping will act in
addition to hysteretic damping produced by the nonlinear, inelastic soil model. Rayleigh
damping should therefore be limited to the smallest value that provides the required
numerical stability. The results of analyses using values greater than 1 to 2% should be
interpreted with great caution. Additional information regarding Rayleigh damping as well
as newer damping models is provided in Kwok, et al. (2007), and Phillips and Hashash
(2009).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-7
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
See Section 6-4.2.2 for specific issues related to liquefaction modeling when using one-
dimensional nonlinear analysis methods.
Two and Three Dimensional Models – Two- and three-dimensional site response analyses
can be performed using computer codes, such as QUAD4, PLAXIS, FLAC, DYNAFLOW,
LSDYNA, and OPENSEES, and use both equivalent linear and nonlinear models. Many
attributes of the two- and three-dimensional models are similar to those described
above for the one-dimensional equivalent linear and nonlinear models. However, the
two- and three-dimensional computer codes typically require significantly more model
development and computational time than one-dimensional analyses. The important
advantages of the two- and three-dimensional models include the ability to consider
soil anisotropy, irregular soil stratigraphy, surface waves, irregular topography, and soil-
structure interaction. Another advantage with the two- and three-dimensional models
is that seismically induced permanent displacements can be estimated. Furthermore,
these modeling platforms are better equipped for nonlinear effective stress analysis for
liquefiable sites and can incorporate models that can capture large strain dilation (e.g.,
UBCSand). Successful application of these codes requires considerable knowledge and
experience. Expert peer review of the analysis shall be conducted, in accordance with
Section 6-3 unless approval to not conduct the peer review is obtained from the State
Geotechnical Engineer.
6-A.5.2 Input Parameters for Site Specific Response Analysis
The input parameters required for both equivalent-linear and nonlinear site specific
ground response analysis include the site stratigraphy (including soil layering and depth to
rock or rock-like material), dynamic properties for each stratigraphic layer (including soil
and rock stiffness, e.g., shear wave velocity), and ground motion time histories. Soil and
rock parameters required by the equivalent linear models include the shear wave velocity
or initial (small strain) shear modulus and unit weight for each layer, and curves relating
the shear modulus and damping ratio as a function of shear strain (See Section 6-2.2).
The parameters required for cyclic nonlinear soil models generally consist of a backbone
curve that models the stress strain path during cyclic loading and rules for loading and
unloading, stiffness degradation, pore pressure generation and other factors (Kramer,
1996). More sophisticated nonlinear soil constitutive models may require definition
of yield surfaces, hardening functions, and flow rules. Many of these models require
specification of multiple parameters whose determination may require a significant
laboratory testing program.
One of the most critical aspects of the input to a site-specific response analysis is the
soil and rock stiffness and impedance values or shear wave velocity profile. Great care
should be taken in establishing the shear wave velocity profile – it should be measured
whenever possible. Equal care should be taken in developing soil models, including
shear wave velocity profiles, to adequately model the potential range and variability in
ground motions at the site and adequately account for these in the site specific design
parameters (e.g., spectra). A long bridge, for example, may cross materials of significantly
different stiffness (i.e., velocities) and/or soil profiles beneath the various bridge piers
and abutments. Because different soil profiles can respond differently, and sometimes
(particularly when very soft and/or liquefiable soils are present) very differently, great care
should be taken in selecting and averaging soil profiles and properties prior to performing
the site response analyses. In most cases, it is preferable to analyze the individual profiles
Page 6-A-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response Appendix 6-A
and then aggregate the responses rather than to average the soil properties or profiles
and analyze only the averaged profile.
A suite of ground motion time histories is required for both equivalent linear and
nonlinear site response analyses as described in Section 6-A.6. The use of at least three
input ground motions is required and seven or more is preferred for site specific ground
response analysis (total, regardless of the number of source zones that need to be
considered. Guidelines for selection and development of ground motion time histories are
also described in Section 6-A.6.
6-A.6 Analysis Using Acceleration-Time Histories
The site specific analyses discussed in Section 6-3 and in this appendix are focused
on the development of site specific design spectra and use in other geotechnical
analyses. However, site specific time histories may be required as input in nonlinear
structural analysis.
Time history development and analysis for site-specific ground response or other analyses
shall be conducted as specified in the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
Bridge Design. For convenience, Article 3.4.4 and commentary of the AASHTO Guide
Specifications are provided below:
Earthquake acceleration time histories will be required for site-specific ground motion
response evaluations and for nonlinear inelastic dynamic analysis of bridge structures. The
time histories for these applications shall have characteristics that are representative of
the seismic environment of the site and the local site conditions, including the response
spectrum for the site.
Response-spectrum-compatible time histories shall be developed from representative
recorded earthquake motions. Analytical techniques used for spectrum matching shall
be demonstrated to be capable of achieving seismologically realistic time series that are
similar to the time series of the initial time histories selected for spectrum matching. The
recorded time histories should be scaled to the approximate level of the design response
spectrum in the period range of significance unless otherwise approved by the Owner. At
least three response-spectrum-compatible time histories shall be used for representing
the design earthquake (ground motions having 7 percent probability of exceedance in 75
years) when conducting dynamic ground motion response analyses or nonlinear inelastic
modeling of bridges.
• For site-specific ground motion response modeling single components of separate
records shall be used in the response analysis. The target spectrum used to develop the
time histories is defined at the base of the soil column. The target spectrum is obtained
from the USGS/AASHTO Seismic Hazard Maps or from a site-specific hazard analysis
as described in Article 3.4.3.1.
• For nonlinear time history modeling of bridge structures, the target spectrum is usually
located at or close to the ground surface, i.e., the rock spectrum has been modified for
local site effects. Each component of motion shall be modeled. The issue of requiring all
three orthogonal components (x, y, and z) of design motion to be input simultaneously
shall be considered as a requirement when conducting a nonlinear time-history
analysis. The design actions shall be taken as the maximum response calculated for the
three ground motions in each principal direction.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-9
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
If a minimum of seven time histories are used for each component of motion, the design
actions may be taken as the mean response calculated for each principal direction. For
near-field sites (D < 6 miles) the recorded horizontal components of motion selected
should represent a near-field condition and that they should be transformed into principal
components before making them response-spectrum- compatible. The major principal
component should then be used to represent motion in the fault-normal direction and
the minor principal component should be used to represent motion in the fault-parallel
direction.
Characteristics of the seismic environment of the site to be considered in selecting time-
histories include: tectonic environment (e.g., subduction zone; shallow crustal faults in
western United States or similar crustal environment; eastern United States or similar
crustal environment); earthquake magnitude; type of faulting (e.g., strike-slip; reverse;
normal); seismic-source-to-site distance; basin effects, local site conditions; and design or
expected ground-motion characteristics (e.g., design response spectrum; duration of strong
shaking; and special ground- motion characteristics such as near-fault characteristics).
Dominant earthquake magnitudes and distances, which contribute principally to the
probabilistic design response spectra at a site, as determined from national ground motion
maps, can be obtained from deaggregation information on the U.S. Geological Survey
website: https://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/interactive.
It is desirable to select time-histories that have been recorded under conditions similar
to the seismic conditions at the site listed above, but compromises are usually required
because of the multiple attributes of the seismic environment and the limited data bank of
recorded time-histories. Selection of time-histories having similar earthquake magnitudes
and distances, within reasonable ranges, are especially important parameters because they
have a strong influence on response spectral content, response spectral shape, duration of
strong shaking, and near- source ground-motion characteristics. It is desirable that selected
recorded motions be somewhat similar in overall ground motion level and spectral shape
to the design spectrum to avoid using very large scaling factors with recorded motions and
very large changes in spectral content in the spectrum-matching approach. If the site is
located within 6 miles of an active fault, then intermediate-to-long-period ground-motion
pulses that are characteristic of near-source time-histories should be included if these types
of ground motion characteristics could significantly influence structural response. Similarly,
the high short-period spectral content of near-source vertical ground motions should be
considered.
Ground-motion modeling methods of strong-motion seismology are being increasingly
used to supplement the recorded ground-motion database. These methods are especially
useful for seismic settings for which relatively few actual strong-motion recordings are
available, such as in the central and eastern United States. Through analytical simulation
of the earthquake rupture and wave- propagation process, these methods can produce
seismologically reasonable time series.
Response spectrum matching approaches include methods in which time series
adjustments are made in the time domain (Lilhanand and Tseng, 1988; Abrahamson,
1992) and those in which the adjustments are made in the frequency domain (Gasparini
and Vanmarcke, 1976; Silva and Lee, 1987; Bolt and Gregor, 1993). Both of these
approaches can be used to modify existing time-histories to achieve a close match to the
design response spectrum while maintaining fairly well the basic time-domain character
of the recorded or simulated time-histories. To minimize changes to the time-domain
Page 6-A-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response Appendix 6-A
characteristics, it is desirable that the overall shape of the spectrum of the recorded time-
history not be greatly different from the shape of the design response spectrum and that
the time-history initially be scaled so that its spectrum is at the approximate level of the
design spectrum before spectrum matching.
When developing three-component sets of time histories by simple scaling rather than
spectrum matching, it is difficult to achieve a comparable aggregate match to the design
spectra for each component of motion when using a single scaling factor for each time-
history set. It is desirable, however, to use a single scaling factor to preserve the relationship
between the components. Approaches for dealing with this scaling issue include:
• Use of a higher scaling factor to meet the minimum aggregate match requirement for
one component while exceeding it for the other two,
• Use of a scaling factor to meet the aggregate match for the most critical component
with the match somewhat deficient for other components, and
• Compromising on the scaling by using different factors as required for different
components of a time-history set.
While the second approach is acceptable, it requires careful examination and interpretation
of the results and possibly dual analyses for application of the horizontal higher horizontal
component in each principal horizontal direction.
The requirements for the number of time histories to be used in nonlinear inelastic dynamic
analysis and for the interpretation of the results take into account the dependence of
response on the time domain character of the time histories (duration, pulse shape, pulse
sequencing) in addition to their response spectral content.
Additional guidance on developing acceleration time histories for dynamic analysis may be
found in publications by the Caltrans Seismic Advisory Board Adhoc Committee (CSABAC)
on Soil-Foundation-Structure Interaction (1999) and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
(2000). CSABAC (1999) also provides detailed guidance on modeling the spatial variation
of ground motion between bridge piers and the conduct of seismic soil-foundation-
structure interaction (SFSI) analyses. Both spatial variations of ground motion and SFSI
may significantly affect bridge response. Spatial variations include differences between
seismic wave arrival times at bridge piers (wave passage effect), ground motion incoherence
due to seismic wave scattering, and differential site response due to different soil profiles
at different bridge piers. For long bridges, all forms of spatial variations may be important.
For short bridges, limited information appears to indicate that wave passage effects and
incoherence are, in general, relatively unimportant in comparison to effects of differential
site response (Shinozuka et al., 1999; Martin, 1998). Somerville et al. (1999) provide
guidance on the characteristics of pulses of ground motion that occur in time histories in
the near-fault region.
In addition to the information sources cited above, Kramer (1996), Bommer and Acevedo
(2004), NEHRP (2011), and Kramer, et al. (2012), should be consulted for specific
requirements on the selection, scaling, and use of time histories for ground motion
characterization and dynamic analysis.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 6-A-11
July 2019
Appendix 6-A Site Specific Seismic Hazard and Site Response
Final selection of time histories to be used will depend on two factors:
• How well the response spectrum generated from the scaled time histories matches
the design response spectrum, and
• Similarity of the fault mechanisms for the time histories to those of recognized seismic
source zones that contribute to the site’s seismic hazard Also, if the earthquake
records are used in the site specific ground response model as bedrock motion, the
records should be recorded on sites with bedrock characteristics. The frequency
content, earthquake magnitude, and peak bedrock acceleration should also be used
as criteria to select earthquake time histories for use in site specific ground response
analysis.
The requirements in the first bullet are most important to meet if the focus of the seismic
modeling is structural and foundation design. The requirements in the second bullet are
most important to meet if liquefaction and its effects are a major consideration in the
design of the structure and its foundations. Especially important in the latter case is the
duration of strong motion.
Note that a potential issue with the use of a spectrum-compatible motion that should
be considered is that in western Washington, the uniform hazard spectrum (UHS) may
have significant contributions from different sources that have major differences in
magnitudes and site-to-source distances. The UHS cannot conveniently be approximated
by a single earthquake source. For example, the low period (high frequency) part of the
UHS spectrum may be controlled by a low-magnitude, short- distance event and the
long period (low frequency) portion by a large-magnitude, long-distance event. Fitting a
single motion to that target spectrum will therefore produce an unrealistically energetic
motion with an unlikely duration. Using that motion as an input to an analysis involving
significant amounts of nonlinearity (such as some sort of permanent deformation analysis,
or the analysis of a structure with severe loading) can lead to overprediction of response
(soil and/or structural). However, if the soil is overloaded by this potentially unrealistically
energetic prediction of ground motion, the soil could soften excessively and dampen
a lot of energy (large strains), more than would be expected in reality, leading to an
unconservative prediction of demands in the structure.
To address this potential issue, time histories representing the distinctly different seismic
sources (e.g., shallow crustal versus subduction zone) should be spectrally matched or
scaled to correspondingly distinct, source-specific spectra. A source- specific spectrum
should match the UHS or design spectrum over the period range in which the source
is the most significant contributor to the ground motion hazard, but will likely be lower
than the UHS or design spectrum at other periods for which the source is not the most
significant contributor to the hazard. However, the different source-spectra in aggregate
should envelope the UHS or design spectrum. Approval by the State Geotechnical
Engineer and State Bridge Engineer is required for use of source-specific spectra and
time histories.
Page 6-A-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Seismic Zones and Peak Horizontal Acceleration (%g) for 7%
Probability of Exceedance in 75 years - Site Class - B/C Boundary
July 2019
- 1000 Year Seismic Event -
31
V
U
16
19
29
V
U20
21
Appendix 6-B
13
12
395
£
¤
23
48 47
34
¤ 97
153
¬
(
50
52
V £
U
51
49
525
V
U
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
101
£
¤
14
44 28
V
U
49
£
¤ 2
405
3
§
¦
¥̈
22
49 U
V 18
¬
(
40 V
U
24
52
¬
(
50
V
U 16 ¬
(
10
¬
(
35
28
26
¬
(
17
30
¬
(
45
¬
(
15 V
U281
51
5
9
§
¦
¥̈ 11
42
V
U21
43
V
U 8
¬
(
20
90 17
V
U
¬
(
25 §
¦
¥̈
18
195
£
¤
53
29
8
41
26
V
U
410
Acceleration Maps
39 38
37
V
U V
U127
36 33
31
401 32
V
U
46
V
U 4 V
U504
82 124
V
U 12
£
¤
§
¦
¥̈ §
¦182
¥̈ 129
High Resolution Seismic
27
221
V
U
V
U 730
£
¤
Legend
Seismic Zones and 0.131 - 0.150 0.261 - 0.280 0.361 - 0.390 0.481 - 0.500 Major Lakes
Peak Horizontal
Acceleration (%g) 0.151 - 0.180 0.281 - 0.300 0.391 - 0.410 0.501 - 0.530 Major Shorelines
0.080 - 0.090 0.181 - 0.210 0.301 - 0.320 0.411 - 0.430 U.S. Interstate
0.091 - 0.110
0.111 - 0.130
0.211 - 0.230
0.231 - 0.260
0.321 - 0.340
0.341 - 0.360
0.431 - 0.460
0.461 - 0.480
U.S. Highway
State Route
¯ Miles
0 15 30 60 90 120
Page 6-B-1
Horizontal Spectral Response Acceleration of 0.2 - second Period (%g) for 7% Probability
of Exceedance in 75 years - with 5% of Critical Damping
- 1000 Year Seismic Event -
Page 6-B-2
Appendix 6-B
66
68
31
V
U
36
46
20
78
V
U
44
18
42
48
54
395
£
¤
52
¤ 97
100
¬
« 112
153
V £
U
94
114
525
V
U
108
£
¤101
28
24
26
V
U28
2
£
¤
110 405
¬
« ¬ 110 §
¦
¥̈
38
68
3
U«
V 167
V
U V
U 18
2
112
20
11
16 90
¬
« ¬
«
V
U
72
62
58
¬ 80 30
4 §
¦
¥̈5
« ¬ 70
40
¬
« ¬
« 281
V
U
34
10 « ¬ 60
96
« V
U21
82
32
10 8 10 6 50 17
V
U
8
V
U ¬
« 90
§
¦
¥̈ 195
£
¤
V
U410
22
98
92 26
88
V
U
86 84 127
V
U
76 74
401
10 2
V
U 66 64
94
18
V
U 4 V
U504
82 124
V
U 12
£
¤
56
§
¦
¥̈ 182
§
¦
¥̈ V
U 129
221
V
U 730
£
¤
Legend
Horizontal Spectral 0.311 - 0.360 0.551 - 0.600 0.801 - 0.850 1.051 - 1.100 Major Lakes
Response
Acceleration 0.361 - 0.410 0.601 - 0.650 0.851 - 0.900 1.101 - 1.150 Major Shorelines
0.180 - 0.210 0.411 - 0.460 0.651 - 0.700 0.901 - 0.950 U.S. Interstate
0.211 - 0.260
0.261 - 0.310
0.461 - 0.500
0.501 - 0.550
0.701 - 0.750
0.751 - 0.800
0.951 - 1.000
1.001 - 1.050
U.S. Highway
State Route
¯
Miles
0 12.5 25 50 75 100
July 2019
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
High Resolution Seismic Acceleration Maps
Horizontal Spectral Response Acceleration of 1.0 - second Period (%g) for 7% Probability
of Exceedance in 75 years - with 5% of Critical Damping
July 2019
- 1000 Year Seismic Event -
V
U 31
14
13
9
21
20
24
V
U
25
395
£
¤
35
38
¤ 97
153
V £
U
26
38
37
525
V
U
101
£
¤
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
8
23
High Resolution Seismic Acceleration Maps
28
V
U
2
£
¤
405
§
¦
¥̈
6
3
U
V 167
U
V
16
16
12
V
U V
U 18
18
31
17
281
V
U
5
7
29
§
¦
¥̈
11
V
U21
37
17
V
U
15
8
V
U 90
§
¦
¥̈ 195
£
¤
42
34
410
V
U
19
V
U26
27
28
127
V
U
41
39
36
22
32
401
V
U 504
33
V
U 82 124
V
U £
¤ 12
§
¦
¥̈ §
¦
¥̈ 182
129
V
U
221
V
U 730
£
¤
Legend
Horizontal Spectral 0.141 - 0.160 0.271 - 0.290 U.S. Interstate
Response
Acceleration 0.161 - 0.180 0.301 - 0.320 U.S. Highway
0.060000 0.181 - 0.200 0.321 - 0.340 State Route
0.061 - 0.080 0.201 - 0.210 0.341 - 0.360 Major Lakes
0.081 - 0.100 0.211 - 0.230 0.361 - 0.380 Major Shorelines
¯
Miles 0.101 - 0.120 0.231 - 0.250 0.381 - 0.400
0 12.5 25 50 75 100 0.121 - 0.140 0.251 - 0.270 0.401 - 0.420
Page 6-B-3
Appendix 6-B
Appendix 6-B High Resolution Seismic Acceleration Maps
Page 6-B-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
July 2019
Chapter 7 Slope Stability Analysis
7 .1 Overview
Slope stability analysis is used in a wide variety of geotechnical engineering problems,
including, but not limited to, the following:
• Determination of stable cut and fill slopes
• Assessment of overall stability of retaining walls, including global and compound
stability (includes permanent systems and temporary shoring systems)
• Assessment of overall stability of shallow and deep foundations for structures
located on slopes or over potentially unstable soils, including the determination
of lateral forces applied to foundations and walls due to potentially unstable slopes
• Stability assessment of landslides (mechanisms of failure, and determination
of design properties through back-analysis), and design of mitigation techniques
to improve stability
• Evaluation of instability due to liquefaction
Types of slope stability analyses include rotational slope failure, translational failure,
irregular surfaces of sliding, and infinite slope failure. Stability analysis techniques
specific to rock slopes, other than highly fractured rock masses that can in effect be
treated as soil, are described in Chapter 12. Detailed stability assessment of landslides
is described in Chapter 13.
7 .2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Slope
Stability Analysis
The input data needed for slope stability analysis is described in Chapter 2 for site
investigation considerations, Chapters 9 and 10 for fills and cuts, and Chapter 13 for
landslides. Chapter 5 provides requirements for the assessment of design property
input parameters.
Detailed assessment of soil and rock stratigraphy is critical to the proper assessment
of slope stability, and is in itself a direct input parameter for slope stability analysis.
It is important to define any thin weak layers present, the presence of slickensides,
etc., as these fine details of the stratigraphy could control the stability of the slope
in question. Knowledge of the geologic nature of the strata present at the site
and knowledge of past performance of such strata may also be critical factors in
the assessment of slope stability. See Chapter 5 for additional requirements and
discussion regarding the determination and characterization of geologic strata and the
determination of ESU’s for design purposes.
Whether long-term or short-term stability is in view, and which will control the
stability of the slope, will affect the selection of soil and rock shear strength parameters
used as input in the analysis. For short-term stability analysis, undrained shear strength
parameters should be obtained. For long-term stability analysis, drained shear strength
parameters should be obtained. For assessing the stability of landslides, residual shear
strength parameters will be needed, since the soil has in such has typically deformed
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 7-1
October 2013
Slope Stability Analysis Chapter 7
enough to reach a residual value. For highly overconsolidated clays, such as the
Seattle clays (e.g., Lawton Formation), if the slope is relatively free to deform after
the cut is made or is otherwise unloaded, even if a structure such as a wall is placed
to retain the slope after that deformation has already occurred, residual shear strength
parameters should be obtained and used for the stability analysis. See Chapter 5 for
requirements on the development of shear strength parameters.
Detailed assessment of the groundwater regime within and beneath the slope/landslide
mass is also critical. Detailed pieziometric data at multiple locations and depths within
and below the slope will likely be needed, depending on the geologic complexity
of the stratigraphy and groundwater conditions. Potential seepage at the face of the
slope must be assessed and addressed. In some cases, detailed flow net analysis
may be needed. If seepage does exit at the slope face, the potential for soil piping
should also be assessed as a slope stability failure mechanism, especially in highly
erodable silts and sands. If groundwater varies seasonally, long-term monitoring
of the groundwater levels in the soil should be conducted. If groundwater levels tend
to be responsive to significant rainfall events, the long-term groundwater monitoring
should be continuous, and on-site rainfall data collection should also be considered.
7 .3 Design Requirements
Limit equilibrium methods shall be used to assess slope stability. The Modified
Bishop, simplified Janbu, Spencer, or other widely accepted slope stability analysis
methods should be used for rotational, translational and irregular surface failure
mechanisms. Each limit equilibrium method varies with regard to assumptions used
and how stability is determined. Therefore, a minimum of two limit equilibrium
methods should be used and compared to one another to ensure that the the level
of safety in the slope is accurately assessed. In cases where the stability failure
mechanisms anticipated are not well modeled by limit equilibrium techniques,
or if deformation analysis of the slope is required, more sophisticated analysis
techniques (e.g., finite difference methods such as is used by the computer program
FLAC) may be used in addition to the limit equilibrium methodologies. Since these
more sophisticated methods are quite sensitive to the quality of the input data and
the details of the model setup, including the selection of constitutive models used
to represent the material properties and behavior, limit equilibrium methods should
also be used in such cases, and input parameters should be measured or assessed
from back-analysis techniques whenever possible. If the differences in the results are
significant, the reasons for the differences shall be assessed with consideration to any
available field observations to assess the correctness of the design model used. If the
reasons for the differences cannot be assessed, and if the FLAC model provides a less
conservative result than the limit equilibrium based methods, the limit equilibrium
based methods shall govern the design.
If the potential slope failure mechanism is anticipated to be relatively shallow and
parallel to the slope face, with or without seepage affects, an infinite slope analysis
should be conducted. Typically, slope heights of 15 to 20 feet or more are required
to have this type of failure mechanism. For infinite slopes consisting of cohesionless
soils that are either above the water table or that are fully submerged, the factor
of safety for slope stability is determined as follows:
Page 7-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
FS
FS (7-1)
(7-1)
Tan
Tan
Chapter 7 Slope Stability Analysis
where,
where,
Tan
Tan
FS Tanφ
FS = (7-1)
φφ==the Tanβ
Tan
Tan
theangle
angle internal
of
of internalfriction
frictionfor
forthe
thesoil
soil
Where:
ββ==the
the slope
angle
slope relative
angle relativeto
tothe
thehorizontal
horizontal
Tan Tan
FS =bb the angle of internal friction for the soil
φ
FS
β =ss Tan
slopes Tanslope
For
Forinfinite
infinite slopesthe that haveangle
thathave relative
seepage
seepage at
atthe to theface,
theslope
slope horizontal
face, the
thefactor
factorof
ofsafety
safetyfor
forslope
slopestability
stabilityisisdetermined
determined
as
as follows:
Forfollows:
infinite slopes that have seepage at the slope face, the factor of safety for slope
stability is determined as follows:
Tan Tan (7-2)
(7-2)
FS
FS γbbb Tanφ
FS = (7-2)
γs
ss TanTan
Tanβ
Where:
where,
where,
γb = the buoyant unit weight of the soil
γs = the saturated unit weight of the soil
γγbb==the
thebuoyant
buoyantunit
unitweight
weightof
ofthe
thesoil
soil
Considering
γγss==the that
thesaturated the
saturatedunit buoyant
unitweight
weightof unit
ofthe weight is roughly one-half of the saturated unit
thesoil
soil
weight, seepage on the slope face can reduce the factor of safety by a factor of two, a
condition
Slope
Slope which
Stability
Stability should obviously be avoided through some type
Analysis
Analysis of drainage
Geotechnical
Geotechnical if at Manual
Design
Design all
Manual M
M46-03
46-03
possible;
Chapter
Chapter 7-4otherwise much flatter slopes will be needed. When using the infinite slope
7-4 December
December2006
2006
method, if the FS is near or below 1.0 to 1.15, severe erosion or shallow slumping
is likely. Vegetation on the slope can help to reduce this problem, as the vegetation
roots add cohesion to the surficial soil, improving stability. Note that conducting
an infinite slope analysis does not preclude the need to check for deeper slope failure
mechanisms, such as would be assessed by the Modified Bishop or similar methods
listed above.
Translational (block) or noncircular searches are generally more appropriate for
modeling thin weak layers or suspected planes of weakness, and for modeling stability
of long natural slopes or of geologic strata with pronounced shear strength anisotropy
(e.g., due to layered/bedded macrostructure or pre-existing fracture patterns). If there
is a disparately strong unit either below or above a thin weak unit, the user must ensure
that the modeled failure plane lies within the suspected weak unit so that the most
critical failure surface is modeled as accurately as possible. Circular searches for these
types of conditions should generally be avoided as they do not generally model the
most critical failure surface.
For very simplified cases, design charts to assess slope stability are available.
Examples of simplified design charts are provided in NAVFAC DM-7 (US Department
of Defense, 2005). These charts are for a c-φ soil, and apply only to relatively uniform
soil conditions within and below the cut slope. They do not apply to fills over relatively
soft ground, as well as to cuts in primarily cohesive soils. Since these charts are for a
c-φ soil, a small cohesion will be needed to perform the calculation. If these charts are
to be used, it is recommended that a cohesion of 50 to 100 psf be used in combination
with the soil friction angle obtained from SPT correlation for relatively clean sands
and gravels. For silty to very silty sands and gravels, the cohesion could be increased
to 100 to 200 psf, but with the friction angle from SPT correlation (see Chapter 5)
reduced by 2 to 3 degrees, if it is not feasible to obtain undisturbed soil samples
suitable for laboratory testing to measure the soil shear strength directly. This should
be considered general guidance, and good engineering judgment should be applied
when selecting soil parameters for this type of an analysis. Simplified design charts
shall only be used for final design of non-critical slopes that are approximately 10 feet
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 7-3
October 2013
Slope Stability Analysis Chapter 7
in height or less and that are consistent with the simplified assumptions used by the
design chart. Simplified design charts may be used as applicable for larger slopes for
preliminary design.
The detailed guidance for slope stability analysis provided by Abramson, et al. (1996)
should be used.
For additional design requirements for temporary slopes, including application of the
applicable WAC’s, see Sections 15.7 and 9.5.5.
7 .4 Resistance Factors and Safety Factors for Slope Stability Analysis
For overall stability analysis of walls and structure foundations, design shall be
consistent with Chapters 6, 8 and 15 and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. For slopes adjacent to but not directly supporting structures, a
maximum resistance factor of 0.75 should be used. For foundations on slopes that
support structures such as bridges and retaining walls, a maximum resistance factor
of 0.65 should be used. This reduced resistance factor also applies if the slope is not
directly supporting the structure, but if slope failure occurred, it could impact and
damage the structure. Exceptions to this could include minor walls that have a minimal
impact on the stability of the existing slope, in which the 0.75 resistance factor may
be used. Since these resistance factors are combined with a load factor of 1.0 (overall
stability is assessed as a service limit state only), these resistance factors of 0.75 and
0.65 are equivalent to a safety factor of 1.3 and 1.5, respectively.
For general slope stability analysis of permanent cuts, fills, and landslide repairs, a
minimum safety factor of 1.25 should be used. Larger safety factors should be used
if there is significant uncertainty in the analysis input parameters. The Monte Carlo
simulation features now available in some slope stability computer programs may be
used for this purpose, from which a probability of failure can be determined, provided
a coefficient of variation for each of the input parameters can be ascertained. For
considerations regarding the statistical characterization of input parameters, see Allen,
et al. (2005). For minimum safety factors and resistance factors for temporary cuts, see
Section 15.7.
For seismic analysis, if seismic analysis is conducted (see Chapter 6 for policies on
this issue), a maximum resistance factor of 0.9 should be used for slopes involving or
adjacent to walls and structure foundations. This is equivalent to a safety factor of 1.1.
For other slopes (cuts, fills, and landslide repairs), a minimum safety factor of 1.05
shall be used.
Page 7-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 7 Slope Stability Analysis
Conditions Probability of Failure, Pf
Unacceptable in most cases > 0.1
Temporary structures with no potential life loss and low repair cost 0.1
Slope of riverbank at docks, no alternative docks, pier shutdown threatens 0.01 to 0.02
operations
Low consequences of failure, repairs when time permits, repair cost less than 0.01
cost to go to lower Pf
Existing large cut on interstate highway 0.01 to 0.02
New large cut (i.e., to be constructed) on interstate highway 0.01 or less
Acceptable in most cases except if lives may be lost 0.001
Acceptable for all slopes 0.0001
Unnecessarily low 0.00001
Slope Stability – Probability of Failure (Adapted From Santamarina, et al ., 1992)
Table 7-1
7 .5 References
Abramson, L., Boyce, G., Lee, T., and Sharma, S., 1996, Slope Stability and
Stabilization Methods, Wiley, ISBN 0471106224.
Allen, T., Nowak, A., and Bathurst, R., 2005, Calibration to Determine Load and
Resistance Factors for Geotechnical and Structural Design. TRB Circular E-C079,
83 pp.
Santamarina, J. C., Altschaeffl, A. G., and Chameau, J. L., 1992, “Reliability of Slopes:
Incorporating Qualitative Information,” Transportation Research Board, TRR 1343,
Washington, D.C., pp. 1-5.
US Department of Defense, 2005, Soil Mechanics, Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC),
UFC 3-220-10N,
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 7-5
October 2013
Slope Stability Analysis Chapter 7
Page 7-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8 .1 Overview
This chapter covers the geotechnical design of bridge foundations, cut-and-cover
tunnel foundations, foundations for walls, and hydraulic structure foundations
(pipe arches, box culverts, flexible culverts, etc.). Chapter 17 covers foundation
design for lightly loaded structures, and Chapter 18 covers foundation design
for marine structures. Both shallow (e.g., spread footings) and deep (piles, shafts,
micro-piles, etc.) foundations are addressed. In general, the load and resistance
factor design approach (LRFD) as prescribed in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications shall be used, unless a LRFD design methodology is not available
for the specific foundation type being considered (e.g., micro-piles). Structural design
of bridge and other structure foundations is addressed in the WSDOT LRFD Bridge
Design Manual (BDM).
All structure foundations within WSDOT Right of Way or whose construction
is administered by WSDOT shall be designed in accordance with the Geotechnical
Design Manual (GDM) and the following documents:
• Bridge Design Manual LRFD M23-50
• Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction M 21-01
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, U.S.
The most current versions of the above referenced manuals including all interims
or design memoranda modifying the manuals shall be used. In the case of conflict
or discrepancy between manuals, the following hierarchy shall be used: those
manuals listed first shall supersede those listed below in the list.
8 .2 Overall Design Process for Structure Foundations
The overall process for geotechnical design is addressed in Chapters 1 and 23. For
design of structure foundations, the overall WSDOT design process, including both
the geotechnical and structural design functions, is as illustrated in Figure 8-1.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-1
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Bridge and Structures Office
(BO) requests conceptual
foundation recommendations
from GeotechnicalDivision (GD)
GD provides
conceptual foundation
recommendations to BO
BO obtains site data
GD provides
from Region, develops
preliminary
draft preliminary plan,
foundation design
and provides initial foundation
recommendations
needs input to GD
Iterate
BO performs structural analysis GD performs final
and modeling, and provides geotechnical design
feedback to GD regarding as needed and
foundation loads, type, provides final
size, depth, and configuration geotechnical report
needed for structural purposes for the structure
BO performs final structural
modeling and develops final
PS&E for structure
Overall Design Process for LRFD Foundation Design
Figure 8-1
The steps in the flowchart are defined as follows:
Conceptual Bridge Foundation Design – This design step results in an informal
communication/report produced by the Geotechnical Office at the request of the
Bridge and Structures Office. This informal communication/report, consistent with
what is described for conceptual level geotechnical reports in Chapter 23, provides
a brief description of the anticipated site conditions, an estimate of the maximum
slope feasible for the bridge approach fills for the purpose of determining bridge
length, conceptual foundation types feasible, and conceptual evaluation of potential
geotechnical hazards such as liquefaction. The purpose of these recommendations
is to provide enough geotechnical information to allow the bridge preliminary plan
to be produced. This type of conceptual evaluation could also be applied to other types
of structures, such as tunnels or special design retaining walls.
Page 8-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
Develop Site data and Preliminary Plan – During this phase, the Bridge and
Structures Office obtains site data from the Region (see Design Manual Chapters 610,
710, and 730) and develops a preliminary bridge plan (or other structure) adequate
for the Geotechnical Office to locate borings in preparation for the final design of the
structure (i.e., pier locations are known with a relatively high degree of certainty).
The Bridge and Structures Office would also provide the following information
to the Geotechnical Office to allow them to adequately develop the preliminary
foundation design:
• Anticipated structure type and magnitudes of settlement (both total and differential)
the structure can tolerate.
• At abutments, the approximate maximum elevation feasible for the top of the
foundation in consideration of the foundation depth.
• For interior piers, the number of columns anticipated, and if there will be single
foundation elements for each column, or if one foundation element will support
multiple columns.
• At stream crossings, the depth of scour anticipated, if known. Typically, the
Geotechnical Office will pursue this issue with the HQ Hydraulics Office.
• Any known constraints that would affect the foundations in terms of type, location,
or size, or any known constraints which would affect the assumptions which need
to be made to determine the nominal resistance of the foundation (e.g., utilities that
must remain, construction staging needs, excavation, shoring and falsework needs,
other constructability issues).
Preliminary Foundation Design – This design step results in a memorandum
produced by the Geotechnical Office at the request of the Bridge and Structures Office
that provides geotechnical data adequate to do the structural analysis and modeling for
all load groups to be considered for the structure. The geotechnical data is preliminary
in that it is not in final form for publication and transmittal to potential bidders. In
addition, the foundation recommendations are subject to change, depending on the
results of the structural analysis and modeling and the effect that modeling and analysis
has on foundation types, locations, sizes, and depths, as well as any design assumptions
made by the geotechnical designer. Preliminary foundation recommendations may
also be subject to change depending on the construction staging needs and other
constructability issues that are discovered during this design phase. Geotechnical work
conducted during this stage typically includes completion of the field exploration
program to the final PS&E level, development of foundation types and capacities
feasible, foundation depths needed, P-Y curve data and soil spring data for seismic
modeling, seismic site characterization and estimated ground acceleration, and
recommendations to address known constructability issues. A description of subsurface
conditions and a preliminary subsurface profile would also be provided at this stage,
but detailed boring logs and laboratory test data would usually not be provided.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-3
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Structural Analysis and Modeling – In this phase, the Bridge and Structures
Office uses the preliminary foundation design recommendations provided by the
Geotechnical Office to perform the structural modeling of the foundation system and
superstructure. Through this modeling, the Bridge and Structures Office determines
and distributes the loads within the structure for all appropriate load cases, factors
the loads as appropriate, and sizes the foundations using the foundation nominal
resistances and resistance factors provided by the Geotechnical Office. Constructability
and construction staging needs would continue to be investigated during this phase.
The Bridge and Structures Office would also provide the following feedback to the
Geotechnical Office to allow them to check their preliminary foundation design and
produce the Final Geotechnical Report for the structure:
• Anticipated foundation loads (including load factors and load groups used).
• Foundation size/diameter and depth required to meet structural needs.
• Foundation details that could affect the geotechnical design of the foundations.
• Size and configuration of deep foundation groups.
Final Foundation Design – This design step results in a formal geotechnical
report produced by the Geotechnical Office that provides final geotechnical
recommendations for the subject structure. This report includes all geotechnical
data obtained at the site, including final boring logs, subsurface profiles, and
laboratory test data, all final foundation recommendations, and final constructability
recommendations for the structure. At this time, the Geotechnical Office will check
their preliminary foundation design in consideration of the structural foundation design
results determined by the Bridge and Structures Office, and make modifications to the
preliminary foundation design as needed to accommodate the structural design needs
provided by the Bridge and Structures Office. It is possible that much of what was
included in the preliminary foundation design memorandum may be copied into the
final geotechnical report, if no design changes are needed. This report will also be used
for publication and distribution to potential bidders.
Final Structural Modeling and PS&E Development – In this phase, the Bridge
and Structures Office makes any adjustments needed to their structural model to
accommodate any changes made to the geotechnical foundation recommendations
as transmitted in the final geotechnical report. From this, the bridge design and final
PS&E would be completed.
Note that a similar design process should be used if a consultant or design-builder is
performing one or both design functions.
Page 8-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8 .3 Data Needed for Foundation Design
The data needed for foundation design shall be as described in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Section 10 (most current version). The expected project
requirements and subsurface conditions should be analyzed to determine the type and
quantity of information to be developed during the geotechnical investigation. During
this phase it is necessary to:
• Identify design and constructability requirements (e.g. provide grade separation,
transfer loads from bridge superstructure, provide for dry excavation) and their
effect on the geotechnical information needed
• Identify performance criteria (e.g. limiting settlements, right of way restrictions,
proximity of adjacent structures) and schedule contraints
• Identify areas of concern on site and potential variability of local geology
• Develop likely sequence and phases of construction and their effect on the
geotechnical information needed
• Identify engineering analyses to be performed (e.g. bearing capacity, settlement,
global stability)
• Identify engineering properties and parameters required for these analyses
• Determine methods to obtain parameters and assess the validity of such methods
for the material type and construction methods
• Determine the number of tests/samples needed and appropriate locations for them.
Table 8-1 provides a summary of information needs and testing considerations for
foundation design.
Chapter 5 covers the requirements for how the results from the field investigation, the
field testing, and the laboratory testing are to be used separately or in combination to
establish properties for design. The specific test and field investigation requirements
needed for foundation design are described in the following sections.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-5
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Found-
Engineering
ation Required Information for Analyses Field Testing Laboratory Testing
Evaluations
Type
• bearing capacity • subsurface profile (soil, groundwater, rock) • SPT • 1-D Oedometer tests
• settlement (magnitude • shear strength parameters (granular • soil/rock shear tests
& rate) soils)
• compressibility parameters (including • grain size distribution
Shallow Foundations
• shrink/swell of consolidation, shrink/swell potential, and • CPT
• Atterberg Limits
foundation soils elastic modulus) • PMT
• specific gravity
(natural soils or • frost depth • dilatometer
embankment fill) • moisture content
• stress history (present and past vertical • rock coring
• frost heave • unit weight
effective stresses) (RQD)
• scour (for water • organic content
• depth of seasonal moisture change • plate load
crossings) testing • collapse/swell potential
• unit weights
• liquefaction tests
• geologic mapping including orientation and • geophysical
testing • intact rock modulus
• overall slope stability characteristics of rock discontinuities
• point load strength test
• pile end-bearing • subsurface profile (soil, ground water, rock) • SPT • soil/rock shear tests
• pile skin friction • shear strength parameters (granular • interface friction tests
soils)
• settlement • horizontal earth pressure coefficients • grain size distribution
• pile load test
• down-drag on pile • interface friction parameters (soil and pile) • 1-D Oedometer tests
• CPT
Driven Pile Foundations
• lateral earth pressures • compressibility parameters • pH, resistivity tests
• PMT
• chemical compatibility • chemical composition of soil/rock (e.g., • Atterberg Limits
of soil and pile potential corrosion issues) • vane shear
• specific gravity
test
• drivability • unit weights • organic content
• dilatometer
• presence of boulders/ • presence of shrink/swell soils (limits skin • moisture content
very hard layers friction) • piezometers
• unit weight
• scour (for water • geologic mapping including orientation and • rock coring
(RQD) • collapse/swell potential
crossings) characteristics of rock discontinuities
tests
• vibration/heave • geophysical
testing • intact rock modulus
damage to nearby
structures • point load strength test
• liquefaction
• overall slope stability
• shaft end bearing • subsurface profile (soil, ground water, rock) • installation • 1-D Oedometer
• shaft skin friction • shear strength parameters technique • soil/rock shear tests
test shaft
• constructability • interface shear strength friction parameters • grain size distribution
(soil and shaft) • shaft load
• down-drag on shaft • interface friction tests
test
Drilled Shaft Foundations
• quality of rock socket • compressibility parameters • pH, resistivity tests
• vane shear
• lateral earth pressures • horizontal earth pressure coefficients • permeability tests
test
• settlement (magnitude • chemical composition of soil/rock • Atterberg Limits
• CPT
& rate) • unit weights • specific gravity
• SPT
• groundwater seepage/ • permeability of water-bearing soils (granular • moisture content
dewatering/ potential • presence of artesian conditions soils) • unit weight
for caving
• presence of shrink/swell soils (limits skin • PMT • organic content
• presence of boulders/ friction) • dilatometer • collapse/swell potential
very hard layers
• geologic mapping including orientation and • piezometers tests
• scour (for water characteristics of rock discontinuities
crossings) • rock coring • intact rock modulus
• degradation of soft rock in presence of (RQD)
• liquefaction • point load strength test
water and/or air (e.g., rock sockets in
• geophysical • slake durability
• overall slope stability shales)
testing
Summary of Information Needs and Testing Considerations
(Modified After Sabatini, et al., 2002)
Table 8-1
Page 8-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.3.1 Field Exploration Requirements for Foundations
Subsurface explorations shall be performed to provide the information needed for the
design and construction of foundations. The extent of exploration shall be based on
variability in the subsurface conditions, structure type, and any project requirements
that may affect the foundation design or construction. The exploration program
should be extensive enough to reveal the nature and types of soil deposits and/or
rock formations encountered, the engineering properties of the soils and/or rocks, the
potential for liquefaction, and the ground water conditions. The exploration program
should be sufficient to identify and delineate problematic subsurface conditions
such as karstic formations, mined out areas, swelling/collapsing soils, existing fill
or waste areas, etc.
Borings should be sufficient in number and depth to establish a reliable longitudinal
and transverse substrata profile at areas of concern, such as at structure foundation
locations, adjacent earthwork locations, and to investigate any adjacent geologic
hazards that could affect the structure performance. Requirements for the number
and depth of borings presented in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
Article 10.4.2, should be used. While engineering judgment will need to be applied by
a licensed and experienced geotechnical professional to adapt the exploration program
to the foundation types and depths needed and to the variability in the subsurface
conditions observed, the intent of AASHTO Article 10.4.2 regarding the minimum
level of exploration needed should be carried out. Geophysical testing may be used
to guide the planning of the subsurface exploration and reduce the requirements for
borings. The depth of borings indicated in AASHTO Article 10.4.2 performed before
or during design should take into account the potential for changes in the type, size and
depth of the planned foundation elements.
AASHTO Article 10.4.2 shall be used as a starting point for determining the locations
of borings. The final exploration program should be adjusted based on the variability
of the anticipated subsurface conditions as well as the variability observed during
the exploration program. If conditions are determined to be variable, the exploration
program should be increased relative to the requirements in AASHTO Article 10.4.2
such that the objective of establishing a reliable longitudinal and transverse substrata
profile is achieved. If conditions are observed to be homogeneous or otherwise are
likely to have minimal impact on the foundation performance, and previous local
geotechnical and construction experience has indicated that subsurface conditions
are homogeneous or otherwise are likely to have minimal impact on the foundation
performance, a reduced exploration program relative to what is specified in AASHTO
Article 10.4.2 may be considered. Even the best and most detailed subsurface
exploration programs may not identify every important subsurface problem condition
if conditions are highly variable. The goal of the subsurface exploration program,
however, is to reduce the risk of such problems to an acceptable minimum.
For situations where large diameter rock socketed shafts will be used or where drilled
shafts are being installed in formations known to have large boulders, or voids such
as in karstic or mined areas, it may be necessary to advance a boring at the location
of each shaft.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-7
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
In a laterally homogeneous area, drilling or advancing a large number of borings may
be redundant, since each sample tested would exhibit similar engineering properties.
Furthermore, in areas where soil or rock conditions are known to be very favorable
to the construction and performance of the foundation type likely to be used (e.g.,
footings on very dense soil, and groundwater is deep enough to not be a factor),
obtaining fewer borings than provided in AASHTO Article 10.4.2 may be justified.
In all cases, it is necessary to understand how the design and construction of the
geotechnical feature will be affected by the soil and/or rock mass conditions in order to
optimize the exploration.
Samples of material encountered shall be taken and preserved for future reference and/
or testing. Boring logs shall be prepared in detail sufficient to locate material strata,
results of penetration tests, groundwater, any artesian conditions, and where samples
were taken. Special attention shall be paid to the detection of narrow, soft seams that
may be located at stratum boundaries.
For drilled shaft foundations, it is especially critical that the groundwater regime is
well defined at each foundation location. Piezometer data adequate to define the limits
and piezometric head in all unconfined, confined, and locally perched groundwater
zones should be obtained at each foundation location.
For cut-and-cover tunnels, pipe arches, etc., spacing of investigation points shall be
consistent for that required for retaining walls (see Chapter 15), with a minimum
of two investigation points spaced adequately to develop a subsurface profile for the
entire structure.
8.3.2 Laboratory and Field Testing Requirements for Foundations
General requirements for laboratory and field testing, and their use in the determination
of properties for design, are addressed in Chapter 5. In general, for foundation
design, laboratory testing should be used to augment the data obtained from the field
investigation program, to refine the soil and rock properties selected for design.
Foundation design will typically heavily rely upon the SPT and/or qc results obtained
during the field exploration through correlations to shear strength, compressibility, and
the visual descriptions of the soil/rock encountered, especially in non-cohesive soils.
The information needed for the assessment of ground water and the hydrogeologic
properties needed for foundation design and constructability evaluation is typically
obtained from the field exploration through field instrumentation (e.g., piezometers)
and in-situ tests (e.g., slug tests, pump tests, etc.). Index tests such as soil gradation,
Atterberg limits, water content, and organic content are used to confirm the visual
field classification of the soils encountered, but may also be used directly to obtain
input parameters for some aspects of foundation design (e.g., soil liquefaction, scour,
degree of over-consolidation, and correlation to shear strength or compressibility of
cohesive soils). Quantitative or performance laboratory tests conducted on undisturbed
soil samples are used to assess shear strength or compressibility of finer grained
soils, or to obtain seismic design input parameters such as shear modulus. Site
performance data, if available, can also be used to assess design input parameters.
Recommendations are provided in Chapter 5 regarding how to make the final selection
of design properties based on all of these sources of data.
Page 8-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8 .4 Foundation Selection Considerations
Foundation selection considerations to be evaluated include:
• the ability of the foundation type to meet performance requirements (e.g.,
deformation, bearing resistance, uplift resistance, lateral resistance/deformation)
for all limit states, given the soil or rock conditions encountered
• the constructability of the foundation type
• the impact of the foundation installation (in terms of time and space required) on
traffic and right-of-way
• the environmental impact of the foundation construction
• the constraints that may impact the foundation installation (e.g., overhead
clearance, access, and utilities)
• the impact of the foundation on the performance of adjacent foundations,
structures, or utilities, considering both the design of the adjacent foundations,
structures, or utilities, and the performance impact the installation of the new
foundation will have on these adjacent facilities.
• the cost of the foundation, considering all of the issues listed above.
Spread footings are typically very cost effective, given the right set of conditions.
Footings work best in hard or dense soils that have adequate bearing resistance and
exhibit tolerable settlement under load. Footings can get rather large in medium
dense or stiff soils to keep bearing stresses low enough to minimize settlement,
or for structures with tall columns or which otherwise are loaded in a manner that
results in large eccentricities at the footing level, or which result in the footing being
subjected to uplift loads. Footings are not effective where soil liquefaction can occur
at or below the footing level, unless the liquefiable soil is confined, not very thick, and
well below the footing level. However, footings may be cost effective if inexpensive
soil improvement techniques such as overexcavation, deep dynamic compaction, and
stone columns, etc. are feasible. Other factors that affect the desirability of spread
footings include the need for a cofferdam and seals when placed below the water table,
the need for significant overexcavation of unsuitable soil, the need to place footings
deep due to scour and possibly frost action, the need for significant shoring to protect
adjacent existing facilities, and inadequate overall stability when placed on slopes that
have marginally adequate stability. Footings may not be feasible where expansive or
collapsible soils are present near the bearing elevation. Since deformation (service)
often controls the feasibility of spread footings, footings may still be feasible and cost
effective if the structure the footings support can be designed to tolerate the settlement
(e.g., flat slab bridges, bridges with jackable abutments, etc.).
Deep foundations are the best choice when spread footings cannot be founded on
competent soils or rock at a reasonable cost. At locations where soil conditions
would normally permit the use of spread footings but the potential exists for scour,
liquefaction or lateral spreading, deep foundations bearing on suitable materials
below such susceptible soils should be used as a protection against these problems.
Deep foundations should also be used where an unacceptable amount of spread
footing settlement may occur. Deep foundations should be used where right-of-way,
space limitations, or other constraints as discussed above would not allow the use
of spread footings.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-9
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Two general types of deep foundations are typically considered: pile foundations, and
drilled shaft foundations. Shaft foundations are most advantageous where very dense
intermediate strata must be penetrated to obtain the desired bearing, uplift, or lateral
resistance, or where obstructions such as boulders or logs must be penetrated. Shafts
may also become cost effective where a single shaft per column can be used in lieu
of a pile group with a pile cap, especially when a cofferdam or shoring is required to
construct the pile cap. However, shafts may not be desirable where contaminated soils
are present, since contaminated soil would be removed, requiring special handling
and disposal. Shafts should be used in lieu of piles where deep foundations are needed
and pile driving vibrations could cause damage to existing adjacent facilities. Piles
may be more cost effective than shafts where pile cap construction is relatively easy,
where the depth to the foundation layer is large (e.g., more than 100 feet), or where the
pier loads are such that multiple shafts per column, requiring a shaft cap, are needed.
The tendency of the upper loose soils to flow, requiring permanent shaft casing,
may also be a consideration that could make pile foundations more cost effective.
Artesian pressure in the bearing layer could preclude the use of drilled shafts due to the
difficulty in keeping enough head inside the shaft during excavation to prevent heave
or caving under slurry.
For situations where existing structures must be retrofitted to improve foundation
resistance or where limited headroom is available, micro-piles may be the best
alternative, and should be considered.
Augercast piles can be very cost effective in certain situations. However, their ability
to resist lateral loads is minimal, making them undesirable to support structures
where significant lateral loads must be transferred to the foundations. Furthermore,
quality assurance of augercast pile integrity and capacity needs further development.
Therefore, it is WSDOT policy not to use augercast piles for bridge foundations.
8.5 Overview of LRFD for Foundations
The basic equation for load and resistance factor design (LRFD) states that the loads
multiplied by factors to account for uncertainty, ductility, importance, and redundancy
must be less than or equal to the available resistance multiplied by factors to account
for variability and uncertainty in the resistance per the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. The basic equation, therefore, is as follows:
Σηιγi Qi ≤ ϕRn (8-1)
Where:
ηι = Factor for ductility, redundancy, and importance of structure
γi = Load factor applicable to the i’th load Qi
Qi = Load
ϕ = Resistance factor
Rn = Nominal (predicted) resistance
For typical WSDOT practice, ηi should be set equal to 1.0 for use of both minimum
and maximum load factors. Foundations shall be proportioned so that the factored
resistance is not less than the factored loads.
Page 8-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
Figure 8-2 below should be utilized to provide a common basis of understanding for
loading locations and directions for substructure design. This figure also indicates the
geometric data required for abutment and substructure design. Note that for shaft and
some pile foundation designs, the shaft or pile may form the column as well as the
foundation element, thereby eliminating the footing element shown in the figure.
Transverse
Longitudinal
Plan
Elev. ______ Elev. _____
Parallel to Abutment Transverse to Bridge
Normal to Abutment
Longitudinal to Bridge
Elev. _____
Elev. _____
Axial
Axial
Elev. _____ Elev. _____ North
Elev. _____ South
Elev. _____ North Existing Ground Line
Elev. _____ South
Elevation Elev. _____
Template for Foundation Site Data and Loading Direction Definitions
Figure 8-2
8.6 LRFD Loads, Load Groups and Limit States to be Considered
The specific loads and load factors to be used for foundation design are as found in
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the LRFD Bridge Design Manual
(BDM).
8.6.1 Foundation Analysis to Establish Load Distribution for Structure
Once the applicable loads and load groups for design have been established for
each limit state, the loads shall be distributed to the various parts of the structure
in accordance with Sections 3 and 4 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. The distribution of these loads shall consider the deformation
characteristics of the soil/rock, foundation, and superstructure. The following process
is used to accomplish the load distribution (see LRFD BDM Section 7.2 for more
detailed procedures):
1. Establish stiffness values for the structure and the soil surrounding the foundations
and behind the abutments.
2. For service and strength limit state calculations, use P-Y curves for deep
foundations, or use strain wedge theory, especially in the case of short or
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-11
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
intermediate length shafts (see Section 8.13.2.3.3), to establish soil/rock stiffness
values (i.e., springs) necessary for structural design. The bearing resistance at
the specified settlement determined for the service limit state, but excluding
consolidation settlement, should be used to establish soil stiffness values for spread
footings for service and strength limit state calculations. For strength limit state
calculations for deep foundations where the lateral load is potentially repetitive
in nature (e.g., wind, water, braking forces, etc.), use soil stiffness values derived
from P-Y curves using non-degraded soil strength and stiffness parameters. The
geotechnical designer provides the soil/rock input parameters to the structural
designer to develop these springs and to determine the load distribution using the
analysis procedures as specified in LRFD BDM Section 7.2 and Section 4 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, applying unfactored loads, to get
the load distribution. Two unfactored load distributions for service and strength
limit state calculations are developed: one using undegraded stiffness parameters
(i.e., maximum stiffness values) to determine the maximum shear and moment in
the structure, and another distribution using soil strength and stiffness parameters
that have been degraded over time due to repetitive loading to determine the
maximum deflections and associated loads that result.
3. For extreme event limit state (seismic) deep foundation calculations, use soil
strength and stiffness values before any liquefaction or other time dependent
degradation occurs to develop lateral soil stiffness values and determine the
unfactored load distribution to the foundation and structure elements as described
in Step 2, including the full seismic loading. This analysis using maximum
stiffness values for the soil/rock is used by the structural designer to determine
the maximum shear and moment in the structure. The structural designer then
completes another unfactored analysis using soil parameters degraded by
liquefaction effects to get another load distribution, again using the full seismic
loading, to determine the maximum deflections and associated loads that result. For
footing foundations, a similar process is followed, except the vertical soil springs
are bracketed to evaluate both a soft response and a stiff response. See Section
6.4.2.7 for additional information on this design issue.
4. Once the load distributions have been determined, the loads are factored to analyze
the various components of the foundations and structure for each limit state. The
structural and geotechnical resistance are factored as appropriate, but in all cases,
the lateral soil resistance for deep foundations remain unfactored (i.e., a resistance
factor of 1.0).
Throughout all of the analysis procedures discussed above to develop load
distributions, the soil parameters and stiffness values are unfactored. The geotechnical
designer must develop a best estimate for these parameters during the modeling. Use of
intentionally conservative values could result in unconservative estimates of structure
loads, shears, and moments or inaccurate estimates of deflections.
See the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.6 for the
development of elastic settlement/bearing resistance of footings for static analyses and
Chapter 6 for soil/rock stiffness determination for spread footings subjected to seismic
loads. See Sections 8.12.2.3 and 8.13.2.3.3, and related AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications for the development of lateral soil stiffness values for deep
foundations.
Page 8-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.6.2 Downdrag Loads
Regarding downdrag loads, possible development of downdrag on piles, shafts, or
other deep foundations shall be evaluated where:
• Sites are underlain by compressible material such as clays, silts or organic soils,
• Fill will be or has recently been placed adjacent to the piles or shafts, such as is
frequently the case for bridge approach fills,
• The groundwater is substantially lowered, or
• Liquefaction of loose sandy soil can occur.
Downdrag loads (DD) shall be determined, factored (using load factors), and applied
as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Section 3. The load
factors for DD loads provided in Table 3.4.1-2 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications shall be used for the strength limit state. This table does not address the
situation in which the soil contributing to downdrag in the strength limit state consists
of sandy soil, the situation in which a significant portion of the soil profile consists of
sandy layers, nor the situation in which the CPT is used to estimate DD and the pile
bearing resistance. Therefore, the portion of Table 3.4.1-2 in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications that addresses downdrag loads has been augmented to
address these situations as shown in Table 8-3.
Type of Load, Foundation Type, and Load Factor
Method Used to Calculate Downdrag Maximum Minimum
Piles, α Tomlinson Method 1.4 0.25
Piles, λ Method 1.05 0.30
DD:
Piles, Nordlund Method, or Nordlund and λ Method 1.1 0.35
Downdrag
Piles, CPT Method 1.1 0.40
Drilled shafts, O’Neill and Reese (1999) Method 1.25 0.35
Strength Limit State Downdrag Load Factors
Table 8-3
For the Service and Extreme Event Limit states, a downdrag load factor of 1.0 should
be used.
8.6.3 Uplift Loads due to Expansive Soils
In general, uplift loads on foundations due to expansive soils shall be avoided through
removal of the expansive soil. If removal is not possible, deep foundations such as
driven piles or shafts shall be placed into stable soil. Spread footings shall not be used
in this situation.
Deep foundations penetrating expansive soil shall extend to a depth into moisture-
stable soils sufficient to provide adequate anchorage to resist uplift. Sufficient
clearance should be provided between the ground surface and underside of caps or
beams connecting piles or shafts to preclude the application of uplift loads at the pile/
cap connection due to swelling ground conditions.
Evaluation of potential uplift loads on piles extending through expansive soils requires
evaluation of the swell potential of the soil and the extent of the soil strata that may
affect the pile. One reasonably reliable method for identifying swell potential is
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-13
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
presented in Chapter 5. Alternatively, ASTM D4829 may be used to evaluate swell
potential. The thickness of the potentially expansive stratum must be identified by:
• Examination of soil samples from borings for the presence of jointing,
slickensiding, or a blocky structure and for changes in color, and
• Laboratory testing for determination of soil moisture content profiles.
8.6.4 Soil Loads on Buried Structures
For tunnels, culverts and pipe arches, the soil loads to be used for design shall be as
specified in Sections 3 and 12 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
8.6.5 Service Limit States
Foundation design at the service limit state shall include:
• Settlements
• Horizontal movements
• Overall stability, and
• Scour at the design flood
Consideration of foundation movements shall be based upon structure tolerance to total
and differential movements, rideability and economy. Foundation movements shall
include all movement from settlement, horizontal movement, and rotation.
In bridges where the superstructure and substructure are not integrated, settlement
corrections can be made by jacking and shimming bearings. Article 2.5.2.3 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications requires jacking provisions for these
bridges. The cost of limiting foundation movements should be compared with the cost
of designing the superstructure so that it can tolerate larger movements or of correcting
the consequences of movements through maintenance to determine minimum lifetime
cost. WSDOT may establish criteria that are more stringent.
The design flood for scour is defined in Article 2.6.4.4.2 and is specified in Article
3.7.5 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications as applicable at the service
limit state.
8.6.5.1 Tolerable Movements
Foundation settlement, horizontal movement, and rotation of foundations shall be
investigated using all applicable loads in the Service I Load Combination specified in
Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Transient loads
may be omitted from settlement analyses for foundations bearing on or in cohesive soil
deposits that are subject to time-dependent consolidation settlements.
Foundation movement criteria shall be consistent with the function and type of
structure, anticipated service life, and consequences of unacceptable movements on
structure performance. Foundation movement shall include vertical, horizontal and
rotational movements. The tolerable movement criteria shall be established by either
empirical procedures or structural analyses or by consideration of both.
Experience has shown that bridges can and often do accommodate more movement
and/or rotation than traditionally allowed or anticipated in design. Creep, relaxation,
and redistribution of force effects accommodate these movements. Some studies
have been made to synthesize apparent response. These studies indicate that angular
Page 8-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
distortions between adjacent foundations greater than 0.008 (RAD) in simple spans
and 0.004 (RAD) in continuous spans should not be permitted in settlement criteria
(Moulton et al. 1985; DiMillio, 1982; Barker et al. 1991). Other angular distortion
limits may be appropriate after consideration of:
• Cost of mitigation through larger foundations, realignment or surcharge,
• Rideability,
• Aesthetics, and,
• Safety.
In addition to the requirements for serviceability provided above, the following criteria
(Tables 8-4, 8-5, and 8-6) shall be used to establish acceptable settlement criteria:
Total Settlement Differential Settlement Over 100 Feet within
at Pier or Pier or Abutment, and Differential Settlement Action
Abutment Between Piers
ΔH ≤ 1 in ΔH100 ≤ 0.75 in Design and Construct
Ensure structure can
1 in < ΔH ≤ 4 in 0.75 in < ΔH100 ≤ 3 in
tolerate settlement
Obtain Approval1 prior
ΔH > 4 in ΔH100 > 3 in to proceeding with
design and Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
Settlement Criteria for Bridges
Table 8-4
Total Settlement Differential Settlement Over 100 Feet Action
ΔH ≤ 1 in ΔH100 ≤ 0.75 in Design and Construct
Ensure structure can
1 in < ΔH ≤ 2.5 in 0.75 in < ΔH100 ≤ 2 in
tolerate settlement
Obtain Approval1 prior
to proceeding with
ΔH > 2.5 in ΔH100 > 2 in
design and Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
Settlement Criteria for Cut and Cover Tunnels, Concrete Culverts
(including box culverts), and Concrete Pipe Arches
Table 8-5
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-15
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Total Settlement Differential Settlement Over 100 Feet Action
ΔH ≤ 2 in ΔH100 ≤ 1.5 in Design and Construct
Ensure structure can
2 in < ΔH ≤ 6 in 1.5 in < ΔH100 ≤ 5 in
tolerate settlement
Obtain Approval1
prior to proceeding
ΔH > 6 in ΔH100 > 5 in
with design and
Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
Settlement Criteria for Flexible Culverts
Table 8-6
Rotation movements should be evaluated at the top of the substructure unit (in plan
location) and at the deck elevation.
The horizontal displacement of pile and shaft foundations shall be estimated using
procedures that consider soil-structure interaction (see Section 8.12.2.3). Horizontal
movement criteria should be established at the top of the foundation based on the
tolerance of the structure to lateral movement, with consideration of the column length
and stiffness. Tolerance of the superstructure to lateral movement will depend on
bridge seat widths, bearing type(s), structure type, and load distribution effects.
8 .6 .5 .2 Overall Stability
The evaluation of overall stability of earth slopes with or without a foundation unit
shall be investigated at the service limit state as specified in Article 11.6.2.3 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Overall stability should be evaluated
using limiting equilibrium methods such as modified Bishop, Janbu, Spencer, or
other widely accepted slope stability analysis methods. Article 11.6.2.3 recommends
that overall stability be evaluated at the Service I limit state (i.e., a load factor of
1.0) and a resistance factor, φos of 0.65 for slopes which support a structural element.
For resistance factors for overall stability of slopes that contain a retaining wall, see
Chapter 15. Also see Chapter 7 for additional information and requirements regarding
slope stability analysis and acceptable safety factors and resistance factors.
Available slope stability programs produce a single factor of safety, FS. Overall slope
stability shall be checked to insure that foundations designed for a maximum bearing
stress equal to the specified service limit state bearing resistance will not cause the
slope stability factor of safety to fall below 1.5. This practice will essentially produce
the same result as specified in Article 11.6.2.3 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. The foundation loads should be as specified for the Service I limit state
for this analysis. If the foundation is located on the slope such that the foundation load
contributes to slope instability, the designer shall establish a maximum footing load
that is acceptable for maintaining overall slope stability for Service, and Extreme Event
limit states (see Figure 8-3 for example). If the foundation is located on the slope such
that the foundation load increases slope stability, overall stability of the slope shall be
evaluated ignoring the effect of the footing on slope stability, or the foundation load
shall be included in the slope stability analysis and the foundation designed to resist the
lateral loads imposed by the slope.
Page 8-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
Foundation Design
Center of rotation Center of rotation
Example Where
Figure 8-3 Footing
Example Contributes
where to Instability
footing contributes of Slope
to instability (Left(left
of slope Figure)
figure)
VS . Example Where Footing Contributes to Stability of Slope (Right Figure)
vs. example where footing contributes to stability of slope (right figure).
Figure 8-3
8.6.5.3 Abutment Transitions
If the slope is found to not be adequately stable, the slope shall be stabilized so that it
Vertical and horizontal movements caused by embankment loads behind bridge abutments shall be
achieves the required level of safety, or the structure foundation and the structure itself
investigated. Settlement of foundation soils induced by embankment loads can result in excessive
shall be designed
movements to resistelements.
of substructure the additional
Both shortload. Loads
and long termon foundations
settlement potentialdue to forces
should be considered.
caused by slope instability shall be determined in accordance with Liang (2010) or
Vessely, et al.
Settlement (2007) and
of improperly Yamasaki,
placed et al.backfill
or compacted (2013). The
behind load oncan
abutments thecause
deep foundation
poor rideability
unit
andand/or structure
a possibly dangerousshall
bump beatdetermined
the end of thesuch
bridge.that the required
Guidance level
for proper of safety
detailing for the
and material
slope is achieved. The required level of safety for slope is an FS of 1.5 (or resistance
requirements for abutment backfill is provided in Cheney and Chassie (2000) and should be followed.
factor of 0.65) for slope instability that can impact a structure, per the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge
LateralDesign Specifications,
earth pressure behind and/orArticles 10.5.2.3
lateral squeeze below and 11.6.2.3,
abutments candesigned at the
also contribute service
to lateral
movement of abutments and should be investigated, if applicable.
limit state. For the Extreme Event Limit State, the required minimum level of safety is
a FS of 1.1 (resistance factor of 0.9).
In addition to the considerations for addressing the transition between the bridge and the abutment fill
8 .6 .5 .3 Abutment Transitions
provided above, an approach slab shall be provided at the end of each bridge for WSDOT projects, and
shall be the same width as the bridge deck. However, the slab may be deleted under certain conditions as
Vertical and
described horizontal
herein. movements
If approach slabs are tocaused by aembankment
be deleted, geotechnical and loads behind
structural bridgeis required.
evaluation
abutments shall be
The final decision oninvestigated. Settlement
whether or not to of foundation
delete the approach slabs shallsoils induced
be made by the by
WSDOT Region
Project Development
embankment loads canEngineer with
result in consideration to the geotechnical
excessive movements and structural elements.
of substructure evaluation. The
Both
geotechnical and structural evaluation shall consider, as a minimum, the criteria described below.
short and long term settlement potential should be considered.
Settlement
1. Approachof improperly placedfororgeotechnical
slabs may be deleted compacted backfill
reasons if thebehind
following abutments
geotechnical can cause
considerations
poor rideability
are met: and a possibly dangerous bump at the end of the bridge. Guidance for
proper •detailing and are
If settlements material requirements
excessive, resulting in thefor abutment
angular backfill
distortion is provided
of the slab to be greatin Samtani
enough to
become a safety problem for
and Nowatzki (2006) and should be followed.motorists, with excessive defined as a differential settlement
between the bridge and the approach fill of 8 inches or more, or,
Lateral•earth pressure
If creep behind
settlement and/or lateral
of the approach fill will squeeze below
be less than abutments
0.5 inch, can also
and the amount of new fill
contribute to lateral movement of abutments and should be investigated, if applicable.
placed at the approach is less than 20 ft, or
• If approach fill heights are less than 8 ft, or
In addition to the considerations for addressing the transition between the bridge
• If more than 2 inches of differential settlement could occur between the centerline and shoulder
and the abutment fill provided above, an approach slab shall be provided at the end
of each bridge for WSDOT projects, and shall be the same width as the bridge deck.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 Foundation Design
However,
Decemberthe2006slab may be deleted under certain conditions as described hereinChapter and as8-21
described in Design Manual M22-01, Chapter 720. If approach slabs are to be deleted,
a geotechnical and structural evaluation is required. The geotechnical and structural
evaluation shall consider, as a minimum, the criteria described below.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-17
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
1. Approach slabs may be deleted for geotechnical reasons if the following
geotechnical considerations are met:
• If settlements are excessive, resulting in the angular distortion of the slab to be
great enough to become a safety problem for motorists, with excessive defined
as a differential settlement between the bridge and the approach fill of 8 inches
or more, or,
• If creep settlement of the approach fill will be less than 0.5 inch, and the
amount of new fill placed at the approach is less than 20 feet, or
• If approach fill heights are less than 8 feet, or
• If more than 2 inches of differential settlement could occur between the
centerline and shoulder
2. Other issues such as design speed, average daily traffic (ADT) or accommodation
of certain bridge structure details may supersede the geotechnical reasons for
deleting the approach slabs.
8.6.6 Strength Limit States
Design of foundations at strength limit states shall include evaluation of the nominal
geotechnical and structural resistances of the foundation elements as specified in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 10.5.
8.6.7 Extreme Event Limit States
Foundations shall be designed for extreme events as applicable in accordance with the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
8 .7 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Design Parameters
The load and resistance factors provided herein result from a combination of design
model uncertainty, soil/rock property uncertainty, and unknown uncertainty assumed
by the previous allowable stress design and load factor design approach included in
previous AASHTO design specifications. Therefore, the load and resistance factors
account for soil/rock property uncertainty in addition to other uncertainties.
It should be assumed that the characteristic soil/rock properties to be used in
conjunction with the load and resistance factors provided herein that have been
calibrated using reliability theory (see Allen, 2005) are average values obtained
from laboratory test results or from correlated field in-situ test results. It should be
noted that use of lower bound soil/rock properties could result in overly conservative
foundation designs in such cases. However, depending on the availability of soil or
rock property data and the variability of the geologic strata under consideration, it
may not be possible to reliably estimate the average value of the properties needed for
design. In such cases, the geotechnical designer may have no choice but to use a more
conservative selection of design parameters to mitigate the additional risks created by
potential variability or the paucity of relevant data. Regarding the extent of subsurface
characterization and the number of soil/rock property tests required to justify use of
the load and resistance factors provided herein, see Chapter 5. For those load and
resistance factors determined primarily from calibration by fitting to allowable stress
design, this property selection issue is not relevant, and property selection should be
based on past practice. For information regarding the derivation of load and resistance
factors for foundations, (see Allen, 2005).
Page 8-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.8 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Service Limit States
Resistance factors for the service limit states shall be taken as specified in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 10.5 (most current version).
8.9 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Strength Limit States
Resistance factors for the strength limit states for foundations shall be taken as
specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 10.5 (most
current version). Regionally specific values may be used in lieu of the specified
resistance factors, but should be determined based on substantial statistical data
combined with calibration or substantial successful experience to justify higher values.
Smaller resistance factors should be used if site or material variability is anticipated to
be unusually high or if design assumptions are required that increase design uncertainty
that have not been mitigated through conservative selection of design parameters.
Exceptions with regard to the resistance factors provided in the most current version of
AASHTO for the strength limit state are as follows:
• For driven pile foundations, if the WSDOT driving formula is used for pile
driving construction control, the resistance factor ϕdyn shall be equal to 0.55 (end
of driving conditions only). This resistance factor does not apply to beginning of
redrive conditions. See Allen (2005b and 2007) for details on the derivation of this
resistance factor.
• For driven pile foundations, when using Wave Equation analysis to estimate pile
bearing resistance and establish driving criteria, a resistance factor of 0.50 may
be used if the hammer performance is field verified. Field verification of hammer
performance includes direct measurement of hammer stroke or ram kinetic energy
(e.g., ram velocity measurement). The wave equation may be used for either end of
drive or beginning of redrive pile bearing resistance estimation.
• For drilled shaft foundations, the requirements in Appendix 8-B shall be met.
This appendix essentially provides an update to the AASHTO LRFD drilled shaft
design specifications approved by the AASHTO Bridge Subcommittee in June
2013. These new specifications shall be used until the final drilled shaft AASHTO
specifications are published in the next edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications.
All other resistance factor considerations and limitations provided in the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 10.5 shall be considered applicable to
WSDOT design practice.
8 .10 Resistance Factors for Foundation Design – Extreme Event
Limit States
Design of foundations at extreme event limit states shall be consistent with the
expectation that structure collapse is prevented and that life safety is protected.
8.10.1 Scour
The resistance factors and their application shall be as specified in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.5.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-19
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
8.10.2 Other Extreme Event Limit States
Resistance factors for extreme event limit states, including the design of foundations
to resist earthquake, ice, vehicle or vessel impact loads, shall be taken as 1.0, with the
exception of bearing resistance of footing foundations. Since the load factor used for
the seismic lateral earth pressure for EQ is currently 1.0, to obtain the same level of
safety obtained from the AASHTO Standard Specification design requirements for
sliding and bearing, a resistance factor of slightly less than 1.0 is required. For bearing
resistance during seismic loading, a resistance factor of 0.90 should be used. For uplift
resistance of piles and shafts, the resistance factor shall be taken as 0.80 or less, to
account for the difference between compression skin friction and tension skin friction.
Regarding overall stability of slopes that can affect structures, a resistance factor of
0.9, which is equivalent to a factor of safety of 1.1, should in general be used for the
extreme event limit state. Section 6.4.3 and Chapter 7 provide additional information
and requirements regarding seismic stability of slopes.
8 .11 Spread Footing Design
Figure 8-4 provides a flowchart that illustrates the design process, and interaction
required between structural and geotechnical engineers, needed to complete a spread
footing design. ST denotes steps usually completed by the Structural Designer, while
GT denotes those steps normally completed by the geotechnical designer.
Page 8-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
1(ST). Determine bridge geometry and pier locations
1(GT). Determine depth of footing 2(ST). Determine loads applied to
based on geometry and bearing footing, including lateral earth pressure
material loads for abutments
3(ST). Design the footing at the
2(GT). Determine depth of footing service limit state
for scour, if present (with help of
Hydraulic Engineer)
4(ST). Check the bearing pressure of
3(GT). Determine soil properties the footing at the strength limit state
for foundation design, and
resistance factors in consideration
of the soil property uncertainty and
the method selected for calculating 5(ST). Check the eccentricity of the
nominal resistance footing at the strength limit state
4(GT). Determine active, passive,
and seismic earth pressure 6(ST). Check the sliding resistance of
parameters as needed for the footing at the strength limit state
abutments
7(ST). Check the bearing pressure of
5(GT). Determine nominal footing the footing at the extreme limit state
resistance at the strength and 8(GT). Check
extreme limit states nominal footing
resistance at all
limit states, and
overall stability 8(ST). Check the eccentricity of the
6(GT). Determine nominal footing in light of new footing at the extreme limit state
resistance at the service limit state footing
dimensions,
depth, and loads
9(ST). Check sliding resistance of the
footing at the extreme limit state
7(GT). Check overall stability,
determining max. feasible bearing
load to maintain adequate stability
10(ST). Design the footing (and walls
for abutment) according to the
concrete section of the Specification
Flowchart for LRFD Spread Footing Design
Figure 8-4
8.11.1 Loads and Load Factor Application to Footing Design
Figures 8-5 and 8-6 provide definitions and locations of the forces and moments that
act on structural footings. Note that the eccentricity used to calculate the bearing
stress in geotechnical practice typically is referenced to the centerline of the footing,
whereas the eccentricity used to evaluate overturning typically is referenced to point
O at the toe of the footing. It is important to not change from maximum to minimum
load factors in consideration of the force location relative to the reference point used
(centerline of the footing, or point “O” at the toe of the footing), as doing so will cause
basic statics to no longer apply, and one will not get the same resultant location when
the moments are summed at different reference points. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge
design Specifications indicate that the moments should be summed about the center
of the footing. Table 8-7 identifies when to use maximum or minimum load factors for
the various modes of failure for the footing (bearing, overturning, and sliding) for each
force, for the strength limit state.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-21
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
DC, LL
(super. & appr. slab)
Superstructure
Forces
Super. Bearing Forces
(parallel to abutment)
Super. Bearing Forces
(normal to abutment)
H LS EV heel
Substructure
Forces
EH soil
DC abut
EV toe
0.5H
L
0.3H
C
D
R ep
RT
σv
B/2 e0 X0 Point “0”
(a) Static design
B R
DC, LL, EQ
Superstructure
(super. & appr. slab)
Forces
Super. Bearing Forces
(parallel to abutment)
Super. Bearing Forces
(normal to abutment)
H LS EQsoil EVheel
EQabut
Substructure
Forces
EQsoil
DCabut
EVtoe
0.5H
0.3H
L
C
D
Rep
RT
σv
B/2 e0 X0 Point “0”
(b) Seismic design
B R
Definition and location of forces for stub abutments
Figure 8-5
Page 8-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
DC, LL (Appr. Slab)
DC, LL
(super. & appr. slab)
Super. Bearing Forces
(parallel to abutment)
Super. Bearing Forces
(normal to abutment)
EVheel
H LS
Substructure
Forces
EHsoil
DCabut
EVtoe
0.5H
0.3H
CL
D
Rep
RT
σv
B/2 e0 X0 Point “0”
(a) Static design
B R
DC, LL (Appr. Slab)
DC, LL
(super. & appr. slab)
Super. Bearing Forces
(parallel to abutment)
Super. Bearing Forces
(normal to abutment)
EVheel
H LS
EQabut
Substructure
Forces
EQsoil
DCabut
EVtoe
0.5H
0.3H
CL
D
Rep
RT
σv
B/2 e0 X0 Point “0”
(b) Seismic design
B R
Definition and location of forces for L-abutments and interior footings
Figure 8-6
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-23
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
The variables shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are defined as follows:
DC, LL, EQ = vertical structural loads applied to footing/wall
(dead load, live load, EQ load, respectively)
DCabut = structure load due to weight of abutment
EQabut = abutment inertial force due to earthquake loading
EVheel = vertical soil load on wall heel
EVtoe = vertical soil load on wall toe
EHsoil = lateral load due to active or at rest earth pressure
behind abutment
LS = lateral earth pressure load due to live load
EQsoil = lateral load due to combined effect of active or at rest earth
pressure plus seismic earth pressure behind abutment
Rep = ultimate soil passive resistance (note: height of pressure
distribution triangle is determined by the geotechnical engineer
and is project specific)
Rτ = soil shear resistance along footing base at soil-concrete interface
σv = resultant vertical bearing stress at base of footing
R = resultant force at base of footing
eo = eccentricity calculated about point O (toe of footing)
Xo = distance to resultant R from wall toe (point O)
B = footing width
H = total height of abutment plus superstructure thickness
Load Factor
Load Sliding Overturning, eo Bearing Stress (ec, σv)
DC, DCabut Use min. load factor Use min. load factor Use max. load factor
LL, LS Use transient load factor Use transient load factor Use transient load factor (e.g.,
(e.g., LL) (e.g., LL) LL)
EVheel, EVtoe Use min. load factor Use min. load factor Use max. load factor
EHsoil Use max. load factor Use max. load factor Use max. load factor
Selection of Maximum or Minimum Spread Footing Foundation Load Factors for
Various Modes of Failure for the Strength Limit State
Table 8-7
8.11.2 Footing Foundation Design
Geotechnical design of footings, and all related considerations, shall be conducted
as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 10.6 (most
current version), except as specified in following paragraphs and sections.
8 .11 .2 .1 Footing Bearing Depth
For footings on slopes, such as at bridge abutments, the footings should be located as
shown in the LRFD BDM Section 7.7.1. The footing should also be located to meet the
minimum cover requirements provided in LRFD BDM Section 7.7.1.
Page 8-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8 .11 .2 .2 Nearby Structures
Where foundations are placed adjacent to existing structures, the influence of the
existing structure on the behavior of the foundation and the effect of the foundation
on the existing structures shall be investigated. Issues to be investigated include, but
are not limit to, settlement of the existing structure due to the stress increase caused
by the new footing, decreased overall stability due to the additional load created by
the new footing, and the effect on the existing structure of excavation, shoring, and/or
dewatering to construct the new foundation.
8.11.2.3 Service Limit State Design of Footings
Footing foundations shall be designed at the service limit state to meet the tolerable
movements for the structure in accordance with Section 8.6.5.1. The nominal unit
bearing resistance at the service limit state, qserve, shall be equal to or less than
the maximum bearing stress that that results in settlement that meets the tolerable
movement criteria for the structure in Section 8.6.5.1, calculated in accordance with
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, and shall also be less than the
maximum bearing stress that meets overall stability requirements.
Other factors that may affect settlement, e.g., embankment loading and lateral and/or
eccentric loading, and for footings on granular soils, vibration loading from dynamic
live loads should also be considered, where appropriate. For guidance regarding
settlement due to vibrations, see Lam and Martin (1986) or Kavazanjian, et al., (1997).
8.11.2.3.1 Settlement of Footings on Cohesionless Soils
Based on experience (see also Kimmerling, 2002), the Hough method tends to
overestimate settlement of dense sands, and underestimate settlement of very loose
silty sands and silts. Kimmerling (2002) reports the results of full scale studies where
on average the Hough Method (Hough, 1959) overestimated settlement by an average
factor of 1.8 to 2.0, though some of the specific cases were close to 1.0. This does
not mean that estimated settlements by this method can be reduced by a factor of 2.0.
However, based on successful WSDOT experience, for footings on sands and gravels
with N160 of 20 blows/ft or more, or sands and gravels that are otherwise known to be
overconsolidated (e.g., sands subjected to preloading or deep compaction), reduction
of the estimated Hough settlement by up to a factor of 1.5 may be considered, provided
the geotechnical designer has not used aggressive soil parameters to account for the
Hough method’s observed conservatism. The settlement characteristics of cohesive
soils that exhibit plasticity should be investigated using undisturbed samples and
laboratory consolidation tests as prescribed in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications.
8.11.2.3.2 Settlement of Footings on Rock
For footings bearing on fair to very good rock, according to the Geomechanics
Classification system, as defined in Chapter 5, and designed in accordance with the
provisions of this section, elastic settlements may generally be assumed to be less
than 0.5 inches.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-25
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
8.11.2.3.3 Bearing Resistance at the Service Limit State Using Presumptive Values
Regarding presumptive bearing resistance values for footings on rock, bearing
resistance on rock shall be determined using empirical correlation the Geomechanic
Rock Mass Rating System, RMR, as specified in Chapter 5.
8.11.2.4 Strength Limit State Design of Footings
The design of spread footings at the strength limit state shall address the following
limit states:
• Nominal bearing resistance, considering the soil or rock at final grade, and
considering scour as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
Section 10:
• Overturning or excessive loss of contact; and
• Sliding at the base of footing.
The LRFD Bridge Design Manual allows footings to be inclined on slopes of up to
6H:1V. Footings with inclined bases steeper than this should be avoided wherever
possible, using stepped horizontal footings instead. The maximum feasible slope of
stepped footing foundations is controlled by the maximum acceptable stable slope for
the soil in which the footing is placed. Where use of an inclined footing base must be
used, the nominal bearing resistance determined in accordance with the provisions
herein should be further reduced using accepted corrections for inclined footing bases
in Munfakh, et al (2001).
8.11.2.4.1 Theoretical Estimation of Bearing Resistance
The footing bearing resistance equations provided in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications have no theoretical limit on the bearing resistance they predict.
However, WSDOT limits the nominal bearing resistance for strength and extreme
event limit states to 120 KSF on soil. Values greater than 120 KSF should not be used
for foundation design in soil.
8.11.2.4.2 Plate Load Tests for Determination of Bearing Resistance in Soil
The nominal bearing resistance may be determined by plate load tests, provided that
adequate subsurface explorations have been made to determine the soil profile below
the foundation. The nominal bearing resistance determined from a plate load test may
be extrapolated to adjacent footings where the subsurface profile is confirmed by
subsurface exploration to be similar.
Plate load tests have a limited depth of influence and furthermore may not disclose
the potential for long-term consolidation of foundation soils. Scale effects shall
be addressed when extrapolating the results to performance of full scale footings.
Extrapolation of the plate load test data to a full scale footing should be based on the
design procedures provided herein for settlement (service limit state) and bearing
resistance (strength and extreme event limit state), with consideration to the effect of
the stratification (i.e., layer thicknesses, depths, and properties). Plate load test results
should be applied only within a sub-area of the project site for which the subsurface
conditions (i.e., stratification, geologic history, properties) are relatively uniform.
Page 8-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.11.2.4.3 Bearing Resistance of Footings on Rock
For design of bearing of footings on rock, the competency of the rock mass should be
verified using the procedures for RMR rating in Chapter 5.
8.11.2.5 Extreme Event Limit State Design of Footings
Footings shall not be located on or within liquefiable soil. Footings may be located
on liquefiable soils that have been improved through densification or other means
so that they do not liquefy. Footings may also be located above liquefiable soil in a
non-liquefiable layer if the footing is designed to meet all Extreme Event limit states.
In this case, liquefied soil parameters shall be used for the analysis (see Chapter 6).
The footing shall be stable against an overall stability failure of the soil (see Section
8.6.5.2) and lateral spreading resulting from the liquefaction (see Chapter 6).
Footings located above liquefiable soil but within a non-liquefiable layer shall be
designed to meet the bearing resistance criteria established for the structure for
the Extreme Event Limit State. The bearing resistance of a footing located above
liquefiable soils shall be determined considering the potential for a punching shear
condition to develop, and shall also be evaluated using a two layer bearing resistance
calculation conducted in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications Section 10.6, assuming the soil to be in a liquefied condition. Settlement
of the liquefiable zone shall also be evaluated to determine if the extreme event limit
state criteria for the structure the footing is supporting are met. Settlement due to
liquefaction shall be evaluated as specified in Section 6.4.2.4.
For footings, whether on soil or on rock, the eccentricity of loading at the extreme limit
state shall not exceed one-third (0.33) of the corresponding footing dimension, B or
L, for γEQ = 0.0 and shall not exceed four-tenths (0.40) of the corresponding footing
dimension, B or L, for γEQ = 1.0. If live loads act to reduce the eccentricity for the
Extreme Event I limit state, γEQ shall be taken as 0.0.
8 .12 Driven Pile Foundation Design
Figure 8-7 provides a flowchart that illustrates the design process, and interaction
required between structural and geotechnical engineers, needed to complete a driven
pile foundation design. ST denotes steps usually completed by the Structural Designer,
while GT denotes those steps normally completed by the geotechnical designer.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-27
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
1(ST). Determine bridge geometry, pier locations, and foundation top
1(GT). Determine depth of scour, 2(ST). Determine loads applied to 9(GT). Evaluate the
if present (with help of Hydraulic foundation top, including lateral earth pile group for nominal
Engineer) pressure loads for abutments, through resistance at the
structural analysis and modeling as strength and extreme
well as pile lateral load analysis limit states, and
settlement/resistance
2(GT). Determine soil properties at the service limit
for foundation design, liquefaction state
3(ST). Determine the number of piles
potential, and resistance factors in required to support the unfactored
consideration of the soil property applied loads at the strength limit state,
uncertainty and the method and their estimated depth
selected for calculating nominal
resistance 10(GT). Verify
estimated tip elevation
4(ST). Determine the number of piles and pile nominal
required to support the unfactored resistance from Step
applied loads at the extreme event 6(ST), as well as
3(GT). Determine active, passive,
limit state, and their estimated depth minimum tip elevation
and seismic earth pressure
parameters as needed for from the greatest depth
abutments required to meet uplift,
5(ST). Reevaluate foundation lateral load, and
stiffnesses, and rerun structural serviceability
modeling to get new load distribution requirements
4(GT). Select best pile types, and for foundations. Reiterate if loads
determine nominal single pile from lateral pile analysis do not match
resistance at the strength and foundation top loads from structural
modeling within 5% 11(GT). Based on
extreme limit states as function of
minimum tip elevation
depth, estimating pile sizes likely
and pile diameter
needed, & establishing maximum
needed, determine
acceptable pile nominal resistance
6(ST). Factor the loads, and adjust need for overdriving
size of pile group or the pile capacities and driveability of pile
and estimated depths as needed to as designed; if not
5(GT). Estimate downdrag loads, driveable, reevaluate
resist applied factored loads
if present pile foundation design
and structural model
7(ST). Check the minimum pile depth
6(GT). Provide estimate of required to resist factored uplift loads
settlement for pile/pile group, or and to resist lateral loads within
foundation depth required to acceptable deformations
preclude unacceptable settlement
7(GT). Determine nominal uplift 8(ST). Design the foundation (and
resistance for piles as function of walls for abutment) according to the
depth concrete section of the Specification
8(GT). Determine P-Y curve 9(ST). Develop contract specifications, obtaining pile quantities
parameters for pile lateral load from estimated pile depths, minimum pile capacity required,
analysis minimum tip elevations, and overdriving required from design
Design Flowchart for Pile Foundation Design
Figure 8-7
Page 8-28 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.12.1 Loads and Load Factor Application to Driven Pile Design
Figures 8-8 and 8-9 provide definitions and typical locations of the forces and
moments that act on deep foundations such as driven piles. Table 8-8 identifies when
to use maximum or minimum load factors for the various modes of failure for the pile
(bearing, uplift, and lateral loading) for each force, for the strength limit state.
Definition and Location of Forces for Integral Shaft Column or Pile Bent
Figure 8-8
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-29
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
DC, LL, EQ (superstructure)
Super bearing forces
(transverse to bridge)
Super bearing forces
Column (parallel to bridge)
EQ col
New Fill DCcol
Soft or Loose
Soil
DD
Shaft or pile
Bearing Soil/Rock
qs
*Moments are calculated
at bottom of column.
DCnet
qp
Where:
DCcol = structure load due to weight of column
EQcol = earthquake inertial force due to weight of column
qp = ultimate end bearing resistance at base of shaft (unit resistance)
qs = ultimate side resistance on shaft (unit resistance)
DD = ultimate down drag load on shaft (total load)
DCnet = unit weight of concrete in shaft minus unit weight of soil
times the
shaft volume below the groundline (may include part of the column
if the top of the shaft is deep due to scour or for other reasons
Definition and Location of Forces for Pile or Shaft Supported Footing
Figure 8-9
Page 8-30 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
All other forces are as defined previously.
Load Factor
Load Bearing Stress Uplift *Lateral Loading
DC, DCcol Use max. load factor Use min. load factor Use max load factor
Use transient load factor Use transient load factor Use transient load factor
LL
(e.g., LL) (e.g., LL) (e.g., LL)
DCnet Use max. load factor Use min. load factor N/A
Treat as resistance, and
DD Use max. load factor use resistance factor for N/A
uplift
*Use unfactored loads to get force distribution in structure, then factor the resulting forces for final
structural design.
Selection of Maximum or Minimum Deep Foundation Load Factors for
Various Modes of Failure for the Strength Limit State
Table 8-8
All forces and load factors are as defined previously.
The loads and load factors to be used in pile foundation design shall be as specified
in Section 3 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Computational
assumptions that shall be used in determining individual pile loads are described in
Section 4 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
8.12.2 Driven for Pile Foundation Geotechnical Design
Geotechnical design of driven pile foundations, and all related considerations, shall be
conducted as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article
10.7 (most current version), except as specified in following paragraphs and sections:
8.12.2.1 Driven Pile Sizes and Maximum Resistances
In lieu of more detailed structural analysis, the general guidance on pile types, sizes,
and nominal resistance values provided in Table 8-9 may be used to select pile sizes
and types for analysis. The Geotechnical Office limits the maximum nominal pile
resistance for 24 inch piles to 1500 KIPS and 18 inch piles to 1,000 KIPS, and may
limit the nominal pile resistance for a given pile size and type driven to a given soil/
rock bearing unit based on experience with the given soil/rock unit. Note that this 1500
KIP limit for 24 inch diameter piles applies to closed end piles driven to bearing on
to glacially overconsolidated till or a similar geologic unit. Open-ended piles, or piles
driven to less competent bearing strata, should be driven to a lower nominal resistance.
The maximum resistance allowed in that given soil/rock unit may be increased by the
WSDOT Geotechnical Office per mutual agreement with the Bridge and Structures
Office if a pile load test is performed.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-31
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Pile Type and Diameter (in .)
Closed End
Nominal Steel Pipe/ *Precast,
pile Cast-in-Place Prestressed
Resistance Concrete Concrete
(KIPS) Piles Piles Steel H-Piles Timber Piles
120 - - - See WSDOT Standard Specs.
240 - - - See WSDOT Standard Specs.
330 12 in. 13 in. - -
420 14 in. 16 in. 12 in. -
18 in.
nonseismic
600 18 in. 14 in. -
areas, 24 in.
seismic areas
Project Project
900 24 in. -
Specific Specific
*Precast, prestressed concrete piles are generally not used for highway bridges, but are more
commonly used for marine work.
Typical Pile Types and Sizes for Various Nominal Pile Resistance Values
Table 8-9
8.12.2.2 Minimum Pile Spacing
Center-to-center pile spacing should not be less than the greater of 30 IN or 2.5 pile
diameters or widths. A center-to-center spacing of less than 2.5 pile diameters may
be considered on a case-by-case basis, subject to the approval of the WSDOT State
Geotechnical Engineer and Bridge Design Engineer.
8.12.2.3 Determination of Pile Lateral Resistance
Pile foundations are subjected to horizontal loads due to wind, traffic loads, bridge
curvature, vessel or traffic impact and earthquake. The nominal resistance of pile
foundations to horizontal loads shall be evaluated based on both soil/rock and
structural properties, considering soil-structure interaction. Determination of the
soil/rock parameters required as input for design using soil-structure interaction
methodologies is presented in Chapter 5.
See Article 10.7.2.4 in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for detailed
requirements regarding the determination of lateral resistance of piles.
Empirical data for pile spacings less than 3 pile diameters is very limited. If, due
to space limitations, a smaller center-to-center spacing is used, subject to the
requirements in Section 8.12.2.2, based on extrapolation of the values of Pm in Article
10.7.2.4 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, the following values of
Pm at a spacing of no less than 2D may be used:
• For Row 1, Pm = 0.45
• For Row 2, Pm = 0.33
• For Row 3, Pm = 0.25
Page 8-32 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
These values were extrapolated by fitting curves to the AASHTO Article 10.7.2.4 Pm
values. A similar technique should be used to interpolate to intermediate values of
foundation element spacing.
8 .12 .2 .4 Batter Piles
WSDOT design preference is to avoid the use of batter piles unless no other structural
option is available.
8.12.2.5 Service Limit State Design of Pile Foundations
Driven pile foundations shall be designed at the service limit state to meet the tolerable
movements for the structure being supported in accordance with Section 8.6.5.1.
Service limit state design of driven pile foundations includes the evaluation of
settlement due to static loads, and downdrag loads if present, overall stability, lateral
squeeze, and lateral deformation.
Lateral analysis of pile foundations is conducted to establish the load distribution
between the superstructure and foundations for all limit states, and to estimate the
deformation in the foundation that will occur due to those loads. This section only
addresses the evaluation of the lateral deformation of the foundation resulting from the
distributed loads.
8.12.2.5.1 Overall Stability
The provisions of Section 8.6.5.2 shall apply.
8.12.2.5.2 Horizontal Pile Foundation Movement
The horizontal movement of pile foundations shall be estimated using procedures that
consider soil-structure interaction as specified in Section 8.12.2.3.
8.12.2.6 Strength Limit State Geotechnical Design of Pile Foundations
8.12.2.6.1 Nominal Axial Resistance Change after Pile Driving
Setup as it relates to the WSDOT dynamic formula is discussed further in Section
8.12.2.6.4(a) and Allen (2005b, 2007).
8.12.2.6.2 Scour
If a static analysis method is used to determine the final pile bearing resistance (i.e., a
dynamic analysis method is not used to verify pile resistance as driven), the available
bearing resistance, and the pile tip penetration required to achieve the desired bearing
resistance, shall be determined assuming that the soil subject to scour is completely
removed, resulting in no overburden stress at the bottom of the scour zone.
Pile design for scour is illustrated in Figure 8-11, where,
Rscour = skin friction which must be overcome during driving through
scour zone (KIPS)
Qp = (ΣγiQi) = factored load per pile (KIPS)
Dest. = estimated pile length needed to obtain desired nominal
resistance per pile (FT)
ϕdyn = resistance factor, assuming that a dynamic method is used
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-33
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
iQi)/ dyn
Nominal Pile Driving Resistance Required, Rndr
Rscour Rndr
iQ i)/ dyn
Scour
Static skin friction
Zone
component of driving
resistance
Depth
Total pile
resistance during
driving
Bearing
Zone
Dest.
Design of Pile Foundations for Scour
Figure 8-11
8.12.2.6.3 Downdrag
The foundation should be designed so that the available factored geotechnical
resistance is greater than the factored loads applied to the pile, including the downdrag,
at the strength limit state. The nominal pile resistance available to support structure
loads plus downdrag shall be estimated by considering only the positive skin and tip
resistance below the lowest layer contributing to the downdrag. The pile foundation
shall be designed to structurally resist the downdrag plus structure loads.
Page 8-34 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
Pile design for downdrag is illustrated in Figure 8-12,
Where:
RSdd = skin friction which must be overcome during driving through
downdrag zone (KIPS)
Qp = (ΣγiQi) = factored load per pile, excluding downdrag load (KIPS)
DD = downdrag load per pile (KIPS)
Dest. = estimated pile length needed to obtain desired nominal
resistance per pile (FT)
ϕdyn = resistance factor, assuming that a dynamic method is used
to estimate pile resistance during installation of the pile
(if a static analysis method is used instead, use ϕstat)
γp = load factor for downdrag
Similar to the derivation of Equation 8-2, the nominal bearing resistance of the pile
needed to resist the factored loads, including downdrag, is therefore,
Rn = (ΣγiQi)/ϕdyn + γpDD/ϕdyn (8-4)
The total nominal driving resistance, Rndr, needed to obtain Rn, accounting for the
skin friction that must be overcome during pile driving that does not contribute to the
design resistance of the pile, is as follows:
Rndr = RSdd + Rn (8-5)
where, Rndr is the nominal pile driving resistance required. Note that RSdd remains
unfactored in this analysis to determine Rndr.
iQ i)/dyn + p DD/dyn
Nominal Pile Driving Resistance Required, Rndr
RSdd Rndr
iQ i)/dyn + p DD/dyn
Downdrag
Static skin friction
DD Zone
component of driving
resistance
Depth
Total pile
resistance during
driving
Bearing
Zone
Dest.
Design of Pile Foundations for Downdrag
Figure 8-12
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-35
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
In the instance where it is not possible to obtain adequate geotechnical resistance
below the lowest layer contributing to downdrag (e.g., friction piles) to fully resist
the downdrag, or if it is anticipated that significant deformation will be required to
mobilize the geotechnical resistance needed to resist the factored loads including the
downdrag load, the structure should be designed to tolerate the settlement resulting
from the downdrag and the other applied loads in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.7.
The static analysis procedures in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
Article 10.7 may be used to estimate the available pile resistance to withstand the
downdrag plus structure loads to estimate pile lengths required to achieve the required
bearing resistance. For this calculation, it should be assumed that the soil subject to
downdrag still contributes overburden stress to the soil below the downdrag zone.
Resistance may also be estimated using a dynamic method per the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.7, provided the skin friction resistance within
the zone contributing to downdrag is subtracted from the resistance determined from
the dynamic method during pile installation. The skin friction resistance within the
zone contributing to downdrag may be estimated using the static analysis methods
specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.7, from
signal matching analysis, or from pile load test results. Note that the static analysis
method may have a bias, on average over or under predicting the skin friction. The
bias of the method selected to estimate the skin friction within and above the downdrag
zone should be taken into account as described in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, Article 10.7.
8.12.2.6.4 Determination of Nominal Axial Pile Resistance in Compression
If a dynamic formula is used to establish the driving criterion in lieu of a combination
of dynamic measurements with signal matching, wave equation analysis, and/
or pile load tests, the WSDOT Pile Driving Formula from the WSDOT Standard
Specifications for Roads, Bridge, and Municipal Construction Section 6-05.3(12) shall
be used, unless otherwise specifically approved by the WSDOT State Geotechnical
Engineer.
The hammer energy used to calculate the nominal (ultimate) pile resistance during
driving in the WSDOT and other driving formulae described herein is the developed
energy. The developed hammer energy is the actual amount of gross energy produced
by the hammer for a given blow. This value will never exceed the rated hammer
energy (rated hammer energy is the maximum gross energy the hammer is capable of
producing, i.e., at its maximum stroke).
The development of the WSDOT pile driving formula is described in Allen (2005b,
2007). The nominal (ultimate) pile resistance during driving using this method shall be
taken as:
Page 8-36 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-37
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
test, is recommended for piles driven to higher bearing resistance and pile diameters
larger than 30 inches.
As is true of most driving formulae, if they have been calibrated to pile load test
results, the WSDOT pile driving formula has been calibrated to N values obtained at
end of driving (EOD). Since the pile nominal resistance obtained from pile load tests
are typically obtained days, if not weeks, after the pile has been driven, the gain in pile
resistance that typically occurs with time is in effect correlated to the EOD N value
through the driving formula. That is, the driving formula assumes that an “average”
amount of setup will occur after EOD when the pile nominal resistance is determined
from the formula (see Allen, 2005b, 2007). Hence, the WSDOT driving formula shall
not be used in combination with the resistance factor ϕdyn provided in Section 8.9 for
beginning of redrive (BOR) N values to obtain nominal resistance. If pile foundation
nominal resistance must be determined based on restrike (BOR) driving resistance,
dynamic measurements in combination with signal matching analysis and/or pile load
test results should be used.
Since driving formulas inherently account for a moderate amount of pile resistance
setup, it is expected that theoretical methodologies such as the wave equation will
predict lower nominal bearing resistance values for the same driving resistance N
than empirical methodologies such as the WSDOT driving formula. This should be
considered when assessing pile drivability if it is intended to evaluate the pile/hammer
system for contract approval purposes using the wave equation, but using a pile driving
formula for field determination of pile nominal bearing resistance.
If a dynamic (pile driving) formula other than the one provided here is used, subject
to the approval of the State Geotechnical Engineer, it shall be calibrated based on
measured load test results to obtain an appropriate resistance factor, consistent with the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 10.7 and Allen (2005b, 2007).
If a dynamic formula is used, the structural compression limit state cannot be treated
separately as with the other axial resistance evaluation procedures unless a drivability
analysis if performed. Evaluation of pile drivability, including the specific evaluation
of driving stresses and the adequacy of the pile to resist those stresses without damage,
is strongly recommended. When drivability is not checked, it is necessary that the pile
design stresses be limited to values that will assure that the pile can be driven without
damage. For steel piles, guidance is provided in Article 6.15.2 of the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications for the case where risk of pile damage is relatively high.
If pile drivability is not checked, it should be assumed that the risk of pile damage is
relatively high. For concrete piles and timber piles, no specific guidance is available in
Sections 5 and 8, respectively, of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
regarding safe design stresses to reduce the risk of pile damage. In past practice (see
AASHTO 2002), the required nominal axial resistance has been limited to 0.6 f'c for
concrete piles and 2,000 psi for timber piles if pile drivability is not evaluated.
Page 8-38 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.12.2.6.5 Nominal Horizontal Resistance of Pile Foundations
The nominal resistance of pile foundations to horizontal loads shall be evaluated based
on both geomaterial and structural properties. The horizontal soil resistance along
the piles should be modeled using P-Y curves developed for the soils at the site, as
specified in Section 8.12.2.3. For piles classified as short or intermediate as defined in
Section 8.13.2.4.3, Strain Wedge Theory (Norris, 1986; Ashour, et al., 1998) may used.
The applied loads shall be factored loads and they must include both horizontal and
axial loads. The analysis may be performed on a representative single pile with the
appropriate pile top boundary condition or on the entire pile group. If P-Y curves are
used, they shall be modified for group effects. The P-multipliers Article 10.7.2.4 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and Section 8.12.2.3 should be used to
modify the curves. If strain wedge theory is used, P-multipliers shall not be used, but
group effects shall be addressed through evaluation of the overlap between shear zones
formed due to the passive wedge that develops in front of each pile in the group as
lateral deflection increases. If the pile cap will always be embedded, the P-Y horizontal
resistance of the soil on the cap face may be included in the horizontal resistance.
8.12.2.7 Extreme Event Limit State Design of Pile Foundations
For the applicable factored loads (see AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
Section 3) for each extreme event limit state, the pile foundations shall be designed
to have adequate factored axial and lateral resistance. For seismic design, all soil
within and above liquefiable zones shall not be considered to contribute axial
compressive resistance. Downdrag resulting from liquefaction induced settlement
shall be determined as specified in Section 6.5.3 and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications (Article 3.11.8), and shall be included in the loads applied to the
foundation. Static downdrag loads shall not be combined with seismic downdrag loads
due to liquefaction.
The available factored geotechnical resistance should be greater than the factored loads
applied to the pile, including the downdrag, at the extreme event limit state. The pile
foundation shall be designed to structurally resist the downdrag plus structure loads.
Pile design for liquefaction downdrag is illustrated in Figure 8-13, where,
RSdd = skin friction which must be overcome during driving through
downdrag zone
Qp = (ΣγiQi) = factored load per pile, excluding downdrag load
DD = downdrag load per pile
Dest. = estimated pile length needed to obtain desired nominal resistance
per pile
ϕseis = resistance factor for seismic conditions
γp = load factor for downdrag
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-39
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
The nominal bearing resistance of the pile needed to resist the factored loads, including
downdrag, is therefore,
Rn = (ΣγiQi)/ϕseis + γpDD/ϕseis (8-7)
The total driving resistance, Rndr, needed to obtain Rn, accounting for the skin friction
that must be overcome during pile driving that does not contribute to the design
resistance of the pile, is as follows:
Rndr = RSdd + Rn (8-8)
Note that RSdd remains unfactored in this analysis to determine Rndr.
iQi)/seis + p DD/ seis
Nominal Pile Driving Resistance Required, Rndr
RSdd Rndr
iQi)/ seis + p DD/ seis
Liquefaction
Static skin friction
DD Downdrag
component of driving Zone
resistance
Depth
Total pile
resistance during
driving
Bearing
Zone
Dest.
Design of Pile Foundations for Liquefaction Downdrag
Figure 8-13
In the instance where it is not possible to obtain adequate geotechnical resistance
below the lowest layer contributing to downdrag (e.g., friction piles) to fully resist
the downdrag, or if it is anticipated that significant deformation will be required to
mobilize the geotechnical resistance needed to resist the factored loads including the
downdrag load, the structure should be designed to tolerate the settlement resulting
from the downdrag and the other applied loads in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications.
The static analysis procedures in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
may be used to estimate the available pile resistance to withstand the downdrag
plus structure loads to estimate pile lengths required to achieve the required bearing
resistance. For this calculation, it should be assumed that the soil subject to downdrag
still contributes overburden stress to the soil below the downdrag zone.
Resistance may also be estimated using a dynamic method per AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, provided the skin friction resistance within the zone
contributing to downdrag is subtracted from the resistance determined from the
dynamic method during pile installation. The skin friction resistance within the zone
contributing to downdrag may be estimated using the static analysis methods specified
in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, from signal matching analysis, or
from pile load test results. Note that the static analysis method may have a bias, on
average over or under predicting the skin friction. The bias of the method selected to
Page 8-40 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
estimate the skin friction within and above the downdrag zone should be taken into
account as described in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
Downdrag forces estimated using these methods may be conservative, as the downdrag
force due to liquefaction may be between the full static shear strength and the liquefied
shear strength acting along the length of the deep foundation elements (see Section
6.5.3).
The pile foundation shall also be designed to resist the horizontal force resulting from
lateral spreading, if applicable, or the liquefiable soil shall be improved to prevent
liquefaction and lateral spreading. For lateral soil resistance of the pile foundation,
if P-Y curves are used, the soil input parameters should be reduced to account for
liquefaction. To determine the amount of reduction, the duration of strong shaking and
the ability of the soil to fully develop a liquefied condition during the period of strong
shaking should be considered.
Regarding the reduction of P-Y soil strength and stiffness parameters to account for
liquefaction, see Section 6.5.1.2.
The force resulting from flow failure/lateral spreading should be calculated as
described in Chapter 6.
When designing for scour at the extreme event limit state, the pile foundation design
shall be conducted as described in Section 8.12.4.5, and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications. The resistance factors and the check flood per the AASHTO
Bridge Design Specifications shall be used.
8 .13 Drilled Shaft Foundation Design
Figure 8-14 provides a flowchart that illustrates the design process, and interaction
required between structural and geotechnical engineers, needed to complete
a drilled shaft foundation design. ST denotes steps usually completed by the
Structural Designer, while GT denotes those steps normally completed by the
Geotechnical Designer.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-41
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
1(ST). Determine bridge geometry, pier locations, and foundation top
1(GT). Determine depth of scour, 2(ST). Determine loads applied to 9(GT). Evaluate the
if present (with help of Hydraulic foundation top, including lateral earth shaft/shaft group for
Engineer) pressure loads for abutments, through nominal resistance at
structural analysis and modeling as the strength and
well as shaft lateral load analysis extreme limit states,
and
2(GT). Determine soil properties settlement/resistance
for foundation design, liquefaction at the service limit
potential, and resistance factors in 3(ST). Determine depth, diameter, and
state
consideration of the soil property nominal shaft resistance needed to
uncertainty and the method support the unfactored applied loads at
selected for calculating nominal the strength limit state
resistance 10(GT). Verify
estimated tip elevation
3(ST). Determine depth, diameter, and and shaft nominal
nominal shaft resistance needed to resistance from Step
3(GT). Determine active, passive, support the unfactored applied loads at 6(ST), as well as the
and seismic earth pressure the extreme limit state specified tip elevation
parameters as needed for from the greatest depth
abutments required to meet uplift,
5(ST). Reevaluate foundation lateral load, and
stiffnesses, and rerun structural serviceability
modeling to get new load distribution requirements; if
4(GT). Determine nominal single significantly different
for foundations. Reiterate if loads
shaft resistance at the strength and than what was
from lateral shaft analysis do not
extreme limit states as function of provided in Step
match foundation top loads from
depth, for likely shaft diameters 6(ST), have structural
structural modeling within 5%
needed, considering shaft model and foundation
constructability design reevaluated
6(ST). Factor the loads, and adjust the
5(GT). Estimate downdrag loads, shaft size or depth as needed to resist
if present applied factored loads, both lateral and
vertical
6(GT). Provide estimate of
settlement limited resistance 7(ST). Check the minimum shaft
(service state) for shaft/shaft group, depth required to resist factored uplift
or foundation depth required to loads and to resist lateral loads within
preclude unacceptable settlement acceptable deformations
7(GT). Determine nominal uplift 8(ST). Design the foundation (and
resistance for shafts as function of walls for abutment) according to the
depth concrete section of the Specification
8(GT). Determine P-Y curve 9(ST). Develop contract specifications
parameters for shaft lateral load
analysis
Design Flowchart For Drill Shaft Foundation Design
Figure 8-14
Page 8-42 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.13.1 Loads and Load Factor Application to Drilled Shaft Design
Figures 8-8 and 8-9 provide definitions and typical locations of the forces and
moments that act on deep foundations such as drilled shafts. Table 8-8 identifies when
to use maximum or minimum load factors for the various modes of failure for the shaft
(bearing capacity, uplift, and lateral loading) for each force, for the strength limit state.
The loads and load factors to be used in shaft foundation design shall be as specified
in Section 3 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Computational
assumptions that shall be used in determining individual shaft loads are described in
Section 4 of the AASHTO LRFD specifications.
8.13.2 Drilled Shaft Geotechnical Design
Geotechnical design of drilled shaft foundations, and all related considerations, shall
be conducted as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article
10.8 (2012 version, but as revised/supplemented in Appendix 8-B until the next edition
of the AASHTO LRFD specifications, which will contain the revised drilled shaft
design specifications provided in Appendix 8-B, are published), except as specified in
following paragraphs and sections:
8 .13 .2 .1 General Considerations
The provisions of Section 8.13 and all subsections shall apply to the design of drilled
shafts. Throughout these provisions, the use of the term “drilled shaft” shall be
interpreted to mean a shaft constructed using either drilling or casing plus excavation
equipment and related technology. These provisions shall also apply to shafts that
are constructed using casing advancers that twist or rotate casings into the ground
concurrent with excavation rather than drilling. The provisions of this section are not
applicable to drilled piles installed with continuous flight augers that are concreted
as the auger is being extracted (e.g., this section does not apply to the design of
augercast piles).
Shaft designs should be reviewed for constructability prior to advertising the project
for bids.
8 .13 .2 .2 Nearby Structures
Where shaft foundations are placed adjacent to existing structures, the influence of the
existing structure on the behavior of the foundation, and the effect of the foundation
on the existing structures, including vibration effects due to casing installation, should
be investigated. In addition, the impact of caving soils during shaft excavation on the
stability of foundations supporting adjacent structures should be evaluated. For existing
structure foundations that are adjacent to the proposed shaft foundation, and if a shaft
excavation cave-in could compromise the existing foundation in terms of stability or
increased deformation, the design should require that casing be advanced as the shaft
excavation proceeds.
8.13.2.3 Service Limit State Design of Drilled Shafts
Drilled shaft foundations shall be designed at the service limit state to meet
the tolerable movements for the structure being supported in accordance with
Section 8.6.5.1.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-43
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Service limit state design of drilled shaft foundations includes the evaluation of
settlement due to static loads, and downdrag loads if present, overall stability, lateral
squeeze, and lateral deformation.
Lateral analysis of shaft foundations is conducted to establish the load distribution
between the superstructure and foundations for all limit states, and to estimate the
deformation in the foundation that will occur due to those loads. This section only
addresses the evaluation of the lateral deformation of the foundation resulting from the
distributed loads.
8.13.2.3.1 Horizontal Movement of Shafts and Shaft Groups
The provisions of Section 8.12.2.3 and Appendix 8-B shall apply.
8.13.2.3.2 Overall Stability
The provisions of Section 8.6.5.2 shall apply.
8.13.2.4 Strength Limit State Geotechnical Design of Drilled Shafts
The nominal shaft geotechnical resistances that shall be evaluated at the strength limit
state include:
• Axial compression resistance,
• Axial uplift resistance,
• Punching of shafts through strong soil into a weaker layer,
• Lateral geotechnical resistance of soil and rock strata,
• Resistance when scour occurs, and
• Axial resistance when downdrag occurs.
If very strong soil, such as glacially overridden tills or outwash deposits, is present, and
adequate performance data for shaft axial resistance in the considered geological soil
deposit is available, the nominal end bearing resistance may be increased above the
limit specified for bearing in soil in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
up to the loading limit that performance data indicates will produce good long-term
performance. Alternatively, load testing may be conducted to validate the value of
bearing resistance selected for design.
8.13.2.4.1 Scour
The effect of scour shall be considered in the determination of the shaft penetration.
Resistance after scour shall be based on the applicable provisions of Section
8.12.2.6.2 and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section 10. The
shaft foundation shall be designed so that the shaft penetration after the design scour
event satisfies the required nominal axial and lateral resistance. For this calculation, it
shall be assumed that the soil lost due to scour does not contribute to the overburden
stress in the soil below the scour zone. The shaft foundation shall be designed to resist
debris loads occurring during the flood event in addition to the loads applied from the
structure.
The resistance factors are those used in the design without scour. The axial resistance
of the material lost due to scour shall not be included in the shaft resistance.
Page 8-44 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
8.13.2.4.2 Downdrag
The nominal shaft resistance available to support structure loads plus downdrag shall
be estimated by considering only the positive skin and tip resistance below the lowest
layer contributing to the downdrag. For this calculation, it shall be assumed that the
soil contributing to downdrag does contribute to the overburden stress in the soil below
the downdrag zone. In general, the available factored geotechnical resistance should
be greater than the factored loads applied to the shaft, including the downdrag, at the
strength limit state.
In the instance where it is not possible to obtain adequate geotechnical resistance
below the lowest layer contributing to downdrag (e.g., friction shafts) to fully resist the
downdrag, the structure should be designed to tolerate the settlement resulting from the
downdrag and the other applied loads.
8.13.2.4.3 Nominal Horizontal Resistance of Shaft and Shaft Group Foundations
The provisions of Section 8.12.2.6.5 and Appendix 8-B shall apply. For shafts
classified as short or intermediate, when laterally loaded, the shaft maintains a lateral
deflection pattern that is close to a straight line. A shaft is defined as short if its length,
L, to relative stiffness ratio (L/T) is less than or equal to 2, intermediate when this ratio
is less than or equal to 4 but greater than 2, and long when this ratio is greater than 4,
where relative stiffness, T, is defined as:
0.2
EI
T (8-9)
f
where,
E = the shaft modulus
I = the moment of inertia for the shaft, and EI is the bending stiffness
of the shaft, and
f = coefficient of subgrade reaction for the soil into which the shaft
is embedded as provided in NAVFAC DM 7.2 (1982)
For shafts classified as short or intermediate as defined above, strain wedge theory
(Norris, 1986; Ashour, et al., 1998) may be used to estimate the lateral resistance of the
shafts in lieu of P-Y methods.
The design of horizontally loaded drilled shafts shall account for the effects of
interaction between the shaft and ground, including the number of shafts in the group.
When strain wedge theory is used to assess the lateral load response of shaft groups,
group effects shall be addressed through evaluation of the overlap between shear zones
formed due to the passive wedge that develops in front of each shaft in the group as
lateral deflection increases.
8.13.2.5 Extreme Event Limit State Design of Drilled Shafts
The provisions of Section 8.12.2.7 shall apply, except that for liquefaction downdrag,
the nominal shaft resistance available to support structure loads plus downdrag shall
be estimated by considering only the positive skin and tip resistance below the lowest
layer contributing to the downdrag. For this calculation, it shall be assumed that the
soil contributing to downdrag does contribute to the overburden stress in the soil below
the downdrag zone. In general, the available factored geotechnical resistance should
be greater than the factored loads applied to the shaft, including the downdrag, at the
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-45
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
strength limit state. The shaft foundation shall be designed to structurally resist the
downdrag plus structure loads.
In the instance where it is not possible to obtain adequate geotechnical resistance
below the lowest layer contributing to downdrag (e.g., friction shafts) to fully resist the
downdrag, the structure should be designed to tolerate the settlement resulting from the
downdrag and the other applied loads.
8.14 Micropiles
Micropiles shall be designed in accordance with Articles 10.5 and 10.9 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Additional background information
on micropile design may be found in the FHWA Micropile Design and Construction
Guidelines Implementation Manual, Publication No. FHWA-SA-97-070 (Armour, et
al., 2000).
8 .15 Proprietary Foundation Systems
Only proprietary foundation systems that have been reviewed and approved by the
WSDOT New Products Committee, and subsequently added to Appendix 8-A of this
manual, may be used for structural foundation support.
In general, proprietary foundation systems shall be evaluated based on the following:
1. The design shall rely on published and proven technology, and should be consistent
with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and this geotechnical
design manual. Deviations from the AASHTO specifications and this manual
necessary to design the foundation system must be fully explained based on sound
geotechnical theory and supported empirically through full scale testing.
2. The quality of the foundation system as constructed in the field is verifiable.
3. The foundation system is durable, and through test data it is shown that it will have
the necessary design life (usually 75 years or more).
4. The limitations of the foundation system in terms of its applicability, capacity,
constructability, and potential impact to adjacent facilities during and after its
installation (e.g., vibrations, potential subsurface soil movement, etc.) are clearly
identified.
8 .16 Detention Vaults
8.16.1 Overview
Requirements for sizing and locating detention/retention vaults are provided in the
Highway Runoff Manual. Detention/retention vaults as described in this section include
wet vaults, combined wet/detention vaults and detention vaults. For specific details
regarding the differences between these facilities, please refer to Chapter 5 of the
WSDOT Highway Runoff Manual. For geotechnical and structural design purposes, a
detention vault is a buried reinforced concrete structure designed to store water and
retain soil, with or without a lid. The lid and the associated retaining walls may need
to be designed to support a traffic surcharge. The size and shape of the detention vaults
can vary. Common vault widths vary from 15 feet to over 60 feet. The length can
vary greatly. Detention vaults over a 100 feet in length have been proposed for some
projects. The base of the vault may be level or may be sloped from each side toward
the center forming a broad V to facilitate sediment removal. Vaults have specific site
Page 8-46 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
design elements, such as location with respect to right-of-way, septic tanks and drain
fields. The geotechnical designer must address the adequacy of the proposed vault
location and provide recommendations for necessary set-back distances from steep
slopes or building foundations.
8.16.2 Field Investigation Requirements
A geotechnical reconnaissance and subsurface investigation are critical for the design
of all detention vaults. All detention vaults, regardless of their size, will require an
investigation of the underlying soil/rock that supports the structure.
The requirements for frequency of explorations provided in Table 8-10 should be
used. Additional explorations may be required depending on the variability in site
conditions, vault geometry, and the consequences should a failure occur.
Vault surface area (ft2) Exploration points (minimum)
<200 1
200 - 1000 2
1000 – 10,000 3
>10,000 3-4
Minimum Exploration Requirements for Detention Vaults
Table 8-10
The depth of the borings will vary depending on the height of soil being retained
by the vault and the overall depth of the vault. The borings should be extended to a
depth below the bottom elevation of the vault a minimum of 1.5 times the height of
the exterior walls. Exploration depth should be great enough to fully penetrate soft
highly compressible soils (e.g., peat, organic silt, soft fine grained soils) into competent
material of suitable bearing resistance (e.g., very stiff to hard cohesive soil, dense
cohesionless soil or bedrock). Since these structures may be subjected to hydrostatic
uplift forces, a minimum of one boring must be instrumented with a piezometer to
measure seasonal variations in ground water unless the ground water depth is known to
be well below the bottom of the vault at all times.
8.16.3 Design Requirements
A detention vault is an enclosed buried structure surrounded by three or more
retaining walls. Therefore, for the geotechnical design of detention vault walls, design
requirements provided in Chapter 15 are applicable. Since the vault walls typically
do not have the ability to deform adequately to allow active earth pressure conditions
to develop, at rest conditions should be assumed for the design of the vault walls (see
Chapter 15.
If the seasonal high ground water level is above the base of the vault, the vault shall
be designed for the uplift forces that result from the buoyancy of the structure. Uplift
forces should be resisted by tie-down anchors or deep foundations in combination with
the weight of the structure and overburden material over the structure.
Temporary shoring may be required to allow excavation of the soil necessary
to construct the vault. See Chapter 15 for guidelines on temporary shoring. If
a shoring wall is used to permanently support the sides of the vault or to provide
permanent uplift resistance to buoyant forces, the shoring wall(s) shall be designed
as permanent wall(s).
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-47
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
8 .17 References
AASHTO, 2012, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, Sixth Edition, Washington, D.C., USA. (Note:
Most current edition shall be used).
Allen, T. M., 2005, Development of Geotechnical Resistance Factors and Downdrag
Load Factors for LRFD Foundation Strength Limit State Design, Publication No.
FHWA-NHI-05-052, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, DC, 41 pp.
Allen, T. M., 2005b, Development of the WSDOT Pile Driving Formula and Its
Calibration for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD), WSDOT Research
Report WA-RD 610.1, Olympia, WA, 45 pp.
Allen, T. M., 2007, “Development of New Pile-Driving Formula and Its Calibration
for Load and Resistance Factor Design,” Transportation Research Record 2004, TRB,
National Research Council, Washington, DC., pp. 20-27.
Armour, T., Groneck, T., Keeley, J., and Sharma, S., 2000, Micropile Design and
Construction Guidelines Implementation Manual, FHWA-SA-97-070, 376 pp.
Ashour, M., and Norris, G. M., 1999, “Liquefaction and Undrained Response
Evaluation of Sands from Drained Formulation,” ”, ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 8, pp. 649-658.
Ashour, M., and Norris, G. M., 2003, “Lateral Loaded Pile Response in Liquefiable
Soil”, ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 129,
No. 6, pp. 404-414.
Ashour, M., Norris, G. M., and Pilling, P., 1998, “Lateral Loading of a Pile in
layered Soil Using the Strain Wedge Model,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 124, No. 4, pp. 303-315.
Ashour, M., Norris, G. M., and Pilling, P., 2002, “Strain Wedge Model Capability
of Analyzing Behavior of Laterally Loaded Isolated Piles, Drilled Shafts, and Pile
Groups,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 7,
No. 4, pp. 245-254.
Barker, R. M., J. M. Duncan, K. B. Rojiani, P. S. K. Ooi, C. K. Tan, and S. G. Kim.
1991. “Manuals for the Design of Bridge Foundations.” NCHRP Report 343. TRB,
National Research Council, Washington, DC.
Broms, B.B., 1964a. Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesive Soil. ASCE, Journal for
Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Vol 90, SM2, 27 – 63.
Broms, B.B., 1964b. Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesionless Soil. ASCE, Journal
for Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Vol 90, SM3, 123 – 156.
DiMillio, A. F., 1982. “Performance of Highway Bridge Abutments Supported by
Spread Footings on Compacted Fill,” Report No. FHWA/RD-81/184, (NTIS PB83-
201822). (FHWA Staff Study).
Hannigan, P.J., G.G. Goble, G.E. Likins and F. Rausche, 2006. “Design and
Construction of Driven Pile Foundations” - Vol. I and II, Federal Highway
Administration Report No. FHWA-HI-05-042, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, D.C., 822 pp.
Page 8-48 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 8 Foundation Design
Hoek, E., C. Carrazna-Torres, and B. Corkum, 2002. “Hoek-Brown Failure Criterion
– 2002 Edition,” 5th North American Rock Mechanics Symposium and 17th Tunneling
Association of Canada Conference: NARMS-TAC, pp. 267-271.
Hough, B.K. 1959. “Compressibility as the Basis for Soil Bearing Value,” Journal of
the Soil Mechanics and Foundations Division, ASCE, Vol. 85, Part 2.
Ishihara, K., and Yoshimine, M., 1992. “Evaluation of settlements in sand deposits
following liquefaction during earthquakes.” Soils and Foundations, JSSMFE, Vol. 32,
No. 1, March, pp. 173-188.
Kavazanjian, E., Jr., Matasoviæ, T. Hadj-Hamou and Sabatini, P.J. 1997. “Geotechnical
Engineering Circular No. 3, Design Guidance: Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering
for Highways,” Report No. FHWA-SA-97-076, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, D.C.
Kimmerling, R. E. 2002. Geotechnical Engineering Circular 6. Report No. FHWA-
SA-02-054, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, D.C.
Kyfor, Z. G., Schnore, A. R., Carlo, T. A., and Bailey, P. F., 1992. Static Testing of
Deep Foundations. Report No. FHWA-SA-91-042, U. S. Department of Transportation,
Federal Highway Administration, Office of Technology Applications, Washington D.
C., 174
Lam, I. P, and G. R. Martin. 1986. “Seismic Design of Highway Bridge Foundations.”
Vol. 2, Design Procedures and Guidelines. FHWA/RD-86/102, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, p. 18.
Liang, R. Y., 2010, Field Intrumentation, Monitoring of Drilled Shafts for Landslide
Stabilization and Development of Pertinent Design Method, Report No. FHWA/OH-
2010/15, Ohio Department of Transportation, 238 pp.
Moulton, L. K., H. V. S. GangaRao, and G. T. Halverson. 1985. “Tolerable Movement
Criteria for Highway Bridges.” FHWA/RD-85/107. Federal Highway Administration,
U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, p. 118.
Munfakh, G., Arman, A., Collin, J.G., Hung, J.C.-J., and Brouillette, R.P. 2001.
“Shallow Foundations Reference Manual,” Publication No. FHWA-NHI-01-023,
Federal Highway Administration, Washington, D.C.
Norris, G. M., 1986, “Theoretically based BEF Laterally Loaded Pile Analysis:
Proceedings, Third International Conference on Numerical Methods in Offshore Piling,
Nantes, France, pp. 361-386.
Reese, L. C. 1984. “Handbook on Design of Piles and Drilled Shafts Under Lateral
Load.” FHWA-IP-84/11, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, DC.
Reese, L. C., 1986. Behavior of Piles and Pile Groups Under Lateral Load. Report
No. FHWA/RD-85/106, U. S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway
Administration, Office of Engineering and Highway Operations Research and
Development, Washington D. C., 311
Sabatini, P.J, Bachus, R.C, Mayne, P.W., Schneider, J.A., Zettler, T.E. (2002),
Geotechnical Engineering Circular 5 (GEC5) - Evaluation of Soil and Rock Properties.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-49
December 2013
Foundation Design Chapter 8
Report No FHWA-IF-02-034. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Samtani, N. C., and Nowatzki, E. A., 2006. Soils and Foundations Workshop Reference
Manual, Volumes 1 and 2. Washington, DC, National Highway Institute Publication
NHI-06-088 and NHI-06-089, Federal Highway Administration, 1056 pp.
Seed, R. B. and Harder, L. F. Jr., 1990. SPT-Based Analysis of Cyclic Pore Pressure
Generation and Undrained Residual Strength. Proceedings, H. B. Bolton Seed
Memorial Symposium, J. M. Duncan Editor, BiTech Publishers, Vol 2, 351-376.
Tokimatsu, K. and Bolton Seed, B. 1987. Evaluation of Settlements in Sands due
to Earthquake Shaking, Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, ASCE, 113, 8, 861-878.
Vessely, A., Yamasaki, K., and Strom, R., 2007. “Landslide Stabilization Using
Piles.” Proc. of the 1st N. American Conf. on Landslides, Vail, Colorado, Assoc. of
Environmental & Engineering Geologists, pp. 1173-1183.
Williams, M.E., M. McVay and M.I. Hoit, 2003. “LRFD Substructure and Foundation
Design Programs”, Proceedings of the 2003 International Bridge Conference, June
9-11, Pittsburgh, Pa.
WSDOT, 2012, Bridge Design Manual LRFD, M 23-50 (Note: Most current edition
shall be used.)
WSDOT, 2012, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal
Construction, M 41-01 (Note: Most current edition shall be used).
Yamasaki, K., Strom, R. W., Gunsolus, R. A., and D. Andrew Vessely, 2013, “Long-
Term Performance of Landslide Shear Piles,” ASCE Geo-Congress 2013, pp.
1936-1950.
Page 8-50 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-A-1
December 2013
Approved Proprietary Foundation Systems Appendix 8-A
Page 8-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-1
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
ATTACHMENT A — 2013 AGENDA ITEM __ - T-15
10.1—SCOPE – NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.2—DEFINITIONS
ONE ADDITION BELOW – THE REMAINDER STAYS THE SAME
GSI—Geologic Strength Index
10.3—NOTATION
ONE ADDITION BELOW – THE REMAINDER STAYS THE SAME
s, m, a = fractured rock mass parameters (10.4.6.4)
10.4—SOIL AND ROCK PROPERTIES
10.4.1—Informational Needs – NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.4.2—Subsurface Exploration C10.4.2
Subsurface explorations shall be performed to The performance of a subsurface exploration program
provide the information needed for the design and is part of the process of obtaining information relevant for
construction of foundations. The extent of exploration the design and construction of substructure elements. The
shall be based on variability in the subsurface elements of the process that should precede the actual
conditions, structure type, and any project exploration program include a search and review of
requirements that may affect the foundation design or published and unpublished information at and near the site,
construction. The exploration program should be a visual site inspection, and design of the subsurface
extensive enough to reveal the nature and types of soil exploration program. Refer to Mayne et al. (2001) and
deposits and/or rock formations encountered, the Sabatini et al. (2002) for guidance regarding the planning
engineering properties of the soils and/or rocks, the and conduct of subsurface exploration programs.
potential for liquefaction, and the groundwater The suggested minimum number and depth of borings
conditions. The exploration program should be are provided in Table 10.4.2-1. While engineering
sufficient to identify and delineate problematic judgment will need to be applied by a licensed and
subsurface conditions such as karstic formations, experienced geotechnical professional to adapt the
mined out areas, swelling/collapsing soils, existing fill exploration program to the foundation types and depths
or waste areas, etc. needed and to the variability in the subsurface conditions
Borings should be sufficient in number and depth to observed, the intent of Table 10.4.2-1 regarding the
establish a reliable longitudinal and transverse substrata minimum level of exploration needed should be carried
profile at areas of concern such as at structure out. The depth of borings indicated in Table 10.4.2-1
foundation locations and adjacent earthwork locations, performed before or during design should take into account
and to investigate any adjacent geologic hazards that the potential for changes in the type, size and depth of the
could affect the structure performance. planned foundation elements.
Page 8-B-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
As a minimum, the subsurface exploration and testing This Table should be used only as a first step in
program shall obtain information adequate to analyze estimating the number of borings for a particular
foundation stability and settlement with respect to: design, as actual boring spacings will depend upon the
project type and geologic environment. In areas
• Geological formation(s) present, underlain by heterogeneous soil deposits and/or rock
formations, it will probably be necessary to drill more
• Location and thickness of soil and rock units, frequently and/or deeper than the minimum guidelines
in Table 10.4.2-1 to capture variations in soil and/or
• Engineering properties of soil and rock units, such rock type and to assess consistency across the site area.
as unit weight, shear strength and compressibility, For situations where large diameter rock socketed
shafts will be used or where drilled shafts are being
• Groundwater conditions,
installed in formations known to have large boulders,
• Ground surface topography, and or voids such as in karstic or mined areas, it may be
necessary to advance a boring at the location of each
• Local considerations, e.g., liquefiable, expansive or shaft. Even the best and most detailed subsurface
dispersive soil deposits, underground voids from exploration programs may not identify every important
solution weathering or mining activity, or slope subsurface problem condition if conditions are highly
instability potential. variable. The goal of the subsurface exploration
program, however, is to reduce the risk of such
problems to an acceptable minimum.
Table 10.4.2-1 shall be used as a starting point for In a laterally homogeneous area, drilling or
determining the locations of borings. The final advancing a large number of borings may be redundant,
exploration program should be adjusted based on the since each sample tested would exhibit similar
variability of the anticipated subsurface conditions as engineering properties. Furthermore, in areas where soil
well as the variability observed during the exploration or rock conditions are known to be very favorable to the
program. If conditions are determined to be variable, the construction and performance of the foundation type
exploration program should be increased relative to the likely to be used, e.g., footings on very dense soil, and
requirements in Table 10.4.2-1 such that the objective of groundwater is deep enough to not be a factor, obtaining
establishing a reliable longitudinal and transverse fewer borings than provided in Table 10.4.2-1 may be
substrata profile is achieved. If conditions are observed justified. In all cases, it is necessary to understand how
to be homogeneous or otherwise are likely to have the design and construction of the geotechnical feature
minimal impact on the foundation performance, and will be affected by the soil and/or rock mass conditions
previous local geotechnical and construction experience in order to optimize the exploration.
has indicated that subsurface conditions are
homogeneous or otherwise are likely to have minimal
impact on the foundation performance, a reduced
exploration program relative to what is specified in
Table 10.4.2-1 may be considered.
If requested by the Owner or as required by law, Borings may need to be plugged due to
boring and penetration test holes shall be plugged. requirements by regulatory agencies having jurisdiction
Laboratory and/or in-situ tests shall be performed to and/or to prevent water contamination and/or surface
determine the strength, deformation, and permeability hazards.
characteristics of soils and/or rocks and their suitability Parameters derived from field tests, e.g., driven pile
for the foundation proposed. resistance based on cone penetrometer testing, may also
be used directly in design calculations based on
empirical relationships. These are sometimes found to
be more reliable than analytical calculations, especially
in familiar ground conditions for which the empirical
relationships are well established.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-3
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
Table 10 .4 .2-1—Minimum Number of Exploration Points and Depth of Exploration (modified after Sabatini
et al ., 2002)
Minimum Number of Exploration Points and
Application Location of Exploration Points Minimum Depth of Exploration
Retaining Walls A minimum of one exploration point for each Investigate to a depth below bottom of wall at least to a
retaining wall. For retaining walls more than depth where stress increase due to estimated foundation
100 ft in length, exploration points spaced every load is less than ten percent of the existing effective
100 to 200 ft with locations alternating from in overburden stress at that depth and between one and two
front of the wall to behind the wall. For times the wall height. Exploration depth should be great
anchored walls, additional exploration points in enough to fully penetrate soft highly compressible soils,
the anchorage zone spaced at 100 to 200 ft. For e.g., peat, organic silt, or soft fine grained soils, into
soil-nailed walls, additional exploration points competent material of suitable bearing capacity, e.g.,
at a distance of 1.0 to 1.5 times the height of the stiff to hard cohesive soil, compact dense cohesionless
wall behind the wall spaced at 100 to 200 ft. soil, or bedrock.
Shallow For substructure, e.g., piers or abutments, Depth of exploration should be:
Foundations widths less than or equal to 100 ft, a minimum
of one exploration point per substructure. For • great enough to fully penetrate unsuitable
substructure widths greater than 100 ft, a foundation soils, e.g., peat, organic silt, or soft fine
minimum of two exploration points per grained soils, into competent material of suitable
substructure. Additional exploration points bearing resistance, e.g., stiff to hard cohesive soil,
should be provided if erratic subsurface or compact to dense cohesionless soil or bedrock ;
conditions are encountered. • at least to a depth where stress increase due to
To reduce design and construction risk due to estimated foundation load is less than ten percent of
subsurface condition variability and the the existing effective overburden stress at that
potential for construction claims, at least one depth; and
exploration per shaft should be considered for
large diameter shafts (e.g., greater than 5 ft in • if bedrock is encountered before the depth required
diameter), especially when shafts are socketed by the second criterion above is achieved,
into bedrock. exploration depth should be great enough to
penetrate a minimum of 10 ft into the bedrock, but
rock exploration should be sufficient to characterize
compressibility of infill material of near-horizontal
to horizontal discontinuities.
Note that for highly variable bedrock conditions, or in
areas where very large boulders are likely, more than
10 ft or rock core may be required to verify that adequate
quality bedrock is present.
Deep For substructure, e.g., bridge piers or In soil, depth of exploration should extend below the
Foundations abutments, widths less than or equal to 100 ft, a anticipated pile or shaft tip elevation a minimum of 20 ft,
minimum of one exploration point per or a minimum of two times the maximum minimum pile
substructure. For substructure widths greater group dimension, whichever is deeper. All borings
than 100 ft, a minimum of two exploration should extend through unsuitable strata such as
points per substructure. Additional exploration unconsolidated fill, peat, highly organic materials, soft
points should be provided if erratic subsurface fine-grained soils, and loose coarse-grained soils to reach
conditions are encountered, especially for the hard or dense materials.
case of shafts socketed into bedrock. For piles bearing on rock, a minimum of 10 ft of rock
To reduce design and construction risk due to core shall be obtained at each exploration point location
subsurface condition variability and the to verify that the boring has not terminated on a boulder.
potential for construction claims, at least one For shafts supported on or extending into rock, a
exploration per shaft should be considered for minimum of 10 ft of rock core, or a length of rock core
large diameter shafts (e.g., greater than 5 ft in equal to at least three times the shaft diameter for
diameter), especially when shafts are socketed isolated shafts or two times the maximum minimum
into bedrock. shaft group dimension, whichever is greater, shall be
extended below the anticipated shaft tip elevation to
determine the physical characteristics of rock within the
zone of foundation influence.
Note that for highly variable bedrock conditions, or in
areas where very large boulders are likely, more than
10 ft or rock core may be required to verify that adequate
quality bedrock is present.
Page 8-B-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
10.4.3—Laboratory Tests – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.4.4—In-Situ Tests – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.4.5—Geophysical Tests – NO CHANGES- NOT
SHOWN
10.4.6—Selection of Design Properties
10.4.6.1—General – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.4.6.2—Soil Strength – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.4.6.3—Soil Deformation – NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-5
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
10.4.6.4—Rock Mass Strength C10.4.6.4
The strength of intact rock material should be Point load strength index tests may be used to assess
determined using the results of unconfined compression intact rock compressive strength in lieu of a full suite of
tests on intact rock cores, splitting tensile tests on intact unconfined compression tests on intact rock cores
rock cores, or point load strength tests on intact provided that the point load test results are calibrated to
specimens of rock. unconfined compression strength tests. Point load
The rock should be classified using the rock mass strength index tests rely on empirical correlations to
rating system (RMR) as described in Table 10.4.6.4-1. intact rock compressive strength. The correlation
For each of the five parameters in the Table, the relative provided in the ASTM point load test procedure (ASTM
rating based on the ranges of values provided should be D 5731) is empirically based and may not be valid for
evaluated. The rock mass rating (RMR) should be the specific rock type under consideration. Therefore, a
determined as the sum of all five relative ratings. The site specific correlation with uniaxial compressive
RMR should be adjusted in accordance with the criteria strength test results is recommended. Point load strength
in Table 10.4.6.4-2. The rock classification should be index tests should not be used for weak to very weak
determined in accordance with Table 10.4.6.4-3. Except rocks (< 2200 psi /15 MPa).
as noted for design of spread footings in rock, for a rock Because of the importance of the discontinuities in
mass that contains a sufficient number of “randomly” rock, and the fact that most rock is much more
oriented discontinuities such that it behaves as an discontinuous than soilBecause the engineering behavior
isotropic mass, and thus its behavior is largely of rock is strongly influenced by the presence and
independent of the direction of the applied loads, the characteristics of discontinuities, emphasis is placed on
strength of the rock mass should first be classified using visual assessment of the rock and the rock mass. The
its geological strength index (GSI) as described in application of a rock mass classification system
Figures 10.4.6.4-1 and 10.4.6.4-2 and then assessed essentially assumes that the rock mass contains a
using the Hoek-Brown failure criterion. sufficient number of “randomly” oriented discontinuities
such that it behaves as an isotropic mass, and thus its
behavior is largely independent of the direction of the
applied loads. It is generally not appropriate to use such
classification systems for rock masses with well defined,
dominant structural fabrics or where the orientation of
discrete, persistent discontinuities controls behavior to
loading.
The GSI was introduced by Hoek et al. (1995) and
Hoek and Brown (1997), and updated by Hoek et al.
(1998) to classify jointed rock masses. Marinos et al.
(2005) provide a comprehensive summary of the
applications and limitations of the GSI for jointed rock
masses (Figure 10.4.6.4-1) and for heterogeneous rock
masses that have been tectonically disturbed (Figure
10.4.6.4-2). Hoek et al. (2005) further distinguish
heterogeneous sedimentary rocks that are not tectonically
disturbed and provide several diagrams for determining
GSI values for various rock mass conditions. In
combination with rock type and uniaxial compressive
strength of intact rock (qu), GSI provides a practical
means to assess rock mass strength and rock mass
modulus for foundation design using the Hoek-Brown
failure criterion (Hoek et al. 2002).
The design procedures for spread footings in rock
provided in Article 10.6.3.2 have been developed using
the rock mass rating (RMR) system. For design of
foundations in rock in Articles 10.6.2.4 and 10.6.3.2,
classification of the rock mass should be according to the
RMR system. For additional information on the RMR
system, see Sabatini et al. (2002).
Other methods for assessing rock mass strength,
including in-situ tests or other visual systems that have
proven to yield accurate results may be used in lieu of
the specified method.
Page 8-B-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
Table 10 .4 .6 .4-1—Geomechanics Classification of Rock Masses
Parameter Ranges of Values
Point load >175 ksf 85–175 45–85 20–45 For this low range, uniaxial
Strength of strength index ksf ksf ksf compressive test is preferred
intact rock Uniaxial >4320 ksf 2160– 1080– 520– 215–520 70–215 20–70 ksf
1 material compressive 4320 ksf 2160 ksf 1080 ksf ksf ksf
strength
Relative Rating 15 12 7 4 2 1 0
Drill core quality RQD 90% to 100% 75% to 90% 50% to 75% 25% to 50% <25%
2
Relative Rating 20 17 13 8 3
Spacing of joints >10 ft 3–10 ft 1–3 ft 2 in.–1 ft <2 in.
3
Relative Rating 30 25 20 10 5
• Very rough • Slightly rough • Slightly • Slicken-sided • Soft gouge
surfaces surfaces rough surfaces or >0.2 in.
• Not • Separation surfaces • Gouge <0.2 in. thick or
continuous <0.05 in. • Separation thick or • Joints open
Condition of joints <0.05 in. >0.2 in.
• No separation • Hard joint wall • Joints open
4 • Hard joint rock • Soft joint 0.05–0.2 in. • Continuous
wall rock wall rock • Continuous joints
joints
Relative Rating 25 20 12 6 0
5 Groundwater Inflow per None <400 gal./hr. 400–2000 gal./hr. >2000 gal./hr.
conditions 30 ft tunnel
(use one of the length
three evaluation
criteria as
appropriate to
the method of
exploration)
Ratio = joint 0 0.0–0.2 0.2–0.5 >0.5
water
pressure/
major
principal
stress
General Completely Dry Moist only Water under Severe water
Conditions (interstitial water) moderate pressure problems
Relative Rating 10 7 4 0
Table 10 .4 .6 .4-2—Geomechanics Rating Adjustment for Joint Orientations
Strike and Dip Orientations Very
of Joints Favorable Favorable Fair Unfavorable Very Unfavorable
Tunnels 0 –2 –5 –10 –12
Ratings Foundations 0 –2 –7 –15 –25
Slopes 0 –5 –25 –50 –60
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-7
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
Table 10.4.6.4-3—Geomechanics Rock Mass Classes Determined from Total Ratings
RMR Rating 100–81 80–61 60–41 40–21 <20
Class No. I II III IV V
Description Very good rock Good Fair rock Poor Very poor rock
rock rock
Figure 10.4.6.4-1—Determination of GSI for Jointed Rock Mass (Hoek and Marinos, 2000)
Page 8-B-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
Figure 10.4.6.4-2—Determination of GSI for Tectonically Deformed Heterogeneous Rock Masses (Marinos and
Hoek 2000)
The shear strength of fracturedjointed rock masses This method was developed by Hoek (1983) and
should be evaluated using the Hoek and Brown Hoek- Hoek and Brown (1988, 1997). Note that the
Brown failure criterion (Hoek et al., 2002). This instantaneous cohesion at a discrete value of normal
nonlinear strength criterion is expressed in its general stress can be taken as:
form as: criteria in which the shear strength is
represented as a curved envelope that is a function of the ci = τ − σ′n tan φ′i (C10.4.6.4-1)
uniaxial compressive strength of the intact rock, qu, and
two dimensionless constants m and s. The values of m The instantaneous cohesion and instantaneous
and s as defined in Table 10.4.6.4-4 should be used. friction angle define a conventional linear Mohr
The shear strength of the rock mass should be envelope at the normal stress under consideration. For
determined as: normal stresses significantly different than that used to
qu compute the instantaneous values, the resulting shear
τ = ( cot φ′i − cos φ′i ) m (10.4.6.4-1)
8 strength will be unconservative. If there is considerable
in which: variation in the effective normal stress in the zone of
−1 concern, consideration should be given to subdividing
the zone into areas where the normal stress is relative
2 -1 2
−3
φ′i =tan 4 h cos 30 + 0.33 sin h 2 − 1
−1
constant and assigning separate strength parameters to
each zone. Alternatively, the methods of Hoek (1983)
may be used to compute average values for the range of
16 ( mσ′n + squ ) normal stresses expected.
h= 1 + 2
(3m qu )
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-9
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
where:
τ = the shear strength of the rock mass (ksf)
φ′i = the instantaneous friction angle of the rock
mass (degrees)
qu = average unconfined compressive strength
of rock core (ksf)
σ′n = effective normal stress (ksf)
m, s = constants from Table 10.4.6.4-4 (dim)
a
σ 3′ (10.4.6.4-1)
σ 1′ = σ 3′ + qu mb + s
qu
in which:
GSI −100
s = e 9 −3 D
(10.4.6.4-2)
1 1 15
− GSI −20
a= + e − e 3 (10.4.6.4-3)
2 6
where:
e = 2.718 (natural or Naperian log base)
D = disturbance factor (dim)
σ'1 and σ'3 = principal effective stresses (ksf)
qu = average unconfined compressive
strength of rock core (ksf)
mb, s, and a = empirically determined parameters
The value of the constant mi should be
estimated from Table 10.4.6.4-1, based on
lithology. Relationships between GSI and the
parameters mb, s, and a, according to Hoek et
al. (2002) are as follows:
GSI −100
mb = mi e 28−14 D (10.4.6.4-4)
Page 8-B-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
10
Table 10 .4 .6 .4-4—Approximate Relationship between Rock-Mass Quality and Material Constants Used in
Defining Nonlinear Strength (Hoek and Brown, 1988)
Rock Type
A = Carbonate rocks with well developed crystal
cleavage—dolomite, limestone and marble
B = Lithified argrillaceous rocks—mudstone,
siltstone, shale and slate (normal to cleavage)
Constants
C = Arenaceous rocks with strong crystals and poorly
Rock Quality developed crystal cleavage—sandstone and
quartzite
D = Fine grained polyminerallic igneous crystalline
rocks—andesite, dolerite, diabase and rhyolite
E = Coarse grained polyminerallic igneous &
metamorphic crystalline rocks—amphibolite,
gabbro gneiss, granite, norite, quartz-diorite
A B C D E
INTACT ROCK SAMPLES
Laboratory size specimens free m 7.00 10.00 15.00 17.00 25.00
from discontinuities. s 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
CSIR rating: RMR = 100
VERY GOOD QUALITY ROCK
MASS m 2.40 3.43 5.14 5.82 8.567
Tightly interlocking undisturbed s 0.082 0.082 0.082 0.082 0.082
rock with unweathered joints at 3–
10 ft
CSIR rating: RMR = 85
GOOD QUALITY ROCK MASS
Fresh to slightly weathered rock, m 0.575 0.821 1.231 1.395 2.052
slightly disturbed with joints at 3– s 0.0029 0.00293 0.00293 0.00293 0.00293
10 ft 3
CSIR rating: RMR = 65
FAIR QUALITY ROCK MASS
Several sets of moderately m 0.128 0.183 0.275 0.311 0.458
weathered joints spaced at 1–3 ft s 0.0000 0.00009 0.00009 0.00009 0.00009
CSIR rating: RMR = 44 9
POOR QUALITY ROCK MASS
Numerous weathered joints at 2 to m 0.029 0.041 0.061 0.069 0.102
12 in.; some gouge. Clean s 3 × 10 – 3 × 10 –6 3 × 10 –6 3 × 10 –6 3 × 10 –6
6
compacted waste rock.
CSIR rating: RMR = 23
VERY POOR QUALITY ROCK
MASS m 0.007 0.010 0.015 0.017 0.025
Numerous heavily weathered s 1 × 10 – 1 × 10 –7 1 × 10 –7 1 × 10 –7 1 × 10 –7
7
joints spaced <2 in. with gouge.
Waste rock with fines.
CSIR rating: RMR = 3
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-11
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
11
Table 10.4.6.4-1—Values of the Constant mi by Rock Group (after Marinos and Hoek 2000; with updated values from
Rocscience, Inc., 2007)
Rock Class Group Texture
type Coarse Medium Fine Very fine
Conglomerate Sandstone Siltstone Claystone
(21 + 3) 17 + 4 7+2 4+2
Clastic Breccia Greywacke Shale
(19 + 5) (18 + 3) (6 + 2)
SEDIMENTARY
Marl
(7 + 2)
Crystalline Sparitic Micritic Dolomite
Carbonates Limestone Limestone Limestone (9 + 3)
(12 + 3) (10 + 5) (8 + 3)
Non-Clastic Gypsum Anhydrite
Evaporites
10 + 2 12 + 2
Chalk
Organic
7+2
Marble Hornfels Quartzite
9+3 (19 + 4)) 20 + 3
METAMORPHIC
Non Foliated
Metasandstone
(19 + 3)
Migmatite Amphibolite Gneiss
Slightly foliated
(29 + 3) 26 + 6 28 + 5
Schist Phyllite Slate
Foliated*
(10 + 3) (7 + 3) 7+4
Granite Diorite
32 + 3 25 + 5
Light
Granodiorite
(29 + 3)
Plutonic
Gabbro Dolerite
27 + 3 (16 + 5)
Dark
Norite
IGNEOUS
20 + 5
Porphyries Diabase Peridotite
Hypabyssal
(20 + 5) (15 + 5) (25 + 5)
Rhyolite Dacite
(25 + 5) (25 + 3))
Lava
Andesite Basalt
Volcanic
25 + 5 (25 + 5)
Agglomerate Volcanic breccia Tuff
Pyroclastic
(19 + 3) (19 + 5) (13 + 5)
Disturbance to the foundation excavation The disturbance factor, D, ranges from 0
caused by the rock removal methodology (undisturbed) to 1 (highly disturbed), and is an
adjustment for the rock mass disturbance induced by the
should be considered through the disturbance excavation method. Suggested values for various tunnel
factor D in Eqs. 10.4.6.4-2 through 10.4.6.4-4. and slope excavations can be found in Hoek et al.
(2002). However, these values may not directly
applicable to foundations. If using blasting techniques
to remove the rock in a shaft foundation, due to its
confined state, a disturbance factor approaching 1.0
should be considered, as the blast energy will tend to
radiate laterally into the intact rock, potentially
disturbing the rock. If using rock coring techniques,
much less disturbance is likely and a disturbance factor
approaching 0 may be considered. If using a down hole
hammer to break up the rock, the disturbance factor is
likely between these two extremes.
Page 8-B-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
12
Where it is necessary to evaluate the strength of a The range of typical friction angles provided in
single discontinuity or set of discontinuities, the strength Table C10.4.6.4-1 may be used in evaluating measured
along the discontinuity should be determined as follows: values of friction angles for smooth joints.
• For smooth discontinuities, the shear strength is
represented by a friction angle of the parent rock
material. To evaluate the friction angle of this type
of discontinuity surface for design, direct shear tests
on samples should be performed. Samples should
be formed in the laboratory by cutting samples of
intact core or, if possible, on actual discontinuities
using an oriented shear box.
• For rough discontinuities the nonlinear criterion of
Barton (1976) should be applied or, if possible,
direct shear tests should be performed on actual
discontinuities using an oriented shear box.
Table C10.4.6.4-1—Typical Ranges of Friction Angles for
Smooth Joints in a Variety of Rock Types (modified after
Barton, 1976; Jaeger and Cook, 1976)
Friction Typical
Rock Class Angle Range Rock Types
Low Friction 20–27° Schists (high
mica
content),
shale, marl
Medium 27–34° Sandstone,
Friction siltstone,
chalk,
gneiss, slate
High 34–40° Basalt,
Friction granite,
limestone,
conglomerat
e
Note: Values assume no infilling and little relative movement
between joint faces.
When a major discontinuity with a significant
thickness of infilling is to be investigated, the shear
strength will be governed by the strength of the infilling
material and the past and expected future displacement
of the discontinuity. Refer to Sabatini et al. (2002) for
detailed procedures to evaluate infilled discontinuities.
10.4.6.5—Rock Mass Deformation C10.4.6.5
The elastic modulus of a rock mass (Em) shall be Table 10.4.6.5-1 was developed by O’Neill
taken as the lesser of the intact modulus of a sample of and Reese (1999) based on a reanalysis of the
rock core (ER) or the modulus determined from one of
the following equations: Table 10.4.6.5-1.
data presented by Carter and Kulhawy (1988)
for the purposes of estimating side resistance
of shafts in rock. Methods for establishing
design values of Em include:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-13
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
13
RMR −10
Em = 145 10 40
(10.4.6.5-1) • Empirical correlations that relate Em to
strength or modulus values of intact rock
(qu or ER) and GSI
where:
Em = Elastic modulus of the rock mass (ksi) • Estimates based on previous experience in
similar rocks or back-calculated from load
Em ≤ Ei tests
Ei = Elastic modulus of intact rock (ksi)
• In-situ testing such as pressuremeter test
RMR = Rock mass rating specified in
Article 10.4.6.4. Empirical correlations that predict rock mass
or modulus (Em) from GSI and properties of intact rock,
either uniaxial compressive strength (qu) or intact
Em modulus (ER), are presented in Table 10.4.6.5-1. The
Em = Ei (10.4.6.5-2) recommended approach is to measure uniaxial
Ei compressive strength and modulus of intact rock in
laboratory tests on specimens prepared from rock core.
Values of GSI should be determined for representative
zones of rock for the particular foundation design being
considered. The correlation equations in Table 10.4.6.5-
1 should then be used to evaluate modulus and its
variation with depth. If pressuremeter tests are
conducted, it is recommended that measured modulus
values be calibrated to the values calculated using the
relationships in Table 10.4.6.5-1.
Preliminary estimates of the elastic modulus of
intact rock may be made from Table C10.4.6.5-1. Note
that some of the rock types identified in the Table are
not present in the U.S.
It is extremely important to use the elastic modulus
of the rock mass for computation of displacements of
rock materials under applied loads. Use of the intact
modulus will result in unrealistic and unconservative
estimates.
where:
Em = Elastic modulus of the rock mass
(ksi)
Em/Ei = Reduction factor determined from
Table 10.4.6.5-1 (dim)
Ei = Elastic modulus of intact rock from tests
(ksi)
For critical or large structures, determination of
rock mass modulus (Em) using in-situ tests may be
warranted should be considered. Refer to Sabatini et al.
(2002) for descriptions of suitable in-situ tests.
Table 10 .4 .6 .5-1—Estimation of Em Based on RQD (after O’Neill and Reese, 1999)
RQD Em/Ei
(percent) Closed Joints Open Joints
Page 8-B-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
14
RQD Em/Ei
(percent) Closed Joints Open Joints
100 1.00 0.60
70 0.70 0.10
50 0.15 0.10
20 0.05 0.05
Table 10.4.6.5-1—Estimation of Em Based on GSI
Expression Notes/Remarks Reference
GSI −10
qu for qu < 100 MPa
E m (GPa) = 10 40
Accounts for rocks with Hoek and Brown
100 qu < 100 MPa; note qu in (1997); Hoek et al.
GSI −10
MPa (2002)
E m (GPa) = 10 40 for qu > 100 MPa
E GSI Reduction factor on intact
E m = R e 21.7 Yang (2006)
100 modulus, based on GSI
Notes: ER = modulus of intact rock, Em = equivalent rock mass modulus, GSI = geological strength index,
qu = uniaxial compressive strength. 1 MPa = 20.9 ksf.
Table C10 .4 .6 .5-1—Summary of Elastic Moduli for Intact Rock (modified after Kulhawy, 1978)
No. of Elastic Modulus, EiER Standard
No. of Rock (ksi ×103) Deviation
Rock Type Values Types Maximum Minimum Mean (ksi × 103)
Granite 26 26 14.5 0.93 7.64 3.55
Diorite 3 3 16.2 2.48 7.45 6.19
Gabbro 3 3 12.2 9.8 11.0 0.97
Diabase 7 7 15.1 10.0 12.8 1.78
Basalt 12 12 12.2 4.20 8.14 2.60
Quartzite 7 7 12.8 5.29 9.59 2.32
Marble 14 13 10.7 0.58 6.18 2.49
Gneiss 13 13 11.9 4.13 8.86 2.31
Slate 11 2 3.79 0.35 1.39 0.96
Schist 13 12 10.0 0.86 4.97 3.18
Phyllite 3 3 2.51 1.25 1.71 0.57
Sandstone 27 19 5.68 0.09 2.13 1.19
Siltstone 5 5 4.76 0.38 2.39 1.65
Shale 30 14 5.60 0.001 1.42 1.45
Limestone 30 30 13.0 0.65 5.7 3.73
Dolostone 17 16 11.4 0.83 4.22 3.44
Poisson’s ratio for rock should be determined from Where tests on rock core are not practical, Poisson’s
tests on intact rock core. ratio may be estimated from Table C10.4.6.5-2.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-15
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
15
Table C10 .4 .6 .5-2—Summary of Poisson's Ratio for Intact Rock (modified after Kulhawy, 1978)
No. of Poisson's Ratio, ν Standard
No. of Rock Deviation
Rock Type Values Types Maximum Minimum Mean
Granite 22 22 0.39 0.09 0.20 0.08
Gabbro 3 3 0.20 0.16 0.18 0.02
Diabase 6 6 0.38 0.20 0.29 0.06
Basalt 11 11 0.32 0.16 0.23 0.05
Quartzite 6 6 0.22 0.08 0.14 0.05
Marble 5 5 0.40 0.17 0.28 0.08
Gneiss 11 11 0.40 0.09 0.22 0.09
Schist 12 11 0.31 0.02 0.12 0.08
Sandstone 12 9 0.46 0.08 0.20 0.11
Siltstone 3 3 0.23 0.09 0.18 0.06
Shale 3 3 0.18 0.03 0.09 0.06
Limestone 19 19 0.33 0.12 0.23 0.06
Dolostone 5 5 0.35 0.14 0.29 0.08
10.4.6.6—Erodibility of Rock - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.5—LIMIT STATES AND RESISTANCE
FACTORS
10.5.1—General – NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.5.2—Service Limit States – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.5.3—Strength Limit States – NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.5.4—Extreme Events Limit States – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.5.5—Resistance Factors
10.5.5.1—Service Limit States – NO CHANGES
– NOT SHOWN
10.5.5.2—Strength Limit States
10.5.5.2.1—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.5.5.2.2—Spread Footings - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.5.5.2.3—Driven Piles - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.5.5.2.4—Drilled Shafts C10.5.5.2.4
Resistance factors shall be selected based on the The resistance factors in Table 10.5.5.2.4-1 were
Page 8-B-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
16
method used for determining the nominal shaft developed using either statistical analysis of shaft load
resistance. When selecting a resistance factor for shafts tests combined with reliability theory (Paikowsky et al.,
in clays or other easily disturbed formations, local 2004), fitting to allowable stress design (ASD), or both.
experience with the geologic formations and with Where the two approaches resulted in a significantly
typical shaft construction practices shall be considered. different resistance factor, engineering judgment was
Where the resistance factors provided in used to establish the final resistance factor, considering
Table 10.5.5.2.4-1 are to be applied to a single shaft the quality and quantity of the available data used in the
supporting a bridge pier, the resistance factor values in calibration. The available reliability theory calibrations
the Table should be reduced by 20 percent. Where the were conducted for the Reese and O’Neill (1988)
resistance factor is decreased in this manner, the ηR method, with the exception of shafts in cohesive
factor provided in Article 1.3.4 shall not be increased to intermediate geo-materials (IGMs), in which case the
address the lack of foundation redundancy. O’Neill and Reese (1999) method was used. In Article
The number of static load tests to be conducted to 10.8, the O’Neill and Reese (1999) method is
justify the resistance factors provided in Table 10.5.5.2.4-1 recommended. See Allen (2005) for a more detailed
shall be based on the variability in the properties and explanation on the development of the resistance factors
geologic stratification of the site to which the test results for shaft foundation design, and the implications of the
are to be applied. A site, for the purpose of assessing differences in these two shaft design methods on the
variability, shall be defined in accordance with selection of resistance factors.
Article 10.5.5.2.3.as a project site, or a portion of it, The information in the commentary to
where the subsurface conditions can be characterized as Article 10.5.5.2.3 regarding the number of load tests to
geologically similar in terms of subsurface stratification, conduct considering site variability applies to drilled
i.e., sequence, thickness, and geologic history of strata, shafts as well.
the engineering properties of the strata, and groundwater For single shafts, lower resistance factors are
conditions. specified to address the lack of redundancy. See
Article C10.5.5.2.3 regarding the use of ηR.
Where installation criteria are established based on
one or more static load tests, the potential for site
variability should be considered. The number of load
tests required should be established based on the
characterization of site subsurface conditions by the
field and laboratory exploration and testing program.
One or more static load tests should be performed per
site to justify the resistance factor selection as discussed
in Article C10.5.5.2.3, applied to drilled shafts installed
within the site. See Article C10.5.5.2.3 for details on
assessing site variability as applied to selection and use
of load tests.
Site variability is the most important consideration
in evaluating the limits of a site for design purposes.
Defining the limits of a site therefore requires sufficient
knowledge of the subsurface conditions in terms of
general geology, stratigraphy, index and engineering
properties of soil and rock, and groundwater conditions.
This implies that the extent of the exploration program
is sufficient to define the subsurface conditions and their
variation across the site.
A designer may choose to design drilled shaft
foundations for strength limit states based on a
calculated nominal resistance, with the expectation that
load testing results will verify that value. The question
arises whether to use the resistance factor associated
with the design equation or the higher value allowed for
load testing. This choice should be based on engineering
judgment. The potential risk is that axial resistance
measured by load testing may be lower than the nominal
resistance used for design, which could require
increased shaft dimensions that may be problematic,
depending upon the capability of the drilled shaft
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-17
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
17
equipment mobilized for the project and other project-
specific factors.
For the specific case of shafts in clay, the resistance
factor recommended by Paikowsky et al. (2004) is much
lower than the recommendation from Barker et al.
(1991). Since the shaft design method for clay is nearly
the same for both the 1988 and 1999 methods, a
resistance factor that represents the average of the two
resistance factor recommendations is provided in
Table 10.5.5.2.4-1. This difference may point to the
differences in local geologic formations and local
construction practices, pointing to the importance of
taking such issues into consideration when selecting
resistance factors, especially for shafts in clay.
Cohesive IGMs are materials that are transitional
between soil and rock in terms of their strength and
compressibility, such as residual soils, glacial tills, or
very weak rock. See Article C10.8.2.2.3 for a more
detailed definition of an IGM.clay shales or mudstones
with undrained shear strength between 5 and 50 ksf.
Since the mobilization of shaft base resistance is
less certain than side resistance due to the greater
deformation required to mobilize the base resistance, a
lower resistance factor relative to the side resistance is
provided for the base resistance in Table 10.5.5.2.4-1.
O’Neill and Reese (1999) make further comment that
the recommended resistance factor for tip resistance in
sand is applicable for conditions of high quality control
on the properties of drilling slurries and base cleanout
procedures. If high quality control procedures are not
used, the resistance factor for the O’Neill and Reese
(1999) method for tip resistance in sand should be also
be reduced. The amount of reduction should be based on
engineering judgment.
Shaft compression load test data should be
extrapolated to production shafts that are not load tested
as specified in Article 10.8.3.5.6. There is no way to
verify shaft resistance for the untested production shafts,
other than through good construction inspection and
visual observation of the soil or rock encountered in
each shaft. Because of this, extrapolation of the shaft
load test results to the untested production shafts may
introduce some uncertainty. Statistical data are not
available to quantify this at this time. Historically,
resistance factors higher than 0.70, or their equivalent
safety factor in previous practice, have not been used for
shaft foundations. If the recommendations in
Paikowsky, et al. (2004) are used to establish a
resistance factor when shaft static load tests are
conducted, in consideration of site variability, the
resistance factors recommended by Paikowsky, et al. for
this case should be reduced by 0.05, and should be less
than or equal to 0.70 as specified in Table 10.5.5.2.4-1.
This issue of uncertainty in how the load test is
applied to shafts not load tested is even more acute for
shafts subjected to uplift load tests, as failure in uplift
can be more abrupt than failure in compression. Hence,
a resistance factor of 0.60 for the use of uplift load test
Page 8-B-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
18
results is recommended.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-19
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
19
Table 10 .5 .5 .2 .4-1—Resistance Factors for Geotechnical Resistance of Drilled Shafts
Method/Soil/Condition Resistance Factor
Side resistance in clay α-method 0.45
(O’Neill and Reese, 1999 Brown et
al., 2010)
Tip resistance in clay Total Stress 0.40
(O’Neill and Reese, 1999 Brown et
al., 2010)
Side resistance in sand β-method 0.55
(O’Neill and Reese, 1999 Brown et
al., 2010)
Tip resistance in sand O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et 0.50
Nominal Axial al., (2010)
Compressive Side resistance in cohesive O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et 0.60
IGMs al., (2010)
Resistance of Tip resistance in cohesive O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et 0.55
Single-Drilled IGMs al., (2010)
Shafts, ϕstat Side resistance in rock Horvath and Kenney (1979) 0.55
O’Neill and Reese (1999)
Kulhawy et al. (2005)
Brown et al. (2010)
Side resistance in rock Carter and Kulhawy (1988) 0.50
Tip resistance in rock Canadian Geotechnical Society 0.50
(1985)
Pressuremeter Method (Canadian
Geotechnical Society, 1985)
O’Neill and Reese (1999)Brown et
al. (2010)
Block Failure, Clay 0.55
ϕb1
Clay α-method 0.35
(O’Neill and Reese, 1999
Brown et al., 2010)
Uplift Sand β-method 0.45
Resistance of (O’Neill and Reese, 1999
Single-Drilled Brown et al., 2010)
Shafts, ϕup Rock Horvath and Kenney (1979) 0.40
O’Neill and Reese (1999)
Kulhawy et al. (2005)
Brown et al. (2010)
Group Uplift 0.45
Sand and clay
Resistance, ϕug
Horizontal All materials 1.0
Geotechnical
Resistance of
Single Shaft or
Shaft Group
Static Load Test 0.70
(compression), All Materials
ϕload
Static Load Test All Materials 0.60
(uplift), ϕupload
Page 8-B-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
20
10.5.5.2.5—Micropiles - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.5.5.3—Extreme Limit States – NO CHANGES
– NOT SHOWN
10.6—SPREAD FOOTINGS
10.6.1—General Considerations – NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.6.2—Service Limit State Design
10.6.2.1—General – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.6.2.2—Tolerable Movements – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.2.3—Loads – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.6.2.4—Settlement Analyses
10.6.2.4.1—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.6.2.4.2—Settlement of Footings on Cohesionless
Soils - NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.2.4.3—Settlement of Footings on Cohesive
Soils - NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.2.4.4—Settlement of Footings on Rock C10.6.2.4.4
For footings bearing on fair to very good rock, In most cases, it is sufficient to determine
according to the Geomechanics Classification system, as settlement using the average bearing stress under the
defined in Article 10.4.6.4, and designed in accordance footing.
with the provisions of this Section, elastic settlements Where the foundations are subjected to a very large
may generally be assumed to be less than 0.5 in. When load or where settlement tolerance may be small,
elastic settlements of this magnitude are unacceptable or settlements of footings on rock may be estimated using
when the rock is not competent, an analysis of elastic theory. The stiffness of the rock mass should be
settlement based on rock mass characteristics shall be used in such analyses.
made. The accuracy with which settlements can be
Where rock is broken or jointed (relative rating of estimated by using elastic theory is dependent on the
ten or less for RQD and joint spacing), the rock joint accuracy of the estimated rock mass modulus, Em. In
condition is poor (relative rating of ten or less) or the some cases, the value of Em can be estimated through
criteria for fair to very good rock are not met, a empirical correlation with the value of the modulus of
settlement analysis should be conducted, and the elasticity for the intact rock between joints. For unusual
influence of rock type, condition of discontinuities, and or poor rock mass conditions, it may be necessary to
degree of weathering shall be considered in the determine the modulus from in-situ tests, such as plate
settlement analysis. loading and pressuremeter tests.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-21
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
21
The elastic settlement of footings on broken or
jointed rock, in feet, should be taken as:
• For circular (or square) footings:
rI p
=ρ qo 1 − ν 2( ) 144 E (10.6.2.4.4-1)
m
in which:
Ip =
( π) (10.6.2.4.4-2)
βz
• For rectangular footings:
BI p
=ρ qo 1 − ν 2( ) 144 E (10.6.2.4.4-3)
m
in which:
( L / B)
1/ 2
Ip = (10.6.2.4.4-4)
βz
where:
qo = applied vertical stress at base of loaded area
(ksf)
ν = Poisson's Ratio (dim)
r = radius of circular footing or B/2 for square
footing (ft)
Ip = influence coefficient to account for rigidity and
dimensions of footing (dim)
Em = rock mass modulus (ksi)
βz = factor to account for footing shape and rigidity
(dim)
Values of Ip should be computed using the βz values
presented in Table 10.6.2.4.2-1 for rigid footings. Where
the results of laboratory testing are not available, values
of Poisson's ratio, ν, for typical rock types may be taken
as specified in Table C10.4.6.5-2. Determination of the
rock mass modulus, Em, should be based on the methods
described in Article 10.4.6.5 Sabatini (2002).
The magnitude of consolidation and secondary
settlements in rock masses containing soft seams or
other material with time-dependent settlement
characteristics should be estimated by applying
procedures specified in Article 10.6.2.4.3.
10.6.2.5—Overall Stability – NO CHANGES –
Page 8-B-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
22
NOT SHOWN
10.6.2.6—Bearing Resistance at the Service
Limit State
10.6.2.6.1—Presumptive Values for Bearing
Resistance – NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.2.6.2—Semiempirical Procedures for Bearing
Resistance
Bearing resistance on rock shall be determined
using empirical correlation to the Geomechanic Rock
Mass Rating System, RMR, as specified in
Article 10.4.6.4. Local experience should be considered
in the use of these semi-empirical procedures.
If the recommended value of presumptive bearing
resistance exceeds either the unconfined compressive
strength of the rock or the nominal resistance of the
concrete, the presumptive bearing resistance shall be
taken as the lesser of the unconfined compressive
strength of the rock or the nominal resistance of the
concrete. The nominal resistance of concrete shall be
taken as 0.3 f ′c.
10.6.3—Strength Limit State Design
10.6.3.1—Bearing Resistance of Soil – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.3.2—Bearing Resistance of Rock
10.6.3.2.1—General C10.6.3.2.1
The methods used for design of footings on rock The design of spread footings bearing on rock is
shall consider the presence, orientation, and condition of frequently controlled by either overall stability, i.e., the
discontinuities, weathering profiles, and other similar orientation and conditions of discontinuities, or load
profiles as they apply at a particular site. eccentricity considerations. The designer should verify
For footings on competent rock, reliance on simple adequate overall stability at the service limit state and
and direct analyses based on uniaxial compressive rock size the footing based on eccentricity requirements at the
strengths and RQD may be applicable. For footings on strength limit state before checking nominal bearing
less competent rock, more detailed investigations and resistance at both the service and strength limit states.
analyses shall be performed to account for the effects of
weathering and the presence and condition of
discontinuities.
The designer shall judge the competency of a rock The design procedures for foundations in rock have
mass by taking into consideration both the nature of the been developed using the RMR rock mass rating system.
intact rock and the orientation and condition of Classification of the rock mass should be according to
discontinuities of the overall rock mass. Where engineering the RMR system. For additional information on the
judgment does not verify the presence of competent rock, RMR system, see Sabatini et al. (2002).
the competency of the rock mass should be verified using
the procedures for RMR rating in Article 10.4.6.4.
10.6.3.2.2—Semiempirical Procedures - NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.3.2.3—Analytic Method - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-23
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
23
10.6.3.2.4—Load Test - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.6.3.3—Eccentric Load Limitations – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.3.4—Failure by Sliding – NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.6.4—Extreme Event Limit State Design – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.6.5—Structural Design – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.7—DRIVEN PILES – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8—DRILLED SHAFTS
10.8.1—General
10.8.1.1—Scope - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.1.2—Shaft Spacing, Clearance, and
Embedment into Cap - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.1.3—Shaft Diameter and Enlarged Bases -
NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.1.4—Battered Shafts - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.8.1.5—Drilled Shaft Resistance C10.8.1.5
Drilled shafts shall be designed to have adequate The drilled shaft design process is discussed in
axial and structural resistances, tolerable settlements, detail in Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and
and tolerable lateral displacements. Design Methods (O’Neill and Reese, 1999 Brown, et al.,
2010).
Page 8-B-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
24
The axial resistance of drilled shafts shall be The performance of drilled shaft foundations can be
determined through a suitable combination of subsurface greatly affected by the method of construction,
investigations, laboratory and/or in-situ tests, analytical particularly side resistance. The designer should
methods, and load tests, with reference to the history of consider the effects of ground and groundwater
past performance. Consideration shall also be given to: conditions on shaft construction operations and
delineate, where necessary, the general method of
• The difference between the resistance of a single construction to be followed to ensure the expected
shaft and that of a group of shafts; performance. Because shafts derive their resistance from
side and tip resistance, which is a function of the
• The resistance of the underlying strata to support
condition of the materials in direct contact with the
the load of the shaft group;
shaft, it is important that the construction procedures be
• The effects of constructing the shaft(s) on adjacent consistent with the material conditions assumed in the
structures; design. Softening, loosening, or other changes in soil
and rock conditions caused by the construction method
• The possibility of scour and its effect;
could result in a reduction in shaft resistance and an
• The transmission of forces, such as downdrag increase in shaft displacement. Therefore, evaluation of
forces, from consolidating soil; the effects of the shaft construction procedure on
resistance should be considered an inherent aspect of the
• Minimum shaft penetration necessary to satisfy the
design. Use of slurries, varying shaft diameters, and post
requirements caused by uplift, scour, downdrag,
grouting can also affect shaft resistance.
settlement, liquefaction, lateral loads and seismic
Soil parameters should be varied systematically to
conditions;
model the range of anticipated conditions. Both vertical
• Satisfactory behavior under service loads; and lateral resistance should be evaluated in this
manner.
• Drilled shaft nominal structural resistance; and
Procedures that may affect axial or lateral shaft
• Long-term durability of the shaft in service, i.e., resistance include, but are not limited to, the following:
corrosion and deterioration.
Resistance factors for shaft axial resistance for the • Artificial socket roughening, if included in the
strength limit state shall be as specified in design nominal axial resistance assumptions.
Table 10.5.5.2.4-1. • Removal of temporary casing where the design is
The method of construction may affect the shaft dependent on concrete-to-soil adhesion.
axial and lateral resistance. The shaft design parameters
shall take into account the likely construction • The use of permanent casing.
methodologies used to install the shaft. • Use of tooling that produces a uniform cross-section
where the design of the shaft to resist lateral loads
cannot tolerate the change in stiffness if telescoped
casing is used.
It should be recognized that the design procedures
provided in these Specifications assume compliance to
construction specifications that will produce a high
quality shaft. Performance criteria should be included in
the construction specifications that require:
• Shaft bottom cleanout criteria,
• Appropriate means to prevent side wall movement
or failure (caving) such as temporary casing, slurry,
or a combination of the two,
• Slurry maintenance requirements including
minimum slurry head requirements, slurry testing
requirements, and maximum time the shaft may be
left open before concrete placement.
If for some reason one or more of these
performance criteria are not met, the design should be
reevaluated and the shaft repaired or replaced as
necessary.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-25
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
25
10.8.1.6—Determination of Shaft Loads
10.8.1.6.1—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.1.6.2—Downdrag C10.8.1.6.2
The provisions of Articles 10.7.1.6.2 and 3.11.8 See commentary to Articles 10.7.1.6.2 and 3.11.8.
shall apply for determination of load due to downdrag. Downdrag loads may be estimated using the α-
For shafts with tip bearing in a dense stratum or method, as specified in Article 10.8.3.5.1b, for
rock where design of the shaft is structurally calculating to calculate negative shaft resistance friction.
controlled,and downdrag shall be considered at the As with positive shaft resistance, the top 5.0 ft and a
strength and extreme event limit states. bottom length taken as one shaft diameters shaft length
For shafts with tip bearing in soil, downdrag shall assumed to not contribute to nominal side resistance
not be considered at the strength and extreme limit states should also be assumed to not contribute to downdrag
if settlement of the shaft is less than failure criterion. loads.
When using the α-method, an allowance should be
made for a possible increase in the undrained shear
strength as consolidation occurs. Downdrag loads may
also come from cohesionless soils above settling
cohesive soils, requiring granular soil friction methods
be used in such zones to estimate downdrag loads. The
downdrag caused by settling cohesionless soils may be
estimated using the β method presented in Article
10.8.3.5.2.
Downdrag occurs in response to relative downward
deformation of the surrounding soil to that of the shaft,
and may not exist if downward movement of the drilled
shaft in response to axial compression forces exceeds
the vertical deformation of the soil. The response of a
drilled shaft to downdrag in combination with the other
forces acting at the head of the shaft therefore is
complex and a realistic evaluation of actual limit states
that may occur requires careful consideration of two
issues: (1) drilled shaft load-settlement behavior, and (2)
the time period over which downdrag occurs relative to
the time period over which nonpermanent components
of load occur. When these factors are taken into account,
it is appropriate to consider different downdrag forces
for evaluation of geotechnical strength limit states than
for structural strength limit states. These issues are
addressed in Brown et al. (2010).
10.8.1.6.3—Uplift - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.2—Service Limit State Design
10.8.2.1—Tolerable Movements - NO CHANGES
– NOT SHOWN
10.8.2.2—Settlement
10.8.2.2.1—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
Page 8-B-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
26
SHOWN
10.8.2.2.2—Settlement of Single-Drilled Shaft C10.8.2.2.2
The settlement of single-drilled shafts shall be O'Neill and Reese (1999) have summarized load-
estimated in consideration of as a sum of the following: settlement data for drilled shafts in dimensionless form,
as shown in Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1 through 10.8.2.2.2-4.
• Short-term settlement resulting from load transfer, These curves do not include consideration of long-term
consolidation settlement for shafts in cohesive soils.
• Consolidation settlement if constructed in where
Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1 and 10.8.2.2.2-2 show the load-
cohesive soils exists beneath the shaft tip, and
settlement curves in side resistance and in end bearing
• Axial compression of the shaft. for shafts in cohesive soils. Figures 10.8.2.2.2-3 and
10.8.2.2.2-4 are similar curves for shafts in cohesionless
The normalized load-settlement curves shown in
soils. These curves should be used for estimating short-
Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1 through 10.8.2.2.2-4 should be used
term settlements of drilled shafts.
to limit the nominal shaft axial resistance computed as
The designer should exercise judgment relative to
specified for the strength limit state in Article 10.8.3 for
whether the trend line, one of the limits, or some relation
service limit state tolerable movements. Consistent values
in between should be used from Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1
of normalized settlement shall be used for limiting the
through 10.8.2.2.2-4.
base and side resistance when using these Figures. Long-
The values of the load-settlement curves in side
term settlement should be computed according to
resistance were obtained at different depths, taking into
Article 10.7.2 using the equivalent footing method and
account elastic shortening of the shaft. Although elastic
added to the short-term settlements estimated using
shortening may be small in relatively short shafts, it may
Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1 through 10.8.2.2.2-4.
be substantial in longer shafts. The amount of elastic
Other methods for evaluating shaft settlements that
shortening in drilled shafts varies with depth. O’Neill
may be used are found in O’Neill and Reese (1999).
and Reese (1999) have described an approximate
procedure for estimating the elastic shortening of long-
drilled shafts.
Settlements induced by loads in end bearing are
different for shafts in cohesionless soils and in
cohesive soils. Although drilled shafts in cohesive
soils typically have a well-defined break in a load-
displacement curve, shafts in cohesionless soils often
have no well-defined failure at any displacement. The
resistance of drilled shafts in cohesionless soils
continues to increase as the settlement increases
beyond five percent of the base diameter. The shaft
end bearing Rp is typically fully mobilized at
displacements of two to five percent of the base
diameter for shafts in cohesive soils. The unit end
bearing resistance for the strength limit state (see
Article 10.8.3.3) is defined as the bearing pressure
required to cause vertical deformation equal to
five percent of the shaft diameter, even though this
does not correspond to complete failure of the soil
beneath the base of the shaft.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-27
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
27
Induced settlements for isolated drilled shafts are
different for elements in cohesive soils and in
cohesionless soils. In cohesive soils, the failure
threshold, or nominal axial resistance corresponds to
mobilization of the full available side resistance, plus
the full available base resistance. In cohesive soils, the
failure threshold has been shown to occur at an average
normalized deformation of 4 percent of the shaft
diameter. In cohesionless soils, the failure threshold is
the force corresponding to mobilization of the full side
resistance, plus the base resistance corresponding to
settlement at a defined failure criterion. This has been
traditionally defined as the bearing pressure required to
cause vertical deformation equal to 5 percent of the shaft
diameter, even though this does not correspond to
complete failure of the soil beneath the base of the shaft.
Note that nominal base resistance in cohesionless soils is
calculated according to the empirical correlation given
by Eq. 10.8.3.5.2c-1 in terms of N-value. That
relationship was developed using a base resistance
corresponding to 5 percent normalized displacement. If
a normalized displacement other than 5 percent is used,
the base resistance calculated by Eq. 10.8.3.5.2c-1 must
be corrected.
The curves in Figures 10.8.2.2.2-1 and 10.8.2.2.2-3
also show the settlements at which the side resistance is
mobilized. The shaft skin friction Rs is typically fully
mobilized at displacements of 0.2 percent to 0.8 percent
of the shaft diameter for shafts in cohesive soils. For
shafts in cohesionless soils, this value is 0.1 percent to
1.0 percent.
Figure 10.8.2.2.2-1 Normalized Load Transfer in Side
Resistance versus Settlement in Cohesive Soils (from
O’Neill and Reese, 1999)
Page 8-B-28 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
28
Figure 10.8.2.2.2-2—Normalized Load Transfer in End
Bearing versus Settlement in Cohesive Soils (from O’Neill
and Reese, 1999)
The deflection-softening response typically applies
to cemented or partially cemented soils, or other soils
that exhibit brittle behavior, having low residual shear
strengths at larger deformations. Note that the trend line
for sands is a reasonable approximation for either the
deflection-softening or deflection-hardening response.
The normalized load-settlement curves require
separate evaluation of an isolated drilled shaft for side
and base resistance. Brown et al. (2010) provide
alternate normalized load-settlement curves that may be
used for estimation of settlement of a single drilled shaft
considering combined side and base resistance. The
method is based on modeling the average load
deformation behavior observed from field load tests and
incorporates the load test data used in development of
the curves provided by O’Neill and Reese (1999).
Additional methods that consider numerical simulations
of axial load transfer and approximations based on
elasto-plastic solutions are available in Brown et al.
(2010).
Figure 10.8.2.2.2-3—Normalized Load Transfer in Side
Resistance versus Settlement in Cohesionless Soils (from
O’Neill and Reese, 1999)
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-29
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
29
Figure 10.8.2.2.2-4—Normalized Load Transfer in End
Bearing versus Settlement in Cohesionless Soils (from
O’Neill and Reese, 1999)
10.8.2.2.3—Intermediate Geomaterials (IGMs) C10.8.2.2.3
For detailed settlement estimation of shafts in IGMs are defined by O’Neill and Reese (1999)
IGMs, the procedures provided by O’Neill and Reese Brown et al. (2010) as follows:
(1999) described by Brown et al. (2010) should be used.
• Cohesive IGM—clay shales or mudstones with an
Su of 5 to 50 ksf, and
• Cohesionless—granular tills or granular residual
soils with N160 greater than 50 blows/ft.
10.8.2.2.4—Group Settlement C10.8.2.2.4
The provisions of Article 10.7.2.3 shall apply. Shaft See commentary to Article 10.7.2.3.
group effect shall be considered for groups of 2 shafts or O’Neill and Reese (1999) summarize various
more. studies on the effects of shaft group behavior. These
studies were for groups that consisted of 1 × 2 to 3 × 3
shafts. These studies suggest that group effects are
relatively unimportant for shaft center-to-center spacing
of 5D or greater.
10.8.2.3—Horizontal Movement of Shafts and C10.8.2.3
Shaft Groups
The provisions of Articles 10.5.2.1 and 10.7.2.4 See commentary to Articles 10.5.2.1 and 10.7.2.4.
shall apply.
For shafts socketed into rock, the input properties For shafts socketed into rock, approaches to
used to determine the response of the rock to lateral developing p-y response of rock masses include both a
loading shall consider both the intact shear strength of weak rock response and a strong rock response. For the
the rock and the rock mass characteristics. The designer strong rock response, the potential for brittle fracture
shall also consider the orientation and condition of should be considered. If horizontal deflection of the
discontinuities of the overall rock mass. Where specific rock mass is greater than 0.0004b, a lateral load test to
adversely oriented discontinuities are not present, but the evaluate the response of the rock to lateral loading
rock mass is fractured such that its intact strength is should be considered. Brown et al. (2010) provide a
Page 8-B-30 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
30
considered compromised, the rock mass shear strength summary of a methodology that may be used to estimate
parameters should be assessed using the procedures for GSI the lateral load response of shafts in rock. Additional
rating in Article 10.4.6.4. For lateral deflection of the rock background on lateral loading of shafts in rock is
adjacent to the shaft greater than 0.0004b, where b is the provided in Turner (2006).
diameter of the rock socket, the potential for brittle fracture These methods for estimating the response of shafts
of the rock shall be considered. in rock subjected to lateral loading use the unconfined
compressive strength of the intact rock as the main input
property. While this property is meaningful for intact
rock, and was the key parameter used to correlate to
shaft lateral load response in rock, it is not meaningful
for fractured rock masses. If the rock mass is fractured
enough to justify characterizing the rock shear strength
using the GSI, the rock mass should be characterized as
a c-φ material, and confining stress (i.e., σ’3) present
within the rock mass should be considered when
establishing a rock mass shear strength for lateral
response of the shaft. If the P-y method of analysis is
used to model horizontal resistance, user-specified P-y
curves should be derived. A method for developing
hyperbolic P-y curves is described by Liang et al.
(2009).
10.8.2.4—Settlement Due to Downdrag - NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.2.5—Lateral Squeeze - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.8.3—Strength Limit State Design
10.8.3.1—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.3.2—Groundwater Table and Buoyancy -
NO CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.3.3—Scour - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.3.4—Downdrag C10.8.3.4
The provisions of Article 10.7.3.7 shall apply. See commentary to Article 10.7.3.7.
The foundation should be designed so that the The static analysis procedures in Article 10.8.3.5
available factored axial geotechnical resistance is greater may be used to estimate the available drilled shaft
than the factored loads applied to the shaft, including the nominal side and tip resistances to withstand the
downdrag, at the strength limit state. The nominal shaft downdrag plus other axial force effects.
resistance available to support structure loads plus Nominal resistance may also be estimated using an
downdrag shall be estimated by considering only the instrumented static load test provided the side resistance
positive skin and tip resistance below the lowest layer within the zone contributing to downdrag is subtracted
contributing to the downdrag. The drilled shaft shall be from the resistance determined from the load test.
designed structurally to resist the downdrag plus As stated in Article C10.8.1.6.2, that it is
structure loads. appropriate to apply different downdrag forces for
evaluation of geotechnical strength limit states than for
structural strength limit states. A drilled shaft with its tip
bearing in stiff material, such as rock or hard soil, would
be expected to limit settlement to very small values. In
this case, the full downdrag force could occur in
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-31
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
31
combination with the other axial force effects, because
downdrag will not be reduced if there is little or no
downward movement of the shaft. Therefore, the
factored force effects resulting from all load
components, including full factored downdrag, should
be used to check the structural strength limit state of the
drilled shaft.
A rational approach to evaluating this strength
limit state will incorporate the force effects occurring at
this magnitude of downward displacement. This will
include the factored axial force effects transmitted to the
head of the shaft, plus the downdrag loads occurring at a
downward displacement defining the failure criterion.
In many cases, this amount of downward displacement
will reduce or eliminate downdrag. For soil layers that
undergo settlement exceeding the failure criterion (for
example, 5% of B for shafts bearing in sand), downdrag
loads are likely to remain and should be included. This
approach requires the designer to predict the magnitude
of downdrag load occurring at a specified downward
displacement. This can be accomplished using the hand
calculation procedure described in Brown et al. (2010)
or with commercially available software.
When downdrag loads are determined to exist at a
downward displacement defining failure, evaluation of
drilled shafts for the geotechnical strength limit state in
compression should be conducted under a load
combination that is limited to permanent loads only,
including the calculated downdrag load at a settlement
defining the failure criterion, but excluding
nonpermanent loads, such as live load, temperature
changes, etc. See Brown et al. (2010) for further
discussion.
When analysis of a shaft subjected to downdrag
shows that the downdrag load would be eliminated in
order to achieve a defined downward displacement,
evaluation of geotechnical and structural strength limit
states in compression should be conducted under the full
load combination corresponding to the relevant strength
limit state, including the non-permanent components of
load, but not including downdrag.
10.8.3.5—Nominal Axial Compression
Resistance of Single Drilled Shafts - NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.3.5.1—Estimation of Drilled Shaft Resistance
in Cohesive Soils
10.8.3.5.1a—General - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.3.5.1b—Side Resistance C10.8.3.5.1b
The nominal unit side resistance, qs, in ksf, for The α-method is based on total stress. For effective
shafts in cohesive soil loaded under undrained loading stress methods for shafts in clay, see O’Neill and Reese
conditions by the α-Method shall be taken as: (1999) Brown et al. (2010).
The adhesion factor is an empirical factor used to
Page 8-B-32 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
32
correlate the results of full-scale load tests with the
q s = αS u (10.8.3.5.1b-1) material property or characteristic of the cohesive soil.
The adhesion factor is usually related to Su and is
derived from the results of full-scale pile and drilled
in which:
shaft load tests. Use of this approach presumes that the
Su measured value of Su is correct and that all shaft
α = 0.55 for ≤ 1.5 (10.8.3.5.1b-2) behavior resulting from construction and loading can be
pa lumped into a single parameter. Neither presumption is
strictly correct, but the approach is used due to its
0.55 − 0.1( Su pa − 1.5 )
α= simplicity.
Steel casing will generally reduce the side
for 1.5 ≤ Su pa ≤ 2.5 (10.8.3.5.1b-3) resistance of a shaft. No specific data is available
regarding the reduction in skin friction resulting from
where: the use of permanent casing relative to concrete
placed directly against the soil. Side resistance
Su = undrained shear strength (ksf) reduction factors for driven steel piles relative to
concrete piles can vary from 50 to 75 percent,
α = adhesion factor (dim) depending on whether the steel is clean or rusty,
respectively (Potyondy, 1961). Greater reduction in
pa = atmospheric pressure (= 2.12 ksf) the side resistance may be needed if oversized cutting
shoes or splicing rings are used.
If open-ended pipe piles are driven full depth with
The following portions of a drilled shaft, illustrated an impact hammer before soil inside the pile is removed,
in Figure 10.8.3.5.1b-1, should not be taken to and left as a permanent casing, driven pile static analysis
contribute to the development of resistance through skin methods may be used to estimate the side resistance as
friction: described in Article 10.7.3.8.6.
• At least the top 5.0 ft of any shaft;
• For straight shafts, a bottom length of the shaft The upper 5.0 ft of the shaft is ignored in estimating
taken as the shaft diameter; Rn, to account for the effects of seasonal moisture
changes, disturbance during construction, cyclic lateral
• Periphery of belled ends, if used; and loading, and low lateral stresses from freshly placed
concrete. The lower 1.0-diameter length above the shaft
tip or top of enlarged base is ignored due to the
• Distance above a belled end taken as equal to the development of tensile cracks in the soil near these
shaft diameter. regions of the shaft and a corresponding reduction in
lateral stress and side resistance.
When permanent casing is used, the side Bells or underreams constructed in stiff fissured
resistance shall be adjusted with consideration clay often settle sufficiently to result in the formation of
a gap above the bell that will eventually be filled by
to the type and length of casing to be used, and
slumping soil. Slumping will tend to loosen the soil
how it is installed. immediately above the bell and decrease the side
Values of α for contributing portions of shafts resistance along the lower portion of the shaft.
excavated dry in open or cased holes should be
as specified in Eqs. 10.8.3.5.1b-2 and
10.8.3.5.1b-3.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-33
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
33
The value of α is often considered to vary as a
function of Su. Values of α for drilled shafts are
recommended as shown in Eqs. 10.8.3.5.1b-2 and
10.8.3.5.1b-3, based on the results of back-analyzed,
full-scale load tests. This recommendation is based on
eliminating the upper 5.0 ft and lower 1.0 diameter of
the shaft length during back-analysis of load test results.
The load tests were conducted in insensitive cohesive
soils. Therefore, if shafts are constructed in sensitive
clays, values of α may be different than those obtained
from Eqs. 10.8.3.5.1b-2 and 10.8.3.5.1b-3. Other values
of α may be used if based on the results of load tests.
The depth of 5.0 ft at the top of the shaft may need to
be increased if the drilled shaft is installed in expansive
clay, if scour deeper than 5.0 ft is anticipated, if there
is substantial groundline deflection from lateral
Top 5 FT
Noncontributing
loading, or if there are other long-term loads or
construction factors that could affect shaft resistance.
A reduction in the effective length of the shaft
contributing to side resistance has been attributed to
horizontal stress relief in the region of the shaft tip,
arising from development of outward radial stresses at
the toe during mobilization of tip resistance. The
influence of this effect may extend for a distance of 1B
above the tip (O’Neill and Reese, 1999). The
effectiveness of enlarged bases is limited when L/D is
Periphery of Bell greater than 25.0 due to the lack of load transfer to the
Noncontributing
tip of the shaft.
The values of α obtained from Eqs. 10.8.3.5.1b-2
Straight Shaft Belled Shaft and 10.8.3.5.1b-3 are considered applicable for both
compression and uplift loading.
Figure 10.8.3.5.1b-1—Explanation of Portions of Drilled
Shafts Not Considered in Computing Side Resistance
(O’Neill and Reese, 1999 Brown et al., 2010)
10.8.3.5.1c—Tip Resistance C10.8.3.5.1c
For axially loaded shafts in cohesive soil, the These equations are for total stress analysis. For
nominal unit tip resistance, qp, by the total stress method effective stress methods for shafts in clay, see O’Neill
as provided in O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et al. and Reese (1999) Brown et al. (2010).
(2010) shall be taken as: The limiting value of 80.0 ksf for qp is not a
theoretical limit but a limit based on the largest
q p = N c Su ≤ 80.0 ksf (10.8.3.5.1c-1) measured values. A higher limiting value may be used if
based on the results of a load test, or previous successful
experience in similar soils.
in which:
Z (10.8.3.5.1c-2)
Nc =
6 1 + 0.2 ≤ 9
D
where:
D = diameter of drilled shaft (ft)
Z = penetration of shaft (ft)
Page 8-B-34 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
34
Su = undrained shear strength (ksf)
The value of Su should be determined from the
results of in-situ and/or laboratory testing of undisturbed
samples obtained within a depth of 2.0 diameters below
the tip of the shaft. If the soil within 2.0 diameters of the
tip has Su <0.50 ksf, the value of Nc should be multiplied
by 0.67.
10.8.3.5.2—Estimation of Drilled Shaft Resistance
in Cohesionless Soils
10.8.3.5.2a—General C10.8.3.5.2a
Shafts in cohesionless soils should be designed by The factored resistance should be determined in
effective stress methods for drained loading conditions consideration of available experience with similar
or by empirical methods based on in-situ test results. conditions.
Although many field load tests have been
performed on drilled shafts in clays, very few have
been performed on drilled shafts in sands. The shear
strength of cohesionless soils can be characterized by
an angle of internal friction, φf, or empirically related
to its SPT blow count, N. Methods of estimating shaft
resistance and end bearing are presented below.
Judgment and experience should always be
considered.
10.8.3.5.2b—Side Resistance C10.8.3.5.2b
The nominal axial resistance of drilled shafts in O’Neill and Reese (1999) provide additional
cohesionless soils by the β-method shall be taken asThe discussion of computation of shaft side resistance and
side resistance for shafts in cohesionless soils shall be recommend allowing β to increase to 1.8 in gravels and
determined using the β method, take as: gravelly sands, however, they recommend limiting the
unit side resistance to 4.0 ksf in all soils.
qs = βσ′ ≤ 4.0 for 0.25 ≤ β ≤ 1.2
v
(10.8.3.5.2b-1) O’Neill and Reese (1999) proposed a method for
uncemented soils that uses a different approach in that
in which, for sandy soils: the shaft resistance is independent of the soil friction
angle or the SPT blow count. According to their
findings, the friction angle approaches a common value
• for N60 ≥ 15:
due to high shearing strains in the sand caused by stress
= 1.5 − 0.135 z
β (10.8.3.5.2b-2) relief during drilling.
• for N60 < 15:
N 60
=β (1.5 − 0.135 z ) (10.8.3.5.2b-3)
15
where:
σ′v = vertical effective stress at soil layer mid-depth
(ksf)
β = load transfer coefficient (dim)
z = depth below ground, at soil layer mid-depth (ft)
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-35
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
35
N60 = average SPT blow count (corrected only for
hammer efficiency) in the design zone under
consideration (blows/ft)
Higher values may be used if verified by load tests.
For gravelly sands and gravels, Eq. 10.8.3.5.2b-4 The detailed development of Eq. 10.8.3.5.2b-4 is
should be used for computing β where N60 ≥ 15. If provided in O’Neill and Reese (1999).
N60 < 15, Eq. 10.8.3.5.2b-3 should be used.
β 2.0 − 0.06 ( z )
0.75
= (10.8.3.5.2b-4)
qs = β σ'v (10.8.3.5.2b-1) The method described herein is based on axial load
tests on drilled shafts as presented by Chen and
in which: Kulhawy (2002) and updated by Kulhawy and Chen
(2007). This method provides a rational approach for
σ ′p
sin ϕ f′
relating unit side resistance to N-values and to the state
β = (1 − sin ϕ ′f ) tan ϕ f′ (10.8.3.5.2b-2)
of effective stress acting at the soil-shaft interface. This
σ v′ approach replaces the previously used depth-dependent
β-method developed by O’Neill and Reese (1999),
where: which does not account for variations in N-value or
effective stress on the calculated value of β. Further
β = load transfer coefficient (dim) discussion, including the detailed development of Eq.
10.8.3.5.2b-2, is provided in (Brown et al. 2010).
ϕ′f = friction angle of cohesionless soil layer (°)
σ'p = effective vertical preconsolidation stress
σ′v = vertical effective stress at soil layer mid-depth
The correlation for effective soil friction angle for use in
the above equations shall be taken as:
φ′f 27.5 + 9.2 log ( N1 )60
= (10.8.3.5.2b-3)
where:
(N1)60 = SPT N-value corrected for effective
overburden stress
The preconsolidation stress in Eq. 10.8.3.5.2b-2 should
be approximated through correlation to SPT N-values.
For sands:
σ ′p
= 0.47(N 60 )
m
pa
(10.8.3.5.2b-4)
where:
m = 0.6 for clean quartzitic sands
m = 0.8 for silty sand to sandy silts
pa = atmospheric pressure (same units as σ'p, 2.12
ksf or 14.7 psi)
Page 8-B-36 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
36
For gravelly soils:
σ ′p
= 0.15(N 60 )
pa
(10.8.3.5.2b-5)
When permanent casing is used, the side resistance Steel casing will generally reduce the side
shall be adjusted with consideration to the type and resistance of a shaft. No specific data is available
length of casing to be used, and how it is installed. regarding the reduction in skin friction resulting from
the use of permanent casing relative concrete placed
directly against the soil. Side resistance reduction factors
for driven steel piles relative to concrete piles can vary
from 50 to 75 percent, depending on whether the steel is
clean or rusty, respectively (Potyondy, 1961). Casing
reduction factors of 0.6 to 0.75 are commonly used.
Greater reduction in the side resistance may be needed if
oversized cutting shoes or splicing rings are used.
If open-ended pipe piles are driven full depth with
an impact hammer before soil inside the pile is removed,
and left as a permanent casing, driven pile static analysis
methods may be used to estimate the side resistance as
described in Article 10.7.3.8.6.
10.8.3.5.2c—Tip Resistance C10.8.3.5.2c
The nominal tip resistance, qp, in ksf, for drilled O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et al. (2010)
shafts in cohesionless soils by the O’Neill and Reese provide additional discussion regarding the computation
(1999) method described in Brown et al. (2010) shall be of nominal tip resistance and on tip resistance in specific
taken as: geologic environments.
See O’Neill and Reese (1999) for background on
for N 60 ≤ 50, q p =
1.2 N 60 (10.8.3.5.2c-1) IGMs.
If N 60 ≤ 50, then q p =
1.2 N 60
where:
N60 = average SPT blow count (corrected only for
hammer efficiency) in the design zone under
consideration (blows/ft)
The value of qp in Eq. 10.8.3.5.2c-1 should be
limited to 60 ksf, unless greater values can be justified
though load test data.
Cohesionless soils with SPT-N60 blow counts
greater than 50 shall be treated as intermediate
geomaterial (IGM) and the tip resistance, in ksf, taken
as:
0.8
p
q p = 0.59 N 60 a σ′v (10.8.3.5.2c-2)
σ 'v
where:
pa = atmospheric pressure (= 2.12 ksf)
σ′v = vertical effective stress at the tip elevation of
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-37
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
37
the shaft (ksf)
N60 should be limited to 100 in Eq. 10.8.3.5.2c-2 if
higher values are measured.
10.8.3.5.3—Shafts in Strong Soil Overlying Weaker
Compressible Soil - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.3.5.4—Estimation of Drilled Shaft Resistance
in Rock
10.8.3.5.4a—General C10.8.3.5.4a
Drilled shafts in rock subject to compressive Methods presented in this Article to calculate
loading shall be designed to support factored loads in: drilled shaft axial resistance require an estimate of the
uniaxial compressive strength of rock core. Unless the
• Side-wall shear comprising skin friction on the wall rock is massive, the strength of the rock mass is most
of the rock socket; or frequently controlled by the discontinuities, including
orientation, length, and roughness, and the behavior of
• End bearing on the material below the tip of the
the material that may be present within the
drilled shaft; or
discontinuity, e.g., gouge or infilling. The methods
• A combination of both. presented are semi-empirical and are based on load test
data and site-specific correlations between measured
resistance and rock core strength.
The difference in the deformation required to Design based on side-wall shear alone should be
mobilize skin friction in soil and rock versus what is considered for cases in which the base of the drilled hole
required to mobilize end bearing shall be considered cannot be cleaned and inspected or where it is
when estimating axial compressive resistance of shafts determined that large movements of the shaft would be
embedded in rock. Where end bearing in rock is used as required to mobilize resistance in end bearing.
part of the axial compressive resistance in the design, Design based on end-bearing alone should be
the contribution of skin friction in the rock shall be considered where sound bedrock underlies low strength
reduced to account for the loss of skin friction that overburden materials, including highly weathered rock.
occurs once the shear deformation along the shaft sides In these cases, however, it may still be necessary to
is greater than the peak rock shear deformation, i.e., socket the shaft into rock to provide lateral stability.
once the rock shear strength begins to drop to a residual Where the shaft is drilled some depth into sound
value. rock, a combination of sidewall shear and end bearing
can be assumed (Kulhawy and Goodman, 1980).
If the rock is degradable, use of special construction
procedures, larger socket dimensions, or reduced socket
resistance should be considered.
Factors that should be considered when making an
engineering judgment to neglect any component of
resistance (side or base) are discussed in Article
10.8.3.5.4d. In most cases, both side and base
resistances should be included in limit state evaluation
of rock-socketed shafts.
For drilled shafts installed in karstic formations,
exploratory borings should be advanced at each drilled
shaft location to identify potential cavities. Layers of
compressible weak rock along the length of a rock
socket and within approximately three socket diameters
or more below the base of a drilled shaft may reduce the
resistance of the shaft.
Page 8-B-38 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
38
For rock that is stronger than concrete, the concrete
shear strength will control the available side friction,
and the strong rock will have a higher stiffness, allowing
significant end bearing to be mobilized before the side
wall shear strength reaches its peak value. Note that
concrete typically reaches its peak shear strength at
about 250 to 400 microstrain (for a 10-ft long rock
socket, this is approximately 0.5 in. of deformation at
the top of the rock socket). If strains or deformations
greater than the value at the peak shear stress are
anticipated to mobilize the desired end bearing in the
rock, a residual value for the skin friction can still be
used. Article 10.8.3.5.4d provides procedures for
computing a residual value of the skin friction based on
the properties of the rock and shaft.
10.8.3.5.4b—Side Resistance C10.8.3.5.4b
For drilled shafts socketed into rock, shaft Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1 applies to the case where the side
resistance, in ksf, may be taken as (Horvath and Kenney, of the rock socket is considered to be smooth or where
1979): the rock is drilled using a drilling slurry. Significant
additional shaft resistance may be achieved if the
0.65α E pa ( qu pa )
qs =
0.5
< 7.8 pa ( f c′ pa )
0.5 borehole is specified to be artificially roughened by
grooving. Methods to account for increased shaft
(10.8.3.5.4b-1) resistance due to borehole roughness are provided in
Section 11 of O’Neill and Reese (1999).
where: Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1 should only be used for intact
rock. When the rock is highly jointed, the calculated qs
qu = uniaxial compressive strength of rock (ksf) should be reduced to arrive at a final value for design.
The procedure is as follows:
pa = atmospheric pressure (= 2.12 ksf) Step 1. Evaluate the ratio of rock mass modulus to
intact rock modulus, i.e., Em/Ei, using
αE = reduction factor to account for jointing in rock Table C10.4.6.5-1.
as provided in Table 10.8.3.5.4b-1
Step 2. Evaluate the reduction factor, αE, using
f′c = concrete compressive strength (ksi) Table 10.8.3.5.4b-1.
Table 10 .8 .3 .5 .4b-1—Estimation of αE (O’Neill Step 3. Calculate qs according to Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1.
and Reese, 1999) •
•
Em/Ei αE •
•
1.0 1.0
•
0.5 0.8
•
0.3 0.7
•
0.1 0.55
0.05 0.45
For drilled shafts socketed into rock, unit side Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1 is based on regression analysis of
resistance, qs in ksf, shall be taken as load test data as reported by Kulhawy et al. (2005) and
includes data from pervious studies by Horvath and
(Kulhawy et al., 2005): Kenney (1979), Rowe and Armitage (1987), Kulhawy
and Phoon (1993), and others. The recommended value
qS q (10.8.3.5.4b-1) of the regression coefficient C = 1.0 is applicable to
=C u
pa pa “normal” rock sockets, defined as sockets constructed
with conventional equipment and resulting in nominally
clean sidewalls without resorting to special procedures
where:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-39
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
39
or artificial roughening. Rock that is prone to smearing
pa = atmospheric pressure taken as 2.12 ksf or rapid deterioration upon exposure to atmospheric
conditions, water, or slurry are outside the “normal”
C = regression coefficient taken as 1.0 for normal range and may require additional measures to insure
conditions reliable side resistance. Rocks exhibiting this type of
behavior include clay shales and other argillaceous
qu = uniaxial compressive strength of rock (ksf) rocks. Rock that cannot support construction of an
unsupported socket without caving is also outside the
If the uniaxial compressive strength of rock forming “normal” and will likely exhibit lower side resistance
the sidewall of the socket exceeds the drilled shaft than given by Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1 with C = 1.0. For
concrete compressive strength, the value of concrete additional guidance on assessing the magnitude of C,
compressive strength (f′c) shall be substituted for qu in see Brown, et al. (2010).
Eq. 10.8.3.5.4b-1. Shafts are sometimes constructed by supporting the
For fractured rock that caves and cannot be drilled hole with temporary casing or by grouting the rock
without some type of artificial support, the unit side ahead of the excavation. When using these construction
resistance shall be taken as: methods, disturbance of the sidewall results in lower
unit side resistances. Based on O’Neill and Reese
(1999) and as discussed in Brown et al. (2010), the
qS q (10.8.3.5.4b-2) reduction in side resistance can be related empirically to
= 0.65α E u
pa pa the RQD and joint conditions.
The joint modification factor, αE is given in Table
10.8.3.5.4b-1 based on RQD and visual inspection of
joint surfaces.
Table 10 .8 .3 .5 .4b-1—Estimation of αE (O’Neill
and Reese, 1999)
RQD (%) Joint Modification Factor, αE
Closed joints Open or gouge-filled jo
100 1.00 0.85
70 0.85 0.55
50 0.60 0.55
30 0.50 0.50
20 0.45 0.45
10.8.3.5.4c—Tip Resistance C10.8.3.5.4c
End-bearing for drilled shafts in rock may be taken If end bearing in the rock is to be relied upon,
as follows: and wet construction methods are used, bottom clean-
out procedures such as airlifts should be specified to
• If the rock below the base of the drilled shaft to a ensure removal of loose material before concrete
depth of 2.0B is either intact or tightly jointed, i.e., placement.
no compressible material or gouge-filled seams, and The use of Eq. 10.8.3.5.4c-1 also requires that there
the depth of the socket is greater than 1.5B (O’Neill are no solution cavities or voids below the base of the
and Reese, 1999): drilled shaft.
Page 8-B-40 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
40
q p = 2.5qu (10.8.3.5.4c-1) For further information see O’Neill and Reese
(1999)Brown et al. (2010).
Eq. 10.8.3.5.4c-2 is a lower bound solution for
• If the rock below the base of the shaft to a depth of bearing resistance for a drilled shaft bearing on or
2.0B is jointed, the joints have random orientation, socketed in a fractured rock mass. This method is
and the condition of the joints can be evaluated as: appropriate for rock with joints that are not necessarily
oriented preferentially and the joints may be open,
s
qp = + (m s + s ) qu (10.8.3.5.4c-2) closed, or filled with weathered material. Load testing
will likely indicate higher tip resistance than that
calculated using Eq. 10.8.3.5.4c-2. Resistance factors for
where: this method have not been developed and must therefore
be estimated by the designer. Bearing capacity theory
s, m = fractured rock mass parameters and are provides a framework for evaluation of base resistance
specified in Table 10.4.6.4-4 for cases where the bearing rock can be characterized by
its GSI. Eq. 10.8.3.5.4c-2 (Turner and Ramey, 2010) is
qu = unconfined compressive strength of rock (ksf) a lower bound solution for bearing resistance of a drilled
shaft bearing on or socketed into a fractured rock mass.
a
Fractured rock describes a rock mass intersected by
A (10.8.3.5.4c-2) multiple sets of intersecting joints such that the strength
q p = A + qu mb + s is controlled by the overall mass response and not by
qu
failure along pre-existing structural discontinuities. This
generally applies to rock that can be characterized by the
In which: descriptive terms shown in Figure 10.4.6.4-1 (e.g.,
“blocky”, “disintegrated”, etc.).
(σ ′ )
a
′ + q u mb v ,b + s
A = σ vb (10.8.3.5.4c-3)
qu
where:
σ'vb = vertical effective stress at the socket
bearing elevation (tip elevation)
s, a, and
mb = Hoek-Brown strength parameters for the
fractured rock mass determined from GSI
(see Article 10.4.6.4)
qu = uniaxial compressive strength of intact rock
Eq. 10.8.3.5.4c-1 should be used as an upper-bound
limit to base resistance calculated by Eq. 10.8.2.5.4c-2,
unless local experience or load tests can be used to
validate higher values.
10.8.3.5.4d—Combined Side and Tip C10.8.3.5.4d
Resistance
Design methods that consider the difference in shaft Typically, the axial compression load on a shaft
movement required to mobilize skin friction in rock socketed into rock is carried solely in shaft side
versus what is required to mobilize end bearing, such as resistance until a total shaft movement on the order of
the methodology provided by O’Neill and Reese (1999), 0.4 in. occurs.
shall be used to estimate axial compressive resistance of Designs which consider combined effects of side
shafts embedded in rock. friction and end-bearing of a drilled shaft in rock
require that side friction resistance and end bearing
resistance be evaluated at a common value of axial
displacement, since maximum values of side friction
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-41
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
41
and end-bearing are not generally mobilized at the
same displacement.
Where combined side friction and end-bearing in
rock is considered, the designer needs to evaluate
whether a significant reduction in side resistance will
occur after the peak side resistance is mobilized. As
indicated in Figure C10.8.3.5.4d-1, when the rock is
brittle in shear, much shaft resistance will be lost as
vertical movement increases to the value required to
develop the full value of qp. If the rock is ductile in
shear, i.e., deflection softening does not occur, then
the side resistance and end-bearing resistance can be
added together directly. If the rock is brittle, however,
adding them directly may be unconservative. Load
testing or laboratory shear strength testing, e.g., direct
shear testing, may be used to evaluate whether the
rock is brittle or ductile in shear.
A
Developed Resistance
Shaft resistance
C
Base resistance
Shaft Movement
Figure C10.8.3.5.4d-1—Deflection Softening Behavior of
Drilled Shafts under Compression Loading (after O’Neill
and Reese, 1999).
The method used to evaluate combined side
friction and end-bearing at the strength limit state
requires the construction of a load-vertical
deformation curve. To accomplish this, calculate the
total load acting at the head of the drilled shaft, QT1,
and vertical movement, wT1, when the nominal shaft
side resistance (Point A on Figure C10.8.3.5.4d-1) is
mobilized. At this point, some end bearing is also
mobilized. For detailed computational procedures for
estimating shaft resistance in rock, considering the
combination of side and tip resistance, see O’Neill
and Reese (1999).
A design decision to be addressed when using rock
sockets is whether to neglect one or the other component
of resistance (side or base). For example, design based
on side resistance alone is sometimes assumed for cases
in which the base of the drilled hole cannot be cleaned
and inspected or where it is determined that large
downward movement of the shaft would be required to
mobilize tip resistance. However, before making a
decision to omit tip resistance, careful consideration
should be given to applying available methods of quality
construction and inspection that can provide confidence
Page 8-B-42 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
42
in tip resistance. Quality construction practices can
result in adequate clean-out at the base of rock sockets,
including those constructed by wet methods. In many
cases, the cost of quality control and assurance is offset
by the economies achieved in socket design by including
tip resistance. Load testing provides a means to verify
tip resistance in rock.
Reasons cited for neglecting side resistance of rock
sockets include (1) the possibility of strain-softening
behavior of the sidewall interface (2) the possibility of
degradation of material at the borehole wall in
argillaceous rocks, and (3) uncertainty regarding the
roughness of the sidewall. Brittle behavior along the
sidewall, in which side resistance exhibits a significant
decrease beyond its peak value, is not commonly
observed in load tests on rock sockets. If there is reason
to believe strain softening will occur, laboratory direct
shear tests of the rock-concrete interface can be used to
evaluate the load-deformation behavior and account for
it in design. These cases would also be strong candidates
for conducting field load tests. Investigating the sidewall
shear behavior through laboratory or field testing is
generally more cost-effective than neglecting side
resistance in the design. Application of quality control
and assurance through inspection is also necessary to
confirm that sidewall conditions in production shafts are
of the same quality as laboratory or field test conditions.
Materials that are prone to degradation at the
exposed surface of the borehole and are prone to a
“smooth” sidewall generally are argillaceous
sedimentary rocks such as shale, claystone, and
siltstone. Degradation occurs due to expansion, opening
of cracks and fissures combined with groundwater
seepage, and by exposure to air and/or water used for
drilling. Hassan and O’Neill (1997) note that this
behavior is most prevalent in cohesive IGM’s and that in
the most severe cases degradation results in a smear
zone at the interface. Smearing may reduce load
transfer significantly. As reported by Abu-Hejleh et al.
(2003), both smearing and smooth sidewall conditions
can be prevented in cohesive IGM’s by using
roughening tools during the final pass with the rock
auger or by grooving tools. Careful inspection prior to
concrete placement is required to confirm roughness of
the sidewalls. Only when these measures cannot be
confirmed would there be cause for neglecting side
resistance in design.
Analytical tools for evaluating the load
transfer behavior of rock socketed shafts are
given in Turner (2006) and Brown et al.
(2010).
10.8.3.5.5—Estimation of Drilled Shaft Resistance C10.8.3.5.5
in Intermediate Geomaterials (IGMs)
For detailed base and side resistance estimation See Article 10.8.2.2.3 for a definition of an IGM.
procedures for shafts in cohesive IGMs, the procedures For convenience, since a common situation is to tip
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-43
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
43
provided by O’Neill and Reese (1999) Brown et al. the shaft in a cohesionless IGM, the equation for tip
(2010) should be used. resistance in a cohesionless IGM is provided in
Article C10.8.3.5.2c.
10.8.3.5.6—Shaft Load Test - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.8.3.6—Shaft Group Resistance - NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.3.7—Uplift Resistance - NO CHANGES –
NOT SHOWN
10.8.3.8—Nominal Horizontal Resistance of
Shaft and Shaft Groups - NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.8.3.9—Shaft Structural Resistance - NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
10.8.4—Extreme Event Limit State C10.8.4
The provisions of Article 10.5.5.3 and 10.7.4 shall See commentary to Articles 10.5.5.3 and 10.7.4.
apply.
10.9—MICROPILES – NO CHANGES – NOT
SHOWN
10.10—REFERENCES
AASHTO. 1988. Manual on Subsurface Investigations, First Edition, MSI-1. American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials, Washington, DC.
AASHTO. 2002. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th Edition, HB-17. American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington, DC.
AASHTO. 2011. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Design, Second Edition, LRFDSEIS-2. American
Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington, DC.
Allen, T. M. 2005. Development of Geotechnical Resistance Factors and Downdrag Load Factors for LRFD
Foundation Strength Limit State Design, FHWA-NHI-05-052, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, DC.
Abu-Hejleh, N, M.W. O’Neill, D. Hannerman, and W.J. Atwoll. 2003. Improvement of the Geotechnical Axial Design
Methodology for Colorado’s Drilled Shafts Socketed in Weak Rock. Report No. CDOT-DTD-R-2003-6, Colorado
Department of Transportation, Denver, 192 p.
Allen, T. M., 2005, Development of Geotechnical Resistance Factors and Downdrag Load Factors for LRFD
Foundation Strength Limit State Design, Publication No. FHWA-NHI-05-052, Federal Highway Administration,
Washington, DC, 41 pp.
Allen, T. M., 2007, “Development of New Pile-Driving Formula and Its Calibration for Load and Resistance Factor
Design,” Transportation Research Record: Journal of the Transportation Research Board, No. 2004, Transportation
Research Board of the National Academies, Washington, D.C., pp. 20–27.
Page 8-B-44 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
44
Arman, A., N. Samtani, R. Castelli, and G. Munfakh. 1997. Subsurface Investigations: Training Course in
Geotechnical and Foundation Engineering, FHWA-HI-97-021. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, DC.
Ashour, M., G. M. Norris, and P. Pilling. 1998, “Lateral Loading of a Pile in Layered Soil Using the Strain Wedge
Model,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers,
Reston, VA, Vol. 124, No. 4, pp. 303–315.
ASTM D 5731-07, Standard Test Method for Determination of the Point Load Strength Index of Rock and Application
to Rock Strength Classifications.
ASTM D6429, Standard Guide for Selecting Surface Geophysical Methods
Baguelin, F., J. F. Jezequel, and D. H. Shields. 1987. The Pressuremeter and Foundation Engineering. Trans Tech
Publications, Clausthal-Zellerfeld, Germany, p. 617.
Barkdale, R. D., and R. C. Bachus. 1983. Design and Construction of Stone Columns—Vol. 1, FHWA/RD-83/02C.
Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Barker, R. M., J. M. Duncan, K. B. Rojiani, P. S. K. Ooi, C. K. Tan, and S. G. Kim. 1991. Manuals for the Design of
Bridge Foundations. NCHRP Report 343. Transportation Research Board, National Research Council, Washington,
DC.
Barton, N. R. 1976. “The Shear Strength of Rock and Rock Joints,” Engineering Geology. Elsevier Science
Publishing Company, Inc., New York, NY, Vol. 7, pp. 287–332.
Bieniawski, Z. T. 1984. Rock Mechanics Design in Mining and Tunneling. A. A. Balkema, Rotterdam/Boston, p. 272.
Bogard, J. D., and H. Matlock. 1990. “Application of Model Pile Tests to Axial Pile Design.” In Proc., 22nd Annual
Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, TX, Vol. 3, pp. 271–278.
Boulanger, R. W., and I. M. Idriss. 2006. “Liquefaction Susceptibility Criteria for Silts and Clays,” Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 132,
No. 11, pp. 1413–1426.
Bowles, J. E. 1977. Foundation Analysis and Design, Second Edition. McGraw–Hill Book Company, New York, NY.
Bowles, J. E. 1988. Foundation Analysis and Design, 4th Edition. McGraw–Hill Book Company, New York, NY,
p. 1004.
Bray, J. D., and R. B. Sancio. 2006. “Assessment of the Liquefaction Susceptibility of Fine-Grained Soils,” Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 132, No. 9,
pp. 1165–1176.
Bray, J. D., R.B. Sancio, M. F. Riemer, and T. Durgunoglu. 2004. “Liquefaction Susceptibility of Fine-Grained
Soils.” In Proc., 11th International Conference on Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering and 3rd International
Conference On Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering, Berkeley, CA, January 2004, Doolin, Kammerer, Nogami,
Seed and Towhata, Eds., Vol. 1, pp. 655–662.
Broms, B. B. 1964a. “Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesive Soil,” ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 90, SM2, pp. 27–63.
Broms, B.B. 1964b. “Lateral Resistance of Piles in Cohesionless Soil,” ASCE Journal for Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 90, SM3, pp. 123–156.
Campanella, R. G. 1994. “Field Methods for Dynamic Geotechnical Testing: An Overview of Capabilities and
Needs.” In Dynamic Geotechnical Testing II, Special Technical Publication No. 1213, American Society for Testing
and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, pp. 3–23.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-45
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
45
Brown, D.A., J.P. Turner, and R.J. Castelli, 2010 Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and LRFD Design Methods
– Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 10, FHWA NHI-10-016. National Highway Institute, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Canadian Geotechnical Society. 1985. Canadian Foundation Engineering Manual, Second Edition. Bitech Publishers,
Ltd., Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, p. 460.
Carter, J. P., and F. H. Kulhawy. 1988. Analysis and Design of Foundations Socketed into Rock, Report No. EL-5918.
Empire State Electric Engineering Research Corporation and Electric Power Research Institute, New York, NY,
p. 158.
Cetin, K. O., R. B. Seed, A. Der Kiureghian, K. Tokimatsu, L. F, Harder, R. E. Kayen, and R. E. S. Moss. 2004.
“Standard Penetration Test-Based Probabilistic and Deterministic Assessment of Seismic Soil Liquefaction Potential,”
Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol.
130, No. 12, pp. 1314–1340.
Chen, Y-J, and F.H. Kulhawy, 2002. “Evaluation of Drained Axial Capacity for Drilled Shafts,” Geotechnical Special
Publication No. 116, Deep Foundations 2002. ASCE, Reston, VA, pp. 1200-1214.
Cheney, R. and R. Chassie. 2000. Soils and Foundations Workshop Reference Manual, NHI-00-045. National
Highway Institute, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Davisson, M. T. 1972. “High Capacity Piles.” Proceedings Lecture Series, Innovations in Foundation Construction,
Illinois Section, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA.
Davisson, M. T., and K. E. Robinson. 1965. “Bending and Buckling of Partially Embedded Piles.” In Proc., Sixth
International Conference S. M. and F. E. University of Toronto Press, Montreal, Canada, pp. 243–246.
DiMillio, A. F. 1982. Performance of Highway Bridge Abutments Supported by Spread Footings on Compacted Fill,
FHWA/RD-81/184 (NTIS PB83-201822). FHWA Staff Study.
Duncan, J. M., and A. L. Buchignani. 1976. An Engineering Manual for Settlement Studies. Department of Civil
Engineering, University of California at Berkley, Berkley, CA, p. 94. Geotechnical engineering report.
Duncan, J. M. 2000. “Factors of Safety and Reliability in Geotechnical Engineering,” Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 126, No. 4, pp. 307–316.
Elias, V. 1990. Durability/Corrosion of Soil Reinforced Structures, FHWA/R-89/186. Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, p. 173.
Elias, V., J. Welsh, J. Warren, and R. Lukas. 2000. Ground Improvement Technical Summaries—Vols. 1 and 2,
Demonstration Project 116, FHWA-SA-98-086. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC.
EPRI. 1983. Transmission Line Structure Foundations for Uplift-Compression Loading, EL-2870. Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA.
Esrig, M. E., and R. C. Kirby. 1979. “Advances in General Effective Stress Method for the Prediction of Axial
Capacity for Driven Piles in Clay.” In Proc., 11th Annual Offshore Technology Conference, pp. 437–449.
Fang, H. Y. 1991. Foundation Engineering Handbook, Second Edition. Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, NY.
Gifford, D. G., J. R. Kraemer, J. R. Wheeler, and A. F. McKown. 1987. Spread Footings for Highway Bridges,
FHWA/RD-86/185. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, p. 229.
Goodman, R. E. 1989. “Introduction.” In Rock Mechanics, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York,
NY, p. 562.
Page 8-B-46 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
46
Hannigan, P. J., G. G. Goble, G. Thendean, G. E. Likins, and F. Rausche. 2006. Design and Construction of Driven
Pile Foundations, FHWA-NHI-05-042 and NHI-05-043, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington, D.C., Vols. I and II.
Hansen, B. J. 1970. “A Revised and Extended Formula for Bearing Capacity,” Bulletin. Danish Geotechnical Institute,
Copenhagen, Vol. 28.
Hara, A., T. Ohta, M. Niwa, S. Tanaka, and T. Banno. 1974. “Shear Modulus and Shear Strength of Cohesive Soils,”
Soils and Foundations. Vol. 14, No. 3, pp. 1–12.
Hassan, K.M. and M.W. O’Neill. 1997. “Side Load-Transfer Mechanisms in Drilled Shafts in soft Argillaceous
Rock,” Journal of Geotechnical And Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 123, No. 2, ASCE, pp.272-280.
Hoek, E. 1983. “Strength of Jointed Rock Masses,” Geotechnique. Thomas Telford Ltd., London, Vol. 33, No. 3,
pp. 187–223.
Hoek, E., and E. T. Brown. 1988. “The Hoek-Brown Failure Criterion—A 1988 Update.” In Proc., 15th Canadian
Rock Mechanics Symposium, Toronto, Canada.
Hoek, E., and E. T. Brown. 1997. “Practical Estimates of Rock Mass Strength,” International Journal of Rock
Mechanics and Mining Sciences. Available at http://www.rocscience.com/.
Hoek, E., P.K.Kaiser, and W.F. Bawden. 1995. Support of Underground Excavations in Hard
Rock. AA Balkema, Rotterdam, 215 p.
Hoek E, P. Marinos, and M. Benissi. 1998. “Applicability of the Geological Strength Index (GSI)
Classification for Weak and Sheared Rock Masses—The Case of the Athens Schist Formation.”
Bulletin of Engineering Geology and the Environment, Vol. 57, pp. 151–160.
Hoek, E. and P. Marinos. 2000. Prediciting tunnel squeezing problems in weak heterogeneous rock masses, Tunnels
and Tunneling International, pp. 1-21.
Hoek, E., C. Carranza-Torres, and B. Corkum. 2002. “Hoek-Brown Failure Criterion – 2002 Edition,” In Proc., North
American Rock Mechanics Society Meeting. Toronto, Canada
Hoek, E., P. Marinos and V. Marinos. 2005. “Characterization and Engineering Properties of
Tectonically Undisturbed but Lithologically Varied Sedimentary Rock Masses.” International
Journal of Rock Mechanics and Mining Sciences, Vol. 42, pp. 277-285.
Holtz, R. D., and W. D. Kovacs. 1981. An Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering. Prentice–Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, NJ.
Horvath, R. G., and T. C. Kenney. 1979. “Shaft Resistance of Rock Socketed Drilled Piers.” In Proc., Symposium on
Deep Foundations. American Society of Civil Engineers, Atlanta, GA, pp. 182–214.
Hough, B. K. 1959. “Compressibility as the Basis for Soil Bearing Value,” Journal of the Soil Mechanics and
Foundations Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 85, Part 2.
Jaeger, J. C., and N. G. W. Cook. 1976. Fundamentals of Rock Mechanics. Chapman & Hall, London.
Janbu, N. 1963. “Soil Compressibility as Determined By Oedometer and Triaxial Tests.” In Proc, 3rd European
Conference of Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering. Wiesbaden, Germany, Vol. 1.
Janbu, N. 1967. “Settlement Calculations Based on Tangent Modulus Concept,” Bulletin No. 2, Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering Series. The Technical University of Norway, Trondheim, Norway, p. 57.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-47
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
47
Kavazanjian, E., Jr., T. Hadj-Hamou Matasoviæ, and P. J. Sabatini. 1997. Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 3,
Design Guidance: Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering for Highways, FHWA-SA-97-076, Federal Highway
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Kimmerling, R. E. 2002. Geotechnical Engineering Circular 6, Shallow Foundations, FHWA-SA-02-054, Federal
Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Komurka, V. E., A. B. Wagner, and T. B. Edil. 2003. Estimating Soil/Pile Set-Up, Wisconsin Highway Research
Program #0092-00-14, Wisconsin Department of Transportation, Madison, WI.
Kramer, S. L. 1996. Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice–Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
Kulhawy, F. H. 1978. “Geomechanical Model for Rock Foundation Settlement,” Journal of the Geotechnical
Engineering Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, Vol. 104, No. GT2, pp. 211–227.
Kulhawy, F. H., and R. E. Goodman. 1980. “Design of Foundations on Discontinuous Rock.” In Proc., International
Conference on Structural Foundations on Rock, International Society for Rock Mechanics, Vol. I, pp. 209–220.
Kulhawy, F. H., and R. E. Goodman. 1987. “Foundations in Rock.” In Ground Engineering Reference Manual, F. G.
Bell, ed. Butterworths Publishing Co., London, Chapter 55.
Kulhawy, F.H. and K.K. Phoon. 1993. “Drilled Shaft Side Resistance in Clay Soil to Rock,” Geotechnical Special
Publication No. 38: Design and Performance of Deep Foundations, ASCE, New York, pp. 172-183.
Kulhawy, F.H., W.A. Prakoso, and S.O. Akbas. 2005. “Evaluation of Capacity of Rock Foundation Sockets,” Alaska
Rocks 2005, Proceedings, 40th U.S. Symposium on Rock Mechanics, American Rock Mechanics Association,
Anchorage, AK, 8 p.
Kulhawy, F.H. and Y-R Chen. 2007. “Discussion of ‘Drilled Shaft Side Resistance in Gravelly Soils’ by Kyle M.
Rollins, Robert J. Clayton, Rodney C. Mikesell, and Bradford C. Blaise,” Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 133, No. 10, pp. 1325-1328.
Kyfor, Z. G., A. R. Schnore, T. A. Carlo, and P. F. Bailey. 1992. Static Testing of Deep Foundations,
FHWA-SA-91-042, Federal Highway Administration, Office of Technology Applications, U. S. Department of
Transportation, Washington D. C., p. 174.
Lam, I. P, and G. R. Martin. 1986. “Design Procedures and Guidelines.” In Seismic Design of Highway Bridge
Foundations, FHWA/RD-86/102, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington,
DC, Vol. 2, p. 18.
Lambe, T.W. and R. V. Whitman. 1969. Soil Mechanics. New York, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
Liang, R, K Yang and J Nusairat. 2009. “P-y Criterion for Rock Mass” Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, ASCE, Vol 135, No. 1, pp. 26-36.
Lukas, R. G. 1995. Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 1—Dynamic Compaction, FHWA-SA-95-037. Federal
Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Marinos, P. and E. Hoek. 2000. “GSI: A Geologically Friendly Tool for Rock Mass Strength Estimation,” In Proc.,
Geo-Engineering 2000, International Conference on Geotechncial and Geological Engineering. Melbourne,
Austrailia, pp. 1422-1440
Marinos, V., P. Marinos and E. Hoek. 2005. The Geological Strength index: applications and
limitations, Bulletin of Engineering Geology and the Environment, Vol. 64, pp. 55-65.
Mayne, P. W., B. R.Christopher, and J. DeJong. 2001. Manual on Subsurface Investigations, FHWA NHI-01-031.
Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C.
Page 8-B-48 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
48
Meyerhof, G. G. 1953. “The Bearing Capacity of Foundations under Eccentric and Inclined Loads.” In Proc., 3rd
International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Switzerland, pp. 440–445.
Meyerhof, G. G. 1956. “Penetration Tests and Bearing Capacity of Cohesionless Soils,” Journal of the Soil Mechanics
and Foundation Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 82, No. SM1, pp. 866-1–866-19.
Meyerhof, G. G. 1957. “The Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Foundations on Slopes.” In Proc., 4th International
Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, London.
Meyerhof, G.G. 1976. “Bearing Capacity and Settlement of Pile Foundations,” Journal of the Geotechnical
Engineering Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, Vol. 102, No. GT3, pp. 196–228.
Morgano, C. M. and B. White. 2004. “Identifying Soil Relaxation from Dynamic Testing.” In Proc., 7th International
Conference on the Application of Stresswave Theory to Piles 2004, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia.
Moulton, L. K., H. V. S. GangaRao, and G. T. Halverson. 1985. Tolerable Movement Criteria for Highway Bridges,
FHWA/RD-85/107. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC, p. 118.
Moss, R. E. S., R. B. Seed, R. E. Kayen, J. P. Stewart, A. Der Kiureghian, and K. O. Cetin. 2006. “CPT-Based
Probabilistic and Deterministic Assessment of In Situ Seismic Soil Liquefaction Potential,” Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 132, No. 8, pp. 1032–1051.
Munfakh, G., A. Arman, J. G. Collin, J. C.-J. Hung, and R. P. Brouillette. 2001. Shallow Foundations Reference
Manual, FHWA-NHI-01-023. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Nordlund, R. L. 1979. Point Bearing and Shaft Friction of Piles in Sand. Missouri-Rolla 5th Annual Short Course on
the Fundamentals of Deep Foundation Design.
Norris, G. M. 1986. “Theoretically Based BEF Laterally Loaded Pile Analysis.” In Proc., 3rd International
Conference on Numerical Methods in Offshore Piling, Nantes, France, pp. 361–386.
Nottingham, L., and J. Schmertmann. 1975. An Investigation of Pile Capacity Design Procedures. Final Report D629
to Florida Department of Transportation from Department of Civil Engineering, University of Florida, Gainesville,
FL, p. 159.
Olson, S. M., and T. D. Stark. 2002. “Liquefied Strength Ratio from Liquefaction Flow Failure Case Histories,”
Canadian Geotechnical Journal. NRC Research Press, Ottawa, ON, Canada, Vol. 39, pp 629–647.
O’Neill, M. W. and L. C. Reese. 1999. Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and Design Methods,
FHWA-IF-99-025, Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Paikowsky, S. G., C. Kuo, G. Baecher, B. Ayyub, K. Stenersen, K. O’Malley, L. Chernauskas, and M. O’Neill. 2004.
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) for Deep Foundations, NCHRP Report 507. Transportation Research
Board, National Research Council, Washington, DC.
Peck, R. B., W. E. Hanson, and T. H. Thornburn. 1974. Foundation Engineering, Second Edition. John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., New York, NY, p. 514.
Potyondy, J. G. 1961. “Skin Friction Between Various Soils and Construction Materials,” Géotechnique. Vol. 11,
No. 4, pp. 339–353.
Poulos, H. G., and E. H. Davis. 1974. Elastic Solutions for Soil and Rock Mechanics. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, NY, p. 411.
Prakash, S., and H. D. Sharma. 1990. Pile Foundations in Engineering Practice. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New
York, NY, p. 734.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-49
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
49
Prandtl, L. 1921. “Über die eindingungsfestigkeit (harte) plasticher baustoffe und die festigkeit von schneiden.”
Zeitschrift für Angewandte Mathematik und Mechanik, Vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 15–20.
Rausche, F., F. Moses, and G. G. Goble. 1972. “Soil Resistance Predictions from Pile Dynamics,” Journal of the Soil
Mechanics and Foundation Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 98, No. SM9, pp. 917–937.
Rausche, F., G. G.Goble, and G. Likins. 1985. “Dynamic Determination of Pile Capacity,” Journal of Geotechnical
Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 111, No. 3, pp. 367–383.
Reese, L. C. 1984. Handbook on Design of Piles and Drilled Shafts Under Lateral Load, FHWA-IP-84/11. Federal
Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Reese, L. C. 1986. Behavior of Piles and Pile Groups Under Lateral Load, FHWA/RD-85/106. Federal Highway
Administration, Office of Engineering and Highway Operations Research and Development, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington DC, p. 311.
Reese, L. C., and M. W. O'Neill. 1988. Drilled Shafts: Construction Procedures and Design Methods,
FHWA-HI-88-042 or ADSC-TL-4. Federal Highway Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC, p. 564.
Reissner, H. 1924. “Zum erddruckproblem.” In Proc., 1st Intem. Congress of Applied Mechanics,” Delft, Germany,
pp. 295–311.
Richardson, E. V., and S. R. Davis. 2001. Hydraulic Engineering Circular 18, Evaluating Scour at Bridges,
Fourth Edition, FHWA NHI-01-001. Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 18, Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Rowe, R.K. and H.H. Armitage. 1987. “A Design Method for Drilled Piers in Soft Rock,” Canadian Geotechnical
Journal, Vol. 24, pp. 126-142.
Sabatini, P. J, R. C Bachus, P. W. Mayne, J. A. Schneider, and T. E. Zettler. 2002. Geotechnical Engineering Circular
5 (GEC5)—Evaluation of Soil and Rock Properties, FHWA-IF-02-034. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC.
Seed, R. B., and L. F. Harder. 1990. SPT-Based Analysis of Pore Pressure Generation and Undrained Residual
Strength. In Proc., H. B. Seed Memorial Symposium, Berkeley, CA, May 1990. BiTech Ltd., Vancouver, BC, Canada,
Vol. 2, pp. 351–376.
Skempton, A. W. 1951. “The Bearing Capacity of Clays.” In Proc., Building Research Congress, Vol. 1,
pp. 180–189.
Smith, S. P. 1994. “Preliminary Procedure to Predict Scour in Bedrock.”
Sowers, G. F. 1979. Introductory Soil Mechanics and Foundations: Geotechnical Engineering. MacMillan Publishing
Co., New York, NY, p. 621.
Terzaghi, K., and R. B. Peck. 1967. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice, Second Edition. John Wiley and Sons,
Inc., New York, NY, p. 729.
Terzaghi, K., R. G. Peck, and G. Mesri. 1996. Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice. John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
New York, NY, pp. 549.
Tomlinson, M. J. 1980. Foundation Design and Construction, Fourth Edition. Pitman Publishing Limited, 128 Long
Acre, London WC2E 9AN, UK.
Tomlinson, M. J. 1986. Foundation Design and Construction, Fifth Edition. Longman Scientific and Technical,
London, p. 842.
Tomlinson, M. J. 1987. Pile Design and Construction Practice. Viewpoint Publication, p. 415.
Page 8-B-50 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Appendix 8-B Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions
50
Turner, J.P. 2006. NCHRP Synthesis 360: Rock-Socketed Shafts for Highway Structure Foundations, Transportation
Research Board, National Research Council, Washington, D.C., 148 p.
Turner, J. P., and S. B. Ramey. 2010. “Base Resistance of Drilled Shafts in Fractured Rock,” In Proc., The Art of
Foundation Engineering Practice Congress 2010. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, pp. 687-701.
U.S. Department of the Navy. 1982. Soil Mechanics. Design Manual 7.1, NAVFAC DM-7.1. Naval Facilities
Engineering Command, Alexandria, VA, p. 348.
Vesic', A. S. 1970. Research on Bearing Capacity of Soils.
Vesic', A. S. 1975. “Bearing Capacity of Shallow Foundations.” In Foundation Engineering Handbook, H.
Winterkorn, and H. Y. Fang, eds. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, NY, Chapter 3, pp. 121–147.
Vesic', A. S. 1973. “Analysis of Ultimate Loads of Shallow Foundations,” Journal of the Soil Mechanics and
Foundations Division. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 99, No. SM1. pp. 45–73.
Vijayvergiya, V. N., and J. A. Focht, Jr. 1972. “A New Way to Predict the Capacity of Piles in Clay.” In Proc., 4th
Annual Offshore Technology Conference, Vol. 2, pp. 865–874.
Williams, M. E., M. McVay, and M. I. Hoit. 2003. “LRFD Substructure and Foundation Design Programs.” In Proc.,
2003 International Bridge Conference, June 9–11, Pittsburgh, PA.
Winterkorn, H. F., and H. Y. Fang. 1975. Foundation Engineering Handbook. Van Nostrand Reinhold Company,
New York, NY, p. 751.
Wyllie, D. C. 1999. Foundations on Rock. Routledge, New York, NY.
Yazdanbod, A., S. A. Sheikh, and M. W. O'Neill. 1987. “Uplift of Shallow Underream in Jointed Clay.” In Proc.,
Foundations for Transmission Line Towers, J. L. Briaud, ed. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA,
pp. 110–127.
Youd, T. L., and I. M. Idriss. 1997. Proc., NCEER Workshop on Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance of Soils,
MCEER-97-0022.
Youd, T. L. and B. L. Carter. 2005. “Influence of Soil Softening and Liquefaction on Spectral Acceleration,” Journal
of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 131,
No. 7, pp. 811–825.
Youd, et al. 2001. “Liquefaction Resistance of Soils: Summary Report from the 1996 NCEER and 1998 NCEER/NSF
Workshops on Evaluation of Liquefaction Resistance in Soils,” Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 127, No. 10, pp. 817–833.
Zhang, L. M., W. H. Tang, and C. W. W. Ng. 2001. “Reliability of Axially Loaded Driven Pile Groups,” Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering. American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, Vol. 127,
No. 12, pp. 1051–1060.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09 Page 8-B-51
December 2013
Approved AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications – Drilled Shaft Design Provisions Appendix 8-B
51
APPENDIX A10—SEISMIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS – NO
CHANGES – NOT SHOWN
Page 8-B-52 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.09
December 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9 .1 Overview and Data Needed
This chapter addresses the design and construction of rock embankments, bridge
approach embankments, earth embankments, and light weight fills. Static loading
as well as seismic loading conditions are covered, though for a more detailed
assessment of seismic loading on embankment performance, see Chapter 6. The
primary geotechnical issues that impact embankment performance are overall stability,
internal stability, settlement, materials, and construction.
For the purposes of this chapter embankments include the following:
• Rock embankments, defined as fills in which the material in all or any part
of an embankment contains 25 percent or more, by volume, gravel or stone
4 inches or more in diameter.
• Bridge approach embankments, defined as fill beneath a bridge structure and
extending 100 feet beyond a structure’s end at subgrade elevation for the full
embankment width, plus an access ramp on a 10H:1V slope from subgrade down
to the original ground elevation. The bridge approach embankment also includes
any embankment that replaces unsuitable foundation soil beneath the bridge
approach embankment.
• Earth embankments are fills that are not classified as rock or bridge approach
embankments, but that are constructed out of soil.
• Lightweight fills contain lightweight fill or recycled materials as a significant
portion of the embankment volume, and the embankment construction is usually
by special provision. Lightweight fills are most often used as a portion of the
bridge approach embankment to mitigate settlement or in landslide repairs
to reestablish roadways.
9.1.1 Site Reconnaissance
General requirements for site reconnaissance are given in Chapter 2.
The key geotechnical issues for design and construction of embankments include
stability and settlement of the underlying soils, the impact of the stability and
settlement on the construction staging and time requirements, and the impact
to adjacent and nearby structures, such as buildings, bridge foundations, and utilities.
Therefore, the geotechnical designer should perform a detailed site reconnaissance
of the proposed construction. This should include a detailed site review outside the
proposed embankment footprint in addition to within the embankment footprint. This
reconnaissance should extend at least two to three times the width of the embankment
on either side of the embankment and to the top or bottom of slopes adjacent to the
embankment. Furthermore, areas below proposed embankments should be fully
explored if any existing landslide activity is suspected.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-1
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.1.2 Field Exploration and Laboratory Testing Requirements
General requirements for the development of the field exploration and laboratory
testing plans are provided in Chapter 2. The expected project requirements and
subsurface conditions should be analyzed to determine the type and quantity of
information to be obtained during the geotechnical investigation. During this phase it is
necessary to:
• Identify performance criteria (e.g. allowable settlement, time available
for construction, seismic design requirements, etc.).
• Identify potential geologic hazards, areas of concern (e.g. soft soils), and potential
variability of local geology.
• Identify engineering analyses to be performed (e.g. limit equilibrium slope stability
analyses, liquefaction susceptibility, lateral spreading/slope stability deformations,
settlement evaluations).
• Identify engineering properties required for these analyses.
• Determine methods to obtain parameters and assess the validity of such methods
for the material type.
• Determine the number of tests/samples needed and appropriate locations for them.
The goal of the site characterization for embankment design and construction
is to develop the subsurface profile and soil property information needed for stability
and settlement analyses. Soil parameters generally required for embankment
design include:
• Total stress and effective stress strength parameters;
• Unit weight;
• Compression indexes (primary, secondary and recompression); and
• Coefficient of consolidation).
Table 9-1 provides a summary of site characterization needs and field and laboratory
testing considerations for embankment design.
Page 9-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
Required
Geotechnical Engineering
Information Field Testing Laboratory Testing
Issues Evaluations
for Analyses
Embankments • settlement • subsurface profile • nuclear density • 1-D Oedometer
and (magnitude & rate) (soil, ground water, • plate load test • triaxial tests
Embankment • bearing capacity rock)
• test fill • unconfined
Foundations • compressibility
• slope stability • CPT (w/ pore compression
parameters
• lateral pressure pressure • direct shear tests
• shear strength measurement)
• internal stability • grain size
parameters
• borrow source • SPT distribution
• unit weights
evaluation • PMT • Atterberg Limits
(available quantity • time-rate
• dilatometer • specific gravity
and quality of consolidation
parameters • vane shear • organic content
borrow soil)
• horizontal • rock coring (RQD) • moisture-density
• required
earth pressure • geophysical testing relationship
reinforcement
coefficients • piezometers • hydraulic
• liquefaction
• interface friction conductivity
• delineation of soft • settlement plates
parameters • geosynthetic/soil
soil deposits • slope inclinometers
• pullout resistance testing
• potential for
• geologic mapping • shrink/swell
subsidence (karst,
mining, etc.) including • slake durability
orientation and • unit weight
• constructability
characteristics of
• relative density
rock discontinuities
• shrink/swell/
degradation of soil
and rock fill
Summary of Information Needs and Testing Considerations for Embankments
(Adapted From Sabatini, Et Al ., 2002)
Table 9-1
9.1.3 Soil Sampling and Stratigraphy
The size, complexity and extent of the soil sampling program will depend primarily
on the type, height and size of embankment project as well as the expected
soil conditions.
Generally, embankments 10 feet or less in height, constructed over average to good
soil conditions (e.g., non-liquefiable, medium dense to very dense sand, silt
or gravel, with no signs of previous instability) will require only a basic level of site
investigation. A geologic site reconnaissance (see Chapter 2), combined with widely
spaced test pits, hand holes, or a few shallow borings to verify field observations and
the anticipated site geology may be sufficient, especially if the geology of the area
is well known, or if there is some prior experience in the area.
For larger embankments, or for any embankment to be placed over soft or
potentially unstable ground, geotechnical explorations should in general be spaced
no more than 500 feet apart for uniform conditions. In non-uniform soil conditions,
spacing should be decreased to 100 to 300 foot intervals with at least one boring
in each major landform or geologic unit. A key to the establishment of exploration
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-3
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
frequency for embankments is the potential for the subsurface conditions to impact
the construction of the embankment, the construction contract in general, and the
long-term performance of the finished project. The exploration program should
be developed and conducted in a manner that these potential problems, in terms
of cost, time, and performance, are reduced to an acceptable level. The boring
frequency described above may need to be adjusted by the geotechnical designer
to address the risk of such problems for the specific project.
All embankments over 10 feet in height, embankments over soft soils, or those that
could impact adjacent structures (bridge abutments, buildings etc.), will generally
require geotechnical borings for the design. The more critical areas for stability
of a large embankment are between the top and bottom of the slopes. This is where
base stability is of most concern and where a majority of the borings should be located,
particularly if the near-surface soils are expected to consist of soft fine-grained
deposits. At critical locations, (e.g., maximum embankment heights, maximum
depths of soft strata), a minimum of two exploration points in the transverse direction
to define the existing subsurface conditions for stability analyses should be obtained.
More exploration points to define the subsurface stratigraphy, including the conditions
within and below existing fill, may be necessary for very large fills or very erratic
soil conditions.
Embankment widening projects will require careful consideration of exploration
locations. Borings near the toe of the existing fill are needed to evaluate the
present condition of the underlying soils, particularly if the soils are fine-grained.
In addition, borings through the existing fill into the underlying consolidated soft soil,
or, if overexcavation of the soft soil had been done during the initial fill construction,
borings to define the extent of removal, should be obtained to define conditions below
the existing fill.
In some cases, the stability and/or durability of the existing embankment fill may
be questionable because the fill materials are suspect or because slope instability in the
form of raveling, downslope lobes, or slope failures have been observed during the site
reconnaissance phase. Some embankments constructed of material that is susceptible
to accelerated weathering may require additional borings through the core of the
embankment to sample and test the present condition of the existing fill.
Borings are also needed near existing or planned structures that could be impacted
by new fill placement. Soil sampling and testing will be useful for evaluating the
potential settlement of the existing structure foundations as the new fill is placed.
The depth of borings, test pits, and hand holes will generally be determined by the
expected soil conditions and the depth of influence of the new embankment.
Explorations will need to be sufficiently deep to penetrate through surficial problem
soils such as loose sand, soft silt and clay and organic materials, and at least 10 feet
into competent soil conditions. In general, all geotechnical borings should be drilled
to a minimum depth of twice the planned embankment height.
Understanding of the underlying soil conditions requires appropriate sampling
intervals and methods. As for most engineering problems, testing for strength and
compression in fine-grained soils requires the need for undisturbed samples. The SPT
is useful in cohesionless soil where it is not practical or possible to obtain undisturbed
Page 9-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
samples for laboratory engineering tests. SPT sampling is recommended at wet sand
sites where liquefaction is a key engineering concern.
On larger projects, cone penetration test (CPT) probes can be used to supplement
conventional borings. Besides being significantly less expensive, CPT probes allow the
nearly continuous evaluation of soil properties with depth. They can detect thin layers
of soil, such as a sand lens in clay that would greatly reduce consolidation time that
may be missed in a conventional boring. In addition, CPT probes can measure pore
pressure dissipation responses, which can be used to evaluate relative soil permeability
and consolidation rates. Because there are no samples obtained, CPT probes shall
be used in conjunction with a standard boring program. Smaller projects that require
only a few borings generally do not warrant an integrated CPT/boring field program.
9.1.4 Groundwater
At least one piezometer should be installed in borings drilled in each major fill zone
where stability analysis will be required and groundwater is anticipated. Water levels
measured during drilling are often not adequate for performing stability analysis.
This is particularly true where drilling is in fine-grained soils that can take many days
or more for the water level to equalize after drilling (see Chapter 2). Even in more
permeable coarse grained soils, the drilling mud used to drill the boring can obscure
detection of the groundwater level. Notwithstanding, water levels should be recorded
during drilling in all borings or test pits. Information regarding the time and date of the
reading and any fluctuations that might be seen during drilling should be included on
the field logs.
For embankment widening projects, piezometers are generally more useful in borings
located at or near the toe of an existing embankment, rather than in the fill itself.
Exceptions are when the existing fill is along a hillside or if seepage is present on
the face of the embankment slope.
The groundwater levels should be monitored periodically to provide useful information
regarding variation in levels over time. This can be important when evaluating base
stability, consolidation settlement or liquefaction. As a minimum, the monitoring
should be accomplished several times during the wet season (October through April)
to assess the likely highest groundwater levels that could affect engineering analyses.
If practical, a series of year-round readings taken at 1 to 2 month intervals should
be accomplished in all piezometers.
The location of the groundwater table is particularly important during stability and
settlement analyses. High groundwater tables result in lower effective stress in the
soil affecting both the shear strength characteristics or the soil and its consolidation
behavior under loading. The geotechnical designer should identify the location of
the groundwater table and determine the range in seasonal fluctuation.
If there is a potential for a significant groundwater gradient beneath an embankment
or surface water levels are significantly higher on one side of the embankment than
the other, the effect of reduced soil strength caused by water seepage should be
evaluated. In this case, more than one piezometer should be installed to estimate the
gradient. Also, seepage effects must be considered when an embankment is placed
on or near the top of a slope that has known or potential seepage through it. A flow net
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-5
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
or a computer model (such as MODFLOW) may be used to estimate seepage velocity
and forces in the soil. This information may then be used into the stability analysis
to model pore pressures.
9 .2 Design Considerations
9.2.1 Typical Embankment Materials and Compaction
General instructions for embankment construction are discussed in the WSDOT
Construction Manual Section 2.3.3, and specific construction specifications for
embankment construction are provided in WSDOT Construction Specifications Section
2-03. The geotechnical designer should determine during the exploration program
if any of the material from planned earthwork will be suitable for embankment
construction (see Chapter 10). Consideration should be given to whether the material is
moisture sensitive and difficult to compact during wet weather.
9 .2 .1 .1 Rock Embankments
The WSDOT Standard Specifications define rock embankment as “all or any part
of an embankment in which the material contains 25 percent or more by volume
of gravel or stone 4 inches or greater in diameter.” Compaction tests cannot
be applied to coarse material with any degree of accuracy; therefore, a given amount
of compactive effort is specified for rock embankments, as described in Standard
Specifications Section 2-03.3(14)A.
Special consideration should be given to the type of material that will be used
in rock embankments. In some areas of the state, moderately weathered or very soft
rock may be encountered in cuts and used as embankment fill. On projects located
in southwestern Washington, degradable fine grained sandstone and siltstone are
often encountered in the cuts. The use of this material in embankments can result
in significant long term settlement and stability problems as the rock degrades, unless
properly compacted with heavy tamping foot rollers (Machan, et al., 1989).
The rock should be tested by the Washington Degradation Test (WSDOT Test Method
113) and the slake durability test (see Chapter 5) if there is suspicion that the geologic
nature of the rock source proposed indicates that poor durability rock is likely to be
encountered. When the rock is found to be non-durable, it should be physically broken
down and compacted as earth embankment provided the material meets or exceeds
common borrow requirements. Special compaction requirements may be needed for
these materials. In general, tamping foot rollers work best for breaking down the rock
fragments. The minimum size roller should be about 30 tons. Specifications should
include the maximum size of the rock fragments and maximum lift thickness. These
requirements will depend on the hardness of the rock, and a test section should be
incorporated into the contract to verify that the Contractor’s methods will achieve
compaction and successfully break down the material. In general, both the particle size
and lift thickness should be limited to 12 inches.
9 .2 .1 .2 Earth Embankments and Bridge Approach Embankments
Three types of materials are commonly used in WSDOT earth embankments,
including common, select, and gravel borrow. Bridge approach embankments should
be constructed from select or gravel borrow, although common borrow may be used
Page 9-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
in the drier parts of the State, provided it is not placed below a structure foundation
or immediately behind an abutment wall. Common borrow is not intended for use
as foundation material beneath structures or as wall backfill due to its tendency
to be more compressible and due to its poor drainage characteristics.
Requirements for common, select and gravel borrow are in Section 9-03.14 of the
WSDOT Standard Specifications. The suggested range of soil properties for each
material type to be used in design is discussed in Chapter 5. The common and select
borrow specifications are intended for use where it is not necessary to strictly control
the strength properties of the embankment material and where all weather construction
is not required.
Procedures for constructing earth embankments are described in Section 2-03.3(14)
B of the Standard Specifications. Compaction is specified in accordance with Method
A, Method B, or Method C. Method A consists of routing hauling equipment over
the embankment and is not normally used on WSDOT projects. Method B limits the
thickness of the lifts to 8 inches and requires that 90 percent of maximum dry density
be achieved in all but the upper 2 feet of the embankment. In the upper two feet
of the embankment the lift thickness is limited to 4 inches and the required compaction
is 95 percent of maximum dry density. Method B is used on all embankments
on WSDOT projects unless another method is specified.
Method C differs from Method B in that the entire embankment must be compacted
to 95 percent of maximum dry density. Method C is required when the structural
quality of the embankment is essential. Method C is required in bridge approach
embankments as defined in Section 1-01.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications.
Method C shall also be required on any foundation material beneath structures.
Because foundation stresses are transferred outward as well as downward into
the bearing soils, the limits of the foundation material should extend horizontally
outward from each edge of the footing a distance equal to the thickness of the fill
below the foundation.
The maximum density and optimum moisture content for soil placed in earth
embankments are determined by testing in accordance with WSDOT Test Method
No. 606 (Method of Test for Compaction Control of Granular Materials) or AASHTO
T 99 Method A (standard Proctor) as prescribed in Section 2-03.3(14)D of the
Standard Specifications. Test method 606 is used if 30 percent or more of the material
consists of gravel size particles (retained on the No. 4 sieve).
9 .2 .1 .3 Fill Placement Below Water
If material will be placed below the water table, material that does not require
compaction such as Quarry Spalls, Foundation Material Class B, Shoulder Ballast,
or light loose rip rap should specified. Once above the water table, other borrow
materials should be used. Quarry spalls and rip rap should be choked with Shoulder
Ballast or Foundation Material Class A or B before placement of borrow. Alternately,
construction geosynthetic for soil stabilization may be used to prevent migration of the
finer borrow into the voids spaces of the coarser underlying material.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-7
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.2.2 Embankments for Detention/Retention Facilities
Embankments for detention/retention facilities impounding over 10 acre-feet of water
come under the jurisdiction of the Dam Safety Office (DSO) of the Washington State
Department of Ecology and shall be designed as a small dam in accordance with
DSO requirements.
Embankments for detention/retention facilities impounding 10 acre feet of water or less
are not regulated by the DSO, but they should be designed using the DSO guidelines
as the basis for design. Unlined drainage facilities shall be analyzed for seepage and
piping through the embankment fill and underlying soils. Stability of the fill and
underlying soils subjected to seepage forces shall have a minimum safety factor of 1.5.
Furthermore, the minimum safety factor for piping stability analysis shall be 1.5.
9.2.3 Stability Assessment
In general, embankments 10 feet or less in height with 2H:1V or flatter side slopes,
may be designed based on past precedence and engineering judgment provided there
are no known problem soil conditions such as liquefiable sands, organic soils, soft/
loose soils, or potentially unstable soils such as Seattle clay, estuarine deposits, or peat.
Embankments over 10 feet in height or any embankment on soft soils, in unstable
areas/soils, or those comprised of light weight fill require more in depth stability
analyses, as do any embankments with side slope inclinations steeper than 2H:1V.
Moreover, any fill placed near or against a bridge abutment or foundation, or that
can impact a nearby buried or above-ground structure, will likewise require stability
analyses by the geotechnical designer. Slope stability analysis shall be conducted
in accordance with Chapter 7.
Prior to the start of the stability analysis, the geotechnical designer should determine
key issues that need to be addressed. These include:
• Is the site underlain by soft silt, clay or peat? If so, a staged stability analysis may
be required.
• Are site constraints such that slopes steeper than 2H:1V are required? If so, a
detailed slope stability assessment is needed to evaluate the various alternatives.
• Is the embankment temporary or permanent? Factors of safety for temporary
embankments may be lower than for permanent ones, depending on the site
conditions and the potential for variability.
• Will the new embankment impact nearby structures or bridge abutments? If so,
more elaborate sampling, testing and analysis are required.
• Are there potentially liquefiable soils at the site? If soil, seismic analysis to
evaluate this may be warranted (see Chapter 6) and ground improvement may
be needed.
Several methodologies for analyzing the stability of slopes are detailed or identified by
reference in Chapter 7 and are directly applicable to earth embankments.
9 .2 .3 .1 Safety Factors
Embankments that support structure foundations or walls or that could potentially
impact such structures should be designed in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications and Chapters 8 and 15. If an LRFD design is required,
Page 9-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
a resistance factor is used in lieu of a safety factor. However, since slope stability in
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications is assessed only for the service and
extreme event (seismic) limit states, the load factors are equal to 1.0, and the resistance
factor is simply the inverse of the factor of safety (i.e., 1/FS) that is calculated in most
slope stability analysis procedures and computer programs. The resistance factors and
safety factors for overall stability under static conditions are as follows:
• All embankments not supporting or potentially impacting structures shall have a
minimum safety factor of 1.25.
• Embankments supporting or potentially impacting non-critical structures shall have
a resistance factor for overall stability of 0.75 (i.e., a safety factor of 1.3).
• All Bridge Approach Embankments and embankments supporting critical
structures shall have a resistance factor of 0.65 (i.e., a safety factor of 1.5). Critical
structures are those for which failure would result in a life threatening safety hazard
for the public, or for which failure and subsequent replacement or repair would be
an intolerable financial burden to the citizens of Washington State.
Under seismic conditions, only those portions of the new embankment that could
impact an adjacent structure such as bridge abutments and foundations or nearby
buildings require seismic analyses and an adequate overall stability resistance factor
(i.e., a maximum resistance factor of 0.9 or a minimum factor of safety of 1.1). See
Chapter 6 for specific requirements regarding seismic design of embankments.
9 .2 .3 .2 Strength Parameters
Strength parameters are required for any stability analysis. Strength parameters
appropriate for the different types of stability analyses shall be determined based
on Chapter 5 and by reference to FHWA Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 5
(Sabatini, et al., 2002).
If the critical stability is under drained conditions, such as in sand or gravel, then
effective stress analysis using a peak friction angle is appropriate and should be used
for stability assessment. In the case of over-consolidated fine grained soils, a friction
angle based on residual strength may be appropriate. This is especially true for
soils that exhibit strain softening or are particularly sensitive to shear strain such as
Seattle Clay.
If the critical stability is under undrained conditions, such as in most clays and silts, a
total stress analysis using the undrained cohesion value with no friction is appropriate
and should be used for stability assessment.
For staged construction, both short (undrained) and long term (drained) stability need
to be assessed. At the start of a stage the input strength parameter is the undrained
cohesion. The total shear strength of the fine-grained soil increases with time as the
excessive pore water dissipates, and friction starts to contribute to the strength. A more
detailed discussion regarding strength gain is presented in Section 9.3.1.
9.2.4 Embankment Settlement Assessment
New embankments, as is true of almost any new construction, will add load to the
underlying soils and cause those soils to settle. As discussed in Section 8.11.3.2, the
total settlement has up to three potential components: 1) immediate settlement, 2)
consolidation settlement, and 3) secondary compression.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-9
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Settlement shall be assessed for all embankments. Even if the embankment
has an adequate overall stability factor of safety, the performance of a highway
embankment can be adversely affected by excessive differential settlement at the
road surface.
Settlement analyses for embankments over soft soils require the compression index
parameters for input. These parameters are typically obtained from standard one-
dimensional oedometer tests of the fine-grained soils (see Chapter 5 for additional
information). For granular soils, these parameters can be estimated empirically
(see Section 8.11.3.2). Oedometer tests should be completed to at least twice the
preconsolidation pressure with at least three, and preferably four, points on the virgin
consolidation curve (i.e., at stresses higher than the preconsolidation pressure). The
coefficient of consolidation value for the virgin curve can be ten times higher than that
for the test results below the preconsolidation pressure.
9 .2 .4 .1 Settlement Impacts
Because primary consolidation and secondary compression can continue to occur long
after the embankment is constructed (post construction settlement), they represent the
major settlement concerns for embankment design and construction. Post construction
settlement can damage structures and utilities located within the embankment,
especially if those facilities are also supported by adjacent soils or foundations that
do not settle appreciably, leading to differential settlements. Embankment settlement
near an abutment could create an unwanted dip in the roadway surface, or downdrag
and lateral squeeze forces on the foundations. See Chapter 8 for more information
regarding the use of bridge approach slabs to minimize the effects of differential
settlement at the abutment, and the methodology to estimate downdrag loads
on foundations.
If the primary consolidation is allowed to occur prior to placing utilities or building
structures that would otherwise be impacted by the settlement, the impact is essentially
mitigated. However, it can take weeks to years for primary settlement to be essentially
complete, and significant secondary compression of organic soils can continue for
decades. Many construction projects cannot absorb the scheduling impacts associated
with waiting for primary consolidation and/or secondary compression to occur.
Therefore, estimating the time rate of settlement is often as important as estimating the
magnitude of settlement.
To establish the target settlement criteria, the tolerance of structures or utilities
to differential settlement that will be impacted by the embankment settlement shall
be determined. Lateral movement (i.e., lateral squeeze) caused by the embankment
settlement and its effect on adjacent structures, including light, overhead sign, and
signal foundations, shall also be considered. If structures or utilities are not impacted
by the embankment settlement, settlement criteria are likely governed by the long-term
maintenance needs of the roadway surfacing. In that case, the target settlement criteria
shall be established with consideration of the effect differential settlement will have on
the pavement life and surface smoothness.
Page 9-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9 .2 .4 .2 Settlement Analysis
9.2.4.2.1 Primary Consolidation
The key parameters for evaluating the amount of settlement below an embankment
include knowledge of:
• The subsurface profile including soil types, layering, groundwater level and
unit weights;
• The compression indexes for primary, rebound and secondary compression from
laboratory test data, correlations from index properties, and results from settlement
monitoring programs completed for the site or nearby sites with similar soil
conditions. See Chapters 5 and 8 for additional information regarding selection of
design parameters for settlement analysis.
• The geometry of the proposed fill embankment, including the unit weight of fill
materials and any long term surcharge loads.
The detailed methodology to estimate primary consolidation settlement is provided
in Section 8.11.3.2, except that the stress distribution below the embankment should
be calculated as described in Section 9.2.4.3. The soil profile is typically divided into
layers for analysis, with each layer reflecting changes in soils properties. In addition,
thick layers with similar properties are often subdivided for refinement of the analysis
since the settlement calculations are based on the stress conditions at the midpoint of
the layer (i.e. it is typically preferable to evaluate a near-surface, 20-foot thick layer as
two 10-foot thick layers as opposed to one 20-foot thick layer). The total settlement is
the sum of the settlement from each of the compressible layers.
If the pre-consolidation pressure of any of the soil layers being evaluated is greater
than its current initial effective vertical stress, the settlement will follow its rebound
compression curve rather than its virgin compression curve (represented by Cc). In this
case Crε, the recompression index, should be used instead of Ccε in Equation 8-8 up
to the point where the initial effective stress plus the change in effective stress imposed
by the embankment surpasses the pre-consolidation pressure. Pre-consolidation
pressures in excess of the current vertical effective stress occur in soils that have been
overconsolidated, such as from glacial loading, preloading, or desiccation.
9.2.4.2.2 Secondary Compression
For organic soils and highly plastic soils determined to have an appreciable secondary
settlement component, the secondary compression should be determined as described
in Section 8.11.3.2.2, Equation 8-13. Note the secondary compression is in general
independent of the stress state and theoretically is a function only of the secondary
compression index and time.
Similar to estimating the total primary consolidation, the contribution from the
individual layers are summed to estimate the total secondary compression. Since
secondary compression is not a function of the stress state in the soil but rather how
the soil breaks down over time, techniques such as surcharging to pre-induce the
secondary settlement are sometimes only partially effective at mitigating the secondary
compression. Often the owner must accept the risks and maintenance costs associated
with secondary compression if a cost/benefit analysis indicates that mitigation
techniques such as using lightweight fills or overexcavating and replacing the highly
compressible soils are too costly.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-11
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9 .2 .4 .3 Stress Distribution
One of the primary input parameters for settlement analysis is the increase in vertical
stress at the midpoint of the layer being evaluated caused by the embankment or other
imposed loads. It is generally quite conservative to assume the increase in vertical
stress at depth is equal to the bearing pressure exerted by the embankment at the
ground surface. In addition to the bearing pressure exerted at the ground surface, other
factors influencing the stress distribution at depth include the geometry (length and
width) of the embankment, inclination of the embankment side slopes, depth below the
ground surface to the layer being evaluated, and horizontal distance from the center
of the load to the point in question. Several methods are available to estimate the
stress distribution.
9.2.4.3.1 Simple 2V:1H Method
Perhaps the simplest approach to estimate stress distribution at depth is using the
2V:1H (vertical to horizontal) method. This empirical approach is based on the
assumption that the area the load acts over increases geometrically with depth as
depicted in Figure 9-1. Since the same vertical load is spread over a much larger area
at depth, the unit stress decreases.
2V:1H Method to Estimate Vertical Stress Increase as a Function of Depth
Below Ground (After Holtz and Kovacs, 1981)
Figure 9-1
Page 9-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9.2.4.3.2 Theory of Elasticity
Boussinesq (1885) developed equations for evaluating the stress state in a
homogenous, isotropic, linearly elastic half-space for a point load acting perpendicular
to the surface. Elasticity based methods should be used to estimate the vertical stress
increase in subsurface strata due to an embankment loading, or embankment load in
combination with other surcharge loads. While most soils are not elastic materials,
the theory of elasticity is the most widely used methodology to estimate the stress
distribution in a soil deposit from a surface load. Most simplifying charts and the
subroutines in programs such as SAF-1 and EMBANK are based on the theory of
elasticity. Some are based on Boussinesq theory and some on Westergaard’s equations
(Westegaard, 1938), which also include Poisson’s ratio (relates the ratio of strain
applied in one direction to strain induced in an orthogonal direction).
9.2.4.3.3 Empirical Charts
The equations for the theory of elasticity have been incorporated into design charts and
tables for typical loading scenarios, such as below a foundation or an embankment.
Almost all foundation engineering textbooks include these charts. For convenience,
charts to evaluate embankment loading are included as Figures 9-2 and 9-3.
Influence Factors for Vertical Stress Under a Very Long Embankment
(After NAVFAC, 1971 as Reported in Holtz and Kovacs, 1981)
Figure 9-2
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-13
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Influence Values for Vertical Stress Under the Corners of a Triangular Load of
Limited Length (after NAVFAC, 1971 as reported in Holtz and Kovacs, 1981)
Figure 9-3
9.2.4.3.4 Rate of Settlement
The time rate of primary consolidation is typically estimated using equations based
on Terzaghi’s one-dimensional consolidation theory. The time rate of primary
consolidation shall be estimated as described in Section 8.11.3.2.
The value of Cv should be determined from the laboratory test results, piezocone
testing, and/or back-calculation from settlement monitoring data obtained at the site or
from a nearby site with similar geologic and soil conditions.
The length of the drainage path is perhaps the most critical parameter because the
time to achieve a certain percentage of consolidation is a function of the square of the
drainage path length. This is where incorporating CPTs into the exploration program
can be beneficial, as they provide a nearly continuous evaluation of the soil profile,
Page 9-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
including thin sand layers that can easily be missed in a typical boring exploration
program. The thin sand lenses can significantly reduce the drainage path length.
It is important to note some of the assumptions used by Terzaghi’s theory to understand
some of its limitations. The theory assumes small strains such that the coefficient
of compressibility of the soil and the coefficient of permeability remain essentially
constant. The theory also assumes there is no secondary compression. Both of these
assumptions are not completely valid for extremely compressible soils such as organic
deposits and some clays. Therefore, considerable judgment is required to when using
Terzaghi’s theory to evaluate the time rate of settlement for these types of soil. In
these instances, or when the consolidation process is very long, it may be beneficial
to complete a preload test at the site with sufficient monitoring to assess both the
magnitude and time rate of settlement for the site.
9 .2 .4 .4 Analytical Tools
The primary consolidation and secondary settlement can be calculated by hand or
by using computer programs such as SAF-1 (Prototype Engineering Inc., 1993)
or EMBANK (FHWA, 1993). Alternatively, spreadsheet solutions can be easily
developed. The advantage of computer programs such as SAF-1 and EMBANK
are that multiple runs can be made quickly, and they include subroutines to
estimate the increased vertical effective stress caused by the embankment or other
loading conditions.
9.3 Stability Mitigation
A variety of techniques are available to mitigate inadequate slope stability for new
embankments or embankment widenings. These techniques include staged construction
to allow for the underlying soils to gain strength, base reinforcement, ground
improvement, use of lightweight fill, and construction of toe berms and shear keys. A
summary of these instability mitigation techniques is presented below along with the
key design considerations.
9.3.1 Staged Construction
Where soft compressible soils are present below a new embankment location and it is
not economical to remove and replace these soils with compacted fill, the embankment
can be constructed in stages to allow the strength of the compressible soils to increase
under the weight of new fill. Construction of the second and subsequent stages
commences when the strength of the compressible soils is sufficient to maintain
stability. In order to define the allowable height of fill for each stage and maximum
rate of construction, detailed geotechnical analysis is required. This analysis typically
requires consolidated undrained (CU), consolidated drained (CD) or consolidated
undrained with pore pressure measurements (CUp), and initial undrained (UU) shear
strength parameters for the foundation soils along with the at-rest earth pressure
coefficient (Ko), soil unit weights, and the coefficient of consolidation (Cv).
The analysis to define the height of fill placed during each stage and the rate at
which the fill is placed is typically completed using a limit equilibrium slope
stability program along with time rate of settlement analysis to estimate the percent
consolidation required for stability. Alternatively, numerical modeling programs,
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-15
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
such as FLAC and PLAXIS, can be used to assess staged construction, subject to
the approval of the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer. Numerical modeling has
some advantages over limit equilibrium approaches in that both the consolidation
and stability can be evaluated concurrently. The disadvantages of numerical
modeling include the lack of available field verification of modeling results, and
most geotechnical engineers are more familiar with limit equilibrium approaches
than numerical modeling. The accuracy of the input parameters can be critical to the
accuracy of numerical approaches. Steps for using a limit equilibrium approach to
evaluate staged construction are presented below.
For staged construction, two general approaches to assessing the criteria used during
construction to control the rate of embankment fill placement to allow the necessary
strength gain to occur in the soft subsoils are available. The two approaches are total
stress analysis and effective stress analysis:
• For the total stress approach, the rate of embankment construction is controlled
through development of a schedule of maximum fill lift heights and intermediate
fill construction delay periods. During these delay periods the fill lift that was
placed is allowed to settle until an adequate amount of consolidation of the
soft subsoil can occur. Once the desired amount of consolidation has occurs,
placement of the next lift of fill can begin. These maximum fill lift thicknesses
and intermediate delay periods are estimated during design. For this approach,
field measurements such as the rate of settlement or the rate of pore pressure
decrease should be obtained to verify that the design assumptions regarding rate
of consolidation are correct. However, if only a small amount of consolidation is
required (e.g., 20 to 40% consolidation), it may not be feasible to determine of the
desired amount of consolidation has occurred, since the rate of consolidation may
still be on the linear portion of the curve at this point. Another approach may be
to determine if the magnitude of settlement expected at that stage, considering the
degree of consolidation desired, has been achieved. In either case, some judgment
will need to be applied when interpreting such data and deciding whether or not to
reduce or extend the estimated delay period during fill construction.
• For the effective stress approach, the pore pressure increase beneath the
embankment in the soft subsoil is monitored and used to control the rate of
embankment construction. During construction, the pore pressure increase is not
allowed to exceed a critical amount to insure embankment stability. The critical
amount is generally controlled in the contract by use of the pore pressure ratio (ru),
which is the ratio of pore pressure to total overburden stress. To accomplish this
pore pressure measurement, pore pressure transducers are typically located at key
locations beneath the embankment to capture the pore pressure increase caused
by consolidation stress. As is true of the total stress approach, some judgment will
need to be applied when interpreting such data and deciding whether or not to
reduce or extend the estimated delay period during fill construction, as the estimate
of the key parameters may vary from the actual values of the key parameters in the
field. Also, this approach may not be feasible if the soil contains a high percentage
of organic material and trapped gases, causing the pore pressure readings to be too
high and not drop off as consolidation occurs.
Page 9-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
Since both approaches have limitations and uncertainties, it is generally desirable
to analyze the embankment using both approaches, to have available a backup plan
to control the rate of fill placement, if the field data proves difficult to interpret.
Furthermore, if the effective stress method is used, a total stress analysis should in
general always be conducted to obtain an estimate of the time required to build the fill
for contract bidding purposes.
Detailed procedures for both approaches are provided in the sections that follow.
These procedures have been developed based on information provided in Ladd (1991),
Symons (1976), Skempton and Bishop (1955), R. D. Holtz (personal communication,
1993), S. Sharma (personal communication, 1993), and R. Cheney (personal
communication, 1993). Examples of the application of these procedures are provided
in Appendix 9-A.
9 .3 .1 .1 Design Parameters
First, define the problem in terms of embankment geometry, soil stratigraphy, and
water table information.
The geotechnical designer must make some basic assumptions regarding the fill
properties. Typically, the designer assumes presumptive values for the embankment
fill, since the specific source of the fill material is usually not known at the time
of design. However, specialized soils laboratory tests should be performed for the
soft underlying soils. From undisturbed samples, the geotechnical designer should
obtain Unconsolidated Undrained (UU) triaxial tests and Consolidated Undrained
(CU) triaxial tests with pore pressure measurements. These tests should be used to
determine the initial undrained shear strength available. The CU test with pore pressure
measurements should also be used to determine the shear strength envelope needed for
total or effective stress analyses. In addition, the geotechnical designer should obtain
consolidation test data to determine compressibility of the soft underlying soils as well
as the rate of consolidation for the compressible strata (Cv). Cv will be an important
parameter for determining the amount of time required during consolidation to gain the
soil shear strength needed.
In general triaxial tests should be performed at the initial confining stress (Po’) for the
sample as determined from the unit weight and the depth that the sample was obtained.
Po’ = Dγ’ (9-1)
Where:
D = Sample Depth in feet
γ’ = Effective Unit Weight (pcf)
The third point in the triaxial test is usually performed at 4Po’. During the triaxial
testing it is important to monitor pore pressure to determine the pore pressure
parameters A and B. Note that A and B are not constant but change with the stress path
of the soil. These parameters are defined as follows:
A = ΔU /Δσ1 (9-2)
B = ΔU /Δσ3 (9-3)
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-17
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9 .3 .1 .2 In-Situ Shear Strength and Determination of Stability Assuming Undrained
Loading
The first step in any embankment design over soft cohesive soils is to assess its
stability assuming undrained conditions throughout the entire fill construction period.
If the stability of the embankment is adequate assuming undrained conditions, there is
no need to perform a staged construction design. The UU shear strength data, as well
as the initial shear strength from CU tests, can be used for this assessment.
The geotechnical designer should be aware that sample disturbance can result in
incorrect values of strength for normally consolidated fine grained soils. Figure 9-4
shows how to correctly obtain the cohesive strength for short term, undrained loading.
Determination of Short Term Cohesive Shear Strength From the CU Envelope
Figure 9-4
When a normally consolidated sample is obtained, the initial effective stress (PO’) and
void ratio correspond to position 1 on the e - Log P curve shown in Figure 9-4. As the
stress changes, the sample will undergo some rebound effects and will move towards
point 2 on the e – Log P curve. Generally, when a UU test is performed, the sample
state corresponds to position 2 on the e – Log P curve. Samples that are reconsolidated
to the initial effective stress (PO’) during CU testing undergo a void ratio change and
will generally be at point 3 on the e – Log P curve after reconsolidation to the initial
effective stress. It is generally assumed that consolidating the sample to 4 times the
initial effective stress prior to testing will result in the sample closely approximating
the field “virgin” curve behavior.
Page 9-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
To determine the correct shear strength for analysis, perform a CU triaxial test at the
initial effective stress (PO’) and as close as practical to 4PO’. On the Mohr diagram
draw a line from the ordinate to point 4, and draw a second line from PO’ to point 3.
Where the two lines intersect, draw a line to the shear stress axis to estimate the correct
shear strength for analysis. In Figure 9-4, the cohesion intercept for the CU strength
envelope (solid line) is 150 psf. The corrected strength based on the construction
procedure in Figure 9-4 would be 160 psf. While the difference is slight in this
example, it may be significant for other projects.
Once the correct shear strength data has been obtained, the embankment stability can
be assessed. If the embankment stability is inadequate, proceed to performing a total
stress or effective stress analysis, or both.
9 .3 .1 .3 Total Stress Analysis
The CU triaxial test is ideally suited to staged fill construction analysis when
considering undrained strengths. A CU test is simply a series of UU tests performed at
different confining pressures. In the staged construction technique, each embankment
stage is placed under undrained conditions (i.e., “U” conditions). Then the soil
beneath the embankment stage is allowed to consolidate under drained conditions,
which allows the pore pressure to dissipate and the soil strength to increase (i.e.,
“C” conditions).
In most cases, the CU envelope cannot be used directly to determine the strength
increase due to the consolidation stress placed on the weak subsoil. The stress increase
from the embankment fill is a consolidation stress, not necessarily the normal stress
on potential failure planes in the soft soil, and with staged construction excess pore
pressures due to overburden increases are allowed to partially dissipate. Figure 9-5
illustrates how to determine the correct strength due to consolidation and partial pore
pressure dissipation.
Consolidated Strength Construction From Triaxial Data
Figure 9-5
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-19
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
To correct φcu for the effects of consolidation use the following (see Ladd, 1991):
af/σ’c = tan φconsol (9-4)
tan φconsol = sin φcu/(1-sin φcu) (9-5)
Determine the strength gain (ΔCuu) by multiplying the consolidation stress increase
(Δσv) by the tangent of φconsol. The consolidation stress increase is the increased
effective stress in the soft subsoil caused by the embankment fill.
ΔCuu = Δσvtanφconsol (9-6)
This is an undrained strength and it is based on 100% consolidation. When
constructing embankments over soft ground using staged construction practices, it is
often not practical to allow each stage to consolidate to 100%. Therefore, the strengths
used in the stability analysis need to be adjusted for the consolidation stress applied
and the degree of consolidation achieved in the soft soils within the delay period
between fill stages. The strength at any degree of consolidation can be estimated using:
Cuu u% = Cuui + U(Cuu) = Cuui + UΔσvtanφconsol (9-7)
The consolidation is dependent upon the time (t), drainage path length (H), coefficient
of consolidation (Cv), and the Time Factor (T). From Holtz and Kovacs (1981), the
following approximation equations are presented for consolidation theory:
T = tCv/H2 (9-8)
Where:
T = 0.25πU2; for U < 60% (9-9)
and,
T = 1.781 – 0.933log(100 –U%); for U > 60% (9-10)
The geotechnical designer should use these equations along with specific construction
delay periods (t) to determine how much consolidation occurs by inputting a time
(t), calculating a Time Factor (T), and then using the Time Factor (T) to estimate the
degree of consolidation (U).
Once all of the design parameters are available, the first step in a total stress staged fill
construction analysis is to use the initial undrained shear strength of the soft subsoil
to determine the maximum height to which the fill can be built without causing the
slope stability safety factor to drop below the critical value. See Section 9.3.1.1.2 for
determination of the undrained shear strength needed for this initial analysis.
In no case shall the interim factor of safety at any stage in the fill construction be
allowed to drop below 1.15. A higher critical value should be used (i.e., 1.2 or 1.25)
if uncertainty in the parameters is high, or if the soft subsoil is highly organic. At the
end of the final stage, determine the time required to achieve enough consolidation
to obtain the minimum long-term safety factor (or resistance factor if structures are
involved) required, as specified in Section 9.2.3.1. This final consolidation time will
determine at what point the embankment is considered to have adequate long-term
stability such that final paving (assuming that long-term settlement has been reduced
during that time period to an acceptable level) and other final construction activities
can be completed. In general, this final consolidation/strength gain period should be on
the order of a few months or less.
Page 9-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
Once the maximum safe initial fill stage height is determined, calculate the stress
increase resulting from the placement of the first embankment stage using the
Boussinesq equation (e.g., see Figures 9-2 and 9-3). Note that because the stress
increase due to the embankment load decreases with depth, the strength gain also
decreases with depth. To properly account for this, the soft subsoil should be broken
up into layers for analysis just as is done for calculating settlement. Furthermore, the
stress increase decreases as one moves toward the toe of the embankment. Therefore,
the soft subsoil may need to be broken up into vertical sections as well.
Determine the strength gain in each layer/section of soft subsoil by multiplying the
consolidation stress increase by the tangent of φconsol (see Equation 9-6), where φconsol
is determined as shown in Figure 9-5 and Equation 9-5. This will be an undrained
strength. Multiply this UU strength by the percent consolidation that has occurred
beneath the embankment up to the point in time selected for the fill stage analysis using
Equations 9-7, 9-8, and 9-9 or 9-10. This will be the strength increase that has occurred
up to that point in time. Add to this the UU soil strength existing before placement of
the first embankment stage to obtain the total UU strength existing after the selected
consolidation period is complete. Then perform a slope stability analysis to determine
how much additional fill can be added with consideration to the new consolidated shear
strength to obtain the minimum acceptable interim factor of safety.
Once the second embankment stage is placed, calculation of the percent consolidation
and the strength gain gets more complicated, as the stress increase due to the new fill
placed is just starting the consolidation process, while the soft subsoil has already
had time to react to the stress increase due to the previous fill stage. Furthermore,
the soft subsoil will still be consolidating under the weight of the earlier fill stage.
This is illustrated in Figure 9-6. For simplicity, a weighted average of the percent
consolidation that has occurred for each stage up to the point in time in question should
be used to determine the average percent consolidation of the subsoil due to the total
weight of the fill.
Continue this calculation process until the fill is full height. It is generally best
to choose as small a fill height and delay period increment as practical, as the
conservatism in the consolidation time estimate increases as the fill height and delay
time increment increases. Typical fill height increments range from 2 to 4 feet, and
delay period increments range from 10 to 30 days.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-21
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Consolidation of soil due to first stage load P1
0 during first stage consolidation period.
Consolidation of soil due to
second stage load P2 during
second stage consolidation period.
% Consolidation
Consolidation of soil due to P2
first stage load P1 during second P1
stage consolidation period.
100
Time
e0 Begin consolidation at P1
Load P2 added
Void Ratio, e
Consolidation at P2
Increasing
% consolidation
Last stage
fill placed U1
(decreasing)
FS = 1.25 obtained
U2
U3
U4
Log σv (increasing)
Concepts Regarding the Percent Consolidation Resulting
From Placement of Multiple Fill Stages
Figure 9-6
9 .3 .1 .4 Effective Stress Analysis
In this approach, the drained soil strength, or φCD, is used to characterize the
strength of the subsoil. Of course, the use of this soil strength will likely indicate
that the embankment is stable, whereas the UU strength data would indicate that the
embankment is unstable (in this example). It is the buildup of pore pressure during
embankment placement that causes the embankment to become unstable. The amount
of pore pressure buildup is dependent on how rapidly the embankment load is placed.
Given enough time, the pore pressure buildup will dissipate and the soil will regain its
effective strength, depending on the permeability and compressibility of the soil.
Page 9-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
The key to this approach is to determine the amount of pore pressure buildup that can
be tolerated before the embankment safety factor drops to a critical level, using φCD
for the soil strength and conducting a slope stability analysis (see Chapter 7). A slope
stability computer program such as XSTABL can be used to determine the critical pore
pressure increase directly. This pore pressure increase can then be used to determine
the pore pressure ratio, ru, which is often used to compare with in-situ pore pressure
measurements. The pore pressure ratio, ru, is defined as shown in Figure 9-7.
Pore Pressure Ratio Concepts
Figure 9-7
For XSTABL, the critical pore pressure increase is input into the program as a “pore
pressure constant” for each defined soil unit in the soil property input menu of the
program. This pore pressure is in addition to the pore pressure created by the static
water table. Therefore, a water table should also be included in the analysis. Other
slope stability programs have similar pore pressure features that can be utilized.
To determine the pore pressure increase in the soft subsoil to be input into the
stability analysis, calculate the vertical stress increase created by the embankment
at the original ground surface, for the embankment height at the construction stage
being considered. Based on this, determine the vertical stress increase, Δσv, using the
Boussinesq stress distribution (e.g., Figures 9-2 and 9-3), at various depths below the
ground surface, and distances horizontally from the embankment centerline, in each
soil unit which pore pressure buildup is expected (i.e., the soft silt or clay strata which
are causing the stability problem). Based on this, and using Ko, the at rest earth
pressure coefficient, to estimate the horizontal stress caused by the vertical stress
increase, determine the pore pressure increase, Δup, based on the calculated vertical
stress increase, Δσv, as follows:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-23
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Page 9-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
embankment unless one is lucky enough to have installed a piezometer in the
right location and happens to be taking a reading as the embankment is failing.
Therefore, the pore pressure increase measured by the piezometers will be strictly due
to consolidation stresses.
Note that ru will vary depending on the embankment height analyzed. ru will be lowest
at the maximum embankment height, and will be highest at the initial stages of fill
construction. Therefore, ru should be determined at several embankment heights.
9.3.2 Base reinforcement
Base reinforcement may be used to increase the factor of safety against slope failure.
Base reinforcement typically consists of placing a geotextile or geogrid at the base
of an embankment prior to constructing the embankment. Base reinforcement
is particularly effective where soft/weak soils are present below a planned embankment
location. The base reinforcement can be designed for either temporary or permanent
applications. Most base reinforcement applications are temporary, in that the
reinforcement is needed only until the underlying soil’s shear strength has increased
sufficiently as a result of consolidation under the weight of the embankment (see
Section 9.3.1). Therefore, the base reinforcement does not need to meet the same
design requirements as permanent base reinforcement regarding creep and durability.
For example, if it is anticipated that the soil will gain adequate strength to meet
stability requirements without the base reinforcement within 6 months, then the creep
reduction factor determined per WSDOT Standard Practice T925 could be based
on, say, a minimum 1 year life, assuming deformation design requirements are met.
Other than this, only installation damage would need to be addressed, unless unusual
chemical conditions exist that could cause rapid strength degradation. Alternatively,
the values of Tal provided in the WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL) could be used,
but will be conservative for this application. However, if it is anticipated that the soil
will never gain enough strength to cause the embankment to have the desired level
of stability without the base reinforcement, the long-term design strengths provided
in the QPL or as otherwise determined using T925 for a minimum 75 year life shall
be used.
The design of base reinforcement is similar to the design of a reinforced slope in that
limit equilibrium slope stability methods are used to determine the strength required
to obtain the desired safety factor (see Chapter 15). The detailed design procedures
provided by Holtz, et al. (1995) should be used for embankments utilizing base
reinforcement.
Base reinforcement materials should be placed in continuous longitudinal strips in the
direction of main reinforcement. Joints between pieces of geotextile or geogrid in the
strength direction (perpendicular to the slope) should be avoided. All seams in the
geotextiles should be sewn and not lapped. Likewise, geogrids should be linked with
mechanical fasteners or pins and not simply overlapped. Where base reinforcement
is used, the use of gravel borrow, instead of common or select borrow, may also be
appropriate in order to increase the embankment shear strength.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-25
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.3.3 Ground Improvement
Ground improvement can be used to mitigate inadequate slope stability for both
new and existing embankments, as well as reduce settlement. The primary ground
improvement techniques to mitigate slope stability fall into two general categories,
namely densification and altering the soil composition. Chapter 11 Ground
Improvement, should be reviewed for a more detailed discussion and key references
regarding the advantages and disadvantages of these techniques, applicability for the
prevailing subsurface conditions, construction considerations, and costs. In addition
to the two general categories of ground improvement identified above, wick drains
(discussed in Chapter 11 and Section 9.4.1) may be used in combination with staged
embankment construction to accelerate strength gain and improve stability, in addition
to accelerating long-term settlement. The wick drains in effect drastically reduce the
drainage path length, thereby accelerating the rate of strength gain. Other ground
improvement techniques such as stone columns can function to accelerate strength
gain in the same way as wick drains, though the stone columns also reduce the stress
applied to the soil, thereby reducing the total strength gain obtained. See Chapter 11 for
additional guidance and references to use if this technique is to be implemented.
9.3.4 Lightweight Fills
Lightweight embankment fill is another means of improving embankment stability.
Lightweight fills are generally used for two conditions: the reduction of the driving
forces contributing to instability, and reduction of potential settlement resulting from
consolidation of compressible foundation soils. Situations where lightweight fill may
be appropriate include conditions where the construction schedule does not allow the
use of staged construction, where existing utilities or adjacent structures are present
that cannot tolerate the magnitude of settlement induced by placement of typical
fill, and at locations where post-construction settlements may be excessive under
conventional fills.
Lightweight fill can consist of a variety of materials including polystyrene blocks
(geofoam), light weight aggregates (rhyolite, expanded shale, blast furnace slag,
fly ash), wood fiber, shredded rubber tires, and other materials. Lightweight fills
are infrequently used due to either high costs or other disadvantages with using
these materials.
9 .3 .4 .1 Geofoam
Geofoam is approximately 1/100th the weight of conventional soil fill and, as a
result, is particularly effective at reducing driving forces or settlement potential.
Typical geofoam embankments consist of the foundation soils, the geofoam fill, and a
pavement system designed to transfer loads to the geofoam. Geofoam dissolves readily
in gasoline and other organic fluids/vapors and therefore must be encapsulated where
such fluids can potentially reach the geofoam. Other design considerations for geofoam
include creep, flammability, buoyancy, moisture absorption, photo-degradation, and
differential icing of pavement constructed over geofoam. Furthermore, geofoam should
not be used where the water table could rise and cause buoyancy problems, as geofaom
will float. Design guidelines for geofoam embankments are provided in the NCHRP
document titled Geofoam Applications in the Design and Construction of Highway
Embankments (Stark et al., 2004). Additional information on the design properties and
testing requirements are provided in Chapter 5.
Page 9-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9.3.4.2 Lightweight Aggregates
Mineral aggregates, such as expanded shales, rhyolite, fly ash, or blast furnace
slags, can also be used as lightweight fill materials. Expanded shales and rhyolite
materials consist of inert mineral aggregates that have similar shear strengths to many
conventional fill materials, but weigh roughly half as much. The primary disadvantage
with expanded shales and rhyolite is that these materials are expensive. Fly ash can
also be used for lightweight fill; however, fly ash is difficult to place and properly
control the moisture condition. Blast furnace slag is another waste material sometimes
used for lightweight fill. Due to the weight of blast furnace slag, it is not as effective
as other lightweight fill materials. Also, slag materials have been documented to
swell when hydrated, potentially damaging improvements founded above the slag.
The chemical composition of fly ash and blast furnace slag should be investigated to
confirm that high levels of contaminants are not present. Due to the potential durability
and chemical issues associated with some light weight aggregates, approval from the
State Geotechnical Engineer is required before such materials may be considered for
use in embankments.
9 .3 .4 .3 Wood Fiber
Wood fibers may also be used for lightweight fill. For permanent applications, only
fresh wood fiber should be used to prolong the life of the fill. Wood fiber fills typically
have unit weights between about 35 to 55 pcf. To mitigate the effects of leachate,
the amount of water entering the wood should be minimized. Wood fiber fill will
experience creep settlement for several years and some pavement distress should be
expected during that period. See Chapter 5 for more information regarding wood
fiber fills.
9 .3 .4 .4 Scrap (Rubber) Tires
In 1996, a moratorium on the use of scrap tires as embankment fill was put into effect
due to several instances where the tire fills caught fire due to some type of exothermic
reaction which has yet to be fully defined. A report to the Washington State legislature
was published in 2003 to address whether or not, and under what circumstances, the
moratorium on the use of scrap tires as fill should be lifted (Baker, et al., 2003). Based
on that report, scrap tire fills up to 10 feet in thickness may be considered, provided
that they are designed and specified as described in Baker, et al. (2003).
9.3.4.5 Light Weight Cellular Concrete
Large quantities of air can be entrained into concrete to produce a very light weight
porous concrete that can be poured in place of soil to reduce the driving force to
improve stability or reduce settlement. Typical unit weights feasible range from 20
to 80 pcf, and relative to soil, its shear strength is fairly high. However, if significant
differential settlement is still anticipated in spite of the use of the light weight concrete,
due to its relatively brittle nature, the concrete could crack, losing much of its shear
strength. This should be considered if using light weight cellular concrete. Its cost
can be quite high, being among the most expensive of the light weight fill materials
mentioned herein.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-27
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9 .3 .4 .6 Toe Berms and Shear keys
Toe berms and shear keys are each methods to improve the stability of an embankment
by increasing the resistance along potential failure surfaces. Toe berms are typically
constructed of granular materials that can be placed quickly, do not require much
compaction, but have relatively high shear strength. As implied by the name, toe berms
are constructed near the toe of the embankment slopes where stability is a concern. The
toe berms are often inclined flatter than the fill embankment side slopes, but the berm
itself should be checked for stability. The use of berms may increase the magnitude
of settlements as a consequence of the increased size of the loaded area.
Toe berms increase the shearing resistance by:
• Adding weight, and thus increasing the shear resistance of granular soils below the
toe area of the embankment;
• Adding high strength materials for additional resistance along potential failure
surfaces that pass through the toe berm; and
• Creating a longer failure surface, thus more shear resistance, as the failure surface
now must pass below the toe berm if it does not pass through the berm.
Shear keys function in a manner similar to toe berms, except instead of being adjacent
to and incorporating the toe of the fill embankment, the shear key is placed under
the fill embankment—frequently below the toe of the embankment. Shear keys are
best suited to conditions where they key can be embedded into a stronger underlying
formation. Shear keys typically range from 5 to 15 feet in width and extend 4 to
10 feet below the ground surface. They are typically backfilled with quarry spalls or
similar materials that are relatively easy to place below the groundwater level, require
minimal compaction, but still have high internal shear strength. Like toe berms, shear
keys improve the stability of the embankment by forcing the potential failure surface
through the strong shear key material or along a much longer path below the shear key.
9.4 Settlement Mitigation
9.4.1 Acceleration Using Wick Drains
Wick drains, or prefabricated drains, are in essence vertical drainage paths that can be
installed into compressible soils to decrease the overall time required for completion of
primary consolidation. Wick drains typically consist of a long plastic core surrounded
by a geotextile. The geotextile functions as a separator and a filter to keep holes in the
plastic core from being plugged by the adjacent soil, and the plastic core provides a
means for the excess pore water pressures to dissipate. A drainage blanket is typically
placed across the ground surface prior to installing the wick drains and provides a
drainage path beneath the embankment for water flowing from the wick drains.
The drains are typically band-shaped (rectangular) measuring a few inches wide in
plan dimension. They are attached to a mandrel and are usually driven/pushed into
place using either static or vibratory force. After the wick drains are installed, the
fill embankment and possibly surcharge fill are placed above the drainage blanket.
A key consideration for the use of wick drains is the site conditions. If obstructions
or a very dense or stiff soil layer is located above the compressible layer, pre-drilling
may be necessary. The use of wick drains to depths over about 60 feet require
specialized equipment.
Page 9-28 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
The primary function of a wick drain is to reduce the drainage path in a thick
compressible soil deposit. As noted in Section 9.3.3, a significant factor controlling the
time rate of settlement is the length of the drainage path. Since the time required for a
given percentage consolidation completion is related to the square of the drainage path,
cutting the drainage path in half would reduce the consolidation time to one-fourth
the initial time, all other parameters held constant. However, the process of installing
the wick drains creates a smear zone that can impede the drainage. The key design
issue is maximizing the efficiency of the spacing of the drains, and one of the primary
construction issues is minimizing the smear zone around the drains. A full description
of wick drains, design considerations, example designs, guideline specifications, and
installation considerations are provided by reference in Chapter 11. Section 2-03.3(14)
H of the WSDOT Standard Specifications addresses installation of prefabricated
vertical drains.
9.4.2 Acceleration Using Surcharges
Surcharge loads are additional loads placed on the fill embankment above and
beyond the design height. The primary purpose of a surcharge is to speed up the
consolidation process. The surcharges speed up the consolidation process because the
percentage of consolidation required under a surcharge will be less than the complete
consolidation under the design load. As noted previously, it is customary to assume
consolidation is essentially complete at the theoretical 90% completion stage, where
T = 0.848. In comparison, T = 0.197 for 50% consolidation. Therefore it takes less
than one-fourth the time to achieve an average of 50% consolidation in a soil layer
than it does to achieve 90%. In this example, the objective would be to place a
surcharge sufficiently large such that 50% of the total settlement estimated from the fill
embankment and the surcharge is equal to or greater than 100 percent of the settlement
estimated under the fill embankment alone at its design height. Based on previous
experience, the surcharge fill needs to be at least one-third the design height of the
embankment to provide any significant time savings.
In addition to decreasing the time to reach the target settlement, surcharges can also
be used to reduce the impact of secondary settlement. Similar to the example presented
above, the intent is to use the surcharge to pre-induce the settlement estimated to occur
from primary consolidation and secondary compression due to the embankment load.
For example, if the estimated primary consolidation under an embankment is 18 inches
and secondary compression is estimated at an additional 6 inches over the next
25 years, then the surcharge would be designed to achieve 24 inches of settlement
or greater under primary consolidation only. The principles of the design of surcharges
to mitigate long-term settlement provided by Cotton, et al. (1987) should be followed.
Using a surcharge typically will not completely eliminate secondary compression,
but it has been successfully used to reduce the magnitude of secondary settlement.
However, for highly organic soils or peats where secondary compression is expected
to be high, the success of a surcharge to reduce secondary compression may be quite
limited. Other more positive means may be needed to address the secondary
compression in this case, such as removal.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-29
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Two significant design and construction considerations for using surcharges include
embankment stability and re-use of the additional fill materials. New fill embankments
over soft soils can result in stability problems as discussed in Section 9.3. Adding
additional surcharge fill would only exacerbate the stability problem. Furthermore,
after the settlement objectives have been met, the surcharge will need to be removed. If
the surcharge material cannot be moved to another part of the project site for use as site
fill or as another surcharge, it often not economical to bring the extra surcharge fill to
the site only to haul it away again. Also, when fill soils must be handled multiple times
(such as with a “rolling” surcharge), it is advantageous to use gravel borrow to reduce
workability issues during wet weather conditions.
9.4.3 Lightweight Fills
Lightweight fills can also be used to mitigate settlement issues as indicated in
Section 9.3.4. Lightweight fills reduce the new loads imposed on the underlying
compressible soils, thereby reducing the magnitude of the settlement. See Chapter 5
and Section 9.3.4 for additional information on light weight fill.
9.4.4 Over-excavation
Over-excavation simply refers to excavating the soft compressible soils from below
the embankment footprint and replacing these materials with higher quality, less
compressible soil. Because of the high costs associated with excavating and disposing
of unsuitable soils as well as the difficulties associated with excavating below the water
table, over-excavation and replacement typically only makes economic sense under
certain conditions. Some of these conditions include, but are not limited to:
• The area requiring overexcavation is limited;
• The unsuitable soils are near the ground surface and do not extend very deep
(typically, even in the most favorable of construction conditions, over-excavation
depths greater than about 10 feet are in general not economical);
• Temporary shoring and dewatering are not required to support or facilitate
the excavation;
• The unsuitable soils can be wasted on site; and
• Suitable excess fill materials are readily available to replace the over-excavated
unsuitable soils.
9 .5 Construction Considerations and PS&E Development
Consideration should be given to the time of year that construction will likely occur.
If unsuitable soil was encountered during the field investigation, the depth and station
limits for removal should be provided on the plans. Chapter 530 of the WSDOT Design
Manual provides guidance for the use of geotextile for separation or soil stabilization
(see also Chapter 16). Note that for extremely soft and wet soil, a site specific design
should be performed for the geotextile.
Hillside Terracing is specified in Section 2-03.3(14) of the WSDOT Standard
Specifications. Where embankments are built on existing hillsides or existing
embankment slopes, the existing surface soil may form a plane of weakness unless
the slope is terraced or stepped. Terracing breaks up the plane, increasing the strength
of the entire system. Generally slopes that are 3H:1V or steeper should be terraced
Page 9-30 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
to improve stability. However there may be specific cases where terracing may be
waived during design, such as when the existing slope is steeper than 1H:1V and
benching would destabilize the existing slope.
The compaction requirements in the WSDOT Standard Specifications apply
to the entire embankment, including near the sloping face of the embankment.
For embankment slopes of 2H:1V or steeper, depending on the embankment soil
properties, getting good compaction out to the embankment face can be difficult
to achieve, and possibly even unsafe for those operating the compaction equipment.
The consequences of poor compaction at the sloping face of the embankment include
increased risk of erosion and even surficial slope instability. This issue becomes
especially problematic as the embankment slope steepness approaches 1.5H:1V.
Surficial stability of embankments (See Chapter 7) should be evaluated during design
for embankment slopes of 2H:1V or steeper. The embankment design shall include the
use of techniques that will improve embankment face slope stability for embankment
slopes steeper than 1.7H:1V, and should consider the use of such techniques for slopes
of 2H:1V or steeper.
Approaches typically used to address compaction and surficial stability of embankment
slopes include:
• Over-build the embankment laterally at the slope face approximately 2 feet,
compact the soil, and then trim off the outer 2 feet of the embankment to produce a
well compacted slope face.
• Use strips of geosynthetic placed in horizontal layers at the slope face as a
compaction and surficial stability aid (see Elias, et al., 2001). The strips should
generally be a minimum of 4 feet wide (horizontally into the slope) and spaced
vertically at 1 to 1.5 feet (1.5 feet maximum). The specific reinforcement width
and vertical spacing will depend on the soil type. The reinforcement strength
required depends on the coarseness and angularity of the backfill material and the
susceptibility of the geosynthetic to damage during placement and compaction. See
Elias, et al. (2001) for specific guidance on the design of geosynthetic layers as a
compaction and surficial stability aid.
Even if good compaction can be obtained using one of these techniques, the potential
for erosion and surficial instability should be addressed through appropriate use
of slope vegetation techniques such as seeding and mulching, temporary or permanent
turf reinforcement mats, or for deeper surficial stability problems, bioengineering.
Note that if geosynthetic layers are placed in the soil as a compaction aid or to
improve overall embankment slope stability, the typical practice of cultivating the
upper 1 feet of the soil per the WSDOT Standard Specifications, Section 8-02,
should not be conducted. Instead, the landscape architect who is developing the slope
vegetation plan should consult with the HQ Geotechnical Division to insure that the
slope vegetation plan (either per the WSDOT Standard Specifications or any special
provisions developed) does not conflict with the slope geosynthetic reinforcement and
the need for good compaction out to the slope face.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-31
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.5.1 Settlement and Pore Pressure Monitoring
If settlement is expected to continue after embankment construction, some type
of monitoring program should be provided. Settlement should be monitored, if post
construction settlement will affect pavement performance or a settlement sensitive
structure will be constructed on the embankment. The type of monitoring will depend
on the magnitude and time frame of the settlement. For many monitoring programs,
use of survey hubs or monuments and routine surveying methods are adequate. These
methods are commonly used if paving should be delayed until embankment settlement
is nearly complete. The geotechnical report should include the time period that the
settlement should be monitored and the frequency of observations.
Settlement estimates provided in the contract should be conservative. Therefore,
if another construction operation must be delayed until the settlement of the
embankment is nearly complete, the time estimate should be the longest length
of time that is likely to be necessary; then the contractor will not be delayed longer
than anticipated.
As discussed in Section 9.3.1, embankments constructed over soft ground may require
the use of staged construction to ensure the stability of the embankment. Geotechnical
instrumentation is a vital part of construction to monitor field performance and provide
information relevant to decisions regarding the rate of construction. The principal
parameters monitored during embankment construction are pore water pressure and
displacement, both vertical and lateral.
As discussed previously, in relatively impermeable, soft, saturated soil, the applied
load from embankment construction increases the pore water pressure. With time,
the excess pore water pressure will dissipate and the shear strength will increase.
It is important to measure the pore water pressure to determine when it is safe
to proceed with additional embankment construction. In such cases it is also useful
to measure vertical deformation to assist in the interpretation of the data to assess the
rate at which embankment construction should proceed.
9.5.2 Instrumentation
The following discussion of monitoring equipment typically used for embankment
construction monitoring provides an overview of the typical equipment available. A
more comprehensive discussion of monitoring techniques is available in Geotechnical
Instrumentation for Monitoring Field Performance (Dunnicliff, 1993) and
Geotechnical Instrumentation Reference Manual, NHI Course No. 13241 FHWA-
HI-98-034 (Dunnicliff, 1998). Additional information on WSDOT policies regarding
instrumentation installation and standards is provided in Chapter 3.
9 .5 .2 .1 Piezometers
Three types of piezometers are commonly used to monitor embankment construction:
open standpipe, pneumatic and vibrating wire. Each type of piezometer has advantages
and disadvantages. The sections below describe the various piezometer types.
Open Standpipe Piezometers – These piezometers are installed in a drilled borehole.
A porous zone or screen is installed in the soil layer of interest. For embankment
settlement purposes it is necessary to completely seal the porous zone against the
inflow of water from shallower zones. Open standpipe piezometers are relatively
Page 9-32 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
simple to install and the water level readings are easy to obtain. However, standpipes
may interfere with or be damaged by construction activities and the response time
for changes in water pore pressure in low permeability soils is slow. This type
of piezometer is generally not very useful for monitoring the pore pressure increase
and subsequent decrease due to consolidation in staged construction applications.
Pneumatic Piezometers – Pneumatic piezometers are usually installed in drilled
boreholes in a manner similar to standpipe piezometers, but they can be sealed
so that increases in pore water pressure result in a smaller volume change and a
more rapid response in instrument measurement. Pneumatic piezometers do not need
open standpipes. However, crimping or rupture of the tubes due to settlement of the
embankment can cause failure.
Vibrating Wire Piezometers – Vibrating wire piezometers are usually installed
in drilled boreholes; although, models are available for pushing into place in soft soils.
The cables can be routed long distances and they are easily connected to automatic
data acquisition systems.
9 .5 .2 .2 Instrumentation for Settlement
9.5.2.2.1 Settlement Plates
Settlement plates are used to monitor settlement at the interface between native ground
and the overlying fill. They consist of a steel plate welded to a steel pipe. An outer pipe
consisting of steel or PVC pipe is placed around the pipe and the embankment is built
up around it. Both pipes are extended to the completed surface. The outer pipe isolates
the inner pipe from contact with the fill. As the embankment and soil surface settle,
the top of the inner pipe can be monitored with standard survey equipment. These
devices are simple to use, but provide data at only one point and are subject to damage
during construction.
9.5.2.2.2 Pneumatic Settlement Cells
These cells are generally placed at the interface between the embankment fill and
native ground. A flexible tube is routed to a reservoir, which must be located away
from the settlement area. The reservoir must be kept at a constant elevation. The
precision of the cells is about 0.75 inches.
9.5.2.2.3 Sondex System
The Sondex System can be used for monitoring settlement at several points at depth.
The system is installed in a borehole and consists of a series of stainless steel wire
loops on a plastic corrugated pipe. The plastic pipe is placed over an access casing
and grouted in the borehole. The locations of the stainless steel loops are determined
by electrical induction measurements from a readout unit. The loops can be located
to about 0.05 inches and displacements of up to 2 inches can be measured. Accurate
measurement of settlement depends on the compatibility of the soil and grout.
Therefore, if the grout mix has a higher strength than the surrounding soil, not all the
settlement will be measured.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-33
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.5.2.2.4 Horizontal Inclinometer
Horizontal inclinometers are used to measure vertical deflections in a grooved guide
casing, placed horizontally beneath the embankment. The probe is pulled through the
casing and readings of inclination relative to horizontal are obtained. The inclinometer
is a highly accurate system for obtaining settlement data. Because the length of the
inclinometer probe is typically about 2 feet, large displacements of the casing caused
by settlement may stop passage of the probe.
9.5.3 PS&E Considerations
Specifications for monitoring equipment that will be supplied by the contractor
should ensure that the equipment is compatible with the read out equipment that
will be used during construction. The specifications should also make clear who will
provide the monitoring and analyze the data. If the contractor’s survey crew will
collect the settlement data, it should be indicated in the special provisions. It is also
important to stipulate who will analyze the data and provide the final determination
on when settlement is complete or when additional fill can be placed. In general, the
geotechnical designer should analyze and interpret the data.
9.5.4 PS&E Checklist
The following issues should be addressed in the PS&E regarding embankments:
• Slope inclination required for stability
• Embankment foundation preparation requirements, overexcavation limits shown
on plans
• Plan details for special drainage requirements such as lined ditches, interceptor
trenches, drainage blankets, etc.
• Hillside terracing requirements
• Evaluation of on-site materials
• Special embankment material requirements
• Special treatment required for fill placement such as non-durable rock, plastic soil,
or lightweight fill
• Magnitude and time for settlement
• Settlement waiting period estimated in the Special Provisions (SP)
• Size and limits of surcharge
• Special monitoring needs
• If instrumentation is required to control the rate of fill placement, do the SP’s
clearly spell out how this will be done and how the readings will be used to control
the contractor’s operation
• SP’s clearly state that any instrumentation damaged by contractor personnel will be
repaired or replaced at no cost to the state
• Settlement issues with adjacent structures, should construction of structures be
delayed during embankment settlement period
• Monitoring of adjacent structures
Page 9-34 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9.5.5 Requirements for Temporary Fills for Construction Facilitation
Temporary fills for haul roads, construction equipment access, and other temporary
construction activities shall be designed in accordance with this GDM, in particular
this chapter (Chapter 9), except as noted in the following subsections.
9 .5 .5 .1 Design Requirements
The design of the temporary fill/fill slope shall address the stability and settlement of
the temporary fill itself as well as the impact of the temporary fill on the global stability
and deformation of the of the overall slope on which the fill is located. The stability
and movement of any temporary structures and construction equipment (e.g., cranes,
compaction equipment, etc.) placed on the temporary fill shall also be addressed
in the design. Temporary fills and fill slopes shall be designed such that the risk to
health and safety of workers and the public is kept to an acceptable level and that
adjacent facilities are not damaged. Seismic design of temporary fills and fill slopes is
not required.
If temporary fills are placed on or adjacent to permanent or temporary structures, the
impact of the temporary fill on those structures, both with regard to stability and lateral
and vertical movements, shall be assessed. The functioning and design life of those
structures shall not be compromised by the placement of the temporary fill.
If temporary walls are used to support the temporary fill, the impact of the temporary
fill on the wall stability and deformations shall be addressed, and the design of the
temporary wall shall meet the requirements in Chapter 15 and the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications.
As a minimum, the design of temporary fill slopes for stability by or under the
supervision of a registered professional engineer shall include geotechnical
calculations to address slope stability (i.e., Chapter 7). If the fill is placed over
relatively soft to very soft ground, the deformation of the fill shall also be determined
through engineering calculations (i.e., Chapter 9) that are based on a knowledge of
the subsurface conditions present and engineering data that can be used to estimate
soil and rock properties. Such calculations shall also address the effect of ground
water conditions and the loading conditions on or above the slope that could affect
its stability and deformation. The design shall be conducted in accordance with the
requirements in this GDM and referenced documents. Engineering recommendations
based upon field observations alone shall not be considered to be an engineering
design, unless the fill is a low height (less than 10 feet high) granular, cohesionless
well-compacted fill without concentrated loads from large equipment or structure
supports, and the fill is placed over dense to very dense soil or rock, in which the
supporting soil or rock is not affected by fissures, slickensides, or other localized
weaknesses.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-35
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
9.5.5.2 Safety Factors and Design Life Considerations
For temporary fill slopes, the safety factors specified in Section 9.2.3.1 are applicable.
If the soil properties are well defined and shown to have low variability, a lower
factor of safety may be justified through the use of the Monte Carlo simulation feature
available in slope stability analysis computer programs. In this case, a probability of
failure of 0.01 or smaller shall be targeted (Santamarina, et al., 1992). However, even
with this additional analysis, in no case shall a slope stability safety factor less than
1.2 be used for design of the temporary fill slope.
9.5.5.3 Design Loads
The design of temporary fills and fill slopes shall address the actual construction-
related loads that could be imposed on the temporary fill. As a minimum, the
temporary fill shall be designed for a live load surcharge of 250 psf to address routine
construction equipment traffic on the fill. For unusual temporary loadings resulting
from large cranes or other large equipment placed on the fill, the loading imposed
by the equipment shall be specifically assessed and taken into account in the design
of the fill. For the case where large or unusual construction equipment loads will
be applied to the fill, the construction equipment loads shall still be considered to be a
live load, unless the dynamic and transient forces caused by use of the construction
equipment can be separated from the construction equipment weight as a dead load,
in which case, only the dynamic or transient loads carried or created by the use of the
construction equipment need to be considered live load.
If temporary structures (e.g., false work and formwork support) are placed
on or adjacent to the temporary fill, the temporary fill shall be designed to carry the
loads resulting from the temporary structures and to meet the stability and deformation
requirements of those structures.
9 .5 .5 .4 Design Property Selection
In addition to the requirements in Chapter 9 for determination of design properties,
the requirements for design property selection for temporary cuts and shoring in
Chapters 5 and 15 shall also be considered applicable to temporary fills and fill slopes.
9 .5 .5 .5 Performance Requirements for Temporary Fills and Fill Slopes
Temporary fills and slopes shall be designed to prevent excessive deformation that
could result in damage to adjacent facilities, both during fill construction and during
the life of the temporary fill. An estimate of expected displacements or vibrations,
threshold limits that would trigger remedial actions, and a list of potential remedial
actions if thresholds are exceeded should be developed. Thresholds shall be established
to prevent damage to adjacent facilities, as well as degradation of the soil properties
due to deformation.
The removal of the temporary fill shall not adversely impact adjacent structures and
facilities.
Page 9-36 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
9 .5 .5 .6 Temporary Fill Submittal and Submittal Review Requirements
Temporary Fill submittals shall generally meet the requirements in Section 2-09.3(3)B
of the Standard Specifications M 41-10.
When performing a geotechnical review of a contractor temporary fill submittal, the
following items should be specifically evaluated:
1. Performance objectives for the temporary fill
a. Is the anticipated length of time the temporary fill will be in place provided?
b. Are objectives regarding anticipated and allowed deformations of the fill and
adjacent and supported structures provided?
c. Are the performance objectives compatible and consistent with contract and
GDM/BDM requirements?
2. Subsurface conditions
a. Is the soil/rock stratigraphy consistent with the subsurface geotechnical data
provided in the contract boring logs?
b. Did the contractor/fill designer obtain the additional subsurface data needed
to meet the geotechnical exploration requirements fills and temporary fill walls
as identified in Chapters 9 and 15, respectively?
c. Was justification for the soil, rock, and other material properties used for the
design of the temporary fill provided, and is that justification, and the final
values selected, consistent with Chapter 5 and the subsurface field and lab data
obtained at the fill site?
d. Were ground water conditions adequately assessed through field measurements
combined with the site stratigraphy to identify zones of ground water, aquitards
and aquicludes, artesian conditions, and perched zones of ground water that
could impact the stability and deformation of the fill and adjacent facilities that
may be impacted by the presence of the temporary fill?
3. Temporary fill loading
a. Have the anticipated loads on or caused by the temporary fill been correctly
identified, considering all applicable limit states?
b. If construction or public traffic near or on the temporary fill, has a minimum
traffic live load surcharge of 250 psf been applied?
c. If larger construction equipment such as cranes will be placed on the temporary
fill, have the loads from that equipment been correctly determined and included
in the temporary fill design?
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-37
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
4. Temporary fill design
a. Have the correct design procedures been used (i.e., the GDM and referenced
design specifications and manuals)?
b. Have all appropriate limit states been considered (e.g., global stability of slopes
above and below wall, global stability of wall/slope combination, internal
wall stability, external wall stability, bearing capacity, settlement, lateral
deformation, piping or heaving due to differential water head, etc.)?
5. Are all safety factors, or load and resistance factors for LRFD temporary wall
or structure design, identified, properly justified in a manner that is consistent with
the GDM, and meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the GDM?
6. Have the effects of any construction activities adjacent to the temporary fill
on the stability/performance of the fill been addressed in the shoring design (e.g.,
excavation or soil disturbance below the fill, excavation dewatering, vibrations and
soil loosening due to soil modification/improvement activities, etc.)?
7. Temporary fill monitoring/testing
a. Is a monitoring/testing plan provided to verify that the performance of the fill
and the structures it supports or impacts is acceptable throughout the design life
of the system?
b. Have appropriate displacement or other performance triggers been provided
that are consistent with the performance objectives of the fill and adjacent
facilities?
8. Temporary fill removal
a. Have any portions of the temporary fill (including temporary fill walls used
to support the fill) to be left in place after construction of the permanent
structure is complete been identified?
b. Has a plan been provided regarding how to prevent the remaining portions
of the temporary fill or walls from interfering with future construction and
performance of the finished work (e.g., will the remaining portions impede
flow of ground water, create a hard spot, create a surface of weakness regarding
slope stability, etc.)?
9 .6 References
Baker, T. E., Allen, T. M., Pierce, L. M., Jenkins, D. V., Mooney, D. T., Christie, R. A.,
and Weston, J. T., 2003, Evaluation of the Use of Scrap Tires in Transportation Related
Applications in the State of Washington, Report to the Legislature as Required by SHB
2308, WSDOT, 268 pp.
Boussinesq, J., 1885, “Application des Potentiels a L’Etude de L’Equilibre et due
Mouvement des Solides Elastiques,” Gauthier-Villars, Paris.
Cheney, R. and Chassie, R. 2000. Soils and Foundations Workshop Reference Manual.
Washington, DC, National Highway Institute Publication NHI-00-045, Federal
Highway Administration.
Page 9-38 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 9 Embankments
Cotton, D. M., Kilian, A. P., and Allen T 1987, “Westbound Embankment Preload
on Rainier Avenue, Seattle, Washington,” Transportation Research Record 1119,
Washington, DC, pp. 61-75.
Dunnicliff, J., 1993, Geotechnical Instrumentation for Monitoring Field Performance,
NCHRP Synthesis 89, Transportation Research Board.
Elias, V., and Christopher, B.R., and Berg, R. R., 2001, Mechanically Stabilized Earth
Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes - Design and Construction Guidelines, No. FHWA-
NHI-00-043, Federal Highway Administration, 394 pp.
Federal Highway Administration, 1992, “EMBANK,” Computer Program, Users
Manual Publication No. FHWA-SA-92-045.
Dunnicliff, J., 1998, Geotechnical Instrumentation Reference Manual, NHI Course
No. 13241, Module 11. FHWA-HI-98-034, Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation.
Holtz, R. D., and Kovacs, W. D., 1981, An Introduction to Geotechnical Engineering,
Prentice-Hall, Inc, Eaglewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
Holtz, R. D., Christopher, B. R., and Berg, R. R., 1995, Geosynthetic Design and
Construction Guidelines, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA HI-95-038.
Ladd, C. C., 1991, “Stability Evaluation During Staged Construction (the 22nd Karl
Terzaghi Lecture),” Journal of Geotechnical Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 117, No. 4, pp.
540-615.
Machan, G., Szymoniak, T. and Siel, B., 1989, “Evaluation of Shale Embankment
Construction Criteria, Experimental Feature Final Report OR 83-02,” Oregon State
Highway Division, Geotechnical Engineering Group.
NAVFAC, 1971, Design Manual: Soil Mechanics, Foundations, and Earth Structures,
DM-7. (note: included as Appendix A in US Department of Defense, 2005,
Soil Mechanics, Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC), UFC 3-220-10N).
Prototype Engineering, Inc., 1993, “SAF-1” Soil Settlement Analyses Software Suite,
Winchester, Massachusetts.
Sabatini, P.J, Bachus, R.C, Mayne, P.W., Schneider, J.A., Zettler, T.E 2002,
Geotechnical Engineering Circular 5 (GEC5) - Evaluation of Soil and Rock
Properties. Report No FHWA-IF-02-034. Federal Highway Administration, U.S.
Department of Transportation.
Santamarina, J. C., Altschaeffl, A. G., and Chameau, J. L., 1992, “Reliability of Slopes:
Incorporating Qualitative Information,” Transportation Research Board, TRR 1343,
Washington, D.C., pp. 1-5.
Skempton, A. W., and Bishop, A. W., 1955, “The Gain in Stability Due to Pore
Pressure Dissipation in a Soft Clay Foundation,” Fifth International Conference on
Large Dams, Paris, pp. 613-638.
Stark, T., Arellano, D., Horvath, J. and Leshchinsky, D., 2004, Geofoam Applications
in the Design and Construction of Highway Embankments, NCHRP Report 529,
Transportation Research Board, 58 pp.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-39
October 2013
Embankments Chapter 9
Symons, I. F., 1976, Assessment and Control of Stability for Road Embankments
Constructed on Soft Subsoils, Transport and Road Research laboratory, Crowthorne,
Berkshire, TRRL Laboratory Report 711, 32 pp.
Tonkins, T. and Terranova, T., 1995, “Instrumentation of Transportation Embankments
Constructed on Soft Ground,” Transportation Research Circular No. 438.
Westergaard, H., 1938, “A Problem of Elasticity Suggested by a Problem in Soil
Mechanics: A Soft Material Reinforced by Numerous Strong Horizontal Sheets,” in
Contribution to the Mechanics of Solids, Stephen Timoshenko 60th Anniversary Volume,
Macmillan, New York, New York, pp. 268-277.
Page 9-40 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Gravel Borrow
φ = 36°
γT = 130 pcf
Soft Silt
γT = 90 pcf
CUU = 160 psf
φCU = 17° φCD = 27°
Cv = 1.0 ft2/day
Ko = 0.55
B = 1.0
Dense Sand
φ = 40° γT = 125 pcf
Embankment Geometry for Example
Figure 9-A-1
Using the test results, the geotechnical designer should first assess short term
(undrained) strength of the embankment to determine if staged construction is
required. For the example geometry, XSTABL was used to assess short-term
(undrained) stability using Cuu = 160 psf (see Figures 9-4 and 9-5 for the specific
strength envelopes used). Figure 9-A-2 provides the results of the stability analysis,
and indicates that the factor of safety is well below the minimum long-term value of
1.25 required for an embankment without a structure. Therefore, staged construction
or some other form or mitigation is required to construct the embankment. For this
example, continue with a staged construction approach.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-1
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
Undrained Stability for the Example Geometry
Figure 9-A-2
Page 9-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
9-A.2 Determination of Maximum Stable First Stage Fill Height
The analysis conducted in the previous section is conducted again, but this time
limiting the fill height to that which has a factor of safety that is equal to or greater
than the minimum acceptable interim value (use FS = 1.15 to 1.2 minimum for this
example). As shown in Figure 9-A-3, the maximum initial fill height is 6 feet. This
initial fill height is used as a starting point for both the total stress and the effective
stress analyses.
Stage 1 Fill Stability, Assuming no Strength Gain and a Fill Height of 6 Feet
Figure 9-A-3
9-A .3 Total Stress Analysis Procedure Example
In this approach, the undrained soil strength envelope, or φconsol, as determined
in Figure 9-5, is used to characterize the strength of the subsoil. Next, the geotechnical
designer determines how much strength gain can be obtained by allowing the first
stage of fill to consolidate the underlying soft soils, using total stresses and undrained
strengths after consolidation (see Section 9.3.1.3). The geotechnical designer calculates
the stress increase resulting from the placement of the first embankment stage using
the Boussinesq equation or those of Westergaard (see Figures 9-2 and 9-3). Note that
because the stress increase due to the embankment load decreases with depth, the
strength gain also decreases with depth. To properly account for this, the soft subsoil
should be broken up into layers and zones for analysis just as is done for calculating
settlement. For the example, the subsurface is divided into the layers and zones
shown in Figure 9-A-4 to account for the differences in stress increase due to the
embankment. The geotechnical designer will have to utilize judgment in determining
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-3
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
the optimum number of layers and zones to use. If the division of zones is too coarse,
the method may not properly model the field conditions during construction, and too
fine of a division will result in excessive computational effort.
Division of Subsurface for Estimating Strength Increase and Consolidation
Figure 9-A-4
For the example geometry model the embankment as a continuous strip with a width
of 103 feet (B = 35’ + (4x20) – (2x6)). As zone 3 is located close to the center of the
embankment the stress change in that zone will be close to that near the center of the
embankment for the stage 1 loading. Therefore, zone 3 is not used in the analysis
example yet. It will be used later in the example. The stress increases in the zones are
as follows:
σv Δσv
Zone Layer Z Z/B I
6 feet × 130 pcf (I × σv)
1 5 feet 0.049 0.98 780 psf 764 psf
1
2 20 feet 0.190 0.93 780 psf 725 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.55 780 psf 429 psf
2
2 20 feet 0.190 0.75 780 psf 585 psf
Once the geotechnical designer has the stress increase, the increase in strength
due to consolidation can be estimated using Equations 9-6 and 9-7. However, the
strength increase achieved will depend on the degree of consolidation that occurs.
The consolidation is dependant upon the time (t), drainage path length (H), coefficient
of consolidation (Cv), and the Time Factor (T). Using Equations 9-8 through 9-10,
assuming the stage 1 fill is allowed to consolidate for 15 days and assuming the soft
soil layer is doubly drained, the percent consolidation would be:
T = tCv/H2
T = 15 days(1 feet2/Day)/(30 feet/2)2 (assumed double draining)
T = 0.067 = 0.25πU2; for U < 60%
U = 0.292 or 29%
Page 9-A-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
Therefore, at 15 days and 29% consolidation, using Equation 9-7, the strength gain
would be as follows:
Δσv
Zone Layer Cuui U φconsol Cuu 29%
(I × σv)
1 764 psf 160 psf 0.29 22° 250 psf
1
2 725 psf 160 psf 0.29 22° 245 psf
1 429 psf 160 psf 0.29 22° 210 psf
2
2 585 psf 160 psf 0.29 22° 228 psf
Using the same procedure the strength gain at other time periods can be estimated. For
example, at 60 days the percent consolidation would be 59%, and the strength gain
would be as follows:
Δσv
Zone Layer Cuui U φconsol Cuu 59%
(I × σv)
1 764 psf 160 psf 0.59 22° 342 psf
1
2 725 psf 160 psf 0.59 22° 333 psf
1 429 psf 160 psf 0.59 22° 262 psf
2
2 585 psf 160 psf 0.59 22° 299 psf
The geotechnical designer should consider that as consolidation time increases the
relative increase in strength becomes less as time continues to increase. Having
a settlement delay period that would achieve 100% consolidation is probably not
practical due to the excessive duration required. Delay period of more than 2 months
are generally not practical. Continue the example assuming a 15 day settlement
delay period will be required. Using the strength gained, the geotechnical designer
determines how much additional fill can be placed.
Determine the height of the second stage fill that can be constructed by using Cuu 29%
and increasing the fill height until the factor of safety is approximately 1.2 but not less
than 1.15. As shown in Figure 9-A-5, the total fill height can be increased to 8 feet
(2 feet of new fill is added) after the 15 day delay period.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-5
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
Stage 2 Undrained Analysis, Assuming 15 Day Delay Period After Atage 1,
and a Total Fill Height of 8 Feet
Figure 9-A-5
For the second stage of fill, the effective footing width changes as the fill becomes
thicker. The equivalent footing width for use with the Boussinesq stress distribution
will be 99 feet (B = 35’ + (4 × 20) – (2 × 8)). As zone 3 is located close to the center
of the embankment the stress change in that zone will be close to that near the center
of the embankment for the stage 1 and stage 2 loading. Therefore, zone 3 is not used
in the analysis example yet. It will be used later in the example. The stress increases in
the zones are as follows:
σv Δσv
Zone Layer Z Z/B I
8 feet × 130 pcf (I × σv)
1 5 feet 0.049 0.98 1040 psf 1019 psf
1
2 20 feet 0.190 0.93 1040 psf 967 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.55 1040 psf 231 psf
2
2 20 feet 0.190 0.75 1040 psf 315 psf
Once the geotechnical designer has the stress increase, the increase in strength
due to consolidation can be estimated. The geotechnical designer must now begin
to use weighted averaging to account for the difference in consolidation times
(see Figure 9-6). The first stage of fill was allowed to settle for 15 days prior to placing
the additional 2 feet of fill in the second stage, bringing the total fill height up to 8 feet.
If the second lift of soil is allowed to consolidate for another 15 days, the soil will
actually have been consolidating for 30 days total. For 30 days, the Time Factor (T).
would be:
Page 9-A-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
The strength gain at 30 days and 38% average consolidation would be as follows:
Δσv
Zone Layer Cuui U φconsol Cuu 38%
(I × σv)
1 764 psf 160 psf 0.38 22° 317 psf
1
2 725 psf 160 psf 0.38 22° 309 psf
1 429 psf 160 psf 0.38 22° 248 psf
2
2 585 psf 160 psf 0.38 22° 280 psf
The geotechnical designer would continue this iterative process of adding fill,
determining the weighted average consolidation, subsequent strength gain, and
stability analysis to determine the next “safe” lift until the embankment is constructed
full height.
Once the final stage fill is placed, it will continue to cause consolidation of the soft
subsoil, increasing its strength. The calculations to determine the time required once
the embankment is completed to cause the factor of safety to increase to the minimum
long-term acceptable FS of 1.25 are summarized as follows:
Δσv
Zone Layer Cuui U φconsol Cuu 38%
(I × σv)
1 2509 psf 160 psf 0.71 22° 880 psf
1
2 780 psf 160 psf 0.71 22° 384 psf
1 2314 psf 160 psf 0.71 22° 824 psf
2
2 962 psf 160 psf 0.71 22° 436 psf
1 1430 psf 160psf 0.71 22° 570 psf
3
2 1560 psf 160 psf 0.71 22° 608 psf
The calculations tabulated above assume that 25 days after the final fill layer is has
elapsed, resulting in an average degree of consolidation of 71%.
The final stability analysis, using the undrained shear strengths tabulated above,
is as shown in Figure 9-A-6.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-7
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
Final Stage Undrained Analysis, Assuming 25 Days Have Expired Since Last
Fill Increment Was Placed, and a Total Fill Height of 20 Feet
Figure 9-A-6
In summary, the fill increments and delay periods are as follows:
Stage Fill Increment Time Delay Prior to Next Stage
1 6 feet 15 days
2 2 feet 15 days
3 2 feet 15 days
4 2 feet 15 days
5 2 feet 30 days
6 2 feet 30 days
7 3 feet 10 days
8 1 feet 25 days to obtain FS = 1.25
TOTALS 20 feet 155 days
Fewer stages can be selected by the geotechnical designer, but longer delay periods
are required to achieve more consolidation and the higher strength increases necessary
to maintain stability. A comparable analysis using thicker fill stages and longer
settlement delay periods yielded the following:
Stage Fill Increment Time Delay Prior to Next Stage
1 6 feet 60 days
2 4.5 feet 60 days
3 5.5 feet 40 days
4 4 feet 5 days to obtain FS = 1.25
TOTALS 20 feet 165 days
Page 9-A-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
When using the total stress method of analysis it is often best to maximize the
initial fill height. Doing this will produce the greatest amount of soil strength gain
early in the construction of the fill. In addition, keeping the subsequent stages of fill
as small as possible enables the fill to be constructed with the shortest total delay
period, though in the end, the time required to achieve the final long-term safety factor
is approximately the same for either approach.
9-A .4 Effective Stress Analysis Procedure Example
In this approach, the drained soil strength, or φCD, is used to characterize the strength
of the subsoil. From Figure 9-5, φCD is 27°. However, it is the buildup of pore pressure
during embankment placement that causes the embankment to become unstable. The
amount of pore pressure buildup is dependent on how rapidly the embankment load
is placed. Given enough time, the pore pressure buildup will dissipate and the soil will
regain its effective strength, depending on the permeability and compressibility of the
soil. The key to this approach is to determine the amount of pore pressure build up that
can be tolerated before the embankment safety factor drops to a critical level when
using φCD for the soil strength. A limit equilibrium stability program such as XSTABL
should be used to determine the pore pressure increase that can be tolerated and result
in the embankment having a safety factor of 1.15 to 1.2 during construction.
Many of the newer stability programs have the ability to accept ru values directly
or to calculate r . The geotechnical designer should be aware of how the stability
u
program calculates r . When using XSTABL, the geotechnical designer should not
u
input r directly. Instead, he should input excess pore pressures directly into the
u
program and then run the stability analysis.
The rate of fill construction required to prevent ru from being exceeded cannot
be determined directly from the drained analysis, as embankment stability needs
in addition to the subsoil consolidation rate affects the rate of construction. The total
construction time cannot therefore be determined directly using Cv and the percent
consolidation required for stability.
Using the example geometry shown in Figure 9-A-1, the geotechnical designer should
divide the subsurface into layers and zones in a manner similar to that shown in Figure
9-A-4. The geotechnical designer then determines the stress increase due to the first
stage of fill, 6 feet in this case.
The stress increases in the zones are as follows based on an equivalent strip footing
width of 103 feet:
σv Δσv
Zone Layer Z Z/B I
6 feet × 130 pcf (I × σv)
1 5 feet 0.049 0.98 780 psf 764 psf
1
2 20 feet 0.190 0.93 780 psf 725 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.55 780 psf 429 psf
2
2 20 feet 0.190 0.75 780 psf 585 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.98 780 psf 764 psf
3
2 20 feet 0.019 0.93 780 psf 725 psf
Note that Zone 3 has the same stress increase as Zone 1.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-9
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
As discussed previously in Section 9.3.1.4, the pore pressure increase is dependent
upon the load and the degree of consolidation. Using Equation 9-15 with an assumed
percent consolidation, determine the pore pressure change to use in the stability
analysis. It will be necessary to perform the analysis for several percent consolidations
to determine what the critical pore pressure is for maintaining stability.
K0 = 1 - sin φCD = 1 – sin 27° = 0.55
B = 1.0, assuming subsoil is fully saturated. For Layer 1, Zone 1, at 30% consolidation,
Δup = B[(1 + 2K0)/3]Δσv(1-U) = 1.0[(1 + 2(0.55))/3](764 psf)(1-.30) = 374 psf
The remaining values are as follows:
Δσv
U Δup30% U Δup35% U Δup40%
Layer Zone (I × σv)
(%) (psf) (%) (psf) (%) (psf)
(psf)
1 764 30 374 35 346 40 320
1
2 725 30 354 35 329 40 303
1 429 30 209 35 194 40 179
2
2 585 30 286 35 265 40 245
1 764 30 373 35 346 40 320
3
2 725 30 354 35 329 40 303
The slope stability results from XSTABL are provided in Figure 9-A-7. For the two
subsoil layers, all zones, a drained friction angle, φCD, of 27° was used, and the pore
pressure increases Δup from the tabulated summary of the calculations provided above
were inserted into the soil zones shown in Figure 9-A-7 as pore pressure constants.
The results shown in this figure are for a percent consolidation of 35%.
Page 9-A-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
Stage 1 Drained Analysis at Percent Consolidation
of 35% and a Fill Height of 6 Feet
Figure 9-A-7
Using Equation 9-16, ru at this stage of the fill construction is determined as follows:
ru = B[(1 + 2K0)/3](1-U) = 1.0[(1 + 2(0.55))/3](1-0.35) = 0.45
Subsequent stages of fill construction are checked to determine the critical pore
pressure ratio, up to the point where the fill is completed. The pore pressure ratio
is evaluated at several fill heights, but not as many stages need to be analyzed as
is the case for total stress analysis, as the rate of fill construction is not the focus
of the drained analysis. All that needs to be achieved here is to adequately define
the relationship between ru and the fill height. Therefore, one intermediate fill height
(13.5 feet) and the maximum fill height (20 feet) will be checked.
For a fill height of 13.5 feet, the stress increases in the zones are as follows based on an
equivalent strip footing width of 88 feet:
σv Δσv
Zone Layer Z Z/B I
13 feet × 130 pcf (I × σv)
1 5 feet 0.049 0.97 1,690 psf 1,700 psf
1
2 20 feet 0.190 0.90 1,690 psf 1,580 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.40 1,690 psf 702 psf
2
2 20 feet 0.190 0.55 1,690 psf 965 psf
1 5 feet 0.049 0.75 1,690 psf 1,320 psf
3
2 20 feet 0.019 0.70 1,690 psf 1,230 psf
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-11
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
Note that the stress increase in Zone 3 is now different than the stress increase in
Zone 1, due to the fact that the embankment slope now is over the top of Zone 3.
The pore pressure increase resulting from a 13.5 feet high fill, assuming various
percent consolidations, is recalculated using Equation 9-15 as illustrated earlier. The
results of these calculations are as tabulated below:
Δσv
U Δup55% U Δup60% U Δup65%
Zone Layer (I × σv)
(%) (psf) (%) (psf) (%) (psf)
(psf)
1 1702 55 534 60 475 65 415
1
2 1580 55 496 60 441 65 386
1 702 55 220 60 196 65 171
2
2 695 55 218 60 194 65 170
1 1316 55 413 60 367 65 321
3
2 1229 55 386 60 343 65 300
Note that higher percent consolidations are targeted, as a higher percent consolidation
is likely to have occurred by the time the fill is 13.5 feet high. The slope stability
results from XSTABL are provided in Figure 9-A-8. For the two subsoil layers, all
zones, a drained friction angle, φCD, of 27° was used, and the pore pressure increases
Δup from the tabulated summary of the calculations provided above were inserted into
the soil zones shown in Figure 9-A-8 as pore pressure constants. The results shown in
this figure are for a percent consolidation of 60%.
Stage 2 Drained Analysis at Percent Consolidation
of 60% and a Fill Height of 13.5 Feet
Figure 9-A-8
Page 9-A-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 9-A Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design
Using Equation 9-16, ru at this stage of the fill construction is determined as follows:
ru = B[(1 + 2K0)/3](1-U) = 1.0[(1 + 2(0.55))/3](1-0.60) = 0.28
Similarly, these calculations were conducted for the full fill height of 20 feet, and for
a minimum FS = 1.15 to 1.2, ru was determined to be 0.22 (U = 68%).
In summary, the pore pressure ratios that should not be exceeded during fill
construction are as follows:
Total Fill Height (ft) ru
6 0.45
13.5 0.28
20 0.22
Values of ru could be interpolated to estimate the critical ru at other fill heights.
It should be assumed that if these values of ru are used to control the rate of fill
construction, the time required to build the fill will be approximately as determined
from the total stress analysis provided in the previous section.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 9-A-13
October 2013
Examples Illustrating Staged Fill Construction Design Appendix 9-A
Page 9-A-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
10 .1 Overview and Data Acquisition
10.1.1 Overview
During the project definition phase, the project designer provides a description of
the proposed cuts to the Region Materials Engineer (RME) as outlined in the Design
Manual M 22-01 Chapter 510. The designer may prepare preliminary cross sections
using the criteria presented in Design Manual M 22-01 Section 640.07. For side hill
conditions the cross sections should extend up to the top of the hill or a controlling
feature such as a rock outcrop or level bench. The RME with assistance from the
HQ Geotechnical Division as needed, reviews existing information, performs a site
reconnaissance and provides conceptual recommendations.
During the project design phase the subsurface investigation is completed and the
cut slope design recommendations are prepared. Included in the recommendations
are the slope inclinations required for stability, mitigation requirements if needed
and the usability of excavated cut material. Typically for cut slope design, adequate
geotechnical information is provided during the project design phase to complete the
PS&E Development. Additional geotechnical work might be needed when right of way
cannot be obtained or design requirements change.
10.1.2 Site Reconnaissance
General procedures for site reconnaissance are presented in Chapter 2. Special
considerations for cut slopes should be made during the office and site review. The
office review of aerial photos from different dates may reveal if there has been any
change in slope angle or vegetation over time. Landforms identified on the photos
should be field checked to determine if they can be related to geologic processes and
soil type.
The existing natural and cut slopes in the project vicinity should be inspected
for performance. Measure the inclination and height of existing cut slopes, and
look for erosion or slope stability problems. Ask the regional maintenance engineer
about any stability/erosion problems with the existing cut slopes. In general, if stable
slopes will be cut back into an existing slope 10 feet or less and at the same or flatter
angle of inclination, the slope height does not increase significantly because of
the cut, there is no evidence of instability, there is no evidence the material type
is likely to be different at the excavation face, and there is no potential for seepage
to be encountered in the cut, then typically no further exploration will be required.
Observation of existing slopes should include vegetation, in particular the types
of vegetation that may indicate wet soil. Indirect relationships, such as subsurface
drainage characteristics may be indicated by vegetative pattern. Assess whether tree
roots may be providing anchoring of the soil and if there are any existing trees near
the top of the proposed cut that may become a hazard after the cut is completed.
Changes in ground surface slope angle may reflect differences in physical
characteristics of soil and rock materials or the presence of water.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-1
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
For cuts that are projected to be less than 10 feet in height, determine if further
exploration is warranted based on soil type and extent.
10.1.3 Field Exploration
10 .1 .3 .1 Test Borings
A minimum of one boring should be performed for each proposed soil cut slope
greater than about 10 feet in height. For longer cuts, horizontal spacing for borings
parallel to the cut should generally be between 200 to 400 feet, based on site geology.
Wider spacing may be considered if, based on existing data and site geology,
conditions are likely to be uniform and of low impact to construction and long-term
cut slope performance. Each landform should be explored, and the borings should
be spaced so that the extent of each soil type present is reasonably determined.
At critical locations where slope stability analysis is necessary, additional borings
perpendicular to the cut should be provided in order to model existing geologic
conditions for use in slope stability analysis. The exploration program should also
be developed with consideration to the potential for use of the removed material as a
source for fill material elsewhere on the project. If the construction contract is set
up with the assumption that the cut material can be used as a materials source for fill
or other uses on the project, it is important to have adequate subsurface information
to assess how much of the cut material is useable for that purpose. A key to the
establishment of exploration frequency for embankments is the potential for the
subsurface conditions to impact the construction of the cut, the construction contract
in general, and the long-term performance of the finished project. The exploration
program should be developed and conducted in a manner that these potential problems,
in terms of cost, time, and performance, are reduced to an acceptable level. The boring
frequency described above may need to be adjusted by the geotechnical designer
to address the risk of such problems for the specific project.
Borings should extend a minimum of 15 feet below the anticipated depth of the cut
at the ditch line to allow for possible downward grade revision and to provide adequate
information for slope stability analysis. Boring depths should be increased at locations
where base stability is a concern due to groundwater and/or soft or weak soil zones.
Borings should extend through any weak zones into competent material.
Hand augers, test pits, trenches or other similar means of exploration may be used for
investigating subsurface conditions for sliver cuts (additional cut in an existing natural
or cut slope) or shallow cuts, if the soil conditions are known to be fairly uniform.
10 .1 .3 .2 Sampling
For soil cuts, it is important to obtain soil samples in order to perform laboratory
index tests such as grain size analysis, natural moisture content and Atterberg limits.
This is generally the best way to define site stratigraphy. In situ testing can be used
to augment the exploration program. However, information obtained from site
specific samples is necessary to verify and place in proper context soil classification,
strength and compressibility parameters obtained from in situ tests. Sampling should
be performed for the purpose of cut stability assessment and assessment of the cut
material as a materials source, if the cut material is needed as a materials source.
Special considerations for loess slopes are discussed later in this chapter.
Page 10-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
For granular soils, SPT samples at 5 feet intervals and at changes in strata are generally
sufficient. A combination of SPTs and undisturbed thin-wall push tube (i.e. WSDOT
undisturbed or Shelby tube) should be used in cohesive soil. The vane shear test
(VST) may also be performed in very soft to soft cohesive soil. In general, the VST
should be used in conjunction with laboratory triaxial testing unless there is previous
experience with the VST at the site. The pressuremeter test (PMT) and dilatometer test
(DMT) are expensive and generally have limited applicability for cut slope design,
but are useful for determining shear strength and overconsolidation ratio in stiff to hard
cohesive soil.
Because it is generally desirable to obtain samples for laboratory testing, the static
cone penetration test (CPT) is not often used for routine exploration of cut slopes.
However, the CPT provides continuous data on the stratigraphic profile and can
be used to evaluate in situ strength parameters in very soft to medium stiff cohesive
soil and very loose to medium dense sands.
10 .1 .3 .3 Groundwater Measurement
Knowledge of groundwater elevations is critical for the design of cut slopes.
The presence of groundwater within or just below a proposed cut will affect the
slope angle required to achieve and maintain stability. For example, the presence
of groundwater near the base of a proposed cut slope in loess will preclude making
a near vertical slope. Substantially more right-of-way may be required to construct
a flatter slope. Measurement of groundwater and estimates of its fluctuations are also
important for the design of appropriate drainage facilities. Groundwater that daylights
within a proposed cut slope may require installation of horizontal drains (generally for
coarser grained cohesionless soils) or other types of drainage facilities. Groundwater
near the toe of slopes may require installation of underdrains. Groundwater
measurements are also important if slope stability analysis is required.
In granular soil with medium to high permeability, reliable groundwater levels can
sometimes be obtained during the drilling program. At a minimum, groundwater
levels should be obtained at completion of drilling after the water level has stabilized
and 12 hours after drilling is completed for holes located in medium to high
permeability soils. In low permeability soils false water levels can be recorded,
as it often takes days for water levels to reach equilibrium; the water level is further
obscured when drilling fluid is used. In this case piezometers should be installed
to obtain water levels after equilibrium has been reached. Piezometers should
be installed for any major cuts, or as determined by the geotechnical designer, to obtain
accurate water level information.
If slope stability analysis is required or if water levels might be present near the face
of a cut slope, piezometers should be installed in order to monitor seasonal fluctuations
in water levels. Monitoring of piezometers should extend through at least one wet
season (typically November through April). Continuous monitoring can be achieved
by using electrical piezometers such as vibrating wire type in conjunction with digital
data loggers.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-3
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Values of permeability and infiltration rates are generally determined based
on correlations with grain size and/or knowledge of the site soil based on previous
experience. However, borehole permeability tests, such as slug or pump tests, may
be performed in order to design drainage facilities, especially if horizontal drains
may be used.
10.1.4 Laboratory Testing
Standard classification tests should be performed on representative samples for all
soil cut slopes. These tests include gradation analysis, moisture content, and Atterberg
limits. These tests will provide information to aid in determining appropriate slope
inclinations, drainage design, and usability of the cut material as a materials source
for earthwork on the project. Additional tests will often be required to determine
the suitability of reusing soil excavated from a cut for other purposes throughout the
project. Examples include organic content to determine if a soil should be classified
as unsuitable and compaction testing to aid in determining the optimum moisture
content and shrink/swell factors for earthwork calculations. pH and corrosivity tests
should also be performed on samples at locations for proposed drainage structures.
If it is determined by the geotechnical designer that slope stability analysis should
be performed, laboratory strength testing on undisturbed samples may be required.
Slope stability analysis requires accurate information of soil stratigraphy and strength
parameters, including cohesion (c’), friction angle (φ’), undrained shear strength (Su),
and unit weight for each layer. In-place density measurements can be determined from
WSDOT undisturbed, Dames and Moore, or Shelby tube samples.
Cohesive soil shear strength parameters should be obtained from undisturbed soil
samples using consolidated undrained triaxial tests with pore pressure measurement
if portions of the proposed slope are saturated or might become saturated in the
future. Effective strength parameters from these tests should be used to analyze
cohesive soil cut slopes and evaluate long term effects of soil rebound upon unloading.
Unconsolidated undrained (UU) triaxial tests or direct shear tests can be used to obtain
undrained shear strength parameters for short term stability analysis, or when it is
determined by the geotechnical designer that total stress/strength parameters are
sufficient. The choice of which test to perform should be determined by the expected
stress condition in the soil in relation to the anticipated failure surface. It should
be understood, however, that strength parameters obtained from unsaturated tests
are dependent on the moisture content at which the tests are performed. If the
moisture content of the soil in question increases in the future, even to levels still
below saturation, the shear strength might be significantly reduced, especially
for cohesive soils. Ring shear tests can be performed to determine residual shear
strength parameters for soils located in existing landslide areas. Repeated direct shear
tests have been used in the past to obtain residual strength parameters, but research
has shown that this approach tends to over-estimate the residual strength, unless a
slickensided surface in the specimen can be oriented such that the direct shear test fails
the specimen on that pre-existing surface (Sabatini, et al., 2002). Residual strength
parameters should also be obtained for cuts in heavily overconsolidated clays, such as
the Seattle clays (e.g., Lawton formation), as the removal of soil can release locked in
stresses and allow the clay to deform, causing its strength to drop to a residual value.
Page 10-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
It should be noted that for unsaturated soils, particularly cohesive soils, the natural
moisture content of the soil at the time of testing must be determined since this will
affect the results. Consideration should be given during stability analysis to adjusting
strength parameters to account for future changes in moisture content, particularly
if field testing was performed during the dry summer months and it is possible that the
moisture content of the soil will likely increase at some point in the future. In this case
using the values obtained from the field directly may lead to unconservative estimates
of shear strength.
10 .2 Overall Design Considerations
10.2.1 Overview
Small cut slopes are generally designed based on past experience with similar soils
and on engineering judgment. Cut slopes greater than 10 feet in height usually require
a more detailed geotechnical analysis. Relatively flat (2H:1V or flatter) cuts in granular
soil when groundwater is not present above the ditch line, will probably not require
rigorous analysis. Any cut slope where failure would result in large rehabilitation
costs or threaten public safety should obviously be designed using more rigorous
techniques. Situations that will warrant more in-depth analysis include large cuts, cuts
with irregular geometry, cuts with varying stratigraphy (especially if weak zones are
present), cuts where high groundwater or seepage forces are likely, cuts involving
soils with questionable strength, or cuts in old landslides or in formations known
to be susceptible to landsliding.
A major cause of cut slope failures is related to the release of stress within the soil
upon excavation. This includes undermining the toe of the slope and oversteepening
the slope angle, or as mentioned previously, cutting into heavily overconsolidated
clays. Careful consideration should be given to preventing these situations
for cut slopes by keeping the base of the slope as loaded as possible, by choosing
an appropriate slope angle (i.e. not oversteepening), and by keeping drainage ditches
near the toe a reasonable distance away. For heavily overconsolidated clays, retaining
walls rather than an open cut may be needed that will prevent the deformation
necessary to allow the soil strength to go to a residual value.
Consideration should also be given to establishing vegetation on the slope
to prevent long-term erosion. It may be difficult to establish vegetation on slopes
with inclinations greater than 2H:1V without the use of erosion mats or other
stabilization method.
10.2.2 Design Parameters
The major parameters in relation to design of cut slopes are the slope angle and height
of the cut. For dry cohesionless soil, stability of a cut slope is independent of height
and therefore slope angle becomes the only parameter of concern. For purely cohesive
(φ= 0) soils, the height of the cut becomes the critical design parameter. For c’-φ’ and
saturated soils, slope stability is dependent on both slope angle and height of cut. Also
critical to the proper design of cut slopes is the incorporation of adequate drainage
facilities to ensure that future stability or erosional problems do not occur.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-5
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
10 .3 Soil Cut Design
10.3.1 Design Approach and Methodology
Safe design of cut slopes is based either on past experience or on more in-depth
analysis. Both approaches require accurate information regarding geologic conditions
obtained from standard field and laboratory classification procedures. Cut slope heights
and inclinations provided in the Design Manual M 22-01 can be used unless indicated
otherwise by the Geotechnical Designer. If the Geotechnical Designer determines
that a slope stability study is necessary, information that will be needed for analysis
include: an accurate cross section showing topography, proposed grade, soil unit
profiles, unit weight and strength parameters (c’, φ’), (c, φ), or Su (depending on soil
type and drainage and loading conditions) for each soil unit, and location of the water
table and flow characteristics.
Generally, the design factor of safety for static slope stability is 1.25. For pseudo-
static seismic analysis the factor of safety can be decreased to 1.1. Cut slopes are
generally not designed for seismic conditions unless slope failure could impact
adjacent structures. These factors of safety should be considered as minimum
values. The geotechnical designer should decide on a case by case basis whether
or not higher factors of safety should be used based the consequences of failure,
past experience with similar soils, and uncertainties in analysis related to site and
laboratory investigation.
Initial slope stability analysis can be performed using simple stability charts. See
Abramson et al. (1996) for example charts. These charts can be used to determine
if a proposed cut slope might be subject to slope failure. If slope instability appears
possible, or if complex conditions exist beyond the scope of the charts, more rigorous
computer methods such XSTABL, PCSTABL, SLOPE/W, etc. can be employed
(see Chapter 7). As stated previously, effective use of these programs requires accurate
determination of site geometry including surface profiles, soil unit boundaries, and
location of the water table, as well as unit weight and strength parameters for each soil
type.
Because of the geology of Washington, many soil cuts will likely be in one of five
typical types of deposits. These soils can be grouped based on geologic history
and engineering properties into residual soil, alluvial sand and gravel, glacially
overconsolidated soil, colluvial deposits, and loess deposits. A design procedure
has been developed for loess slopes and is presented later in this chapter. A brief
discussion of the other three soil types follows:
Residual Soil – The most typical residual soil is encountered in the Coast Range
in the southwest part of the state. Other residual soil units weathered from
rock formations such as the Renton, Cowlitz, Ellensburg and Ringold are also
encountered in other parts of the state. However, the soil in the coast range is the
most extensive residual soil found in the state and is the focus of this discussion.
These soils have formed from weathering of siltstone, sandstone, claystone and
tuff, and typically consist of soft to stiff silt, elastic silt and lean clay with varying
amounts of rock fragments, sand and fat clay. Because of the cohesive nature of the
soil and the angular rock fragments, the soils often form fairly steep natural slopes.
Root strength from dense vegetation also contributes to the steep slopes. Logging
Page 10-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
a slope can often cause it to become unstable within a few years. These slopes are
likely to become at least partially saturated during the winter and spring months.
Groundwater also tends to move unevenly through the soil mass following zones
of higher permeability such as sand layers and relict bedding and joint planes. For
this reason, determination of representative groundwater elevations with the use
of open standpipe piezometers may be difficult.
These slopes should generally be designed using total stress parameters to assess
short-term strength during initial loading, and also using effective stress parameters
to assess long-term stability; however, laboratory testing in these soils can be
problematic because of variability and the presence of rock fragments. Shallow
surface failures and weak zones are common. Typical design slopes should
generally be 2H:1V or flatter. Vegetation should be established on cut slopes
as soon as possible.
Alluvial Sand and Gravel Deposits – Normally consolidated sand and gravel
deposits in Washington are the result of several different geologic processes. Post
glacial alluvial deposits are located along existing rivers and streams and generally
consist of loose to medium dense combinations of sand, gravel, silt and cobbles.
In the Puget Sound region, extensive recessional outwash deposits were formed
during the retreat of glacial ice. These deposits generally consist of medium
to very dense, poorly graded sand and gravel with cobbles, boulders and varying
amounts of silt.
In eastern Washington, extensive sand and gravel deposits were deposited during
catastrophic outburst floods from glacially dammed lakes in Montana. These
deposits often consist of loose to dense, poorly graded sand and gravel with
cobbles and boulders and varying amounts of silt. Slopes in sand and gravel
deposits are generally stable at inclinations of from 1.5H:1V to 2H:1V, with
the steeper inclinations used in the more granular soil units with higher relative
densities. Perched water can be a problem, especially in western Washington,
when water collects along zones of silty soil during wet months. These perched
zones can cause shallow slope failures. If significant amounts of silt are not
present in the soil, vegetation is often difficult to establish.
Glacially Overconsolidated Deposits – Glacially consolidated soils are found
mainly in the Puget Sound Lowland and the glacial valleys of the Cascades. For
engineering purposes, these deposits can generally be divided into cohesionless
and cohesive soil. The cohesionless soil deposits are poorly sorted and consist of
very dense sand and gravel with silt, cobbles, and boulders. The soil units exhibit
some apparent cohesion because of the overconsolidation and fines content. If
little or no groundwater is present, slopes will stand at near vertical inclinations
for fairly long periods of time. However, perched groundwater on low permeability
layers is very often present in these slopes and can contribute to instability. Typical
inclinations in these soils range from 1.75H:1V to 1H:1V; although, the steeper
slope inclinations should be limited to slopes with heights of about 20 feet or less.
These slopes also work well with rockeries at slopes of 1H:6V to 1H:4V.
Overconsolidated cohesive soils such as described in Section 5.13.3 consist of very
stiff to very hard silt and clay of varying, and may contain fissures and slickensides.
These soils may stand at near vertical inclinations for very limited periods of time.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-7
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
The relaxation of the horizontal stresses cause creep and may lead to fairly rapid
failure. Slopes in these soils should be designed based on their residual friction
angle and often need to be laid back at inclinations of 4H:1V to 6H:1V. See Section
5.13.3 for specific requirements regarding the design of slopes in this type of
deposit.
10.3.2 Seepage Analysis and Impact on Design
The introduction of water to a slope is a common cause of slope failures. The
addition of water often results in a reduction in shear strength of unsaturated soils.
It raises the water table and adds to seepage forces, raising pore pressures and
causing a corresponding reduction in effective stress and shear strength in saturated
soil. Finally, it adds weight to the soil mass, increasing driving forces for slope
failures. In addition, it can cause shallow failures and surface sloughing and raveling.
These problems are most common in clay or silt slopes. It is important to identify
and accurately model seepage within proposed cut slopes so that adequate slope
and drainage designs are employed.
For slope stability analysis requiring effective stress/strength parameters, pore
pressures have to be known or estimated. This can be done using several methods.
The phreatic (water table) surface can be determined by installing open standpipes
or observation wells. This is the most common approach. Piezometric data from
piezometers can be used to estimate the phreatic surface, or peizometric surface
if confined flow conditions exist. A manually prepared flow net or a numerical method
such as finite element analysis can be used provided sufficient boundary information
is available. The pore pressure ratio (ru) can also be used. However, this method
is generally limited to use with stability charts or for determining the factor of safety
for a single failure surface.
10.3.3 Drainage Considerations and Design
The importance of adequate drainage cannot be overstated when designing cut slopes.
Surface drainage can be accomplished through the use of drainage ditches and berms
located above the top of the cut, around the sides of the cut, and at the base of the
cut. The following section on cut slopes in loess contains a more in-depth discussion
on surface drainage.
Subsurface drainage can be employed to reduce driving forces and increase soil shear
strength by lowering the water table, thereby increasing the factor of safety against
a slope failure. Subsurface conditions along cut slopes are often heterogeneous.
Thus, it is important to accurately determine the geologic and hydrologic conditions
at a site in order to place drainage systems where they will be the most effective.
Subsurface drainage techniques available include cut-off trenches, horizontal drains
and relief wells.
Cut-off trenches are constructed by digging a lateral ditch near the top of the cut
slope to intercept ground water and convey it around the slope. They are effective
for shallow groundwater depths. If the groundwater table needs to be lowered to
a greater depth, horizontal drains can be installed, if the soils are cohesionless and
granular in nature. Horizontal drains are generally not very effective in finer grained
soils. Horizontal drains consist of small diameter holes drilled at slight angles into
Page 10-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
a slope face and backfilled with perforated pipe wrapped in drainage geotextile.
Installation might be difficult in soils containing boulders, cobbles or cavities.
Horizontal drains require periodic maintenance as they tend to become clogged over
time. Relief wells can be used in situations where the water table is at a great depth.
They consist of vertical holes cased with perforated pipe connected to a disposal
system such as submersible pumps or discharge channels similar to horizontal drains.
They are generally not common in the construction of cut slopes.
Whatever subsurface drainage system is used, monitoring should be implemented
to determine its effectiveness. Typically, piezometers or observation wells are
installed during exploration. These should be left in place and periodic site readings
should be taken to determine groundwater levels or pore pressures depending on the
type of installation. High readings would indicate potential problems that should
be mitigated before a failure occurs.
Surface drainage, such as brow ditches at the top of the slope, and controlling seepage
areas as the cut progresses and conveying that seepage to the ditch at the toe of the cut,
should be applied to all cut slopes. Subsurface drainage is more expensive and should
be used when stability analysis indicates pore pressures need to be lowered in order
to provide a safe slope. The inclusion of subsurface drainage for stability improvement
should be considered in conjunction with other techniques outlined below to develop
the most cost effective design meeting the required factor of safety.
10.3.4 Stability Improvement Techniques
There are a number of options that can be used in order to increase the stability
of a cut slope. Techniques include:
• Flattening slopes
• Benching slopes
• Lowering the water table (discussed previously)
• Structural systems such as retaining walls or reinforced slopes.
Changing the geometry of a cut slope is often the first technique considered when
looking at improving stability. For flattening a slope, enough right-of-way must
be available. As mentioned previously, stability in purely dry cohesionless soils
depends on the slope angle, while the height of the cut is often the most critical
parameter for cohesive soils. Thus, flattening slopes usually proves more effective
for granular soils with a large frictional component. Benching will often prove more
effective for cohesive soils. Benching also reduces the amount of exposed face along
a slope, thereby reducing erosion. Figure 10.1 shows the typical configuration of
a benched slope. Structural systems are generally more expensive than the other
techniques, but might be the only option when space is limited.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-9
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Notes:
(1) Staked slope line - Maximum slope 1H:1V.
(2) Step rise - heaight variable 1 foot to 2 feet.
(3) Step tread - width = staked slope ratio × step rise.
(4) Step termini - width = 1/2 step tread width.
(5) Slope rouding.
(6) Overburden area - variable slope ratio.
Typical Roadway Section With Stepped Slopes
(From Design Manual Figure 1230-8)
Figure 10-1
Shallow failures and sloughing can be mitigated by placing 2 to 3-foot thick rock
drainage blanket over the slope in seepage areas. Moderate to high survivability
permanent erosion control geotextile should be placed between native soil and drain
rock to keep fines from washing out and/or clogging the drain rock.
In addition, soil bioengineering can be used to stabilize cut slopes against shallow
failures (generally less than 3 feet deep), surface sloughing and erosion along cut faces.
Refer to the Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 940 for uses and design considerations
of soil bioengineering.
10.3.5 Erosion and Piping Considerations
Surface erosion and subsurface piping are most common in clean sand, nonplastic silt
and dispersive clays. Loess is particularly susceptible. However, all cut slopes should
be designed with adequate drainage and temporary and permanent erosion control
facilities to limit erosion and piping as much as possible. See Sections 10.3.3 and 10.5
for more information on drainage structures.
The amount of erosion that occurs along a slope is a factor of soil type, rainfall
intensity, slope angle, length of slope, and vegetative cover. The first two factors
cannot be controlled by the designer, but the last three factors can. Longer slopes can
be terraced at approximate 15- to 30-foot intervals with drainage ditches installed
to collect water. Best Management Practices (BMPs) for temporary and permanent
Page 10-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
erosion and stormwater control as outlined in the WSDOT Highway Runoff Manual
and WSDOT Roadside Manual should always be used. Construction practices
should be specified that limit the extent and duration of exposed soil. For cut slopes,
consideration should be given to limiting earthwork during the wet season and
requiring that slopes be covered as they are exposed, particularly for highly erodable
soils mentioned above.
10.4 Use of Excavated Materials
The suitability of soil excavated from a roadway cut section for reuse should be
determined by a combination of site reconnaissance, boring information and laboratory
testing. Soil samples obtained from SPT testing are generally too small to be used for
classifying soils as gravel borrow, select borrow, etc. Bulk soil samples obtained from
test pits are more appropriate to determine the appropriate engineering characteristics,
including compaction characteristics, of all soil units.
Based on the exploration and laboratory testing program, the geotechnical designer
should determine the extent of each soil unit, the preferred uses for each unit
(i.e. common fill, structural fill, drain rock, riprap, etc.), and any measures necessary
for improvement of soil units to meet a particular specification. Soil excavated from
within the roadway prism intended for use as embankment fill should generally meet,
as a minimum, Standard Specification 9-03.14(3) for common borrow. However, both
common borrow and select borrow are not usable as an all weather material. If all
weather use is desired, the material should meet the specifications for gravel borrow
per the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Any soil units considered unsuitable for reuse
such as highly plastic soil, peat, and muck should be identified.
Consideration should be given to the location and time of year that construction
will likely take place. In western Washington, in place soil that is more than a few
percentage points over optimum moisture content is often impractical to aerate and
dry back and must be wasted, stockpiled for later use or conditioned with admixtures.
Even glacially overconsolidated soil with a high fines content that is near the optimum
moisture content may become too wet for proper compaction during excavation,
haul and placement. Laboratory testing consisting of the standard and modified
Proctor (ASSHTO T 99 and T 180, respectively) tests should be performed on bulk
samples, if the fines content indicates the soil may be moisture sensitive (generally
more than about 10 percent). The Standard Specification Section 2-03.3(14)D
requires that maximum density for soil with more than 30 percent by weight retained
on the U.S. No. 4 sieve be determined by WSDOT Test Method 606. Test Method
606 does not provide reliable information on the optimum moisture content for
placement. Therefore, the modified Proctor test should be performed to determine
the optimum moisture.
Techniques such as adding portland cement to stabilize wet soil have been used on
WSDOT projects in the past. The addition of cement can lower the moisture content
of soil a few percent and provide some strength. However, concerns regarding the
pH of runoff water from the project site may limit the use of this technique on some
sites. The FHWA Publication “Soil and Base Stabilization and Associated Drainage
Considerations, Volumes 1 and 2” (SA-93-004 & SA-93-005) provide additional
information on soil amendments.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-11
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
The RME or geotechnical designer should provide guidance in determining shrink/
swell factors for earthwork computations. Soil excavated from cuts and then
compacted for embankment construction typically has a shrinkage factor. Values
vary based on soil type, in-place density, method of fill construction and compactive
effort. Soil wasted typically has a swell factor because material is often end-dumped
at the waste site. The shrink/swell factor for soil that will be reused can be estimated
by determining the ratio of in situ density versus compacted density determined from
Proctor tests. Corrections may need to be applied for oversize particles screened out
of xcavated material. Local experience with similar soil also can be used to determine
shrink/swell factors. Typical shrink/swell factors for various soils and rock are
presented in Table 10-1.
Loose
In situ wet Percent Compacted
Percent Condition
Material unit weight Shrink (-) or wet unit
Swell wet unit
(pcf) Swell (+) weight (pcf)
weight (pcf)
Sand 114 5 109 -11 129
Sandy Gravel 131 5 124 -7 141
Silt 107 35 79 -17 129
Loess 91 35 67 -25 120
Rock/Earth
Mixtures
75% R/25 % E 153 25 122 +12 136
50% R/50% E 139 29 108 -5 146
25% R/75% E 125 26 99 -8 136
Granite 168 72 98 +28 131
Limestone 162 63 100 +31 124
Sandstone 151 61 94 +29 117
Shale-Siliceous 165 40 118 +25 132
Siltstone 139 45 96 +9 127
Approximate Shrink/Swell Factors
(From Alaska DOT Geotechnical Procedures Manual, 1983)
Table 10-1
10.5 Special Considerations for Loess
Loess is an aeolian (wind deposited) soil consisting primarily of silt with fine sand
and clay, generally found in the southeastern part of the state. See Figure 10-2 for
general extents of loess deposits found within Washington state. Loess contains
a large amount of void space, and particles are held together by the clay component.
It can stand at near vertical slopes indefinitely provided its moisture content remains
low. However, upon wetting it loses strength and because of its open structure can
experience large rapid deformations that can result in slope failures. Slope failures
in loess soil can occur as either shallow slides or flows or rotational slides. Loess
is also highly prone to erosion and piping.
Page 10-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
Approximate Gradation of Boundaries for Washington Loess
(After Higgins and Fragaszy, WA-RD 145.2)
Figure 10-2
Loess Can be Broken Down into Three Main Types – Clayey loess, silty loess, and
sandy loess, based on grain size analysis (see Figure 10-3). Past research indicates
that cuts in silty loess deposits with low moisture contents can stand at near vertical
slopes (0.25H:1V), while cuts in clayey loess deposits perform best at maximum slopes
of 2.5H:1V. Soils characterized as sandy loess can be designed using conventional
methods. WSDOT manual “Design Guide for Cut Slopes in Loess of Southeastern
Washington” (WA-RD 145.2) provides an in-depth discussion on design of cut slopes
in loess.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-13
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Definition of Sandy, Silty, and Clayey Loess for Southeastern Washington
(After Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988)
Figure 10-3
The two most important factors affecting performance of cut slopes in loess are
gradation and moisture content. Moisture content for near vertical slopes is crucial.
It should not be over 17 percent. There should be no seepage along the cut face,
especially near the base. If there is a possibility of groundwater in the cut, near vertical
slopes should not be used. Maintenance of moisture contents below critical values
requires adequate drainage facilities to prevent moisture migration into the cut via
groundwater or infiltration from the surface.
The design of cut slopes in loess should include the following procedures that have
been adapted from WA-RD 145.2 (Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988):
1. Perform office studies to determine possible extents of loess deposits along the
proposed road alignment.
2. Perform field reconnaissance including observation of conditions of existing cut
slopes in the project area.
3. Perform field exploration at appropriate locations. For loess slope design,
continuous sampling in the top 6 feet and at 5 foot intervals thereafter should
be used.
Page 10-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
4. Perform laboratory grain-size analysis on representative samples throughout the
depth of the proposed cut and compare the results with Figure 10-3. If the soil falls
within the zone of sandy loess, or if sandy layers or other soils are encountered that
do not classify as silty or clayey loess, design using conventional soil mechanics
methods. If the soil falls within the zone of clayey loess, design using a maximum
slope inclination of 2.5H:1V. If the soil falls within the zone of silty loess, the slope
may be designed using a 0.25H:1V inclination provided that moisture contents
will be within allowable levels as described in subsequent steps. See Figure 10-4
for typical sections in silty and clayey loess. If deep cuts (greater than about
50 feet) are to be used, or if moisture contents during the design life of the slope
greater than 17 percent are expected, it is recommended that laboratory shear
strength testing be run in order to perform slope stability analysis. If moisture
contents below 17 percent are expected, total stress analysis can be used. If
moisture contents above 17 percent are expected, effective stress analysis should
be used. Care should be taken when using laboratory shear strength data because
of the difficulty obtaining undisturbed samples in loess.
5. Determine if groundwater or seasonal perched water might be present. If so, the
cut slope should be designed for a maximum slope of 2.5H:1V and appropriate
drainage design applied. Slopes flatter than 2.5H:1V might be necessary because
of seepage forces. In this case a drainage blanket may be required. See step 4 if
slope stability analysis is required.
6. Perform moisture content analysis on representative samples. Moisture contents
within the proposed slope above 17 percent indicate the soil structure is potentially
unstable and prone to collapse. If moisture contents are below 17 percent and the
soil classifies as silty loess, design for near vertical slopes. Otherwise, design for
maximum slopes of 2.5H:1V. See step 4 if slope stability analysis is required.
7. Near vertical slopes should be benched on approximately 20 feet vertical intervals
when the total height of the cut exceeds 30 feet. Benches should be 10 to 15 feet
wide and gently sloped (10H:1V) towards the back of the cut to prevent water
from flowing over the cut face. Benches should maintain a gradient for drainage
not exceeding 3 to 5 percent. See number 4 if slope stability analysis is required.
8. Adequate drainage control is extremely important in loess soil due to its strength
dependence on moisture content and high potential for erosion. The following
section outlines general drainage design considerations for loess slopes. These
designs can also be employed for cut slope design in other soils. However, as
stated previously, loess soils are generally more susceptible to erosion and wetting
induced slope failures, so the design of drainage structures for loess slopes might
be overconservative when applied to other soils.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-15
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Typical Sections for Cut Slopes in Silty and Clayey Loess
(After Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988)
Figure 10-4
Drainage at Head of Slopes – For silty loess, a drainage ditch or berm should
be constructed 10 to 15 feet behind the top of the slope prior to excavation. Provided
the gradient is less than about 5 percent, a flat bottomed, seeded drainageway will
be adequate. A mulch or geotextile mat should be used to protect the initial seeding.
If the slope is located where adequate vegetation will not grow, a permanent erosion
control geotextile covered with crushed rock or coarse sand can be used. The sizing
of cover material should be based on flow velocities. The geotextile should be chosen
to prevent erosion or piping of the underlying loess and strong enough to withstand
placement of the cover material. Gradients greater than about 5 percent will require
a liner similar to those used to convey water around the sides of cut slopes as described
below. For clayey loess a drainage way behind the top of a cut slope is necessary only
when concentrated flows would otherwise be directed over the slope face. In this case
drainage should be the same as for silty loess. See Figure 10-5 for drainage details
at the head of cut slopes in silty loess.
Page 10-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
Drainage Above a Cut Slope in Silty Loess
(After Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988)
Figure 10-5
Drainage Around Sides of Cut Slopes – Drainageways around the sides of slopes
generally have higher gradients (about 5 to 10 percent) than those at the tops of slopes.
WSDOT WA-RD 145.2 (Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988) recommends four general
designs for drainageways within this gradient range:
1. Line the drainageway with permanent erosion control geotextile and cover with
coarse crushed rock.
2. Line the drainageway with permanent erosion control geotextile under a
gabion blanket.
3. Construct the drainageway with a half-rounded pipe. The pipe should be keyed
into the top of the slope to prevent erosional failure, and adequate compaction
should be provided around the pipe to prevent erosion along the soil/pipe interface.
Care should be taken to prevent leakage at pipe joints.
4. Line the drainageway with asphalt or concrete. This approach is expensive, and
leakage can lead to piping and eventual collapse of the channel.
Drainage Over the Face of Cut Slopes – Where cuts will truncate an existing
natural drainage basin, it is often necessary to convey water directly over the face of
slopes due to the excessive ROW required to convey water around the sides. At no
point should water be allowed to flow freely over the unprotected face of a cut slope.
WSDOT WA-RD145.2 (Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988) lists three possible designs for
this scenario in clayey loess and two possible designs in silty loess. For clayey loess:
1. Cut a shallow, flat bottomed ditch into the slope face. The ditch should be lined
with permanent erosion control geotextile and covered with a gabion mat or
coarse rock
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-17
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
2. Use a half-rounded pipe as described previously.
3. Use an asphalt or concrete liner.
For silty loess with a near vertical slope:
1. Intercept the drainage high enough above the cut to channel it around the sides
using techniques described previously for drainage around the sides of cut slopes.
2. Convey water over the slope face using a PVC pipe connected to a collection area
impounded by a berm located above the head of the slope. The pipe should be
installed above the ground and sealed against the berm to prevent seepage along
the outside of the pipe. The pipe also should be anchored both above and below
the slope face, and a splash plate should be provided at the bottom to prevent
undercutting of the slope. Figure 10-6 shows details of drainage over a cut face.
This design is best suited for low to moderate flow volumes in conjunction with
berm drainage. It should not be used with ditches.
Drainage Over a Cut Slope
(After Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988)
Figure 10-6
Page 10-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
Drainage at the Toe of slopes – Drainage ditches along the roadway should be
constructed at least 10 feet from the toe of the slope, and the ground surface should be
gently sloped toward the ditch.
Sufficient right-of-way should be available to ensure that future agricultural activities
are kept away from the top of the cut slope to keep drainageways from being filled in
and to limit excessive disturbance around the cut slope.
Finally, proper construction control should be implemented. Construction equipment
should be kept away from the top of the slope once the cut has been made. The
following recommendations all have the same focus, to limit the amount of water that
might reach the slope face. Construction should be performed during the summer,
if possible. Drainage ways above the top of the cut should be constructed prior
to opening up the cut. Seeding or other slope protection should be implemented
immediately following construction of the cut. All cut slopes should be uniform,
i.e. compound slopes should not be allowed. If animal holes are present that would
create avenues for piping, they should be backfilled with low permeability fines
or grout.
A design checklist taken from WA-RD 145.2 (Higgins and Fragaszy, 1988) is included
in Appendix 10-A.
10 .6 PS&E Considerations
Considerations concerning PS&E and construction generally consist of specifying
the extents and periods during which earthwork is permitted in order to limit
soil disturbance and erosion. Specifications should also be included that require
construction of adequate drainage structures prior to grubbing and that construction
equipment stay away from the tops of completed cut slopes.
In general, excavation for slopes should proceed in the uphill direction to allow surface
or subsurface water exposed during excavation to drain without becoming ponded. Cut
slopes should not be cut initially steeper, and then trimmed back after mass excavation.
This procedure can result in cracks and fissures opening up in the oversteepened slope,
allowing infiltration of surface water and a reduction in soil shear strength.
Both permanent and temporary cuts in highly erodable soil should be covered as
they are excavated. Vegetation should be established on permanent slopes as soon as
feasible. Only uniform slopes should be constructed in loess or other erodable soil (no
compound slopes) in order to prevent erosion and undercutting.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-19
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
10 .7 References
AASHTO “Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods
of Sampling and Testing,” Part 2: Tests.
Alaska DOT, Geotechnical Procedures Manual, 1983.
Abramson, L., Boyce, G., Lee, T., and Sharma, S., 1996, Slope Stability and
Stabilization Methods, Wiley, ISBN 0471106224.
FHWA, 1993, Soil and Base Stabilization and Associated Drainage Considerations,
Vol 1, FHWA-SA-93-004.
FHWA, 1993, Soil and Base Stabilization and Associated Drainage Considerations,
Vol 2, FHWA-SA-93-005
Higgins, J. D., and Fragaszy, R. J., and Martin, T., 1987, Engineering Design in Loess
Soils of Southeastern Washington, WSDOT Research Report WA-RD 145.1, 121 pp.
Higgins, J. D., and Fragaszy, R. J., 1988, Design Guide for Cut Slopes in Loess of
Southeastern Washington, WSDOT Research Report WA-RD 145.2, 57 pp.
Design Manual M 22-01
Highway Runoff Manual M 31-16, 2004
Roadside Manual.
Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction M 21-01, 2004
Page 10-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Project Definition Yes No N/A
1. Is the proposed construction within a loess region?
If yes, what loess type is present? (Figure 10.3)
Sandy Loess Silty Loess Clayey Loess
2. Does the proposed construction involve complete realignment?
3. Does the proposed construction involve minor realignment?
4. Has an assessment been made of the current land management activities, e.g.
review recent aerial photography?
5. Has an assessment been made of the potential for land use changes, e.g.
converting dryland farming to irrigation farming?
Project Field Data Yes No N/A
1. Is a county soil survey report available for review? If yes, answer the following:
a. Have major soil types along the proposed route been identified?
b. Have important soil parameters of those major soil types been identified?
i.e. grain size distribution, percent clay vs. depth, permeability, drainage,
depth to bedrock, agricultural use, irrigation potential.
2. Have plans, profiles and cross sections been reviewed?
3. Do the cross sections show the existing ground line beyond the top of the
proposed cut?
4. Have all major cut and fill slopes been located?
5. What cut slope inclinations are desired by the Region:
____ ¼:1 ____2.5:1 or ____other
If other, identify proposed cut slope angle and reason.
6. If ¼:1 cuts area proposed, is there sufficient right-of-way to accommodate the
required drainage facilities and fencing?
7. Are there any existing or proposed structures present near the top of the
proposed backslope?
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-A-1
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Geotechnical Investigation Yes No N/A
1. Does the site investigation meet the minimum requirements established by
WSDOT and FHWA, e.g. frequency of sampling holes, depth of holes, sample of
frequency, hole locations, etc.?
2. Were all major cuts represented by samples taken at depth in the loess?
3. Were all cut slope aspects represented in the sampling process?
4. On projects where minor sliver cuts are required, did sampling
(hand auger holes) along the face of the existing cut extend a minimum of 4 feet
into the face?
5. Has the soil sampling been continuous in the top 6 feet and then every 5 feet
thereafter?
6. Was the soil investigation conducted during the wet time of year?
7. Was natural field moisture determined from samples sealed in soil sample cans?
8. Was groundwater encountered in any of the test borings?
If yes, were piezometers installed for monitoring purposes?
9. Is the groundwater perched on an impermeable layer (i.e. bedrock)?
10. Will the proposed cut daylight the groundwater table?
11. Has a field review of the condition of existing loess slope cuts been made?
12. What is the repose of the existing cuts in the vicinity of the proposed project?
13. Are the existing cuts in ____good, ____average, ____poor condition?
Explain in detail.
Laboratory Testing Yes No N/A
1. Have Atterberg limits been performed?
2. Have hydrometer tests been performed?
3. Have sieve analyses been performed?
4. Has field moisture been calculated?
5. Has the shear strength been determined on representative samples from cuts
exceeding 50 feet in height?
Page 10-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 10 Soil Cut Design
Design Evaluation and Recommendations Yes No N/A
1. Has the laboratory data been summarized, i.e. graphs representing percent clay
vs. depth, and percent field moisture with depth?
2. Based on criteria in Figure 10.3 and Section 10.5 of this chapter has the project
loess soil been appropriately classified as to type and critical moisture?
3. Are the recommended cuts based on guidelines in Section 10.5 of this chapter?
If answer is no, is a justification given?
4. Were there specific recommendations made of erosion control, e.g. backslopes,
sideslopes, ditches? (This is absolutely critical to the successful use of cut
slopes in loess; surface runoff must be collected and discharge so as not to
saturate and erode the cut face.)
5. If ¼:1 cut slopes are recommended, answer the following:
a. Has a drainage profile along the proposed ditch been established?
b. Does the ditch extend to a cut/fill transition or to a drainage structure?
c. If the gradient of the ditch exceeds 5 percent is there the provision for ditch
erosion protection i.e. asphalt or concrete or rock/geotextile lined ditch?
d. Is there the provision for discharging water (without saturating the cut slope)
from the ditch to the road grade line at low water collection points along the
ditch profile?
e. Is the proposed drainage ditch a minimum of 10 feet from the face of the
¼:1 cut slope?
f. Does the design include the construction of a controlled access fence?
6. If 2.5:1 cut slopes are recommended answer the following:
a. If the cut intersects a natural drainageway have provisions been made to
discharge the water over or around the face?
b. Where soil is exposed to concentrated flow, such as in a ditch, is there
provision for erosion protection?
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 10-A-3
October 2013
Soil Cut Design Chapter 10
Page 10-A-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 11 Ground Improvement
11 .1 Overview
Ground improvement is used to address a wide range of geotechnical engineering
problems, including, but not limited to, the following:
• Improvement of soft or loose soil to reduce settlement, increase bearing resistance,
and/or to improve overall stability for structure and wall foundations and/or
for embankments.
• To mitigate liquefiable soils.
• To improve slope stability for landslide mitigation.
• To retain otherwise unstable soils.
• To improve workability and usability of fill materials.
• To accelerate settlement and soil shear strength gain.
Types of ground improvement techniques include the following:
• Vibrocompaction techniques such as stone columns and vibroflotation, and other
techniques that use vibratory probes that may or may not include compaction of
gravel in the hole created to help densify the soil
• Deep dynamic compaction
• Blast densification
• Geosynthetic reinforcement of embankments
• Wick drains, sand columns, and similar methods that improve the drainage
characteristics of the subsoil and thereby help to remove excess pore pressure that
can develop under load applied to the soil
• Grout injection techniques and replacement of soil with grout such as compaction
grouting, jet grouting, and deep soil mixing
• Lime or cement treatment of soils to improve their shear strength and workability
characteristics
• Permeation grouting and ground freezing (temporary applications only)
Each of these methods has limitations regarding their applicability and the degree of
improvement that is possible.
Rock mass improvement techniques such as bolting dowelling, shotcreting, etc., are
not presented in this chapter, but are addressed in Chapter 12.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 11-1
October 2013
Ground Improvement Chapter 11
11 .2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for
Ground Improvement Analysis
In general, the geotechnical investigation conducted to design the cut, fill, structure
foundation, retaining wall, etc., that the improved ground is intended to support will be
adequate for the design of the soil improvement technique proposed. However, specific
soil information may need to be emphasized depending on the ground improvement
technique selected.
For example, for vibro-compaction techniques, deep dynamic compaction, and blast
densification, detailed soil gradation information is critical to the design of such
methods, as minor changes in soil gradation characteristics could affect method
feasibility. Furthermore, the in-situ soil testing method used (e.g., SPT testing cone
testing, etc.) will need to correspond to the technique specified in the contract to
verify performance of the ground improvement technique, as the test data obtained
during design will be the baseline to which the improved ground will be compared.
Other feasibility issues will need to be addressed if these types of techniques are
used. Critical is the impact the vibrations caused by the improvement technique will
have on adjacent structures. Investigation of the foundations and soil conditions
beneath adjacent structures and utilities may be needed, in addition to precondition
surveys of the structures to enable identification of any damage caused by the ground
improvement technique, if the risk of damage to adjacent structures and utilities is
estimated to be acceptably low.
For wick drains, the ability to penetrate the soil with the wick drain mandrel, in
addition to obtaining good rate of settlement information, must be assessed. Good
Atterberg limit and water content data should be obtained, as well as any other data
that can be useful in assessing the degree of overconsolidation of the soil present,
if any.
Grout injection techniques (not including permeation grouting) can be used in a fairly
wide range of soils, provided the equipment used to install the grout can penetrate the
soil. The key here is to assess the ability of the equipment to penetrate the soil, assign
the soil density and the potential for obstructions such as boulders.
Permeation grouting is more limited in its application, and its feasibility is strongly
dependent on the ability of the grout to penetrate the soil matrix under pressure.
Detailed grain size characterization and permeability assessment must be conducted,
as well as the effect ground water may have on these techniques, to evaluate the
feasibility of these techniques. An environmental assessment of such techniques
may also be needed, especially if there is potential to contaminate groundwater
supplies. These techniques are highly specialized and require the approval of
the State Geotechnical Engineer before proceeding with a design based on using
these techniques.
Similarly, ground freezing is a highly specialized technique that is strongly depending
on the soil characteristics and groundwater flow rates present. Again, approval of the
State Geotechnical Engineer is required before proceeding with a design based on
using this technique.
Page 11-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 11 Ground Improvement
11 .3 Design Requirements
The design requirements provided in FHWA manual No. FHWA-SA-98-086 “Ground
Improvement Technical Summaries” (Elias, et al., 2000) shall be followed. In
addition, for stone column design, FHWA Report No. FHWA/RD-83/O2C “Design
and Construction of Stone Columns” (Barkdale and Bachus, 1983) shall be used,
for deep dynamic compaction, FHWA manual No. FHWA-SA-95-037, Geotechnical
Engineering Circular No. 1, “Dynamic Compaction” (Lukas, 1995) shall be used,
and for wick drain design, FHWA manual FHWA/RD-86/168 “Prefabricated Vertical
Drains – A design and Construction Guidelines Manual” (Rixner, et al., 1986) shall
be used.
For blast densification, the methodology and general approach described in
Kimmerling (1994), and the additional design guidelines provided by Mitchell (1981)
should be used. For lime and cement treatment of soils, Alaska DOT/FHWA Report
No. FHWA-AK-RD-01-6B “Alaska Soil Stabilization Design Guide” (Hicks, 2002)
shall be used for design. Design of geosynthetic base reinforcement and reinforced
slopes are addressed in Chapters 9 and 15, respectively.
11 .4 References
Barkdale, R. D., and Bachus, R. C., 1983, Design and Construction of Stone Columns
– Vol. 1, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA/RD-83/02C.
Elias, V., Welsh, J., Warren, J., and Lukas, R., 2000, Ground Improvement
Technical Summaries – Vol. 1 and 2, Demonstration Project 116, Federal Highway
Administration, FHWA-SA-98-086.
Hicks, R. G., 2002, Alaska Soil Stabilization Design Guide, Alaska
Department of Transportation and Federal Highway Administration Report No.
FHWA-AK-RD-01-6B.
Kimmerling, R. E., 1994, Blast Densification for Mitigation of Dynamic Settlement and
Liquefaction, WSDOT Research Report WA-RD 348.1, 114 pp.
Lukas, R. G., 1995, Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 1 – Dynamic Compaction,
Federal Highway Administration, FHWA-SA-95-037.
Mitchell, J. K., 1981, Soil Improvement: State-of-the-Art Report, Proceedings of
the 10th International Conference on Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering,
Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 509-565.
Rixner, J. J., Kraemer, S. R., and Smith, A. D., 1986, Prefabricated Vertical Drains –
Vol. 1: Engineering Guidelines, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA/RD-86/168.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 11-3
October 2013
Ground Improvement Chapter 11
Page 11-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 12 Rock Cut Design
12 .1 Overview
This chapter addresses the assessment of stable slopes for rock cuts, including
planning for excavation (e.g., blasting plan development), and rock mass improvement
techniques such as bolting, dowelling, shotcreting, etc., to produce a stable slope.
12 .2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for Rock
Cut Stability Analysis
In addition to the site reconnaissance and geotechnical investigation requirements
described in Chapter 2, rock slope design heavily relies upon surface mapping and
discontinuity logging in boreholes of rock structure to assess discontinuities (fracture/
joint) patterns and conditions, as discontinuities strongly control rock slope stability.
In some cases, test hole data should also obtained, especially if surface mapping is
not feasible due to the presence of overburden soil or for other reasons. Assessment of
ground water present in the rock discontinuities, as is true of any slope, is critical to the
assessment of stability. The detailed requirements for site investigation and analysis of
rock cuts provided in FHWA HI-99-007 “Rock Slopes Reference Manual” (Munfakh,
et al., 1998) shall be used. In addition to the requirements provided in the FHWA
manual, design parameters shall be developed in accordance with Chapter 5.
12 .3 Design Requirements
The detailed requirements for design of rock cuts provided in FHWA HI-99-007 “Rock
Slopes Reference Manual” (Munfakh, et al., 1998) shall be used. In addition, for the
development of blasting plans for rock cut excavation, the FHWA manual entitled
“Rock Blasting and Overbreak Control,”FHWA-HI-92-001 (Konya and Walter, 1991)
shall be used.
12 .4 References
Konya, C. J., and Walter, E. J., 1991, Rock Blasting and Overbreak Control, Federal
Highway Administration, FHWA-HI-92-001.
Munfakh, G., Wyllie, D., and Mah, C. W., 1998, Rock Slopes Reference Manual,
Federal Highway Administration, FHWA HI-99-007.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 12-1
October 2013
Rock Cut Design Chapter 12
Page 12-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 13 Landslide Analysis and Mitigation
13 .1 Overview
This chapter addresses the assessment of landslides in soil and rock, and the
development of the mitigating measures needed to stabilize the landslide.
13 .2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for
Landslide Analysis
In addition to the site reconnaissance and geotechnical investigation requirements
described in Chapter 2, the exploration requirements provided in Special TRB Report
247 “Landslides Investigation and Mitigation”, Turner and Schuster, editors (1996)
or “Landslides in Practice” by Cornforth (2005). Soil and rock properties for use in
landslide analysis and mitigation shall be developed in accordance with Chapter 5.
13 .3 Design Requirements
For landslides in soil and soft rock, the slope stability analysis methods and design
requirements specified in Chapter 7 shall be used. For rockslides, the stability analysis
method specified in Chapter 12 shall be used. The detailed requirements for analysis
and mitigation design of landslides shall in addition be conducted in accordance
with Special TRB Report 247 “Landslides Investigation and Mitigation”, Turner and
Schuster, editors (1996) or “Landslides in Practice” by Cornforth (2005).
13 .4 References
Cornforth, D. H., 2005, Landslides in Practice, John Wiley and Sons, Hoboken, NJ,
596 pp.
Turner, A. K., and Schuster, R. L., editors, 1996, Landslides Investigation and
Mitigation, Transportation Research Board, TRB Special Report 247, National
Academy Press, Washington, DC, 673 pp.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 13-1
October 2013
Landslide Analysis and Mitigation Chapter 13
Page 13-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 14 Unstable Rockslope Analysis and Mitigation
14 .1 Overview
This chapter addresses the assessment of unstable rockslopes and the development
of the mitigating measures needed to stabilize the rockslope or to safely prevent the
rockfall from reaching the traveled way.
14 .2 Development of Design Parameters and Other Input Data for
Unstable Rockslope Analysis
In addition to the site reconnaissance and geotechnical investigation requirements
described in Chapter 2, assessment of unstable rockslopes heavily relies upon surface
mapping of rock structure to assess fracture/joint patterns and conditions, as rock
fractures and joints strongly control rock slope stability, and observations from past
rockfall events. The detailed requirements for investigation of unstable rockslopes
provided in FHWA manual No. FHWA SA-93-085, “Rockfall Hazard Mitigation
Methods” (Brawner, 1994).
14 .3 Design Requirements
The design requirement specified in Chapter 12 for Rock cut design are applicable
to assessment and stabilization of unstable rockslopes. In addition, to address the
prediction of rockfall and its mitigation, the design requirements provided in FHWA
manual No. FHWA SA-93-085, “Rockfall Hazard Mitigation Methods” (Brawner,
1994) shall be used.
14 .4 References
Brawner, C.O., 1994, Rockfall Hazard Mitigation Methods, Federal Highway
Administration,FHWA SA-93-085.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 14-1
October 2013
Unstable Rockslope Analysis and Mitigation Chapter 14
Page 14-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and
Reinforced Slopes
15-1 Introduction and Design Standards
This chapter addresses the geotechnical design of the abutments as well as retaining
walls and reinforced slopes. Abutments for bridges have components of both foundation
design and wall design. Retaining walls and reinforced slopes are typically included in
projects to minimize construction in wetlands, to widen existing facilities, and to minimize
the amount of right of way needed in urban environments. Projects modifying existing
facilities often need to modify or replace existing retaining walls or widen abutments
for bridges.
There tends to be confusion regarding when they should be incorporated into a project,
what types are appropriate, how they are designed, who designs them, and how they are
constructed. The roles and responsibilities of the various WSDOT offices and those of
the Department’s consultants further confuse the issue of retaining walls and reinforced
slopes, as many of the roles and responsibilities overlap or change depending on the
wall type. This chapter does not fully address the roles and responsibilities of the various
WSDOT offices with regard to wall and abutment design, and the design process that
should be used. The Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 730, should be consulted for
additional guidance on these issues.
All abutments, retaining walls, and reinforced slopes within WSDOT Right of Way or
whose construction is administered by WSDOT shall be designed in accordance with
the Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM) and the following documents:
• Bridge Design Manual (LRFD) M 23-50
• Design Manual M 22-01
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, U.S.
The most current versions or editions of the above referenced manuals including all
interims or design memoranda modifying the manuals shall be used. In the case of conflict
or discrepancy between manuals, the following hierarchy shall be used: Those manuals
listed first shall supersede those listed below in the list.
The following manuals provide additional design and construction guidance for retaining
walls and reinforced slopes and should be considered supplementary to the GDM and
the manuals and design specifications listed above:
• Lazarte, C. A., Robinson, H., Gomez, J. E., Baxter, A., Cadden, A., and Berg, R., 2015.
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, Soil Nail Walls – Reference Manual, U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA-NHI-14-007,
425 pp.
• Porterfield, J. A., Cotton, D. A., Byrne, R. J., 1994, Soil Nail Walls-Demonstration Project
103, Soil Nailing Field Inspectors Manual, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal
Highway Administration, FHWA-SA-93-068, 86 pp.
• Samtani, N. C., and Nowatzki, E. A., 2006, Soils and Foundations, Reference Manual-
Volumes I and II, Washington, D.C., National Highway Institute Publication,
FHWA-NHI-06-088/089, Federal Highway Administration.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-1
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
• Berg, R. R., Christopher, B. R., and Samtani, N. C., 2009, Design of Mechanically
Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Slopes, No. FHWA-NHI-10-024, Federal Highway
Administration, 306 pp.
• Sabatini, P. J., Pass, D. G., and Bachus, R. C., 1999, Geotechnical Engineering Circular No.
4, Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems, FHWA-IF-99-015, 281 pp.
15-2 Overview of Wall Classifications and Design Process for Walls
The various walls and wall systems can be categorized based on how they are
incorporated into construction contracts. Standard Walls comprise the first category and
are the easiest to implement. Standard walls are those walls for which standard designs
are provided in the WSDOT Standard Plans. The internal stability design and the external
stability design for overturning and sliding stability have already been addressed in the
Standard Plan wall design, and bearing resistance, settlement, and overall stability must be
determined for each standard-design wall location by the geotechnical designer. All other
walls are nonstandard, as they are not included in the Standard Plans.
Nonstandard walls may be further subdivided into proprietary or nonproprietary.
Nonstandard, proprietary walls are patented or trademarked wall systems designed
and marketed by a wall manufacturer. The wall manufacturer is responsible for internal
stability. Sliding stability, eccentricity, bearing resistance, settlement, compound stability,
and overall slope stability are determined by the geotechnical designer. Nonstandard,
nonproprietary walls are not patented or trade marked wall systems. However, they may
contain proprietary elements. An example of this would be a gabion basket wall. The
gabion baskets themselves are a proprietary item.
However, the gabion manufacturer provides gabions to a consumer, but does not provide
a designed wall. It is up to the consumer to design the wall and determine the stable
stacking arrangement of the gabion baskets. Nonstandard, nonproprietary walls are
fully designed by the geotechnical designer and, if structural design is required, by the
structural designer. Reinforced slopes are similar to nonstandard, nonproprietary walls in
that the geotechnical designer is responsible for the design, but the reinforcing may be a
proprietary item.
A number of proprietary wall systems have been extensively reviewed by the Bridge and
Structures Office and the HQ Geotechnical Office. This review has resulted in WSDOT
preapproving some proprietary wall systems. The design procedures and wall details
for these preapproved wall systems shall be in accordance with this manual and other
manuals specifically referenced herein as applicable to the type of wall being designed,
unless alternate design procedures have been agreed upon between WSDOT and the
proprietary wall manufacturer. These preapproved design procedures and details allow
the manufacturers to competitively bid a particular project without having a detailed
wall design provided in the contract plans. Note that proprietary wall manufacturers may
produce several retaining wall options, and not all options from a given manufacturer
have been preapproved. The Bridge and Structures Office shall be contacted to obtain
the current listing of preapproved proprietary systems prior to including such systems
in WSDOT projects. A listing of the preapproved wall systems, as of the current
publication date for this manual, is provided in Appendix 15-D. Specific preapproved
details and system specific design requirements for each wall system are also included
as appendices to Chapter 15. Incorporation of non-preapproved systems requires the
wall supplier to completely design the wall prior to advertisement for construction.
Page 15-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
All of the manufacturer’s plans and details would need to be incorporated into the
contract documents. Several manufacturers may need to be contacted to maintain
competitive bidding. More information is available in chapters 610 and 730 of the
Design Manual M 22-01.
If it is desired to use a non-preapproved proprietary retaining wall or reinforced slope
system, review and approval for use of the wall or slope system on WSDOT projects
shall be based on the submittal requirements provided in Appendix 15-C. The wall or
reinforced slope system, and its design and construction, shall meet the requirements
provided in this manual, including Appendix 15-A. For Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE)
walls, the wall supplier shall demonstrate in the wall submittal that the proposed wall
system can meet the facing performance tolerances provided in Appendix 15-A through
calculation, construction technique, and actual measured full scale performance of the
wall system proposed.
Note that MSE walls are termed Structural Earth (SE) walls in the Standard Specifications
M 41-10 and associated General Special Provisions (GSPs). In the general literature, MSE
walls are also termed reinforced soil walls. In this GDM, the term “MSE” is used to refer to
this type of wall.
15-3 Required Information
15-3.1 Site Data and Permits
The Design Manual M 22-01 discusses site data and permits required for design and
construction. In addition, chapters 610 and 730 provide specific information relating
to geotechnical work and retaining walls.
15-3.2 Geotechnical Data Needed for Retaining Wall and Reinforced
Slope Design
The project requirements, site, and subsurface conditions should be analyzed to
determine the type and quantity of information to be developed during the geotechnical
investigation. It is necessary to:
• Identify areas of concern, risk, or potential variability in subsurface conditions.
• Develop likely sequence and phases of construction as they may affect retaining wall
and reinforced slope selection.
• Identify design and constructability requirements or issues such as:
– Surcharge loads from adjacent – Easements
structures – Excavation limits
– Backslope and toe slope – Wetlands
geometries
– Construction Staging
– Right of way restrictions
– Materials sources
• Identify performance criteria such as:
– Tolerable settlements for the retaining walls and reinforced slopes
– Tolerable settlements of structures or property being retained
– Impact of construction on adjacent structures or property
– Long-term maintenance needs and access
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-3
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
• Identify engineering analyses to be performed:
– Bearing resistance – Global stability
– Settlement – Internal stability
• Identify engineering properties and parameters required for these analyses.
• Identify the number of tests/samples needed to estimate engineering properties.
Table 15-1 provides a summary of information needs and testing considerations for
retaining walls and reinforced slope design.
Chapter 5 covers requirements for how the results from the field investigation, the field
testing, and laboratory testing are to be used to establish properties for design. The
specific tests and field investigation requirements needed for foundation design are
described in the following sections.
Table 15-1 Summary of Information Needs and Testing Considerations
Geotechnical Engineering Required Information for Field Laboratory
Issues Evaluations Analyses Testing Testing
• internal stability • subsurface profile (soil, • SPT • 1-D Oedometer
• external stability ground water, rock) • CPT • triaxial tests
• global and compound • horizontal earth • dilatometer • unconfined
stability pressure coefficients compression
• vane shear
• limitations on rate of • interface shear • direct shear tests
• piezometers
construction strengths
• test fill? • grain size distribution
• settlement • foundation soil/wall fill
• nuclear density? • Atterberg limits
shear strengths?
• horizontal • specific gravity
• compressibility • pullout test (MSEW/
deformation?
parameters? (including RSS) • pH, resistivity,
• lateral earth pressures? chloride, and sulfate
consolidation, shrink/ • rock coring (RQD)
• bearing capacity? swell potential, and tests?
• geophysical testing
Fill Walls/ • chemical compatibility elastic modulus) • moisture content?
Reinforced with soil, groundwater, • chemical composition • organic content
Soil Slopes and wall materials? of fill/ foundation • moisture-density
• pore pressures behind soils? relationships
wall • hydraulic conductivity • hydraulic conductivity
• borrow source of soils directly behind
evaluation (available wall?
quantity and quality of • time-rate consolidation
borrow soil) parameters?
• liquefaction • geologic mapping
• potential for including orientation
subsidence (karst, and characteristics of
mining, etc.) rock discontinuities?
• constructability • design flood elevations
• scour • seismicity
Page 15-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Table 15-1 Summary of Information Needs and Testing Considerations
Geotechnical Engineering Required Information for Field Laboratory
Issues Evaluations Analyses Testing Testing
• internal stability • subsurface profile (soil, • test cut to evaluate • triaxial tests
• external stability ground water, rock) stand-up time • unconfined
• excavation stability • shear strength of soil • well pumping tests compression
• global and compound • horizontal earth • piezometers • direct shear
stability pressure coefficients • SPT • grain size distribution
• dewatering • interface shear • CPT • Atterberg limits
strength (soil and
• chemical compatibility • vane shear • specific gravity
reinforcement)
of wall/soil • dilatometer • pH, resistivity tests
• hydraulic conductivity
• lateral earth pressure • pullout tests (anchors, • organic content
of soil
Cut Walls • down-drag on wall nails) • hydraulic conductivity
• geologic mapping
• pore pressures behind including orientation • geophysical testing • moisture content
wall and characteristics of • unit weight
• obstructions in rock discontinuities
retained soil • seismicity
• liquefaction
• see page
• potential for
subsidence (karst,
mining, etc.)
• constructability
15-3.3 Site Reconnaissance
For each abutment, retaining wall, and reinforced slope, the geotechnical designer
should perform a site review and field reconnaissance. The geotechnical designer should
be looking for specific site conditions that could influence design, construction, and
performance of the retaining walls and reinforced slopes on the project. This type of
review is best performed once survey data has been collected for the site and digital
terrain models, cross-sections, and preliminary wall profiles have been generated by
the civil engineer (e.g., region project engineer). In addition, the geotechnical designer
should have access to detailed plan views showing existing site features, utilities,
proposed construction, and right or way limits. With this information, the geotechnical
designer can review the wall/slope locations making sure that survey information agrees
reasonably well with observed site topography. The geotechnical designer should observe
where utilities are located, as they will influence where field exploration can occur and
they may affect design or constructability. The geotechnical designer should look for
indications of soft soils or unstable ground. Items such as hummocky topography, seeps
or springs, pistol butted trees, and scarps, either old or new, need to be investigated
further. Vegetative indicators such as equisetum (horsetails), cat tails, black berry, or
alder can be used to identify soils that are wet or unstable. A lack of vegetation can also
be an indicator of recent slope movement. In addition to performing a basic assessment
of site conditions, the geotechnical designer should also be looking for existing features
that could influence design and construction such as nearby structures, surcharge loads,
and steep back or toe slopes. This early in design, it is easy to overlook items such as
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-5
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
construction access, materials sources, and limits of excavation. The geotechnical designer
needs to be cognizant of these issues and should be identifying access and excavation
issues early, as they can affect permits and may dictate what wall type may or may not
be used.
15-3.4 Field Exploration Requirements
A soil investigation and geotechnical reconnaissance is critical for the design of all
abutments, retaining walls, or reinforced slopes. The stability of the underlying soils,
their potential to settle under the imposed loads, the usability of any existing excavated
soils for wall/reinforced slope backfill, and the location of the ground water table are
determined through the geotechnical investigation. All abutments, retaining, walls and
reinforced slopes regardless of their height require an investigation of the underlying soil/
rock that supports the structure. Abutments shall be investigated like other bridge piers in
accordance with Chapter 8.
Retaining walls and reinforced slopes that are equal to or less than 10 feet in exposed
height, hexp, as measured vertically from wall bottom to top or from slope toe to crest,
as shown in Figure 15-1, shall be investigated in accordance with Sections 15-3.4.1 and
15.3.4.2. For all retaining walls and reinforced slopes greater than 10 feet in exposed
height, the field exploration shall be completed in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications and this manual.
Figure 15-1 Exposed Height (H) for a Retaining Wall or Slope
hexp
Wall Reinforced Slope
Explorations consisting of geotechnical borings, test pits, hand holes, or a combination
thereof shall be performed at each wall or slope location. Geophysical testing may be
used to supplement the subsurface exploration and reduce the requirements for borings.
If the geophysical testing is done as a first phase in the exploration program, it can also
be used to help develop the detailed plan for second phase exploration. As a minimum,
the subsurface exploration and testing program should obtain information to analyze
Figure 15-1
foundation stability and settlement with respect to:
• Geological formation(s).
• Location and thickness of soil and rock units.
• Engineering properties of soil and rock units, such as unit weight, shear strength and
compressibility.
Page 15-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
• Ground water conditions.
• Ground surface topography.
• Local considerations (e.g., liquefiable, expansive or dispersive soil deposits,
underground voids from solution weathering or mining activity, or slope
instability potential).
In areas underlain by heterogeneous soil deposits and/or rock formations, it will probably
be necessary to perform more investigation to capture variations in soil and/ or rock type
and to assess consistency across the site area. In a laterally homogeneous area, drilling
or advancing a large number of borings may be redundant, since each sample tested
would exhibit similar engineering properties. In all cases, it is necessary to understand
how the design and construction of the geotechnical feature will affect the soil and/or
rock mass in order to optimize the exploration. The following minimum guidelines for
frequency and depth of exploration shall be used. Additional exploration may be required
depending on the variability in site conditions, wall/slope geometry, wall/slope type, and
the consequences should a failure occur.
15-3.4.1 Exploration Type, Depth, and Spacing
Generally, walls 10 feet or less in height, constructed over average to good soil conditions
(e.g., non-liquefiable, medium dense to very dense sand, silt or gravel, with no signs of
previous instability) will require only a basic level of site investigation. A geologic site
reconnaissance (see Chapter 2), combined with widely spaced test pits, hand holes, or
a few shallow borings to verify field observations and the anticipated site geology may
be sufficient, especially if the geology of the area is well known, or if there is some prior
experience in the area.
The geotechnical designer should investigate to a depth below bottom of wall or
reinforced slope at least to a depth where stress increase due to estimated foundation
load is less than 10 percent of the existing effective overburden stress and between
one and two times the exposed height of the wall or slope. Exploration depth should be
great enough to fully penetrate soft highly compressible soils (e.g., peat, organic silt, soft
fine grained soils) into competent material of suitable bearing capacity (e.g., stiff to hard
cohesive soil, compact dense cohesionless soil, or bedrock). Hand holes and test pits
should be used only where medium dense to dense granular soil conditions are expected
to be encountered within limits that can be reasonably explored using these methods,
approximately 10 feet for hand holes and 15 feet for test pits, and that based on the site
geology there is little risk of an unstable soft or weak layer being present that could affect
wall stability.
For retaining walls and reinforced slopes less than 100 feet in length, the exploration
should occur approximately midpoint along the alignment or where the maximum
height occurs. Explorations should be completed on the alignment of the wall face or
approximately midpoint along the reinforced slope, i.e., where the height, as defined in
Figure 15-1, is 0.5H. Additional borings to investigate the toe slope for walls or the toe
catch for reinforced slopes may be required to assess overall stability issues.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-7
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
For retaining walls and slopes more than 100 feet in length, exploration points should in
general be spaced at 100 to 200 feet, but may be spaced at up to 500 feet in uniform,
dense soil conditions. Even closer spacing than 100 to 200 feet should be used in highly
variable and potentially unstable soil conditions. Where possible, locate at least one
boring where the maximum height occurs. Explorations should be completed on the
alignment of the wall face or approximately midpoint along the reinforced slope, i.e.,
where the height is 0.5H. Additional borings to investigate the toe slope for walls or
the toe catch for reinforced slopes may be required to assess overall stability issues.
Exploration locations may be adjusted if geophysical testing conducted in accordance
with Chapter 5 is done, provided enough borings are available to properly interpret the
geophysical test results.
A key to the establishment of exploration frequency for walls is the potential for the
subsurface conditions to impact the construction of the wall, the construction contract in
general, and the long-term performance of the finished project. The exploration program
should be developed and conducted in a manner that these potential problems, in terms
of cost, time, and performance, are reduced to an acceptable level. The boring frequency
described above may need to be adjusted by the geotechnical designer to address the
risk of such problems for the specific project. Exploration locations may be adjusted if
geophysical testing conducted in accordance with Chapter 5 is done, provided enough
borings are available to properly interpret the geophysical test results.
15-3.4.2 Walls and Slopes Requiring Additional Exploration
15-3.4.2.1 Soil Nail Walls
Soil nail walls should have additional geotechnical borings completed to explore the soil
conditions within the soil nail zone. The additional exploration points shall be at a distance
of 1.0 to 1.5 times the height of the wall behind the wall to investigate the soils in the
nail zone. For retaining walls and slopes more than 100 feet in length, exploration points
should in general be spaced at 100 to 200 feet, but may be spaced at up to 500 feet in
uniform, dense soil conditions. Even closer spacing than 100 to 200 feet should be used
in highly variable and potentially unstable soil conditions. The depth of the borings shall
be sufficient to explore the full depth of soils where nails are likely to be installed, and
deep enough to address overall stability issues.
In addition, each soil nail wall should have at least one test pit excavated to evaluate
stand-up time of the excavation face. The test pit shall be completed outside the nail
pattern, but as close as practical to the wall face to investigate the stand-up time of the
soils that will be exposed at the wall face during construction. The test pit shall remain
open at least 24 hours and shall be monitored for sloughing, caving, and groundwater
seepage. A test pit log shall be prepared and photographs should be taken immediately
after excavation and at 24 hours. If variable soil conditions are present along the wall
face, a test pit in each soil type should be completed. The depth of the test pits should
be at least twice the vertical nail spacing and the length along the trench bottom should
be at least one and a half times the excavation depth to minimize soil-arching effects. For
example, a wall with a vertical nail spacing of 4 feet would have a test pit 8 feet deep and
at least 12 feet in length at the bottom of the pit.
Page 15-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-3.4.2.2 Walls With Ground Anchors or Deadman Anchors
Walls with ground anchors or deadman anchors should have additional geotechnical
borings completed to explore the soil conditions within the anchor/deadman zone. For
retaining walls more than 100 feet in length, exploration points should in general be
spaced at 100 to 200 feet, but may be spaced at up to 500 feet in uniform, dense soil
conditions. Even closer spacing than 100 to 200 feet should be used in highly variable
and potentially unstable soil conditions. The borings should be completed outside the
no-load zone of the wall in the bond zone of the anchors or at the deadman locations.
The depth of the borings shall be sufficient to explore the full depth of soils where ground
anchors or deadman anchors are likely to be installed, and deep enough to address overall
stability issues.
15-3.4.2.3 Wall or Slopes With Steep Back Slopes or Steep Toe Slopes
Walls or slopes that have a back slopes or toe slopes that exceed 10 feet in slope
length and that are steeper than 2H:1V should have at least one hand hole, test pit,
or geotechnical boring in the backslope or toe slope to define stratigraphy for overall
stability analysis and evaluate bearing resistance. The exploration should be deep enough
to address overall stability issues. Hand holes and test pits should be used only where
medium dense to dense granular soil conditions are expected to be encountered within
limits that can be reasonably explored using these methods, approximately 10 feet for
hand holes and 20 feet for test pits.
15-3.5 Field, Laboratory, and Geophysical Testing for Abutments, Retaining
Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
The purpose of field and laboratory testing is to provide the basic data with which to
classify soils and to estimate their engineering properties for design. Often for abutments,
retaining walls, and reinforced slopes, the backfill material sources are not known or
identified during the design process. For example, mechanically stabilized earth walls
are commonly constructed of backfill material that is provided by the Contractor during
construction. During design, the material source is not known and hence materials cannot
be tested. In this case, it is necessary to design using commonly accepted values for
regionally available materials and ensure that the contract will require the use of materials
meeting or exceeding these assumed properties.
For abutments, the collection of soil samples and field testing shall be in accordance with
chapters 2, 5, and 8.
For retaining walls and reinforced slopes, the collection of soil samples and field testing
are closely related. Chapter 5 provides the minimum requirements for frequency of field
tests that are to be performed in an exploration point. As a minimum, the following field
tests shall be performed and soil samples shall be collected:
In geotechnical borings, soil samples shall be taken during the Standard Penetration
Test (SPT). Fine grained soils or peat shall be sampled with 3-in Shelby tubes or WSDOT
Undisturbed Samplers if the soils are too stiff to push 3-in Shelby tubes. All samples in
geotechnical borings shall be in accordance with chapters 2 and 3.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-9
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
In hand holes, sack soil samples shall be taken of each soil type encountered, and WSDOT
Portable Penetrometer tests shall be taken in lieu of SPT tests. The maximum vertical
spacing between portable penetrometer tests should be 5 feet.
In test pits, sack soil samples shall be taken from the bucket of the excavator, or from the
spoil pile for each soil type encountered once the soil is removed from the pit. WSDOT
Portable Penetrometer tests may be taken in the test pit. However, no person shall enter
a test pit to sample or perform portable penetrometer tests unless there is a protective
system in place in accordance with Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155-657.
In soft soils, CPT tests or insitu vane shear tests may be completed to investigate soil
stratigraphy, shear strength, and drainage characteristics.
All soil samples obtained shall be reviewed by a geotechnical engineer or engineering
geologist. The geotechnical designer shall group the samples into stratigraphic units
based on consistency, color, moisture content, engineering properties, and depositional
environment. At least one sample from each stratigraphic unit should be tested in the
laboratory for Grain Size Distribution, Moisture Content, and Atterberg limits. Additional
tests, such as Loss on Ignition, pH, Resistivity, Sand Equivalent, or Hydrometer may
be performed.
Walls that will be constructed on compressible or fine grained soils should have
undisturbed soil samples available for laboratory testing, e.g., shelby tubes or WSDOT
undisturbed samples. Consolidation tests and Unconsolidated Undrained (UU) triaxial
tests should be performed on fine grained or compressible soil units. Additional tests such
as Consolidated Undrained (CU), Direct Shear, or Lab Vane Shear may be performed to
estimate shear strength parameters and compressibility characteristics of the soils.
Geophysical testing may be used for establishing stratification of the subsurface
materials, the profile of the top of bedrock, depth to groundwater, limits of types of soil
deposits, the presence of voids, anomalous deposits, buried pipes, and depths of existing
foundations. Data from Geophysical testing shall always be correlated with information
from direct methods of exploration, such as SPT, CPT, etc.
15-3.6 Groundwater
One of the principal goals of a good field reconnaissance and field exploration is to
accurately characterize the groundwater in the project area. Groundwater affects the
design, performance, and constructability of project elements. Installation of piezometer(s)
and monitoring is usually necessary to define groundwater elevations. Groundwater
measurements shall be conducted in accordance with Chapter 2, and shall be assessed
for each wall. In general, this will require at least one groundwater measurement point
for each wall. If groundwater has the potential to affect wall performance or to require
special measures to address drainage to be implemented, more than one measurement
point per wall will be required.
Page 15-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-3.7 Wall Backfill Testing and Design Properties
The soil used as wall backfill may be tested for shear strength in lieu of using a lower
bound value based on previous experience with the type of soil used as backfill (e.g.,
gravel borrow). See Chapter 5 (specifically Table 5-2) for guidance on selecting a shear
strength value for design if soil specific testing is not conducted. A design shear strength
value of 36° to 38° has been routinely used as a lower bound value for gravel borrow
backfill for WSDOT wall projects. Triaxial tests conducted in accordance with AASHTO
T296-95 (2000), but conducted on remolded specimens of the backfill compacted at
optimum moisture content, plus or minus 3 percent, to 95 percent of maximum density
per WSDOT Test Method T606, may be used to justify higher design friction angles
for wall backfill, if the backfill source is known at the time of design. This degree of
compaction is approximately equal to 90 to 95 percent of modified proctor density
(ASTM D1557). The specimens are not saturated during shearing, but are left at the
moisture content used during specimen preparation, to simulate the soil as it is actually
placed in the wall. Note that this type of testing can also be conducted as part of the wall
construction contract to verify a soil friction assumed for design.
Other typical soil design properties for various types of backfill and native soil units are
provided in Chapter 5.
The ability of the wall backfill to drain water that infiltrates it from rain, snow melt, or
ground water shall be considered in the design of the wall and its stability. Figure 15-2
illustrates the effect the percentage of fines can have on the permeability of the soil.
In general, for a soil to be considered free draining, the fines content (i.e., particles
passing the No. 200 sieve) should be less than 5 percent by weight. If the fines content is
greater than this, the reinforced wall backfill cannot be fully depended upon to keep the
reinforced wall backfill drained, and other drainage measures may be needed.
15-4 General Design Requirements
15-4.1 Design Methods
The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall be used for all abutments and
retaining walls addressed therein. The walls shall be designed to address all applicable
limit states (strength, service, and extreme event). Rock walls, reinforced slopes, and
soil nail walls are not specifically addressed in the AASHTO specifications, and shall be
designed in accordance with this manual. Many of the FHWA manuals used as WSDOT
design references were not developed for LRFD design. For those wall types (and
including reinforced slopes) for which LRFD procedures are not available, allowable stress
design procedures included in this manual, either in full or by reference, shall be used,
again addressing all applicable limit states.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-11
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Figure 15-2 Permeability and Capillarity of Drainage Materials (Department of Defense 2005)
Page 15-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
The load and resistance factors provided in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications have been
developed in consideration of the inherent uncertainty and bias of the specified design
methods and material properties, and the level of safety used to successfully construct
thousands of walls over many years. These load and resistance factors shall only be
applied to the design methods and material resistance estimation methods for which they
are intended, if an option is provided in this manual or the AASHTO LRFD specifications
to use methods other than those specified herein or in the AASHTO LRFD specifications.
For estimation of soil reinforcement pullout in reinforced soil (MSE) walls, the resistance
factors provided are to be used only for the default pullout methods provided in the
AASHTO LRFD specifications. If wall system specific pullout resistance estimation
methods are used, resistance factors shall be developed statistically using reliability
theory to produce a probability of failure Pf of approximately 1 in 100 or smaller. Note
that in some cases, Section 11 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications refers
to AASHTO LRFD Section 10 for wall foundation design and the resistance factors for
foundation design. In such cases, the design methodology and resistance factors provided
in the Chapter 8 shall be used instead of the resistance factors in AASHTO LRFD
Section 10, where the GDM and the AASHTO Specifications differ.
For reinforced soil slopes, the FHWA manual entitled “Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls
and Reinforced Soil Slopes Design & Construction Guidelines” by Berg, et al. (2009), or
most current version of that manual, shall be used as the basis for design. The LRFD
approach has not been developed as yet for reinforced soil slopes. Therefore, allowable
stress design shall be used for design of reinforced soil slopes.
All walls shall meet the requirements in the Design Manual M 22-01 for layout and
geometry. All walls shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the Standard
Specifications, General Special Provisions, and Standard Plans. Specific design requirements
for tiered walls, back-to-back walls, and MSE wall supported abutments are provided in
the GDM as well as in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, and by reference in
those design specifications to FHWA manuals (Berg, et al. 2009).
15-4.2 Tiered Walls
Walls that retain other walls or have walls as surcharges require special design to account
for the surcharge loads from the upper wall. Proprietary wall systems may be used for
the lower wall, but proprietary walls shall not be considered preapproved in this case.
Chapter 730 of the Design Manual M 22-01 discusses the requirements for utilizing non-
preapproved proprietary walls on WSDOT projects. If the upper wall is proprietary, a
preapproved system may be used provided it meets the requirements for preapproval and
does not contain significant structures or surcharges within the wall reinforcing.
For tiered walls, the FHWA manual entitled “Design and Construction of Mechanically
Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes” by Berg, et al. (2009), shall be used as
the basis for design for those aspects of the design not covered in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications and the GDM.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-13
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-4.3 Back-to-Back Walls
The face-to-face dimension for back-to-back sheetpile walls used as bulkheads for
waterfront structures must exceed the maximum exposed height of the walls. Bulkhead
walls may be cross braced or tied together provided the tie rods and connections are
designed to carry twice the applied loads.
The face to face dimension for back to back Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) walls
should be 1.1 times the average height of the MSE walls or greater. Back-to- back MSE
walls with a width/height ratio of less than 1.1 shall not be used unless approved by
the State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Design Engineer. The maximum
height for back-to-back MSE wall installations (i.e., average of the maximum heights
of the two parallel walls) is 30 feet, again, unless a greater height is approved by the
State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Design Engineer. Justification to be
submitted to the State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Design Engineer for
approval should include rigorous analyses such as would be conducted using a calibrated
numerical model, addressing the force distribution in the walls for all limit states, and the
potential deformations in the wall for service and extreme event limit states, including the
potential for rocking of the back-to-back wall system.
The soil reinforcement for back-to-back MSE walls may be connected to both faces, i.e.,
continuous from one wall to the other, provided the reinforcing is designed for at least
double the loading, if approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer. Reinforcement may
overlap, provided the reinforcement from one wall does not contact the reinforcement
from the other wall. Reinforcement overlaps of more than 3 feet are generally not
desirable due to the increased cost of materials. Preapproved proprietary wall systems
may be used for back-to-back MSE walls provided they meet the height, height/width
ratio and overlap requirements specified herein. For seismic design of back-to-back walls
in which the reinforcement layers overlap the walls may be considered able to slide to
reduce the acceleration to be applied if both walls are free to slide. If the back-to-back
walls are close enough together such that the active zones of the walls at least partially
overlap, the inertial force of the walls shall be based on the total volume of both walls plus
the retained soil between the walls.
For back-to-back walls, the FHWA manual entitled “Design and Construction of
Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes” by Berg, et al. (2009),
shall be used as the basis for design for those aspects of the design not covered in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the GDM.
15-4.4 Walls on Slopes
Standard Plan walls founded on slopes shall meet the requirements in the Standard
Plans. Additionally, all walls shall have a near horizontal bench at the wall face at least 4
feet wide to provide access for maintenance. Bearing resistance for footings in slopes
and overall stability requirements in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall
be met. Table C11.10.2.2-1 in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications should
be used as a starting point for determining the minimum wall face embedment when
the wall is located on a slope. Use of a smaller embedment must be justified based on
slope geometry, potential for removal of soil in front of the wall due to erosion, future
construction activity, etc., and external and global wall stability considerations.
Page 15-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-4.5 Minimum Embedment
All walls and abutments should meet the minimum embedment criteria in AASHTO. The
final embedment depth required shall be based on geotechnical bearing and stability
requirements provided in the AASHTO LRFD specifications, as determined by the
geotechnical designer (see also Section 15-4.4). Walls that have a sloping ground line at
the face of wall may need to have a sloping or stepped foundation to optimize the wall
embedment. Sloping foundations (i.e., not stepped) shall be 6H:1V or flatter. Stepped
foundations shall be 1.5H:1V or flatter determined by a line through the corners of the
steps. The maximum feasible slope of stepped foundations for walls is controlled by the
maximum acceptable stable slope for the soil in which the wall footing is placed. Concrete
leveling pads constructed for MSE walls shall be sloped at 6H:1V or flatter or stepped
at 1.5H:1V or flatter determined by a line through the corners of the steps. As MSE wall
facing units are typically rectangular shapes, stepped leveling pads are preferred.
In situations where scour (e.g., due to wave or stream erosion) can occur in front of the
wall, the wall foundation (e.g., MSE walls, footing supported walls), the pile cap for pile
supported walls, and for walls that include some form of lagging or panel supported
between vertical wall elements (e.g., soldier pile walls, tieback walls), the bottom of the
footing, pile cap, panel, or lagging shall meet the minimum embedment requirements
relative to the scour elevation in front of the wall. A minimum embedment below scour of
2 feet, unless a greater depth is otherwise specified, shall be used.
15-4.6 Wall Height Limitations
Proprietary wall systems that are preapproved through the WSDOT Bridge and Structures
Office are in general preapproved to 33 feet or less in total height. Greater wall heights
may be used and for many wall systems are feasible, but a special design (i.e., not
preapproved) may be required. The 33 feet preapproved maximum wall height can be
extended for proprietary wall systems if approved by the State Geotechnical and Bridge
Design Engineers.
Some types of walls may have more stringent height limitations. Walls that have more
stringent height limitations include full height propped precast concrete panel MSE walls
(Section 15-5.3.7), flexible faced MSE walls with a vegetated face (Section 15-5.3.8),
MSE wall supported bridge abutments (Section 15-5.3.6), and modular dry cast concrete
block faced systems (Section 15-5.3.9). Other specific wall systems may also have more
stringent height limitations due to specific aspects of their design or the materials used in
their construction.
15-4.7 Serviceability Requirements
Walls shall be designed to structurally withstand the effects of total and differential
settlement estimated for the project site, both longitudinally and in cross-section, as
prescribed in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications. In addition to the requirements for
serviceability provided above, the following criteria (tables 15-2, 15-3, and 15-4) shall be
used to establish acceptable settlement criteria (includes settlement that occurs during
and after wall construction):
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-15
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Table 15-2 Settlement Criteria for Reinforced Concrete Walls, Nongravity Cantilever
Walls, Anchored/Braced Walls, and MSE Walls With Full Height Precast
Concrete Panels (Soil is Place Directly Against Panel)
Differential Settlement
Total Settlement Over 100 Feet Action
ΔH ≤ 1 in ΔH100 ≤ 0.75 in Design and Construct
1 in < ΔH ≤ 2.5 in 0.75 in < ΔH100 ≤ 2 in Ensure structure can tolerate settlement
ΔH > 2.5 in ΔH100 > 2 in Obtain Approval1 prior to proceeding with
design and Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
Table 15-3 Settlement Criteria for MSE Walls With Modular (Segmental) Block
Facings, Prefabricated Modular Walls, and Rock Walls
Differential Settlement
Total Settlement Over 100 Feet Action
ΔH ≤ 2 in ΔH100 ≤ 1.5 in Design and Construct
2 in < ΔH ≤ 4 in 1.5 in < ΔH100 ≤ 3 in Ensure structure can tolerate settlement
ΔH > 4 in ΔH100 > 3 in Obtain Approval1 prior to proceeding with
design and Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
Table 15-4 Settlement Criteria for MSE Walls With Flexible Facings and Reinforced
Slopes, and Walls in Which the Structural Facing is Installed as a Second
Construction Stage After the Wall Settlement is Complete
Differential Settlement
Total Settlement Over 50 Feet Action
ΔH ≤ 4 in ΔH50 ≤ 3 in Design and Construct
4 in < ΔH ≤ 12 in 3 in < ΔH50 ≤ 9 in Ensure structure can tolerate settlement
ΔH > 12 in ΔH50 > 9 in Obtain Approval1 prior to proceeding with
design and Construction
1Approval of WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer required.
For two-stage walls, Table 15-4 settlement limits apply to the first stage. In that case, the
effect of that settlement on installation of the second stage facing shall be addressed.
For the second stage facing, long-term settlement shall be limited to the values shown in
tables 15-2 and 15-3.
For MSE walls with precast panel facings up to 75 feet2 in area, limiting differential
settlements shall be as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications, Article C11.10.4.1,
and total settlement shall be 4 inches or less unless approval by the WSDOT State
Geotechnical Engineer and WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer is obtained.
Note that more stringent tolerances than indicated in tables 15-2 to 15-4 may be
necessary to meet aesthetic requirements for the walls.
Page 15-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-4.8 Active, Passive, At-Rest Earth Pressures
The geotechnical designer shall assess soil conditions and shall develop earth pressure
diagrams for all walls except standard plan walls in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications. Earth pressures may be based on either Coulomb or Rankine
theories. The type of earth pressure used for design depends on the ability of the wall
to yield in response to the earth loads. For walls that free to translate or rotate (i.e.,
flexible walls), active pressures shall be used in the retained soil. Flexible walls are further
defined as being able to displace laterally at least 0.001H, where H is the height of the
wall. Standard Plan reinforced concrete walls, Standard Plan Geosynthetic walls, MSE
walls, soil nail walls, soldier pile walls and anchored walls are generally considered to be
flexible retaining walls. Non-yielding walls shall use at-rest earth pressure parameters.
Non-yielding walls include, for example, integral abutment walls, wall corners, cut and
cover tunnel walls, and braced walls (i.e., walls that are cross-braced to another wall or
structure). Where bridge wing and curtain walls join the bridge abutment, at rest earth
pressures should be used. At distances away from the bridge abutment equal to or greater
than the height of the abutment wall, active earth pressures may be used. This assumes
that at such distances away from the bridge abutment, the wing or curtain wall can
deflect enough to allow active conditions to develop.
If external bracing is used, active pressure may be used for design. For walls used to
stabilize landslides, the applied earth pressure acting on the wall shall be estimated from
limit equilibrium stability analysis of the slide and wall (external and global stability only).
The earth pressure force shall be the force necessary to achieve stability in the slope,
which may exceed at-rest or passive pressure.
Regarding the use of passive pressure for wall design and the establishment of its
magnitude, the effect of wall deformation and soil creep should be considered, as
described in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Article 3.11.1 and associated
commentary. For passive pressure in front of the wall, the potential removal of soil due
to scour, erosion, or future excavation in front of the wall shall be considered when
estimating passive resistance.
15-4.9 Surcharge Loads
Article 3.11.6 in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall be used for surcharge
loads acting on all retaining walls and abutments for walls in which the ground surface
behind the wall is 4H:IV or flatter, the wall shall be designed for the possible presence of
construction equipment loads immediately behind the wall. These construction loads shall
be taken into account by applying a 250 psf live load surcharge to the ground surface
immediately behind the wall. Since this is a temporary construction load, seismic loads
should not be considered for this load case.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-17
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-4.10 Seismic Earth Pressures
For seismic design of walls, the requirements in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications shall be met.
For free standing walls that are free to move during seismic loading, if it is desired to use
a value of kh that is less than 50 percent of As, such walls may be designed for a reduced
seismic acceleration (i.e., yield acceleration) as specifically calculated in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications. The reduced (yield) acceleration should be determined using a
wall displacement that is less than or equal to the following displacements:
• Structural gravity or semi-gravity walls – maximum horizontal displacement of 4 in.
• MSE walls – maximum horizontal displacement of 8 in.
These maximum allowed displacements do not apply to walls that support other
structures, unless it is determined that the supported structures have the ability to
tolerate the design displacement without compromising the required performance of the
supported structure. These maximum allowed displacements also do not apply to walls
that support utilities that cannot tolerate such movements and must function after the
design seismic event or that support utilities that could pose a significant danger to the
public of the utility ruptured. For walls that do support other structures, the maximum
wall horizontal displacement allowed shall be no greater than the displacement that is
acceptable for the structure supported by the wall.
These maximum allowed wall displacements also do not apply to non-gravity walls (e.g.,
soldier pile, anchored walls). A detailed structural analysis of non-gravity walls is required
to assess how much they can deform laterally during the design seismic event, so that the
appropriate value of kh can be determined.
If fine grained soils are present behind the wall, the seismic earth pressure shall be
determined accounting for the effect of earthquake shaking and displacement on the soil
shear strength. For sensitive silts and clays (see also Section 6.4.3), the shear strength
used to calculate the seismic earth pressure shall be reduced to account for the strength
loss caused by the shaking. If over-consolidated cohesive soils (e.g., “Seattle Clays” as
described in Section 5-13.3) are present behind the wall and the wall is designed to
allow displacement, the residual drained friction angle rather than the peak friction
angle in accordance with Chapter 5, should be used to determine the seismic lateral
earth pressure. To justify a design shear strength greater than its residual value, a wall
displacement analysis shall be conducted and shall demonstrate that the magnitude of the
wall deflections allowed are too small to drop the shear strength to its residual value. See
Chapter 5 for additional requirements regarding the shear strength issue, and Chapter 6
and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for design methods and additional
requirements to estimate the wall deflection.
Note that for the design methods typically used to estimate seismic earth pressure
and which are specified in the GDM the slope of the active failure plane flattens as the
earthquake acceleration increases. For anchored walls, the bonded zone of the anchors
shall be located behind the active failure wedge. The methodology provided in FHWA
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4 (Sabatini et al., 1999) should be used to locate
the active failure plane for the purpose of anchored zone location for anchored walls. If
the anchors are needed to provide an acceptable level of safety for overall slope stability
Page 15-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
during seismic loading, the bonded zone of the anchors shall be located behind the critical
slope stability failure surface and the active zone behind the wall for seismic loading.
For walls that support other structures that are located over the active zone of the wall,
the inertial force due to the mass of the supported structure shall be considered in the
design of the wall if that structure can displace laterally with the wall during the seismic
event. For supported structures that are only partially supported by the active zone of
the wall, numerical modeling of the wall and supported structure should be considered to
assess the impact of the supported structure inertial force on the wall stability.
15-4.11 Liquefaction
Under extreme event loading, liquefaction and lateral spreading may occur. The
geotechnical designer shall assess liquefaction and lateral spreading for the site and
identify these geologic hazards. Design to assess and to mitigate these geologic hazards
shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions in Chapter 6.
For walls that retain liquefiable soils, and for which ground improvement is not feasible
or cost effective to mitigate the liquefiable soils, the Generalized Limit Equilibrium (GLE)
Method should be used to estimate the seismic active earth pressure as specified in
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, specifically Article 11.6.5.3. Two analyses are
required when a wall retains soil layers that may liquefy. These two analyses include: (1)
a pseudo-static wall design as specified in Section 15-4.10, and (2) an analysis in which
the soil has liquefied. For sites where more than 20 percent of the hazard contributing
to the peak ground acceleration is from an earthquake with a magnitude of 7.5 or more
(i.e., a long duration earthquake where there is potential for strong motion to occur after
liquefaction has occurred), it should be assumed that the additional earth pressure behind
the wall due to liquefaction occurs simultaneously with the earthquake ground motion.
In this case, kh shall be as specified in the previous section (i.e., Section 15-4.10). For
earthquakes in which the magnitude is less than 7.5, it can be assumed that kh = 0 when
the soil is liquefied.
When using the GLE Method to determine seismic earth pressure when the soil is
liquefied, the liquefied shear strength shall be determined as a function of vertical
effective stress such as shown in Figures 6-1, 6-3, and 6-4. Furthermore, for soils that
liquefy but which have relatively high SPT blowcounts, it is possible that the seismic
lateral earth pressure generated could be higher than the earth pressure generated
when the soil has not liquefied. In such cases, the earth pressure generated when
using liquefied soil shear strength shall be limited to be no less than the non-liquefied
earth pressure.
Numerical, two dimensional effective stress methods may also be used to assess the
earth pressure on retaining walls due to retained soil that contains liquefiable layers. The
geotechnical designer shall provide documentation that their numerical model has been
validated and calibrated with field data, centrifuge data, and/or extensive sensitivity
analyses. Due to the highly specialized nature of these more sophisticated liquefaction
assessment approaches, approval by the State Geotechnical Engineer is required to use
nonlinear effective stress methods for liquefaction evaluation, and independent peer
review as described in Section 6-3.3 shall be conducted.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-19
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-4.12 Overall Stability
All retaining walls and reinforced slopes shall be designed for overall stability using
Strength Limit State load groups, using a load factor of 1.0 for non-structural loads and
shall have a resistance factor for overall stability of 0.75 (i.e., a safety factor of 1.3 as
calculated using a limit equilibrium slope stability method). This resistance factor is not to
be applied directly to the soil properties used to assess this mode of failure. If structural
foundation loads are to be applied to the slope being analyzed (e.g., such as a bridge
footing or retaining wall), the structural foundation loads shall be factored as a Strength
Limit State load, and the resistance factor shall be no greater than 0.75. If Extreme Event
loading is a factor (e.g., for earthquake loading), the load and resistance factors specified
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall be used.
It is important to check overall stability for surfaces that include the wall mass, as well
as surfaces that check for stability of the soil below the wall, if the wall is located well
above the toe of the slope. If the slope below the wall is determined to be potentially
unstable, the wall stability should be evaluated assuming that the unstable slope material
has moved away from the toe of the wall, if the slope below the wall is not stabilized. The
slope above the wall, if one is present, should also be checked for overall stability.
Stability shall be assessed using limiting equilibrium methods in accordance with
Chapter 7.
15-4.13 Wall Drainage
Drainage shall be provided for all walls when it is possible for water to build up behind
the wall due to groundwater, stormwater infiltration, flooding, or due to tidal influence.
In instances where wall drainage cannot be provided, the hydrostatic pressure from the
water shall be included in the design of the wall. In general, wall drainage shall be in
accordance with the Standard Plans, General Special Provisions. Figure 730-11 in the
Design Manual M 22-01 shall be used for drain details and drain placement for all walls
not covered by Standard Plan D-4 except as follows:
• Gabion walls and rock walls are generally considered permeable and do not typically
require wall drains, provided construction geotextile is placed against the native soil
or fill.
• Soil nail walls shall use composite drainage material centered between each column
of nails. The drainage material shall be connected to weep holes using a drain gate
or shall be wrapped around an underdrain.
• Cantilever and Anchored wall systems using lagging shall have composite drainage
material attached to the lagging face prior to casting the permanent facing. Walls
without facing or walls using precast panels are not required to use composite
drainage material provided the water can pass through the lagging unhindered.
• For walls subject to periodic inundation due to tides or frequent flooding, additional
drainage features shall be included with the wall to prevent or at least minimize the
potential for rapid draw-down conditions, such as additional weep holes, chimney
drains, etc., plus rapidly draining backfill as described in Section 15-3.7 below the
level of inundation, if wall backfill is needed.
Page 15-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-4.14 Utilities
Walls that have or may have future utilities in the backfill should minimize the use of soil
reinforcement. MSE, soil nail, and anchored walls commonly have conflicts with utilities
and should not be used when utilities must remain in the reinforced soil zone unless there
is no other wall option. Utilities that are encapsulated by wall reinforcement may not be
accessible for replacement or maintenance. Utility agreements should specifically address
future access if wall reinforcing will affect access.
15-4.15 Guardrail and Barrier
Guardrail and barrier shall meet the requirements of the Design Manual M 22-01, Bridge
Design Manual, Standard Plans, and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
In no case shall guardrail posts be placed through MSE wall or reinforced slope soil
reinforcement closer than 3 feet from the back of the wall facing elements. Furthermore,
the guard rail posts shall be installed through the soil reinforcement in a manner that
prevents ripping and distortion of the soil reinforcement, and the soil reinforcement
shall be designed to account for the reduced cross-section resulting from the guardrail
post holes.
For walls with a traffic barrier, the distribution of the applied impact load to the wall top
shall be as described in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Article 11.10.10.2
for LRFD designs unless otherwise specified in the Bridge Design Manual, except that for
MSE walls, the impact load should be distributed into the soil reinforcement considering
only the top two reinforcement layers below the traffic barrier to take the distributed
impact load as described in NCHRP Report 663, Appendix I (Bligh, et al., 2010). See
Figure 15-3 for an illustration of soil reinforcement load distributions for TL-3 and TL-4
loading. In that figure, pd is the dynamic pressure distribution due to the traffic impact
load that is to be resisted by the soil reinforcement, and ps is the static earth pressure
distribution, which is to be added to the dynamic pressure to determine the total soil
reinforcement loading. For TL-5 loading, the soil reinforcement loads shown in the figure
should be scaled up considering the magnitude of the impact load for TL-4 loading relative
to the impact load for TL-5 loading.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-21
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Figure 15-3 MSE Wall Soil Reinforcement Design for Traffic Barrier Impact for TL-3 and TL-4 Loading
(after Bligh, et al., 2010)
(a) Pressure distribution for reinforcement pullout
(b) Pressure distribution for reinforcement rupture.
MSE Wall Soil Reinforcement Design for Traffic Barrier Impact for
TL-3 and TL-4 Loading (after Bligh, et al., 2010)
Page 15-22 Figure 15-3 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-5 Wall Type Specific Design Requirements
15-5.1 Abutments
Abutment foundations shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 8. Abutment
walls, wingwalls, and curtain walls shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications and as specifically required in this GDM. Abutments that are
backfilled prior to constructing the superstructure shall be designed using active earth
pressures. Active earth pressures shall be used for abutments that are backfilled after
construction of the superstructure, if the abutment can move sufficiently to develop
active pressures. If the abutment is restrained, at-rest earth pressure shall be used.
Abutments that are “U” shaped or that have curtain/wing walls should be designed to
resist at-rest pressures in the corners, as the walls are constrained (see Section 15-4.8).
15-5.2 Nongravity Cantilever and Anchored Walls
WSDOT typically does not utilize sheet pile walls for permanent applications, except
at Washington State Ferries (WSF) facilities. Sheet pile walls may be used at WSF
facilities but shall not be used elsewhere without approval of the WSDOT Bridge Design
Engineer. Sheet pile walls utilized for shoring or cofferdams shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor and shall be approved on construction, unless the construction contract
special provisions or plans state otherwise.
Permanent soldier piles for soldier pile and anchored walls should be installed in drilled
holes. Impact or vibratory methods may be used to install temporary soldier piles, but
installation in drilled holes is preferred.
Nongravity and Anchored walls shall be designed using the latest edition of the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Key geotechnical design requirements for these types of
walls are found in Sections 3 and 11 of the AASHTO LRFD specifications.
15-5.2.1 Nongravity Cantilever Walls
The exposed height of nongravity cantilever walls is generally controlled by acceptable
deflections at the top of wall. In “good” soils, cantilever walls are generally 12 to 15
feet or less in height. Greater exposed heights can be achieved with increased section
modulus or the use of secant/tangent piles. Nongravity cantilever walls using a single row
of ground anchors or deadmen anchors shall be considered an anchored wall.
In general, the drilled hole for the soldier piles for nongravity cantilever walls will be
filled with a relatively low strength flowable material such as controlled density fill
(CDF), provided that water is not present in the drilled hole. Since CDF has a relatively
low cement content, the cementitious material in the CDF has a tendency to wash out
when placed through water. If the CDF becomes too weak because of this, the design
assumption that the full width of the drilled hole, rather than the width of the soldier
pile by itself, governs the development of the passive resistance in front of the wall will
become invalid. The presence of groundwater will affect the choice of material specified
by the structural designer to backfill the soldier pile holes, e.g., CDF if the hole is not wet,
or higher strength concrete designed for tremie applications. Therefore, it is important
that the geotechnical designer identify the potential for ground water in the drilled holes
during design, as the geotechnical stability of a nongravity cantilever soldier pile wall is
governed by the passive resistance available in front of the wall.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-23
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Typically, when discrete vertical elements are used to form the wall, it is assumed that
due to soil arching, the passive resistance in front of the wall acts over three pile/shaft
diameters. For typical site conditions, this assumption is reasonable. However, in very soft
soils, that degree of soil arching may not occur, and a smaller number of pile diameters
(e.g., 1 to 2 diameters) should be assumed for this passive resistance arching effect.
For soldier piles placed in very dense soils, such as glacially consolidated till, when CDF
is used, the strength of the CDF may be similar enough to the soil that the full shaft
diameter may not be effective in mobilizing passive resistance. In that case, either full
strength concrete should be used to fill the drilled hole, or only the width of the soldier
pile should be considered effective in mobilizing passive resistance.
If the wall is being used to stabilize a deep seated landslide, in general, it should be
assumed that full strength concrete will be used to backfill the soldier pile holes, as the
shearing resistance of the concrete will be used to help resist the lateral forces caused by
the landslide.
15-5.2.2 Anchored/Braced Walls
Anchored/braced walls generally consist of a vertical structural elements such as soldier
piles or drilled shafts and lateral anchorage elements placed beside or through the vertical
structural elements. Design of these walls shall be in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications.
In general, the drilled hole for the soldier piles for anchored/braced walls will be filled
with a relatively low strength flowable material such as controlled density fill (CDF). For
anchored walls, the passive resistance in front of the wall toe is not as critical for wall
stability as is the case for nongravity cantilever walls. For anchored walls, resistance
at the wall toe to prevent “kickout” is primarily a function of the structural bending
resistance of the soldier pile itself. Therefore, it is not as critical that the CDF maintain
its full shear strength during and after placement if the hole is wet. For anchored/braced
walls, the only time full strength concrete would be used to fill the soldier pile holes
in the buried portion of the wall is when the anchors are steeply dipping, resulting in
relatively high vertical loads, or for the case when additional shear strength is needed to
resist high lateral kickout loads resulting from deep seated landslides. In the case of walls
used to stabilize deep seated landslides, the geotechnical designer must clearly indicate
to the structural designer whether or not the shear resistance of the soldier pile and
cementitious backfill material (i.e., full strength concrete) must be considered as part of
the resistance needed to help stabilize the landslide.
15-5.2.3 Permanent Ground Anchors
The geotechnical designer shall define the no-load zone for anchors in accordance with
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. If the ground anchors are installed through
landslide material or material that could potentially be unstable, the no load zone shall
include the entire unstable zone as defined by the actual or potential failure surface plus
5 feet minimum. The contract documents should require the drill hole in the no load zone
to be backfilled with a non-structural filler. Contractors may request to fill the drill hole in
the no load zone with grout prior to testing and acceptance of the anchor. This is usually
acceptable provided bond breakers are present on the strands, the anchor unbonded
length is increased by 8 feet minimum, and the grout in the unbonded zone is not placed
by pressure grouting methods.
Page 15-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
The geotechnical designer shall determine the factored anchor pullout resistance that can
be reasonably used in the structural design given the soil conditions. The ground anchors
used on the projects shall be designed by the Contractor. Compression anchors (see
Sabatini, et al., 1999) may be used, but conventional anchors are preferred by WSDOT.
The geotechnical designer shall estimate the nominal anchor bond stress (tn) for the
soil conditions and common anchor grouting methods. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications and the FHWA publications listed at the beginning of this chapter provide
guidance on acceptable values to use for various types of soil and rock. The geotechnical
designer shall then apply a resistance factor to the nominal bond stress to determine a
feasible factored pullout resistance (FPR) for anchors to be used in the wall. In general, a
5-in diameter low pressure grouted anchor with a bond length of 15 to 30 feet should be
assumed when estimating the feasible anchor resistance. FHWA research has indicated
that anchor bond lengths greater than 40 feet are not fully effective. Anchor bond lengths
greater than 50 feet shall be approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer.
The structural designer shall use the factored pullout resistance to determine the number
of anchors required to resist the factored loads. The structural designer shall also use this
value in the contract documents as the required anchor resistance that Contractor needs
to achieve. The Contractor will design the anchor bond zone to provide the specified
resistance. The Contractor will be responsible for determining the actual length of the
bond zone, hole diameter, drilling methods, and grouting method used for the anchors.
All ground anchors shall be proof tested, except for anchors that are subjected to
performance tests. A minimum of 5 percent of the wall’s anchors shall be performance
tested. For ground anchors in clays, or other soils that are known to be potentially
problematic, especially with regard to creep, at least one verification test shall be
performed in each soil type within the anchor zone. Past WSDOT practice has been to
perform verification tests at two times the design load with proof and performance tests
loaded to 1.5 times the design load. National practice has been to test to 1.33 times the
design load for proof and performance tests. Historically, WSDOT has utilized a higher
safety factor in its anchored wall designs (FS=1.5) principally due to past performance
with anchors constructed in Seattle Clay. For anchors that are installed in Seattle Clay,
other similar formations, and clays in general, the level of safety obtained in past WSDOT
practice shall continue to be used (i.e., FS = 1.5). Detailed testing and acceptance
protocols, based on recommendations by Allen (2020), that shall be followed for tiebacks
installed in clays are provided in Appendix 15-G. The recommended protocols for
tiebacks in clay provided in Allen (2020) and in Appendix 15-G were primarily developed
for straight-shafted, low pressure grouted tiebacks. Application of these criteria to
pressure and post- grouted tiebacks may be considered, subject to approval by the State
Geotechnical Engineer. For anchors in other soils (e.g., sands, gravels, glacial tills), the level
of safety obtained when applying the national practice (i.e., FS = 1.33) should be used.
The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications specifically addresses anchor testing.
The AASHTO specifications recommend that the test loads used in past allowable stress
design practice be reduced by the load factor applicable to the limit state that controls
the maximum factored design load for the anchor. For the strength limit state, a load
factor γEH of 1.35 is typically applied to the lateral earth pressure acting on the wall. If the
seismic design (i.e., Extreme Event I) controls the factored load acting on the anchor, then
the load factor is only 1.0. However, due to the extreme nature of the loading for this limit
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-25
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
state, the extra margin of safety used to design in the strength limit state is not needed
for the seismic load case, as past allowable stress design practice used a FS of 1.0.
To be consistent with previous WSDOT practice, for the Strength Limit State, verification
tests, if conducted, shall be performed to 1.5 times the factored design load (FDL) for the
anchor. Proof and performance tests shall be performed to 1.15 times the factored design
load (FDL) for anchors installed in clays, and to 1.00 times the factored design load (FDL)
for anchors in other soils and rock. The geotechnical designer should make the decision
during design as to whether or not a higher test load is required for anchors in a portion
of, or all of, the wall due to the presence of clays or other problematic soils. These proof,
performance, and verification test loads assume that a load factor, γEH, of 1.35 is applied
to the apparent earth pressure used to design the anchored wall. If the Extreme Event I
limit state controls the design, the same loading sequence and magnitude as used for the
strength limit state should be used for all anchor tests.
The following shall be used for verification tests:
Strength Limit State Controls
Load Hold Time
AL 1 Min.
0.25FDL 10 Min.
0.50FDL 10 Min.
0.75FDL 10 Min.
1.00FDL 10 Min.
1.15FDL 60 Min.
1.25FDL 10 Min.
1.50FDL 10 Min.
AL 1 Min.
AL is the alignment load. The test load shall be applied in increments of 25 percent of
the factored design load. Each load increment shall be held for at least 10 minutes.
Measurement of anchor movement shall be obtained at each load increment. The load-
hold period shall start as soon as the test load is applied and the anchor movement, with
respect to a fixed reference, shall be measured and recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10,
15, 20, 25, 30, 45, and 60 minutes.
The following shall be used for proof tests, for anchors in clay or other creep susceptible
or otherwise problematic soils or rock:
Strength Limit State Controls
Load Hold Time
AL 1 Min.
0.25FDL 1 Min.
0.50FDL 1 Min.
0.75FDL 1 Min.
1.00FDL 1 Min.
1.15FDL 10 Min.
AL 1 Min.
Page 15-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
The following shall be used for proof tests, for anchors in sands, gravels, glacial tills, rock,
or other materials where creep is not likely to be a significant issue:
Strength Limit State Controls
Load Hold Time
AL 1 Min.
0.25FDL 1 Min.
0.50FDL 1 Min.
0.75FDL 1 Min.
1.00FDL 10 Min.
AL 1 Min.
The maximum test load in a proof test shall be held for ten minutes, and shall be
measured and recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. If the anchor movement
between one minute and ten minutes exceeds 0.04 in, the maximum test load shall be
held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the anchor movements
shall be recorded at 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, and 60 minutes.
Performance tests cycle the load applied to the anchor. Between load cycles, the anchor
is returned to the alignment load (AL) before beginning the next load cycle. The following
shall be used for performance tests:
Cycle 1 Cycle 2 Cycle 3 Cycle 4 Cycle 5* Cycle 6
AL AL AL AL AL AL
0.25FDL 0.25FDL 0.25FDL 0.25FDL 0.25FDL Lock-off
0.50FDL 0.50FDL 0.50FDL 0.50FDL
0.75FDL 0.75FDL 0.75FDL
1.00FDL 1.00FDL
1.15FDL
*The fifth cycle shall be conducted if the anchor is installed in clay or other problematic soils. Otherwise,
the load hold is conducted at 1.00FDL and the fifth cycle is eliminated.
The load shall be raised from one increment to another immediately after a deflection
reading. The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for 10 minutes. If the
anchor movement between one minute and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 inch, the maximum
test load shall be held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the
anchor movements shall be recorded at 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, and 60 minutes. After the
final load hold, the anchor shall be unstressed to the alignment load then jacked to the
lock-off load.
The structural designer should specify the lock-off load in the contract. Past WSDOT
practice has been to lock-off at 80 percent of the anchor design load. Because the
factored design load for the anchor is higher than the “design load” used in past practice,
locking off at 80 percent would result in higher tendon loads. To match previous
practice, the lock-off load for all permanent ground anchors shall be 60 percent of the
factored design load for the anchor. This applies to both the Strength and Extreme Event
limit states.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-27
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Since the contractor designs and installs the anchor, the contract documents should
require the following:
1. Lock off shall not exceed 70 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength for
the anchor.
2. Test loads shall not exceed 80 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength for
the anchor.
3. All anchors shall be double corrosion protected (encapsulated). Epoxy coated or bare
strands shall not be used unless the wall is temporary.
4. Ground anchor installation angle should be 15 to 30 degrees from horizontal, but
may be as steep as 45 degrees to install anchors in competent materials or below
failure planes.
The geotechnical designer and the structural designer should develop the construction
plans and special provisions to ensure that the contractor complies with these
requirements.
15-5.2.4 Deadmen
The geotechnical designer shall develop earth pressures and passive resistance for
deadmen in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Deadmen shall
be located in accordance with Figure 20 from NAVFAC DM-7.2, Foundations and Earth
Structures, May 1982 (reproduced below for convenience in Figure 15-4).
Page 15-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Chapter 15 Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes
Figure 15-4 Deadman Anchor Design (After NAVFAC, 1982)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-29
December 2020
Deadman Anchor Design (After NAVFAC, 1982)
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-5.3 Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls
Wall design shall be in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
except as noted below.
With regard to internal stability design of MSE walls, three methods for estimating the
design soil reinforcement loads (Tmax) are available. They include the Simplified Method,
the Coherent Gravity Method, and the Simplified Stiffness Method (hereinafter referred
to as the Stiffness Method). The Simplified and Coherent Gravity methods have been
in use for many years and are currently included in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. The Stiffness Method, developed by Allen and Bathurst (2015, 2018),
is newer than the other two methods. While each method started from different
“theoretical” assumptions, all three methods have been empirically developed from
measurements made during wall operational conditions. It is therefore important that
these methods be applied to design situations that are within the range of the case
history data used to develop them. For insights as to the range of the design situations
applicable to the Coherent Gravity Method, see Schlosser (1978), Schlosser and Segrestin
(1979), and Allen et al. (2001). Likewise, for the Simplified Method, see Allen et al.
(2001). Finally, for the Stiffness Method, see Allen and Bathurst (2015, 2018). If any of
these methods must be used for situations that are significantly beyond their empirical
basis (e.g., for walls placed on soft compressible soil), additional evaluations should be
conducted. Of the three methods, the Stiffness Method has the broadest empirical basis.
However, the Stiffness Method has not been as widely used yet relative to the other two
methods for new wall designs, especially for steel reinforced structures.
The Stiffness Method is in general less conservative, but more accurate, than the other
two methods. For this reason, the load and resistance factors provided in the current
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (2017), which are based on levels of safety
used in previous long-term design practice, are not directly applicable to the Stiffness
Method, requiring that the Stiffness Method be calibrated using reliability theory to
achieve the target minimum reliability (see Allen et al. 2005). Therefore, the calibrated
load and resistance factors provided in Section 15-5.3.10.2 for the Stiffness Method shall
be used.
Note that load and resistance factors are not provided for the Stiffness Method in Section
15-5.3.10.2 for MSE walls with steel (i.e., inextensible) reinforcement. Calibration of
the Stiffness Method load and resistance factors for steel reinforced systems are still in
progress and therefore are not available at the time of this update. Until that calibration
work is complete, the Stiffness Method is only approved for routine use for MSE walls
with extensible reinforcement. This method may be used for steel reinforced MSE walls
only if the reinforcement layers are instrumented such that the reinforcement loads
are measured, subject to approval by the State Geotechnical Engineer. However, the
Coherent Gravity and Simplified methods, using the load and resistance factors provided
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, should be used for inextensible steel
reinforced MSE walls, considering long-term successful design practice.
These MSE wall design procedures assume that inextensible reinforcements are not
mixed with extensible reinforcements within the same wall. Therefore, MSE walls shall
not contain a mixture of inextensible and extensible reinforcements.
Page 15-30 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-5.3.1
15-5.3.1 Soil Reinforcement Spacing Considerations
Vacant
For uniform vertical spacing of soil reinforcement, S , the tributary layer thickness,
For uniform vertical spacing of soil reinforcement, Sv,v the tributary layer thickness, is equal
is equal to the vertical spacing of the reinforcement. For nonuniform vertical spacing
to the vertical spacing of the reinforcement. For nonuniform vertical spacing of soil
of soil reinforcement, S shall be taken as shown in Figure 15-5.
reinforcement, Sv shall bev taken as shown in Figure 15-5.
Figure 15-5 Determination of the tributary layer thickness, Sv
Figure 15-5 Determination of the tributary layer thickness, Sv.
The design procedures provided herein assume that the wall facing combined with
The
thedesign procedures
reinforced backfill provided herein assume
acts as a coherent unit tothat
formthea wall facing
gravity combined
retaining with the
structure. The
reinforced
effect of relatively large vertical spacing of reinforcement on this assumption is not well of
backfill acts as a coherent unit to form a gravity retaining structure. The effect
relatively
known and large verticalspacing
a vertical spacinggreater
of reinforcement
than 2.7 feet on should
this assumption
not be used is not well known
without and a
full scale
vertical spacing
wall data (e.g., greater than 2.7
reinforcement feetand
loads should not and
strains, be used without
overall full scale
deflections) wall
that data (e.g.,
support the
reinforcement loads and strains, and overall deflections) that support
acceptability of larger vertical spacing. However, for MSE wall systems with facing units the acceptability of
larger vertical spacing. However, for MSE wall systems with facing units equal to or greater
equal to or greater than 2.7 ft high with a minimum facing unit width, W , equal to or
than 2.7 ft high with a minimum facing unit width, Wu, equal to or greateruthan the facing unit
greater than the facing unit height, the maximum spacing, Sv, shall not exceed the width
height, the maximum spacing, Sv, shall not exceed the width of the facing unit, Wu, or 3.3 ft,
of the facing unit, W , or 3.3 ft, whichever is less. See Allen and Bathurst (2003, 2018)
whichever is less. See uAllen and Bathurst (2003, 2018) for results from and analysis of case
for results
history data from and analysis
regarding of case
this issue. It is history data regarding
also important this issue.
to recognize It is also
that large important
vertical spacing of
to recognize that large vertical spacing of reinforcement can result in excessive
reinforcement can result in excessive facing deflection, both localized and global, which could facing
indeflection,
turn causeboth localized
localized and global,
elevated stresses which
in thecould
facingin turn cause
and its localizedtoelevated
connection the soil stresses
in the facing and
reinforcement, its connection
especially for wallstowith
the flexible
soil reinforcement, especially for walls
facing. Center-to-center with flexible
horizontal spacing
facing. Center-to-center horizontal spacing of reinforcement elements
of reinforcement elements should not exceed 3.3 ft for walls with rigid facing panels. For should not exceed
3.3 ft
walls for flexible
with walls with rigidpanels,
facing facing horizontal
panels. For walls
gaps with flexible
between facing panels,elements
soil reinforcement horizontalshould
gaps
not between
exceed soil reinforcement elements should not exceed 1.5 ft.
1.5 ft.
Horizontalspacings
Horizontal spacingsasaslarge
largeasas3.3
3.3ftfthave
havebeen
beenused
usedinintypical
typicaldesign
designand
andconstruction
construction
practice for MSE walls. Back-analysis of instrumented MSE
practice for MSE walls. Back-analysis of instrumented MSE walls indicates thatwalls indicates that
reinforcementload
reinforcement loadprediction
predictionaccuracy
accuracyisisnotnotadversely
adverselycompromised
compromisedwith withhorizontal
horizontalspacing
spacing of this magnitude when the reinforcement elements are directly
of this magnitude when the reinforcement elements are directly attached to rigid facings attached to rigidsuch
asfacings
precastsuch as precast
concrete panels.concrete
However,panels. However,
for flexible for flexible
facings such asfacings
welded such as large
wire, welded
horizontal
wire, largespacing of the
horizontal reinforcement
spacing has be shown
of the reinforcement tobe
has cause poor
shown to wall performance
cause poor wall and
therefore should
performance and not be usedshould
therefore for wallsnotwith flexible
be used for facing. Forflexible
walls with flexiblyfacing.
faced walls, even a
For flexibly
gap of 1.5
faced ft between
walls, even a gap reinforcement
of 1.5 ft betweenelements can result in
reinforcement excessive
elements candeformation of the
result in excessive
facing elements.
deformation Therefore,
of the if horizontal
facing elements. gaps of this
Therefore, magnitude
if horizontal gapsareofused, the effect of
this magnitude arethe
gaps onthe
used, theeffect
facingofpanel deformation
the gaps on the facingshould be investigated.
panel deformation should be investigated.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-31
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12 Page 15-31
December 2020
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-5.3.2 Live Load Considerations for MSE Walls
The AASHTO design specifications allow traffic live load to not be specifically considered
for pullout design (note that this does not apply to traffic barrier impact load design as
discussed above). The concept behind this is that for the most common situations, it is
unlikely that the traffic wheel paths will be wholly contained within the active zone of the
wall, meaning that one of the wheel paths will be over the reinforcement resistant zone
while the other wheel path is over the active zone. However, there are cases where traffic
live load could be wholly contained within the active zone.
Therefore, include live load in calculation of Tmax, where Tmax is as defined in the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (i.e., the calculated maximum load in each reinforcement
layer), for pullout design if it is possible for both wheels of a vehicle to drive over the wall
active zone at the same time, or if a special live loading condition is likely (e.g., a very
heavy vehicle could load up the active zone without having a wheel directly over the
reinforcement in the resistant zone). Otherwise, live load does not need to be considered.
For example, with a minimum 2 feet shoulder and a minimum vehicle width of 8 feet,
the active zone for steel reinforced walls would be wide enough for this to happen only
if the wall is over 30 feet high, and for geosynthetic walls over 22 feet high. For walls of
greater height, live load would need to be considered for pullout for the typical traffic
loading situation.
15-5.3.3 Backfill Considerations for MSE Walls
For steel reinforced MSE walls, the design soil friction angle for the backfill shall not be
greater than 40° even if soil specific shear strength testing is conducted, as research
conducted to date indicates that measured reinforcement loads do not continue to
decrease as the soil shear strength increases (Bathurst, et al., 2009, Allen and Bathurst
2015 and 2018). For geosynthetic MSE walls, however, the load in the soil reinforcement
does appear to be correlated to soil shear strength even for shear strength values greater
than 40° (see Allen, et al., 2003 and Bathurst, et al., 2008). A maximum design friction
angle of 40° should also be used for geosynthetic reinforced walls even with backfill
specific shear strength testing, unless project specific approval is obtained from the
WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer to exceed 40°. If backfill shear strength testing is
conducted, it shall be conducted in accordance with Section 15-3.7.
In general, low silt content backfill materials such as Gravel Borrow per the WSDOT
Standard Specifications should be used for MSE walls. If higher silt content soils are used
as wall backfill, the wall should be designed using only the frictional component of the
backfill soil shear strength as discussed in Section 15-3.7. Other issues that shall be
addressed if higher fines content soils are used are as follows:
• Ability to place and compact the soil, especially during or after inclement weather
– In general, as the fines content increases and the soil becomes more well graded,
water that gets into the wall backfill due to rain, surface water flow, or ground water
flow can cause the backfill to “pump” during placement and compaction, preventing
the wall backfill from being properly compacted. Even some gravel borrow gradations
may be susceptible to pumping problems when wet, especially when the fines content
is greater than 5 percent. Excessive wall face deformation during wall construction
can also occur in this case. Because of this potential problem, higher silt content wall
backfill should only be used during extended periods of dry weather, such as typically
Page 15-32 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
occurs in the summer and early fall months in Western Washington, and possibly most
of the year in at least some parts of Eastern Washington.
• For steel reinforced wall systems, the effect of the higher fines content on corrosion
rate of the steel reinforcement – General practice nationally is that use of backfill
with up to 15 percent silt content is acceptable for steel reinforced systems (AASHTO,
2010; Berg, et al., 2009). If higher silt content soils are used, elevated corrosion rates
for the steel reinforcement should be considered (see Elias, et al., 2009).
• Prevention of water or moisture build-up in the wall reinforced backfill – When
the fines content is greater than 5 percent, the material should not be considered
to be free draining (see Section 15-3.7). In such cases where the fines content is
greater than that allowed in the WSDOT gravel borrow specification (i.e., greater
than 7 percent), special measures to prevent water from entering the reinforced
backfill shall be implemented. This includes placement of under-drains at the back
of the reinforced soil zone, sheet drains to intercept possible ground and rainwater
infiltration flow, and use of some type impermeable barrier over the top of the
reinforced soil zone.
• Potential for long-term lateral and vertical deformation of the wall due to soil creep,
or in general as cohesive soil shear strength is lost over the life of the wall – Strain
and load increase with time in a steel reinforced soil wall was observed for a large wall
in California, a likely consequence of using a backfill soil with a significant cohesion
component (Allen, et al., 2001). The Stiffness Method (see Section 15-5.3.10.1,
especially Table 15-E-2 in Appendix 15-E) may be used to estimate the reinforcement
strain increase caused by loss of cohesive shear strength over time (i.e., estimate the
reinforcement strain using the c-f shear strength at end of construction, and subtract
that from the reinforcement strain estimated using only the frictional component
of that shear strength for design to get the long-term strain). This would give an
indication of the long-term wall deformation that could occur.
15-5.3.4 Compound Stability Assessment for MSE Walls
If the MSE wall is located over a soft foundation soil, sloping ground above or below the
wall, on or adjacent to unstable ground due to landslides, the wall is a combination of two
or more tiers, or the wall supports foundation loads, compound stability of the wall shall
be evaluated for the Strength Limit State and as applicable the Extreme Event Limit State
in accordance with Section 15-4.12. It is recommended that this stability evaluation only
be used to evaluate surfaces that intersect within the bottom 20 to 30 percent of the
reinforcement layers. As discussed by Allen and Bathurst (2002) and Allen and Bathurst
(2018), available limit equilibrium approaches such as the ones typically used to evaluate
slope stability do not work well for internal stability of reinforced soil structures, resulting
in excessively conservative designs, at least for geosynthetic or otherwise extensible
reinforced systems, and resulting in unconservative designs for steel or otherwise
inextensible reinforced systems.
Limit equilibrium analyses (LEA) shall be used to evaluate compound stability. The long-
term strength of each backfill reinforcement layer intersected by the failure surface
should be considered as resisting forces in the limit equilibrium slope stability analysis.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-33
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
To perform a LEA for compound stability, three analysis steps are conducted, which
are as follows:
• Estimate the nominal load in each reinforcement layer, Tmax, targeting a load and
resistance factor combination of 1.0.
• Adjust the reinforcement spacing and strength required to meet the limit states
as specified in sections 15-5.3.10.3.2 and 15-5.3.10.3.3 for each reinforcement
layer using factored load and resistance values. Load factors shall be as specified
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Table 3.4.1-1 and 3.4.1-2, and
resistance factors as specified in AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Table
11.5.7-1, except for the Stiffness Method, in which the load and resistance factors
are as specified in GDM Section 15-5.3.10.1, Table 15-5.
• Check the factored design using LEA with factored load and resistance values.
When additional surcharge loads, such as a structure footing load or live load, are applied
to the top of the reinforced zone of the MSE wall, for Step 3, they shall be factored as
specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Article 3.4.1 for the Strength I
limit state.
Development of LEA for MSE wall design is summarized in Leshchinsky et al. (2016,
2017). LEA, using either a log spiral or circular failure surface, is described by Vahedifard
et al. (2014, 2016) and Leshchinsky et al. (2016, 2017). It is also possible to conduct the
LEA using conventional slope stability computer software in which the tensile inclusions
provide resistance to slope instability.The results of the compound stability analysis, if
it controls the reinforcement needs near the base of the wall, should be expressed as
minimum total reinforcement strength and total reinforcement pullout resistance for all
layers within a “box” at the base of the wall to meet compound stability requirements. The
location of the critical compound stability failure surface in the bottom portion of the wall
should also be provided so that the resistant zone boundary location is identified.
Regarding pullout, the length of reinforcement needed behind the critical compound
stability failure surface may vary significantly depending on the reinforcement coverage
ratio anticipated and the frictional characteristics of the soil reinforcement. Therefore,
several scenarios for these two key variables may need to be investigated to assure it is
feasible to obtain the desired level of compound stability for all wall/ reinforcement types
that are to be considered for the selected width “B” of the box. For convenience, to define
the box width “B” required for the pullout length, an average active and resistant zone
length should be defined for the box. This concept is illustrated in Figure 15-6. In this
figure “H” is the total wall height, “T” is the load required in each reinforcement layer that
must be resisted to achieve the desired level of safety in the wall for compound stability
(Section 15-4.12 applies for compound stability with regard to the slope stability safety
factor needed), and Ttotal is the total force increase needed in the compound stability
analysis to achieve the desired level of safety with regard to compound stability. This
total force should be less than or equal to the total long-term tensile strength, Tal, of the
reinforcement layers within the defined “box” and the total pullout resistance available
for the reinforcement contained within the box, considering factored loads and resistance
values. The engineer needs to select the value of “B” that meets this pullout length
requirement. However, the value of “B” selected should be minimized to keep the wall
base width required to a minimum, to keep excavation needs as small as possible.
Page 15-34 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
From the wall supplier’s view, the contract would specify a specific value of “B” that is
long enough such that the desired minimum pullout resistance can be obtained but that
provides a consistent basis for bidding purposes with regard to the amount of excavation
and shoring needed to build the wall.
Note that for taller walls, it may be desirable to define more than one box at the wall base
to improve the accuracy of the pullout length for the intersected reinforcement layers. If
the wall is tiered, a box may need to be provided at the base of each tier, depending on
the horizontal separation between tiers.
Chapter 15 Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes
Figure 15-6 Compound Stability Assessment Concept for MSE Wall Design
15-5.3.5 Design ofCompound Stability
MSE Walls PlacedAssessment
in Front Concept for MSE Wall
of Existing Design
Permanent Walls
Figure 15-5
or Rock
• For internal stability design of MSE walls in this situation, see Morrison, et al.
Widening existing (2006). Global
facilities and compound
sometimes stability,
requires MSEboth for to
walls static
be (strength limit state)
built in front and
of those
seismic loading, shall be evaluated, especially to determine
existing facilities with inadequate room to obtain the minimum 0.7H wall base width. the strength and pullout
resistance needed for the upper layers that extend over the top of the existing
To reduce excavation costs and shoring costs in side hill situations, the “existing facility”
feature. At least one surface that is located at the face of the existing structure but
could in fact be athat
shoring wall orthe
goes through even a near
upper vertical rock
reinforcement layersslope
shall face. See Figure
be checked for both15-7
staticfor
a conceptual illustration of this situation.
and seismic loading conditions. That surface will likely be critical for sizing the
upper reinforcement layers.
In such cases, assuming that the existing facility is designed as a permanent structure with
• For new walls with a height over 30 feet, a lateral deformation analysis should be
adequate designconducted
life, or if the
(e.g.,barrier
using ato adequate
properly reinforcement
calibrated length is
numerical model). a rock slope,
Approval from the the
following designState
requirements
Geotechnicalapply:
and Bridge Design Engineers is required in this case.
• The minimum base
• This width
type of MSEis 0.4H or 6 feet,
wall design whichever
should not be usedis to
greater,
supportwhere H is the
high volume total
mainline
transportation facilities if the vertical junction between the
height of the new wall. Note that for soil reinforcement lengths that are less than existing wall or rock
face and
8 feet, the weight thesize
and backofofconstruction
the new wall is within the traffic
equipment used tolane, especially
place if there isthe
and compact
potential for cracking in the pavement surface to occur due to differential vertical
soil backfill will need to be limited in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
movement at that location.
Specifications Article C11.10.2.1.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-35
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
• A minimum of two reinforcement layers, or whatever is necessary for stability, shall
extend over the top of the existing structure or steep rock face an adequate distance
to insure adequate pullout resistance. The minimum length of these upper two
reinforcement layers should be 0.7H, 5 feet behind the face of the existing structure
or rock face, or the minimum length required to resist the pullout forces applied
to those layers, whichever results in the greatest reinforcement length. Note that
to accomplish this, it may be necessary to remove some of the top of the existing
structure or rock face if the existing structure is nearly the same height as the new
wall. The minimum clearance between the top of the existing structure or rock face
and the first reinforcement layer extended beyond the top of the existing structure
should be 6 in to prevent stress concentrations.
• The MSE wall reinforcements that are truncated by the presence of the existing
structure or rock face shall not be directly connected to that existing face, due
to the risk of the development of downdrag forces at that interface and the potential
to develop bin pressures and higher reinforcement forces (i.e., Tmax).
• For internal stability design of MSE walls in this situation, see Morrison, et al. (2006).
Global and compound stability, both for static (strength limit state) and seismic
loading, shall be evaluated, especially to determine the strength and pullout resistance
needed for the upper layers that extend over the top of the existing feature. At least
one surface that is located at the face of the existing structure but that goes through
the upper reinforcement layers shall be checked for both static and seismic loading
conditions. That surface will likely be critical for sizing the upper reinforcement layers.
• For new walls with a height over 30 feet, a lateral deformation analysis should be
conducted (e.g., using a properly calibrated numerical model). Approval from the State
Geotechnical and Bridge Design Engineers is required in this case.
• This type of MSE wall design should not be used to support high volume mainline
transportation facilities if the vertical junction between the existing wall or rock
face and the back of the new wall is within the traffic lane, especially if there is
potential for cracking in the pavement surface to occur due to differential vertical
movement at that location unless approved by the State Geotechnical and State
Pavement engineers.
Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Figure 15-7 Example of Steep Shored MSE Wall
0.4H or 6 ft min.
Example of Steep Shored MSE Wall
Figure 15-6
15.5.3.5
Page 15-36 MSE Wall Supported Abutments Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
The geotechnical design of MSE wall supported bridge abutments shall be in
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-5.3.6 MSE Wall Supported Abutments
The geotechnical design of MSE wall supported bridge abutments shall be in accordance
with the requirements in the following documents, provided in hierarchal order:
1. This Geotechnical Design Manual
2. The Bridge Design Manual (Section 7.5).
3. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
4. FHWA NHI-10-024 Volume I and NHI-10-025 Volume II, “Design and Construction
of Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes,” (Berg et al., 2009)
See the WSDOT BDM, including Bridge Office Design Policy memoranda, for additional
details regarding the design and geometric requirements for SE and geosynthetic wall
supported bridge abutments.
The FHWA has developed a manual for a type of MSE wall supported bridge abutment,
termed GRS-IBS, provided on the following FHWA website: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/
everydaycounts/technology/grs_ibs/
However, this GDM, and the referenced manuals and design memorandum provided at
the beginning of this GDM section, shall be considered to supersede the FHWA GRS-IBS
manual with regard to design and material requirements.
For MSE wall bridge abutments, two superstructure foundation support options are
available:
• For single or multi-span bridges, subject to approval by the State Geotechnical and
State Bridge Design engineer, use of a footing foundation placed directly above the
MSE wall reinforced soil zone, or
• For flat slab single span bridges with a span length of up to 60 feet, the end of the flat
slab itself bears directly on the surface of the MSE wall reinforced soil zone.
MSE walls directly supporting the bridge superstructure at the abutments shall be
30 feet or less in total height (i.e., height of exposed wall plus embedment depth of wall).
Abutment spread footings, or the ends of the superstructure flat slab bearing directly on
the surface of the MSE wall, should be designed for service loads not to exceed 3.0 TSF
and factored strength limit state footing loads not to exceed 4.5 TSF. Because this is an
increase relative to what is specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, for
bearing service loads greater than 2.0 TSF, a vertical settlement monitoring program with
regard to footing or superstructure slab settlement shall be conducted. As a minimum, this
settlement monitoring program should consist of monitoring settlement measurement
points located at the front edge and back edge of the structure footing, or for slabs
place directly on the SME wall top, two settlement measurement points located within
the bearing area, and settlement monitoring points directly below the footing or slab
bearing area at the base of the wall to measure settlement occurring below the wall. The
monitoring program should be continued until movement has been determined to have
stopped. If the measured footing settlement exceeds the vertical deformation and angular
distortion requirements established for the structure, corrective action shall be taken.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-37
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
For this MSE wall application, only the following MSE wall/facing types shall be used:
• Two stage geosynthetic wrapped face geosynthetic walls (i.e., similar to the Standard
Plan D-3 wall) with cast-in-place (CIP) or precast concrete full height panels, or
shotcrete depending on aesthetic needs,
• Single stage dry-cast concrete modular block faced walls using WSDOT preapproved
concrete block – geosynthetic reinforcement combinations (see Appendix 15-D), and
• WSDOT preapproved proprietary MSE walls identified as such (see Appendix 15-D),
but only those that are concrete faced. Welded wire faced preapproved MSE walls
may be used for temporary bridge abutment applications. However, MSE walls
identified in Appendix 15-D as preapproved proprietary walls shall not be considered
preapproved for the MSE wall supported bridge abutment application (i.e., a special
design is required).
Figures 15-8, 15-9, and 15-10 provide typical sections that should be used in the
design of MSE wall bridge abutments. The base of the wall may be truncated to reduce
excavation needs subject to the limitations provided in Section 11 of the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications. Figure 15-9 is similar to the Standard Plan geosynthetic wall
(Standard Plan D-3), except as modified in this figure for this application. This figure
does not show all the details needed for the facing design. For the additional facing
details needed, see Standard Plans D-3-10 and D-3-11. The minimum tensile strength
of the geotextile or geogrid used as bridge approach soil reinforcement in figures 15-8
and 15-9 shall be 2.4 kips/ft in accordance with ASTM D4595 for geotextiles or ASTM
D6637 for geogrids. The soil reinforcement and facing design is project specific and shall
be completed in accordance with manuals and design policy documents cited at the
beginning of this section.
Page 15-38 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Specifications. Figure 15-8 is similar to the Standard Plan geosynthetic wall (Standard Plan D-
Specifications. Figure 15-8
3), except as modified in thisis figure
similarfor
to this
the Standard PlanThis
application. geosynthetic wall
figure does not(Standard Plandetails
show all the D-
3), except
Abutments, Retainingneeded
Walls,foras
andthemodified in this
facing design.
Reinforced figure
Slopes for this application. This figure does not show all the
For the additional facing details needed, see Standard PlansChapter details
D-3- 15
needed
10 and for the facing
D-3-11. design.
The soil For the additional
reinforcement facing
and facing details
design needed,
is project see Standard
specific Plans
and shall be D-3-
10 and D-3-11.
completed The soil reinforcement
in accordance with manuals and and facing
design design
policy is project specific
documents cited atand
theshall be of
beginning
completed
Abutments, RetainingWalls,
this 15-8 in accordance with manuals and design policy documents cited at the beginning
and
section. Reinforced Slopes of
Chapter 15
Figure
Abutments, RetainingWalls, andTypical
this section. Section
Reinforced Slopes for MSE Wall Supported Abutment – Flat Slab Chapter 15
Superstructure With no Footing and Dry-Cast Modular Block Wall Facing
Geotextile for Underground Drainage, Formatted
Geotextile for Underground
low survivability, Class A perDrainage,
Std. Specs. Formatted:
Precast voided or slab low survivability,
9-33.2(1) with 1Class
ft min. A per Std. Specs.
horizontal
Precast voided or
superstructure slab
(void Min. 3 ft 9-33.2(1) withneeded
overlap (only 1 ft min.ofhorizontal
geogrid is
Min. 3 ftconcrete
behind Surfacing
superstructure (void
is min. 1 ft from facing) overlap
used for(only needed of geogrid is
reinforcement)
behind Surfacing
is min.41in.
ft from bearingconcrete
beam
min. facing) used for reinforcement)
Bridge approach soil reinforcement
bearing beam
4vert.
in. min.
clearance Bridge approach
(min. length of 12soilft reinforcement
or to back of wall
vert. clearance (min. length of 12
reinforcement, ft or to back
whichever of wall
is greater,
reinforcement, whichever
and vert. spacing of 8 in.) is greater,
8 in. high by 12 in. and vert.(provide
spacing of 8 in.)
8wide
in. high by 12 in. Compressible material min. 4 in. thickness)
precast
Compressible material (provide min. 4 in. thickness)
wide precast
concrete beam full Bearing bed reinforcement (max. vertical spacing of 8 in.,
concrete
width of beam
slab full Bearing bed reinforcement
min. length of 2 ft beyond flat(max. vertical
slab) spacing
if vertical of 8 in.,
spacing of
width ofJoint
slab filler min. length
primary of 2 ft beyond
reinforcement flat slab)than
is greater if vertical spacing
12 in. for min. of 5
Joint filler primary
ft belowreinforcement
structural slabis greater than 12 in. for min. of 5
#4 rebar, grouted ft below structural slab
#4inrebar,
place grouted Secondary reinforcement (max. vertical spacing of
in place
Dry cast concrete Secondary
8 in., min. reinforcement (max. vertical
length of 4 ft behind facing), spacing
if primaryof
Dry cast concrete
modular block 8reinforcement
in., min. length of 4 ft is
spacing behind
greater facing),
than 12 if primary
in.
modular
facing block reinforcement spacing is greater than 12 in.
facing
Max. spacing between primary
Max. spacing between
reinforcement layers =primary
16 in.
reinforcement layers = 16 in.
Primary reinforcement
Primary reinforcement
Concrete leveling pad
Concrete leveling pad
Figure 15-7
Typical Typical
Section section
forsection
MSE Wallfor MSE wall supported
Supported abutment
Abutment – flat
– Flat Slabslab superstructure
Superstructure
Figure 15-7 Typical
with no for
footing MSE
and wall supported
dry-cast modularabutment
block –
wallflat slab
facing.
Typical Section for MSE Wall Supported Abutment – Flat Slab Superstructure superstructure
Figure 15-9 With noSection
Typical
with Footing forand
no footing andDry-Cast
MSE Modular
Wall Supported
dry-cast modular Block
wallWall
Abutment
block Facing
– Flat
facing. Slab
With no Footing and Dry-Cast Figure Modular Block Wall Facing
15-7
Superstructure With no Footing and Precast or CIP Concrete Wall Facing
Figure 15-7
(Two Stage Wall Construction)
Precast voided or slab Formatte
Precast voided or(void
superstructure slab Min. 3 ft Formatte
superstructure (void Min. 3 ftconcrete
behind Surfacing
is min. 1 ft from facing)
is min. 1 ft from facing) behind
bearingconcrete
beam Surfacing
4 in. min. bearing beam
4vert.
in. min.
clearance Bridge approach soil reinforcement
vert. clearance Bridge approach
(min. length soilft reinforcement
of 12 or to back of wall
(min. length of 12
reinforcement, ft or to back
whichever of wall
is greater,
8 in. high by 12 in. reinforcement, whichever
and vert. spacing of 8 in.) is greater,
8wide
in. high by 12 in.
precast andmaterial
vert. spacing of 8min.
in.) 4 in. thickness)
Compressible (provide
wide precast
concrete beam full Compressible material (provide min. 4 in. thickness)
concrete
width of beam
slab full Bearing bed reinforcement (max. vertical spacing of 12 in.
width of slab Bearing bed reinforcement
for 5 ft below (max. vertical spacing of 12 in.
structural slab)
WSDOT
Facing extends Geotechnical
8 in. Design Manual for 5 ft below structural slab)July 2011June 2013
WSDOT
Facing
aboveextends
bottomGeotechnical
8ofin. Design Manual July 2011June
Geotextile for Underground Drainage, 2013
above bottom material
compressible of Page 15-41 Geotextile for Underground
low survivability, Class A perDrainage,
Std. Specs.
compressible material Page 15-41 low survivability,
9-33.2(1) with 1Class A per
ft min. Std. Specs.
horizontal
9-33.2(1) withneeded
overlap (only 1 ft min.ofhorizontal
geogrid is
Joint filler overlap
used for(only needed of geogrid is
reinforcement)
Joint filler used for reinforcement)
Precast of CIP
Precast of facing
concrete CIP Max. spacing between primary
concrete facing Max. spacing between
reinforcement layers =primary
16 in.
reinforcement layers = 16 in.
Primary reinforcement
Primary reinforcement
Concrete leveling pad
Concrete leveling pad
Figure 15-8
Typical Typical
Section forsection
MSE Wallfor MSE wall supported
Supported abutment
Abutment – flat
– Flat Slab slab superstructure
Superstructure
Figure
Typical 15-8 Typical
Section
with no footing forsection
MSE
andFooting for
Wall
precast or MSE wall
Supported
CIPPrecastsupported abutment
Abutment
concreteorwall – –
Flat flat
Slab slab superstructure
Superstructure
With no and CIPfacing (two stage
Concrete Wallwall construction).
Facing
with no footing
With noandFooting
precast or
and
(Two
CIP concrete
Precast
Stage Wall orwall
CIPfacing (two stage
Concrete
Construction) Wallwall construction).
Facing
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-39
(Two StageFigure
Wall Construction)
15-8
December 2020
Figure 15-8
Page 15-36 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Figure 15-10 Typical Section Showing External
Chapter 15
Dimensions for Bridge With Spread
Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes
Footing Supported Directly on an MSE Wall Semi-Integral Abutment
(L-Abutment Similar; Wing/Curtain Wall Not Shown)
Formatted: Font: Tim
Formatted: Centered
A = 4 feet min
A= for4 SE Walls
ft min (precast
for SE concrete
Walls (precast panel face
concrete panelor cast-in-place
face concrete
or cast-in-place concreteface),
face),2 2feet minforfor
ft min Formatted: Indent: Le
specialgeosynthetic
special designed designed geosynthetic
retainingretaining
walls withwalls with wrapped
wrapped face face 0 pt, After: 0 pt
B =for
B = 3 feet min 3 ft min forbridges,
I-girder I-girder bridges, andmin
and 5 feet 5 ft for
minnon-I-girder,
for non-I-girder, slab,
slab, andand boxgirder
box girderbridges
bridges
C = 30 ft max Formatted: Indent: Le
C = 30 feet max 0 pt, After: 12 pt
Figure 15-9 Typical Section showing external dimensions for bridge with spread footing
Typical Section Showing External Dimensions for Bridge With Spread Footing
supported directly on two-stage
an MSE wall wallssemi-integral
For geosynthetic wrapped face with aabutment
precast(L-abutment
or CIP concrete similar;facing
Supported Directlywing/curtain on an MSE Wall
wall not Semi-Integral
shown). Abutment
(e.g., similar to a Standard Plan geosynthetic
(L-Abutment wall) and walls faced with dry cast concrete
For geosynthetic wrapped face Similar; Wing/Curtain
two-stage walls with a precastWall
or CIPNot Shown)
concrete facing (e.g.,
blocks, a maximum reinforcement vertical
similar to a Standard Plan geosynthetic wall) spacing
Figure
and wallsof 16 inches shall be used.
15-9 faced with dry cast concrete However,
blocks, a
for dry cast concrete
maximum block faced
reinforcement walls,
vertical secondary
spacing of 16 inchesreinforcement layersforwith
shall be used. However, a minimum
dry cast
For geosynthetic
concrete wrapped
block faced walls, face two-stage
secondary walls with
reinforcement layersawith
precast
athe or CIP
minimum concrete
length facing
of 4 ft behind
length of 4
(e.g.,thefeet
similar behind the facing shall be placed between primary reinforcement
facing to a Standard
shall Plan geosynthetic
be placed between wall) and layers
the primary reinforcement wallsiffaced with reinforcement
the primary dry cast
layersconcrete
if the primary
blocks, reinforcement layers are spaced
a maximum reinforcement verticalat greater
spacing ofthan 12 inches.
16 inches shall beThis will
resultused.
in a geosynthetic
However, reinforcement
for dry cast concrete layer being placed between every facing block.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual block faced walls, secondaryJuly reinforcement
2011June 2013
Theselayers
spacingwithlimitations
a minimumapply length toofthe portions
4 feet behindofthethefacing
MSE shall
wall that directly
be placed support the
between
Page 15-43
bridge foundation (i.e., within the limits of stress increase
the primary reinforcement layers if the primary reinforcement layers are spaceddue to the footing loadatper the
AASHTO greaterLRFD
thanBridge Design
12 inches. This will result in Article
Specifications, 3.11.6.3).
a geosynthetic The secondary
reinforcement layerand
being bearing
bed reinforcement
placed betweenlayers, and the
every facing bridge
block. approach
These spacingreinforcement
limitations apply layers (see
to the figures 15-8
portions
of thefor
and 15-9 MSE wall thatofdirectly
definition supportshall
these terms), the bridge
be thefoundation (i.e., withinreinforcement
same geosynthetic the limits
productof stress
as theincrease
primary due to the footinglayers
reinforcement load per the AASHTO
directly above and LRFD belowBridgethem.Design
At transitions
Specifications, Article 3.11.6.3). The secondary and
between primary reinforcement materials (if more than one geosynthetic product bearing bed reinforcement layers,
is
and the bridge approach reinforcement layers (see Figures
used for the primary reinforcement), the secondary reinforcement materials shall be the 15-7 and 15-8 for definition
of these
stronger terms),
of the shall be the
two primary same geosynthetic
reinforcement productsreinforcement
above andproduct below the as the primary or
secondary
bearing bed reinforcement layer.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-37
Page 15-40
October 2013 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
For other MSE wall systems that can be used in this application as specified herein, the
reinforcement spacing shall be as needed to meet the wall system requirements and the
design requirements in the specified design manuals at the beginning of this section.
With regard to Figure 15-10, the minimum horizontal setbacks for the footing on the MSE
wall are specified to minimize the potential for shear and excessive vertical deformation
of the reinforced backfill too close to the connection of the reinforcement to the facing.
The vertical clearance specified between the MSE facing units and the bottom of the
superstructure is needed to provide access for bridge inspection. For flat slab single span
bridges directly supported by MSE abutments, without a footing and bridge bearings (for
span lengths up to 60 feet), these minimum setbacks and clearances do not apply.
The bearing resistance for the footing or flat slab supported by the MSE wall is a function
of the soil reinforcement density in addition to the shear strength of the soil. If designing
the wall using LRFD, two cases should be evaluated to size the footing for bearing
resistance for the strength limit state, as two sets of load factors are applicable (see the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Section 3, for definitions of these terms):
• The load factors applicable to the structure loads applied to the footing, such as DC,
DW, EH, LL, etc.
• The load factor applicable to the distribution of surcharge loads through the soil, ES.
When ES is used to factor the load applied to the soil to evaluate bearing, the structure
loads and live load applied to the footing should be unfactored. When ES is not used to
factor the load applied to the soil to evaluate bearing, the structure loads and live load
applied to the footing should be factored using DC, DW, EH, LL, etc. The wall should
be designed for both cases, and the case that results in the greatest amount of soil
reinforcement should be used for the final strength limit state design. See the Bridge
Design Manual for additional requirements on the application of load groups for design of
MSE wall supported abutments, especially regarding how to handle live load, and for the
structural detailing required.
The potential lateral and vertical deformation of the wall, considering the affect of the
footing load on the wall, should be evaluated. Measures shall be taken to minimize
potential deformation of the reinforced soil, such as use of high quality backfill such as
Gravel Borrow compacted to 95 percent of maximum density. The settlement and lateral
deformation of the soil below the wall shall also be included in this deformation analysis.
If there is significant uncertainty in the amount of vertical deformation in or below
the wall anticipated, the ability to jack the abutment to accommodate unanticipated
abutment settlement should also be considered in the abutment design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-41
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-5.3.7 Full Height Propped Precast Concrete Panel MSE Walls
This wall system consists of a full height concrete facing panel directly connected to the
soil reinforcement elements. The facing panel is braced externally during a significant
percentage of the backfill placement. The amount the wall is backfilled before releasing
the bracing is somewhat dependent on the specifics of the wall system and the amount
of resistance needed to prevent the wall from moving excessively during placement of the
remaining fill. Once the external bracing is released, the wall facing allowed to move in
response to the release of the bracing.
A key issue regarding the performance of this type of wall is the differential settlement
that is likely to occur between the rigid facing panel and the backfill soil as the backfill
soil compresses due to the increase in overburden pressure as the fill is placed. Since
the facing panel, for practical purposes, can be considered to be essentially rigid, all the
downward deformation resulting from the backfill soil compression causes the reinforcing
elements to be dragged down with the soil, causing a strain and load increase in the soil
reinforcement at its connection with the facing panel. As the wall panel becomes taller,
the additional reinforcement force caused by the backfill settlement relative to the facing
panel becomes more significant.
WSDOT has successfully built walls of this nature up to 25 feet in height. For
greater heights, the uncertainty in the prediction of the reinforcement loads at the
facing connection for this type of MSE wall can become large. Specialized design
procedures to estimate the magnitude of the excess force induced in the reinforcement
at the connection may be needed, requiring approval by the WSDOT State
Geotechnical Engineer.
15-5.3.8 Flexible Faced MSE Walls With Vegetation
If a vegetated face is to be used with an MSE wall, the exposed (i.e., above ground wall
height shall be limited to 20 feet or less, and the wall face batter shall be no steeper
than 1H:6V, unless the facing is battered at 1H:2V or flatter, in which case the maximum
height could be extended to 30 feet). A flatter facing batter may be needed depending
on the wall system – see appendices to this GDM chapter for specific requirements.
For the vegetated facing, if the facing batter is steeper, or if the height is greater than
specified here, the compressibility of the facing topsoil could create excessive stresses,
settlement, and/or bulging in the facing, any of which could lead to facing stability or
deformation problems.
The topsoil placed in the wall face to encourage vegetative growth shall be minimized as
much as possible, and should be compacted to minimize internal settlement of the facing.
For welded wire facing systems, the effect of the topsoil on the potential corrosion of the
steel shall be considered when sizing the steel members at the face and at the connection
to the soil reinforcement.
In general, placement of drip irrigation piping within or above the reinforced soil volume
to encourage the vegetative growth in the facing should be avoided. However, if a drip
irrigation system must be used and placed within or above the reinforced soil volume, the
wall shall be designed for the long-term presence of water in the backfill and at the face,
regarding both increased design loads and increased degradation/ corrosion of the soil
reinforcement, facing materials, and connections.
Page 15-42 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-5.3.9 Dry Cast Concrete Block Faced MSE Walls
Abutments, RetainingWalls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15.5.3.8 ForCast
Dry modular dry castBlock
Concrete block faced
Facedwalls,
MSE WSDOT
Wallshas observed block cracking in near
vertical walls below a depth of 25 feet from the wall top in some block faced walls. Key
15.5.3.8 DryFor
Cast Concrete
modular Block
dry cast blockFaced MSE WSDOT
faced walls, Walls has observed block cracking in near
contributing factors include tolerances in the vertical dimension of the blocks that are too
vertical
For modular
great wallsdry
(maximum belowcastablock
vertical depth of 25walls,
faced
dimension feet from
toleranceWSDOT the wall
should hasbetop in some
observed
maintained block
block faced
in orwalls.
cracking
at +1/16 in near
less for
Key contributing
vertical walls below factors
a include
depth of 25 tolerances
feet from in the
the wallvertical
top
walls built as part of WSDOT projects, even though the current ASTM requirements for indimension
some block of the
faced blocks
walls.
that
Key are
these types tooofgreat
contributing blocks(maximum
factors
haveinclude
been vertical
relaxeddimension
tolerances
to +1/8 thetolerance
inin), vertical
poor should
blockdimension be maintained
placement of technique,
the blocks at soil
+ 1
that/16are
in or
reinforcement tooless
greatfor(maximum
placed walls builtvertical
between as
thepart of WSDOT
dimension
blocks that creates projects,
tolerance even unevenness
should
too much though the current
be maintained at
between
ASTM
+ /block
the1 16 in orrequirements
less for some
surfaces, for these
walls forms
built as types
ofpart of blocks
of WSDOT
shimming have
to make been
projects, relaxed
facing even to
batterthough + 1/8 in), poor
the current
adjustments, and
block
ASTM placement
requirements technique,
for soil
these reinforcement
types of blocks placed
have beenbetween
relaxed
inconsistencies in the block concrete properties. See Figure 15-11 for illustrations of thetoblocks
+ 1/8 in),that creates
poor
too
block much
potential unevenness
placement
causes between
oftechnique,
block soilthe
cracking. block surfaces,
reinforcement
Another placed
tall block some forms
between
faced of
theshimming
wall problemblocks to creates
that make by
encountered
facing
too much
others batter
includes adjustments,
unevenness
shearingbetween and back
of the inconsistencies
the block
portion surfaces,in the
of the block
some
blocks concrete
forms
parallelofto properties.
shimming
the wall, to See
make
possibly
Figure
facing
face 15-10
duebatter for illustrations
adjustments,
to excessive buildup of potential
andofinconsistencies
downdrag forcescauses of block
in immediately cracking.
the block concrete Another
behindproperties. tall
the blocks.See block
This
problem, if it occurs, has been observed in the bottom 5 to 7 feet of walls that have athe
faced
Figure wall
15-10problem
for encountered
illustrations of by others
potential includes
causes of shearing
block of the
cracking. back
Another portion
tall of
block
blocks
facedheight
hinge parallel
wall problemto theencountered
wall, possibly
of approximately 25 to by30face
others
feetdue to excessive
includes
(total of buildup
shearing
height 35of ofback
theor
feet downdrag
more) portion forces
and mayof the
have
immediately
blocks parallelbehind
to the the blocks.
wall, possiblyThis problem,
face due toif it occurs,
excessive has been
buildup
been caused by excessive downdrag forces due to backfill soil compressibility immediately of observed
downdrag in the
forces
bottom
immediately
behind 5 to
the 7behind
feet ofthe
facing. walls that have
blocks. This aproblem,
hinge height of approximately
if it occurs, 25 to 30in
has been observed feet
the
(total
bottomheight
5 to 7offeet
35 of
feetwalls
or more) and may
that have have
a hinge beenof
height caused by excessive
approximately downdrag
25 to 30 feet
forces due to backfill soil compressibility immediately behind the facing.
(total height of 35 feet or more) and may have been caused by excessive downdrag
Figure 15-11 Example Causes of Cracking in Modular Dry Cast Concrete
forces due to backfill
Block WallsoilFacings
compressibility immediately behind the facing.
CRACK CRACK
CRACK CRACK
differential settlement uneven unit dimension
differential settlement uneven unit dimension
CRACK
CRACK
CRACK
CRACK
misalignment or
discontinuous reinforcement layer
misalignment or
uneven seating
discontinuous reinforcement layer
Considering these potential problems, for of
modular dry cast concrete block faced walls,
uneven seating
Example Causes Cracking in Modular
the wall height should be limited
Dry Cast to 30 feet
Concrete if near
Block vertical,
Wall
Example Causes of Cracking in Modular or to a hinge height of 30
Facings
feet if battered. Block wall
Dryheights greater than
Figure
Cast Concrete this Wall
15-10
Block may be considered on a project
Facings
specific basis, subject to the approval of the
Figure State
15-10Geotechnical
Considering these potential problems, for modular dry cast concrete and State Bridge
block facedDesign
walls,
Engineers, if the requirements identified below are met:
the wall height should be limited to 30 feet if near vertical, or to a hinge height of
Considering these potential problems, for modular dry cast concrete block faced walls,
• Total
30
the wallifsettlement
feet battered.
height is limited
Block
should be wall toheights
limited 2 to
in and differential
30greater
feet settlement
than vertical,
if near this mayor isalimited
betoconsidered toon
hinge height1.5a inch
project
of
30as
specificidentified
feet ifbasis, in Table
subject
battered. Block to15-3.
the
wall Since
approval
heightsthis
of isthe
greaterspecified
State in Table
may 15-3,
thanGeotechnical
this andthis alsoBridge
State
be considered applies to
on a project
shorter
Design walls.
Engineers, if the requirements identified below are
specific basis, subject to the approval of the State Geotechnical and State Bridge met:
Design
• • ATotal Engineers,
settlement
concrete ifisthe
leveling pad requirements
limited
is placed identified
to 2 inbelow
and below
differential
the first ofare met: to
liftsettlement
blocks is provide
limited to 1.5 inchflat
a uniform
as identified
• surface
Total for theinblocks.
settlement Table 15-3.
Noteto
is limited Since
that this
2 inthis is
andshould specified
be done
differential in Table
for all 15-3,
settlement this also
preapproved
is limited applies
toblock to
faced
1.5 inch
shorter
walls walls.in of
regardless
as identified Tableheight.
15-3. Since this is specified in Table 15-3, this also applies to
shorter walls.
• A concrete leveling pad is placed below the first lift of blocks to provide a uniform
• flat surface leveling
A concrete for the blocks. Note that
pad is placed belowthis the
should
firstbeliftdone for alltopreapproved
of blocks block
provide a uniform
faced walls for
flat surface regardless
the blocks. of height.
Note that this should be done for all preapproved block
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-43
December 2020
faced walls regardless of height.
Page 15-40 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
• A moderately compressible bearing material is placed between each course of blocks,
such as a geosynthetic reinforcement layer. The layer must provide an even bearing
surface (many polyester geogrids or multi-filament woven geotextiles provide an
adequately even bearing surface with sufficient thickness and compressibility to
distribute the bearing load between blocks evenly). The bearing material needs to
extend from near the front edge of the blocks (without protruding beyond the face) to
at least the back of the blocks or a little beyond. As a minimum, this should be done
for all block lifts that are 25 feet or more below the wall top, but doing this for block
lifts at depths of less than 25 feet as well is desirable.
If the wall face is tiered such that the front of the facing for the tier above is at least 3 feet
behind the back of the facing elements in the tier below, then these height limitations
only apply to each tier. The minimum setback between tiers is needed to reduce build-up
of excessive down drag forces behind the lower tier wall facing.
Success in building such walls without these block cracking or shear failure problems will
depend on the care with which these walls are constructed and the enforcement of good
construction practices through proper construction inspection, especially with regard to
the constructability issues identified previously. Success will also depend on the quality
of the facing blocks. Therefore, making sure that the block properties and dimensional
tolerances meet the requirements in the contract through testing and observation is also
important and should be carried out for each project.
Modular block facings should not be used where periodic inundation due to tides or
flooding can occur, unless a project specific assessment of the amount and frequency of
inundation is conducted and approval by the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer to use
the facing blocks below the inundation zone is obtained. Periodic inundation may affect
the durability of dry cast concrete facing blocks and could locally elevate the pH at the
connection between the soil reinforcement and the facing as unreacted lime leaches from
the facing blocks. Elevated pH can affect the durability of polyester geosynthetics.
15-5.3.10 Internal Stability Using the Stiffness Method
The Stiffness Method, as described by Allen and Bathurst (2015, 2018), is provided in
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (Sections 3 and 11) to design the internal
stability for MSE walls with extensible reinforcement that are not in high settlement areas
(i.e., total settlement beneath the wall of more than 6 in.). See Allen and Bathurst (2018)
for a definition of “extensible” for soil reinforcement. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications are applicable, as well as the traffic barrier design provisions in the WSDOT
BDM, except as modified in the provisions that follow.
15-5.3.10.1 Determination of Tmax Using the Stiffness Method
The AASHTO Simplified and Coherent Gravity methods rely on limit equilibrium and/
or earth pressure theory concepts for their formulation but modified based on empirical
data, whereas, the Stiffness Method, also empirically derived, relies on the difference in
the stiffness of the various wall components to determine and distribute loads to the wall
reinforcement layers and the facing.
Though all of these methods can be used to evaluate the potential for reinforcement
rupture and pullout for the Strength and Extreme Event limit states, only the Stiffness
Method can be used to directly evaluate the potential for soil backfill failure. These
Page 15-44 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
other methods used in historical practice indirectly account for soil failure based on
the successful construction of thousands of structures (i.e., if the other limit states are
met, soil failure will be prevented, and the wall will meet serviceability requirements for
internal stability).
Detailed Stiffness Method procedures and design examples are provided in Allen and
Bathurst (2018) in the Supplemental Data associated with that paper, and additional
examples are provided in Appendix 15-E.
A key parameter for this method is the geosynthetic secant creep stiffness at 1,000 hours
and 2% strain as determined using AASHTO R-69. Product specific creep stiffness test
data can be obtained from NTPEP (2019) and Allen and Bathurst (2019).
For the Stiffness Method, Tmax is calculated as follows:
Tmax = Sv [Hγr Dtmax + γr(Href/H)S]kavh F (15-1)
where,
Sv = tributary vertical thickness for reinforcement layer (ft)
H = height of wall (ft)
Href = reference wall height = 20 ft
γr = unit weight of soil in wall reinforcement zone (lbs/ft3)
S = average soil surcharge thickness over reinforcement (ft)
γf = unit weight of soil in wall in surcharge above wall (lbs/ft3)
Dtmax = Tmax distribution factor (dim)
kavh = active earth pressure coefficient for a wall with a vertical face (dim.)
F = empirically determined influence factor that captures the effect that the soil
reinforcement properties, soil cohesion, and wall geometry have on Tmax (dim)
Dtmax shall be determined as follows:
For z < zb:
Dtmax = Dtmax0 + (z/zb)(1 − Dtmax0) (15-2)
For z ≥ zb: Dtmax = 1.0
zb = Ch (H)1.2 (15-3)
where,
z = depth of reinforcement layer below top of wall at wall face (ft)
zb = depth below top of wall at wall face where Dtmax becomes equal to 1.0 (and below
which Dtmax equals 1.0) (ft)
Dtmax0 = Tmax distribution factor magnitude at top of wall at wall face, equal to 0.12 (dim)
Ch = coefficient equal to 0.32 when H is in ft and 0.40 when H is in meters
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-45
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Determination of the Tmax distribution factor Dtmax is illustrated in Figure 15-12. In the
figure, depths below the wall top have been normalized by the wall height, H. Tmxmx is the
maximum value of Tmax in the wall section where the soil backfill failure surface crosses
the reinforcement layers.
Figure 15-12 Illustration of Dtmax factor for the Stiffness Method
Dtmax0 = 0.12
0
0.2
zb/H
0.4
z/H
0.6
Illustration of Dtmax factor for the
Stiffness Method
0.8
Figure 15-12
For vertical or near-vertical
1.0 walls (i.e., a facing batter of 10o or less from the vertical)
with a single reinforcement strength
0 Dand
tmaxstiffness,
1.0
and cohesionless
= Tmax/Tmxmx backfill soil (defined
as having a plasticity index of 6 or less), F shall be determined as follows:
For vertical or near-vertical walls (i.e., a facing batter of 10º or less from the vertical) with
a single reinforcement strength and stiffness, and cohesionless backfill soil (defined as
F
having = FgFindex
a plasticity fs of 6 or less), F may be determined as follows: (15-4)
where,
F = FgFfs (15-4)
F
where,
g = global stiffness factor (dim)
FfsFg = = global
facing stiffness
stiffness factor
factor (dim)(dim)
Ffs = facing stiffness factor (dim)
The global stiffness factor Fg shall be determined as follows:
The global stiffness factor Fg shall be determined as follows:
β (15-5)
æ Sglobal ö
Φ g = α çç ÷ (15-5)
÷
è pa ø
where,
where,
α = empirical coefficient = 0.16
a β = empirical
= empirical coefficient
exponent = 0.26= 0.16
b S = empirical
= global exponent
reinforcement = 0.26(ksf)
stiffness
global
Sglobal = global reinforcement stiffness (ksf)
P = atmospheric pressure at sea level (equals 2.11 ksf if Sglobal is in ksf, or 101 kPa
Pa a = atmospheric pressure at sea level (equals 2.11 ksf)
if Sglobal is in kPa)
and,
and,
Page 15-44 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Page 15-46 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽
ave ∑𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽 (15-6)
Chapter 15 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) =n 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻
å n J
S global = J ave = å
i
where, J i =1 J i (15-6)
Jave= (H/n
S global ave )
= i =H
= average 1
secant tensile creep stiffness corrected for the coverage ratio, i.e., R(15-6)
cJi, of all
(H/n )“n” reinforcement
H layers (kips/ft)
where,
Ji = secant tensile creep stiffness of reinforcement layer i per unit of reinforcement
where,
Jave = width (kips/ft)
average secant tensile stiffness of all “n” reinforcement layers (kips/ft)
JJave
i R =
c = = average
reinforcementsecant
secant tensile tensileratio
coverage
stiffness stiffness
of(dim) of all “n” reinforcement
reinforcement layers the
layer i considering (kips/ft)
horizontal
Ji n = = number secant oftensile stiffness
reinforcement of
layers reinforcement
in wall section layer
(dim) i considering
spacing, i.e., the coverage ratio Rc, of the reinforcement (kips/ft) the horizontal
n = spacing,
number of i.e., the coveragelayers
reinforcement ratio Rinc, wall
of the reinforcement
section (dim) (kips/ft)
Snglobal and
= Fg shall be determined
number per unitlayers
of reinforcement of wall
in width rather than
wall section (dim)per reinforcement
width, as Tmax represents a force per unit per unit of wall width. Hence, Rc is included in
For geogrids
Equation 15-6.and geotextiles, the reinforcement stiffness should be based on the
For geogrids
laboratory and geotextiles,
secant the at
creep stiffness reinforcement
2% strain andstiffness should
1,000 hours asbe based on
specified in the
AASHTO R
laboratory
For
69. geogrids secant creepwalls,
stiffness
and geotextiles,
For polymer strap the at 2%strains
strain and
reinforcement
working 1,000
to be hours
stiffness
tend as
Ji should
lower specified
thanbefor
based in
otheronAASHTO R
69.
the For polymer
laboratory
geosynthetics strap
secant
based walls,
creep
on strain working
stiffness atstrains
2% strain
measurements tendand
to be
observed inlower
1,000 thanas
fullhours
scale for otherstrap
specified
polymer in walls
geosynthetics
AASHTO R-69. based
For on strain
polymer measurements
strap walls, workingobserved
strainsin full
tend scale
to be polymer
lower
(Miyata et al., 2018), and Ji determined at a strain level of 1% may be more appropriate. strap
than for walls
other
(Miyata et al.,based
geosynthetics 2018),onand Ji determined
strain measurementsat a strain levelinoffull
observed 1%scale
maypolymer
be morestrap
appropriate.
walls
(Miyata et al., 2018), and J determined at a strain level
The facing stiffness factori Ffs shall be determined as follows: of 1% may be more appropriate.
The facing stiffness factor Ffs shall be determined as follows:
The facing stiffness factor Ffs shall be determined as follows:
k
æ æ Sglobal ö ök (15-7)
F fs = hæçç æç Sglobal ö÷ Ff ö÷÷ (15-7)
F fs = h ççè çè pa ÷ø Ff ÷÷ø (15-7)
è è pa ø ø
where,
where,
where,
h h = = empirical
empiricalcoefficient = 0.57
coefficient = 0.57
h = empirical
k k = = empirical
empirical coefficient
exponent = 0.15
exponent = 0.57
= 0.15
Ff Ff =
k empirical
= = facing
facing exponent
stiffness
stiffness = 0.15
parameter as calculated
parameter using using
as calculated Equation 15-8 (dim)
Equation 15-8 (dim)
Ff = facing stiffness parameter as calculated using Equation 15-8 (dim)
1.5H33pa (15-8)
Ff = 1.5H p
Ff = Eb33 (h eff /aH) (15-8)
Eb (h eff / H) (15-8)
where,
where,
E = elastic modulus of the “equivalent elastic beam” representing the wall face (ksf)
where,
E b = elastic modulus
= thickness of the
of the facing “equivalent
column (ft) elastic beam” representing the wall face
E h = elastic
(ksf) modulus of the “equivalent elastic beam” representing the wall
= equivalent height of an un-jointed facing column that is approximately 100%
face
eff
b = (ksf)
thickness
efficient of the facing
in transmitting column
moment (ft) the height of the facing column (ft)
through
bheff = = thickness
equivalentofheight the facing
of ancolumn (ft) facing column that is approximately
un-jointed
All
heffother= variables
100% areefficient
equivalentas defined
height in previously.
of an un-jointed
transmitting moment facing column
through thethat is approximately
height of the facing
100%
column efficient
(ft) in transmitting moment through the height of the facing
For a flexible facedcolumn wall(ft)
with extensible reinforcement (e.g., geosynthetics), and for all
inextensible reinforced (e.g., steel) walls, set Ffs = 1. For full height and incremental
All other
panel variables
walls, are
heff = H areandasaspanel
defined previously.
height, respectively. Since the facing stiffness factor Ffs
All other variables defined previously.
is intended to be a single value for the wall, a single representative value of heff must
be
Forselected.
a flexible faced wall
Typically,
with extensible
is setextensible
heff with equal to the
reinforcement
reinforcement
(e.g., geosynthetics),
vertical
and for all
spacing in modular
For a flexible
inextensible faced wall
reinforced (e.g., steel) reinforcement
walls, set F (e.g.,
= 1. For full geosynthetics),
height andjoints and
incremental for all
block-type
inextensible structures since the reinforcement is fslocated
walls, set Ffs = 1.Since at the horizontal between
panel units.
facing hreinforced
walls, For = H and
eff blocks
(e.g.,
thatpanelsteel)
height,
do not haverespectively.
For the
a reinforcement layer
full facing
height stiffness
and incremental
at the horizontal factor
joints,Ffs is
panel
intendedwalls, h
to bewill = H and
a single panel height,
value interlock respectively.
for the wall, Since the facing stiffness factor Ffs is
andamoment
single representative
transfer fromvalue block of
to hblock.
eff must be
eff
these facings have better If the
intended to be
selected. Typically,a single value for the wall, a single representative value of h must be
spacingheff is set equal tothe thesmallest
reinforcement verticalspacing
spacing(e.g.,
in modular
eff
reinforcement is non-uniform, predominate involving 3
selected.
block-type Typically,
structures hsince
eff is set
the equal to the
reinforcement reinforcement
is located atvertical
the spacing
horizontal in modular
joints between
or more reinforcementsince
block-type layers in reinforcement
the wall), defined as a spacing
the that involves three or more
facing units.structures
For blocks thatthe is located
do not have a reinforcement atlayer horizontal joints
at the horizontal between
joints,
facing units. For
these facings willblocks that do
have better not haveand
interlock a reinforcement
moment transfer layer at the
from horizontal
block to block. joints,
If the
these
reinforcement spacing is non-uniform, the smallest predominate spacing should beIfused
Geotechnical Design facings
Manual M will have
46-03.13 better interlock and moment transfer from block to block. Page the
15-47
December 2020 reinforcement spacing is non-uniform, the smallest predominate spacing should be used
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-45
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
reinforcement layers, should be used for this calculation. Smaller heff values will lead to
more conservative (safer) design because the facing stiffness factor will be larger. For
two-stage walls in which the outer facing is built after the wall is built to full height, the
facing stiffness factor shall be based on the facing stiffness of the first stage wall (typically
the first stage wall face is flexible, and Ffs = 1.0 in that case). The facing stiffness factor
Ffs could also be conservatively set to 1.0 for tall geosynthetic walls (i.e., H > 30 ft) and
for typical “thin” panel-face systems, such as incremental concrete panels.
To calculate
Abutments, Retaining Ff, an
Walls, and elastic modulus
Reinforced Slopes of the facing column is needed. For wet castChapter
concrete15
(e.g., in incremental concrete panels), the modulus typically is typically 300,000 to
for this calculation. Smaller heff values will lead to more conservative (safer) design
600,000 ksf. For dry cast concrete, the elastic modulus is typically less, on the order
because the facing stiffness factor will be larger. For two-stage walls in which the outer
of 200,000 to 250,000 ksf. In addition, for dry cast concrete facing blocks, if the blocks
facing is built after the wall is built to full height, the facing stiffness factor shall be based
are not solid or have an irregular geometry, this modulus should be further reduced based
on the facing stiffness of the first stage wall (typically the first stage wall face is flexible,
on the plan view cross-sectional area of the block.
and Ffs = 1.0 in that case). The facing stiffness factor Ffs could also be conservatively
set discontinuous
For to 1.0 for tall geosynthetic walls
reinforcement, the(i.e., H > 30 ft) coverage
reinforcement and for typical “thin”
ratio shall bepanel-face
determined
systems,
as such
specified as incremental
in Article concrete
11.10.6.4.1 of thepanels.
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
For discontinuous reinforcement, the reinforcement coverage ratio shall be determined as
If the wall is tall enough such that layers with different strength and stiffness properties
specified in Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
are needed to match the layer strengths to the layer specific Tmax values, the complete
If the wall
Stiffness is tall enough
Method equationsuch that be
should layers
used,with different
though strength and
the complete stiffness
equation canproperties
be used are
needed
any timetoif match
a morethe layer strengths
accurate estimatetooftheTmaxlayer specificFor
is desired. thevalues,
Tmax the Stiffness
complete complete Method,
Stiffness
FMethod equation
in Equation 15-4should be used.as For
is expanded the complete Stiffness Method, F in Equation 15-4
follows:
is expanded as follows:
F = FgFfsFfbFlocalFc (15-9)
F = FgFfsFfbFlocalFc (15-9)
where,
where,
F = global stiffness factor (dim)
Fg Fg = =
global stiffness factor (dim)
facing stiffness factor (dim)
FfsFfs = = facing
facing stiffness
batter factorfactor
(dim) (dim)
fb
FfbF = = facing
local batterfactor
stiffness factor (dim)
(dim)
local
Flocal
Fc = = local
soil stiffness
cohesion factor
factor (dim)(dim)
Fc = soil cohesion factor (dim)
Fg and Ffs are determined as shown in equations 15-5 and 15-7. Ffb shall be determined
Fgfollows:
as and Ffs are determined as shown in equations 15-5 and 15-7. Ffb shall be
determined as follows:
d (15-10)
æK ö
Φfb = ç abh ÷ (15-10)
è K avh ø
where,
where,
d d = = empirical empirical exponent
exponent = 0.40
= 0.40
KabhKabh= = coefficient
coefficient of active lateral
of active lateral earthearth pressure
pressure considering
considering wall
wall face face(dim)
batter batter (dim)
KavhKavh= = coefficient
coefficient of active
of active lateral
lateral earth earth pressure
pressure not considering
not considering wall face batter
wall face batter
(i.e.,
(i.e., assuming
assuming wallwall
face face is vertical)
is vertical) (dim) (dim)
Forboth
For bothdeterminations
determinations of
of the
the coefficient
coefficient of
of active
active lateral
lateral earth
earth pressure,
pressure, wall
wallfriction
frictionis
is assumed
assumed to to
be be zero.
zero.
The local stiffness factor, Flocal, shall be determined as follows:
a
æ S ö
Flocal = ç local ÷
è Slocalave ø (15-11)
where,
Page 15-48 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
a = empirical exponent = 0.50 for extensible reinforcement (e.g., geotextiles,
December 2020
geogrids, polymer straps)
(i.e., assuming wall face is vertical) (dim)
For both
Abutments, Retaining Walls,determinations of the coefficient
and Reinforced Slopes of active lateral earth pressure, wall friction
Chapter 15
is assumed to be zero.
The local stiffness factor, Flocal, shall be determined as follows:
The local stiffness factor, Flocal, shall be determined as follows:
a (15-11)
æ S ö
Flocal = ç local ÷
è Slocalave ø (15-11)
where,
where,
a = empirical exponent = 0.50 for extensible reinforcement (e.g., geotextiles, geogrids,
a = polymer straps)
empirical exponent = 0.50 for extensible reinforcement (e.g., geotextiles,
Slocal = local reinforcement
geogrids, stiffness
polymer straps)determined as follows:
Slocal = local reinforcement stiffness determined as follows:
Slocal = RCJ/Sv (15-12)
Swhere,
local = Ji/Sv (15-12)
RC, Ji and Sv are as defined previously
where, Ji and Sv are as defined previously.
Slocalave shall be determined as follows:
Slocalave shall be𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 determined as follows:
∑𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖(𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 /𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 )
Page 15-46
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
October 2013
Chapter 15 where, Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
all variables
n
are as defined previously.
As is true fori =1Sglobal
i å(J /S )
, vSlocal , Slocalave, and Flocal shall be determined per unit of wall width
S
rather =
localavethan per reinforcement width, as T
n max represents a force per unit per unit of wall
width. Hence, Rc is included in equations 15-11 and 15-12.
where, all variables are as defined previously.
The soil cohesion factor, Fc, shall be determined as follows:
The soil cohesion factor, Fc, shall be determined as follows:
Φ" = e%("⁄('(*)) (15-13)
(15-13)
where,
where,
e e = base
= base forfor
thethe natural
natural logarithm,
logarithm, equalequal to approximately
to approximately 2.718… 2.718…
l l = = empirical coefficient
empirical within
coefficient exponent
within = -16 = -16
exponent
c c = = cohesion
cohesionof MSE wall wall
of MSE backfill (psf) (psf)
backfill
All other variables are as defined previously.
All other variables are as defined previously.
Note
Notethat
thatthis
thiscohesion
cohesionterm
term does
does not
not apply
apply to
to apparent cohesion resulting
apparent cohesion resulting from
from matric
matric
suction or nonlinearity of Mohr’s envelope (Allen and Bathurst 2018). See See
suction or nonlinearity of Mohr’s envelope (Allen and Bathurst 2018). Table
Appendix
15-E-2 for selecting
15-E, Table 15-E-2,soil
forparameters forparameters
selecting soil design andfor how soil cohesion
design and howshould be handled.
soil cohesion
Soil
should be handled. In general, soil backfill cohesion should be assumed to beWSDOT
backfill cohesion shall be assumed to be zero for design. Furthermore, for zero for
projects,
design. cohesive
However,backfill
if soil shall not be
cohesion used
(i.e., forcohesion”
“true the MSE wall. However,inifTable
as identified soil cohesion
15-E-2)
(i.e., “true cohesion”
is present, Fc may be as used
identified in Table
to assess 15-E-2) isfor
the potential present, Fc may be used
post-construction to assess
deformation
the
andpotential for post-construction
reinforcement load increase. Seedeformation
Appendixand 15-Ereinforcement load
for additional increase. See
information on
Appendix 15-E
this subject. for additional information on this subject.
Conceptually,
Conceptually,thetheStiffness
StiffnessMethod
Methodwaswasdeveloped
developedby bystarting
startingwith
withthe
theSimplified
Simplified
Method,
Method,butbutmodifying
modifyingthatthatmethod
methodempirically
empiricallytotoimprove
improveitsitsaccuracy,
accuracy,considering the
considering
stiffness of the
the stiffness ofwall components,
the wall and improving
components, the distribution
and improving of as
of Tmax
the distribution a function
Tmax as a of
depth in the
function wall toinmore
of depth accurately
the wall to morereflect full scale
accurately wallfull
reflect measurements. Figure 15-13
scale wall measurements.
illustrates the relationship
Figure 15-13 between
illustrates the the Simplified
relationship between theMethod and the
Simplified Stiffness
Method andMethod.
the
Stiffness Method.
Simplified Method
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-49
December 2020
where,
Chapter 15 e = base for the natural logarithm, equal
Abutments, to approximately
Retaining 2.718… Slopes
Walls, and Reinforced
l = empirical coefficient within exponent = -16
c = cohesion of MSE wall backfill (psf)
Figure 15-13 Comparison of AASHTO Simplified and Stiffness Method equations
(Allen and Bathurst 2015)
Simplified Method
Stiffness Method
15-5.3.10.2 Load and Resistance
Comparison Factors for
of AASHTO Simplified andthe Stiffness
Stiffness Method
Method equations (Allen
and Bathurst 2015).
Table 15-5 provides a summary of the load and resistance factors needed for MSE wall
Figure 15-13
internal stability design using the Stiffness method to estimate Tmax. Reliability theory,
using the Monte Carlo method as described in Allen et al. (2005), was used to determine
the load and resistance
15.5.3.9.2 Load andfactors provided
Resistance in thethe
Factors table. For additional
Stiffness Method information regarding
calibration of these load and resistance factors, see Allen and Bathurst (2018) and the
Table 15-5 provides a summary of the load and resistance factors needed for MSE
Supplemental Materials associated with that paper. Note that the resistance factors were
wall internal stability design using the Stiffness method to estimate Tmax. for
adjusted relative to Allen and Bathurst (2018) to reflect the load factor (i.e., 1.35
Reliability
theory, using the Monte Carlo method as described in Allen et al. (2005), was used to
vertical earth pressure, EV) currently in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual for the
determine the load and resistance factors provided in the table. For additional
Strength Limit State.
information regarding calibration of these load and resistance factors, see Allen and
Bathurst (2018) and the Supplemental Materials associated with that paper. Note that
Table 15-5 Load and Resistance Factors for the Stiffness Method
the resistance
(Servicefactors were adjusted
and Strength relative to Allen and Bathurst (2018) to reflect the
Limit States)
load factor (i.e., 1.35 for vertical earth pressure, EV) currently in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Reinforcement Load Factor,
Manual for the Strength Limit State. Resistance Factor
Limit State
1 Type γp-EV, γp-EVc, and γp-EVsf Live Load, γLL фrr, фcr, фpo and фsf
2
Reinforcement Geogrids and Resistance
1.35 Load Factor, 1.75Live 0.80
Factor
rupture, γp-EV1, and
Limit State geotextiles
Reinforcement Type gp-EV, gp-EVc, Load,2
connection failure, 4Polymer frr, fcr, fpo
and gp-EVsf gLL
γp-con (strength limit) 1.35 1.75 and0.55
fsf
straps
Page 15-46 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Soil failure, γp-EVsf All
1.20 1.0 1.0 October 2013
(service limit) geosynthetics
Pullout, γp-EV
(strength limit All
1.35 N/A 0.70
- default model in geosynthetics
AASHTO 2020)3
Notes:
1 Based on probability of failure = 1% (target reliability index β = 2.3) to determine resistance factor for
strength limit states. Probability of failure = 15% (β = 1.0) for service limit state. See Allen and Bathurst
(2018) and Bathurst et al. (2019) for additional background on these calibrations.
2 AASHTO (2020); Berg et al. (2009) use γES = 1.5 for traffic loads on MSE walls.
3The pullout resistance factor was developed assuming that the default pullout models provided in
AASHTO 2020 are used. See Bathurst et al. (2019) for reliability theory calibrations using available empirical
data. See Miyata et al. (2019) for pullout model calibration for polymer strap reinforcement.
4 Also termed geostrips.
Page 15-50 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-5.3.10.3 Design for Internal Stability Limit States Using the
Stiffness Method
Limit states considered here include the soil failure limit state in Service I, and pullout,
reinforcement strength, and connection strength in Strength I and Extreme Event I
(seismic) and II (scour).
15-5.3.10.3.1 Soil Failure Limit State (Service I)
The soil failure limit state is considered a service limit state for design because it
is a deformation criterion. Furthermore, if this criterion is substantially exceeded,
the structure will not collapse but will more likely develop progressive increases in
facing deformation.
The soil failure limit state often controls the amount of geosynthetic reinforcement
required. See Allen and Bathurst (2019) for proof of this and to determine the relationship
between creep stiffness and tensile strength. Therefore, it is recommended that this
limit state be checked first to establish the minimum reinforcement stiffness required
and to use this as input for determining Tmax for reinforcement and connection rupture,
and pullout. For wall systems that have relatively low facing-reinforcement connection
strength, it is possible that connection strength may control the amount of reinforcement
needed instead. If this is the case, be sure to check whether or not the increased tensile
strength will require a stiffer reinforcement, in which case, the increased stiffness value(s)
will need to be used to recalculate Tmax (i.e., it is important to make sure that the tensile
strength and stiffness specified for final design are well matched).
Reinforced fill soil failure is defined to occur when the working strain in the reinforcement
exceeds a value sufficient to allow the soil to reach or exceed its peak shear strength
and a contiguous shear failure zone within the reinforced wall backfill develops. For the
stiffness Method as described in GDM Section 15-5.3.10.1, the wall shall be designed to
prevent failure of the soil within the reinforced soil mass, thus preserving working stress
conditions. To prevent exceedance of the soil failure limit state, the reinforcement strain
Ɛrein in individual layers shall be determined as follows for extensible reinforcement:
𝛾𝛾𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 (15-14)
𝜀𝜀𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = ≤ 𝜀𝜀𝜀𝜀𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
φ𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
where,
Ɛrein = the reinforcement strain in any individual reinforcement layer corresponding to
Tmax (%)
γp-EVsf = load factor for prediction of Tmax for the soil failure limit state in Table 15-5 (dim)
Tmax = the maximum load in the reinforcement at each reinforcement level, as specified in
Section 15-5.3.10.1 (kips/ft)
фsf = resistance factor that accounts for uncertainty in the measurement of the
reinforcement stiffness at the specified strain, as specified in Table 15-5 (dim)
Rc = reinforcement coverage ratio (dim)
Ji = secant tensile stiffness of reinforcement layer i per unit of reinforcement width
(kips/ft)
Ɛmxmx = maximum acceptable strain in the wall cross-section corresponding to Tmax in any
reinforcement layer (%)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-51
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Ji should be determined at a strain of 2% for geogrids and geotextiles. Ji should be
determined at 1,000 hrs or the estimated time to complete the wall, as specified in
AASHTO R-69. fsf is as specified in Table 15-5.
If multiple load sources are acting on the reinforced soil backfill, they shall be added to
Tmax as determined using Equation 15-1 by using superposition.
The maximum acceptable strain in each reinforcement layer Ɛmxmx corresponding to
Tmax should be set at 2.0% strain for stiff faced walls and 2.5% strain for flexible faced
walls. These criteria have the objective of preventing the development of a contiguous
shear surface though the reinforced soil zone. If it is decided to treat the wall as having a
flexible face (i.e., a facing stiffness factor of 1.0) even though the facing is classified as a
stiff face, such as a modular block facing, or if the calculated facing stiffness factor is 1.0,
such as typically occurs for taller walls, the maximum acceptable strain for a flexible faced
wall should be used.
For polymer strap walls, working strains tend to be lower than for other geosynthetics
based on strain measurements observed in full scale polymer strap walls (Miyata et al.,
2018 ), and Ji determined at a strain level of 1% may be more appropriate.
Note that to account for reinforcement coverage ratios less than one, Rc must be
included in Equation 15-14 as shown, where Ji is the reinforcement stiffness from
laboratory testing.
15-5.3.10.3.2 Pullout Limit State (Strength I)
erein = gp-EVsfTmax/fsfJi < emxmx (15-14)
The requirements in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual apply, except that Tmax is
calculated using the Stiffness Method, and Tmax is considered to be unfactored. Therefore,
the pullout limit state equation in the current AASHTO LRFD specifications is modified to
be as follows:Pullout Limit State (Strength I)
15.5.3.10.3.2
$%&'( )*+, (15-15)
𝐿𝐿" ≥ (15-15)
f%- .∗ 012 345
Forma&ed: Indent: Le@: 1.0
where,
where, Space Before: 0 pt, Line spa
Le Le = = length
lengthof ofreinforcement
reinforcement inin resisting
resisting zone
zone (ft)(ft) Forma&ed: Font: Not Italic
TmaxTmax= = applied
applied load
load in thethe reinforcement
reinforcement as specified
specified in in Section
Section15-5.3.10.1
15.5.3.10.1 (kips/ft) Forma&ed
gp-EV = (kips/ft)
load factor for vertical earth pressure specified in Table 15-5 (dim.) Forma&ed
gp-EV
fpo= = load factor for
resistance vertical
factor earth pressure specified
for reinforcement pullout fromin Table
Table15-5
15-5 (dim.)
(dim.) Forma&ed
fpo F* = resistance factor for reinforcement
= pullout friction factor (dim.) pullout from Table 15-5 (dim.) Forma&ed
F* α = = pullout friction
scale effect factor (dim.)
correction factor (dim.) Forma&ed
α = scale effect correction factor (dim.)
σv σv = = unfactored
unfactoredvertical
verticalstress
stressat at
thethe reinforcement
reinforcement level
level in the
in the resistant
resistant zonezone (ksf) Forma&ed
C = (ksf)
overall reinforcement surface area geometry factor based on the gross perimeter
C = of the reinforcement
overall and is equal
reinforcement surface to 2 for strip,
area geometry factor grid and on
based sheet-type
the grossreinforcements,
Forma&ed
i.e., two sides (dim.)
perimeter of the reinforcement and is equal to 2 for strip, grid and sheet-
Rc = type
reinforcement coverage
reinforcements, ratio
i.e., two determined
sides (dim.) as shown in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Rc = reinforcement Article 11.10.6.4.1
Design Manual,coverage ratio from(dim.)determined as shown in the Forma&ed
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Article 11.10.6.4.1 (dim.)
If Tmax includes multiple load sources with different load factors, gp-EVTmax should be Forma&ed
replaced with Ttotalf, calculated using superposition, as follows:
Ttotalf = gp-EVTmax +gp-ESSv(kaDsV+ DsH) (15-16) Forma&ed
where:
Page 15-52 gp-EV = Geotechnical
load factor for vertical earth pressure specified in Design Manual M 46-03.13
Table 15-5 (dim.) Forma&ed
γp-ES = load factor for earth surcharge (ES) in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge December 2020
Forma&ed
Design Manual, Table 3.4.1-2
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
If Tmax includes multiple load sources with different load factors, gp-EVTmax should be
replaced with Ttotalf, calculated using superposition, as follows:
Ttotalf = gp-EVTmax +gp-ESSv(kaDsV+ DsH) (15-16)
where,
γp-EV = load factor for vertical earth pressure specified in Table 15-5 (dim.)
γp-ES = load factor for earth surcharge (ES) in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual,
Table 3.4.1-2
Δσv = vertical soil stress due to concentrated load such as a footing load (ksf)
ΔσH = horizontal stress at reinforcement level resulting from a concentrated horizontal
surcharge load (ksf)
Sv = tributary layer vertical thickness for reinforcement (ft)
Ka = active lateral earth pressure coefficient (dim)
Note that Equation 15-16 does not include traffic live load nor seismic load.
For polymer strap reinforcement, the default pullout F* envelope and a value in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (Figure 11.10.6.3.2-2 and Table 11.10.6.3.2-1,
respectively) for geogrids shall be used.
15-5 .3 .10 .3 .3 Reinforcement Tensile and Connection Strength Limit States
(Strength I)
The requirements in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual apply, except that Tmax
is calculated using the Stiffness Method, and Tmax is considered to be unfactored.
Therefore, the reinforcement strength limit state equation in the current AASHTO LRFD
specifications is modified to be as follows:
gp-EV Tmax £ fTal Rc (15-17)
where,
Tmax = applied load in the reinforcement as specified in Section 15-5.3.10.1 (kips/ft)
gp-EV = load factor for vertical earth pressure specified in Table 3.4.1-2 (dim.)
f = resistance factor for reinforcement tension, specified in Table 15-5 (dim.)
Taℓ = nominal long-term reinforcement strength (kips/ft)
Rc = reinforcement coverage ratio determined as shown in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Manual, Article 11.10.6.4.1 (dim.)
If traffic live load is present replace gp-EVTmax with Ttotalf calculated as shown below:
Ttotalf = gp-EVTmax + (gLS)gfheq < fTalRc (15-18)
where,
Ttotalf = total factored load for each reinforcement layer (lbs/ft)
gLS = load factor for live load surcharge, LS, as specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Manual, Table 3.4.1-1 (dim.)
gf = unit weight of soil used to calculate live load surcharge, LS (lbs/ft3)
heq = equivalent height of soil for live load surcharge (ft)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-53
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
If multiple load sources other than traffic live load are present, use Equation 15-16 to
determine Ttotalf. It follows that if these additional load sources are added by superposition
for the Strength limit state design, that these additional load sources should also be added
by superposition to the Service limit state value of Tmax in Equation 15-14. However,
doing so is likely to be excessively conservative, especially for typical loads used for bridge
footings. If such foundation loads are present above the reinforced soil portion of the wall,
it may be best to design the geosynthetic wall using the Simplified Method or using limit
equilibrium as included in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
The long-term geosynthetic strength away from the connection of the reinforcement to
the wall facing shall be determined in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Manual, Article 11.10.6.4, and AASHTO R-69. Values of Tal for specific geosynthetic
products shall be as provided in the WSDOT QPL, Appendix D.
For the reinforcement connection strength, the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual
requirements shall apply. Connection tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
D6638 to obtain the short-term connection strength Tultconn for modular block facings or
ASTM D4884 for seam connections. The connection strength requirements provided for
the specific wall systems identified in the appendices to Chapter 15 shall be used.
15-5.3.10.3.4 Seismic Internal Stability Design Using the Stiffness Method
The requirements in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Article 11.10.7.2,
apply, except that Tmax is calculated using the Stiffness Method, and the additional
seismically induced reinforcement load is added to Tmax using superposition. The load
and resistance factors for the Extreme Event I Limit State provided in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Manual shall be used, except that the resistance factors for reinforcement
tensile resistance and pullout resistance shall be reduced to 1.0. See Appendix 15-E for
additional details on requirements for conducting seismic design for internal stability
using the Stiffness Method.
15-5.4 Prefabricated Modular Walls
Modular block walls without soil reinforcement, gabion, bin, and crib walls shall be
considered prefabricated modular walls.
In general, modular block walls without soil reinforcement (referred to as Gravity Block
Walls in the Standard Specifications Section 8-24 shall have heights no greater than
2.5 times the depth of the block into the soil perpendicular to the wall face, and shall be
stable for all modes of internal and external stability failure mechanisms. In no case, shall
their height be greater than 15 feet. Gabion walls shall be 15 feet or less in total height.
Gabion baskets shall be arranged such that vertical seams are not aligned, i.e., baskets
shall be overlapped.
15-5.5 Rock Walls
Rock walls shall be designed in accordance with the Standard Specifications, and the wall-
slope combination shall be stable regarding overall stability as determined per Chapter 7.
Rock walls shall not be used unless the retained material would be at least minimally
stable without the rock wall (a minimum slope stability factor of safety of 1.25). Rock
walls are considered to act principally as erosion protection and they are not considered
Page 15-54 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
to provide strength to the slope unless designed as a buttress using limit equilibrium
slope stability methods. Rock walls shall have a batter of 6V:1H or flatter. The rocks shall
increase in size from the top of the wall to the bottom at a uniform rate. The minimum
rock sizes shall be:
Table 15-6 Minimum Rock Sizes for Rock Walls
Depth from Minimum Typical Rock Average Dimension
Top of Wall (feet) Rock Size Weight (lbs) (inches)
0 Two Man 200-700 18-28
6 Three Man 700-2000 28-36
9 Four Man 2000-4000 36-48
12 Five Man 4000-6000 48-54
Rock walls shall be 12 feet or less in total height. Rock walls used to retain fill shall be 6
feet or less in total height. Fills constructed for this purpose shall be compacted to 95
percent maximum density, per WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 2-03.3(14)D.
Rock walls should be designed in accordance with FHWA Manual No. FHWA- CFL/TD-
06-006 (Mack, et al., 2006), but subject to the limitations and requirements specified in
this GDM.
15-5.6 Reinforced Slopes
Reinforced slopes do not have a height limit but they do have a face slope steepness limit.
Reinforced slopes steeper than 0.5H:1V shall be considered to be a wall and designed
as such. Reinforced slopes with a face slope steeper than 1.2H:1V shall have a wrapped
face or a welded wire slope face, but should be designed as a reinforced slope. Slopes
flatter than or equal to 1.2H:1V shall be designed as a reinforced slope, and may use turf
reinforcement to prevent face slope erosion except as noted below. Reinforcing shall have
a minimum length of 6 feet. Turf reinforcement of the slope face shall only be used at
sites where the average annual precipitation is 20 in or more. Sites with less precipitation
shall have wrapped faces regardless of the face angle. The primary reinforcing layers
for reinforced slopes shall be vertically spaced at 3 feet or less. Primary reinforcement
shall be steel grid, geogrid, or geotextile. The primary reinforcement shall be designed
in accordance with Berg, et al. (2009), using allowable stress design procedures, since
LRFD procedures are not available. Secondary reinforcement centered between the
primary reinforcement at a maximum vertical spacing of 1 foot shall be used, but it shall
not be considered to contribute to the internal stability. Secondary reinforcement aids in
compaction near the face and contributes to surficial stability of the slope face. Design of
the secondary reinforcement should be done in accordance with Berg, et al. (2009). The
secondary reinforcement ultimate tensile strength measured per ASTM D6637 or ASTM
D4595 should not be less than 1,300 lb/ft in the direction of tensile loading to meet
survivability requirements. Higher strengths may be needed depending on the design
requirements. Gravel borrow shall be used for reinforced slope construction as modified
by the General Special Provisions in Division 2 (see GDM Appendix 15-A for details). The
design and construction shall be in accordance with the General Special Provisions.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-55
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-5.7 Soil Nail Walls
Soil nail walls shall be designed in accordance with the most current edition of AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Manual. The following manual should be consulted for additional
information on soil nail wall design; however, the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual
shall govern if there are any conflicts.
Lazarte, C. A., Robinson, H., Gomez, J. E., Baxter, A., Cadden, A., and Berg, R., 2015.
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, Soil Nail Walls – Reference Manual, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA-NHI-14-007, 425 pp.
For external stability and compound stability analysis, as described in Section 15-5.3.4
and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, limit equilibrium slope stability
analysis as described in Chapter 7 should be used.
The geotechnical designer shall design the wall at critical wall sections. Each critical wall
section shall be evaluated during construction of each nail lift. To accomplish this, the
wall shall be analyzed for the case where excavation has occurred for that lift, but the
nails have not been installed. The minimum construction safety factor shall be 1.2 for
noncritical walls and 1.35 for critical walls (e.g., when underpinning bridge abutments or
other structures that are sensitive to settlement). However, temporary and permanent
underpinning of bridge, wall, or other moderately to heavily loaded structure foundations
with soil nail walls, or other cut wall types that use non-tensioned drilled in place lateral
elements, shall not be done without approval by the WSDOT State Geotechnical Engineer
and State Bridge Engineer.
Permanent soil nails shall be installed in predrilled holes. Soil nails that are installed
concurrently with drilling shall not be used for permanent applications, but may be used in
temporary walls.
Soil nail tendons shall be number 6 bar or larger and a minimum of 12 feet in length
or 60 percent of the total wall height, whichever is greater. Nail testing shall be in
accordance with the WSDOT Standard Specifications and General Special Provisions.
The nail spacing should be no less than 3 feet vertical and 3 feet horizontal. In very dense
glacially over consolidated soils, horizontal nail spacing should be no greater than 8 feet
and vertical nail spacing should be no greater than 6 feet. In all other soils, horizontal and
vertical nail spacing should be 6 feet or less.
Nails may be arranged in a square row and column pattern or an offset diamond pattern.
Horizontal nail rows are preferred, but sloping rows may be used to optimize the nail
pattern. As much as possible, rows should be linear so that each individual nail elevation
can be easily interpolated from the station and elevation of the beginning and ending
nails in that row. Nails that cannot be placed in a row must have station and elevation
individually identified on the plans. Nails in the top row of the wall shall have at least
1 foot of soil cover over the top of the drill hole during nail installation. Horizontal nails
shall not be used. Nails should be inclined at least 10 degrees downward from horizontal.
Inclination should not exceed 30 degrees.
Walls underpinning structures such as bridges and retaining walls shall have double
corrosion protected (encapsulated) nails within the zone of influence of the structure
being retained or supported.
Page 15-56 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Furthermore, nails installed in soils with strong corrosion potential, defined as:
• pH < 4.5 or > 10 (AASHTO T289),
• Resistivity < 2000 ohm-cm (AASHTO T-288),
• Sulphates > 200 ppm (AASHTO T290), or
• Chlorides > 100 ppm (AASHTO T291)
shall also have double corrosion protection. All other nails shall be epoxy, coated unless
the wall is temporary and in soils not defined as having strong corrosion potential.
For inspection of soil nail wall installation and testing, the guidance in the following
manual should be used:
Porterfield, J. A., Cotton, D. A., Byrne, R. J., 1994, Soil Nail Walls-Demonstration Project
103, Soil Nailing Field Inspectors Manual, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal
Highway Administration, FHWA-SA-93-068, 86 pp.
15-6 Standard Plan Walls
Currently, two Standard Plan walls are available for use on WSDOT projects. These
include standard cast-in-place reinforced concrete walls (Standard Plans D-10.10
through D-10.45), and standard geosynthetic walls (Standard Plans D-3, 3a, 3b, and 3c).
For Standard Plan walls, the internal stability design and the external stability design
for overturning and sliding stability have already been completed, and the maximum
soil bearing stress below the wall calculated, for a range of loading conditions. The
geotechnical designer shall identify the appropriate loading condition to use (assistance
from the Bridge and Structures Office and/or the project office may be needed), and shall
assess overall slope stability, compound stability for geosynthetic walls as applicable,
soil bearing resistance, and settlement for each standard plan wall. If it is not clear
which loading condition to use, both external and internal stability may need to be
evaluated to see if one of the provided loading conditions is applicable to the wall under
consideration. The geotechnical designer shall assess whether or not a Standard Plan wall
is geotechnically applicable and stable given the specific site conditions and constraints.
The Standard Plan walls have been designed using LRFD methodology in accordance with
the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Standard Plan reinforced concrete walls
are designed for internal and external stability using the following parameters:
• As = 0.51g for Wall Types 1 through 4, and 0.20g for Wall Types 5 through 8. For
sliding stability, the wall is allowed to slide 4 in to calculate kh from As using a
Newmark deformation analysis, or a simplified version of it.
• For the wall Backfill, φ = 36° and γ = 130 pcf.
• For the foundation soil, for sliding stability analysis, φ = 32°.
• Wall settlement criteria are as specified in Table 15-2.
Standard Plan geosynthetic walls are designed for internal and external stability using the
following parameters:
• As = 0.51g for Wall Types 1 through 4, and 0.20g for Wall Types 5 through 8. For
sliding stability, the wall is allowed to slide 8 in to calculate kh from As using a
Newmark deformation analysis, or a simplified version of it.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-57
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
• For the wall Backfill, φ = 38° and γ = 130 pcf.
• For the foundation soil, for sliding stability analysis, φ = 36°, and interface friction
angle of 0.7×36° = 25°.
• For the retained soil behind the soil reinforcement, for external stability analysis,
φ = 36° and γ = 130 pcf.
• Wall settlement criteria are as specified in Table 15-2, unless the settlement of
the first stage wall (i.e., the geosynthetic wall without the final concrete fascia) is
complete before the final concrete fascia is installed, in which case the settlement
criteria in Table 15-4 may be used).
Regarding the seismic sliding analysis, the geotechnical and structural designers should
determine if the amount of deformation allowed (4 in for reinforced concrete walls and
8 in for geosynthetic walls) is acceptable for the wall and anything above the wall that
the wall supports. Note that for both static and seismic loading conditions, no passive
resistance in front of the geosynthetic wall is assumed to be present for design.
15-7 Temporary Cut Slopes and Shoring
This section addresses the design requirements for temporary cut slopes and shoring,
both separately and in combination. For temporary cuts and shoring, construction
submittals are required in accordance with the Standard Specifications M 41-10 or other
contract documents. This section also addresses submittal review requirements for these
temporary facilities. The design and submittal requirements for temporary fills for haul
roads, construction equipment access, and other temporary construction activities are
as specified in Section 9.5.5.
15-7.1 Overview
Temporary shoring, cofferdams, and cut slopes are frequently used during construction
of transportation facilities. Examples of instances where temporary shoring may be
necessary include:
• Support of an excavation until permanent structure is in-place such as to construct
structure foundations or retaining walls.
• Control groundwater.
• Limit the extent of fill needed for preloads or temporary access roads/ramps.
Examples of instances where temporary slopes may be necessary include:
• Situations where there is adequate room to construct a stable temporary slope in lieu
of shoring.
• Excavations behind temporary or permanent retaining walls.
• Situations where a combination of shoring and temporary excavation slopes can be
used.
• Removal of unsuitable soil adjacent to an existing roadway or structure;
• Shear key construction for slide stabilization.
• Culvert, drainage trench, and utility construction, including those where trench boxes
are used.
Page 15-58 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
The primary difference between temporary shoring/cut slopes/cofferdams, hereinafter
referred to as temporary shoring, and their permanent counterparts is their design life.
Typically, the design life of temporary shoring is the length of time that the shoring or
cut slope are required to construct the adjacent, permanent facility. Because of the
short design life, temporary shoring is typically not designed for seismic loading, and
corrosion protection is generally not necessary. Additionally, more options for temporary
shoring are available due to limited requirements for aesthetics. Temporary shoring is
typically designed by the contractor unless the contract plans include a detailed shoring
design. For contractor designed shoring, the contractor is responsible for internal and
external stability, as well as global slope stability, soil bearing capacity, and settlement of
temporary shoring walls.
Exceptions to this, in which WSDOT provides the detailed shoring design, include
shoring in unusual soil deposits or in unusual loading situations in which the State has
superior knowledge and for which there are few acceptable options or situations where
the shoring is supporting a critical structure or facility. One other important exception is
for temporary shoring adjacent to railroads. Shoring within railroad right of way typically
requires railroad review. Due to the long review time associated with their review, often
9 months or more, WSDOT has been designing the shoring adjacent to railroads and
obtaining the railroad’s review and concurrence prior to advertisement of the contract.
Designers involved in alternative contract projects may want to consider such an
approach to avoid construction delays.
Temporary shoring is used most often when excavation must occur adjacent to a structure
or roadway and the structure or traffic flow cannot be disturbed. For estimating purposes
during project design, to determine if temporary shoring might be required for a project,
a hypothetical 1H:1V temporary excavation slope can be utilized to estimate likely limits
of excavation for construction, unless the geotechnical designer recommends a different
slope for estimating purposes. If the hypothetical 1H:1V slope intersects roadway or
adjacent structures, temporary shoring may be required for construction. The actual
temporary slope used by the contractor for construction will likely be different than the
hypothetical 1H:1V slope used during design to evaluate shoring needs, since temporary
slope stability is the responsibility of the contractor unless specifically designated
otherwise by the contract documents.
15-7.2 Geotechnical Data Needed for Design
The geotechnical data needed for design of temporary shoring is essentially the same
as needed for the design of permanent cuts and retaining structures. Chapter 10
provides requirements for field exploration and testing for cut slope design, and Section
15-3 discusses field exploration and laboratory testing needs for permanent retaining
structures. Ideally, the explorations and laboratory testing completed for the design of
the permanent infrastructure will be sufficient for design of temporary shoring systems
by the Contractor. This is not always the case, however, and additional explorations and
laboratory testing may be needed to complete the shoring design.
For example, if the selected temporary shoring system is very sensitive to groundwater
flow velocities (e.g., frozen ground shoring) or if dewatering is anticipated during
construction, as the Contractor is also typically responsible for design and implementation
of temporary dewatering systems, more exploration and testing may be needed. In
these instances, there may need to be more emphasis on groundwater conditions at
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-59
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
a site; and multiple piezometers for water level measurements and a large number of
grain size distribution tests on soil samples should be obtained. Downhole pump tests
should be conducted if significant dewatering is anticipated, so the contractor has
sufficient data to develop a bid and to design the system. It is also possible that shoring or
excavation slopes may be needed in areas far enough away from the available subsurface
explorations that additional subsurface exploration may be needed. Whatever the case,
the exploration and testing requirements for permanent walls and cuts in the GDM shall
also be applied to temporary shoring and excavation design.
15-7.3 General Design Requirements
Temporary shoring shall be designed such that the risk to health and safety of workers
and the public is kept to an acceptable level and that adjacent improvements are
not damaged.
15-7.3.1 Design Procedures
For geotechnical design of retaining walls used in shoring systems, the shoring
designer shall use the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the additional
design requirements provided in the GDM. For those wall systems that do not yet
have a developed LRFD methodology available, for example, soil nail walls, the FHWA
design manuals identified herein that utilize allowable stress methodology shall be
used, in combination with the additional design requirements in the GDM. The design
methodology, input parameters, and assumptions used must be clearly stated on the
required submittals (see Section 15-7.2).
Regardless of the methods used, the temporary shoring wall design must address both
internal and external stability. Internal stability includes assessing the components that
comprise the shoring system, such as the reinforcing layers for MSE walls, the bars or
tendons for ground anchors, and the structural steel members for sheet pile walls and
soldier piles. External stability includes an assessment of overturning, sliding, bearing
resistance, settlement and global stability.
For geotechnical design of cut slopes, the design requirements provided in
chapters 7 and 10 shall be used and met, in addition to meeting the applicable WACs
(see Section 15-7.5).
For shoring systems that include a combination of soil or rock slopes above and/or below
the shoring wall, the stability of the slope(s) above and below the wall shall be addressed
in addition to the global stability of the wall/slope combination.
For shoring and excavation conducted below the water table elevation, the potential for
piping below the wall or within the excavation slope shall be assessed, and the effect of
differential water elevations behind and in front of the shoring wall, or see page in the soil
cut face, shall be assessed regarding its effect on wall and slope stability, and the shoring
system stabilized for that condition.
If temporary excavation slopes are required to install the shoring system, the stability
of the temporary excavation slope shall be assessed and stabilized.
Page 15-60 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-7.3.2 Safety Factors/Resistance Factors
For temporary structures, the load and resistance factors provided in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications are applicable. Global stability shall be evaluated for the
Strength Limit State. Therefore, any structure loads present shall be factored using the
Strength Limit State load factors. The resistance factor for global stability of the shoring
system should be 0.75 (slope stability factor of safety of 1.3 for wall types in which LRFD
procedures are not available). For soil nail walls, the load and resistance factors provided
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual shall be used.
For design of cut slopes that are part of a temporary excavation, a factor of safety of
1.25 or more as specified in chapters 7 and 10, shall be used. If the soil properties are
well defined and shown to have low variability, a lower factor of safety may be justified
through the use of the Monte Carlo simulation feature available in slope stability analysis
computer programs. In this case, a probability of failure of 0.01 or smaller shall be
targeted (Santamarina, et al., 1992). However, even with this additional analysis, in no
case shall a slope stability safety factor less than 1.2 be used for design of the temporary
cut slope.
15-7.3.3 Design Loads
The active, passive, and at-rest earth pressures used to design temporary shoring shall be
determined in accordance with the procedures outlined in Article 3.11.5 of the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications or Section 5 of the AASHTO Standard Specifications
for Highway Bridges (2002) for wall types in which LRFD procedures are not available.
Surcharge loads on temporary shoring shall be estimated in accordance with the
procedures presented in Article 3.11.6 of the AASHTO LRFD Specifications, or Section 5
of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002) for wall types in which
LRFD procedures are not available. It is important to note that temporary shoring systems
often are subject to surcharge loads from stockpiles and construction equipment, and
these surcharges loads can be significantly larger than typical vehicle surcharge loads
often used for design of permanent structures. The design of temporary shoring must
consider the actual construction-related loads that could be imposed on the shoring
system. As a minimum, the shoring systems shall be designed for a live load surcharge of
250 psf to address routine construction equipment traffic above the shoring system. For
unusual temporary loadings resulting from large cranes or other large equipment placed
above the shoring system, the loading imposed by the equipment shall be specifically
assessed and taken into account in the design of the shoring system. For the case where
large or unusual construction equipment loads will be applied to the shoring system,
the construction equipment loads shall still be considered to be a live load, unless the
dynamic and transient forces caused by use of the construction equipment can be
separated from the construction equipment weight as a dead load, in which case, only the
dynamic or transient loads carried or created by the use of the construction equipment
need to be considered live load.
As described previously, temporary structures are typically not designed for seismic
loads, provided the design life of the shoring system is 3 years or less. Similarly, geologic
hazards, such as liquefaction, are not mitigated for temporary shoring systems.
The design of temporary shoring must also take into account the loading and destabilizing
effect caused by excavation dewatering.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-61
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-7.3.4 Design Property Selection
The procedures provided in Chapter 5 shall be used to establish the soil and rock
properties used for design of the shoring system.
Due to the temporary nature of the structures and cut slopes in shoring design, long-
term degradation of material properties, other than the minimal degradation that could
occur during the life of the shoring, need not be considered. Therefore, corrosion for steel
members, and creep for geosynthetic reinforcement, need to only be taken into account
for the shoring design life.
Regarding soil properties, it is customary to ignore any cohesion present for permanent
structure and slope design (i.e., fully drained conditions). However, for temporary
shoring/cutslope design, especially if the shoring/cutslope design life is approximately
six months or less, a minimal amount of cohesion may be considered for design based
on previous experience with the geologic deposit and/or lab test results. This does
not apply to glacially overconsolidated clays and clayey silts (e.g., Seattle clay), unless
it can be demonstrated that deformation in the clayey soil resulting from release of
locked in stresses during and after the excavation process can be fully prevented. If the
deformation cannot be fully prevented, the shoring/cutslope shall be designed using the
residual shear strength of the soil (see Chapter 5). If the glacially overconsolidated clay
is already in a disturbed state due to previous excavations at the site or due to geologic
processes such as landsliding, glacial shoving, or shearing due to fault activity, resulting
in significant fracturing and slickensides, residual strength parameters should be used
even if the shoring system can fully prevent further deformation (see Section 5.13.3 for
additional requirements on this issue).
If it is planned to conduct soil modification activities that could temporarily or
permanently disturb or otherwise loosen the soil in front of or behind the shoring (e.g.,
stone column installation, excavation), the shoring shall be designed using the disturbed
or loosened soil properties.
15-7.4 Special Requirements for Temporary Cut Slopes
Temporary cuts slopes are used extensively in construction due to the ease of
construction and low costs. Since the contractor has control of the construction
operations, the contractor is responsible for the stability of cut slopes, as well as the
safety of the excavations, unless otherwise specifically stated in the contact documents.
Because excavations are recognized as one of the most hazardous construction
operations, temporary cut slopes must be designed to meet Federal and State regulations
in addition to the requirements stated in the GDM. Federal regulations regarding
temporary cut slopes are presented in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 29,
Sections 1926. The State of Washington regulations regarding temporary cut slopes are
presented in Part N of WAC 296-155. Key aspects of the WAC with regard to temporary
slopes are summarized below for convenience. To assure obtaining the most up to date
requirements regarding temporary slopes, the WAC should be reviewed.
Page 15-62 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
WAC 296-155 presents maximum allowable temporary cut slope inclinations based on
soil or rock type, as shown in Table 15-7. WAC 296-155 also presents typical sections
for compound slopes and slopes combined with trench boxes. The allowable slopes
presented in the WAC are applicable to cuts 20 feet or less in height. The WAC requires
that slope inclinations steeper than those specified by the WAC or for slope heights
greater than 20 feet, as well as slopes in soils or rock not meeting the requirements
to be classified as stable rock, or Type A, B, or C soil, shall be designed by a registered
professional engineer. As a minimum, the design by or under the supervision of the
registered professional engineer shall include a geotechnical slope stability analysis (i.e.,
Chapter 7) that is based on a knowledge of the subsurface conditions present, including
soil and rock stratigraphy, engineering data that can be used to estimate soil and rock
properties, and ground water conditions, and with consideration to the loading conditions
on or above the slope that could affect its stability. The design shall be conducted in
accordance with the requirements in this GDM and referenced documents. Engineering
recommendations based upon field observations alone shall not be considered to be an
engineering design as defined in the WAC and this GDM.
Table 15-7 WAC 296-155 Allowable Temporary Cut Slopes
Maximum Allowable Temporary Cut Slopes
Soil or Rock Type (20 Feet Maximum Height)
Stable Rock Vertical
Type A Soil ¾H:1V
Type B Soil 1H:1V
Type C Soil 1½H:1V
Type A Soil – Type A soils include cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength
of 3,000 psf or greater. Examples include clay and plastic silts with minor amounts of sand
and gravel. Cemented soils such as caliche and glacial till (hard pan) are also considered
Type A Soil. No soil is Type A if:
• It is fissured.
• It is subject to vibrations from heavy traffic, pile driving or similar effects.
• It has been previously disturbed.
• The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation at
4H:1V or greater.
• The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less
stable material.
Type B Soil – Type B soils generally include cohesive soils with an unconfined
compressive strength greater than 1000 psf but less than 3000 psf and granular
cohesionless soils with a high internal angle of friction, such as angular gravel or glacially
overridden sand and gravel soils. Some silty or clayey sand and gravel soils that exhibit an
apparent cohesion may sometimes classify as Type B soils. Type B soils may also include
Type A soils that have previously been disturbed, are fissured, or subject to vibrations.
Soils with layers dipping into the excavation at inclinations steeper than 4H:1V cannot be
classified as Type B soil.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-63
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Type C Soil – Type C soils include most non-cemented granular soils (e.g., gravel, sand,
and silty sand) and soils that do not otherwise meet Types A or B.
The allowable slopes described above apply to dewatered conditions. Flatter slopes may
be necessary if seepage is present on the cut face or if localized sloughing occurs. All
temporary cut slopes greater than 20 feet in height shall be designed by a registered civil
engineer (geotechnical engineer). All temporary cut slopes supporting a structure or wall,
regardless of height, shall also be designed by a registered civil engineer (geotechnical
engineer) in accordance with the GDM. If for a specific project, as specifically identified
in the contract documents, the location of a proposed temporary excavation could
undermine marginally stable ground, such as would occur if the excavation will result in
material being removed from the toe of an inactive or active landslide, the cut for the
excavation shall be designed by a registered civil engineer (geotechnical engineer) in
accordance with the GDM.
For open temporary cuts, the following requirements shall be met:
• No traffic, stockpiles or building supplies shall be allowed at the top of the cut slopes
within a distance of at least 5 feet from the top of the cut.
• Exposed soil along the slope shall be protected from surface erosion,
• Construction activities shall be scheduled so that the length of time the temporary cut
is left open is reduced to the extent practical.
• Surface water shall be diverted away from the excavation.
• The general condition of the slopes should be observed periodically by the
Geotechnical Engineer or his representative to confirm adequate stability.
15-7.5 Performance Requirements for Temporary Shoring and Cut Slopes
Temporary shoring, shoring/slope combinations, and slopes shall be designed to prevent
excessive deformation that could result in damage to adjacent facilities, both during
shoring/cut slope construction and during the life of the shoring system. An estimate of
expected displacements or vibrations, threshold limits that would trigger remedial actions,
and a list of potential remedial actions if thresholds are exceeded should be developed.
Thresholds shall be established to prevent damage to adjacent facilities, as well as
degradation of the soil properties due to deformation.
Typically, the allowance of up to 1 to 2 inches of lateral movement will prevent
unacceptable settlement and damage of most structures and transportation facilities.
A little more lateral movement could be allowed if the facility or structure to be protected
is far enough away from the shoring/slope system.
Guidance regarding the estimation of wall deformation and tolerable deformations
for structures is provided in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Additional
guidance on acceptable deformations for walls and bridge foundations is provided in
Chapter 8 and Section 15-4.7.
In the case of cantilever walls, the resistance factor of 0.75 applied to the passive
resistance accounts for variability in properties and other sources of variability, as well
as the prevention of excess deformation to fully mobilize the passive resistance. The
amount of deformation required to mobilize the full passive resistance typically varies
from 2 to 6 percent of the exposed wall height, depending on soil type in the passive zone
(AASHTO 2017).
Page 15-64 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-7.6 Special Design Requirements for Temporary Retaining Systems
The design requirements that follow for temporary retaining wall systems are in addition,
or are a modification, to the design requirements for permanent walls provided in
Chapter 15 and its referenced design specifications and manuals. Detailed descriptions
of various types of shoring systems and general considerations regarding their application
are provided in Appendix 15-F.
15-7.6.1 Fill Applications
Primary design considerations for temporary fill walls include external stability to
resist lateral earth pressure, ground water, and any temporary or permanent surcharge
pressures above or behind the wall. The wall design shall also account for any destabilizing
effects caused by removal or modification of the soil in front of the wall due to
construction activities. The wall materials used shall be designed to provide the required
resistance for the design life of the wall. Backfill and drainage behind the wall shall
be designed to keep the wall backfill well drained with regard to ground see page and
rainfall runoff.
If the temporary wall is to be buried and therefore incorporated in the finished work,
it shall be designed and constructed in a manner that it does not inhibit drainage in the
finished work, so that:
• It does not provide a plane or surface of weakness with regard to slope stability.
• It does not interfere with planned installation of foundations or utilities.
• It does not create the potential for excessive differential settlement of any structures
placed above the wall.
Provided the wall design life prior to burial is three years or less, the wall does not need
to be designed for seismic loading.
15-7.6.1.1 MSE Walls
MSE walls shall be designed for internal and external stability in accordance with
Section 15-5.3 and related AASHTO Design Specifications. Because the walls will only
be in service a short time (typically a few weeks to a couple years), the reduction factors
(e.g., creep, durability, installation damage) used to assess the allowable tensile strength
of the reinforcing elements are typically much less than for permanent wall applications.
The Tal values (i.e., long-term tensile strength) of geosynthetics, accounting for creep,
durability, and installation damage in Appendix D of the WSDOT Qualified Products List
(QPL) may be used for temporary wall design purposes.
However, those values will be quite conservative, since the QPL values are intended
for permanent reinforced structures.
Alternatively, for geosynthetic reinforcement, a default combined reduction factor for
creep, durability, and installation damage in accordance with the AASHTO specifications
(LRFD or Standard Specifications) may be used, ranging from a combined reduction factor
RF of 4.0 for walls with a life of up to three years, to 3.0 for walls with a one-year life, to
2.5 for walls with a six month life. If steel reinforcement is used for temporary MSE walls,
the reinforcement is not required to be galvanized, and the loss of steel due to corrosion
is estimated in consideration of the anticipated wall design life.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-65
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-7.6.1.2 Prefabricated Modular Block Walls
Prefabricated modular block walls without soil reinforcement are discussed in Section
15-5.4 and should be designed as gravity retaining structures. The blocks shall meet the
requirements in the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Implementation of this specification
will reduce the difficulties associated with placing blocks in a tightly fitted manner. Large
concrete blocks should not be placed along a curve. Curves should be accomplished by
staggering the wall in one-half to one full block widths.
15-7.6.2 Cut Applications
Primary design considerations for temporary cut walls include external stability to
resist lateral earth pressure, ground water, and any temporary or permanent surcharge
pressures above or behind the wall. The wall design shall also account for any destabilizing
effects caused by removal or modification of the soil in front of the wall due to
construction activities. The wall materials used shall be designed to provide the required
resistance for the design life of the wall. Backfill and drainage behind the wall should be
designed to keep the retained soil well drained with regard to ground water see page and
rainfall runoff. If this is not possible, then the shoring wall should be designed for the full
hydrostatic head.
If the temporary wall is to be buried and therefore incorporated in the finished work, it
shall be designed and constructed in a manner that it does not inhibit drainage in the
finished work, so that:
• It does not provide a plane or surface of weakness with regard to slope stability.
• It does not interfere with planned installation of foundations or utilities.
• It does not create the potential for excessive differential settlement of any structures
placed above the wall.
Provided the wall design life prior to burial is three years or less, the wall does not need to
be designed for seismic loading.
15-7.6.2.1 Trench Boxes
In accordance with the WSDOT Standard Specifications, trench boxes are not considered
to be structural shoring, as they generally do not provide full lateral support to the
excavation sides. Trench boxes are not appropriate for excavations that are deeper than
the trench box. Generally, detailed analysis is not required for design of the system;
however, the contractor should be aware of the trench box’s maximum loading conditions
for situations where surcharge loading may be present, and should demonstrate that the
maximum anticipated lateral earth pressures will not exceed the structural capacity of the
trench box. Geotechnical information required to determine whether trench boxes are
appropriate for an excavation include the soil type, density, and groundwater conditions.
Also, where existing improvements are located near the excavation, the soil should exhibit
adequate standup time to minimize the risk of damage as a result of caving soil conditions
against the outside of the trench box. In accordance with sections 15-7.3 and 15-7.4, the
excavation slopes outside of the trench box shall be designed to be stable.
Page 15-66 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
15-7.6.2.2 Sheet Piling, with or without Ground Anchors
The design of sheet piling requires a detailed geotechnical investigation to characterize
the retained soils and the soil located below the base of excavation/dredge line. The
geotechnical information required for design includes soil stratigraphy, unit weight, shear
strength, and groundwater conditions. In situations where lower permeability soils are
present at depth, sheet piles are particularly effective at cutting off groundwater flow.
Where sheet piling is to be used to cutoff groundwater flow, characterization of the soil
hydraulic conductivity is necessary for design.
The sheet piling shall be designed to resist lateral stresses due to soil and groundwater,
both for temporary (i.e., due to dewatering) and permanent ground water levels, as well as
any temporary and permanent surcharges located above the wall. If there is the potential
for a difference in ground water head between the back and front of the wall, the depth
of the wall, or amount of dewatering behind the wall, shall be established to prevent
piping and boiling of the soil in front of the wall.
The steel section used shall be designed for the anticipated corrosion loss during the
design life of the wall. The ground anchors for temporary walls do not need special
corrosion protection if the wall design life is three years or less, though the anchor bar or
steel strand section shall be designed for the anticipated corrosion loss that could occur
during the wall design life. Easements may be required if the ground anchors, if used,
extend outside the right of way/property boundary.
Sheet piling should not be used in cobbly, bouldery soil or dense soil. They also should not
be used in soils or near adjacent structures that are sensitive to vibration.
15-7.6.2.3 Soldier Piles With or Without Ground Anchors
Design of soldier pile walls requires a detailed geotechnical investigation to characterize
the retained soils and the soil located below the base of excavation. The geotechnical
information required for design includes soil stratigraphy, unit weight, shear strength,
surcharge loading, foreslope and backslope inclinations, and groundwater conditions. The
required information presented in sections 15-3 and 15-5.3 is pertinent to the design of
temporary soldier pile walls.
The wall shall be designed to resist lateral stresses due to soil and groundwater, both for
temporary (i.e., due to dewatering) and permanent ground water levels, as well as any
temporary and permanent surcharges located above the wall. If there is the potential for
a difference in ground water head between the back and front of the wall, the depth of
the wall, or amount of dewatering behind the wall, shall be established to prevent boiling
of the soil in front of the wall. The temporary lagging shall be designed and installed in a
way that prevents running/caving of soil below or through the lagging.
The ground anchors for temporary walls do not need special corrosion protection if the
wall design life is three years or less. However, the anchor bar or steel strand section shall
be designed for the anticipated corrosion loss that could occur during the wall design life.
Easements may be required if the ground anchors, if used, extend outside the right of
way/property boundary.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-67
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-7.6.2.4 Prefabricated Modular Block Walls
Modular block walls for cut applications shall only be used in soil deposits that have
adequate standup time such that the excavation can be made and the blocks placed
without excessive caving or slope failure. The temporary excavation slope required to
construct the modular block wall shall be designed in accordance with sections 15-7.3
and 15-7.4. See Section 15-7.6.1.2 for additional special requirements for the design of
this type of wall.
15-7.6.2.5 Braced Cuts
The special design considerations for soldier pile and sheet pile walls described above
shall be considered applicable to braced cuts.
15-7.6.2.6 Soil Nail Walls
Design of soil nail walls requires a detailed geotechnical investigation to characterize
the reinforced soils and the soil located below the base of excavation. The geotechnical
information required for design includes soil stratigraphy, unit weight, shear strength,
surcharge loading, foreslope and backslope inclinations, and groundwater conditions. The
required information presented in sections 15-3 and 15-5.7 is pertinent to the design of
temporary soil nail walls. Easements may be required if the soil nails extend outside the
right of way/property boundary.
15-7.6.3 Uncommon Shoring Systems for Cut Applications
The following shoring systems require special, very detailed, expert implementation, and
will only be allowed either as a special design by the State, or with special approval by the
State Geotechnical Engineer and State Bridge Engineer.
• Diaphragm/slurry walls • Deep soil mixing
• Secant pile walls • Permeation grouting
• Cellular cofferdamsGround • Jet grouting
freezing
More detailed descriptions of each of these methods and special considerations for their
implementation are provided in Appendix 15-F.
15-7.7 Shoring and Excavation Design Submittal Review Guidelines
When performing a geotechnical review of a contractor shoring and excavation submittal,
the following items should be specifically evaluated:
1. Shoring System Geometry
a. Has the shoring geometry been correctly developed, and all pertinent
dimensions shown?
b. Are the slope angle and height above and below the shoring wall shown?
c. Is the correct location of adjacent structures, utilities, etc., if any are present,
shown?
Page 15-68 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
2. Performance Objectives for the Shoring System
a. Is the anticipated design life of the shoring system identified?
b. Are objectives regarding what the shoring system is to protect, and how to
protect it, clearly identified?
c. Does the shoring system stay within the constraints at the site, such as the right
of way limits, boundaries for temporary easements, etc?
3. Subsurface conditions
a. Is the soil/rock stratigraphy consistent with the subsurface geotechnical data
provided in the contract boring logs?
b. Did the contractor/shoring designer obtain the additional subsurface data
needed to meet the geotechnical exploration requirements for slopes and walls
as identified in chapters 10 and 15, respectively, and Appendix 15-F for unusual
shoring systems?
c. Was justification for the soil, rock, and other material properties used for the
design of the shoring system provided, and is that justification, and the final
values selected, consistent with Chapter 5 and the subsurface field and lab data
obtained at the shoring site?
d. Were ground water conditions adequately assessed through field
measurements combined with the site stratigraphy to identify zones of ground
water, aquitards and aquicludes, artesian conditions, and perched zones of
ground water?
4. Shoring system loading
a. Have the anticipated loads on the shoring system been correctly identified,
considering all applicable limit states?
b. If construction or public traffic is near or directly above the shoring system, has
a minimum traffic live load surcharge of 250 psf been applied?
c. If larger construction equipment such as cranes will be placed above the shoring
system, have the loads from that equipment been correctly determined and
included in the shoring system design?
d. If the shoring system is to be in place longer than three years, have seismic and
other extreme event loads been included in the shoring system design?
5. Shoring system design
a. Have the correct design procedures been used (i.e., the GDM and referenced
design specifications and manuals)?
b. Have all appropriate limit states been considered (e.g., global stability of slopes
above and below wall, global stability of wall/slope combination, internal wall
stability, external wall stability, bearing capacity, settlement, lateral deformation,
piping or heaving due to differential water head)?
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-69
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
6. Are all safety factors, or load and resistance factors for LRFD shoring design,
identified, properly justified in a manner that is consistent with the GDM, and meet
or exceed the minimum requirements of the GDM?
7. Have the effects of any construction activities adjacent to the shoring system
on the stability/performance of the shoring system been addressed in the
shoring design (e.g., excavation or soil disturbance in front of the wall or slope,
excavation dewatering, vibrations and soil loosening due to soil modification/
improvement activities)?
8. Shoring System Monitoring/Testing
a. Is a monitoring/testing plan provided to verify that the performance of the
shoring system is acceptable throughout the design life of the system?
b. Have appropriate displacement or other performance triggers been provided
that are consistent with the performance objectives of the shoring system?
9. Shoring System Removal
a. Have any elements of the shoring system to be left in place after construction
of the permanent structure is complete been identified?
b. Has a plan been provided regarding how to prevent the remaining elements of
the shoring system from interfering with future construction and performance
of the finished work (e.g., will the shoring system impede flow of ground water,
create a hard spot, create a surface of weakness regarding slope stability)?
15-8 References
AASHTO, 2002, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, 17th Edition, Washington, D.C., USA.
AASHTO, 2020, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials, Ninth Edition, Washington, D.C., USA.
AASHTO. 2020. R-69, Standard Practice for Determination of Long-Term Strength for
Geosynthetic Reinforcement. American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, Washington, D.C., USA.
Allen, T. M., and Bathurst, R. J., 2003, Prediction of Reinforcement Loads in Reinforced Soil
Walls, WSDOT Research Report WA-RD 513.1 WA-RD 522.2, 364 pp.
Allen, T. M, and Bathurst, R. J., 2009, “Reliability of Geosynthetic Wall Designs and Factors
Influencing Wall Performance,” 4th International GSI-Taiwan Geosynthetics Conference,
Pingtung, Taiwan, pp. 95-123.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. 2019. “Geosynthetic reinforcement stiffness characterization
for MSE wall design.” Geosynthetics International 26(6): pp. 592–610
(https://dx.doi.org/10.1680/jgein.19.00041).
Page 15-70 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Allen, T. M., Bathurst, R. J., Holtz, R. D., Walters, D. L. and Lee, W. F., 2003. “A New
Working Stress Method for Prediction of Reinforcement Loads in Geosynthetic Walls,”
Canadian Geotechnical Journal, Vol. 40, No. 5, pp. 976-994.
Allen, T. M., Bathurst, R. J., Lee, W. F., Holtz, R. D., and Walters, D. L., 2004, “A New
Method for Prediction of Loads in Steel Reinforced Walls,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical
and Geo-environmental Engineering, Vol. 130, No. 11, pp. 1109-1120.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J., 2015. Improved simplified method for prediction of loads
in reinforced soil walls. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering,
141(11): 04015049.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. 2018. Application of the Simplified Stiffness Method
to design of reinforced soil walls. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering, 144(5): 04018024.
Allen, T. M., Nowak, A. S., and Bathurst, R. J., 2005, Calibration to Determine Load and
Resistance Factors for Geotechnical and Structural Design, Transportation Research Board
Circular E-C079, Washington, D.C., 93 p.
Allen, T. M., Christopher, B. R., Elias, V., and DiMaggio, J. D., 2001, Development of the
Simplified Method for Internal Stability Design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls,
WSDOT Research Report WA-RD 513.1, 96 pp.
Anderson, P. L., and Sankey, J., 2001, “The Performance of Buried Galvanized Steel
Reinforcements after 20 Years in Service,” Kyushu 2001, Japan, pp.
Bathurst, R. J., Allen, T. M., and Nowak, A. S., 2008a, “Calibration Concepts for Load and
Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) of Reinforced Soil Walls,” Canadian Geotechnical Journal,
Vol. 45, pp. 1377-1392.
Bathurst, R.J., Allen, T.M., Lin, P. and Bozorgzadeh, N. 2019, “LRFD calibration
of internal limit states for geogrid MSE walls.” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, 145(11):04019087 (http://dx.doi.org/10.1061/(ASCE)
GT.1943-5606.0002124).
Bathurst, R. J., Miyata, Y., Nernheim, A., and Allen, T. M., 2008b, “Refinement of
K-stiffness Method for Geosynthetic Reinforced Soil Walls,” Geosynthetics International,
Vol. 15, No. 4, pp. 269-295.
Bathurst, R. J., Nernheim, A., and Allen, T. M., 2009. “Predicted Loads in Steel Reinforced
Soil Walls Using the AASHTO Simplified Method,” ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and
Geoenvironmental Engineering, Vol. 135, No. 2, pp. 177-184.
Berg, R. R., Christopher, B. R., and Samtani, N. C., 2009, Design of Mechanically
Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Slopes, No. FHWA-NHI-10-024, Federal Highway
Administration, 306 pp.
Bligh, R. P., Briaud, J.-L., Kim, K. M., and Abu-Odeh, A., 2010, Design of Roadside Barrier
Systems Placed on MSE Retaining Walls, NCHRP Report 663, Transportation Research
Board, Washington, D.C., 195 pp.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-71
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
Bolton, M. D. 1986, “The Strength and Dilatancy of Sands,” Geotechnique, Vol. 36, No. 1,
pp. 65-78.
Chugh, A. K., 1995, “A Unified Procedure for Earth Pressure Calculations,” Proceedings:
Third International Conference on Recent Advances in Geotechnical Earthquake
Engineering and Soil Dynamics, Vol. III, St. Luis, Missouri.
Elias, V., Fishman, K.L., Christopher, B. R., and Berg, R. R., 2009, Corrosion/Degradation
of Soil Reinforcements for Mechanically Stabilized Earh Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes, No.
FHWA-NHI-09-087, Federal Highway Administration, 144 pp.
Jewell, R. A., and Wroth, C. P., 1987, “Direct Shear Tests on Reinforced Sand,”
Geotechnique, Vol. 37, No. 1, pp. 53-68.
Lade and Lee, 1976, “Engineering Properties of Soils,” Report UCLA-ENG-7652, 145 pp.
[As cited by Holtz and Kovacs (1981)].
Lazarte, C. A., Robinson, H., Gomez, J. E., Baxter, A., Cadden, A., and Berg, R., 2015.
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 7, Soil Nail Walls – Reference Manual, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA-NHI-14-007, 425 pp.
Leshchinsky, D., Leshchinsky, B., and Leshchinsky, O., 2017, “Limit State Design
Framework for Geosynthetic-Reinforced Soil Structures,” Geotextiles and Geomembranes,
No. 45, pp. 642-652, DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.geotexmem.2017.08.005.
Leshchinsky, D., Leshchinsky, O., Zelenko, B., and Horne, J., 2016, Limit Equilibrium Design
Framework for MSE Structures with Extensible Reinforcement, FHWA-HIF-17-004, Federal
Highway Administration, Office of Bridge Technology, Washington DC. Contract No.
DTFH6114D00 ttps:// www.fhwa.dot.gov/engineering/geotech/pubs/hif17004.pdf.
Mack, D.A., Sanders, S.H., Millhone, W.L., Fippin, R.L., and Kennedy, D.G., 2006. Rockery
Design and Construction Guidelines, FHWA Manual No. FHWA-CFL/TD-06- 006, 178 pp.
Miyata, Y., Bathurst, R.J. and Allen, T.M. 2018. Evaluation of tensile load model accuracy
for PET strap MSE walls. Geosynthetics International 25(6): 656-671.
Miyata, Y., Bathurst, R. J. and Allen, T. M., 2019. “Calibration of PET Strap
Pullout Models using a Statistical Approach,” Geosynthetics International _(online)
http://dx.doi.org/10.1680/jgein.19.00026.
Morrison, K. F., Harrison, F. E., Collin, J. G., Dodds, A., and Arndt, B., 2006. Shored
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (SMSE) Wall Systems, Technical Report, Federal Highway
Administration, Washington, D.C., Report No. FHWA-CFL/TD-06-001, 212 pp.
NAVFAC, 1982, Design Manual: Foundations, and Earth Structures, DM-7.2.
NTPEP (2019). National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP)
DataMine – Geosynthetic Reinforcement (REGEO). American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), Washington, DC, USA.
See “https://data.ntpep.org/REGEO/Products” https://data.
Page 15-72 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes Chapter 15
Porterfield, J. A., Cotton, D. A., Byrne, R. J., 1994, Soil Nail Walls-Demonstration Project
103, Soil Nailing Field Inspectors Manual, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal
Highway Administration, FHWA-SA-93-068, 86 pp.
Sabatini, P. J., Pass, D. G., and Bachus, R. C., 1999, Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4,
Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems, FHWA-IF-99-015, 281 pp.
Samtani, N. C., and Nowatzki, E. A., 2006, Soils and Foundations, Reference Manual-Volumes
I and II, Washington, D.C., National Highway Institute Publication, FHWA-
NHI-06-088/089, Federal Highway Administration.
Santamarina, J. C., Altschaeffl, A. G., and Chameau, J. L., 1992, “Reliability of Slopes:
Incorporating Qualitative Information,” Transportation Research Board, TRR 1343,
Washington, D.C., pp. 1-5.
Schlosser, F., 1978, “History, Current Development, and Future Developments of
Reinforced Earth,” Symposium on Soil Reinforcing and Stabilizing Techniques, sponsored
by New South Wales Institute of Technology and the university of Sidney, Austrailia.
Schlosser, F., and Segrestin, P., 1979, “Dimensionnement des Ouvrages en Terre Armee
par la Methode de l’Equilibre Local,” International Conference on Soil Reinforcement:
Reinforced Earth and Other Techniques, Paris, Vol. 1, pp. 157-162.
Terre Armee, 1979, Experimental Wall Pushed to Break by Corrosion of the Reinforcements,
TAI Research Report R12.
US Department of Defense, 2005, Soil Mechanics, Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC),
UFC 3-220-10N.
Vahedifard, F., Leshchinsky, B.A., Sehat, S. and Leshchinsky, D. 2014. Impact of cohesion
on seismic design of geosynthetic-reinforced earth structures. ASCE Journal of
Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental Engineering, 04014016, 12 p.
Vahedifard, F., Mortezaei, K., Leshchinsky, B. A., Leshchinsky, D. and Lu, N. 2016. Role
of suction stress on service state behavior of geosynthetic-reinforced soil structures.
Transportation Geotechnics 8: 45-56.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-73
December 2020
Chapter 15 Abutments, Retaining Walls, and Reinforced Slopes
15-9 Appendices
Appendix 15-A Preapproved Proprietary Wall and Reinforced Slope General Design
Requirements and Responsibilities
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and
Construction Review Checklist
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
Appendix 15-D Preapproved Proprietary Wall Systems
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection
Considerations
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls
Appendix 15-I Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Eureka Reinforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar ARES Walls
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar MESA Walls
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Allan Block Walls
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Appendix 15-R Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Lock and Load Walls
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for KeyGrid Walls
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details
for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-74 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-A Preapproved Proprietary Wall and
Reinforced Slope General Design
Requirements and Responsibilities
15-A-1 Design Requirements
Wall design shall be in accordance with the Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM), the LRFD
Bridge Design Manual (BDM), and the AASHTO LRFD Specifications. Where there are
differences between the requirements in the GDM and the AASHTO LRFD Specifications,
this manual shall be considered to have the highest priority. Note that since a LRFD
design method for reinforced slopes is currently not available, the allowable stress
design method provided in Berg, et al. (2009) shall be used for reinforced slopes, except
that geosynthetic reinforcement long-term nominal strength shall be determined in
accordance with AASHTO R 69.
The wall/reinforced slope shall be designed for a minimum life of 75 years, unless
otherwise specified by the State. All wall/reinforced slope components shall be designed
to provide the required design life.
15-A-2 Design Responsibilities
The geotechnical designer shall determine if a preapproved proprietary wall system is
suitable for the wall site. The geotechnical designer shall be responsible for design of
the wall for external stability (sliding, overturning, and bearing), compound stability,
and overall (global) stability of the wall. The wall/reinforced slope supplier shall be
responsible to design the wall for internal stability (structural failure of wall/reinforced
slope components including the soil reinforcement, facing, and facing connectors to the
reinforcement, and pullout), for all applicable limit states (as a minimum, serviceability,
strength and extreme event). The wall supplier shall also be responsible to design the
traffic barrier (all walls) and the distribution of the impact load into the soil reinforcement
(MSE walls) in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual and as specified
in the GDM and BDM. The wall or reinforced slope supplier, or the supplier’s consultant,
performing the geotechnical design of the structure shall be performed by, or under
the direct supervision of, a civil engineer licensed to perform such work in the state of
Washington, who is qualified by education or experience in the technical specialty of
geotechnical engineering per WAC 196-27A-20. Final designs and plan sheets produced
by the wall supplier shall be certified (stamped) in accordance with the applicable RCWs
and WACs and as further specified in this manual (see chapters 1 and 23).
The design calculation and working drawing submittal shall be as described in Standard
Specifications Section 6.13.3(2). All computer output submitted shall be accompanied
by supporting hand calculations detailing the calculation process, unless the computer
program MSEW 3.0 supplied by ADAMA Engineering, Inc., is used to perform the
calculations, in which case supporting hand calculations are not required.
Overall stability and compound stability as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications
is the responsibility of the geotechnical designer of record for the project. The
geotechnical designer of record shall also provide the settlement estimate for the wall
and the estimated bearing resistance available for all applicable limit states. If settlement
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-A-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-A Preapproved Proprietary Wall and Reinforced Slope General Design Requirements and Responsibilities
is too great for the wall/reinforced slope supplier to provide an acceptable design,
the geotechnical designer of record is responsible to develop a mitigation design in
accordance with this manual during contract preparation to provide adequate bearing
resistance, overall stability, and acceptable settlement magnitude to enable final design
of the structure. The geotechnical designer of record shall also be responsible to provide
the design properties for the wall/reinforced slope backfill, retained fill, and any other
properties necessary to complete the design for the structure, and the peak ground
acceleration for seismic design. Design properties shall be determined in accordance
with Chapter 5. The geotechnical designer of record is responsible to address geologic
hazards resulting from earthquakes, landslides, and other geologic hazards as appropriate.
Mitigation for seismic hazards such as liquefaction and the resulting instability shall be
done in accordance with Chapter 6. The geotechnical designer of record shall also provide
a design to make sure that the wall/reinforced slope is adequately drained, considering
ground water, infiltration from rainfall and surface runoff, and potential flooding if near
a body of surface water, and considering the ability of the structure backfill material
to drain.
15-A-3 Limits of Preapproved Wall/Reinforced Slope Designs
Preapproved wall design is intended for routine design situations where the design
specifications (e.g., AASHTO, GDM, and BDM) can be readily applied. Whether or not
a particular design situation is within the limits of what is preapproved also depends
specifically on what plan details the proprietary wall supplier has submitted to WSDOT
for approval. See the GDM preapproved wall appendices for details. In general, all the wall
systems are preapproved up to the wall heights indicated in Appendix 15-D, and are also
preapproved for use with traffic barriers, guardrail, hand rails, fencing, and catch basins
placed on top of the wall. Preapproval regarding culvert penetration through the wall face
and obstruction avoidance details varies with the specific wall system, as described in the
GDM preapproved wall appendices.
In general, design situations that are not considered routine nor preapproved are
as follows:
• Very tall walls, as defined for each wall system in Appendix 15-D.
• Vertically stacked or stepped walls, unless the step is less than or equal to 5 percent
of the combined wall height, or unless the upper wall is completely behind the back
of the lower wall, i.e., (for MSE walls, the back of the soil reinforcement) by a distance
equal to the height of the lower wall.
• Back-to-back MSE walls, unless the distance between the backs of the walls (i.e., the
back of the soil reinforcement layers) is 50 percent of the wall height or more.
• In the case of MSE walls and reinforced slopes, any culvert or other conduit that has a
diameter which is greater than the vertical spacing between soil reinforcement layers,
and which does not come through the wall at an angle perpendicular to the wall face
and parallel to the soil reinforcement layers, unless otherwise specified in the GDM
preapproved wall appendix for a specific wall system.
• If the wall or reinforced slope is supporting structure foundations, other walls, noise
walls, signs or sign bridges, or other types of surcharge loads. The wall or reinforced
slope is considered to support the load if the surcharge load is located within a 1H:1V
slope projected from the bottom of the back of the wall, or reinforced soil zone in the
case of reinforced soil structures.
Page 15-A-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Proprietary Wall and Reinforced Slope General Design Requirements and Responsibilities Appendix 15-A
• Walls in which bridge or other structure deep foundations (e.g., piles, shafts,
micropiles) must go through or immediately behind the wall.
• Any wall design that uses a wall detail that has not been reviewed and preapproved
by WSDOT.
Backfill Selection and Effect on Soil Reinforcement Design – Backfill selection shall be
based on the ability of the material to drain and the drainage design developed for the
wall/reinforced slope, and the ability to work with and properly compact the soil in the
anticipated weather conditions during backfill construction. Additionally, for MSE walls
and reinforced slopes, the susceptibility of the backfill reinforcement to damage due
to placement and compaction of backfill on the soil reinforcement shall be taken into
account with regard to backfill selection.
Minimum requirements for backfill used in the reinforced zone of MSE walls and
reinforced slopes are provided in the WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.14(4).
If the wall backfill is exposed to tidal influence or other water conditions that result in
significant water level changes within the reinforced soil backfill, a free draining backfill
shall be used as described in Section 15.3.7.
For reinforced soil slopes, the gradation requirements in WSDOT Standard Specifications
Section 9-03.14(4) shall be used, but modified to require the percent passing a No.
200 sieve of between 7 and 12 percent, and the minimum SE reduced to 15. Based on
experience, for typical reinforced slopes, it is difficult to compact slopes with cleaner soils
as well as to prevent erosion of the slope face while the slope vegetation is becoming
established. However, due to the greater fines content, the reinforced soil is likely to drain
more slowly than the MSE wall backfill, which should be considered in the reinforced
slope design, depending on the anticipated seepage into the reinforced backfill.
All material within the reinforced zone of MSE walls, and also within the bins of
prefabricated bin walls, shall be substantially free of shale or other soft, poor durability
particles, and shall not contain recycled materials, such as glass, shredded tires, portland
cement concrete rubble, or asphaltic concrete rubble, nor shall it contain chemically active
or contaminated soil such as slag, mining tailings, or similar material.
The corrosion criteria provided in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications for steel
reinforcement in soil are applicable to soils that meet the following criteria:
• pH = 5 to 10 (AASHTO T289)
• Resistivity ≥ 3000 ohm-cm (AASHTO T288)
• Chlorides ≤ 100 ppm (AASHTO T291)
• Sulfates ≤ 200 ppm (AASHTO T290)
• Organic Content ≤ 1 percent (AASHTO T267)
If the resistivity is greater than or equal to 5000 ohm-cm, the chlorides and sulfates
requirements may be waived.
For geosynthetic reinforced structures, the approved products and values of Tal in the
Qualified Products List (QPL) are applicable to soils meeting the following requirements,
unless otherwise noted in the QPL or special provisions:
• Soil pH (determined by AASHTO T289) = 4.5 to 9 for permanent applications and 3 to
10 for temporary applications.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-A-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-A Preapproved Proprietary Wall and Reinforced Slope General Design Requirements and Responsibilities
• Maximum soil particle size ≤ 1.25 inches, unless full scale installation damage tests are
conducted in accordance with AASHTO R 69 so that the design can take into account
the potential greater degree of damage.
Soils used for MSE walls and reinforced slopes shall meet the requirements provided
above.
15-A-4 MSE Wall Facing Tolerances
The design of the MSE wall (precast panel faced, and welded wire faced, with or without a
precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or shotcrete facia placed after wall construction)
shall result in a constructed wall that meets the following tolerances:
1. Deviation from the design batter and horizontal alignment, when measured along a
10 feet straight edge, shall not exceed the following:
a. Welded wire faced structural earth wall: 2 inches
b. Precast concrete panel and concrete block faced structural earth wall: ¾ inch
2. Deviation from the overall design batter of the wall shall not exceed the following
per 10 feet of wall height:
a. Welded wire faced structural earth wall: 1.5 inches
b. Precast concrete panel and concrete block faced structural earth wall: ½ inch
3. The maximum outward bulge of the face between welded wire faced structural earth
wall reinforcement layers shall not exceed 2 inches. The maximum allowable offset
in any precast concrete facing panel joint shall be ¾ inch. The maximum allowable
offset in any concrete block joint shall be ⅜ inch.
The design of the MSE wall (geosynthetic wrapped face, with or without a precast
concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or shotcrete facia placed after wall construction) shall
result in a constructed wall that meets the following tolerances:
Permanent Temporary
Description of Criteria Wall Wall
Deviation from the design batter and horizontal alignment for the 3 inches 5 inches
face when measured along a 10 feet straight edge at the midpoint of
each wall layer shall not exceed:
Deviation from the overall design batter per 10 feet of wall height 2 inches 3 inches
shall not exceed:
Maximum outward bulge of the face between backfill reinforcement 4 inches 6 inches
layers shall not exceed:
15-A-5 References
AASHTO. 2015. R-69, Standard Practice for Determination of Long-Term Strength for
Geosynthetic Reinforcement. American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, Washington, D.C., USA.
Berg, R. R., Christopher, B. R., and Samtani, N. C., 2009, Design of Mechanically
Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced Slopes, No. FHWA-NHI-10-024, Federal Highway
Administration, 306 pp.
Page 15-A-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced
Slope Design and Construction Review
Checklist
The review tasks provided herein have been divided up relative to the various aspects
of wall and reinforced slope design and construction. These review tasks have not been
specifically divided up between those tasks typically performed by the geotechnical
reviewer and those tasks typically performed by the structural reviewer. However, to
better define the roles and responsibilities of each office, following each task listed
below, either GT (geotechnical designer), ST (structural designer), or both are identified
beside each task as an indicator of which office is primarily responsible for the review of
that item.
Review contract plans, special provisions, applicable Standard Specifications, any contract
addendums, the appendix to Chapter 15 for the specific wall system proposed in the
shop drawings, and Appendix 15A as preparation for reviewing the shop drawings and
supporting documentation. Also review the applicable AASHTO design specifications and
Chapter 15 as needed to be fully familiar with the design requirements. If a HITEC report
is available for the wall system, it should be reviewed as well.
The shop drawings and supporting documentation should be quickly reviewed to
determine whether or not the submittal package is complete. Identify any deficiencies in
terms of the completeness of the submittal package. The shop drawings should contain
wall plans for the specific wall system, elevations, and component details that address
all of the specific requirements for the wall as described in the contract. The supporting
documentation should include calculations supporting the design of each element of the
wall (i.e., soil reinforcement density, corrosion design, connection design, facing structural
design, external wall stability, special design around obstructions in the reinforced backfill,
etc., and example hand calculations demonstrating the method used by any computer
printouts provided and that verify the accuracy of the computer output. The contract will
describe specifically what is to be included in the submittal package.
The following geotechnical design and construction issues should be reviewed by the
geotechnical designer (GT) and/or structural designer (ST) when reviewing proprietary
wall/reinforced slope designs:
1. External stability design
a. Are the structure dimensions, and design cross-sections, in the wall/
reinforced slope supplier’s plan consistent with the contract requirements and
geotechnical design? As a minimum, check wall/slope base width, embedment
depth, and face batter in comparison to the geotechnical external stability
design. (GT, ST).
b. Have the design documents and plan details been certified in accordance with
this manual? (GT, ST)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-B-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and Construction Review Checklist
2. Internal stability design
a. Has the correct, and agreed upon, design procedure been used (i.e., as specified
in the GDM, BDM, and AASHTO LRFD Specifications), including the correct
earth pressures and earth pressure coefficients? (GT)
b. Has appropriate load group for each limit state been selected? (GT, ST)
i. In general, with the exception of the Stiffness Method described in
Section 15.5.3.10.3.1 the service limit state is not specifically checked for
internal stability.
ii. Strength I should be used for the strength limit state, unless an owner
specified vehicle is to be used, in which case Strength II should also
be checked.
iii. Extreme Event I should be used for seismic design.
iv. Extreme Event II should be used for scour design.
c. Have the correct load factors been selected (see GDM, BDM and the AASHTO
LRFD Specifications)? Note that for reinforced slopes, since LRFD procedures
are currently not available, load factors are not applicable to reinforced slope
design. (GT, ST)
d. Has live load been treated correctly regarding magnitude (in general,
approximated as 2 feet of soil surcharge load) and location (over reinforced zone
for bearing, behind reinforced zone for sliding and overturning)? (GT, ST)
e. Have the effects of any external surcharge loads, including traffic barrier impact
loads, been taken into account in the calculation of load applied internally to the
wall reinforcement and other elements? (GT, ST)
f. Has the correct PGA been used for seismic design for internal stability? (GT)
g. Have the correct resistance factors been selected for design for each
limit state? For reinforced slopes, since LRFD design procedures are currently
not available, check to make sure that the correct safety factors have been
selected. (GT)
h. Have the correct reinforcement and connector properties been used?
i. For steel reinforcement, have the steel reinforcement dimensions and
spacing been identified? (GT, ST)
ii. For steel reinforcement, has it been designed for corrosion using the
correct corrosion rates, correct design life (75 years, unless specified
otherwise in the contract documents)? (GT, ST)
iii. Have the steel reinforcement connections to the facing been designed for
corrosion, and has appropriate separation between the soil reinforcement
and the facing concrete reinforcement been done so that a corrosion cell
cannot occur, per the AASHTO LRFD Specifications? (GT, ST)
Page 15-B-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and Construction Review Checklist Appendix 15-B
iv. For geosynthetic reinforcement products selected, are the long-term
design nominal strengths, Tal, used for design consistent with the values of
Tal provided in the Qualified Products List (QPL) and consistent with the
products approved for the particular wall system in this GDM. (GT)
v. Are the soil reinforcement - facing connection design parameters used
consistent with the connection plan details provided? For steel reinforced
systems, such details include the shear resistance of the connection pins
or bolts, bolt hole sizes, etc. For geosynthetic reinforced systems, such
details include the type of connection, and since the connection strength is
specific to the reinforcement product (i.e., product material, strength, and
type) – facing unit (i.e., material type and strength, and detailed facing unit
geometry) combination, and the specific type of connector used, including
material type and connector geometry, as well as how it fits with the facing
unit. Check to make sure that the reinforcement – facing connection has
been previously approved and that the approved design properties have
been used. (GT, ST)
vi. If a coverage ratio, Rc, of less than 1.0 is used for the reinforcement, and
its connection to the facing, has the facing been checked to see that it
is structurally adequate to carry the earth load between reinforcement
connection points without bulging of facing units, facing unit distress,
or overstressing of the connection between the facing and the soil
reinforcement? (GT, ST)
vii. Are the facing material properties used by the wall supplier consistent with
what is required to produce a facing system that has the required design
life and that is durable in light of the environmental conditions anticipated?
Have these properties been backed up with appropriate supporting test
data? Is the facing used by the supplier consistent with the aesthetic
requirements for the project? (GT, ST)
i. Check to make sure that the following limit states have been evaluated, and
that the wall/reinforced slope internal stability meets the design requirements:
i. Reinforcement resistance in reinforced backfill (strength and extreme
event) (GT)
ii. Reinforcement resistance at connection with facing (strength and extreme
event) (GT, ST)
iii. Reinforcement pullout (strength and extreme event) (GT)
iv. If the Stiffness Method is used, soil failure at the strength limit state (GT)
j. If obstructions such as small structure foundations, culverts, utilities, etc.,
must be placed within the reinforced backfill zone (primarily applies to MSE
walls and reinforced slopes), has the design of the reinforcement placement,
density and strength, and the facing configuration and details, to accommodate
the obstruction been accomplished in accordance with the GDM, BDM, and
AASHTO LRFD Specifications? (GT, ST)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-B-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and Construction Review Checklist
k. Has the computer output for internal stability been hand checked to verify the
accuracy of the computer program calculations (compare hand calculations to
the computer output; also, a spot check calculation by the reviewer may also be
needed if the calculations do not look correct for some reason)? (GT)
l. Have the specific requirements, material properties, and plan details relating to
internal stability specified in the sections that follow in this Appendix for the
specific wall/reinforced slope system been used? (GT, ST)
m. Note that for structural wall facings for MSE walls, design of prefabricated
modular walls, and design of other structural wall systems, a structural design
and detail review must be conducted by the structural reviewer (for WSDOT,
the Bridge and Structures Office conducts this review in accordance with the
BDM and the AASHTO LRFD Specifications). (ST)
i. Compare preapproved wall details to the shop drawing regarding the
concrete facing panel dimensions, concrete cover, rebar size, orientation
and location. This also applies to any other structural elements of the wall
(e.g., steel stiffeners for welded wire facings, concrete components of
modular walls whether reinforced or not, etc.). (ST)
ii. Is a quantity summary of components listed for each wall? (ST)
iii. Do the geometry and dimensions of any traffic barriers or coping shown
on shop drawings match with what is required by contract drawings (may
need to check other portions of contract plans for verification (i.e. paving
plans)? Has the structural design and sizing of the barrier/reaction slab
been done consistently with the AASHTO specifications and BDM? Are
the barrier details constructable? (ST)
iv. Do notes in the shop drawings state the date of manufacture, production
lot number, and piece mark be marked clearly on the rear face of each
panel (if required by special the contract provisions)? (ST)
3. Wall/slope construction sequence and requirements provided in shop drawings
a. Make sure construction sequence and notes provided in the shop drawings
do not conflict with the contract specifications (e.g., minimum lift thickness,
compaction requirements, construction sequence and details, etc.). Any
conflicts should be pointed out in the shop drawing review comments, and such
conflicts should be discussed during the precon meeting with the wall supplier,
wall constructor, and prime contractor for the wall/slope construction. (GT, ST)
b. Make sure any wall/slope corner or angle point details are consistent with the
preapproved details and the contract requirements, both regarding the facing
and the soil reinforcement. This also applies to overlap of reinforcement for
back-to-back walls (GT, ST)
Page 15-B-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and Construction Review Checklist Appendix 15-B
4. Wall and reinforced slope construction quality assurance
a. Discuss all aspects of the wall/slope construction and quality assurance
activities at the wall/reinforced preconstruction meeting. The preconstruction
meeting should include representatives from the wall supplier and related
materials suppliers, the earthwork contractor, the wall constructor, the prime
contractor, the project inspection and construction administration staff, and
the geotechnical and structural reviewers/designers. (GT, ST, and region
project office)
b. Check to make sure that the correct wall or reinforced slope elements, including
specific soil reinforcement products, connectors, facing blocks, etc., are being
used to construct the wall (visually check identification on the wall elements).
For steel systems, make sure that reinforcement dimensions are correct, and
that they have been properly galvanized. (region project office)
c. Make sure that all wall elements are not damaged or otherwise defective.
(region project office)
d. Make sure that all materials certifications reflect what has been shipped to the
project and that the certified properties meet the contract/design requirements.
Also make sure that the identification on the wall elements shipped to the site
match the certifications. Determine if the date of manufacture, production lot
number, and piece mark on the rear face of each panel match the identification
of the panels shown on the shop drawings (if req. by special prov.) (region
project office)
e. Obtain samples of materials to be tested, and compare test results to project
minimum requirements. Also check dimensional tolerances of each wall
element. (region project office)
f. Make sure that the wall backfill meets the design/contract requirements
regarding gradation, ability to compact, and aggregate durability. (region
project office)
g. Check the bearing pad elevation, thickness, and material to make sure that
it meets the specifications, and that its location relative to the ground line
is as assumed in the design. Also check to make sure that the base of the
wall excavation is properly located, and that the wall base is firm. (region
project office)
h. As the wall is being constructed, make sure that the right product is being
used in the right place. For soil reinforcement, make sure that the product is
the right length, spaced vertically and horizontally correctly per the plans, and
that it is placed and pulled tight to remove any slack or distortion, both in the
backfill and at the facing connection. Make sure that the facing connections
are properly and uniformly engaged so that uneven loading of the soil
reinforcement at the facing connection is prevented. (region project office)
i. Make sure that facing panels or blocks are properly seated on one another as
shown in the wall details. (region project office)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-B-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-B Preapproved Proprietary Wall/Reinforced Slope Design and Construction Review Checklist
j. Check to make sure that the correct soil lift thickness is used, and that backfill
compaction is meeting the contract requirements. (region project office)
k. Check to make sure that small hand compactors are being used within 3 feet
of the face. Reduced lift thickness should be used at the face to account for
the reduced compaction energy available from the small hand compactor.
The combination of a certain number of passes and reduced lift thickness
to produce the required level of compaction without causing movement or
distortion to the facing elements should be verified at the beginning of wall
construction. For MSE walls, compaction at the face is critical to keeping
connection stresses and facing performance problems to a minimum. Check to
make sure that the reinforcement is not connected to the facing until the soil
immediately behind the facing elements is up to the level of the reinforcement
after compaction. Also make sure that soil particles do not spill over on to the
top of the facing elements. (region project office)
l. Make sure that drainage elements are placed properly and connected to
the outlet structures, and at the proper grade to promote drainage. (region
project office)
m. Check that the wall face embedment is equal to or greater than the specified
embedment. (region project office)
n. Frequently check to determine if wall face alignment, batter, and uniformity
are within tolerances. Also make sure that acceptable techniques to adjust the
wall face batter and alignment are used. Techniques that could cause stress to
the reinforcement/facing connections or to the facing elements themselves,
including shimming methods that create point loads on the facing elements,
should not be used. (region project office)
o. For reinforced slopes, in addition to what is listed above as applicable, check
to make sure that the slope facing material is properly connected to the soil
reinforcement. Also check that secondary reinforcement is properly placed, and
that compaction out to the slope surface is accomplished. (region project office)
Page 15-B-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems
Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
15-C-1 Instructions
The submittal requirements outlined below are intended to cover multiple wall types.
Some items may not apply to certain wall types. If a wall system has special material
or design requirement not covered in the list below, the WSDOT Bridge Design Office
and the WSDOT Geotechnical Office should be contacted prior to submittal to discuss
specific requirements.
To help WSDOT understand the functioning and performance of the technology and
thereby facilitate the Technical Audit, Applicants are urged to spend the time necessary
to provide clear, complete and detailed responses. A response on all items that could
possibly apply to the system or its components, even those where evaluation protocol
has not been fully established, would be of interest to WSDOT. Any omissions should be
noted and explained.
The submittal should be provided electronically to facilitate distribution within WSDOT
for review purposes (e.g., as a PDF). Responses should be organized in the order shown
and referenced to the given numbering system. Additionally, duplication of information is
not needed or wanted. A simple statement referencing another section is adequate.
If the wall system has been reviewed and a report produced through the IDEA program
or HITEC (if the HITEC report is still relevant to the submitted wall system), please
indicate so and provide an electronic copy of the report(s). It is likely that much of what is
contained in those reports will meet the submittal requirements provided below. If that is
the case, please indicate that is the case, and indicate where in the IDEA or HITEC report
the requested submittal information can be found.
15-C-2 Part One: Wall System Overview
Provide an overview of the wall system. Product brochures will usually fulfill the
requirements of this section.
15-C-3 Part Two: Plan Details
As a minimum, provide the following plan sheet details:
1. All system component details.
2. Typical plan, profile, and section views.
3. Details that show the facing batter(s) that can be obtained with the wall system
(example details that illustrate the permissible range are acceptable).
4. Corner details
• Acute inside corner • Obtuse outside corner
• Obtuse inside corner • Orthogonal outside corner
• Orthogonal inside corner
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-C-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
5. Radius Details (inside and outside radii, include system limitations).
• Inside radii
• Outside radii
• System limitations for inside and outside radii
6. Traffic barrier systems
• Guardrail
• Moment slab barrier
7. Horizontal obstruction details for obstructions
• Horizontal obstructions up to 24 inches oriented parallel to the wall face
• Horizontal obstructions up to 48 inches oriented perpendicular to the wall face
8. Vertical obstruction details for obstructions up to 48 inches.
9. Culvert Penetration
• Up to 48 inch culverts oriented perpendicular to the wall face.
• Up to 24 inch culverts oriented up to a 45 degree skew angle as measured from
perpendicular to the wall face.
10. Leveling pad details in accordance with Section 6-13 of the WSDOT Standard
Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction.
• Minimum dimensions
• Steps
• Corners
11. Coping and gutter details.
All plan sheet details should be provided as 11×17 size, hard or electronic copies. All
dimensions shall be given in English Units (inches and feet). The plan sheet shall as a
minimum identify the wall system, an applicable sheet title, the date the plan sheet was
prepared, and the name of the engineer and company responsible for its preparation.
15-C-4 Part Three: Materials and Material Properties
WSDOT has established material requirements for certain non-proprietary wall
components. These requirements are described in the Standard Specifications for Road,
Bridge, and Municipal Construction, and General Special Provisions (GSP) available at
www.wsdot.wa.gov/design/projectdev/gspamendments.htm. Specifically, GSP 130201.
GB6 covers welded wire faced structural earth wall materials, GSP 130202.GB covers
precast concrete panel faced structural earth wall materials, and GSP 130203. GB6 covers
concrete block faced structural earth wall materials. All wall components falling into the
categories currently defined by WSDOT should meet the WSDOT material requirements.
For materials not currently covered by WSDOT specifications, provide material
specifications describing the material type, quality, certifications, lab and field testing,
acceptance and rejection criteria along with support information for each material
items. Include representative test results (lab and/or field) clearly referencing the date,
source and method of test, and, where required, the method of interpretation and/
or extrapolation. Along with the source of the supplied information, include a listing of
facilities normally used for testing (i.e., in-house and independent).
Page 15-C-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements Appendix 15-C
All geosynthetic reinforced wall systems shall use a soil reinforcement product listed
in the WSDOT Qualified Product List (QPL). Inclusion of geosynthetic reinforcement
products on the QPL will be a necessary prerequisite to wall system approval.
1. For facing units, provide the following information:
• Standard dimensions and tolerances
• Joint sizes and details
• Facing unit to facing unit shear resistance
• Bearing pads (joints)
• Spacers
• Connectors (pins, etc.)
• Joint filler requirements: geotextile or graded granular
• Other facing materials, such as for reinforced slopes, or other materials not
specifically identified above
2. For the soil reinforcement (applies to structural earth walls and reinforced slopes),
provide the following information:
• Manufacturing sizes, tolerances, lengths
• Ultimate and yield strength for metallic reinforcement
• Corrosion resistance test data for metallic reinforcement (for metallic materials
other than those listed in the GSP’s)
• Pullout interaction coefficients for WSDOT Gravel Borrow (Standard Specification
Section 9-03.14(4)), or similar gradation, if default pullout requirements in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications are not used or are not applicable.
3. For the connection between the facing units and the soil reinforcements (applies
to structural earth walls and reinforced slopes), provide the following information:
• Photographs/drawings that illustrate the connection
• Ultimate connection strength, Tultconn, at various confining pressures up to
the anticipated preapproved wall height (typically 33 ft or less) for each
reinforcement product, connection type, and facing unit, and connection test
specific reinforcement strength, Tlot, for all connection tests.
• Provide connection data in an editable format using the table below:
Facing Geogrid Wall Height, Normal Load, Tultconn Tlot
Unit Product H (ft) N (lbs/ft) (lbs/ft) (lbs/ft)
Provide range of Provide range of Provide regression
H for which each N for which each equation(s) here
Tultconn equation Tultconn equation
applies applies
4. For the coping, provide the following information:
• Dimensions and tolerances
• Material used (including any reinforcement)
• Method/details to attach coping to wall top
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-C-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
5. For the traffic railing/barrier, provide the following information:
• Dimensions of precast and cast-in-place barriers and reaction slabs
• How barrier/railing is placed on/in and/or attached to wall top
• How guard railing is placed on/in and/or attached to wall top
6. Regarding the quality control/quality assurance of the wall system material suppliers,
provide the following information:
• QC/QA for metallic or polymeric reinforcement
• QC/QA for facing materials and connections
• QC/QA for other wall components
• Backfill (unit core fill, facing backfill, etc.)
15-C-5 Part Four: Design
Walls shall be designed in conformance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
(GDM), LRFD Bridge Design Manual (BDM), and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications. Provide design assumptions and procedures with specific references (e.g.,
design code section) for each of the design requirements listed below. Clearly show any
deviations from the GDM, LRFD BDM and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications,
along with theoretical or empirical information which support such deviations. In
general, proprietary wall suppliers will only be responsible for internal stability of their
wall system. However, if there are any special external stability considerations for the
wall system, those special considerations should be identified and explained in the wall
system submittal.
Provide detailed design calculations for a 25 feet high wall with a 2H:1V sloping soil
surcharge (extending from the back face of the wall to an infinite distance behind the
wall). The calculations should address the technical review items listed below. The
calculations shall include detailed explanations of any symbols, design input, materials
property values, and computer programs used in the design of the walls. The example
designs shall be completed with seismic forces (assume a PGA of 0.50g). In addition, a
25 feet high example wall shall be performed with no soil surcharge and a traffic barrier
placed on top of the wall at the wall face. The barrier is to be of the “F shape” and “single
slope” configuration and capable of resisting a TL-4 loading in accordance with LRFD
BDM Section 10.2.1 for barrier height and test level requirement. With regard to the
special plan details required in Section 2, provide an explanation of how the requirements
in the GDM, LRFD BDM, and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications will be
applied to the design of these details, including any deviations from those design
standards, and any additional design procedures not specifically covered in those
standards, necessary to complete the design of those details. This can be provided as a
narrative, or as example calculations in addition to those described earlier in this section.
For internal stability design, provide design procedures, assumptions, and any deviations
from the design standards identified above required to design the wall or reinforced
system for each of the design issues: listed below. Note that some of these design issues
are specific to structural earth wall or reinforced slope design and may not be applicable
to other wall types.
Page 15-C-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements Appendix 15-C
1. Assumed failure surface used for design
2. Distribution of horizontal stress
3. How surcharge loads are handled in design
• Concentrated dead load
• Sloped surcharge
• Broken-back surcharge
• Live load
• Traffic impact
4. Determination of the long-term tensile strength of reinforcement
5. Pullout design of soil reinforcement or facing components that protrude into wall
backfill
6. Determination of vertical and horizontal spacing of soil reinforcements (including
traffic impact requirements)
7. Facing design
• Connections between facing units and components
• Facing unit strength requirements
• Interface shear between facing units
• Connections between facing and soil reinforcement/reinforced soil mass
• How facing batter is taken into account for the range of facing batters available
for the system
• Facing compressibility/deformation, if a flexible facing is used
8. Seismic design considerations
9. Design assumptions/parameters for assessing mobilization of backfill weight internal
to wall system (primarily applies to prefabricated modular walls as defined in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications)
List all wall/slope system design limitations, including:
• Seismic loading
• Environmental constraints
• Wall height
• External loading
• Horizontal and vertical deflection limits
• Tolerance to total and differential settlement
• Facing batter
• Other
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-C-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
Computer Support:
If a computer program is used for design or distributed to customers, provide
representative computer printouts of design calculations for the above typical
applications demonstrating the reasonableness of computer results. All computer
output submitted shall be accompanied by supporting hand calculations detailing the
calculation process. If MSEW 3.0, or later version, is used for the wall design, hand
calculations supporting MSEW are not required.
Quality Control/Quality Assurance for design of the wall/slope systems:
Include the system designer’s Quality Assurance program for evaluation of
conformance to the wall supplier’s quality program.
15-C-6 Part Five: Construction
Provide the following information related to the construction of the system:
1. Provide a documented field construction manual describing in detail and with
illustrations as necessary the step-by-step construction sequence, including
requirements for:
• Foundation preparation
• Special tools required
• Leveling pad
• Facing erection
• Facing batter for alignment
• Steps to maintain horizontal and vertical alignment
• Retained and backfill placement/compaction
• Erosion mitigation
• All equipment requirements
2. Include sample construction specifications, showing field sampling, testing and
acceptance/rejection requirements. Provide sample specifications for:
• Materials
• Installation
• Construction
3. Quality Control/Quality Assurance of Construction:
Describe the quality control and quality assurance measurements required during
construction to assure consistency in meeting performance requirements.
Page 15-C-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements Appendix 15-C
15-C-7 Part Six: Performance
Provide the following information related to the performance of the system:
1. Provide a copy of any system warranties.
2. Identify the designated Responsible Party for:
• System performance
• Material performance
• Project-specific design (in-house, consultant)
3. List insurance coverage types (e.g., professional liability, product liability,
performance) limits, basis (i.e., per occurrence, claims made) provided by each
responsible party
4. Provide a well documented history of performance (with photos, where available),
including:
• Oldest
• Highest
• Projects experiencing maximum measure settlement (total and differential)
• Measurements of lateral movement/tilt
• Demonstrated aesthetics
• Project photos
• Maintenance history
5. Provide the following types of field test results, if available:
• Case histories of instrumented structures
• Construction testing
• Pullout testing
6. Regarding construction/in-service structure problems, provide case histories of
structures where problems have been encountered, including an explanation of the
problems and methods of repair.
7. Provide a list of state DOT’s that have used this wall system, including contact
persons, addresses and telephone numbers.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-C-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-C Wall/Reinforced Slope Systems Evaluation: Submittal Requirements
Page 15-C-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-D Preapproved Proprietary Wall Systems
The following wall systems are preapproved for use in WSDOT projects:
Table 15-D-1 Preapproved Proprietary Walls
System Name System Description ASD/ Height, Year Last
and Appendix and Appendix LFD or or Other Initially Approved
Wall Supplier Location Location LRFD? 1 Limitations Approved Update
Hilfiker Retaining Walls Welded Wire Welded wire facing ASD/LFD 33 feet Unknown Approved
1902 Hilfiker Lane Retaining Wall that is continuous 11/9/04
Eureka, CA 95503-5711 Appendix 15-H with welded wire (submitted
707-443-5093 soil reinforcement 9/15/03)
Hilfiker Retaining Walls Eureka Precast concrete ASD/LFD 33 feet Unknown Approved
1902 Hilfiker Lane Reinforced Soil 5’×5’ facing 11/9/04
Eureka, CA 95503-5711 Wall panels and welded (submitted
707-443-5093 Appendix 15-I wire mat soil 10/5/04)
reinforcement
The Reinforced Earth Co. Reinforced Precast concrete LRFD 33 feet 1987 Approved
9025 East Kenyon Ave. Earth Wall 5’×5’ facing panels 11/9/04
Suite 200 Appendix 15-J and steel strip soil (submitted
Denver, CO 80237 reinforcement 3/29/04)
303-790-1481
Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. ARES Wall Precast concrete ASD/LFD 33 feet 1998 Approved
2500 Northwinds Parkway Appendix 15-K 5’×5’ facing panels 11/9/04
Suite 500 and Tensar geogrid (submitted
Alpharetta, GA 30009 soil reinforcement 8/6/04)
770-344-2090
Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. MESA Wall Modular dry cast ASD/LFD 33 feet 2000 Approved
2500 Northwinds Parkway Appendix 15-L concrete block 11/9/04
Suite 500 facing with Tensar (submitted
Alpharetta, GA 30009 geogrid soil 4/19/04
770-344-2090 reinforcement and
9/22/04)
Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. Welded Wire Tensar geogrid ASD/LFD 33 feet* 2006 Approved
2500 Northwinds Parkway Form Wall wrapped face wall 3/3/06
Suite 500 Appendix 15-M with welded wire (submitted
Alpharetta, GA 30009 facing form 11/26/05)
770-344-2090
SSL, LLC MSEPlus Wall Precast concrete LRFD 33 feet 1999 Approved
4740 Scotts Valley Dr., Suite E Appendix 15-N 5’x5’ facing panels 8/5/13
Scotts Valley, CA 95066 and steel welded (submitted
831-430-9300 wire strip soil 5/28/13)
reinforcement
*If the vegetated face option is used for the Hilfiker Welded Wire Retaining Wall or the Tensar Welded Wire Form Wall, the
maximum wall height shall be limited to 20 feet. Greater wall heights for the vegetated face option for these walls may be used
on a case by case basis as a special design if approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Engineer.
1 For those systems still identified as ASD/LFD, use of the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications is preferred.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-D-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-D Preapproved Proprietary Wall Systems
Table 15-D-1 Preapproved Proprietary Walls
System Name System Description ASD/ Height, Year Last
and Appendix and Appendix LFD or or Other Initially Approved
Wall Supplier Location Location LRFD? 1 Limitations Approved Update
Anchor Wall Systems, Inc. Landmark Modular dry LRFD 33 feet 2012 Approved
5959 Baker Rd, Suite 390 Appendix 15-O cast concrete 4/2/12
Minnetonka, MN 55345-5996 block facing with (submitted
952-933-8855 Miragrid geogrid 10/21/11)
soil reinforcement
Allan Block Corporation Allan Block Modular dry LRFD 33 feet 2009 Approved
7424 W. 78th St. Wall (battered cast concrete 7/15/09
Bloomington, MN 55439 face) block facing (submitted
952-835-5309 Appendix 15-P with Miragrid or 1/15/08)
Stratagrid geogrid
soil reinforcement
Redi-Rock International LLC Redi-Rock Precast concrete LRFD 33 feet 2015 Approved
05481 US 31 South PC (Positive block facing with 8/3/15
Charlevoix, MI 49720 Connection) Miragrid strip soil (submitted
866-222-8400 Wall reinforcement Aug. 2012)
Appendix 15-Q
Lock and Load Retaining Walls Lock and Load Precast concrete LRFD 33 feet 2013 Approved
LTD Wall panel facing 7/10/13
1681 Chestnut St., Suite 400 Appendix 15-R attached to (submitted
Vancouver, BC V6J 4M6 wrapped face 5/3/13)
Canada geogrid wall
604-732-9990
Keystone Retaining Wall Keystone Modular dry LRFD 33 feet 2015 Approved
Systems, LLC Keygrid cast concrete 8/3/15
4444 West 78th St. (Compac II and block facing with (submitted
Minneapolis, MN 55435 III Units) Miragrid geogrid 4/17/15)
800-747-8971 Appendix 15-S soil reinforcement
Basalite Concrete Products, GEOWALL Modular dry LRFD 33 feet 2018 Approved
LLC Structural Earth cast concrete 1/2/18
3299 International Place Retaining Wall block facing (submitted
Dupont, WA 98327-7707 Appendix 15-T with Miragrid or 3/4/17)
253-964-5000 Stratagrid geogrid
soil reinforcement
*If the vegetated face option is used for the Hilfiker Welded Wire Retaining Wall or the Tensar Welded Wire Form Wall, the
maximum wall height shall be limited to 20 feet. Greater wall heights for the vegetated face option for these walls may be used
on a case by case basis as a special design if approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer and the State Bridge Engineer.
1 For those systems still identified as ASD/LFD, use of the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications is preferred.
Page 15-D-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the
Stiffness Method
15-E-1 Summary of the Stiffness Method and Notations
Table 15-E-1 provides a summary of how to calculate each of the parameters in the
Stiffness Method, including coefficient values, based on the method details provided by
Allen and Bathurst (2015, 2018). The Stiffness Method equation is repeated below
for convenience:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + � 𝐻𝐻
� 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 � 𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑙𝑙 (15-E-1)
where,
Tmax = maximum load in the soil reinforcement away from the facing
connection (kips/ft)
Kavh = active earth pressure coefficient
Sv = tributary area (equivalent to the vertical spacing of the reinforcement in
the vicinity of each layer when analyses are carried out per unit length of
wall) (ft)
H = total wall height (ft)
Href = reference height = 20 ft
S = average surcharge height above wall within 0.7H of the wall face (ft)
γr = unit weight of wall backfill soil (kcf)
γf = unit weight of surcharge soil (kcf)
Dtmax = Tmax distribution factor
Φg = global stiffness factor
Φfs = facing stiffness factor
Φfb = facing batter factor
Φlocal = local stiffness factor
Φc = soil cohesion factor
Table 15-E-2 provides a recommended approach to address any soil cohesion that may
be present in the wall backfill, as well as what to do if soil shear strength data for the
backfill to be used is not available. Note that in WSDOT experience, if Gravel Borrow
that meets the requirements in Section 9-03.14(4) of the Standard Specifications for
Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction M 41-10 is used as the wall backfill, backfill
friction angles are usually at or above 38º, and 38º may be used without backfill specific
shear strength tests on WSDOT projects in this case (see Table 5-2 in GDM Chapter 5).
Cohesive shear strength of the MSE wall backfill shall not be used for final design (other
than as illustrated in Example 5 at the end of this appendix), and MSE wall backfill that has
significant soil cohesion should be avoided, as soil cohesion can be lost over time after wall
construction and can also significantly reduce the ability of the wall backfill to drain as
water percolates into it. This potential post-construction loss of cohesion over time as well
as increase in the amount of water stored in the backfill can cause post-construction
reinforcement load and deformation increases. The Stiffness Method can be used to
estimate the reinforcement load and deformation increases that could occur post-
construction as soil cohesion is lost. See Example 5 at the end of this appendix for an
illustration of the effect of lost cohesion after wall construction on reinforcement strains.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-1 Summary of equations, parameters, and coefficients for the Stiffness Method
(Allen and Bathurst 2018)
Parameter Name Equation Coefficient Value
Dtmax Tmax zb = Ch × (H)y × Φfb Ch (for H in m) 0.40
distribution For z < zb: Dtmax = Dtmax0 + (z/zb) × (1 − Dtmax0) Ch (for H in ft) 0.32
factor For z ≥ zb: Dtmax = 1.0 y 1.2
Dtmax0 0.12
Φg Global stiffness β α 0.16
factor
S global 0.26
Φ g = α
β
pa
Sglobal Global 𝐽𝐽ave ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
reinforcement 𝑆𝑆global = =
(H/n) 𝐻𝐻
stiffness
𝑎𝑎
Φlocal Local stiffness 𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 “a” for steel 0
factor Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙= � � “a” for 0.5
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
geosynthetic and
extensible steel
grids b
Slocal Local 𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 /𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣
reinforcement
stiffness
Slocalave Average local ∑𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖=1 (𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 ⁄𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 )
reinforcement 𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 =
𝑛𝑛
stiffness
Φfb Facing batter K
d d 0.4
factor Φ fb = abh
K avh
Coefficient 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 �φ𝑟𝑟 + ω�
of active 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ =
earth 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠φ 2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 3 ω �1 + 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ω𝑟𝑟 �
pressure
κ
Φfs Facing stiffness 𝑆𝑆𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 η 0.57
factor Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = η �� � 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 � κ 0.15
𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎
Ff Facing stiffness 1.5𝐻𝐻 3 𝑃𝑃𝑎𝑎
parameter 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 =
𝐸𝐸𝑏𝑏 3 �ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ⁄𝐻𝐻�
Φc Soil cohesion Φc = eλ(c⁄(γr H)) λ -16
factor
Notes:
a
see Allen and Bathurst (2015)
b
e.g., crimped longitudinal steel wire
Page 15-E-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Other Notation in Table 15-E-1:
Tmax = the maximum load in the reinforcement (force/unit running length of wall – e.g. (lbs/ft))
n = number of reinforcement layers
H = height of wall (ft)
Href = reference wall height = 20 ft
Sv = tributary vertical spacing of the reinforcement layer (ft)
b = thickness of the facing column (ft)
E = elastic modulus of the “equivalent elastic beam” representing the wall face (ksf)
pa = atmospheric pressure (101 kPa or 2.11 ksf)
heff = equivalent height of an un-jointed facing column that is approximately 100% efficient in
transmitting moment through the height of the facing column (ft)
Kabh = horizontal component of active earth pressure coefficient accounting for wall face batter
Kavh = horizontal component of active earth pressure coefficient assuming the wall is vertical (ω = 0)
Ji = secant tensile creep stiffness of geosynthetic reinforcement layer i at 2% strain and 1000 hours on
a per unit of reinforcement width basis from laboratory testing (kips/ft)
Jave = average secant tensile creep stiffness corrected for the coverage ratio, i.e., RcJi, of all “n”
geosynthetic reinforcement layers (kips/ft)
Rc = reinforcement coverage ratio
σv = vertical pressure due to gravity forces from self-weight of the reinforced soil and soil above the
reinforced wall backfill (ksf)
c = soil cohesion (ksf)
γr = unit weight of the reinforced soil (kcf)
γf = unit weight of the soil surcharge (kcf)
q = Sγf = average vertical pressure due to soil surcharge on the top of the reinforced soil mass up to a
maximum width of 70% of the wall height H (ksf)
z = depth below wall top measured at the back of the facing (ft)
Ka = active earth pressure coefficient
S = average soil surcharge depth above the wall top using a soil surcharge unit weight γf (ft)
φr = friction angle of the reinforced soil backfill (degrees)
ω = wall face batter in clockwise direction from the vertical (degrees). In AASHTO (2020) the face
batter θ is taken clockwise from the horizontal, hence ω = θ − 90º
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-2 Soil shear strength parameters recommended for design using the Stiffness Method
(after Allen and Bathurst 2018)
Used to calculate
Cohesive strength Value of c
Plasticit Kavh and Kahb
component used to
deduced from y Index calculate Cohesion
failure envelope PI φr c Φc factor Φc Comments
If backfill soil strength properties
c=0 NA φtx or φds 0 0 1 are unknown, use conservative
default value for φr
c>0 If uncertain that matric suction is
contributing to the cohesion
(curved Mohr- φtx or intercept in soil shear test results,
Coulomb envelope ≤6 0 0 1
φds φsec assume c = 0. If backfill soil is
due to particle unknown at time of design, use
interlocking) conservative default value for φr
c>0 Always assume c = 0, unless
(apparent cohesion evaluating the influence of post-
≤6 φtx or φds 0 0 1
due to matric construction loss of matric suction
suction) on reinforcement loads
If uncertain that soil cohesion will
persist for design lifetime, assume c
c>0 = 0. To investigate possible loss of
>6 φtx or φds 0 >0 <1
(true cohesion) cohesive shear strength component
over life of wall, compare Tmax using
c > 0 with Tmax using c = 0
Notes: PI = Plasticity Index, φr = peak friction angle for reinforced soil backfill, φtx = peak friction angle from triaxial test, φds =
peak friction angle from direct shear test, φsec = peak secant friction angle (determined as shown in Allen and Bathurst
(2015, 2018).
Page 15-E-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-2 Limit State Equations for Design
Limit states that need to be considered when doing internal stability design using the
Stiffness Method include soil failure as a Service Limit State, and reinforcement strength,
connection strength, and pullout as Strength and Extreme Event Limit States. The load
and resistance factors applicable to the Stiffness Method for these limit states are
provided in Section 15.5.3.10.2.
15-E-2.1 Soil Failure Limit State Design
Research indicates that if the average peak reinforcement strain in the wall exceeds
approximately 2.5 to 3%, for typical granular backfill materials, soil failure as defined can
be achieved (Allen et al. 2003; Allen and Bathurst 2013, and Allen and Bathurst
2015, 2018). However, AASHTO (2020) has limited the target reinforcement strain to
2% for stiff faced walls and 2.5% for flexible faced walls.
The soil failure limit state should be considered a service limit state for design because it
is a deformation criterion. Furthermore, if this criterion is substantially exceeded the
structure will not collapse but will more likely develop progressive increases in facing
deformation. The soil failure limit state must be evaluated if the Stiffness Method is used
to compute geosynthetic reinforcement loads (as well as for extensible steel grid) for
working stress (operational) conditions. The goal of this limit state is to ensure that the
factored reinforcement strain in any layer is less than the target maximum peak strain to
prevent exceedance of the soil failure limit state. To calculate the reinforcement strain
Ɛrein in individual layers, see Equation 15-14 in Section 15.5.3.10.3.1.
If Ɛrein in any individual layer exceeds the limit strain Ɛmxmx, or if the target strain for the
average Ɛrein for all of the layers in the wall section is exceeded, then another product(s)
with higher stiffness must be selected and this limit state checked again. For the same
product line, increasing stiffness is associated with increasing Tult values as can be seen in
NTPEP reports (e.g., NTPEP 2019).
For design purposes, reinforcement used in the wall would be selected based on the
tensile strength required to prevent reinforcement rupture and connection failure, and
also selected based on the minimum reinforcement stiffness required in all the
reinforcement layers to prevent the development of a contiguous shear surface through
the reinforced soil zone.
In general, the soil failure limit state should be checked first, as this limit state often
controls the amount of reinforcement required. The stiffness values coming out of that
limit state analysis should then be used to determine Tmax for reinforcement and
connection rupture, and pullout. For systems with very poor connection strength, it is
possible that connection strength could control design instead. If that is the case, the soil
failure limit state may need to be reassessed to make sure that the reinforcement creep
stiffness is consistent with the ultimate tensile strength needed. See Allen and Bathurst
(2019) for information on the correlation between tensile strength and creep stiffness, as
well as AASHTO NTPEP (2019) for product line specific correlations between tensile
strength and creep stiffness.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-2.2 Reinforcement Strength Design
The tensile strength reduction factor for a reinforcement product in a geosynthetic
reinforced soil wall is computed as:
RF = RFID × RFCR × RFD (15-E-3)
where,
RFID = installation damage reduction factor,
RFCR = creep reduction factor, and
RFD = durability reduction factor.
These reduction factors shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO R 69.
Product specific data that can be used to assess the reduction factors can be obtained
at NTPEP (2019).
The long-term (nominal) design strength is:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
= 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
(15-E-4)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼
where,
Tult = ultimate tensile strength of the reinforcement
The calibration of the load and resistance factors for the Stiffness Method assumes that
the Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV) of the ultimate tensile strength is used for
design to obtain Tal.
Equation 15-E-1 is the equation to calculate the unfactored reinforcement load Tmax
in each reinforcement layer using the Stiffness Method. The factored limit state design
equation for tensile rupture for the case of dead loads only is expressed as:
γp-EV Tmax < φrrTalRc (15-E-5)
where,
φrr = the resistance factor for reinforcement rupture.
All parameters are as defined previously.
Combining equations 15-E-1 and 15-E-5 for the case of dead loads only leads to:
γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = �𝜑𝜑 � 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = � ϕ � 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻γ𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 +
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
�
𝐻𝐻
� 𝑆𝑆γ𝑓𝑓 � 𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑣𝑣ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑙𝑙 (15-E-6)
where,
Tal (required)
= the required minimum (factored) long-term reinforcement strength to
resist the factored loads.
Page 15-E-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
The equivalent expression for the case of an additional live load LL is:
γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 γ 𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = �𝜑𝜑 � 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = �ϕ 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑅𝑅 � 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻γ𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆γ𝑓𝑓 +
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑐𝑐 𝐻𝐻
γ𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 �γ �� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐 (15-E-7)
𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
where,
LL = live load (kPa),
γLL = live load factor = 1.75.
All other factors are as previously defined. For other dead load scenarios such as footings
with finite surface areas, conventional (elastic) solutions can be used and the resulting
factored horizontal load added to the right-hand side of equations 15-E-5 and 15-E-6
as shown below:
�γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 +𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 (𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎 ∆𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 +∆𝜎𝜎𝐻𝐻 � γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = (𝜑𝜑𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐)
= �ϕ � 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻γ𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆γ𝑓𝑓 +
𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐻𝐻
γ𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 �𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 (𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎 ∆𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 +∆𝜎𝜎𝐻𝐻�
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 � �� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐 + (15-E-8)
γ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 (𝜑𝜑𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 )
where,
γp-EV = load factor for vertical earth pressure specified in Table 15-5 (dim.)
γp-ES = load factor for earth surcharge (ES) in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Manual, Table 3.4.1-2
Δσv = vertical soil stress due to concentrated load such as a footing load (ksf)
ΔσH = horizontal stress at reinforcement level resulting from a concentrated
horizontal surcharge load (ksf)
Sv = tributary layer vertical thickness for reinforcement (ft)
Ka = active lateral earth pressure coefficient (dim)
However, the soil failure limit state would also need to be checked for the combined
loading. If superposition principles are used to determine that combined loading, the soil
failure limit state will become excessively conservative for footing load that are typical
for bridges. Therefore, if designing an MSE bridge abutment, due to the high footing load
that is likely, it is best to use the Simplified Method instead to do that design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-2.3 Connection Strength Design
AASHTO (2020) specifies that To is equal to 1.0×Tmax, although To could be significantly
greater or less than Tmax. In the absence of a method based on measured data, the
AASHTO (2020) approach should be used, except that Tmax is determined using the
Stiffness Method. For design purposes, the minimum connection strength required
is compared to the long-term connection strength available.
The reinforcement connection strength limit state equation is as follows:
γp-EVcTo = φcrTacRc (15-E-9)
where,
Tac = nominal long-term reinforcement/facing connection strength per unit of
wall width (kips/ft)
γp-EVc = connection load factor,
Rc = the reinforcement coverage ratio,
φcr = connection resistance factor for rupture or pullout of the reinforcement
at the connection to the wall face, and
To = the reinforcement load at the connection, which is equal to 1.0Tmax,
and Tmax is determined using the Stiffness Method.
For geosynthetic block-faced walls, the reference (short-term) ultimate connection
strength (Tultconn) is determined from straight-line approximations to different ranges of
normal load (or stress) applied to the connection system from the results of a standard
laboratory testing protocol such as ASTM D6638 (2011), hence:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑐𝑐𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + 𝑁𝑁 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛
= 𝑐𝑐𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + (𝑏𝑏σ𝑛𝑛 )𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝑐𝑐𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 + (𝑏𝑏[𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏 × 𝑧𝑧])𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑛φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 (15-E-10)
where,
cconn = the vertical axis intercept (e.g., units of kips/ft) on a plot of connection
capacity versus normal load N (e.g., units of kips/ft) or stress σn (in ksf)
acting at the connection due to the facing column,
b = toe to heel dimension of the block,
γbk = the unit weight of the infilled block,
z = the depth of the connection below the crest of the wall (assuming the
wall is vertical), and
φconn = the slope of the failure envelope line segment.
Page 15-E-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
For many systems, the line segment for the normal load of interest may be horizontal
(hence, cconn > 0 and φconn = 0) (Bathurst and Simac 1993).
Tac is determined as follows:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ×𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷
(15-E-11)
where,
Tult = minimum average roll value (MARV) ultimate tensile strength of soil
reinforcement (kips/ft)
CRcr = long-term connection strength reduction factor to account for reduced
ultimate strength resulting from connection (dim.)
RFD = reduction factor to prevent rupture of reinforcement due to chemical
and biological degradation (dim.)
CRcr is determined using RFCR to reduce the short-term (i.e., ultimate) connection strength
Tultconn to account for creep of the geosynthetic at the connection, or it may be based on
long-term connection creep tests. If connection creep tests are not conducted, CRcr shall
be based on short-term connection tests and shall be determined as follows:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = (𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 )
(15-E-12)
where,
Tultconn = nominal short-term connection strength (lbs/ft)
RFCR = strength reduction factor to prevent long-term creep rupture of
reinforcement (dim.)
Tlot = ultimate wide width tensile strength (ASTM D4595 or D6637) of the
geosynthetic material used in the connection tests (lbs/ft)
If traffic live load is present and treated as an equivalent uniformly distributed surface
pressure, then the minimum Tac required is:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 𝛾𝛾𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝛾𝛾𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (required) = ≥ � � �𝑇𝑇𝑜𝑜 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 � � 𝑆𝑆 𝐾𝐾 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 �
(𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 × 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ) 𝜑𝜑𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝛾𝛾𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑣𝑣 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ 𝑔𝑔 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑐𝑐
(15-E-13)
The value of Tult to satisfy this requirement is therefore:
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) =
𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢
𝛾𝛾𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 × 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝛾𝛾𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
≥� �� � �𝑇𝑇𝑜𝑜 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 � � 𝑆𝑆 𝐾𝐾 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 𝛷𝛷 �
𝜑𝜑𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢 𝛾𝛾𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑣𝑣 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎� 𝑔𝑔 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑐𝑐
(15-E-14)
All variables are defined previously. For other types of connections, minor modifications
to these equations may be needed; see AASHTO (2020) for guidance on handling other
facing connection systems.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-9
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-2.4 Pullout Resistance Limit State Design
The following equations are used for the pullout resistance limit state to estimate the
required reinforcement length in the anchorage zone beyond the active zone boundary:
γp-EVTmax = φpoPc (15-E-15)
where,
Pc = nominal calculated pullout resistance, and
φpo = resistance factor applicable to pullout resistance.
Other variables are defined previously.
Pc is calculated as:
Pc = C(F*α)σvLeRc (15-E-16)
where,
Le = anchorage length,
F* and α = dimensionless parameters based on reinforcement type,
σv = vertical stress acting on the reinforcement layer anchorage length, and
C = reinforcement surface geometry factor (set at 2 for strip, grid and sheet-
type reinforcement).
Details how to determine α and F*, vertical stress σv, and anchorage length Le behind the
active zone are provided in AASHTO (2020), Article 11.10.6.3.2.
Page 15-E-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-2.5 Design Process for the Stiffness Method
Figure 15-E-1 illustrates the design process for the Stiffness Method, for geosynthetic
walls (Allen and Bathurst 2018).
Figure 15-E-1 Design flowchart for the Stiffness Method for geosynthetic walls
Figure 15-E-1 applies to internal stability Service and Strength Limit State design.
If seismic design is required, seismic forces are considered outside of the Stiffness
Method using superposition principles. See Section 15-E-3 for doing seismic design
for internal stability.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-11
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-3 Seismic Internal Stability Design when Using the Stiffness
Method
The calculation of Tmax using the Stiffness Method (Equation 15-E-1) is also applicable
for seismic design. Tmd, the incremental dynamic inertia force per reinforcement layer,
must be added to Tmax to determine the total reinforcement load for each layer during
seismic loading.
Tmd is calculated in accordance with Article 11.10.7.2 of AASHTO (2020). For
convenience, the equations needed are as follows:
𝑃𝑃
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = � 𝑛𝑛𝑖𝑖� (15-E-17)
where,
Pi = internal inertia force due to the weight of backfill within the active zone,
i.e., the shaded area in AASHTO (2020) Figure 11.10.7.2-1 (kips/ft)
n = total number of reinforcement layers in the wall at a specific wall section
(dim)
kh is dependent on the amount of horizontal movement of the reinforced soil mass during
shaking that is allowed to occur or that will occur. Typically, if the wall is allowed to slide
1 to 2 inches, kh can be assumed equal to 0.5As, and As is equal to PGA x Fpga. Fpga is the
site factor at a period of 0 seconds, and depends on the site class and the peak ground
acceleration (PGA). See Table 6-4 in Chapter 6 of the GDM for values of Fpga.
If it is acceptable to allow more horizontal deformation during shaking (see GDM
Section 15-4.10), kh may be calculated as follows (AASHTO 2020):
𝐴𝐴 0.25
𝑘𝑘ℎ = 0.74𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 � 𝑠𝑠 � (15-E-18)
𝑑𝑑
where,
kh = horizontal seismic acceleration coefficient (dim)
As = earthquake ground acceleration coefficient as specified in Equation
3.10.4.2-2 in AASHTO (2020)
d = lateral wall displacement (in.)
Alternative formulations that may be used to estimate kh as a function of wall
displacement are provided in AASHTO (2020), specifically Appendix A11, Article A11.5.
Free-standing MSE walls may be designed to slide laterally up to 8 inches during
earthquake shaking, provided that whatever is located above the wall can tolerate that
amount of movement, and assuming that no collapse is the seismic performance
objective for the wall.
Page 15-E-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Pi is determined as follows:
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 = 𝑘𝑘ℎ � 𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 × 𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 𝑇𝑇𝑓𝑓 × 𝐻𝐻� (15-E-19)
where,
γr = unit weight of soil in reinforced backfill (kcf)
Aactive = area of MSE reinforced backfill within active zone, plus soil surcharge
above active zone as shown in Figure 11.10.7.2-1 in AASHTO (2020) (ft2)
γfacing = unit weight of structural facing or modular block facing (kcf)
Tf = thickness of facing, or for modular blocks, Wu (ft)
H = wall height at face (ft)
For thin or otherwise light weight facing elements, the weight of the facing may be
ignored for this calculation.
The total load per reinforcement layer during seismic shaking, Ttotalf, is then calculated
using superposition as follows:
𝑇𝑇𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑎𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) (15-E-20)
where,
γseis = Extreme Event I load factor for reinforcement load due dead load plus
seismically induced reinforcement load (dim)
Note that the reason γseis = 1.0 for both the static and dynamic portions of the load is that
a significantly higher probability of failure is targeted due to the fact that the load has a
small likelihood of occurring and also that some damage is acceptable during seismic
loading. The Strength Limit State load factors are significantly greater than 1.0 because
the probability of failure targeted is much lower, and significant damage due to the static
loading is to be prevented by the design.
For seismic pullout design, Ttotalf is used. However, for reinforcement rupture and
connection rupture under seismic loading, the static and dynamic components of the
reinforcement load must be handled separately. The reason for this is that the strength
required to resist Tmax must include the effects of creep because it is a sustained load, but
the strength required to resist Tmd should not include the effects of creep due to the
transient nature of Tmd. See AASHTO (2020) for additional details.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-13
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-3.1 Reinforcement Rupture (Extreme Event I - Seismic)
The ultimate tensile strength of the reinforcement is determined by summing together
the portion needed to resist the static force (i.e., Tmax) and the portion needed to resist
the dynamic portion (i.e., Tmd). Therefore,
Tult = Srs + Srt (15-E-21)
where,
Srs = ultimate reinforcement tensile resistance required to resist static load
component (kips/ft)
Srt = ultimate reinforcement tensile resistance required to resist dynamic
load component (kips/ft)
For the static component,
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑓𝑓 = (15-E-22)
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
Again, Tmax is determined using the Stiffness Method.
For the dynamic component,
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑡𝑡 = φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
(15-E-23)
where,
γseis = the Extreme Event I load factor for reinforcement load due to dead load
plus seismically induced reinforcement load (dim.)
φ = resistance factor for combined static/earthquake loading from Article
11.5.8 (dim.)
Rc = reinforcement coverage ratio specified in Article 11.10.6.4.1 (dim.)
RF = combined strength reduction factor to account for potential long-term
degradation due to installation damage, creep, and chemical aging
specified in Article 11.10.6.4.3b (dim.)
RFID = strength reduction factor to account for installation damage to
reinforcement specified in Article 11.10.6.4.3b (dim.)
RFD = strength reduction factor to prevent rupture of reinforcement due to
chemical and biological degradation specified in Article 11.10.6.4.3b
(dim.)
Page 15-E-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-3.2 Connection Rupture (Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Similarly, the approach used for reinforcement rupture during seismic shaking is also used
for connection rupture.
Tult = Srsc + Srtc (15-E-24)
where,
Srsc = ultimate reinforcement tensile resistance required to resist static load
component at connection (kips/ft)
Srtc = ultimate reinforcement tensile resistance required to resist dynamic
load component at connection (kips/ft)
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙 = 𝑅𝑅𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
(15-E-25)
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑡𝑡𝑙𝑙 = 𝑅𝑅𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
(15-E-26)
where,
γseis = the Extreme Event I load factor for reinforcement load due to dead load
plus seismically induced reinforcement load (dim)
T0 = applied load to reinforcement at facing connection (kip/ft)
RFD = reduction factor to prevent rupture of reinforcement due to chemical
and biological degradation specified in Article 11.10.6.4.4b (dim.)
φ = resistance factor applicable to seismic loading, typically 1.0 (dim.)
CRcr = long-term connection strength reduction factor to account for reduced
ultimate strength resulting from connection, equal to CRu/RFCR or
Tcrc/Tlot, in which Tcrc is the creep limited connection strength at the
desired design life if the creep limited connection strength is determined
directly from the connection creep test data (dim.)
Rc = reinforcement coverage ratio from Article 11.10.6.4.1 (dim.)
Tmd = factored incremental dynamic inertia force (kip/ft)
CRu = short-term reduction factor to account for reduced ultimate strength
resulting from connection as specified in AASHTO (2020) Article
C11.10.6.4.4b, equal to Tultconn/Tlot (dim.)
Fr = reduction factor to account for reduced friction during shaking between
facing blocks and geosynthetic reinforcement (equal to 0.8 if the
connection relies primarily on friction, or 1.0 if the connection is
structural, i.e., does not rely on friction)
15-E-3.3 Pullout (Extreme Event I - Seismic)
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑖𝑖𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 +𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 )
𝐿𝐿𝑙𝑙 = φ𝐶𝐶(0.8α𝑅𝑅 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
(15-E-27)
where,
γseis = the Extreme Event I load factor for reinforcement load due to dead load
plus seismically induced reinforcement load (dim)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-15
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-4 Summary of MSE Wall Internal Stability Design Steps for
Geosynthetic Walls Using the Stiffness Method
1. Establish wall geometry (height, surcharge, minimum width of reinforced soil zone
to satisfy external stability, face batter), and select facing type
2. Establish soil backfill properties (φ, c, γ)
3. Develop preliminary wall reinforcement layout (Sv and Sh)
4. Calculate active earth pressure coefficient for reinforced zone
5. Calculate reinforcement load for each layer, Tmax, using the creep stiffness required
in each layer to meet Service Limit state requirements (i.e., the soil failure limit
state) as a starting point
6. Calculate long-term tensile strength needed for each layer, Tal, for Strength Limit
state, starting with creep stiffness values determined from Step 5
a. Reinforcement rupture: φ𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≥ 𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
b. Connection rupture: φ𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≥ 𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇0
c. In both cases, select geosynthetic reinforcement products with consideration
to long-term strength reduction factors applicable to each product (i.e., RFID,
RFCR, and RFD) and with consideration to the long-term connection strength
available considering the block-geosynthetic combinations available
7. Calculate reinforcement length needed, La + Le, for pullout, Strength Limit State
8. Calculate long-term strength needed for Extreme Event I Limit state (seismic
design)
a. Ttotalf = γseis(Tmax + Tmd)
b. Reinforcement rupture
c. Connection rupture
d. In both cases, select geosynthetic reinforcement products with consideration
to long-term strength reduction factors applicable to each product (i.e., RFID
and RFD, as RFCR not important for seismic loading) and with consideration to
the connection strength available considering the block-geosynthetic
combinations available
e. Pullout
9. If the connection strength is low and/or if the seismic acceleration is high and
controls the reinforcement design with regard to strength and stiffness required,
recalculate Tmax using the increased stiffness required and recheck all limit states
10. Check compound stability (Tal and reinforcement length needed, both Strength and
Extreme Event I limits)
Page 15-E-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
A series of 20 ft tall wall design examples are provided in the sections that follow
to illustrate these design steps for various cases. These design examples include:
1. Flexible face wall, coverage ratio, Rc, of 1.0,
2. Modular block face wall, coverage ratio, Rc, of 1.0, mechanical facing-reinforcement
connection; same as Example 1 but with stiff, rather than flexible, facing,
3. Modular block face wall, coverage ratio, Rc, of 0.9, mechanical facing-reinforcement
connection; same as Example 2 except coverage ratio is less than 1.0 to illustrate how
the coverage ratio is addressed in design,
4. Modular block face wall, coverage ratio, Rc, of 0.9, frictional facing-reinforcement
connection (proprietary wall system); same as Example 3 except that the facing
reinforcement is frictional rather than mechanical, and
5. Flexible face wall, coverage ratio, Rc, of 1.0; same as Example 1, partial example
to illustrate the effect of backfill cohesion, and how cohesion should, and should
not be, handled in wall design.
15-E-5 Stiffness Method Design Example 1: Flexible Faced
Geosynthetic Wall
15-E-5.1 General
This first example is a simple design case. Subsequent examples will add features that
increase in complexity to illustrate how various scenarios are handled when using the
Stiffness Method.
Figure 15-E-2 shows a cross-section of the wall for this design example, and material
properties are provided in Table 15-E-3. Assume for this example that polyester (PET)
geogrid will be used for the soil reinforcement. Assume a flexible facing will be used
(e.g., welded wire baskets, or just a geosynthetic wrap facing). Assume that the
connection between the geogrid and the facing is not an issue (i.e., the connection
strength is 100% efficient) – while this may not be the case for welded wire baskets as
shown, it will be the case for a wrapped face wall. So this assumption is made in this
example to focus on the simplest case for illustration purposes. The wall backfill is
assumed to be a well-graded gravelly sand, with no cohesion. The scope of this design
example is limited to the service (soil failure limit only), strength, and Extreme Event I
(seismic) limit states. Furthermore, for simplicity, live loads are not included in the
calculations to follow. It is also assumed that the foundation soil has sufficient shear
strength to prevent global instability, bearing capacity failure and excessive settlement.
For seismic design, assume that the ground acceleration, As, is 0.50g.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-17
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Note that a 2 ft vertical spacing of the reinforcement is used for this example. Normally,
for a wrapped face geosynthetic wall, a vertical spacing of 2 ft is too large to keep face
bulging, overall lateral deformation, and possibly vertical deformation, under control and
is likely marginally too large even for a welded wire flexible faced wall. This spacing is
being used in this example to facilitate comparisons with the stiff (dry cast concrete
blocks) faced wall examples provided subsequent to this example. Also, a reinforcement
coverage ratio, Rc, of 1.0 is used for this example. Also note that if a wrapped face
geosynthetic wall is part of a two-stage wall system in which a concrete wall facing is
added after the post-construction wall movement has ceased (e.g., the WSDOT Standard
Plan geosynthetic wall), it is still designed as a flexible faced wall, since the more rigid
concrete facia is added after the wrapped face wall is constructed.
Table 15-E-3 Design properties for wall
Property Design Value
Moist soil unit weight (pcf) 130
Triaxial drained peak friction angle φtx (°) 34
Min. available, but not wall system specific,
8.6 × 1.0 = 8.6
1,000 hr, 2% secant Ji x Rc (kips/ft)
RFID RFCR RFD = RF 1.12x1.5x1.3 = 2.18
Coverage ratio, Rc 1.0
1.0 (i.e., 2 baskets between
Facing welded wire basket height (ft)
reinforcement layers)
Facing welded wire basket width, Wu (face to tail) (ft) 1.0
Connection strength as fraction of Tult, CRu 1.0
In Table 15-E-3, and all subsequent uses, Ji is defined as the geosynthetic product secant
creep stiffness at 1,000 hrs and 2% strain, per unit of reinforcement width. When Ji is
multiplied by Rc, the resulting stiffness is per unit of wall width rather than per unit of
reinforcement width.
Page 15-E-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-2 Wall geometry and preliminary PET reinforcement layout for Design
Example 1
Since, for this example, the wall is designed assuming that the wall face is flexible,
Φfs = 1.0. It is assumed that the design can be completely generic (e.g., the WSDOT
Standard Plan Geosynthetic wall). For this flexible wall face example, connection strength
is assumed to not be a consideration, so either reinforcement stiffness or reinforcement
rupture will likely control the design.
The wall geometry is based on Figure 15-E-2. Example calculations are demonstrated for
one of the middle layers (i.e., Layer 6 in Figure 15-E-2, and for the soil failure and pullout
limit states, Layer 10 is also used to illustrate calculations).
S = equivalent uniform height of surcharge = 0 ft
Kavh = Ka = (1 – sin φr)/(1 + sin φr) = (1 – sin 34°)/(1 + sin 34°) = 0.283
For walls with a facing batter ω > 0, the formula below is used to compute Kabh which
appears in the facing batter factor equation (Φfb). Since the wall in this example is vertical
(ω = 0), Kabh = Kavh as shown here:
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐2 �φ𝑟𝑟 +𝜔𝜔� 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐2 (34𝑜𝑜 +0)
𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ = 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠φ𝑟𝑟 2
= 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠34𝑜𝑜
2 = 0.283
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3 𝜔𝜔�1+ � 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐3 0�1+ �
cos 𝜔𝜔 cos 0
The reinforcement stiffness values used in the calculations to follow need to be adjusted
to account for the reinforcement coverage ratio, Rc. However, for this simple example,
Rc is assumed to be 1.0, which is the typical case for flexible faced walls anyway.
Since the soil failure limit state usually controls the amount of reinforcement required,
this limit state is evaluated first, and Tmax calculated, for the wall design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-19
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-5.2 Calculations for Soil Failure Limit State Design (Service I)
The goal of this limit state is to ensure that the factored reinforcement strain in each
layer is less than the target maximum strain in the wall required to prevent a contiguous
shear surface through the backfill soil from developing (i.e., soil failure limit state). The
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (AASHTO 2020) require that the factored
reinforcement peak strain for each layer be 2.5% or less for a flexible faced wall. Some
trial-and-error is typically required to establish what reinforcement stiffness values are
required. As a first trial, use the minimum 1,000-hour 2% strain secant stiffness available
for geosynthetic reinforcement products, Ji = 8.6 kips/ft for all layers (see Table 15-E-3).
Note that the creep stiffness and strength for specific products are available in the
WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL) Appendix E. Alternatively, this data can be
obtained from NTPEP (2019) at the AASHTO NTPEP website
(https://data.ntpep.org/REGEO/Products), and once there, click on “Construction” and
then “Geosynthetic Reinforcement”. In addition, Allen and Bathurst (2019) summarize all
the NTPEP low strain 1,000 hour creep stiffness data available at that time, additional
creep stiffness data found in the literature, and generic relationships between Tult and the
1,000 hour 2% secant creep stiffness for various geosynthetic reinforcement
product types.
The contributing factors, coefficients and parameters that comprise the Tmax equation
can be found in Allen and Bathurst (2015) and Table 15-E-1. To calculate Tmax, the
reinforcement stiffness must be per unit of wall width rather than per unit of
reinforcement product width; hence, RcJi must be used where the reinforcement stiffness
value is required. Therefore, the parameters used to determine Tmax are calculated
as follows:
𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
ave
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = 𝐻𝐻
= (10 × 1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft)/20 ft = 4.30 ksf
(applies to whole wall section)
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
� = 0.16 × (4.30 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.193 (applies to whole wall section)
𝐾𝐾 𝑑𝑑
𝛷𝛷𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = �𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ � = (0.283/0.283)0.4 = 1.0 (applies to whole wall section)
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ
𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 4.30 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.69 + 8 × 4.30 + 5.15
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 4.32 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is calculated as
follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
4.30 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.00 (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 4.32 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Page 15-E-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
The facing stiffness factor Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 is equal to 1.0, since the facing is considered flexible.
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax is determined for Layer 6 as follows:
zb = Ch × (H)y ×Φfb = (0.32× (20 ft)1.2) × 1.0 = 11.65 ft
For z ≤ zb: Dtmax = Dtmax0 + (z/zb) × (1− Dtmax0) = 0.12 + (9.33 ft/11.65 ft) × (1− 0.12) = 0.825
For bottom layers where z > zb: Dtmax = 1.0
Tmax for layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283 × 1.0
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 0.193 × 1.0 × 1.0 × 1.0
Tmax = 0.233 kips/ft of wall width
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to layer 10 is computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.067
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.94% ≤ 2.5% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.233
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 3.25% ≤ 2.5% 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁.
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tmax, and the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-4 for the rest of the layers. As can be seen in the table and the calculations
above, the calculated factored strains are greater than 2.5% in the lower half of the wall,
which exceeds the soil failure limit state strain criterion provided in AASHTO (2020) of
2.5% for flexible faced walls.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-21
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-4 Summary of Example 1 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method considering only the Service Limit State, first trial
using only the minimum stiffness geogrid product available.
+
Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters Soil Failure Limit State
Factore #
Tal
Layer *RcJi Sglobal Slocal +
Tmax (kips/ft)
z (ft) Sv (ft) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs d εrein Corresponding
Number (kips/ft) (ksf) (ksf) (Equation 15-E-1)
(%) to Ji (kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 8.6 4.30 3.69 0.220 N/A 0.193 0.92 1.0 1.0 0.067 0.94 0.67
9 3.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.372 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.105 1.46 0.67
8 5.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.523 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.147 2.06 0.67
7 7.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.674 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.190 2.65 0.67
6 9.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.825 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.233 3.25 < 2.5% 0.67
5 11.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.976 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.275 3.84 (No; 0.67
4 13.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.282 3.94 must 0.67
increase
3 15.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.282 3.94 0.67
stiffness)
2 17.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 N/A 0.193 1.00 1.0 1.0 0.282 3.94 0.67
1 19.33 1.67 8.6 4.30 5.15 1.00 N/A 0.193 1.09 1.0 1.0 0.258 3.60 0.67
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.12 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 6.70
Wall
*Minimum stiffness needed to meet only the soil failure limit, considering all available geosynthetic reinforcement products.
+
All values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product MARV tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., load per unit of reinforcement width basis).
Page 15-E-22 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
To keep the peak reinforcement strains to less than 2.5% so that the soil failure
limit state is met, the design stiffness values need to be increased. Through trial-
and-error, the minimum stiffness values needed to keep the peak strains below
2.5% are as shown in Table 15-E-5.
Table 15-E-5 Creep stiffness values (i.e., at 2% strain and 1,000 h) for
geogrids used in wall
Layer Geogrid Ji (per Unit Width of *Rc x Ji (per Unit Width of
No. Designation Reinforcement, in kips/ft) Wall, in kips/ft)
10 a 8.6 8.6
9 a 8.6 8.6
8 a 8.6 8.6
7 a 8.6 8.6
6 b 17.0 17.0
5 b 17.0 17.0
4 b 17.0 17.0
3 b 17.0 17.0
2 b 17.0 17.0
1 b 17.0 17.0
*This is the stiffness value which has been corrected for Rc to calculate Tmax. Since Rc =
1.0, this stiffness is the same as the stiffness per unit of reinforcement width.
The input parameters to calculate Tmax are recalculated as follows using the
revised stiffness values:
ave 𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = 𝐻𝐻
= (4 × 1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft + 6 × 1.0 × 17.0 kips/ft)/20 ft = 6.82 ksf
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � � = 0.16 × (6.82 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.217
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
𝐾𝐾 𝑑𝑑
𝛷𝛷𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = �𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ � = (0.283/0.283)0.4 = 1.0
𝑎𝑎𝑣𝑣ℎ
𝑅𝑅 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � 𝑐𝑐 � = (1.0 × 17.0 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 8.50 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.65 + 3 × 4.25 + 5 × 8.50 + 10.2
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 6.91 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is calculated
as follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
8.5 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.11 (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6.91 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-23
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
For a flexible wall face, the facing stiffness factor is assumed to be 1.0.
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax does not change relative to the previous calculation (i.e., Dtmax for Layer 6 is
0.825).
Tmax for Layer 6 is re-calculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑓𝑓 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 1.0 × 0.217 × 1.0 × 1.11 × 1.0
Tmax = 0.292 kips/ft
Tmax, and the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-6 for the rest of the layers.
15-E-5.3 Calculations for Soil Failure Limit State Design
(Service I)
Using Equation 15-14, with load factor γsf = 1.2 and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to Layer 10 is
computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.060
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.83% ≤ 2.5% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For Layer 6, using the revised layer stiffness values:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.292
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 2.06% ≤ 2.5% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 17.0
𝑘𝑘𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
See Table 15-E-6 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers. As can be
seen in the table, the new (increased) stiffness values are adequate to meet the
soil failure limit criterion for all layers.
To estimate the equivalent tensile strength that corresponds to the stiffness
values needed to meet the soil failure limit state criterion of 2.5% strain
maximum, use the relationships provided in Allen and Bathurst (2019), or
alternatively use the product line specific relationships provided in NTPEP (2019,
or most current values). Allen and Bathurst (2019) recommend the following
generic relationship between creep stiffness and ultimate tensile strength
for geogrids:
Tult = 0.17Ji (15-E-28)
Page 15-E-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
For the two stiffness values required to meet the soil failure limit state, the
approximate ultimate tensile strength per ft of wall width needed is:
Tult = 0.17 x (8.6 kips/ft) = 1.46 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tult = 0.17 x (17.0 kips/ft) = 2.89 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
To determine Tal, divide Tult by RF = 1.12 x 1.5 x 1.3 = 2.18
Therefore, the approximate long-term tensile strengths implied by the stiffness
required for the soil failure limit state for the reinforcement product (i.e., per ft of
reinforcement product width) are:
Tal = (1.46 kips/ft)/2.18 = 0.67 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tal = (2.89 kips/ft)/2.18 = 1.32 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
15-E-5.4 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture Limit State
(Strength I)
Since no live load is present, the required long-term reinforcement strength (Tal)
for Layer 6 is computed using Equation 15-E-5, solving for Tal.
The minimum required value of reinforcement product Tal and Tult, on a strength
per reinforcement width basis, for Layer 6 is therefore:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.35 × 0.292 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≥ = = 0.49
φ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 0.80 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 = 0.49 × 1.12 × 1.5 × 1.3 = 1.07
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For layer 6, Tal for reinforcement rupture is less than Tal needed to achieve the
stiffness required for the soil failure limit state (i.e., 0.49 kips/ft << 1.32 kips/ft).
Therefore, the soil failure limit state controls the design. See Table 15-E-6 for the
calculation results for the rest of the layers.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-25
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-5.5 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Strength I)
The default pullout parameters α and F* specified in AASHTO (2020) are used for
this example design. For geosynthetic reinforcement, α = 0.8 and F* = 0.67×tan φ.
Since the design φ = 34o, F* = 0.67 × tan 34o = 0.452.
The vertical stress, σv, over the reinforcement anchorage length, Le, can be
approximated as:
σv = zγr + Ssurγf (15-E-29)
Where,
z = depth of the reinforcement layer below the wall top,
Ssur = surcharge height directly above the active zone/resistant zone
boundary at the layer,
γr = unit weight of reinforced soil backfill, and
γf = unit weight of surcharge soil.
Note that the AASHTO (2020) specifications allow the vertical stress to be
calculated at the mid-point of Le relative to the soil surface immediately above the
layer at that location. Equation 15-E-29 is a simpler and slightly conservative
version of this calculation (for design). Since pullout is usually most critical near
the wall top, this example pullout calculation is carried out for Layer 10.
Therefore, for Layer 10, the vertical stress used for the pullout calculation is:
σv = (1.33 ft)(0.13 kcf) + (0)( 0.13 kcf) = 0.173 ksf
Combining equations 15-E-15 and 15-E-16 and solving for Le, the required
factored length of reinforcement in the resistant zone (i.e., behind the active
wedge) is:
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = (15-E-30)
φ𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐶𝐶(α𝐹𝐹 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
Where,
C = an overall reinforcement surface geometry factor (set at 2 for
strip, grid and sheet type reinforcements).
As before, Rc = 1.0 and all other parameters and their values have been defined
earlier. For layer 10:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
1.35 × 0.060
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = = 0.925 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.70 × 2(0.8 × 0.452)(0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘)1.0
Page 15-E-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
To determine the total reinforcement length needed, L, the length of
reinforcement within the active zone, La, must be calculated. For geosynthetic
walls, the active zone is assumed to be bounded by the Rankine active zone
(wedge), illustrated in Figure 15-E-2. La is calculated as follows for a vertical wall
(at layer 10):
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
The minimum length allowed for Le is 3 ft (AASHTO 2020), which is greater than
the calculated Le required for pullout for layer 10. Therefore, using Le = 3 ft, the
total reinforcement length required for layer 10 is:
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 3 ft = 12.9 ft
Pullout calculation results for the other layers are summarized in Table 15-E-6.
It should be recalled that the minimum length of reinforcement for typical
reinforced soil walls is 0.7H = 0.7×(20 ft) = 14 ft. Therefore, pullout does not
control the reinforcement length required. Note that other limit state design
calculations can result in greater reinforcement length, such as external stability
(e.g., sliding) or global stability.
15-E-5.6 Calculations for Determination of Tmax + Tmd
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
The calculation of Tmax as described and carried out earlier in this example using
the Stiffness Method is also applicable for seismic design. Tmd, the incremental
dynamic inertia force per reinforcement layer, must be added to Tmax using
superposition to determine the total reinforcement load for each layer during
seismic loading.
Tmd is calculated using equations 15-E-17 through 15-E-19 as follows:
As = PGA x Fpga = 0.50g
(Note: the site PGA and Fpga is determined from seismic maps provided in GDM
Chapter 6; for this example the value of As has been arbitrarily picked for
illustration purposes, as this example is not for a specific site).
Assume a maximum lateral deflection of 2 inches is allowed/anticipated. Using
Equation 15-E-18, kh is determined as follows:
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 0.25 0.50 0.25
𝑘𝑘ℎ = 0.74𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 � � = 0.74 × 0.50𝑔𝑔 × � � = 0.262𝑔𝑔
𝑑𝑑 2
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-27
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
The inertial force, Pi, is calculated using Equation 15-E-19 as follows:
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 = 𝑘𝑘ℎ � 𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 × 𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 𝑇𝑇𝑓𝑓 × 𝐻𝐻� = 0.262 × �0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.5 ×
34𝑜𝑜 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
�20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 �45𝑜𝑜 − �� × 20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 0.0 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓� = 3.62
2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
And therefore, Tmd is calculated using Equation 15-E-17 as shown below:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 3.62 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =� �= = 0.362
𝑛𝑛 10 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Note that the weight of any facing was not included in this calculation. If the
facing is welded wire, the additional weight would be insignificant. If a second
stage concrete facia is added, the weight of that facing should be included in the
determination of Tmd.
The load factor used for Extreme Event I (seismic) is equal to 1.0, and is applied to
both the static portion and dynamic portion of the loading, as the probability of
failure used for this limit state is much higher than what is used for the Strength
Limit state. The use of a higher probability of failure is due to the low probability
of occurrence of this load combination as well as greater tolerance for
deformation and damage allowed, simply targeting no collapse for life safety. The
total load per reinforcement layer during seismic shaking, Ttotalf, is then calculated
using superposition (Equation 15-E-20) as follows, for Layer 6):
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) = 1.0 �0.292 + 0.362 � = 0.654
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For seismic pullout design, Ttotalf is used. However, for reinforcement rupture and
connection rupture under seismic loading, the static and dynamic components of
the reinforcement load must be handled separately. The reason for this is that the
strength required to resist Tmax must include the effects of creep because it is a
sustained load, but the strength required to resist Tmd should not include the
effects of creep due to the transient nature of Tmd.
Page 15-E-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-5.7 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-21, 15-E-22, and 15-E-23, Tult for static portion of load at
Layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 1.0 × 0.292 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 2.18 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.636
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult for dynamic portion of load at Layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.362 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 1.12 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.527
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Therefore, the minimum required strength per unit width of reinforcement is as
follows:
Tult = Srs + Srt = 0.636 kips/ft + 0.527 kips/ft = 1.16 kips/ft
Tal = 1.16 kips/ft/2.18 = 0.532 kips/ft
For the soil failure limit in the Service Limit State, Tal that corresponds to the
stiffness needed is 1.32 kips/ft >> 0.532 kips/ft. Therefore, the soil failure limit is
still controlling the reinforcement design.
15-E-5.8 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-27 and 15-E-29, Le for Layer 10 (i.e., at the wall top) is
determined as follows:
σv = zγr + Ssurγf
σv = (1.33 ft)(0.13 kcf) + (0)( 0.13 kcf) = 0.173 ksf
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) 1.0 �0.060 + 0.362 �
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = =
φ𝐶𝐶(0.8α𝐹𝐹 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 2 × (0.8 × 0.8 × 0.452) × 0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 1.0
Le = 4.21 ft
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 4.21 ft = 14.1 ft
See Table 15-E-6 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers with regard
to pullout length required.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-29
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-5.9 Calculations to Check to Make Sure Stiffness and
Strength Required are Properly Matched
(Extreme Event I, Seismic)
If a substantial increase in tensile strength is required to achieve internal stability
for Strength Limit or Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit loading, the stiffness needed
to obtain the increased tensile strength required must be determined, Tmax
recalculated, and all limit states recalculated. However, the tensile strength
needed for strength and seismic limit design did not increase relative to what was
required for the Service limit state. Therefore, no recalculations are required in
this case.
15-E-5.10 Results of Example 1 Design Calculations
These calculation results for the Stiffness Method are summarized in Table
15-E-6, and are plotted and compared to design calculation results using the
Simplified Method in figures 15-E-3, 15-E-4, and 15-E-5.
In summary, for the final internal stability design for Example 1, the following
would be specified with regard to reinforcement properties and spacing for the
optimized design, and the following observations can be made:
• The vertical spacing of reinforcements is 2 ft throughout the wall height, and
the coverage ratio is a minimum of 1.0. Again, this large a spacing is used in
this example to facilitate making direct comparisons with the examples that
follow easier.
• The minimum reinforcement length for internal stability (i.e., pullout) is 14 ft
for the Strength Limit, and all layers except the top layer for seismic design
did not exceed this minimum length for both Tmax methods. The top layer
length required is 14.1 ft for seismic design for the Stiffness Method (slightly
less than this for the Simplified Method), which is slightly greater than the
0.7H minimum. The longer reinforcement length due to pullout is consistent
with good detailing for MSE walls in AASHTO (2020) LRFD Article 11.10.7.4.
• Assuming a PET uniaxial geogrid, to meet reinforcement rupture
requirements, the reinforcement must have a minimum short-term (ultimate)
and long-term (i.e., Tal) tensile strength as tabulated in Table 15-E-6. The
strength and stiffness needed to meet the Soil Failure Limit State controls
the design for all layers. Note that these values are based on strength per
unit of reinforcement width. Final selection of reinforcements result in a total
Tal for the wall section of 10.6 kips/ft for the Stiffness Method and 11.9
kips/ft for the Simplified Method if the minimum strength needed is set at
0.67 kips/ft based on product availability.
• Overall, the required strength and stiffness of the reinforcement needed is in
the low to mid-range of the geogrid product lines available. The Stiffness
Method requires less reinforcement than the Simplified Method in the
bottom portion of the wall, and in this case seismic does not control the
design. The ground acceleration used represents what would be included in
Seismic Zone 4, which is the highest seismic zone.
Page 15-E-30 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-6 Summary of Example 1 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 1.0 (Service, Strength, and Extreme
Event I Limit States): (a) Calculation of Tmax, (b) Service and Strength Limit State calculations, and (c) Extreme Event I
(seismic) Limit State calculations.
Unfactored maximum
a) Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters
reinforcement load
RcJi
Layer Number z (ft) Sv (ft) Sglobal (ksf) Slocal (ksf) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs +
Tmax (kips/ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 8.6 6.82 3.65 0.220 N/A 0.217 0.73 1.0 1.0 0.060
9 3.33 2.00 8.6 6.82 4.25 0.372 N/A 0.217 0.79 1.0 1.0 0.093
8 5.33 2.00 8.6 6.82 4.25 0.523 N/A 0.217 0.79 1.0 1.0 0.131
7 7.33 2.00 8.6 6.82 4.25 0.674 N/A 0.217 0.79 1.0 1.0 0.168
6 9.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 0.825 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292
5 11.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 0.976 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.345
4 13.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.354
3 15.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.354
2 17.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.354
1 19.33 1.67 17.0 6.82 10.2 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.21 1.0 1.0 0.323
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.47
Reinforcement Rupture Soil Failure Pullout
b)
(Strength Limit) (Service Limit) (Strength Limit)
#
Minimum Required Strength #
Tensile Strength Corresponding to Anchorage length
Layer Reinforcement per Unit Width of Reinforcement Reinforcement Stiffness Required Le (ft)
z (ft) Factored εrein (%)
Number Product Tult = Tal × RF Tal Tult = Tal × RF Minimum
Tal (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) (kips/ft) (kips/ft) allowed
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid a 0.10 0.22 0.83 0.67 1.46 0.923
9 3.33 Geogrid a 0.16 0.34 1.30 0.67 1.46 0.575
8 5.33 Geogrid a 0.22 0.48 1.85 0.67 1.46 0.506
7 7.33 Geogrid a 0.29 0.62 2.38 0.67 1.46 0.474
6 9.33 Geogrid b 0.49 1.07 2.06 < 2.5% 1.32 2.89 0.641 < 3.0
5 11.33 Geogrid b 0.58 1.27 2.44 (OK) 1.32 2.89 0.625 (OK)
4 13.33 Geogrid b 0.60 1.30 2.50 1.32 2.89 0.544
3 15.33 Geogrid b 0.60 1.30 2.50 1.32 2.89 0.473
2 17.33 Geogrid b 0.60 1.30 2.50 1.32 2.89 0.418
1 19.33 Geogrid b 0.55 1.19 2.28 1.32 2.89 0.343
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 4.17 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 9.12 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 10.6 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 23.2
wall
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-31
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-6, continued
Summary of Example 1 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 1.0 (Service, Strength, and Extreme
Event I Limit States): (c) Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit State calculations.
Soil Failure (Service Limit, Reinforcement Rupture Pullout
c) for Comparison) (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit)
#
Tensile Strength Tal #
Minimum Required Strength per Unit Anchorage length Total Reinforcement
Layer Corresponding to Width of Reinforcement Leseis (ft) Length (ft)
z (ft)
Number Reinforcement Stiffness Tult = Tal × RF Minimum
Tal (kips/ft) Required (minimum is 0.7H = 14 ft)
Required (kips/ft) (kips/ft) allowed
10 (top) 1.33 0.67 0.30 0.66 4.21 14.1
9 3.33 0.67 0.33 0.73 1.82 < 3.0 10.7
8 5.33 0.67 0.37 0.81 1.23 (No, so 9.0
7 7.33 0.67 0.41 0.90 0.96 pullout 7.7
6 9.33 1.32 0.53 1.16 0.93 controls 6.6
5 11.33 1.32 0.59 1.28 0.83 length, 5.4
4 13.33 1.32 0.59 1.30 0.71 but only 4.3
3 15.33 1.32 0.59 1.30 0.62 at wall 3.1
2 17.33 1.32 0.59 1.30 0.55 top) 2.0
1 19.33 1.32 0.56 1.23 0.47 0.8
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 10.6 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 4.89 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 10.7
wall
+
These values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (AASHTO 2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., load per unit of reinforcement width basis).
*Tmd for all reinforcement layers is 0.362 kips/ft.
Page 15-E-32 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-3 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal stability Figure 15-E-4 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal
design to the Simplified Method design, for stability design to the Simplified Method
Service, Strength, and Extreme Event I (seismic) design, for Extreme Event I (seismic) limit
limit states (Example 1). state, pullout (Example 1).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-33
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-6 Stiffness Method Design Example 2: Block Faced
Geosynthetic Wall with Mechanical Connections, Rc = 1.0
15-E-6.1 General
This second example is also a fairly simple design case. Subsequent examples will
add features that increase in complexity to illustrate how various scenarios are
handled when using the Stiffness Method.
Figure 15-E-5 shows a cross-section of the wall for this design example, and
material properties are provided in Table 15-E-7. The reinforcement coverage
ratio, Rc is set at 1.0. Assume for this example that polyester (PET) geogrid will be
used for the soil reinforcement. Assume dry cast concrete blocks will be used for
the facing. A mechanical facing-geogrid connection will be assumed, so the
connection strength is a constant fraction of the geogrid ultimate tensile strength
and is not affected by the normal force between the blocks in the facing column.
The wall backfill is assumed to be a well-graded gravelly sand, with no cohesion.
The scope of this design example is limited to the service (soil failure limit only),
strength, and Extreme Event I (seismic) limit states. Furthermore, for simplicity,
live loads are not included in the calculations to follow. It is also assumed that the
foundation soil has sufficient shear strength to prevent global instability, bearing
capacity failure and excessive settlement. For seismic design, assume that the
ground acceleration, As, is 0.50g.
Table 15-E-7 Design properties for wall
Property Design Value
Moist soil unit weight (pcf) 130
Triaxial drained peak friction angle φtx (°) 34
Min. available, but not wall system specific,
8.6 × 1.0 = 8.6
1,000 hr, 2% secant Ji x Rc (kips/ft)
RFID RFCR RFD = RF 1.12x1.5x1.3 = 2.18
Coverage ratio, Rc 1.0
Facing block unit weight, γblock (pcf) 120
Facing block height (ft) 0.67
Facing block width, Wu (face to tail) (ft) 1.0
Connection strength as fraction of Tult, CRu 0.75
Page 15-E-34 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-5 Wall geometry and preliminary PET reinforcement layout for
Design Example 2.
The wall geometry is based on Figure 15-E-5. As is true in Example 1, Example 2
calculations are demonstrated for one of the middle layers (i.e., Layer 6 in Figure
15-E-5, and for the soil failure and pullout limit states, Layer 10 is also used to
illustrate calculations).
S = equivalent uniform height of surcharge = 0 ft. Since the wall in this example is
vertical (ω = 0) and is using the same soil as used for Example 1, Kabh = Kavh 0.283,
and Φfb = 1.0.
Since the soil failure limit state usually controls the amount of reinforcement
required, this limit state is evaluated first, and Tmax is calculated, for the
wall design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-35
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-6.2 Calculations for Soil Failure Limit State Design
(Service I)
As is true for Example 1, the goal of this limit state is to ensure that the factored
reinforcement strain in each layer is less than the target maximum strain in the
wall required to prevent a contiguous shear surface through the backfill soil from
developing (i.e., soil failure limit state). The factored reinforcement peak strain for
each layer should be 2.0% or less per AASHTO (2020) for a stiff faced wall such
as the modular block faced wall in this example. Some trial-and-error is typically
required to establish what reinforcement stiffness values are required, starting
with the stiffness values required to meet the soil failure limit, as the soil failure
limit often controls the design of geosynthetic walls. As a first trial, use the
minimum 1,000-hour 2% strain secant stiffness available for geosynthetic
reinforcement products, Ji = 8.6 kips/ft per unit of reinforcement width for all
layers (see Table 15-E-7).
The contributing factors, coefficients and parameters that comprise the Tmax
equation can be found in Allen and Bathurst (2015) and Table 15-E-1. To
calculate Tmax, the reinforcement stiffness must be per unit of wall width rather
than per unit of reinforcement product width; hence, RcJi must be used where the
reinforcement stiffness value is required. Therefore, the parameters used to
determine Tmax are calculated as follows:
𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
ave
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = 𝐻𝐻
= (10 × 1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft)/20 ft = 4.30 ksf (applies
to whole wall section)
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
� = 0.16 × (4.30 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.193 (applies to whole wall
section)
𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎� 𝑑𝑑
𝛷𝛷𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = � � = (0.283/0.283)0.4 = 1.0 (applies to whole wall section)
𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎�
𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (8.6 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 4.30 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆 𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.69 + 8 × 4.30 + 5.15
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 4.32 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is calculated
as follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
4.30 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.00 (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 4.32 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Page 15-E-36 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
To determine the facing stiffness factor, one must first determine the facing
stiffness parameter, Ff. To calculate the facing stiffness parameter Ff, the
equivalent height of an unjointed facing column that is approximately 100%
efficient in transmitting moment through the height of the facing column, heff,
must be determined. Since the facing stiffness factor Φfs is intended to be a single
value for the wall, a single representative value of heff must be selected. Typically,
heff is set equal to the reinforcement vertical spacing in modular block-type
structures since the reinforcement is located at the horizontal joints between
facing units. For blocks that do not have a reinforcement layer at the horizontal
joints, these facings will have better interlock and moment transfer from block to
block. If the reinforcement spacing is non-uniform, the smallest predominate
spacing (e.g., for 3 or more layers) should be used for this calculation. Smaller heff
values will lead to more conservative (safer) design because the facing stiffness
factor will be larger.
In this example, the vertical spacing is reasonably uniform throughout the wall
height at 2.0 ft; thus, heff = 2.0 ft is selected in the calculations to follow. The
facing stiffness parameter Ff is calculated using heff = 2.0 ft, H = 20 ft, Wu = b = 1
ft, and E = 157,000 ksf. This value for E is for dry cast concrete, which has a
typical value of E = 209,000 ksf, but has been reduced here to reflect the non-
uniform cross-section of the facing unit (typical for modular dry cast concrete
blocks). Therefore:
1.5𝐻𝐻 3 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎 1.5(20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)3 (2.11 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘)
𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 = ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = 2 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1.61 (applies to whole wall section)
𝐸𝐸𝑏𝑏3 � � (157,000 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘)(1 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 3 )� �
𝐻𝐻 20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
and the facing stiffness factor is:
κ 0.15
𝑆𝑆𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 4.30 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = η �� 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
� 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 � = 0.57 × ��2.11 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘� × 1.61� = 0.681 (applies to
whole wall section)
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax does not change relative to the previous calculation (i.e., Dtmax for Layer 6 is
0.825).
Tmax for Layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
kips
× 1.0 × 0.193 × 0.681 × 1.00 × 1.0 = 0.159 of wall width
ft
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-37
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to layer 6 is
computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.159
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 2.21% ≤ 2% 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
As shown for Example 1 (Equation 15-E-28), the equivalent ultimate tensile
strength that corresponds to the stiffness values needed to meet the soil failure
limit state is equal to 0.17Ji. For the stiffness value used in this first trial, the
approximate ultimate tensile strength per ft of wall width needed is:
Tult = 0.17 x (8.6 kips/ft) = 1.46 kips/ft (applicable to all layers for first trial)
To determine Tal, divide Tult by RF = 1.12 x 1.5 x 1.3 = 2.18. Therefore, Tal per ft of
wall width and per ft of reinforcement width, since Rc = 1.0, is:
Tal = (1.46 kips/ft)/2.18 = 0.67 kips/ft (applicable to all layers)
Tmax, the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, and the predicted
reinforcement strains for all the layers are summarized in Table 15-E-8 for the
rest of the layers.
As can be seen in the table, the calculated factored strains are greater than 2% in
the lower half of the wall, which exceeds the soil failure limit state strain criterion
of 2% for stiff faced walls. Therefore, the reinforcement stiffness needs to be
increased in the lower half of the wall. Through some trial-and-error, the soil
failure limit state is met for this example using the stiffness values provided in
Table 15-E-9.
Page 15-E-38 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-8 Summary of Example 2 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method considering only the Service Limit State,
first trial using only the minimum stiffness geogrid product available.
+
Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters Soil Failure Limit State
Factore #
Tal
Layer *RcJi Sglobal Slocal +
Tmax (kips/ft)
z (ft) Sv (ft) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs d εrein Corresponding
Number (kips/ft) (ksf) (ksf) (Equation 15-E-1)
(%) to Ji (kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 8.6 4.30 3.69 0.220 1.61 0.193 0.92 1.0 0.681 0.046 0.64 0.67
9 3.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.372 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.071 1.00 0.67
8 5.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.523 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.101 1.40 0.67
7 7.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.674 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.130 1.81 0.67
6 9.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.825 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.159 2.21 < 2.0% 0.67
5 11.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 0.976 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.188 2.62 (No; 0.67
4 13.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.192 2.68 must 0.67
increase
3 15.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.192 2.68 0.67
stiffness)
2 17.33 2.00 8.6 4.30 4.30 1.00 1.61 0.193 1.00 1.0 0.681 0.192 2.68 0.67
1 19.33 1.67 8.6 4.30 5.15 1.00 1.61 0.193 1.09 1.0 0.681 0.176 2.45 0.67
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 1.45 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 6.70
Wall
*Minimum stiffness needed to meet only the soil failure limit, considering all geosynthetic reinforcement products, and not just the specific products available for the wall system (i.e., weaker than
Geogrid A in this example).
+
All values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (AASHTO 2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product MARV tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., load per unit of reinforcement width basis).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-39
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-9 Creep stiffness values (i.e., at 2% strain and 1,000 h) for geogrids
used in wall
Layer Geogrid Ji (per Unit Width of *Rc x Ji (per Unit Width
No. Designation Reinforcement, in kips/ft) of Wall, in kips/ft)
10 a 8.6 8.6
9 a 8.6 8.6
8 a 8.6 8.6
7 a 8.6 8.6
6 b 14.5 14.5
5 b 14.5 14.5
4 b 14.5 14.5
3 b 14.5 14.5
2 b 14.5 14.5
1 b 14.5 14.5
*This is the stiffness value which has been corrected for Rc to calculate Tmax.
Since Rc = 1.0, this stiffness is the same as the stiffness per unit of reinforcement width.
Using the Table 15-E-9 stiffness values, considering a total of 10 layers, Sglobal is
recalculated as:
𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
ave
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = = (4 × 1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft + 6 × 1.0 × 14.5 kips/ft)/20 ft =
𝐻𝐻
6.07 ksf
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � � = 0.16 × (6.07 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.211
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
Slocal is recalculated as:
𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (1.0 × 14.5 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 7.25 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.69 + 3 × 4.30 + 5 × 7.25 + 8.68
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 6.15 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is recalculated
as follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
7.25 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.09 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6.15 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Page 15-E-40 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
To determine the facing stiffness factor, the facing stiffness parameter, Ff does not
change, and the facing stiffness factor is recalculated as:
κ 0.15
𝑆𝑆𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 6.07 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = η �� 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
� 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 � = 0.57 × ��2.11 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘� × 1.61� = 0.718
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax remains unchanged.
Tmax for Layer 6 is now recalculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 1.0 × 0.211 × 0.718 × 1.09 × 1.0
Tmax = 0.199 kips/ft (load per unit of wall width)
Tmax, and the recalculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-10 for the rest of the layers for the Service and Strength limit states.
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to layer 10 is
recomputed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.044
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.62% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.199
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 1.65% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 14.5
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
See Table 15-E-10 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers. Therefore, the
soil failure limit state is met for all the reinforcement layers.
To estimate the equivalent tensile strength that corresponds to the stiffness values
needed to meet the soil failure limit state criterion of 2% strain maximum, use the
relationships provided in Allen and Bathurst (2019), i.e., Tult = 0.17Ji, or alternatively use
the product line specific relationships provided in NTPEP (2019).
For the two stiffness values required to meet the soil failure limit state, the approximate
ultimate tensile strength per unit of wall width to obtain the stiffness needed is:
Tult = 0.17 x (8.6 kips/ft) = 1.46 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tult = 0.17 x (14.5 kips/ft) = 2.47 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
To determine Tal, divide Tult by RF = 1.12 x 1.5 x 1.3 = 2.18
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-41
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Therefore, the approximate long-term tensile strengths implied by the stiffness
required for the soil failure limit state for the reinforcement product (i.e., per unit of
wall width and reinforcement product width, since Rc = 1.0) are:
Tal = (1.46 kips/ft)/2.18 = 0.67 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tal = (2.47 kips/ft)/2.18 = 1.13 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
15-E-6.3 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture Limit State
(Strength I)
Since no live load is present, the required long-term reinforcement strength (Tal) for
Layer 6 is computed using Equation 15-E-5.
The minimum required value of Tal and Tult for Layer 6, on a strength per unit of
reinforcement width basis (i.e., this value is what would be compared to the MARV
of the tensile strength of specific reinforcement products), is therefore:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.35 × 0.199 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≥ = = 0.338
φ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 0.80 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 = 0.338 × 1.12 × 1.5 × 1.3 = 0.737
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For layer 6, Tal for reinforcement rupture is significantly less than Tal needed to
achieve the stiffness required for the soil failure limit state (i.e., 0.338 kips/ft <<
1.13 kips/ft).
15-E-6.4 Calculations for Connection Strength Design
(Strength I)
To determine the minimum tensile strength needed at the connection to the facing,
connection strength data for the facing block – geosynthetic combinations
anticipated are needed. It has been assumed for this example that a mechanical
type connection between the facing blocks and geogrid will be used (i.e., not
dominated by friction).
For the purposes of this example and to be consistent with the approach taken
in the current AASHTO (2020) specifications, the load and resistance factors for
the connection rupture limit state are assigned the same values as those used
for geosynthetic rupture limit state at locations away from the connection
(i.e., γp-EVc = γp-EV =1.35 and φcr = φrr = 0.80), and To = Tmax.
To determine the long-term connection strength available, since a mechanical
connection is used in this example, the connection strength will not be a function of
the normal load on the facing blocks. Expressed as a portion of Tlot, the roll specific
tensile strength for the connection testing, the short-term connection strength
𝑇𝑇
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 = 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢�𝑇𝑇 = 0.75. For this example, it will be assumed that this value of
𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
CRu is applicable for all geogrids (this is likely not the case, but to keep the example
as simple as possible, this assumption is made).
Page 15-E-42 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Equation 15-E-9 is used to calculate the minimum long-term connection strength
needed, Tac(required), which essentially is the factored connection load. For the
purposes of this example and to be consistent with the approach taken in the
current AASHTO (2020) specifications, the load and resistance factors for the
connection rupture limit state are assigned the same values as those used for
geosynthetic rupture limit state at locations away from the connection
(i.e., γp-EVc = γp-EV =1.35 and φcr = φrr = 0.80), and To = Tmax.
Therefore, using the load side of the connection limit state design Equation 15-E-9,
at Layer 6, the factored connection load is calculated as follows:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = �𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 �𝑇𝑇0 = (1.35) × 0.199 = 0.269 of wall width
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
To determine the long-term connection strength available, since a mechanical
connection is used in this example, the connection strength will not be a
function of the normal load on the facing blocks, N. Using the resistance side of
Equation 15-E-9 (i.e., the limit state equation for connection design), and the
equation for Tac (Equation 15-E-11), the available long-term connection strength
available is calculated as follows, assuming that the minimum Tult needed is equal
to the Tult needed to obtain the stiffness required to meet the soil failure limit state:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢
φ𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ×𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ×� �𝑅𝑅
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = φ𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷
(15-E-31)
0.75
0.80×2.47𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘⁄𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓×� �1.0
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 1.3
1.5
= 0.760 kips/ft
0.269 kips/ft < 0.760 kips/ft? OK
Combining Equation 15-E-9 with Equation 15-E-31 and solving for Tult, at layer 6,
can determine the minimum Tult required to just satisfy connection strength
requirements as follows:
𝛾𝛾 1
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � φ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑅𝑅
� 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 � � (15-E-32)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢
1.35 1 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � � × 0.199 × 1.3 × 1.5 � � = 0.873
0.8 × 1.0 0.75 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
On a strength per unit of reinforcement width basis (and also strength per unit of
wall width, since Rc = 1.0), this minimum required geosynthetic Tult of 0.873 kips/ft
is below the Tult value of 2.47 kips/ft (i.e., a Tal = 2.47/2.18 = 1.13 kips/ft) estimated
to provide the needed stiffness for the soil failure limit state. Therefore, the soil
failure limit state is still controlling the tensile strength required at this point
(i.e., only considering the Service and Strength Limit States).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-43
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-6.5 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Strength I)
The default pullout parameters α and F* specified in AASHTO (2020) are used for
this example design and are the same as in Example 1 ( α = 0.8 and F* = 0.452).
The vertical stress, σv, over the reinforcement anchorage length, conservatively
calculated using Equation 15-E-29, is the same as in Example 1 (0.173 ksf). Since
pullout is usually most critical near the wall top, this example pullout calculation is
carried out for Layer 10.
As before, Rc = 1.0. Using Equation 15-E-30, the required factored length of
reinforcement in the resistant zone (i.e., behind the active wedge) for Layer 10 is
calculated as follows:
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 =
φ𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐶𝐶(α𝐹𝐹 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
1.35 × 0.044
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = = 0.678 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.70 × 2(0.8 × 0.452)(0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘)1.0
To determine the total reinforcement length needed, L, the length of reinforcement
within the active zone, La, must be calculated. For geosynthetic walls, the active
zone is assumed to be bounded by the Rankine active zone (wedge). La is calculated
as follows for a vertical wall (at layer 10):
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
The minimum length allowed for Le is 3 ft (AASHTO 2020), which is greater than
the calculated Le required for pullout for layer 10. Therefore, using Le = 3 ft, the
total reinforcement length required for layer 10 is:
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 3 ft = 12.9 ft
Pullout calculation results for the other layers are summarized in Table 15-E-10.
It should be recalled that the minimum length of reinforcement for typical
reinforced soil walls is 0.7H = 0.7×(20 ft) = 14 ft. Therefore, pullout does not
control the reinforcement length required. Note that other limit state design
calculations can result in greater reinforcement length, such as external stability
(e.g., sliding) or global stability.
Page 15-E-44 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-6.6 Calculations for Determination of Tmax + Tmd (Extreme
Event I - Seismic)
The calculation of Tmax as described and carried out earlier in this example using the
Stiffness Method is also applicable for seismic design for the static portion of the
reinforcement load. Tmd, the incremental dynamic inertia force per reinforcement
layer, must be added to Tmax to determine the total reinforcement load for each
layer during seismic loading.
Tmd is calculated using equations 15-E-17 through 15-E-19 as follows:
As = PGA x Fpga = 0.50g (same is in previous example)
Assume a maximum lateral deflection of 2 inches is allowed/anticipated. Therefore,
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 0.25 0.50 0.25
𝑘𝑘ℎ = 0.74𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠 � � = 0.74 × 0.50𝑔𝑔 × � � = 0.262𝑔𝑔
𝑑𝑑 2
Including the weight of the facing blocks, using Equation 15-E-19,
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 = 𝑘𝑘ℎ � 𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 × 𝐴𝐴𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 𝑇𝑇𝑓𝑓 × 𝐻𝐻�
34𝑜𝑜
= 0.262 × �0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.5 × �20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 �45 − �� × 20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
2
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
+ 0.12 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 1 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓� = 4.24
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Using Equation 15-E-17,
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 4.24 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =� �= = 0.424
𝑛𝑛 10 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
The total load per reinforcement layer, on a load per unit of wall width basis, during
seismic shaking, Ttotalf, is then calculated using superposition as follows, for Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) = 1.0 �0.199 + 0.424 � = 0.623
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For seismic pullout design, Ttotalf is used. However, for reinforcement rupture and
connection rupture under seismic loading, the static and dynamic components of
the reinforcement load must be handled separately. The reason for this is that the
strength required to resist Tmax must include the effects of creep because it is a
sustained load, but the strength required to resist Tmd should not include the effects
of creep due to the transient nature of Tmd.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-45
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-6.7 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-21, 15-E-22, and 15-E-23, calculate Tult for static portion
of load at Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 1.0 × 0.199 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 2.18 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.434
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult for dynamic portion of load at Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 1.12 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.617
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srs + Srt = 0.434 kips/ft + 0.617 kips/ft = 1.05 kips/ft of reinforcement
unit width
Tal = 1.05 kips/ft/2.18 = 0.483 kips/ft of reinforcement unit width
15-E-6.8 Calculations for Connection Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-24, 15-E-25, and 15-E-26, Tult for static portion of load
at Layer 6 is determined as follows:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 0.75
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = = = 0.500
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 1.5
Since this is a mechanical connection, Fr is set equal to 1.0.
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.199 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.517
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 × 0.500 × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.735
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 × (0.75) × 1.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srsc + Srtc = 0.517 kips/ft + 0.735 kips/ft = 1.25 kips/ft of reinforcement
product width
On a strength per reinforcement width basis, this minimum required geosynthetic
Tult of 1.25 kips/ft is still below the Tult value of 2.47 kips/ft (i.e., a Tal = 2.47/2.18 =
1.13 kips/ft) estimated to provide the needed stiffness for the soil failure limit state.
So the soil failure limit state is still controlling the tensile strength required
considering the Extreme Event I Limit State (i.e., seismic).
Page 15-E-46 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-6.9 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design (Extreme
Event I - Seismic)
Using Equation 15-E-27, Le for Layer 10 (i.e., at the wall top) is determined as
follows:
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) 1.0(0.044 + 0.424)
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = =
φ𝐶𝐶(0.8α𝐹𝐹 )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
∗ 1.0 × 2 × (0.8 × 0.8 × 0.452) × 0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 1.0
Le = 4.68 ft
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 4.68 ft = 14.6 ft
This required length is just barely greater than 70% of the wall height, so it does
control pullout length at the wall top.
15-E-6.10 Calculations to Check to Make Sure Stiffness and
Strength Required are Properly Matched (Extreme
Event I, Seismic)
Since the soil failure limit state is still controlling the design, the stiffness
determined to meet the soil failure limit state is still the correct stiffness to use.
Therefore, an additional iteration with stiffness values that are consistent with the
tensile strengths needed is not required. Had one of the other limit states
controlled the Tult needed, then it would have been necessary to recheck the design
using an increased stiffness value that is consistent with the higher tensile strength.
Fortunately, this does not happen very often (may only occur for block faced walls
with very inefficient connections between the geosynthetic and the facing blocks).
15-E-6.11 Summary for Example 2 Design
See Table 15-E-10 for the calculation results for all of the layers for the Service I,
Strength I, and Extreme Event I limit states. These calculation results are plotted
and compared to design calculation results using the Simplified Method in figures
15-E-6 through 15-E-8.
In summary, for the final internal stability design for Example 2 using the Stiffness
Method, the following would be specified with regard to reinforcement properties
and spacing for the optimized design, and the following observations can be made:
• The vertical spacing of reinforcements is 2 ft throughout the wall height,
and the coverage ratio is a minimum of 1.0.
• The minimum reinforcement length for internal stability (i.e., pullout) is
14 ft for the Strength Limit, and all layers except the top layer for seismic
did not exceed this minimum length. The top layer length required is 14.6 ft
for seismic for the Stiffness Method, which is greater than the 0.7H
minimum (see Figure 15-E-8). The longer reinforcement length due to
pullout is consistent with good detailing for MSE walls in AASHTO LRFD
Article 11.10.7.4.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-47
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
• The lowest strength PET geogrid available was greater in strength and
stiffness than required by the Stiffness Method design for the top 4 layers
(see figures 15-E-6 and 15-E-7). This was not the case for the Simplified
Method, as higher reinforcement strengths than the minimum available
were required for most of the layers.
• The Simplified Method required a total long-term tensile strength Tal of
13.2 kips/ft for the entire wall section, whereas the Stiffness Method
required 5.4 kips/ft for the entire wall section for seismic reinforcement
connection rupture. However, the Tal needed to obtain the stiffness needed
to meet the soil failure limit state controlled the design, for which the total
Tal for the wall section was 9.4 kips/ft, which is just over 70% of the total
tensile strength needed by the Simplified Method. Note that in the upper
third of the wall, all limit states for both methods will be limited to the
minimum strength shown in the plots as a dashed vertical line. If that is
considered, the Simplified Method Tal required would increase to 13.9
kips/ft, making the Stiffness Method required soil reinforcement strength
equal to 68% of what is required by the Simplified Method.
• Overall, the required strength and stiffness of the reinforcement needed is
in the low to mid-range of the geogrid product lines available. Note that the
ground acceleration used for the seismic design represents what would be
included in Seismic Zone 4, which is the highest seismic zone.
Page 15-E-48 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-10 Summary of Example 2 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 1.0 (Service, Strength, and Extreme
Event I Limit States): (a) Calculation of Tmax, (b) Service and Strength Limit State calculations, and (c) Extreme Event I
(seismic) Limit State calculations.
a) Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters Unfactored
RcJi
Layer Number z (ft) Sv (ft) Sglobal (ksf) Slocal (ksf) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs *+
Tmax and T0 (kips/ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 8.6 6.07 3.69 0.220 1.61 0.211 0.77 1.0 0.718 0.044
9 3.33 2.00 8.6 6.07 4.30 0.372 1.61 0.211 0.84 1.0 0.718 0.069
8 5.33 2.00 8.6 6.07 4.30 0.523 1.61 0.211 0.84 1.0 0.718 0.097
7 7.33 2.00 8.6 6.07 4.30 0.674 1.61 0.211 0.84 1.0 0.718 0.125
6 9.33 2.00 14.5 6.07 7.25 0.825 1.61 0.211 1.09 1.0 0.718 0.199
5 11.33 2.00 14.5 6.07 7.25 0.976 1.61 0.211 1.09 1.0 0.718 0.235
4 13.33 2.00 14.5 6.07 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.211 1.09 1.0 0.718 0.241
3 15.33 2.00 14.5 6.07 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.211 1.09 1.0 0.718 0.241
2 17.33 2.00 14.5 6.07 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.211 1.09 1.0 0.718 0.241
1 19.33 1.67 14.5 6.07 8.68 1.00 1.61 0.211 1.19 1.0 0.718 0.220
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 1.71
Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Soil Failure Pullout
b)
(Strength Limit) (Strength Limit) (Service Limit) (Strength Limit)
#
Minimum Required #
Minimum Required
Connection Anchorage length
Strength per Unit Width of Strength per Unit Width of Tal
#
Layer Reinforcement Capacity as Le (ft)
z (ft) Reinforcement Reinforcement Factored εrein (%) Corresponding
Number Product Fraction of
Tal to Ji (kips/ft) Min.
Tal (kips/ft) Tult (kips/ft) Tlot, CRu Tult (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) allowed
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid a 0.075 0.16 0.75 0.09 0.19 0.62 0.67 0.68
9 3.33 Geogrid a 0.12 0.25 0.75 0.14 0.30 0.96 0.67 0.43
8 5.33 Geogrid a 0.16 0.36 0.75 0.19 0.43 1.35 0.67 0.37
7 7.33 Geogrid a 0.21 0.46 0.75 0.25 0.55 1.75 0.67 0.35
6 9.33 Geogrid b 0.34 0.73 0.75 0.40 0.87 1.65 < 2.0% 1.13 0.44 < 3.0
5 11.33 Geogrid b 0.40 0.87 0.75 0.47 1.03 1.95 (OK) 1.13 0.43 (OK)
4 13.33 Geogrid b 0.41 0.89 0.75 0.48 1.06 2.00 1.13 0.37
3 15.33 Geogrid b 0.41 0.89 0.75 0.48 1.06 2.00 1.13 0.32
2 17.33 Geogrid b 0.41 0.89 0.75 0.48 1.06 2.00 1.13 0.29
1 19.33 Geogrid b 0.37 0.81 0.75 0.44 0.97 1.82 1.13 0.23
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 2.89 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 6.31 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 3.44 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 7.52 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 9.4
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-49
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-10, continued
Summary of Example 2 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 1.0 (Service, Strength, and Extreme
Event I Limit States): (c) Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit State calculations.
Soil Failure Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Pullout
c)
(Service Limit, for (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit)
Comparison)
#
Minimum Required #
Minimum Required Total
Anchorage length
Reinforcement Strength per Unit Width of Connection Strength per Unit Width of Reinforcement
#
Tensile Strength Leseis (ft)
Layer Product Reinforcement Capacity as Reinforcement Length (ft)
z (ft) Tal Corresponding
Number to Reinforcement Fraction of
Tult = Tal × RF Min. (min. is 0.7H =
Stiffness Required Tal (kips/ft) Tlot, CRu Tal (kips/ft) Tult (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) allowed 14 ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.33 0.71 0.75 0.39 0.85 4.68 14.6
9 3.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.35 0.77 0.75 0.42 0.92 1.97 < 3.0 10.8
8 5.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.38 0.83 0.75 0.45 0.99 1.30 (No, so 9.1
7 7.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.41 0.89 0.75 0.49 1.06 1.00 pullout 7.7
6 9.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.48 1.05 0.75 0.57 1.25 0.89 controls 6.6
5 11.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.52 1.13 0.75 0.62 1.35 0.77 length at 5.4
4 13.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.52 1.14 0.75 0.62 1.36 0.66 wall top) 4.2
3 15.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.52 1.14 0.75 0.62 1.36 0.58 3.1
2 17.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.52 1.14 0.75 0.62 1.36 0.51 1.9
1 19.33 Geogrid b 1.13 0.50 1.10 0.75 0.60 1.31 0.44 0.8
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 9.4 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 4.54 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 9.92 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 5.41 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 11.8
+
These values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (AASHTO 2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product MARV tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., load per unit of reinforcement width basis).
*Tmd for all reinforcement layers is 0.424 kips/ft.
Page 15-E-50 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-6 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal Figure 15-E-7 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal
stability design to the Simplified Method design, stability design to the Simplified Method
for Service and Strength limit states, block faced design, for Service and Extreme Event I
wall with mechanical connection, Rc = 1.0 (seismic) limit states, block faced wall with
(Example 2). mechanical connection, Rc = 1.0
(Example 2).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-51
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Figure 15-E-8 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal stability design to the Simplified Method design, for
Extreme Event I (seismic) limit state, pullout, block faced wall with mechanical connection, Rc = 1.0
(Example 2).
Page 15-E-52 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-7 Stiffness Method Design Example 3: Block Faced Geosynthetic
Wall with Mechanical Connections, Rc = 0.9
15-E-7.1 General
Figure 15-E-9 shows a cross-section of the wall for this design example. The procedures
and results for the case when the coverage ratio Rc for the reinforcement is less than 1.0
(in this example Rc is set equal to 0.90) are illustrated. Material properties are provided in
Table 15-E-7, except that the minimum geogrid stiffness available on a stiffness per unit
of wall width basis is now reduced using Rc = 0.90 to JiRc = 8.6 x 0.9 = 7.7 kips/ft. All
other aspects of this example are the same as Example 2.
As is true of Example 2, the scope of Example 3 is limited to the service (soil failure limit
only), strength, and Extreme Event I (seismic) limit states. Furthermore, for simplicity, live
loads are not included in the calculations to follow. It is also assumed that the foundation
soil has sufficient shear strength to prevent global instability, bearing capacity failure and
excessive settlement. For seismic design, assume that the ground acceleration, As,
is 0.50g.
Figure 15-E-9 Wall geometry and preliminary PET reinforcement layout for Design
Example 3
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-53
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
The wall geometry is based on Figure 15-E-9. As is true for Example 2, Example 3
calculations are demonstrated for one of the middle layers (i.e., Layer 6 in Figure 15-E-10,
and for the soil failure and pullout limit states, Layer 10 is also used to
illustrate calculations).
S = equivalent uniform height of surcharge = 0 ft
Kavh and Kabh remain unchanged relative to Example 1 and Example 2 at 0.283,
and Φfb = 1.0.
The reinforcement stiffness values used in the calculations to follow need to be adjusted
to account for the reinforcement coverage ratio, Rc of 0.90.
Since the soil failure limit state usually controls the amount of reinforcement required,
this limit state is evaluated first, and Tmax is calculated, for the wall design.
15-E-7.2 Calculations for Soil Failure Limit State Design (Service I)
As is true for Example 2, for Example 3 the factored reinforcement peak strain for each
layer should be 2.0% or less for a modular block faced wall (i.e., stiff face) in this example.
Some trial-and-error is typically required to establish what reinforcement stiffness values
are required, starting with the stiffness values required to meet the soil failure limit, as
the soil failure limit often controls the design of geosynthetic walls. Using trial-and-error,
use the minimum 1,000-hour 2% strain secant stiffness available for geosynthetic
reinforcement products, Ji = 7.7 kips/ft for the top 4 layers, and increase the stiffness of
the bottom 6 layers to 14.5 kips/ft, as shown in Table 15-E-11.
Table 15-E-11 Creep stiffness values (i.e., at 2% strain and 1,000 h) for geogrids used
in wall with Rc = 0.90.
Layer Geogrid Ji (per Unit Width of *Rc x Ji (per Unit Width of
No. Designation Reinforcement, in kips/ft) Wall, in kips/ft)
10 a 8.6 7.7
9 a 8.6 7.7
8 a 8.6 7.7
7 a 8.6 7.7
6 b 16.1 14.5
5 b 16.1 14.5
4 b 16.1 14.5
3 b 16.1 14.5
2 b 16.1 14.5
1 b 16.1 14.5
*This is the stiffness value, corrected for Rc, which is used to calculate Tmax.
Page 15-E-54 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
The contributing factors, coefficients and parameters that comprise the Tmax equation can
be found in Allen and Bathurst (2015) and Table 15-E-1. To calculate Tmax, the
reinforcement stiffness must be per unit of wall width rather than per unit of
reinforcement product width; hence, RcJi must be used to calculate Tmax where the
reinforcement stiffness value is required. Using the Table 15-E-11 stiffness values,
considering a total of 10 layers, the parameters used to determine Tmax are calculated
as follows:
𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
ave
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = 𝐻𝐻
= (4 × 0.9 × 8.6 kips/ft + 6 × 0.9 × 16.1 kips/ft)/20 ft = 5.89 ksf
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � � = 0.16 × (5.89 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.209
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
Slocal is calculated as:
𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (0.9 × 16.1 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 7.25 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.30 + 3 × 3.85 + 5 × 7.25 + 8.68
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 5.98 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is recalculated as
follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
7.25 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.10 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 5.98 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
To determine the facing stiffness factor, the facing stiffness parameter, Ff does not
change, and the facing stiffness factor is calculated as:
κ 0.15
𝑆𝑆𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 5.89 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = η �� 𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
� 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 � = 0.57 × ��2.11 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘� × 1.61� = 0.714
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax does not change relative to the previous calculation (i.e., Dtmax for Layer 6 is 0.825).
Tmax for Layer 6 is now recalculated using the updated values as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283 × 1.0
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 0.209 × 0.714 × 1.10 × 1.0
Tmax = 0.199 kips/ft of wall width
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-55
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Tmax, and the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-12 for the rest of the layers for the Service and Strength limit states.
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to Layer 10 is
computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.042
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑛𝑛 = = × 100% = 0.65% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝐾𝐾
φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 0.9 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
For Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.199
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑖𝑛𝑛 = = × 100% = 1.65% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝐾𝐾
φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 0.9 × 16.1
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
See Table 15-E-12 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers. As shown in the
table, the soil failure limit state is met by all the reinforcement layers.
As shown for examples 1 and 2, the equivalent ultimate tensile strength that corresponds
to the stiffness values needed to meet the soil failure limit state is equal to approximately
0.17Ji. For the two stiffness values required to meet the soil failure limit state, the
approximate ultimate tensile strength per ft of wall width needed is:
Tult = 0.17Ji = 0.17 x (8.6 kips/ft) = 1.46 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tult = 0.17 x (16.1 kips/ft) = 2.74 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
To determine Tal, divide Tult by RF = 1.12 x 1.5 x 1.3 = 2.18. Therefore, the approximate
long-term tensile strengths implied by the stiffness required for the soil failure limit state
for the reinforcement product (i.e., per ft of wall width) are:
Tal = (1.46 kips/ft)/2.18 = 0.67 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 10)
Tal = (2.74 kips/ft)/2.18 = 1.26 kips/ft (applicable to Layer 6)
15-E-7.3 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture Limit State
(Strength I)
Since no live load is present, the required long-term reinforcement strength (Tal) for Layer
6 is computed using Equation 15-E-5.
The minimum required value of Tal and Tult for Layer 6, on a strength per unit of
reinforcement width basis (i.e., this value is what would be compared to the MARV of the
tensile strength of specific reinforcement products), is therefore:
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.35 × 0.199 𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡 𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 ≥ = = 0.373
φ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙 0.80 × 0.90 𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡 = 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐼𝐼𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 = 0.373 × 1.12 × 1.5 × 1.3 = 0.815
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
For Layer 6, Tal for reinforcement rupture is significantly less than Tal needed to achieve
the stiffness required for the soil failure limit state (i.e., 0.373 kips/ft << 1.26 kips/ft).
Page 15-E-56 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-7.4 Calculations for Connection Strength Design (Strength I)
With regard to connection strength, the same value as was used in Example 2 is used for
Example 3 (i.e., a mechanical type connection between the facing blocks and geogrid with
a CRu of 0.75). For the connection design, it is assumed that γp-EVc = γp-EV =1.35, φcr = φrr =
0.80, and To = Tmax. It will also be assumed that this value of CRu is applicable for
all geogrids.
Therefore, using the load side of the connection limit state design Equation 15-E-9,
at Layer 6, the factored connection load is calculated as follows:
𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓 𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = �𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑙𝑙 �𝑇𝑇0 = (1.35) × 0.199 = 0.269 of wall width
𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡 𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡
To determine the long-term connection strength available, since a mechanical connection
is used in this example, the connection strength will not be a function of the normal load
on the facing blocks, N. Using the resistance side of Equation 15-E-9 (i.e., the limit state
equation for connection design), and the equation for Tac (Equation 15-E-11), the
available long-term connection strength available is calculated as follows, assuming that
the minimum Tult needed is equal to the Tult needed (strength per unit of wall width) to
obtain the stiffness required to meet the soil failure limit state:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢
φ𝑐𝑐𝑟𝑟 ×𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ×� �𝑅𝑅
𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 (𝑡𝑡𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑟) = φ𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑟 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙 = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼
(15-E-33)
0.75
0.80×2.47𝑏𝑏𝑖𝑖𝑝𝑝𝑓𝑓⁄𝑓𝑓𝑡𝑡×� �0.9
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑙𝑙 (𝑡𝑡𝑎𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡𝑏𝑏𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑟) = 1.3
1.5
= 0.684 kips/ft
0.269 kips/ft < 0.684 kips/ft? OK
Combining Equation 15-E-9 with Equation 15-E-33 and solving for Tult, at layer 6, can
determine the minimum Tult required to just satisfy connection strength requirements as
follows:
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑙𝑙 1
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡 (𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � � 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅 � �
φ𝑙𝑙𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙 𝐶𝐶𝑅𝑅𝑢𝑢
1.35 1 𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑙𝑙𝑡𝑡 (𝑚𝑚𝑠𝑠𝑛𝑛. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � � × 0.199 × 1.3 × 1.5 � � = 0.970
0.8 × 0.90 0.75 𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
The only difference between examples 2 and 3 regarding the connection
strength and the Tult needed to meet connection strength requirements is Rc
(i.e., 0.873/0.970 = 0.90). These calculations demonstrate that Rc has been handled
correctly.
On a strength per unit of reinforcement width basis, this minimum required geosynthetic
Tult of 0.970 kips/ft is below the Tult value of 2.74 kips/ft (i.e., a Tal = 2.74/2.18 = 1.26
kips/ft) estimated to provide the needed stiffness for the soil failure limit state. So the
soil failure limit state is still controlling the tensile strength required at this point (i.e., only
considering the Service and Strength Limit States).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-57
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-7.5 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Strength I)
The default pullout parameters α and F* specified in AASHTO (2020) are used for this
example design and are the same as in Example 1 ( α = 0.8 and F* = 0.452). Rc in this
example is smaller than in the previous two examples (Rc = 0.90). The vertical stress,
σv, over the reinforcement anchorage length, conservatively calculated using Equation
15-E-29, is the same as in Example 1 (0.173 ksf). Since pullout is usually most critical
near the wall top, this example pullout calculation is carried out for Layer 10.
Using Equation 15-E-30, the required factored length of reinforcement in the resistant
zone (i.e., behind the active wedge) for Layer 10 is:
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝐿𝑙𝑙 =
φ𝑝𝑝𝑙𝑙 𝐶𝐶 (α𝐹𝐹 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑙𝑙
𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐
1.35 × 0.042
𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
𝐿𝐿𝑙𝑙 = = 0.719 𝑘𝑘𝑡𝑡
0.70 × 2(0.8 × 0.452)(0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑐𝑐𝑘𝑘)0.90
To determine the total reinforcement length needed, L, the length of reinforcement
within the active zone, La, must be calculated. For geosynthetic walls, the active zone is
assumed to be bounded by the Rankine active zone (wedge). La is calculated as follows
for a vertical wall (at Layer 10):
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
The minimum length allowed for Le is 3 ft (AASHTO 2020), which is greater than the
calculated Le required for pullout for layer 10. Therefore, using Le = 3 ft, the total
reinforcement length required for layer 10 is:
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 3 ft = 12.9 ft
Pullout calculation results for the other layers are summarized in Table 15-E-12.
It should be recalled that the minimum length of reinforcement for typical reinforced soil
walls is 0.7H = 0.7×(20 ft) = 14 ft. Therefore, pullout does not control the reinforcement
length required. Note that other limit state design calculations can result in greater
reinforcement length, such as external stability (e.g., sliding) or global stability.
15-E-7.6 Calculations for Determination of Tmax + Tmd
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Tmd is calculated as shown for Example 2, Layer 6, and is equal to 0.424 kips/ft. Ttotalf is
also the same as shown for Example 2 and is equal to 0.623 kips/ft of wall width.
Page 15-E-58 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-7.7 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-21, 15-E-22, and 15-E-23, calculate Tult for static portion of load at
Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 1.0 × 0.199 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 2.18 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.482
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult for dynamic portion of load at Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝐹𝐹𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 1.12 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.686
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srs + Srt = 0.482 kips/ft + 0.686 kips/ft = 1.17 kips/ft of reinforcement width
Tal = 1.17 kips/ft/2.18 = 0.537 kips/ft of reinforcement width
The only difference between these calculated values and those calculated for Example 2
is the coverage ratio of 0.90 (i.e., for Tal, 0.434/0.537 = 0.90).
15-E-7.8 Calculations for Connection Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-24, 15-E-25, and 15-E-26, Tult for static portion of load at Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 0.75
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = = = 0.500
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
1.5
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Since this is a mechanical connection, Fr is set equal to 1.0.
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.199 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.575
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 × 0.500 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.817
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 1.0 × (0.75) × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srsc + Srtc = 0.575 kips/ft+0.817 kips/ft = 1.39 kips/ft of reinforcement product
width.
On a strength per unit of reinforcement width basis, this minimum required geosynthetic
Tult of 1.39 kips/ft is still below the Tult value of 2.74 kips/ft (i.e., a Tal = 2.74/2.18 = 1.26
kips/ft) estimated to provide the needed stiffness for the soil failure limit state. So the
soil failure limit state is still controlling the tensile strength required considering the
Extreme Event I Limit State (i.e., seismic).
Again, the only difference between these calculated results and those determined for
Example 2 is the coverage ratio of 0.90.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-59
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-7.9 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using Equation 15-E-27, Le for Layer 10 (i.e., at the wall top) is determined as follows:
σv = zγr + Ssurγf
σv = (1.33 ft)(0.13 kcf) + (0)( 0.13 kcf) = 0.173 ksf
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) 1.0(0.042 + 0.424)
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = =
φ𝐶𝐶(0.8α𝐹𝐹 )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
∗ 1.0 × 2 × (0.8 × 0.8 × 0.452) × 0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.90
Le = 5.18 ft
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 5.18 ft = 15.1 ft
This required length is greater than 70% of the wall height, so it does control pullout
length at the wall top.
15-E-7.10 Calculations to Check to Make Sure Stiffness and Strength
Required are Properly Matched
(Extreme Event I, Seismic)
Since the soil failure limit state is still controlling the design, the stiffness determined to
meet the soil failure limit state is still the correct stiffness to use. Therefore, an additional
iteration with higher stiffness values that are consistent with the tensile strengths needed
is not required. Had one of the other limit states controlled the Tult needed, then it would
have been necessary to recheck the design using a stiffness value that is consistent with
the higher tensile strength. Fortunately, this does not happen very often (only would
occur for block faced walls with very inefficient connections between the geosynthetic
and the facing blocks).
15-E-7.11 Summary for Example 3 Design
See Table 15-E-12 for the calculation results for all of the layers for the Service I,
Strength I, and Extreme Event I limit states. These calculation results are plotted and
compared to design calculation results using the Simplified Method in figures 15-E-10
through 15-E-12.
In summary, for the final internal stability design for Example 3 using the Stiffness
Method, the following would be specified with regard to reinforcement properties and
spacing for the optimized design, and the following observations can be made:
• The vertical spacing of reinforcements is 2 ft throughout the wall height, and the
coverage ratio is a minimum of 0.90.
• The minimum reinforcement length for internal stability (i.e., pullout) is 14 ft for
the Strength Limit, and all layers except the top layer for seismic did not exceed
this minimum length. The top layer length required is 15.1 ft for seismic for the
Stiffness Method, which is greater than the 0.7H minimum. The longer
reinforcement length due to pullout is consistent with good detailing for MSE
walls in AASHTO (2020) LRFD Article 11.10.7.4.
Page 15-E-60 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
• The lowest strength PET geogrid available was greater in strength and
stiffness than required by the Stiffness Method design for the top 4 layers
(see figures 15-E-11 and 15-E-12). This was not the case for the Simplified
Method, as higher reinforcement strengths than the minimum available were
required for most of the layers.
• The Simplified Method required a total long-term tensile strength Tal of 13.5
kips/ft for the entire wall section (seismic connection rupture controlled the
design), whereas the Stiffness Method required only 5.99 kips/ft for the entire
wall section for seismic reinforcement connection rupture. However, the Tal
needed to obtain the stiffness needed to meet the soil failure limit state
controlled the design, for which the total Tal for the wall section was 10.2 kips/ft,
which is just over 75% of the total tensile strength needed by the Simplified
Method. Note that in the upper third of the wall, all limit states for both methods
will be limited to the minimum strength shown in the plots as a dashed vertical
line. If that is considered, the Simplified Method Tal required would increase to
13.7 kips/ft, making the Stiffness Method required soil reinforcement strength
equal to 74% of what is required by the Simplified Method.
• Overall, the required strength and stiffness of the reinforcement needed is in the
low to mid-range of the geogrid product lines available. Note that the ground
acceleration used for the seismic design represents what would be included in
Seismic Zone 4, which is the highest seismic zone.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-61
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-12 Summary of Example 3 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 0.90 (Service, Strength, and
Extreme Event I Limit States): (a) Calculation of Tmax, (b) Service and Strength Limit State calculations, and (c)
Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit State calculations.
a) Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters Unfactored
RcJi
Layer Number z (ft) Sv (ft) Sglobal (ksf) Slocal (ksf) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs +
Tmax and T0 (kips/ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 7.7 5.89 3.30 0.220 1.61 0.209 0.74 1.0 0.714 0.042
9 3.33 2.00 7.7 5.89 3.85 0.372 1.61 0.209 0.80 1.0 0.714 0.065
8 5.33 2.00 7.7 5.89 3.85 0.523 1.61 0.209 0.80 1.0 0.714 0.092
7 7.33 2.00 7.7 5.89 3.85 0.674 1.61 0.209 0.80 1.0 0.714 0.119
6 9.33 2.00 14.5 5.89 7.25 0.825 1.61 0.209 1.10 1.0 0.714 0.199
5 11.33 2.00 14.5 5.89 7.25 0.976 1.61 0.209 1.10 1.0 0.714 0.236
4 13.33 2.00 14.5 5.89 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.209 1.10 1.0 0.714 0.242
3 15.33 2.00 14.5 5.89 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.209 1.10 1.0 0.714 0.242
2 17.33 2.00 14.5 5.89 7.25 1.00 1.61 0.209 1.10 1.0 0.714 0.242
1 19.33 1.67 14.5 5.89 8.68 1.00 1.61 0.209 1.21 1.0 0.714 0.221
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 1.70
Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Soil Failure Pullout
b)
(Strength Limit) (Strength Limit) (Service Limit) (Strength Limit)
#
Minimum Required #
Minimum Required
Connection Anchorage length
Strength per Unit Width of Strength per Unit Width of Tal
#
Layer Reinforcement Capacity as Le (ft)
z (ft) Reinforcement Reinforcement Factored εrein (%) Corresponding
Number Product Fraction of
Tal to Ji (kips/ft) Min.
Tal (kips/ft) Tult (kips/ft) Tlot, CRu Tult (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) allowed
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid a 0.079 0.17 0.75 0.09 0.20 0.65 0.67 0.72
9 3.33 Geogrid a 0.12 0.27 0.75 0.15 0.32 1.02 0.67 0.45
8 5.33 Geogrid a 0.17 0.38 0.75 0.21 0.45 1.43 0.67 0.39
7 7.33 Geogrid a 0.22 0.49 0.75 0.26 0.58 1.85 0.67 0.37
6 9.33 Geogrid b 0.37 0.82 0.75 0.44 0.97 1.65 < 2.0% 1.26 0.49 < 3.0
5 11.33 Geogrid b 0.44 0.97 0.75 0.53 1.15 1.95 (OK) 1.26 0.47 (OK)
4 13.33 Geogrid b 0.45 0.99 0.75 0.54 1.18 2.00 1.26 0.41
3 15.33 Geogrid b 0.45 0.99 0.75 0.54 1.18 2.00 1.26 0.36
2 17.33 Geogrid b 0.45 0.99 0.75 0.54 1.18 2.00 1.26 0.32
1 19.33 Geogrid b 0.41 0.90 0.75 0.49 1.08 1.83 1.26 0.26
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 3.18 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 6.96 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 3.79 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 8.28 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 10.2
Page 15-E-62 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-12, continued
Summary of Example 3 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method and Rc = 0.90 (Service, Strength, and
Extreme Event I Limit States): (c) Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit State calculations.
Soil Failure Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Pullout
c)
(Service Limit, for (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit)
Comparison)
#
Minimum Required #
Minimum Required Total
Anchorage length
Reinforcement Strength per Unit Width of Strength per Unit Width of Reinforcement
#
Tensile Strength Capacity as Leseis (ft)
Layer Product Reinforcement Reinforcement Length (ft)
z (ft) Tal Corresponding Fraction of
Number to Reinforcement Tult Tlot, CRu Min. (min. is 0.7H =
Stiffness Required Tal (kips/ft) Tal (kips/ft) Tult (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) allowed 14 ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.36 0.79 0.75 0.43 0.94 5.18 15.1
9 3.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.39 0.85 0.75 0.46 1.01 2.17 < 3.0 11.0
8 5.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.42 0.91 0.75 0.50 1.08 1.43 (No, so 9.2
7 7.33 Geogrid a 0.67 0.45 0.97 0.75 0.53 1.16 1.09 pullout 7.8
6 9.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.54 1.17 0.75 0.64 1.39 0.99 controls 6.7
5 11.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.58 1.26 0.75 0.69 1.50 0.86 length at 5.5
4 13.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.58 1.27 0.75 0.69 1.52 0.74 wall top) 4.3
3 15.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.58 1.27 0.75 0.69 1.52 0.64 3.1
2 17.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.58 1.27 0.75 0.69 1.52 0.57 2.0
1 19.33 Geogrid b 1.25 0.56 1.22 0.75 0.67 1.46 0.49 0.8
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 10.2 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 5.03 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 11.0 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 5.99 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 13.1
+
These values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (AASHTO 2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product MARV tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., load per unit of reinforcement width basis).
*Tmd for all reinforcement layers is 0.424 kips/ft.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-63
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Figure 15-E-10 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal Figure 15-E-11 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal
stability design to the Simplified Method stability design to the Simplified Method
design, for Service and Strength limit states, design, for Service and Extreme Event I
block faced wall with mechanical (seismic) limit states, block faced wall with
connection, Rc = 0.90 (Example 3). mechanical connection, Rc = 0.90 (Example 3).
Page 15-E-64 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-12 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal stability design to the
Simplified Method design, for Extreme Event I (seismic) limit
state, pullout, block faced wall with mechanical connection, Rc
= 0.90 (Example 3).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-65
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-8 Stiffness Method Design Example 4: Block Faced
Geosynthetic Wall System with Frictional Facing
Connection
15-E-8.1 General
Figure 15-E-9 shows a cross-section of the wall for this design example. Material
properties are provided in Table 15-E-7, except that the minimum geogrid
stiffness available on a stiffness per unit of wall width basis is reduced using
Rc = 0.90 (i.e., same as Example 3). All other aspects of this example are the same
as Example 2. Assume for this example that polyester (PET) geogrid will be used
for the soil reinforcement, and dry cast facing blocks with a frictional connection
between the geogrid and facing blocks are used. Because of the need to assess
connection strength, and because connection strength is geosynthetic and facing
block specific (i.e., wall system specific), example system specific ultimate
connection strength data (Tultconn), and properties for the geosynthetic used with
the wall system, are provided in Figure 15-E-13 and Table 15-E-13. The wall
backfill is assumed to be a well-graded gravelly sand, with no cohesion.
Figure 15-E-13 Block-geogrid connection test results for Design Example 4, in
units of peak tensile capacity (i.e., Tultconn) per unit of
reinforcement width.
Page 15-E-66 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-13 Connection strength equations for example wall system.
Geogrid Approx. Wall Normal Load, Tlot
Tultconn (lbs/ft)
Product Height, H (ft) N (lbs/ft) (lbs/ft)
H<9 N < 1344 976 + N tan 42⁰
Geogrid
H < 20 1344 < N < 2268 1989 + N tan 8.1⁰ 3484
A
H > 20 N > 2268 2416
H < 16 N < 1724 1305 + N tan 36⁰
Geogrid
H < 30 1724 < N < 3424 2045 + N tan 16⁰ 4927
B
H > 30 N > 3424 3030
H < 16 N < 1681 1221 + N tan 37⁰
Geogrid
H < 30 1681 < N < 3479 1642 + N tan 26⁰ 6109
C
H > 30 N > 3479 3339
H < 16 N < 1695 1146 + N tan 42⁰
Geogrid
H < 30 1695 < N < 3380 1657 + N tan 31⁰ 7897
D
H > 30 N > 3380 3688
H < 16 N < 1695 1094 + N tan 45⁰
Geogrid
H > 16 1695 < N < 3373 1640 + N tan 33⁰ 10795
E
H > 30 3373 3830
Data for geogrids B through E are faded in the figure and table since, as will be
shown later, for the Stiffness Method, only the weakest geogrid will be needed.
However, for the comparison to the Simplified Method provided at the end of this
example, the other geogrids will be needed. Showing the other geogrids is also
useful to demonstrate how the Geogrid A connection strength plot compares
with the stronger geogrids. The pattern shown in Figure 15-E-13 is typical of
modular block wall system connection strength data in which the connections are
mostly frictional. Only when the normal stress between blocks gets high enough
do significant connection strength differences between geogrids with a range of
tensile strengths occur, transitioning from mostly friction controlled to
reinforcement rupture controlled. Because of this, at facing block normal loads
that are relatively low, increasing the geogrid tensile strength may not help much,
and the only choice may be to reduce the reinforcement spacing. As is shown
later, this will not be an issue for the Stiffness Method, but this will be an issue for
the Simplified Method. Another approach to address this problem is to conduct
1,000 hour connection creep tests, as for frictional systems, it is likely that a lower
reduction factor for creep, RFCR, could be used instead of the RFCR
determined for the geogrid in-isolation (in this case, RFCR for the geogrid is 1.5,
but for the connection, a RFCR of only 1.2 or lower could be used, as shown in
Figure 15-E-14). However, for this example, to keep the example as simple as
possible, the RFCR for the geogrid of 1.5 is used (i.e., the data in Figure 15-E-5 is
not used in this example, but is for information only).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-67
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
As is true of examples 2 and 3, the scope of this design example is limited to the
service (soil failure limit only), strength, and Extreme Event I (seismic) limit states.
Furthermore, for simplicity, live loads are not included in the calculations to
follow. It is also assumed that the foundation soil has sufficient shear strength to
prevent global instability, bearing capacity failure and excessive settlement. For
seismic design, assume that the ground acceleration, As, is 0.50g.
The wall geometry is based on Figure 15-E-9 (i.e., same as for Example 3). As is
true for examples 2 and 3, Example 4 calculations are demonstrated for one of
the middle layers (i.e., Layer 6 in Figure 15-E-10, and for the soil failure and
pullout limit states, Layer 10 is also used to illustrate calculations).
Figure 15-E-14 Example block-geogrid creep connection test results for a wall
system, in units of peak tensile capacity per unit of
reinforcement width.
S = equivalent uniform height of surcharge = 0 ft
Kavh and Kabh remain unchanged relative to Example 1 and Example 2 at 0.283,
and Φfb = 1.0.
The reinforcement stiffness values used in the calculations to follow, the geogrid
stiffness needs to be adjusted to account for the reinforcement coverage ratio, Rc
of 0.90.
Since the soil failure limit state usually controls the amount of reinforcement
required, this limit state is evaluated first, and Tmax is calculated, for the wall
design.
Page 15-E-68 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-8.2 Calculations for Soil Failure Limit State Design
(Service I)
As is true for examples 2 and 3, for Example 4 the factored reinforcement peak
strain for each layer should be 2.0% or less for a modular block faced wall (i.e.,
stiff face) in this example. Some trial-and-error is typically required to establish
what reinforcement stiffness values are required, starting with the stiffness values
required to meet the soil failure limit, as the soil failure limit often controls the
design of geosynthetic walls. However, since this is a specific hypothetical wall
system, the weakest geogrid available for the wall system should be used as the
starting point to check the soil failure limit state. Therefore, begin by calculating
Tmax using the minimum stiffness reinforcement product available for the wall
system, which is Geogrid A in Figure 15-E-13. The creep stiffness, Ji, of Geogrid A
is 19.2 kips/ft (per unit of reinforcement product width), and its tensile strength
TMARV is 3.50 kips/ft and Tal is 1.61 kips/ft (also per unit of reinforcement
product width).
The contributing factors, coefficients and parameters that comprise the Tmax
equation can be found in Allen and Bathurst (2015) and Table 15-E-1. To
calculate Tmax, the reinforcement stiffness must be per unit of wall width rather
than per unit of reinforcement product width; hence, RcJi must be used where the
reinforcement stiffness value is required. Therefore, considering a total of
10 layers, the parameters used to determine Tmax are calculated as follows:
𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
ave
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = 𝐻𝐻
= (10 × 0.90 × 19.2 kips/ft)/20 ft = 8.65 ksf
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � � = 0.16 × (8.65 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.231
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
𝐾𝐾 𝑑𝑑
𝛷𝛷𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = �𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ � = (0.283/0.283)0.4 = 1.0
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ
𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (0.90 × 19.2 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 8.65 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 7.42 + 8 × 8.65 + 10.4
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 8.70 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is calculated
as follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
8.70 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.00 (𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 8.70 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
To determine the facing stiffness factor, the facing stiffness parameter, Ff does
not change, and the facing stiffness factor is calculated as:
κ 0.15
𝑆𝑆𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 8.65 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = η �� � 𝐹𝐹𝑓𝑓 � = 0.57 × �� � × 1.61� = 0.757
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎 2.11 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-69
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Since c = 0, the cohesion factor, Φc = 1.0.
Dtmax does not change relative to the previous calculation (i.e., Dtmax for Layer 6 is
0.825).
Tmax for Layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 1.0 × 0.231 × 0.757 × 1.10 × 1.0
Tmax = 0.211 kips/ft of wall width
Tmax, and the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-14 for the rest of the layers.
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to Layer 10 is
computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.061
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.42% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 0.90 × 19.2
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.211
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 1.47% ≤ 2% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 0.90 × 19.2
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
See Table 15-E-14 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers for the soil
failure limit state for Example 4. Note that the calculated factored strains are
significantly less than the target maximum strain of 2.0%. This means that if a
weaker geogrid reinforcement was available for this wall system, a weaker
product could have been used. Alternatively, the coverage ratio Rc could have
been reduced further (i.e., to less than 0.90).
Page 15-E-70 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-8.3 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture Limit State
(Strength I)
Since no live load is present, the required long-term reinforcement strength (Tal)
for Layer 6 is computed using Equation 15-E-5.
The minimum required value of Tal and Tult for Layer 6 is therefore:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.35 × 0.211 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 ≥ = = 0.398
φ𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 0.80 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 = 0.398 × 1.12 × 1.5 × 1.3 = 0.868
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For Layer 6, the calculated Tal for reinforcement rupture, using only a stiffness
that is consistent with available wall system specific reinforcement products, is
significantly less than Tal needed to achieve the stiffness required for the soil
failure limit state (i.e., 0.398 kips/ft << 1.26 kips/ft) and significantly less that the
Tal for the weakest geogrid product available for the wall system (i.e., 0.398
kips/ft << 1.61 kips/ft). Therefore, to meet the Strength Limit State,
reinforcement rupture, Geogrid A can be used. See Table 15-E-14 for the
calculation results for the rest of the wall layers.
15-E-8.4 Calculations for Connection Strength Design
(Strength I)
To determine the minimum tensile strength needed at the connection to the
facing, connection strength data for the facing block – geosynthetic combinations
anticipated are needed. It has been assumed for this example that a frictional type
connection between the facing blocks and geogrid will be used. Short-term
connection test results for the geogrids under consideration in this example are
shown in Figure 15-E-13 and Table 15-E-13. Tlot values for the connection tests
are also summarized in the figure.
Equation 15-E-9 is used to calculate the minimum long-term connection strength
needed, Tac(required). For the purposes of this example and to be consistent with
the approach taken in the current AASHTO (2020) specifications, the load and
resistance factors for the connection rupture limit state are assigned the same
values as those used for geosynthetic rupture limit state at locations away from
the connection (i.e., γp-EVc = γp-EV =1.35 and φcr = φrr = 0.80), and To = Tmax.
Therefore, using Equation 15-E-9, at Layer 6, the factored connection load is:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = �𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 �𝑇𝑇0 = (1.35) × 0.211 = 0.285 of wall width
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
To determine the long-term connection strength available, since a dominantly
frictional connection is used in this example, the connection strength will be a
function of the normal load on the facing blocks, N, which is affected by the
depth of the connection below the wall top if the facing is vertical (i.e., no facing
batter), but is limited by the hinge height (see AASHTO 2020 LRFD Bridge Design
Manual, Art. 11.10.6.4.4b) if the facing is battered. For this example, the facing is
assumed to have no batter (i.e., is vertical).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-71
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
To determine Tultconn, the normal force, N, on the facing blocks, in units of load per
unit of wall width, must be determined at each layer depth. The following
equation can be used for this purpose for a vertical wall:
𝑁𝑁 = 𝛾𝛾𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 × 𝑧𝑧 × 𝑊𝑊𝑢𝑢 (15-E-34)
where,
γblock = average unit weight of block plus any soil placed in block hollow
areas, if any are present (kcf)
z = depth below wall top at face to reinforcement layer (for battered
walls, use the hinge height as a limit) (ft)
Wu = facing block width (face to back of block) (ft)
Using the relationships presented in Figure 15-E-13 and Table 15-E-13, Tultconn is
calculated as follows for Layer 6, using the connection test results for Geogrid A
(i.e., this geogrid is the minimum strength geogrid available for the specific wall
system that meets or exceeds soil failure limit state requirements):
𝑁𝑁 = 0.12 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 9.33𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 1.0𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 1.12 kips/ft
Therefore,
Tultconn = 0.976 + 1.12 × Tan 42o = 1.98 kips/ft
Expressed as a portion of Tlot, the short-term connection strength CRu is (1.98
kips/ft)/(3.484 kips/ft) = 0.568.
Combining equations 15-E-11 and 15-E-12, the available, factored long-term
connection strength is calculated as follows:
𝑇𝑇
φ𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ×𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 ×� 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 ×𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷
(15-E-35)
For Layer 6,
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
1.98
3.50𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.8 × × (0.9)
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
1.5 × 3.484 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎) = = 0.734
1.3 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Note that Tult in this equation is a Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV), whereas
Tlot is the tensile strength of the geogrid used for the connection testing.
At Layer 6,
Tac (available) > Tac (required (i.e., 0.734 kips/ft >> 0.285 kips/ft).
Therefore, connection strength does not control the design.
Focusing instead on the minimum geogrid tensile strength needed to safely meet
the demand at the connection, determine Tult as follows:
𝛾𝛾 𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � φ𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑅𝑅
� 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 �𝑇𝑇 � (15-E-36)
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
Page 15-E-72 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Note that Tlot/Tultconn, which essentially is 1/CRu, will be specific to the
geosynthetic reinforcement and block/connector system used, in addition to
being a function of the normal force between blocks at the connection, N. This
equation can be used to estimate the ultimate geogrid tensile strength, Tult,
required at the connections to compare to the Tult required for the other limit
states, to help determine which limit state is controlling the design.
With the above in mind, for Layer 6, Tult (min. required, on a strength per unit of
reinforcement width basis) for connection strength is as follows, using RFCR
determined from the in-isolation geogrid creep
rupture data:
1.35 3.484 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 (𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚. 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟) = � �× 0.211 × 1.3 × 1.5 � � = 1.36 , and
0.8×0.9 1.98 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tal = (1.36 kips/ft)/2.18 = 0.623 kips/ft.
On a strength per unit of reinforcement width basis, this minimum required
geosynthetic Tal of 0.623 kips/ft is below the Tal value of the weakest geogrid
product available for this wall system (i.e., Geogrid A, in which
TMARV = 3.50 kips/ft and a Tal = 3.50/2.18 = 1.61 kips/ft). So at this point,
the minimum strength product available for this wall system is in fact
controlling design.
15-E-8.5 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Strength I)
The default pullout parameters α and F* specified in AASHTO (2020) are used for
this example design and are the same as in Example 1 ( α = 0.8 and F* = 0.452).
The vertical stress, σv, over the reinforcement anchorage length, conservatively
calculated using Equation 15-E-29, is the same as in Example 1 (0.173 ksf). Since
pullout is usually most critical near the wall top, this example pullout calculation is
carried out for Layer 10.
Using Equation 15-E-30, the required factored length of reinforcement in the
resistant zone (i.e., behind the active wedge) for Layer 10 is:
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 =
φ𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐶𝐶(α𝐹𝐹 ∗ )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
Tmax used here corresponds to the minimum stiffness product available for the wall
system (i.e., Ji = 19.2 kips/ft). As before, Rc = 0.90 and all other parameters and their
values have been defined earlier. For layer 10, per ft of reinforcement width:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
1.35 × 0.061
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = = 1.04 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.70 × 2(0.8 × 0.452)(0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘)0.90
To determine the total reinforcement length needed, L, the length of
reinforcement within the active zone, La, must be calculated. For geosynthetic
walls, the active zone is assumed to be bounded by the Rankine active zone
(wedge). La is calculated as follows for a vertical wall (at Layer 10):
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-73
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
The minimum length allowed for Le is 3 ft (AASHTO 2020), which is greater than
the calculated Le required for pullout for layer 10. Therefore, using Le = 3 ft, the
total reinforcement length required for layer 10 is:
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 3 ft = 12.9 ft
Strength Limit State calculation results for all the layers (i.e., reinforcement
rupture, connection rupture, and pullout) are summarized in Table 15-E-15
(a and b).
It should be recalled that the minimum length of reinforcement for typical
reinforced soil walls is 0.7H = 0.7×(20 ft) = 14 ft. Therefore, pullout does not
control the reinforcement length required. Note that other limit state design
calculations can result in greater reinforcement length, such as external stability
(e.g., sliding) or global stability.
15-E-8.6 Calculations for Determination of Tmax + Tmd
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
The calculation of Tmax as described and carried out earlier in this example using
the Stiffness Method is also applicable for seismic design for the static portion of
the reinforcement load. Tmd, the incremental dynamic inertia force per
reinforcement layer, must be added to Tmax to determine the total reinforcement
load for each layer during seismic loading.
Tmd is calculated as shown for Example 2, considering the weight of the facing
blocks.
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖 4.24 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 =� �= = 0.424
𝑛𝑛 10 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
The total load per reinforcement layer during seismic shaking, Ttotalf, is then
calculated using superposition as follows, for Layer 6):
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) = 1.0 �0.211 + 0.424 � = 0.635
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
For seismic pullout design, Ttotalf is used. However, for reinforcement rupture and
connection rupture under seismic loading, the static and dynamic components of
the reinforcement load must be handled separately. The reason for this is that the
strength required to resist Tmax must include the effects of creep because it is a
sustained load, but the strength required to resist Tmd should not include the
effects of creep due to the transient nature of Tmd.
Page 15-E-74 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
15-E-8.7 Calculations for Reinforcement Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-21, 15-E-22, and 15-E-23, Tult for the static portion of load
at Layer 6 is:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 1.0 × 0.211 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 2.18 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.511
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult for dynamic portion of load at Layer 6 is:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 1.12 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 0.686
φ𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 1.0 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srs + Srt = 0.511 kips/ft + 0.687 kips/ft = 1.20 kips/ft
Tal = 1.20 kips/ft/2.18 = 0.550 kips/ft of reinforcement product width.
15-E-8.8 Calculations for Connection Rupture
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
To determine the Tult needed to prevent connection rupture during seismic
loading, need CRu and CRcr, which are calculated as follows for Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 1.98
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 = = = 0.568
𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
3.484
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 1.98
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = = = 0.379
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 1.5 × 3.484 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Because this is a frictional connection, the connection resistance is reduced using
a factor, Fr, of 0.8 to account for potential loss of frictional resistance due to the
earthquake ground motion.
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇0 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.211 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 1.01
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 0.8 × 1.0 × 0.379 × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝐷𝐷 1.0 × 0.424 × 1.3 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = = 1.35
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟 φ𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑢𝑢 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 0.8 × 1.0 × (0.568) × 0.90 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Tult = Srsc + Srtc = 1.01 kips/ft+1.35 kips/ft = 2.36 kips/ft
Tal = 2.36 kips/ft/2.18 = 1.08 kips/ft of reinforcement product width.
On a load per reinforcement product width basis, this minimum required
geosynthetic Tal of 1.08 kips/ft is still below the Tal value of the minimum geogrid
product tensile strength Tal available for this wall system (i.e., Geogrid A) of
1.61 kips/ft. Therefore, the minimum strength product available for this wall
system is still controlling the design and can be used for all the
reinforcement layers.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-75
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-8.9 Calculations for Pullout Limit State Design
(Extreme Event I - Seismic)
Using equations 15-E-29 and 15-E-30, Le for Layer 10 (i.e., at the wall top)
is determined as follows:
σv = zγr + Ssurγf
σv = (1.33 ft)(0.13 kcf) + (0)( 0.13 kcf) = 0.173 ksf
𝛾𝛾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 (𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 + 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ) 1.0(0.061 + 0.424)
𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 = =
φ𝐶𝐶(0.8α𝐹𝐹 )𝜎𝜎𝑣𝑣 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐
∗ 1.0 × 2 × (0.8 × 0.8 × 0.452) × 0.173 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.90
Le = 5.39 ft
La = (H – z) tan (45° − φr/2) = (20 ft − 1.33 ft) tan (45° – 34°/2) = 9.93 ft
L = La + Le = 9.93 ft + 5.39 ft = 15.3 ft
Therefore, at the wall top, pullout is controlling the reinforcement length needed.
15-E-8.10 Calculations to Check to Make Sure Stiffness
and Strength Required are Properly Matched
(Extreme Event I, Seismic)
A substantial increase in tensile strength was required to achieve internal stability
for seismic loading, given the high ground acceleration required for this
hypothetical site in the Puget Sound region of western Washington. However, the
weakest geogrid product available for the example wall system (i.e., Geogrid A)
has a Tal of 1.61 kips/ft of reinforcement product width, which is significantly
greater than the Tal needed of 1.08 kips/ft. Therefore, an additional iteration
to match the available reinforcement strength and stiffness to the demand is
not required.
Typically, this check will show that another iteration to complete the wall design
is not required, except possibly for very inefficient facing/reinforcement
connections combined with high seismic loading.
15-E-8.11 Summary for Example 4 Design
See Table 15-E-14 for the calculation results for all of the layers for the Service I,
Strength I, and Extreme Event I limit states. These calculation results are plotted in
figures 15-E-15 through 15-E-17. In Figure 15-E-15, the minimum tensile strength
needed to just meet the soil failure limit state is also shown for illustration
purposes, which demonstrates that the strength required to just meet the soil
failure limit is significantly less than the strength of the minimum tensile strength
geogrid (i.e., Geogrid A) available for the wall system.
Page 15-E-76 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
In summary, for the final internal stability design for Example 4 using the Stiffness
Method, the following would be specified with regard to reinforcement properties
and spacing for the optimized design, and the following observations can be made:
• The vertical spacing of reinforcements is 2 ft throughout the wall height,
and the coverage ratio is a minimum of 0.90.
• The minimum reinforcement length for internal stability (i.e., pullout) is 14 ft
for the Strength Limit, and all layers except the top layer for seismic did not
exceed this minimum length. The top layer length required is 15.3 ft for
seismic for the Stiffness Method, which is greater than the 0.7H minimum.
The longer reinforcement length due to pullout is consistent with good
detailing for MSE walls in AASHTO LRFD Article 11.10.7.4.
• The lowest strength PET geogrid included with the wall system was greater in
strength and stiffness than required by the Stiffness Method design (see
figures 15-E-15 and 15-E-16). Comparative calculations were done with the
Simplified Method, but those calculations showed that greater tensile strength
than the minimum strength product for the wall system and reduced vertical
spacing were required to have enough reinforcement for equilibrium (not
shown in figures 15-E-15 and 15-E-16, as a layer by layer comparison
between methods was not possible due to the increase in the number of
layers needed for the Simplified Method).
• Using Geogrid A as the minimum strength geogrid available, the Simplified
Method required a total long-term tensile strength Tal of 30.1 kips/ft for the
entire wall section (distributed among 15 reinforcement layers), whereas the
Stiffness Method would allow Geogrid A to be used for all layers, but
distributed among only 10 reinforcement layers, for a total of 16.1 kips/ft for
the entire wall section. Therefore, the Stiffness Method would require only
53% of the total reinforcement strength required by the Simplified Method.
The Stiffness method could have allowed even less total reinforcement
strength to be used if the coverage ratio Rc was reduced to less than 0.90,
or if a weaker geogrid was available for this system.
• Overall, the required strength and stiffness of the reinforcement needed is in
the low to mid-range of the geogrid product lines available. Note that the
ground acceleration used for the seismic design represents what would be
included in Seismic Zone 4, which is the highest seismic zone.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-77
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-14 Summary of Example 4 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method, Rc = 0.90, and frictional wall face
connection (Service, Strength, and Extreme Event I Limit States): (a) Calculation of Tmax using minimum strength
product available for wall system, (b) Service and Strength Limit State calculations, and (c) Extreme Event I (seismic)
Limit State calculations.
+
Unfactored maximum
a) Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters
reinforcement load
*RcJi
Layer Number z (ft) Sv (ft) Sglobal (ksf) Slocal (ksf) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs x
Tmax and T0 (kips/ft)
(kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 17.3 8.65 7.42 0.220 1.61 0.231 0.92 1.0 0.757 0.061
9 3.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 0.372 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.095
8 5.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 0.523 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.134
7 7.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 0.674 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.173
6 9.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 0.825 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.211
5 11.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 0.976 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.250
4 13.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 1.00 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.256
3 15.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 1.00 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.256
2 17.33 2.00 17.3 8.65 8.65 1.00 1.61 0.231 1.00 1.0 0.757 0.256
1 19.33 1.67 17.3 8.65 10.4 1.00 1.61 0.231 1.09 1.0 0.757 0.234
Base of wall 20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 1.93
Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Soil Failure Pullout
b)
(Strength Limit) (Strength Limit) (ServiceLimit) (Strength Limit)
#
Minimum #
Minimum Required #
Minimum required strength
Connection Anchorage length
#
Reinforce- Available Strength per Unit Width of per Unit Width of
Capacity Le (ft)
Layer ment Product Product Reinforcement Reinforcement
z (ft) Tultconn Factored εrein (%)
Number Available for Tensile
Tult = Tal × RF (kips/ft)/% Tal Tult = Tal × RF Minimum
Wall System Strength, Tal (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) of Tult (kips/ft) (kips/ft) allowed
Tal (kips/ft)
Column→ 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.11 0.25 1.09/0.31 0.32 0.69 0.42 1.04
9 3.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.18 0.39 1.32/0.38 0.42 0.91 0.66 0.65
8 5.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.25 0.55 1.55/0.45 0.50 1.10 0.93 0.57
7 7.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.32 0.71 1.79/0.51 0.57 1.24 1.20 0.54
6 9.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.40 0.87 1.95/0.56 0.62 1.36 1.47 < 2.0% 0.52 < 3.0
5 11.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.47 1.02 2.05/0.59 0.67 1.46 1.73 (OK) 0.50 (OK)
4 13.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.48 1.05 2.15/0.62 0.67 1.47 1.78 0.44
3 15.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.48 1.05 2.24/0.64 0.66 1.45 1.78 0.38
2 17.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.48 1.05 2.34/0.67 0.65 1.43 1.78 0.34
1 19.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.44 0.96 2.42/0.69 0.59 1.29 1.62 0.28
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 16.1 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 3.61 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 7.89 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 5.67 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 12.4
wall
Page 15-E-78 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Table 15-E-14, continued.
Summary of Example 4 wall design calculations using Stiffness Method, Rc = 0.90, and frictional wall face
connection (Service, Strength, and Extreme Event I Limit States): (c) Extreme Event I (seismic) Limit
State calculations.
Reinforcement Rupture Connection Rupture Pullout
c)
(Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit) (Extreme Event I Limit)
#
Minimum #
Minimum Required #
Minimum Required Total
Connection Anchorage length
Reinforce-
#
Available Strength per Unit Width of Strength per Unit Width of Reinforcement
capacity Leseis (ft)
Layer ment Product Product Reinforcement Reinforcement Length (ft)
z (ft) Tultconn
Number Available for Tensile
Tult = Tal × RF (kips/ft)/% Tal Tult = Tal × RF Minimum (minimum is
Wall System Strength, Tal (kips/ft) Required
(kips/ft) of Tult (kips/ft) (kips/ft) allowed 0.7H = 14 ft)
Tal (kips/ft)
Column→ 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 12
10 (top) 1.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.38 0.83 1.09/0.31 1.33 2.90 5.39 15.3
9 3.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.42 0.92 1.32/0.38 1.22 2.67 2.31 < 3.0 11.2
8 5.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.46 1.01 1.55/0.45 1.16 2.53 1.55 (No, so 9.3
7 7.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.51 1.11 1.79/0.51 1.11 2.43 1.20 pullout 7.9
6 9.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.55 1.20 1.95/0.56 1.08 2.35 1.01 controls 6.7
5 11.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.59 1.29 2.05/0.59 1.05 2.30 0.88 length, 5.5
4 13.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.60 1.31 2.15/0.62 1.05 2.29 0.75 but only 4.3
at wall
3 15.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.60 1.31 2.24/0.64 1.03 2.26 0.66 3.1
top))
2 17.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.60 1.31 2.34/0.67 1.02 2.23 0.58 2.0
1 19.33 Geogrid A 1.61 0.57 1.25 2.42/0.69 0.96 2.10 0.50 0.9
Base of
20 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 16.1 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 5.28 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 11.5 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 11.0 ∑ 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = 24.1
wall
*Minimum geosynthetic stiffness available for wall system (i.e., Geogrid A).
+
These values are on a load per unit of wall width basis in accordance with Article 11.10.6.4.1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Manual (AASHTO 2020).
#
For comparison to geogrid product tensile strength that is not reduced by Rc (i.e., strength per unit of reinforcement width basis).
x
Tmd for all reinforcement layers is 0.424 kips/ft.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-79
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Figure 15-E-15 Stiffness Method internal stability design Figure 15-E-16 Stiffness Method internal stability design to
for Service and Strength limit states the Simplified Method design, for Extreme
(Example 4). Event I (seismic) limit state (Example 4).
Page 15-E-80 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-17 Comparison of Stiffness Method internal stability design to the
Simplified Method design, for Extreme Event I (seismic) limit
state, pullout (Example 4).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-81
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-9 Stiffness Method Design Example 5: Wrapped (Flexible)
Faced Geosynthetic Wall Using Backfill with Small
Cohesion
15-E-9.1 General
This example is an extension of Example 1 to consider the effect of wall backfill
soil cohesion on wall behavior during and after wall construction. Therefore, this
is not a completely developed example. The only purpose of this example is to
demonstrate the types of design problems, and possibly long-term wall
performance problems, that may occur if cohesion is present, especially if the
design is conducted taking into account the “beneficial” effect that cohesion can
have in reducing the reinforcement load, Tmax. The key issue here is the reliability
of the cohesion long-term (e.g., will changes in moisture content, softening of the
clayey backfill, or soil creep over time occur, reducing the cohesion and allowing
the reinforcement layer Tmax values to increase over time?). In addition to this, as
the fines content and plasticity of the backfill increase, the more likely is the
buildup of water in the backfill to occur, causing large increases in reinforcement
load and wall face deformations (Allen and Bathurst 2009).
Material properties are the same as in Example 1, which are provided in
Table 15-E-3, with the exception that the backfill is assumed to have some clayey
fines, resulting in a relatively small soil cohesion of 0.20 ksf in addition to the
friction angle of 34o.
Table 15-E-2 provides requirements for how to address soil cohesion in the wall
backfill. In general, backfill materials that have some cohesion should be avoided,
especially in western Washington where rainfall is relatively plentiful. However, in
the unusual case in which MSE wall backfill with a limited amount of cohesion
cannot be avoided, the effect of that soil cohesion on wall strains and
deformations can be assessed using the Stiffness Method.
In this example, the effect of this cohesion on Tmax at end of construction
(i.e., EOC) for the wall, and potential loss of that cohesion over time, is
investigated. The results generated in this example will be compared to the
Example 1 design, which in effect is the design that would be done if some
cohesion is present, but the cohesion is ignored (i.e., using φ = 34o and c = 0). The
reinforcement stiffness for this example is assumed to be the same as is used in
Example 1 (i.e., see Table 15-E-3).
Page 15-E-82 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
For this example design, determination of the minimum reinforcement stiffness
required to keep the peak strain level in the reinforcement layers at 2.5% or less
required trial-and-error to optimize the reinforcement design. As in the previous
example, Layer 6 will be the primary focus to illustrate the method, except for
pullout, in which the uppermost layer (Layer 10) is the focus to illustrate the
method. Note that the coverage ratio, Rc, is equal to 1.0 for this example.
ave 𝐽𝐽 ∑𝑛𝑛
𝑖𝑖=1 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖
𝑆𝑆global = (H/n) = = (4 × 1.0 × 8.6 kips/ft + 6 × 1.0 × 17.0
𝐻𝐻
kips/ft)/20 ft = 6.82 ksf
𝑆𝑆global 𝛽𝛽
𝛷𝛷𝑔𝑔 = α � � = 0.16 × (6.82 ksf/2.11 ksf)0.26 = 0.217
𝑝𝑝𝑎𝑎
𝐾𝐾 𝑑𝑑
𝛷𝛷𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = �𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ � = (0.283/0.283)0.4 = 1.0
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ
𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽
𝑆𝑆local = � � = (1.0 × 17.0 kips/ft)/(2.0 ft) = 8.50 ksf for Layer 6
𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖
∑ �𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽�𝑆𝑆 �
𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖 3.65 + 3 × 4.25 + 5 × 8.50 + 10.2
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 6.91 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑛𝑛 10
where, n = 10 is the number of reinforcement layers. Therefore, Φlocal is calculated
as follows:
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 0.5
8.5 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 0.5
Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = � � =� � = 1.11 (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6)
𝑆𝑆𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 6.91 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
For a flexible wall face, the facing stiffness factor is assumed to be 1.0.
Given c = 0.20 ksf, the cohesion factor, Φc is calculated as follows:
Φ𝑐𝑐 = 𝑒𝑒 −16(𝑐𝑐⁄(𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐻𝐻)) = 𝑒𝑒 −16(0.20 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘⁄(0.13 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘×20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)) = 0.292
Dtmax is determined for Layer 6 as follows:
zb = Ch × (H)y ×Φfb = (0.32× (20 ft)1.2) × 1.0 = 11.65 ft
For z ≤ zb: Dtmax = Dtmax0 + (z/zb) × (1− Dtmax0) = 0.12 + (9.33 ft/11.65 ft) ×
(1− 0.12) = 0.825
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-83
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
For bottom layers where z > zb: Dtmax = 1.0
Tmax for Layer 6 is calculated as follows:
𝐻𝐻𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 𝑆𝑆𝑣𝑣 �𝐻𝐻𝛾𝛾𝑟𝑟 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + � � 𝑆𝑆𝛾𝛾𝑓𝑓 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿� 𝐾𝐾𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑔𝑔 Φ𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 Φ𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 Φ𝑐𝑐
𝐻𝐻
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 2.0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 �20𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 0.825 + � � 0 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 × 0.130 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 + 0� 0.283
20 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
× 1.0 × 0.217 × 1.0 × 1.11 × 0.292
Tmax = 0.0853 kips/ft
Tmax, and the calculated parameters needed to calculate Tmax, are summarized in
Table 15-E-15 for the rest of the layers.
Note that Tmax for this layer not considering cohesion is 0.292 kips/ft.
Using Equation 15-14 with load factor γsf = 1.2, and resistance factor φsf = 1.0
(Table 15-5), the factored reinforcement strain corresponding to Layer 10 is
computed as:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.017
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.25% ≤ 2.5% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 8.6
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Assuming no cohesion (i.e., as shown in Example 1), for Layer 10,
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = 0.83% 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ 0.25% 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
For Layer 6:
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝛾𝛾𝑝𝑝−𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑇𝑇𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 1.2 × 0.0853
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = = × 100% = 0.60% ≤ 2.5% 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
φ𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑅𝑅𝑐𝑐 𝐽𝐽𝑖𝑖 1.0 × 1.0 × 17.0
𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Assuming no cohesion (i.e., as shown in Example 2), for Layer 6,
𝜀𝜀𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = 2.06% 𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 ≥ 0.60% 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒
See Table 15-E-15 for the calculation results for the rest of the layers.
Based on these calculations, the reinforcement strains increase by a factor of
approximately 3.5 post-construction (i.e., 0.83%/0.25%, and 2.06%/0.60%), as
when the cohesion is ignored during design, the cohesion will still be present
during construction and reduce the reinforcement loads and strains accordingly,
as illustrated here. However, the final reinforcement strains and loads long-term
will still be as designed with the cohesion ignored and will meet standards. The
key is the effect that cohesion loss over time, if it occurs, will have on post-
construction wall face deformation, and whether or not the wall, and whatever it
supports, can successfully handle that post-construction deformation. Based on
experience, a reinforcement strain increase of approximately 1 to 1.5% could
result in a face deformation increase of approximately 1 inch for a 20 ft high wall.
Page 15-E-84 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-18 provides plots that compare the strains that result for various
assumptions regarding the short-term and long-term presence of cohesion. If the
wall is designed considering this limited amount of cohesion (i.e., 0.20 ksf) and the
absolute minimum creep stiffness needed to meet the design criteria,
reinforcement strains quickly become excessive if that cohesion is lost over time
post-construction (i.e., as high as 8.6% as shown in Table 15-E-15 and over 6%
strain post-construction), and does not consider the effect of water build-up in
the wall backfill due to reduced drainage characteristics (see Allen and Bathurst
2009 for an assessment of wall backfill water build-up on the probability
of failure).
It is for this reason that completing the wall design taking into account the soil
cohesion, which will result in a reduced reinforcement strength and stiffness, if
backfill that has a small to moderate amount of cohesion is the only backfill
available, shall not be done (i.e., for final wall design, always assume that Φc = 1.0
whether or not some limited cohesion in the wall backfill is present). However, if a
limited amount of cohesion is present in the backfill, the Stiffness Method may be
used to assess how much post-construction strain in the reinforcement may occur
if that cohesion disappears over time.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-85
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
Table 15-E-15 Summary of Example 5 wall design calculations using Simplified Stiffness Method
(Service and Strength Limit States).
Unfactored maximum
a) Tmax Equation (Eq. 15-E-1) Parameters (including cohesion)
reinforcement load
Layer Number z (ft) Sv (ft) Ji (kips/ft) Sglobal (ksf) Slocal (ksf) Dtmax Ff Φg Φlocal Φfb Φfs Φc Tmax (kips/ft)
10 (top) 1.33 2.33 8.5 6.82 3.65 0.220 N/A 0.217 0.73 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.017
9 3.33 2.00 8.5 6.82 4.25 0.372 N/A 0.217 0.78 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.027
8 5.33 2.00 8.5 6.82 4.25 0.523 N/A 0.217 0.78 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.038
7 7.33 2.00 8.5 6.82 4.25 0.674 N/A 0.217 0.78 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.049
6 9.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 0.825 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.085
5 11.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 0.976 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.101
4 13.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.103
3 15.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.103
2 17.33 2.00 17.0 6.82 8.50 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.11 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.103
1 19.33 1.67 17.0 6.82 10.2 1.00 N/A 0.217 1.21 1.0 1.0 0.292 0.094
Base of wall 20 T max = 0.72
Unfactored Tmax (kips/ft) Unfactored Tmax (kips/ft)
b) Factored εrein (%) Factored εrein (%)
(Eq. 15-E-1) (Eq. 15-E-1)
Wall Designed for Wall Designed for
Wall Designed for φ = 34o Wall Designed for φ = 34o
φ = 34o and c = 0.2 ksf* φ = 34o and c = 0.2 ksf*
Not Accounting Not Accounting
Accounting for Accounting for *Accounting for *Accounting for
Layer for Cohesion (as for Cohesion (as *+Cohesion *+Cohesion
z (ft) Cohesion, Cohesion, Cohesion in Final Cohesion in
Number Designed in Designed in Lost Lost
c = 0.2 ksf c = 0.2 ksf Design Final Design
Example 1) Example 1)
Column→ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 (top) 1.33 0.060 0.017 0.83 0.25 0.015 0.051 0.60 2.04
9 3.33 0.093 0.027 1.30 0.38 0.023 0.080 0.93 3.19
8 5.33 0.131 0.038 1.85 0.54 0.033 0.112 1.31 4.49
7 7.33 0.168 0.049 2.38 0.69 0.042 0.145 1.69 5.78
6 9.33 0.292 0.085 2.06 0.60 0.052 0.177 2.07 7.08
5 11.33 0.345 0.101 2.44 0.71 0.061 0.209 2.45 8.38
4 13.33 0.354 0.103 2.50 0.73 0.063 0.215 2.51 8.59
3 15.33 0.354 0.103 2.50 0.73 0.063 0.215 2.51 8.59
2 17.33 0.354 0.103 2.50 0.73 0.063 0.215 2.51 8.59
1 19.33 0.323 0.094 2.28 0.67 0.057 0.196 2.29 7.85
Base of
wall
20 T max = 2.47 T max = 0.72 εave = 2.06 εave = 0.60 T max = 0.47 T max = 1.61 εave = 1.89 εave = 6.46
*Using minimum creep stiffness of 3.0 kips/ft for all layers, which is well below the minimum stiffness available of 8.2 kips/ft.
However, this is for illustration purposes only, and not recommended for design.
+
Cohesion is lost over time due to softening of the backfill due to moisture increase, or, in the case of apparent cohesion, due to backfill moisture content
changes, over time.
Page 15-E-86 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
Figure 15-E-18 Comparison of Stiffness Method predicted factored reinforcement strains for wrapped face (flexible) wall
with some soil cohesion (Example 5): (a) designed assuming cohesion is not present (i.e., φ = 34o and c = o;
same as Example 1), (b) designed assuming cohesion is present (i.e., φ = 34o and c = 0.2 ksf).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-87
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
15-E-10 Summary of Lessons Learned from Design Examples
The provided design examples illustrate the use of the Stiffness Method for several
geosynthetic wall design scenarios. These scenarios include flexible and stiff facings,
and for the stiff faced walls, mechanical (i.e., structural) and friction dominated
facing/reinforcement connections, coverage ratios ranging from 0.9 to 1.0, and
cohesionless and cohesive soil backfills. Designs are carried out using both the
Stiffness Method and the Simplified Method. Designs were carried out for internal
stability (soil failure, reinforcement and connection rupture, and pullout) considering
Service, Strength, and Extreme Event I (seismic) limit states.
Lessons learned from these examples are as follows:
• In all cases, for the Stiffness Method designs, the Soil Failure Limit controlled
the amount and strength of reinforcements needed. However, for Example 4
(i.e., the block faced wall with frictional facing reinforcement connections),
since it represented a hypothetical proprietary wall system, the minimum
strength geogrid available for the system was stronger than the strength
required to meet the soil failure limit state.
• For Example 1 (i.e., the flexible faced wall), the difference between the
Stiffness and Simplified method designs was the least of all the examples (i.e.,
total Tal for wall section of 10.6 kips/ft for the Stiffness Method and 11.9
kips/ft for the Simplified Method). The Stiffness Method, however, required
less reinforcement in the lower half of the wall and more reinforcement in
the upper half of the wall relative to the Simplified Method distribution of
reinforcement strength. Example 4 (block faced wall with primarily frictional
facing/reinforcement connections) had the largest difference in the Stiffness
and Simplified method designs regarding the total reinforcement strength Tal
needed (i.e., total Tal needed for wall section of 16.1 kips/ft for the Stiffness
Method and 30.1 kips/ft for the Simplified Method).
• The main reason for the larger difference in total Tal needed between the
methods for Example 4 was due to the connection strength design for the
Simplified Method, especially for seismic loading. This was mainly due to the
fact that the Stiffness Method predicts a significantly lower reinforcement
load (i.e., Tmax and T0) than does the Simplified Method due to the greater
prediction accuracy of the Stiffness Method.
• Comparison of examples 1 and 2 can be used to assess the effect of facing
stiffness on the magnitude of the total Tal needed for the wall design using
the Stiffness Method. For the flexible faced wall (Example 1), the total Tal
needed was 10.6 kips/ft, whereas for the comparable stiff (i.e., block) faced
wall (Example 2), the total Tal needed was 9.4 kips/ft. The main reason for the
difference was the reduction in Tmax resulting from the facing stiffness and its
effect on the strength required to meet the soil failure limit state
requirements. Had the connection strength controlled the Stiffness Method
design, the difference between the flexible and stiff faced wall examples
would have varied depending on the efficiency of the connection.
Page 15-E-88 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
December 2020
MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method Appendix 15-E
• Example 5 was used to demonstrate the effect soil cohesion can have on the
predicted reinforcement loads and strains when using the Stiffness Method.
Even a small amount of cohesion (i.e., 0.2 ksf) can have a big effect on the
predicted reinforcement load, and the amount of soil reinforcement needed.
In general, backfill soil with clayey fines should be avoided. Based on this
example, provided the backfill cohesion is small, ignoring the contribution of
the soil cohesion to the soil shear strength used for design will result in a wall
design with minimal risk of poor performance provided the fines content is
not too high and good drainage is provided. However, it must be recognized
that the reinforcement loads at end of wall construction will be reduced due
to the cohesion whether or not the cohesion is ignored for the wall design.
In this case, the effect of potential loss of soil cohesion due to longer term
soil moisture content changes on reinforcement load and wall face
deformation changes after wall construction could be investigated using the
Stiffness Method. However, the final wall design should not be conducted
taking advantage of the reduced reinforcement loads due to soil cohesion,
as post-construction changes in the reinforcement loads and wall face
deformation are likely to be unacceptable.
15-E-11 References
AASHTO (2020). AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials, Ninth Edition, Washington, D.C., USA.
AASHTO (2015). Standard Practice for Determination of Long-Term Strength for
Geosynthetic Reinforcement, Standard Practice R 69-15, 46 p.
Allen, T. M, and Bathurst, R. J. (2009), “Reliability of Geosynthetic Wall Designs and
Factors Influencing Wall Performance,” 4th International GSI-Taiwan Geosynthetics
Conference, Pingtung, Taiwan, pp. 95-123.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. (2013). Comparison of working stress and limit
equilibrium behavior of reinforced soil walls. ASCE Geotechnical Special Publication
No. 230, "Sound Geotechnical Research to Practice” Honoring Robert D, Holtz II,
(Stuedlein, A.W. and Christopher, B.R., editors), pp. 500-514.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. (2015). Improved simplified method for prediction of
loads in reinforced soil walls. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering, 141(11): 04015049.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. 2018. Application of the Simplified Stiffness Method to
design of reinforced soil walls. ASCE Journal of Geotechnical and Geoenvironmental
Engineering, 144(5): 04018024.
Allen, T.M. and Bathurst, R.J. 2019. “Geosynthetic reinforcement stiffness
characterization for MSE wall design.” Geosynthetics International 26(6): pp. 592–
610 (https://dx.doi.org/10.1680/jgein.19.00041).
Allen, T.M., Bathurst, R.J., Holtz, R.D., Walters, D.L. and Lee, W.F. (2003). A new
working stress method for prediction of reinforcement loads in geosynthetic walls.
Canadian Geotechnical Journal, 40(5): 976-994.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-E-89
December 2020
Appendix 15-E MSE Wall Design Using the Stiffness Method
ASTM D4595-17. Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the
Wide-Width Strip Method. ASTM International, West Conshohocken, PA, USA.
ASTM D6637 / D6637M-15. Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile
Properties of Geogrids by the Single or Multi-Rib Tensile Method. ASTM
International, West Conshohocken, PA, USA.
ASTM D6638 (2011). Standard Test Method for Determining Connection Strength
Between Geosynthetic Reinforcement and Segmental Concrete Units (Modular
Concrete Blocks). Standard D6638, 7 p.
Bathurst, R.J. and Simac, M.R. (1993). Laboratory testing of modular unit-geogrid
facing connections. STP 1190 Geosynthetic Soil Reinforcement Testing Procedures
(S.C.J. Cheng, ed.), American Society for Testing and Materials (Special Technical
Publication), pp. 32-48.
NTPEP (2019). AASHTO National Transportation Product Evaluation Program
(NTPEP) DataMine – Geosynthetic Reinforcement (REGEO). American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), Washington, DC, USA. See
"https://data.ntpep.org/REGEO/Products" https://data.
Page 15-E-90 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.12
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring
Systems and Selection Considerations
15-F-1 Fill Applications
While most temporary retaining systems are used in cut applications, some temporary
retaining systems are also used in fill applications. Typical examples include the use
of MSE walls to support preload fills that might otherwise encroach into a wetland or
other sensitive area, the use of modular block walls or wrapped face geosynthetic walls
to support temporary access road embankments or ramps, and the use of temporary
wrapped face geosynthetic walls to support fills during intermediate construction stages.
MSE walls, including wrapped face geosynthetic walls, are well suited for the support
of preload fills because they can be constructed quickly, are relatively inexpensive, are
suitable for retaining tall fill embankments, and can tolerate significant settlements.
Modular block walls without soil reinforcement (e.g., ecology block walls) are also easy
to construct and relatively inexpensive; however they should only be used to support
relatively short fill embankments and are less tolerant to settlement than MSE walls.
Therefore, block walls are better suited to areas with firm subgrade soils where the
retained fill thickness behind the walls is less than 15 feet.
15-F-2 MSE Walls
MSE walls are described briefly in Section 15.5.3, and extensively in Publication No.
FHWA-NHI-00-043 (Elias, et al., 2001). In general, MSE walls consist of strips or sheets
of steel or polymeric reinforcement placed as layers in backfill material and attached to a
facing. Facings may consist of concrete blocks or panels, gabions, or a continuation of the
reinforcement layer.
15-F-3 Prefabricated Modular Block Walls
Prefabricated modular block walls without soil reinforcement are discussed in Section
15.5.4 and should be designed as gravity retaining structures. Concrete blocks used for
gravity walls typically consist of 2½- by 2½- by 5-foot solid rectangular concrete blocks
designed to interlock with each other. They are typically cast from excess concrete at
concrete batch plants and are relatively inexpensive. Because of their rectangular shape
they can be stacked a variety of ways. Because of the tightly fitted configuration of a
concrete block wall, oversized blocks will tend to fit together poorly. Occasionally, blocks
from a concrete batch plant are found to vary in dimension by several inches.
15-F-4 Common Cut Applications
A wide range of temporary shoring systems are available for cut applications. Each
temporary shoring system has advantages and disadvantages, conditions where the
system is suitable or not suitable, and specific design considerations. The following
sections provide a brief overview of many common temporary shoring systems for cut
applications. The “Handbook of Temporary Structures in Construction” (Ratay, 1996) is
another useful resource for information on the design and construction of temporary
shoring systems.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-F-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations
15-F-5 Trench Boxes
Trench boxes are routinely used to protect workers during installation of utilities and
other construction operations requiring access to excavations deeper than 4 feet. Trench
boxes consist of two shields connected by internal braces and have a fixed width and
height. The typical construction sequence consists of excavation of a trench and then
setting the trench box into the excavation prior to allowing workers to gain access to the
protected area within the trench box. For utility construction, the trench box is commonly
pulled along the excavation by the excavator as the utility construction advances.
Some trench boxes are designed such that the trench boxes can be stacked for deeper
excavations.
The primary advantage of trench boxes is that they provide protection to workers for a
low cost and no site specific design is generally required. Another advantage is that trench
boxes are readily available and are easy to use. One disadvantage of trench boxes is that
no support is provided to the soils—where existing improvements are located adjacent to
the excavation, damage may result if the soils cave-in towards the trench box. Therefore,
trench boxes are not suitable for soils that are too weak or soft to temporarily support
themselves. Another disadvantage of trench boxes is the internal braces extend across
the excavation and can impede access to the excavation. Finally, trench boxes provide
no cutoff for groundwater; thus, a temporary dewatering system may be necessary for
excavations that extend below the water table for trench boxes to be effective.
Trench boxes are most suitable for trenches or other excavations where the depth is
greater than the width of the excavation and soil is present on both sides of the trench
boxes. Trench boxes are not appropriate for excavations that are deeper than the
trench box.
15-F-6 Sheet Piling
Sheet piling is a common temporary shoring system in cut applications and is particularly
beneficial as the sheet piles can act as a diaphragm wall to reduce groundwater seepage
into the excavation. Sheet piling typically consists of interlocking steel sheets that are
much longer than they are wide. Sheets can also be constructed out of vinyl, aluminum,
concrete, or wood; however, steel sheet piling is used most often due to its ability to
withstand driving stresses and its ability to be removed and reused for other walls. Sheet
piling is typically installed by driving with a vibratory pile driving hammer. For sheet piling
in cut applications, the piling is installed first, then the soil in front of the wall is excavated
or dredged to the design elevation. There are two general types of sheet pile walls:
cantilever, and anchored/braced.
Sheet piling is most often used in waterfront construction; although, sheet piling can
be used for many upland applications. One of the primary advantages of sheet piling is
that it can provide a cutoff for groundwater flow and the piles can be installed without
lowering the groundwater table. Another advantage of sheet piling is that it can be used
for irregularly shaped excavations. The ability for the sheet piling to be removed makes
sheet piling an attractive shoring alternative for temporary applications. The ability for
sheet piling to be anchored by means of ground anchors or deadman anchors (or braced
internally) allows sheet piling to be used where deeper excavations are planned or where
large surcharge loading is present. One disadvantage of sheet piling is that it is installed
by vibrating or driving; thus, in areas where vibration sensitive improvements or soils are
Page 15-F-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations Appendix 15-F
present, sheet piling may not be appropriate. Another disadvantage is that where very
dense soils are present or where cobbles, boulders or other obstructions are present,
installation of the sheets is difficult.
15-F-7 Soldier Piles
Soldier pile walls are frequently used as temporary shoring in cut applications. The ability
for soldier piles to withstand large lateral earth pressures and the proven use adjacent to
sensitive infrastructure make soldier piles an attractive shoring alternative. Soldier pile
walls typically consist of steel beams installed in drilled shafts; although, drilled shafts
filled with steel cages and concrete or precast reinforced concrete beams can be used.
Following installation of the steel beam, the shaft is filled with structural concrete, lean
concrete, or a combination of the two. The soldier piles are typically spaced 6 to 8 feet
on center. As the soil is excavated from in front of the soldier piles, lagging is installed to
retain the soils located between adjacent soldier piles. The lagging typically consists of
timber; however, reinforced concrete beams, reinforced shotcrete, or steel plates can also
be used as lagging. Ground anchors, internal bracing, rakers, or deadman anchors can be
incorporated in soldier pile walls where the wall height is higher than about 12 feet, or
where backslopes or surcharge loading are present.
Soldier piles are an effective temporary shoring alternative for a variety of soil conditions
and for a wide range of wall heights. Soldier piles are particularly effective adjacent to
existing improvements that are sensitive to settlement, vibration, or lateral movement.
Construction of soldier pile walls is more difficult in soils prone to caving, running sands,
or where cobbles, boulders or other obstructions are present; however, construction
techniques are available to deal with nearly all soil conditions. The cost of soldier pile
walls is higher than some temporary shoring alternatives. In most instances, the steel
soldier pile is left in place following construction. Where ground anchors or deadman
anchors are used, easements may be required if the anchors extend outside the right-of-
way/property boundary. Where ground anchors are used and soft soils are present below
the base of the excavation, the toe of the soldier pile should be designed to prevent
excessive settlements.
15-F-8 Prefabricated Modular Block Walls
In general, modular blocks (see Section 15.6.6.1.2) for cut applications require the soil
deposit to have adequate standup time such that the excavation can be made and
the blocks placed without excessive caving. Otherwise large temporary backcuts and
subsequent backfill placement may be required. A key advantage to modular block walls
is that the blocks can be removed and reused after the temporary structure is no longer
needed. One disadvantage to using modular blocks in cut applications is that the blocks
are placed in front of an excavation and the soils are initially not in full contact with the
blocks unless the areas is backfilled. Some movement of the soil mass is required prior
to load being applied to the blocks—this movement can be potentially damaging to
upslope improvements.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-F-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations
15-F-9 Braced Cuts
Braced cuts are used in applications where a temporary excavation is required that
provides support to the retained soils in order to reduce excessive settlement or lateral
movement of the retained soils. Braced cuts are generally used for trenches or other
excavations where soil is present on both sides of the excavation and construction
activities are not affected by the presence of struts extending across the excavation. A
variety of techniques are available for constructing braced cuts; however, most include a
vertical element, such as a sheet pile, metal plate, or a soldier pile, that is braced across
the excavation by means of struts. Many of the considerations discussed below for soldier
pile walls and sheet piling apply to braced cuts.
15-F-10 Soil Nail Walls
The soil nail wall system consists of drilling and grouting rows of steel bars or “nails”
behind the excavation face as it is excavated and then covering the face with reinforced
shotcrete. The placement of soil nails reinforces the soils located behind the excavation
face and increases the soil’s ability to resist a mass of soil from sliding into the excavation.
Soil nail walls are typically used in dense to very dense granular soils or stiff to hard, low
plasticity, fine-grained soils. Soil nail walls are less cost effective in loose to medium dense
sands or soft to medium stiff/high plasticity fine-grained soils.
The soils typically are required to have an adequate standup time (to allow placement of
the steel wire mesh and/or reinforcing bars to be installed and the shotcrete to be placed).
Soils that have short standup times are problematic for soil nailing. Many techniques
are available for mitigating short standup time, such as installation of vertical elements
(vertical soil nails or light steel beams set in vertical drilled shafts placed several feet on
center along the perimeter of the excavation), drilling soil nails through soil berms, use
of slot cuts, and flash-coating with shotcrete. Easements may be required if the soil nails
extend outside the right-of-way/property boundary.
15-F-11 Uncommon Shoring Systems for Cut Applications
The following shoring systems require special, very detailed, expert implementation:
15-F-11.1 Diaphragm/Slurry Walls
Diaphragm/slurry walls are constructed by excavating a deep trench around the proposed
excavation. The trench is filled with a weighted slurry that keeps the excavation open. The
width of the trench is at least as wide as the concrete wall to be constructed. The slurry
trench is completed by installing steel reinforcement cages and backfilling the trench
with tremied structural concrete that displaces the slurry. The net result is a continuous
wall that significantly reduces horizontal ground water flow. Once the concrete cures, the
soil is excavated from in front of the slurry wall. Internal bracing and/or ground anchors
can be incorporated into slurry walls. Diaphragm/slurry walls can be incorporated into a
structure as permanent walls.
Diaphragm/slurry walls are most often used where groundwater is present above the base
of the excavation. Slurry walls are also effective where contaminated groundwater is to
be contained. Slurry walls can be constructed in dense soils where the use of sheet piling
is difficult. Other advantages of slurry walls include the ability to withstand significant
Page 15-F-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations Appendix 15-F
vertical and lateral loads, low construction vibrations, and the ability to construct slurry
walls in low-headroom conditions. Slurry walls are particularly effective in soils where
high groundwater and loose soils are present, and dewatering could lead to settlement
related damage of adjacent improvements, assuming that the soils are not so loose or soft
that the slurry is inadequate to prevent squeezing of the very soft soil.
In addition to detailed geotechnical design information, diaphragm/slurry walls require
jobsite planning, preparation and control of the slurry, and contractors experienced in
construction of slurry walls. For watertight applications, special design and construction
considerations are required at the joints between each panel of the slurry wall.
15-F-11.2 Secant Pile Walls
Secant pile walls are another type of diaphragm wall that consist of interconnected drilled
shafts. First, every other drilled shaft is drilled and backfilled with low strength concrete
without steel reinforcement. Next, structural drilled shafts are installed between the low
strength shafts in a manner that the structural shafts overlap the low strength shafts. The
structural shafts are typically backfilled with structural concrete and steel reinforcement.
The net result is a continuous wall that significantly reduces horizontal ground water flow
while retaining soils behind the wall.
Secant pile walls are typically more expensive than many types of cut application
temporary shoring alternatives; thus, the use of secant pile walls is limited to situations
where secant pile walls are better suited to the site conditions than other shoring
alternatives. Conditions where secant pile walls may be more favorable include high
groundwater, the need to prevent migration of contaminated groundwater, sites where
dewatering may induce settlements below adjacent improvements, sites with soils
containing obstructions, and sites where vibrations need to be minimized.
15-F-11.3 Cellular Cofferdams
Sheet pile cellular cofferdams can be used for applications where internal bracing is not
desirable due to interference with construction activities within the excavation. Cellular
cofferdams are typically used where a dewatered work area or excavation is necessary
in open water or where large dewatered heads are required. Cellular cofferdams
consist of interlocking steel sheet piles constructed in a circle, or cell. The individual
cells are constructed some distance apart along the length of the excavation or area
to be dewatered. Each individual cell is joined to adjacent cells by arcs of sheet piles,
thus providing a continuous structure. The cells are then filled with soil fill, typically
granular fill that can be densified. The resulting structure is a gravity wall that can resist
the hydrostatic and lateral earth pressures once the area within the cellular cofferdam
is dewatered or excavated. As a gravity structure, cellular cofferdams need adequate
bearing; therefore, sites where the cellular cofferdam can be founded on rock or dense
soil are most suitable for these structures.
Cellular cofferdams are difficult to construct and require accurate placement of the
interlocking sheet piles. Sites that require installation of sheet piles through difficult soils,
such as through cobbles or boulders are problematic for cellular cofferdams and can result
in driving the sheets out of interlock.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-F-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations
15-F-11.4 Frozen Soil Walls (Ground Freezing)
Frozen soil walls can be used for a variety of temporary shoring applications including
construction of deep vertical shafts and tunneling. Frozen soil walls are typically used
where conventional shoring alternatives are not feasible or have not been successful.
Frozen soil walls can be constructed as gravity structures or as compressive rings. Ground
freezing also provides an effective means of cutting of groundwater flows. Frozen soil
has compressive strengths similar to concrete. Installation of a frozen soil wall can be
completed with little vibration and can be completed around existing utilities or other
infrastructure. Ground freezing is typically completed by installing rows of steel freeze
pipes along the perimeter of the planned excavation. Refrigerated fluid is then circulated
through the pipes at temperatures typically around -20°C to -30°C. Frozen soil forms
around each freeze pipe until a continuous mass of frozen soil is present. Once the frozen
soil reaches the design thickness, excavation can commence within the frozen soil.
Frozen soil walls can be completed in difficult soil and groundwater conditions where
other shoring alternatives are not feasible. Frozen soil walls can provide an effective
cutoff for groundwater and are well suited for containment of contaminated groundwater.
Frozen soil walls are problematic in soils with rapid groundwater flows, such as coarse
sands or gravels, due to the difficulty in freezing the soil. Flooding is also problematic to
frozen soil walls where the flood waters come in contact with the frozen soil—a condition
which can lead to failure of the shoring. Special care is required where penetrations
are planned through frozen soil walls to prevent groundwater flows from flooding the
excavation. Accurate installation of freeze pipes is required for deeper excavations to
prevent windows of unfrozen soil. Furthermore, ground freezing can result in significant
subsidence as the frozen ground thaws. If settlement sensitive structures are below or
adjacent to ground that is to be frozen, alternative shoring means should be selected.
15-F-11.5 Deep Soil Mixing
Deep soil mixing (DSM) is an in-situ soil improvement technique used to improve the
strength characteristics of panels or columns of native soils. DSM utilizes mixing shafts
suspended from a crane to mix cement into the native soils. The result is soil mixed
panels or columns of improved soils. Two types of DSM walls can be constructed: gravity
walls and diaphragm-type walls. Gravity type DSM walls consist of columns or panels
of improved soils configured in a pattern capable of resisting movement of soil into the
excavation. Diaphragm-type DSM walls are constructed by improving the soil along the
perimeter of the excavation and inserting vertical reinforcement into the improved soil
immediately after mixing cement into the soil. The result is a low permeability structural
wall that can be anchored with tiebacks, similar to a soldier pile wall, where the improved
soil acts as the lagging.
Advantages with deep soil mixing gravity walls include the use of the native soils as part
of the shoring system and reduced or no reinforcement. However, a significant volume
of the native soils needs to be improved over a wide area to enable the improved soil to
act as a gravity structure. Advantages with soil mixed diaphragm walls include the ability
to control groundwater seepage, construction of the wall facing simultaneously with
placement of steel soldier piles, and a thinner zone of improved soils compared to gravity
DSM walls.
Page 15-F-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations Appendix 15-F
DSM walls can be installed top-down by wet methods where mechanical mixing
systems combine soil with a cementitious slurry or through bottom up dry soil mixing
where mechanical mixing systems mix pre-sheared soil with pneumatically injected
cement or lime. DSM is generally appropriate for any soil that is free of boulders or
other obstructions; although, it may not be appropriate for highly organic soils. DSM
can be completed in very soft to stiff cohesive soils and very loose to medium dense
granular soils.
15-F-11.6 Permeation Grouting
Permeation grouting involves the pressurized injection of a fluid grout to improve the
strength of the in-situ soils and to reduce the soil’s permeability. A variety of grouts
are available—micro-fine cement grout and sodium silicate grout are two of the more
frequently used types in permeation grouting. To be effective, the grout must be able
to penetrate the soil; therefore, permeation grouting is not applicable in cohesive soils
or granular soils with more than about 20 percent fines. Disadvantages of permeation
grouting is the expense of the process and the high risk of difficulties. Permeation
grouting, like ground freezing or jet grouting, can be used to create gravity retaining walls
consisting of improved soils or can be used to create compression rings for access shafts
or other circular excavations.
In addition to characterizing the soils gradation and stratigraphy, it is important
to characterize the permeability of the soils to evaluate the suitability of
permeation grouting.
15-F-11.7 Jet Grouting
Jet grouting is a ground improvement technique that can be used to construct temporary
shoring walls and groundwater cutoff walls. Jet grouting can also be used to form a seal or
strut at the base of an excavation. Jet grouting is an erosion based technology where high
velocity fluids are injected into the soil formation to break down the soil structure and to
mix the soil with a cementitious slurry to form columns of improved soil. Jet grouting can
be used to construct diaphragm walls to cutoff groundwater flow and can be configured
to construct gravity type shoring systems or compressive rings for circular shafts. Jet
grouting is applicable to most soil conditions; however, high plasticity clays or stiff to hard
cohesive soils are problematic for jet grouting.
Advantages with jet grouting include the ability to use of the native soils as part of the
shoring system. A significant volume of the native soils needs to be improved over a wide
area to enable the improved soil to act as a gravity structure. The width of the improved
soil column is difficult to control, thus the final face of a temporary shoring wall may be
irregular or protrude into the excavation.
15-F-12 Factors Influencing Choice of Temporary Shoring
A multitude of factors will influence the choice of temporary shoring systems for a
particular application. The most common considerations are cost, subsurface constraints
(i.e. difficult driving conditions, the need to cutoff groundwater seepage, etc.), site
constraints (i.e. limited access, impacts to adjacent infrastructure, etc.), and local practice.
The sections below, while not all-inclusive, provide a brief discussion of several of the
factors that influence selection of temporary shoring systems.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-F-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations
15-F-12.1 Application
The first screening criteria for alternative temporary shoring options will be the purpose
of the shoring—will it retain an excavation or support a fill.
15-F-12.2 Cut/fill Height
Some retaining systems are more suitable for supporting deep excavations/fill thicknesses
than others. Temporary modular block walls are typically suitable only for relatively short
fill embankments (less than 15 feet), while MSE walls can be designed to retain fills
several tens of feet thick.
In cut applications, the common cantilever retaining systems (sheet piling and soldier
piles) are typically most cost effective for retained soil heights of 12 to 15 feet or less.
Temporary shoring walls in excess of 15 feet typically require bracing, either external
(struts, rakers, etc.) or internal (ground anchors or dead-man anchors).
15-F-13 Soil Conditions
15-F-13.1 Dense Soils and Obstructions
Dense subsurface conditions, such as presented by glacial till or bedrock, result in difficult
installation conditions for temporary shoring systems that are typically driven or vibrated
into place (sheet piling). Cobbles, boulders and debris within the soil also often present
difficult driving conditions. It is often easier to use drilling methods to install shoring
in these conditions. However, oversize materials and dense conditions may also hinder
conventional auger drilling, resulting in the need for specialized drilling equipment.
Methods such as slurry trenches and grouting may become viable in areas with very
difficult driving and drilling conditions.
15-F-13.2 Caving Conditions
Caving conditions caused by a combination of relatively loose cohesionless soils and/or
groundwater seepage may result in difficult drilling conditions and the need to use casing
and/or drilling slurry to keep the holes open.
15-F-13.3 Permeability
Soil permeability is based primarily on the soil grain size distribution and density. It
influences how readily groundwater flows through a soil. If soils are very permeable and
the excavation will be below the water level, then some sort of groundwater control will
be required as part of the shoring system; this could consist of traditional dewatering
methods or the use of shoring systems that also function as a barrier to seepage, such
as sheet piling and slurry trench methods.
15-F-13.4 Groundwater, Bottom Heave and Piping
The groundwater level with respect to the proposed excavation depth will have a
substantial influence on the temporary shoring system selected. Excavations that extend
below the groundwater table and that are underlain by relatively permeable soils will
require either dewatering, shoring systems that also function as a barrier to groundwater
seepage, or some combination thereof. If the anticipated dewatering volumes are high,
Page 15-F-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations Appendix 15-F
issues associated with treating and discharge of the effluent can be problematic. Likewise,
large dewatering efforts can cause settlement of nearby structures if they are situated
over compressible soils, or they may impact nearby contamination plumes, should they
exist. Considerations for barrier systems include the depth to an aquitard to seal off
groundwater flow and estimated flow velocities. If groundwater velocity is high, some
barrier systems such as frozen ground and permeation grouting will not be suitable.
Bottom heave and piping can occur in soft/loose soils when the hydrostatic pressure
below the base of the excavation is significantly greater than the resistance provided
by the floor soils. In this case, temporary shoring systems that can be used to create a
seepage barrier below the excavation, thus increasing the flow path and reducing the
hydrostatic pressure below the base, may be better suited than those that do not function
as a barrier. For example, sheet piling can be installed as a seepage barrier well below
the base of the excavation, while soldier pile systems cannot. This is especially true if
an aquitard is situated below the base of the excavation where the sheet piles can be
embedded into the aquitard to seal off the groundwater flow path.
15-F-13.5 High Locked in Lateral Stresses
Glacially consolidated soils, especially fine-grained soils, often have high locked in lateral
stresses because of the overconsolidation process (i.e. Ko can be much greater than a
typical normally consolidated soil deposit). The Seattle Clay is an example of this type
of soil, and much has been written about the performance of cuts into this material
made to construct Interstate 5 (Peck, 1963; Sherif, 1966; Andrews, et al., 1966; and
Strazer, et al., 1974). When cuts are made into soils with high locked in lateral stresses,
they tend to rebound upon the stress relief, which can open up joints and fractures.
Hydrostatic pressure buildup in the joints and fractures can function as a hydraulic jack
and move blocks of soil, and movement can quickly degrade the shear strength of the soil.
Therefore, for excavations into virgin material suspected of having high locked in lateral
stresses, temporary shoring methods that limit the initial elastic rebound are required. For
example, anchored shoring systems that are loaded and locked-off before the excavation
will likely perform better than passive systems that allow the soil move, such as soil nails.
15-F-13.6 Compressible Soils
Compressible soils are more likely to impact the selection of temporary walls used to
retain fills. MSE walls are typically more settlement tolerant than other fill walls, such
as modular block walls.
15-F-13.7 Space Limitations
Space limitations include external constraints, such as right-of-way issues and adjacent
structures, and internal constraints such as the amount of working space required.
If excavations are required near existing right-of-ways, then temporary construction
easements may be required to install the shoring system. Permanent easements may
be required if the shoring systems include support from ground anchors or dead-man
anchors that may remain after construction is complete. To minimize the need for
temporary and permanent easements, cantilever walls or walls with external bracing
(e.g. struts or rakers) should be considered. However, if the work space in front of the
excavation needs to be clear, then shoring systems with external support may not
be appropriate.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-F-9
December 2020
Appendix 15-F Description of Typical Temporary Shoring Systems and Selection Considerations
Existing infrastructure, such as underground utilities that cannot be relocated, may have
the same impact on the choice of temporary shoring system as nearby right-of-ways.
15-F-13.8 Adjacent Infrastructure
The location of infrastructure adjacent to the site and the sensitivity of the infrastructure
to settlement and/or vibrations will influence the selection of temporary shoring. For
example, it may be necessary to limit dewatering or incorporate recharge wells if the
site soils are susceptible to consolidation if the water table is lowered. If the adjacent
infrastructure is brittle or supported above potentially liquefiable soils, it may be
necessary to limit vibrations, which may exclude the selection of temporary shoring
systems that are driven or vibrated into place, such as sheet piling.
The shoring system itself could also be sensitive to adjacent soil improvement or
foundation installation activities. For example, soil improvement activities such as the
installation of stone columns in loose to medium dense sands immediately in front of
a shoring structure could cause subsidence of the loose sands and movement, or even
failure, of the shoring wall. In such cases, the shoring wall shall be designed assuming that
the soil immediately in front of the wall could displace significantly, requiring that the wall
embedment be deepened and ground anchors be added.
15-F-14 References
Andrews, G., Squier, L., and Klassel, J., (1966) “Cylinder Pile Retaining Walls,” Paper
No. 295, Proceedings: ASCE Structural Conference; Miami, Florida, January 31, -
February 4, 1966.
Elias, V., and Christopher, B.R., and Berg, R. R., 2001, Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls
and Reinforced Soil Slopes - Design and Construction Guidelines, No. FHWA- NHI-00-
043, Federal Highway Administration, 394 pp.
Peck, R., (1963) “Report on Evaluation of Stability Problems, Seattle Freeway South of
Olive Way”, Report to U.S. Bureau of Public Roads, July 1963.
Ratay, R., (1996) Handbook of Temporary Structures in Construction; Engineering
Standards, Designs, Practices and Procedures (Second Edition), McGraw-Hill, pp.
Sherif, M., (1966) “Physical Properties of Seattle Freeway Soils,” Contract No. GC- 1530,
Engineering Report No. 2, Prepared for Washington State Highway Department Division
of Materials and Research.
Strazer, R., Bestwick, K., and Wilson, S., (1974) “Design Considerations for Deep Retained
Excavations in Over-Consolidated Seattle Clays,” Association of Engineering Geology,
Vol. XI, No. 4.
Page 15-F-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols
for Tiebacks in Clay
Testing and Acceptance for Tiebacks Installed in Clay
The contents for this appendix are based on Allen (2020).
For tiebacks installed in intact glacially overconsolidated clay, paleolandslide deposits
derived from the glacially overconsolidated clay, or otherwise disturbed glacial clay,
a project specific protocol for tieback bond zone design, testing, and acceptance shall
consist of the following:
• Sacrificial pullout and sacrificial pullout with creep tests conducted on tiebacks in
each soil unit in which tieback bond zones will be installed:
– To be able to extrapolate the pullout test results to longer bond zones, a
minimum bond zone length of 4.6 m (15 ft) should be used for the test tiebacks
to minimize the effect of load transfer rate nonlinearity along the bond zone
soil-grout interface.
– The testing protocol and analysis should be consistent with the protocol used for
long-term tieback testing.
– The pullout tests should be done in pairs. The first test is used to establish the
values of Tc and Tuw that will be used for the second pullout test, loading the
tieback incrementally until pullout is achieved, if possible. The sacrificial tieback
testing schedule for this testing is provided in Tables 15-G-1 and 15-G-2.
– The loading increments should be based on the Factored Design Load (FDL), using
a load increment of 0.10FDL to 0.20FDL. A load factor of 1.35, consistent with
required load factors in AASHTO (2020), should be used to determine the FDL.
– The second pullout test is also loaded incrementally until Tuw from the first test is
achieved, at which point a 72-hour creep test is conducted. If in the second test
the creep rate versus load level curve is starting to sweep upward sooner than
expected, it may become necessary to use a lower value of Tuw for the 72-your
load hold. In that case, the next increment of load increase above Tuw may need
to start lower than shown in Table 15-G-2.
– Once the creep test is completed for the second tieback, the tieback load is
increased incrementally above Tuw until pullout is achieved, if possible.
– At each load increment, the load level should be held for 60 minutes and
creep measured.
• Contractor designed tieback bond zone diameter and length: The results from these
sacrificial verification (pullout) tests described above, if they are successful, should
be used to design the tieback bond zone length and diameter for the proposed
production tieback installation method. To obtain the average bond zone soil-grout
interface adhesion for the final design of the tieback bond zone, a resistance factor
of 0.67 (i.e., the reciprocal of the safety factor, or 1/1.5 = 0.67) should be applied
to Tuw determined from these pullout and extended creep tests. If the tiebacks are
in disturbed glacially overconsolidated clay (e.g., paleolandslide or otherwise similar
deposits), a resistance factor of 0.45 should be used to account for the increased
variability of the deposit.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-G-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay
• Production creep performance tests: Five percent of the production tiebacks (or a
minimum of 3 tiebacks per wall, whichever is greater) should be subjected to a creep
performance test. The tieback testing schedule for this creep performance testing is
provided Table 15-G-3.
• Production cyclic performance tests, but with no longer-term creep testing: Five
percent of the production tiebacks (or a minimum of 3 tiebacks per wall, whichever is
greater) should be subjected to a cyclic performance test. In cyclic performance tests
the highest load tested is held for 60 minutes to determine the creep rate. The tieback
testing schedule for this cyclic performance testing is provided Table 15-G-4.
• Production proof tests conducted on all remaining tiebacks in each wall: In proof
tests the highest load tested is held for 60 minutes to determine the creep rate. The
tieback testing schedule for proof testing is provided Table 15-G-5.
Table 15-G-1 Sacrificial pullout test schedule for tiebacks in glacial
clay soil units (first test)
Load* Hold Time (minutes)
AL --
0.20 FDL 60
0.40 FDL 60
0.50 FDL 60
0.60 FDL 60
0.70 FDL 60
0.80 FDL 60
0.90 FDL 60
1.0 FDL 60
1.2 FDL 60
1.4 FDL 60
1.6 FDL 60
1.8 FDL 60
2.0 FDL 60
*FDL = Factored Design Load. Failure is defined as the tieback being unable to hold
the load without continued movement (pullout).
Page 15-G-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay Appendix 15-G
Table 15-G-2 Sacrificial pullout test schedule for tiebacks in glacial
clay soil units with 72-hour creep test (second test)
Load* Hold Time (minutes)
AL --
0.20 Tuw 60
0.40 Tuw 60
0.50 Tuw 60
0.60 Tuw 60
0.70 Tuw 60
0.80 Tuw 60
0.90 Tuw 60
Tuw from first test 4,320 (72 hrs)
1.2 FDL 60
1.4 FDL 60
1.6 FDL 60
1.8 FDL 60
2.0 FDL 60
*FDL = Factored Design Load. Failure is defined as the tieback being unable to hold
the load without continued movement (pullout).
Table 15-G-3 Production tieback creep performance test schedule
for tiebacks in glacial clay soil units
*Load Hold Time (minutes)
AL --
0.20 FDL 60
0.40 FDL 60
0.60 FDL 60
0.80 FDL 60
1.00 FDL 360 (6 hrs)
*Conduct on 5% of the production tiebacks in each wall, but no less than 3 tiebacks
per wall.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-G-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay
Table 15-G-4 Production tieback cyclic performance test schedule
for tiebacks in glacial clay soil units
aLoad Hold Time (minutes)
AL --
0.25 FDL --
AL --
0.25 FDL --
0.50 FDL --
AL --
0.25 FDL --
0.50 FDL --
0.75 FDL --
AL --
0.25 FDL --
0.50 FDL --
0.75 FDL --
1.00 FDL b60
AL --
Jack to lock-off load __--
aConduct on 5% of the production tiebacks in each wall, but no less than 3 tiebacks
per wall.
bIfthe anchor movement between 6 and 60 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches
(0.03 inches for pressure- and post-grouted tiebacks), the maximum test load shall be
held for an additional 300 minutes.
Table 15-G-5 Production tieback proof test schedule for tiebacks in
glacial clay soil units
aLoad Hold Time (minutes)
AL --
0.25 FDL 10
0.50 FDL 10
0.75 FDL 10
1.00 FDL b60
aConduct on all remaining production tiebacks in each wall.
bIfthe anchor movement between 6 and 60 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches (0.03
inches for pressure- and post-grouted tiebacks), the maximum test load shall be held
for an additional 300 minutes.
Page 15-G-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay Appendix 15-G
Creep test measurement times and tieback acceptance criteria shall be as provided in
Table 15-G-6 for tiebacks in clay.
Table 15-G-6 Creep measurement times and creep criteria for tiebacks in clay soil units
Hold Time (minutes) Measurement Times (minutes) Creep Criterion*
10 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 0.75 mm/log cycle
(0.03 inch per log cycle) of time
60 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 1.0 mm/log cycle
(0.04 inch per log cycle) of time
360 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, then 1.0 mm/log cycle
every 30 minutes up to 360 minutes (0.04 inch per log cycle) of time
4320 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, then +1.5 mm/log cycle
every 30 minutes up to 4,320 minutes (0.06 inch per log cycle) of time
*Adjust criterion based on test results from the sacrificial pullout tests, but no greater than shown in
this table.
+Limit to 1.0 mm/log cycle (0.04 in./log cycle) of time if testing pressure- or post-grouted tiebacks.
Use slope of creep curve (i.e., such as from a log linear regression) to determine creep rate for comparison to
the creep criterion.
Additional Implementation Requirements for Production Tieback Walls
Based on the results of this study, the following are recommendations that should be
considered when developing tieback testing programs for production walls:
1. The special testing requirements provided in this appendix should be considered
applicable to tiebacks installed in overconsolidated clays, both in an intact condition
and in a disturbed condition (e.g., partially reconsolidated paleolandslide deposits
such as the Vashon Unsorted), in the central Puget Sound region. This testing is
especially important when, for the soil surrounding the tieback bond zones, the soil
consistency index is less than 0.9 and the liquid limit is greater than 50, but should
also be considered for any clayey silt, silty clay, or clay. See the report conclusions
(Allen 2020) for guidance regarding the soil data requirements needed to make
this assessment.
2. Two sacrificial pullout/creep test tiebacks should be installed in each clay unit; one
sacrificial test is for pullout and the other is for pullout and creep testing (see Tables
15-G-1 and 15-G-2). The load zone should be in the target soil unit. The verification
(pullout) tests must be performed prior to production tieback installation.
3. A minimum 15-foot-long bond length is required for the sacrificial verification test
tiebacks. Additional tendon steel should be added to the test tiebacks to make sure
the tieback can be loaded to at least twice the FDL and high enough to achieve
pullout, if possible.
4. Except for the load-cycled performance tests, no load cycling is allowed for tiebacks
in glacial clay units. No retesting is allowed for tiebacks in glacial clay units.
5. If the verification (pullout) test results indicate good creep performance at the
4,320-minute hold time, a creep criterion up to 0.06 inch per log cycle of time could
be considered by the Engineer for straight shafted tiebacks. For pressure-grouted
and post-grouted tiebacks, a creep criterion up to 0.04 inch per log cycle of time
could be considered.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-G-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-G Testing and Acceptance Protocols for Tiebacks in Clay
6. If a tieback fails in creep, lock off the load at 50% of the load at creep failure.
Additional tiebacks may be required to achieve the wall design load resistance.
7. The sacrificial verification test load-hold periods shall start as soon as the test load
is applied and the anchor movement, with respect to a fixed reference, shall be
measured and recorded in accordance with Table 15-G-6.
8. The maximum test load in a cyclic performance test shall be held for 60 minutes.
The load-hold period shall start as soon as the maximum test load is applied and the
tieback movement, with respect to a fixed reference, shall be measured and recorded
in accordance with Table 15-G-6. If the anchor movement between 6 and 60 minutes
exceeds 0.04 inches (0.03 inches for pressure- and post-grouted tiebacks), the
maximum test load shall be held for an additional 300 minutes. If the load-hold is
extended the anchor movement shall be recorded in accordance with Table 15-G-6.
9. The maximum test load in a proof test shall be held for 60 minutes. The load-hold
period shall start as soon as the maximum test load is applied and the anchor
movement, with respect to a fixed reference, shall be measured and recorded in
accordance with Table 15-G-6. If the anchor movement between 6 and 60 minutes
exceeds 0.04 inches, the maximum test load shall be held for an additional 300
minutes. If the load-hold is extended, the tieback movement shall be recorded in
accordance with the 360-minute creep measurements listed in Table 15-G-6.
AL = Alignment Load, FDL = Factored Design Load
References
Allen, Tony M., 2020, I-90 Demonstration Project: Long-Term Performance of Tiebacks
Installed in Glacially Overridden Clays, Washington State Department of Transportation,
Research Report WA-RD 823.1, 252 pp.
Page 15-G-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Hilfiker
Welded Wire Faced Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific design requirements shall be met:
No HITEC evaluation report is currently available for this wall system. Design
procedures for specific elements of the wall system have been provided to WSDOT
in a letter dated September 15, 2003. The design procedures used by Hilfiker
Retaining Walls are in full conformance with the AASHTO Standard Specifications
for Highway Bridges (2002). Interim approval is given for the continued use of the
AASHTO Standard Specifications as the basis for design.
Regarding the soil reinforcement material, the minimum wire size acceptable for
permanent walls is W4.5 for the longitudinal wires. For the transverse wires, the
minimum wire size shall be W3.5. For all permanent walls, the welded wire shall be
galvanized in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD specifications. For temporary
walls, galvanization is not required, but the life of the wire shall be designed to be
adequate for the intended life.
Regarding the backing mats used in the welded wire facing, the minimum clear
opening dimension of the backing mat shall not exceed the minimum particle size
of the wall facing backfill. The maximum particle size for the wall facing backfill shall
be 6 inches.
The maximum vertical spacing of soil reinforcement shall be 24 inches.
The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 4 feet. Larger diameter culverts or obstructions are not considered
preapproved. This wall is also preapproved for use with traffic barriers.
This wall system is preapproved for a welded wire/gravel fill face for vertical to near
vertical facing batter and welded wire vegetated face for wall face batters as steep as
6V:1H. This preapproval presumes that the facing tolerances in the WSDOT Standard
Specifications Section 6-13.3(1) for welded wire faced walls are met.
The following standard details shall be used for the Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced
Wall system:
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-H-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls Appendix 15-H
Page
Page 15-H-2
15-H-2 Geotechnical
WSDOT Geotechnical DesignDesign
ManualManual M 46-03.13
M 46-03.08
October 2013 2020
December
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls Appendix 15-H
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design
Geotechnical Manual
Design M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-H-3
Page 15-H-3
December
October 2013 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls Appendix 15-H
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls
Page 15-H-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-H-4 October M
Geotechnical Design Manual 2013
46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-H Preapproved
Preapproved WallSpecific
Wall Appendix: Appendix: Specific Requirements
Requirements and Details and Details Welded
for Hilfiker for Hilfiker
WireWelded
Faced Wire Faced
Walls Walls 15-H
Appendix
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-H-5
Geotechnical
October 2013 Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-H-5
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Appendix 15-H Specific
Preapproved WallRequirements and Details
Appendix: Specific for Hilfiker
Requirements Welded
and Wire
Details for Faced
HilfikerWalls Appendix
Welded 15-H Walls
Wire Faced
Page 15-H-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-H-6 Geotechnical Design Manual
October M 46-03.13
2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-I Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Eureka
Reinforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply to the design of the Hilfiker Eureka Reinforced Soil concrete
5 feet × 5 feet panel faced retaining wall:
No HITEC evaluation report is currently available for this wall system. The design
procedures used by Hilfiker Retaining Walls are based on the AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002). Therefore, for internal stability of the wall, the
AASHTO Simplified Method shall be used. Interim approval is given for the continued use
of the AASHTO Standard Specifications as the basis for design.
Note the connector shall be designed to have adequate life considering corrosion loss.
Furthermore, the connector loops embedded in the facing panels shall be lined up such
that the steel grid reinforcement cross bar at the connection is uniformly loaded.
Therefore, regarding the alignment of the bearing surfaces of the embedded anchors,
once the steel welded wire grid is inserted into the loops, no loop shall have a gap
between the loop and the steel welded wire grid cross bar of more than 0.125 inch.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for steel grid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications. If, at some future time product
and soil specific pullout data is provided to support use of non-default pullout interaction
coefficients, it should be noted that LRFD pullout resistance design using these product
and soil specific interaction coefficients has not been calibrated using product specific
data statistics and reliability theory. Therefore, the specified resistance factors in the
GDM and AASHTO LRFD Specifications should not be considered applicable to product
specific pullout interaction coefficients.
Approved details for the Hilfiker Eureka Reinforced Soil concrete 5 feet × 5 feet panel
faced retaining wall system are provided in the following plan sheets. Exceptions and
additional requirements regarding the approved details are as follows:
• Regarding the filter fabric shown, WSDOT reserves the right to require the use
Standard Specification materials as specified in Standard Specification Section 9-33 that
are similar to those specified in this plan sheet.
• No culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details for this wall system, as well
as traffic barrier details, were provided. However, the obstruction avoidance details,
as well as traffic barrier details provided for the Hilfiker welded wire wall system
(Chapter 15 App – Hilfiker WW Wall) are acceptable to apply to the Hilfiker Eureka
RS Concrete panel Wall, up to a maximum obstruction diameter of 4 feet. This wall
system is not preapproved for culvert penetration of the face, as no details for this
situation have been provided.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-I-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-I Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Eureka Reinforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls Appendix 15-H
Page 15-H-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Page 15-I-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Eureka Reinforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-I
Appendix 15-H Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-H-3
October 2013
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-I-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-I Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Eureka Reinforced Soil Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Hilfiker Welded Wire Faced Walls Appendix 15-H
Page 15-H-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Page 15-I-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Reinforced
Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the
following specific requirements apply to the design of the Reinforced EarthTM concrete
5 feet × 5 feet panel faced retaining wall:
No HITEC evaluation report is currently available for this wall system. Design procedures
for specific elements of the wall system have been provided to WSDOT in a binder
dated March 29, 2004. The design procedures used by RECO are based on the AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002). Internal stability is based on the use
of the Coherent Gravity method per the other widely used and accepted methods clause
in the AASHTO Standard Specifications. The Coherent Gravity Method should yield
similar results to the AASHTO Simplified Method for this wall system. Interim approval
is given for the continued use of the AASHTO
Standard Specifications and the Coherent Gravity Method as the basis for design.
Note the connector between the wall face panels and the soil reinforcement strips
shall be designed to have adequate life considering corrosion loss as illustrated in the
March 29, 2004 binder provided to WSDOT by RECO.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for steel grid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications. If, at some future time product
and soil specific pullout data is provided to support use of non-default pullout interaction
coefficients, it should be noted that LRFD pullout resistance design using these product
and soil specific interaction coefficients has not been calibrated using product specific
data statistics and reliability theory. Therefore, the specified resistance factors in the
GDM and AASHTO LRFD Specifications should not be considered applicable to product
specific pullout interaction coefficients.
Approved details for the Reinforced EarthTM concrete 5 feet × 5 feet panel faced
retaining wall system are provided in the following plan sheets. Exceptions and additional
requirements regarding these approved details are as follows:
• Several plan sheets were submitted that detail panels with dimensions other than
5 feet × 5 feet. The cruciform shaped panels are also considered preapproved for
use in WSDOT projects. However, unless otherwise shown in the contract, it should
always be assumed that the 5 feet × 5 feet panels are intended for WSDOT projects.
Other panel sizes may be used by special design (e.g., full height panels), with the
approval of the State Bridge Design Engineer and the State Geotechnical Engineer,
provided a complete wall design with detailed plans are developed and included in
the construction contract (i.e., walls with larger facing panels shall not be submitted
as shop drawings in design-bid-build projects).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
• Where filter cloth or geotextile fabric is shown, WSDOT reserves the right to require
the use Standard Specification materials as specified in Standard Specification Section
9-33 that are similar to those specified in this plan sheet.
• Where steel strips are skewed to avoid a backfill obstruction, the maximum skew
angle shall be 15 degrees.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 4 feet. Larger diameter culverts or obstructions are not considered
preapproved. This wall is also preapproved for use with traffic barriers.
Page 15-J-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-3
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-5
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-7
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-9
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-11
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-15
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-17
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-19
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-21
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-22 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-23
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-25
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-27
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-29
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-30 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-31
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-32 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-33
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-34 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-35
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-36 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-37
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-38 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-39
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-40 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-41
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-42 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-43
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-44 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-45
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-46 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-47
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-48 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-J
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-J-49
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Reinforced Earth (RECO) Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-J-50 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Tensar
ARES Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
The detailed design methodology, design properties, and assumptions used by Tensar
Earth Technologies for the ARES wall are summarized in the HITEC evaluation report
for this wall system (HITEC, 1997, Evaluation of the Tensar ARES Retaining Wall System,
ASCE, CERF Report No. 40301). The design methodology, which is based on the
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002) is consistent with the general design
requirements in Appendix 15-A, except as noted below. Interim approval is given for the
continued use of the AASHTO Standard Specifications as the basis for design.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications. For LRFD based design, while it
is recognized that product and soil type specific pullout interaction coefficients obtained
in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Specifications for the Tensar products used with
this wall system are provided in the HITEC report for the ARES Wall system, pullout
resistance design using these product and soil specific interaction coefficients has not
been calibrated using the available product specific data statistics and reliability theory.
Therefore, the specified resistance factors in the GDM and AASHTO LRFD Specifications
should not be considered applicable to the product specific pullout interaction
coefficients provided in the HITEC report.
The reinforcement long-term tensile strengths (Tal) provided in the WSDOT Qualified
Products List (QPL) for the Tensar Geogrid product series, which are based on the 2003
version of the product series, shall be used for wall design, until such time that they
are updated, and the updated strengths approved for WSDOT use in accordance with
WSDOT Standard Practice T 925. Until such time that the long-term reinforcement
strengths are updated, it shall be verified that any material sent to the project site for
this wall system is the 2003 version of the product. Furthermore, the short-term ultimate
tensile strengths (ASTM D6637) listed in the QPL shall be used as the basis for quality
assurance testing and acceptance of the product as shipped to the project site per the
Standard Specifications for Construction.
The HITEC report provided details and design criteria for a panel slot connector to attach
the geogrid reinforcement to the facing panel. Due to problems with cracking of the
facing panel at the location of the slot, that connection system has been discontinued
and replaced with a full thickness panel in which geogrid tabs have been embedded into
the panel. For this new connection system, the geogrid reinforcement is connected to the
geogrid tab through the use of a Bodkin joint. Construction and fabrication inspectors
should verify that the panels to be used for WSDOT projects do not contain the
discontinued slot connector.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-1
December 2020
connection strengths that are approved for use with the ARES wall system.
Tensar15-K
Appendix Soil TensarPreapproved
Panel Wall T ult (MARV)
Appendix: for Geogrid
Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Reinforcement Connector Tab Reinforcement per ASTM D6637 CRu RF Tac (lbs/ft)
Geogrid Product Geogrid Product in WSDOT QPL (lbs/ft)
The Bodkin connection test results provided by letter to WSDOT dated September 28,
UMESA3/ 2004, were UMESA6/
performed on the 2003 version
4,820 of the Tensar geogrid
1.0 product
3.6 line.1,340
In that
UX1400HS letter, itUX1700HS
was stated that UMESA6 (UX1700HS) will typically be used for the connector
UMESA4/ tabs, regardless
UMESA6/ of the product selected for the reinforcement. If a lighter weight
7,880 1.0 will 3.5 2,250
UX1500HS productUX1700HS
is used for the connector tabs, the connection strength need to be reduced
accordingly. Table 15-(Tensar ARES)-1 provides a summary of the connection strengths
UMESA5/ that are approved
UMESA6/ for use with the ARES wall system.
9,870 1.0 3.4 2,900
UX1600HS UX1700HS
UMESA6/ Table 15-K-1
UMESA6/Approved Connection12,200
Strength Design Values for Tensar
0.91 3.3 Ares Walls
3,360
UX1700HS UX1700HS
Tensar Soil Tensar Panel Tult (MARV) for Geogrid
UMESA3/ Reinforcement
UMESA3/ Connector Tab Reinforcement per ASTM D6637 Tac
Geogrid Product Geogrid Product4,820 in WSDOT QPL 0.85
(lbs/ft)3.6 CRu1,140
RF (lbs/ft)
UX1400HS UX1400HS
UMESA3/UX1400HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 4,820 1.0 3.6 1,340
UMESA4/ UMESA4/
UMESA4/UX1500HS 7,880
UMESA6/UX1700HS 7,8800.79 3.5 1,780
1.0 3.5 2,250
UX1500HS UX1500HS
UMESA5/UX1600HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 9,870 1.0 3.4 2,900
UMESA5/ UMESA5/
UMESA6/UX1700HS UMESA6/UX1700HS
9,870 12,200
0.87 3.4 0.912,530
3.3 3,360
UX1600HS UX1600HS
UMESA3/UX1400HS UMESA3/UX1400HS 4,820 0.85 3.6 1,140
UMESA6/ UMESA6/
UMESA4/UX1500HS UMESA4/UX1500HS
12,200 7,8800.91 3.3 0.793,360
3.5 1,780
UX1700HS UX1700HS
UMESA5/UX1600HS UMESA5/UX1600HS 9,870 0.87 3.4 2,530
UMESA6/UX1700HS
Approved ConnectionUMESA6/UX1700HS 12,200Ares Walls 0.91 3.3 3,360
Strength Design Values for Tensar
Table 15-M-1
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows for the Tensar ARES
Twall:
ac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows for the Tensar
ARES wall: TMARV • CR u
Tac =• CR
TMARV (15-(Tensar ARES)-1)
Tac = u
RF (15-(Tensar ARES)-1)
RF
Where:
Where:
RF = RFIDRF RF×IDRF×DRFCR × RFD
= CR
× RF
RF
and,
and, = RF ID × RF CR × RFD
MARV == The
TTMARV Theminimum
minimum average
average roll value
roll value forultimate
for the the ultimate geosynthetic
geosynthetic strength Tult
CRu strength
= The Tultconnection strength Tultconn divided by the lot specific ultimate tensile
ultimate
CRu = strength, Tlot (i.e.,
The ultimate the lot of material
connection strengthspecific
Tultconntodivided
the connection testing)
by the lot specific
RFID = Reduction factor for installation damage
ultimate tensile strength, Tlot (i.e., the lot of material specific to the
RFCR = Creep reduction
connection factor for the geosynthetic
testing)
RF = The durability reduction
RF D = Reduction factor for installation factor for thedamage
geosynthetic
ID
RFCR = Creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic
RFD = The durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic
Page 15-M-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Page 15-K-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Approved details for the Tensar ARES wall system are provided in the following plan
sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details are
as follows:
• For all plan sheets, the full height panel details are not preapproved. Full height panels
may be used by special design, with the approval of the State Bridge Design Engineer
and the State Geotechnical Engineer, provided a complete wall design with detailed
plans are developed and included in the construction contract (i.e., full height panel
walls shall not be submitted as shop drawings in design-bid-build projects).
• In plan sheet 3 of 19, there should be a minimum cover of 4 inches of soil between
the geogrid and the traffic barrier reaction slab.
• In plan sheet 8 of 19, the strength of the geogrid and connection available shall be
reduced by 10% to account for the skew of the geogrid reinforcement. The skew angle
relative to the perpendicular from the wall face shall be no more than 10º.
• In plan sheets 10 and 14 of 19, regarding the filter fabric shown, WSDOT reserves
the right to require the use Standard Specification materials as specified in Standard
Specification Section 9-33 that are similar to those specified in this plan sheet.
• In plan sheet 15 of 19, the guard rail detail, the guard rail post shall either be installed
through precut holes in the geogrid layers that must penetrated, or the geogrid layers
shall be cut in a manner that prevents ripping or tearing of the geogrid.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 2 feet for culvert penetration through the face and up to 4 feet for
obstruction avoidance. Larger diameter culverts or obstructions are not considered
preapproved. This wall is also preapproved for use with traffic barriers.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-5
December 2020
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-5
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
15-M-6
Page WSDOT Geotechnical DesignDecember
Manual 2020M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-7
December 2020
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-7
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Page
15-M-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design December
Manual 2020
M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-9
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
December 2020 M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-9
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-11
December 2020
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-11
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-13
December 2020
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-13
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-15
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
December 2020 M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-15
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-17
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
December 2020 M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-17
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls Appendix 15-K
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-K-19
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
December 2020 M 46-03.08 Page 15-M-19
October 2013
Appendix 15-K Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar ARES Walls
Page 15-K-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Page 15-M-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Tensar
MESA Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
The detailed design methodology, design properties, and assumptions used by Tensar
Earth Technologies for the MESA wall are summarized in the HITEC evaluation report
for this wall system (HITEC, 2000, Evaluation of the Tensar MESA Wall System, ASCE,
CERF Report No. 40358). The design methodology, which is based on the Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002) is consistent with the general design
requirements in Appendix 15-A, except as noted below. Interim approval is given for the
continued use of the AASHTO Standard Specifications as the basis for design.
Considering the currently approved block dimensions, the maximum vertical spacing
of reinforcement allowed to meet the requirements in the AASHTO Specifications is
2 feet. Regarding horizontal spacing of reinforcement strips (i.e., rolls), reinforcement
coverage ratios of greater than 0.7 are acceptable for this wall system. This is based on
having a maximum of one facing block between reinforcement rolls, as allowed by the
AASHTO Specifications.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications. For LRFD based design, while it
is recognized that product and soil type specific pullout interaction coefficients obtained
in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Specifications for the Tensar products used with
this wall system are provided in the HITEC report for the MESA Wall system, pullout
resistance design using these product and soil specific interaction coefficients has not
been calibrated using the available product specific data statistics and reliability theory.
Therefore, the specified resistance factors in the GDM and AASHTO LRFD Specifications
should not be considered applicable to the product specific pullout interaction
coefficients provided in the HITEC report.
The reinforcement long-term tensile strengths (Tal) provided in the Qualified Products List
(QPL) for the Tensar Geogrid product series, which are based on the 2003 version of the
product series, shall be used for wall design, until such time that they are updated, and
the updated strengths approved for WSDOT use in accordance with WSDOT Standard
Practice T 925. Until such time that the long-term reinforcement strengths are updated, it
shall be verified that any material sent to the project site for this wall system is the 2003
version of the product. Furthermore, the short-term ultimate tensile strengths (ASTM
D6637) listed in the QPL shall be used as the basis for quality assurance testing and
acceptance of the product as shipped to the project site per the Standard Specifications
for Construction.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-1
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
TheThe HITEC
HITEC report
report provided
provided connection
connection data
data forfor
thethe
DOT 3 system
DOT 3 system and the HP System.
and the HP System.
Both systems provide partial connection coverage, with the 3
DOT
Both systems provide partial connection coverage, with the DOT system 3 system only providing
only
14 teeth
providing 14per 21per
teeth openings, and the
21 openings, HPthe
and System providing
HP System 17 teeth
providing 17per 21per
teeth openings.
21 The
DOT 3 system shall3 not be used.
openings. The DOT system shall not be used.
TheTheconnection
connectiontesttest
results provided
results provided in the HITEC
in the HITEC report
reportfor for
thisthis
wall system
wall system utilized
utilized
an earlier version
an earlier version(i.e., before
(i.e., before 2003)
2003) of of
thethe
Tensar product
Tensar product series thatthat
series hadhadlowerlower ultimate
ultimate short-term
short-term geogrid geogrid
tensile tensile strengths
strengths than than are currently
are currently approved
approved in theinQPL.
the QPL.
Since
Since connection
connection testtest
datadata have
have notnot beenprovided
been provided forfor
thethecombination
combination ofofthethestronger
strongerTensar
Tensar geogrid
geogrid product
product seriesseries
(i.e.,(i.e., the 2003
the 2003 series),
series), the connection
the connection strengths
strengths in thein the
HITEC
HITEC report
report forolder
for the the older product
product series series
shallshall be used,
be used, which which is likely
is likely conservative.
conservative. Based on
Based
the on the connection
connection data provided
data provided in the in the HITEC
HITEC report
report for thisfor
wallthis wall system,
system, the short-term,
the ultimate
short-term, ultimate strength
connection connection strengthfactor,
reduction reduction
CRu, factor,
for theCR Tensar
u , for the
geogrid,Tensar
MESA block
geogrid, MESA using
combination block thecombination
HP Connector usingsystem
the HPisConnector
as provided system
in Tableis as15-(Tensar
provided MESA)-1
in
Table
for15-(Tensar
each product MESA)-1
approved forfor
eachuseproduct
with the approved for useTable
MESA system. with 15-(Tensar
the MESA system. MESA)-1 also
Table 15-(Tensar
provides MESA)-1value
the approved also of
provides the approved
Tac, as defined in the value
AASHTO ac, as defined
of TLRFD in the
Specifications,
AASHTO
assuming LRFD Specifications,
a durability reduction assuming
factor ofa1.1.
durability reduction factor of 1.1.
Tult (MARV) for Tult (MARV) for *CRu if CRcr if
Table 15-L-1 Approved
Geogrid per Connection Strength
Geogrid per CRuDesign
2003Values
Tult for Tensar
2003MESA
Tult Walls
Tensar ASTM D6637 in ASTM D6637 for from (MARV) (MARV)
Tult (MARV) for T (MARV) for CR
Geogrid HITEC Report 2003ultProduct HITEC u Values Values Tac
Tensar Geogrid per ASTM Geogrid per ASTM from *CRu if 2003 CR if 2003
Product (lbs/ft) (lbs/ft) Report Used RFCR Usedcr (lbs/ft)
Geogrid D6637 in HITEC D6637 for 2003 HITEC Tult (MARV) Tult (MARV) Tac
UMESA3
Product 4400 (lbs/ft)
Report 4820 (lbs/ft) 0.79
Product Report 0.72 2.6 RF 0.28
Values Used Values 1200 (lbs/ft)
Used
CR
UMESA4
UMESA3 6850 4400 7880 4820 0.730.79 0.630.72 2.6 2.6 0.24 0.281720 1200
UMESA5 9030 9870 0.80 0.73 2.6 0.28 2510
UMESA4 6850 7880 0.73 0.63 2.6 0.24 1720
UMESA6 10,700 12200 0.75 0.66 2.6 0.25 2770
UMESA5 9030 9870 0.80 0.73 2.6 0.28 2510
*i.e.,UMESA6 10,700
to get same Tultconn 12200
value as in HITEC report. 0.75 0.66 2.6 0.25 2770
*i.e., to get sameConnection
Approved Tultconn value as in HITEC report.
Strength Design Values for Tensar MESA Walls
Table 15-J-1
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
T • CRu (15-L-1)
Tac = MARV (15-J-1)
RFCR • RFD
Where:
where,
TMARV the
TMARV theminimum averageroll
minimum average rollvalue
value
forfor
thethe ultimate
ultimate geosynthetic
geosynthetic strength Tult,
CRu strength T ,
ult connection strength Tultconn divided by the lot specific ultimate tensile
= the ultimate
CRu = the ultimate
strength, Tlotconnection strength
(i.e., the lot of materialTspecific divided
ultconn to by the lottesting),
the connection specific
RFCR = ultimate tensile strength,
creep reduction Tlotgeosynthetic,
factor for the (i.e., the lot and
of material specific to the
RFD = connection testing),
the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
RFCR = creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic, and
RFD = the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
Page 15-J-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-L-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Since the HITEC report was developed, Tensar Earth Technologies has developed a new
connector that provides, for the most part, a full coverage connector, providing 19 teeth
per 21 openings. Short-term connection tests on the strongest geogrid product in the
series shows that connection strengths higher than those obtained with the HP System
will be obtained with the new connector, which is called the DOT system (note that the
3 has been dropped – this is not the same as the DOT3 system). This new DOT System
may be used, provided that the values for Tac shown in Table 15-(Tensar MESA)-1 are used
for design, which should be conservative, until a more complete set of test results are
available. Photographs illustrating the new DOT connector system are provided in Figures
15-(Tensar MESA)-1 through 15-(Tensar MESA)-3.
The longitudinal (i.e., in the direction of loading) and transverse (i.e., parallel to the
wall or slope face) ribs that make up the geogrid shall be perpendicular to one another.
The maximum deviation of the cross-rib from being perpendicular to the longitudinal
rib (skew) shall be manufactured to be no more than 1 inch in 5 feet of geogrid width.
The maximum deviation of the cross-rib at any point from a line perpendicular to the
longitudinal ribs located at the cross-rib (bow) shall be 0.5 inches.
The gap between the connector tabs and the bearing surface of the geogrid
reinforcement cross-rib shall not exceed 0.5 inches. A maximum of 10% of connector tabs
may have a gap between 0.3 inches and 0.5 inches. Gaps in the remaining connector tabs
shall not exceed 0.3 inches.
Concrete for dry cast concrete blocks used in the Tensar MESA wall system shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi.
2. Conform to ASTM C1372.
3. The lot of blocks produced for use in this project shall conform to the following
freeze-thaw test requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1262:
• Minimum acceptable performance shall be defined as weight loss at the
conclusion of 150 freeze-thaw cycles not exceeding one percent of the block’s
initial weight for a minimum of four of the five block specimens tested.
4. The concrete blocks shall have a maximum water absorption of one percent above
the water absorption content of the lot of blocks produced and successfully tested
for the freeze-thaw test specified in the preceding paragraph.
It is noted in ASTM C1372 that a dimensional tolerance for the height of the block of
1/8 inch is allowed, but that Elias, et al. (2001), which is referenced in Chapter 15 and by
the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges (2002) recommends a tighter
dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch. Based on WSDOT experience, for walls greater than
25 feet in height, some cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses tends
to occur in the bottom portion of the wall. Therefore, blocks placed at depths below the
wall top of 25 feet or more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch
to reduce the risk of significant cracking of facing blocks.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-3
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Figure 15-L-1 MESA DOT System Connector and Block
MESA DOT System Connector and Block
Figure 15-J-1
MESA DOT System Connector and Block
Figure 15-J-1
Figure 15-L-2 MESA DOT System Connector and Block as Assembled
MESA DOT System Connector and Block as Assembled
Figure 15-J-2
MESA DOT System Connector and Block as Assembled
Figure 15-J-2
Page 15-J-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-L-4 October 2013
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Page 15-J-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual 2020
December M 46-03.08
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Figure 15-L-3 MESA DOT System Connector and Block as Assembled, With Block Placed
on Top
MESA
Block DOT System
connectors forConnector andwith
block courses Block as Assembled,
geogrid With
reinforcement Block
shall Placed
be glass fiberon Top
reinforced high-density polypropyleneFigure 15-J-3 to the following minimum material
conforming
specifications:
Block connectors for block courses with geogrid reinforcement shall be glass fiber
reinforced high-density polypropylene conforming to the following minimum
Property Specification Value
material specifications:
Polypropylene ASTM D 4101 73 ± 2 percent
Property Group Specification
1 Class 1 Grade 2 Value
Polypropylene
Fiberglass Content ASTM ASTM
D 2584D 4101 7325
± 2± percent
3 percent
Group 1 Class 1 Grade 2
Carbon Black ASTM D 4218 2 percent minimum
Fiberglass Content ASTM D 2584 25 ± 3 percent
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.08 ± 0.04
Carbon Black ASTM D 4218 2 percent minimum
Tensile Strength at yield ASTM D 638 8,700 ± 1,450 psi
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.08 ± 0.04
Melt Flow Rate ASTM D 1238 0.37 ± 0.16 ounces/10 min.
Tensile Strength at yield ASTM D 638 8,700 ± 1,450 psi
Block connectors for block courses without
Melt Flow Rate ASTM Dgeogrid
1238 reinforcement0.37 shall±be glass
0.16 fiber min.
ounces/10
reinforced
Blockhigh-density polyethylene
connectors for (HDPE)
block courses conforming
without to the following
geogrid reinforcement minimum
shall be glass fiber
materialreinforced
specifications:
high-density polyethylene (HDPE) conforming to the following minimum
material specifications:
Property Specification Value
HDPE Property ASTM Specification
D 1248 Value
68 ± 3 percent
HDPE Group ASTM
3 ClassD1 1248
Grade 5 68 ± 3 percent
Fiberglass Content Group
ASTM D 2584 3 Class 1 Grade 5 30 ± 3 percent
Fiberglass Content ASTM D 2584 30 ± 3 percent
Carbon Black ASTM D 4218 2 percent minimum
Carbon Black ASTM D 4218 2 percent minimum
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.16 ± 0.06
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.16 ± 0.06
Tensile Strength at yield ASTM D 638 8,700 ± 725 psi
Tensile Strength at yield ASTM D 638 8,700 ± 725 psi
Melt Flow Rate ASTM D 1238 0.11 ± 0.07 ounces/10 min.
Melt Flow Rate ASTM D 1238 0.11 ± 0.07 ounces/10 min.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-5
December 2020
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-J-5
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Approved details for the Tensar MESA wall system with the DOT System connector are
provided in the following plan sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding
these approved details are as follows:
• In plan sheet 5 of 13, the guard rail detail, the guard rail post shall either be installed
through precut holes in the geogrid layers that must penetrated, or the geogrid layers
shall be cut in a manner that prevents ripping or tearing of the geogrid.
• In plan sheets 4, 6, and 8 of 13, regarding the geotextiles and drainage composites
shown, WSDOT reserves the right to require the use Standard Specifications materials
as specified in Standard Specification Section 9-33 that are similar to those specified
in this plan sheet.
• In plan sheet 7 of 13, regarding the geogrid at wall corner detail, cords in the wall
facing alignment to form an angle point or a radius shall be no shorter than the width
of the roll to insure good contact between the connectors and the geogrid cross-
bar throughout the width of the geogrid. Alternatively, the geogrid roll could be cut
longitudinally in half to allow a tighter radius, if necessary.
• In plan sheet 7 of 13, regarding the typical geogrid percent coverage, the maximum
distance X between geogrid strips shall be one block width. Therefore, the minimum
percent coverage shall be 73 percent.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 2 feet for culvert penetration through the face and up to 4 feet for
obstruction avoidance. Larger diameter culverts or obstructions are not considered
preapproved. This wall is also preapproved for use with traffic barriers.
Page 15-L-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-7
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-9
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-11
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-15
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-17
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-J
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-J Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls Appendix 15-L
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-L-19
December 2020
Appendix 15-L Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar MESA Walls
Page 15-L-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Tensar
Welded Wire Form Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific design requirements shall be met:
No HITEC evaluation report is currently available for this wall system. Design procedures
for specific elements of the wall system have been provided to WSDOT in a submittal
dated May 20, 2005, and final Wall Details submitted May 26, 2005. The design
procedures used by Tensar Earth Technologies (TET) are in full conformance with the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications (2004).
This wall system consists of Tensar geogrid reinforcement that is connected to a welded
wire facing panel. Regarding the welded wire facing panel, the minimum wire size
acceptable for permanent walls is W4.5, and the welded wire shall be galvanized in
accordance with the AASHTO LRFD specifications. The actual wire size submitted is
W4.0. The exception regarding the wire size is allowed. Due to the smaller wire size, there
is some risk that the welded wire form will not provide the full 75 year life required for
the wall. Therefore, to insure internal stability of the wall, the geogrid reinforcement shall
be wrapped fully behind the face to add the redundancy needed to insure the wall face
system is stable for the required design life. The galvanization requirement for the welded
wire form still applies, however, as failure of the welded wire form at some point during
the wall design life could allow some local sagging of the wall face to occur. The minimum
clear opening dimension of the facing panel, or backing mat if present, shall not exceed
the minimum particle size of the wall facing backfill. The maximum particle size for the
wall facing backfill shall be 4 inches. The maximum vertical spacing of soil reinforcement
shall be 18 inches for vertical and battered wall facings.
The geogrid tensile strengths used for design for this wall system shall be aslisted in the
WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL).
The Bodkin connection shown in the typical cross-section (page 15-(Tensar WW)-1) may
be used subject to the following conditions:
• No more than one Bodkin connection may be used within any given layer, andon no
more than 50% of the layers in a given section ofwall.
• If the Bodkin connection is located outside of the active zone for the wall as defined
in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications plus 3 feet and is located at least
4 feet from the face, no reduction in design tensile strength due to the presence of
the Bodkin connection is required.
• If the Bodkin connection is located closer to the wall face than as described
immediately above, the design tensile strength of the reinforcement shall be
reduced to account for the Bodkin connection. Table 15-(Tensar WW)-1 provides a
summary of the reduction factors to be applied to account for the presence of the
Bodkin connection.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-M-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Table 15-M-1 Approved Bodkin Connection Strength Reduction Factors for Tensar
Welded Wire Form Walls
Tensar Primary
SoilReinforcement Tensar Product to Which Soil Connection Strength Reduction
Geogrid Product Reinforcement is Connected Factor, CRu
UMESA3/UX1400HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 1.0
UMESA4/UX1500HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 1.0
UMESA5/UX1600HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 1.0
UMESA6/UX1700HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 0.91
UMESA3/UX1400HS UMESA3/UX1400HS 0.85
UMESA4/UX1500HS UMESA4/UX1500HS 0.79
UMESA5/UX1600HS UMESA5/UX1600HS 0.87
UMESA6/UX1700HS UMESA6/UX1700HS 0.91
Approved details for the Tensar Welded Wire Form Wall system are provided in the
following plan sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved
details are as follows:
• Though not shown in the approved plan sheets, if guard rail is to be placed at the top
of the wall, the guard rail post shall either be installed through precut holes in the
geogrid layers that must penetrated, or the geogrid layers shall be cut in a manner that
prevents ripping or tearing of the geogrid.
• In plan sheets on pages 3, 4, 5, and 13, regarding the geotextiles shown,WSDOT
reserves the right to require the use Standard Specification materials as specified in
Standard Specification Section 9-33 that are similar to those specified in this plansheet.
• Regarding the plantable face alternate plan details on page 6, this alternativeshall only
be considered approved if specifically called out in the contract specifications.
• Regarding the welded wire form and support strut details on page 7,galvanization is
required per the contract specifications for all permanent walls.
• Regarding the geogrid penetration plan sheet detail on page 15, alternative 1 from
Article 11.10.10.4 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications shall be followed
to account for the portion of the geogrid layer cut through by the penetration. For
penetration diameters larger than 30 inches or closer than 3 feet
• from the wall face, Alternative 2 in AASHTO LRFD Article 11.10.10.4 shall apply to
accommodate the load transfer and to provide a stable wall face.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 4 feet for culvert penetration through the face and up to 2.5 feet for
obstruction avoidance. Larger diameter culverts or obstructions are not considered
preapproved. This wall is also preapproved for use with traffic barriers.
• This wall system is preapproved for both a welded wire/gravel fill face for vertical
to near vertical facing batter, and welded wire vegetated face, provided aminimum
horizontal step of 6 inches between each facing lift is used, effectively battering the
wall face at 3V:1H or flatter. The horizontal step is necessary to reduce vertical stress
on the relatively compressible topsoil placed immediately behind the facing so that
settlement of the facing does notoccur.
Page 15-M-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-M-3
December 2020
Page 15-(Tensar WW)-3
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-4 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
June 2006
Page 15-M-5
December 2020 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-5
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-6 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-7 Page 15-M-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-8 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-9 Page 15-M-9
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-10 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-11 Page 15-M-11
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-12 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-13 Page 15-M-13
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-14 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-15 Page 15-M-15
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual June 2006
Page 15-M-16 Page 15-(Tensar WW)-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-M-17
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Page 15-M-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls Appendix 15-M
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-M-19
December 2020
Appendix 15-M Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Tensar Welded Wire Form Walls
Page 15-M-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements and Details
for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply to the design of the SSL MSE PlusTM Retaining Wall:
The welded wire steel soil reinforcement shall be comprised of W11, W20, or W24
smooth wire as shown and noted in the preapproved SSL MSEPlus wall system drawings.
Deformed bars shall not be used for soil reinforcement. As SSL has committed to
always supply soil reinforcement steel with a minimum yield strength of 75 ksi, the soil
reinforcement steel shall be designed for a yield strength, Fy, of 75 ksi, which is greater
than the minimum yield strength specified in ASTM A82. Because the yield strength is
greater than the minimum yield strength allowed by ASTM A82, as a minimum, the yield
strength of the steel shipped to the project site will be verified that it meets the minimum
Fy of 75 ksi through the tensile test results for the as delivered material, and WSDOT
reserves the right to conduct its own tensile tests to verify the steel yield strength.
The design of the connection between the facing panels and the soil reinforcement shall
meet the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification requirements. To determine the
connection strength, the following values of the short-term (i.e., uncorroded) connection
strength ratio CRu shall be used:
Welded Wire Soil Reinforcement Wire Size Short-Term Connection Strength Ratio, CRu
Welded Wire Soil Short-Term Connection
Reinforcement Wire Size Strength Ration, CRu
W11 0.98
W20 0.87
W24 0.96
Minimum bend radii for the welded wire soil reinforcement shall be as shown in the
preapproved plans (sheet 4 of 15 titled “Standard Details 3 of 3”).
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for steel grid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications. If, at some future time product
and soil specific pullout data is provided to support use of non-default pullout interaction
coefficients, it should be noted that LRFD pullout resistance design using these product
and soil specific interaction coefficients has not been calibrated using product specific
data statistics and reliability theory. Therefore, the specified resistance factors in the
GDM and AASHTO LRFD Specifications should not be considered applicable to product
specific pullout interaction coefficients.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-N-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Approved details for the SSL MSE PlusTM wall system are provided in the following
plan sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details
are as follows:
• In plan sheet 4 of 10, regarding the filter fabric shown, the use Standard Specification
materials as specified in Standard Specification M 41-10 Section 9-33 that are similar
to those specified in this plan sheet shall be used.
• In plan sheets 4 of 15, 2 of 10, and 5 of 10, there should be a minimum cover
of 4 inches of soil between the steel grid and the traffic barrier reaction slab.
Quality control of the materials used in the SSL MSEPlus wall system shall meet the
requirements in the SSL Quality Control Manual, Revision 4, dated 5/31/2012.
Page 15-N-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-Q
Preapproved Preapproved
Wall Appendix: SpecificWall Appendix: and
Requirements Specifi c Requirements
Details and Details
for SSL Concrete Panel for SSL Concrete
Walls Panel Walls
Appendix 15-N
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-Q-3
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-N-3
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-4
Page 15-Q-4 WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical Design
Design Manual
Manual MM46-03.13
46-03.08
December
October2020
2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-N
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design Manual Design
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08 PagePage
15-N-5
15-Q-5
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N
Preapproved Wall Preapproved Wall cAppendix:
Appendix: Specifi Specific
Requirements andRequirements and
Details for SSL Details Panel
Concrete for SSL Concrete Panel
Walls Walls
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-Q-6
Page 15-N-6 WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical Design
Design ManualM 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08
October
December 20202013
Preapproved Wall15-Q
Appendix Appendix: Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specififor SSL Concrete and
c Requirements Panel Walls for SSL Concrete
Details Appendix 15-NWalls
Panel
WSDOT
Geotechnical Geotechnical
Design Manual Design Manual
M 46-03.13 M 46-03.08 PagePage 15-Q-7
15-N-7
October
December 2020 2013
Appendix 15-N
Preapproved Preapproved
Wall Wall Appendix:
Appendix: Specifi Specificand
c Requirements Requirements andConcrete
Details for SSL Details for SSL Walls
Panel Concrete Panel Walls 15-Q
Appendix
Page 15-N-8
Page 15-Q-8 Geotechnical
WSDOT Design
Geotechnical Manual
Design M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08
December 2020 2013
October
Preapproved Wall15-Q
Appendix Appendix: Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specififor SSL Concrete and
c Requirements Panel Walls for SSL Concrete
Details Appendix 15-NWalls
Panel
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design Manual Design
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08 PagePage
15-N-9
15-Q-9
December 2020 2013
October
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-10
Page 15-Q-10 Geotechnical Design
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
Manual M
M 46-03.13
46-03.08
December
October 2020
2013
Preapproved Wall
Appendix Appendix:Preapproved
15-Q Specific Requirements and Specifi
Wall Appendix: Detailscfor SSL Concrete
Requirements Panel
and Walls
Details Appendix
for SSL Concrete 15-N
Panel Walls
WSDOTDesign
Geotechnical Geotechnical
Manual Design Manual
M 46-03.13 M 46-03.08 Page
Page 15-Q-11
15-N-11
October
December 20202013
Appendix 15-N Wall Appendix:
Preapproved Preapproved Wall
Specifi Appendix: Specific
c Requirements Requirements
and Details and Details
for SSL Concrete forWalls
Panel SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-12
Page 15-Q-12 Geotechnical Design
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
Manual M
M 46-03.13
46-03.08
December
October 2020
2013
Preapproved Wall
Appendix Appendix:Preapproved
15-Q Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor SSL Concrete
Requirements Panel
and Walls
Details Appendix
for SSL Concrete 15-N
Panel Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOTDesign Manual Design
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-N-13
Page 15-Q-13
December 20202013
October
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Page 15-Q-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
December 2020
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-N
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-N-15
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-Q-15
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
PagePage
15-N-16
15-Q-16 WSDOTGeotechnical
GeotechnicalDesign
DesignManual
Manual MM46-03.13
46-03.08
December
October2020
2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-N
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design Manual Design
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08 PagePage
15-N-17
15-Q-17
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-18
Page 15-Q-18 Geotechnical
WSDOT Design
Geotechnical Manual
Design M 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08
December 2020 2013
October
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-N
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design Manual
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-N-19
Page 15-Q-19
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N
Preapproved Wall Preapproved WallcAppendix:
Appendix: Specifi Specific
Requirements andRequirements and
Details for SSL Details Panel
Concrete for SSL Concrete Panel
Walls Walls
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-Q-20
Page 15-N-20 WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical Design
Design ManualM 46-03.13
Manual M 46-03.08
October
December 2013
2020
Preapproved
AppendixWall
15-QAppendix: Specific Requirements
Preapproved andSpecifi
Wall Appendix: Details for SSL Concrete
c Requirements andPanel Walls
Details Appendix
for SSL Concrete Panel15-N
Walls
WSDOT Geotechnical
Geotechnical Design
Design Manual Manual
M 46-03.13 M 46-03.08 Page
Page 15-Q-21
15-N-21
October
December 20202013
Appendix 15-N
Preapproved Wall Preapproved Wall c
Appendix: Specifi Appendix: Specific
Requirements andRequirements and
Details for SSL Details Panel
Concrete for SSL Concrete Panel
Walls Walls
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-22
Page 15-Q-22 Geotechnical
WSDOT Design
Geotechnical Manual
Design ManualM 46-03.13
M 46-03.08
December 2020
October 2013
Preapproved Wall
Appendix Appendix:
15-Q Specific Requirements
Preapproved and Specifi
Wall Appendix: Detailscfor SSL Concrete
Requirements andPanel Walls
Details Appendix
for SSL Concrete 15-N
Panel Walls
Geotechnical
WSDOT Design Manual
Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-N-23
Page 15-Q-23
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-N-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Page 15-Q-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
December 2020
October 2013
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls Appendix 15-N
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-N-25
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-Q-25
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N
Preapproved Preapproved
Wall Appendix: WallcAppendix:
Specifi Specific
Requirements and Requirements
Details for SSLand DetailsPanel
Concrete for SSL ConcreteAppendix
Walls Panel Walls
15-Q
Page Page
15-N-26
15-Q-26 Geotechnical
WSDOT Design
Geotechnical Manual
Design Manual M 46-03.13
M 46-03.08
December
October2020
2013
Preapproved Wall
Appendix Appendix:
15-Q Specific Requirements
Preapproved andSpecifi
Wall Appendix: Detailsc for SSL Concrete
Requirements andPanel Walls
Details Appendix
for SSL Concrete 15-N
Panel Walls
Geotechnical Design Manual
WSDOT Geotechnical M 46-03.13
Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-N-27
Page 15-Q-27
December 2020
October 2013
Appendix 15-N Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for SSL Concrete Panel Walls
Page 15-N-28 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Landmark
Reinforced Soil Wall
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
Facing Blocks –Blocks acceptable for use are the Landmark tapered and straight blocks.
These blocks can form facing batters of vertical (0 degrees) to 4 degrees. Considering
the currently approved block dimensions, the maximum vertical spacing of reinforcement
allowed to meet the requirements in the AASHTO Specifications is 2.5 feet.
Soil Reinforcement – Only geosynthetic reinforcement listed in the QPL and which has
been evaluated for connection strength with the Landmark wall system shall be used.
Therefore, the following specific QPL geosynthetic reinforcement products are approved
for use with this wall system:
Miragrid 5XT
Miragrid 8XT
Miragrid 10XT
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
Reinforcement/Facing Block Connection Requirements – The connection between
Landmark facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement is essentially a mechanical
connection, with the possible exception of the connection when Miragrid 10XT is used.
For mechanical connections, the connection resistance is generally not dependent on
the normal force between blocks. The connection testing conducted for this wall system
demonstrates that the connection is behaving as a mechanical connection for the
Miragrid 5XT and 8XT. For the 10XT, the connection strength increases as normal stress
increases. Therefore, it is likely that the connection with Miragrid 10XT is at least partially
depending on frictional resistance. The design facing/reinforcement connection strength
shall be as specified in the following table.
Table 15-O-1 Approved Connection Strength Design Values for Landmark Walls
Creep Reduction
Factor applicable to
Tlot the Connection (use
Block Geogrid Product Tultconn (lbs/ft) (lbs/ft) CRu for RFCR in Eq. 1)
Straight Miragrid 5XT 2800+ 3844 0.73 1.45*
Block Miragrid 8XT 4000 6564 0.61 1.45*
Miragrid 10XT 3948+N*Tan 16o 9456 Tultconn/9456 1.2
Tapered Miragrid 5XT 2837 – N*Tan7o 3844 Tultconn/3844 1.45*
Block Miragrid 8XT 4250 – N*Tan5o 6564 Tultconn/6564 1.45*
Miragrid 10XT 3770+N*Tan 30o to
N = 2850 lbs/ft, 9456 Tultconn/9456 1.2
and 5400 lbs/ft at N > 2850 lbs/ft
N = normal load at reinforcement layer at facing, in lbs/ft of width parallel to face.
+This is a lower bound value – see connection test results in report by Bathurst, Clarabut Geotechnical Testing, Inc., Project
report No. BCGT9930, 9/1/2000.
*Same as the value of RFCR reported in the QPL, Appendix D for these geogrid products.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-O-1
December 2020
Project report No. BCGT9930, 9/1/2000.
*Same as the value of RFCR reported in the QPL, Appendix D for these geogrid products.
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall
Approved Connection Strength Design Values for Landmark Walls
Table 15-R-1
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
T × CRU
Tac × MARV
RFCR × RFD
Where:
where,
TMARV= = the
TMARV theminimum
minimum averageaveragerollroll value
value for for
the the ultimate
ultimate geosynthetic
geosynthetic strength Tult,
CRu = strength Tult,connection strength Tultconn divided by the lot specific ultimate tensile
the ultimate
CRu = the strength,
ultimateTlot connection
(i.e., the lot of materialTspecificdivided
strength to the connection
by the lottesting),
ultconn
RFCR = specific
creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic, and
ultimate tensile strength, Tlot (i.e., the lot of material
RFD = specific
the durability
to thereduction
connection factor for the geosynthetic.
testing),
RF = creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic, and
RFCRCRand RFD shall be as provided in the QPL, Appendix D, except as noted in the
RFD = the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
previous table. Regarding the Miragrid 10XT, the sustained load test results indicate that
RFthe
CR and RF D shall
connection be as provided
resistance reductionin the
dueQPL, Appendix
to creep is not D,
as except
large asasfor
noted in thetwo
the other
previous
Miragrid table. Regarding
products, likelythe
dueMiragrid
to the fact10XT,
thatthe sustained
at least someload testconnection
of the results indicate
resistance
thatisthe connection
frictional resistance
in nature ratherreduction
than fully due to creep Therefore,
mechanical. is not as large
the as for the
lower other
creep two
reduction
Miragrid
factor forproducts, likely due
the Miragrid 10XT toisthe fact that at least some of the connection resistance
acceptable.
is frictional in nature rather than fully mechanical. Therefore, the lower creep reduction
It isfor
factor noted
the in ASTM C1372
Miragrid 10XT isthat a dimensional tolerance for the height of the block of
acceptable.
1/8 inch is allowed, but that Section 15.5.3.8 recommends a tighter dimensional tolerance
It isofnoted in ASTM
1/16 inch. Based C1372
on WSDOT that aexperience,
dimensional fortolerance for the
walls greater thanheight of the
25 feet block some
in height,
of 1/8 inch is allowed, but that Section 15.5.3.8 recommends a tighter dimensional
cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses tends to occur in the bottom
tolerance
portionofof1/16 inch.Therefore,
the wall. Based on WSDOT experience,
blocks placed forbelow
at depths walls greater
the wallthan
top 25 feetfeet or
of 25
in height, some cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses
more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch to reduce the risk oftends
to occur in thecracking
significant bottom of
portion
facingofblocks.
the wall. Therefore, blocks placed at depths below
the wall top of 25 feet or more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance of
1/16 Approved detailsthe
inch to reduce for risk
the Landmark wallcracking
of significant system are provided
of facing in the following plan sheets.
blocks.
Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details are as follows:
• In plan sheet 5 of 6, the guard rail detail, the guard rail post shall either be installed
through precut holes in the geogrid layers that must penetrated, or the geogrid layers
shall be cut in a manner that prevents ripping or tearing of the geogrid.
• In plan sheet 3 of 6, regarding the geogrid at wall corner detail, cords in the wall
Page 15-R-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
facing alignment to form an angle point or a radius shall be no shorterOctober
than the width
2013
of the roll to insure good contact between the connectors and the geogrid cross-
bar throughout the width of the geogrid. Alternatively, the geogrid roll could be cut
longitudinally in half to allow a tighter radius, if necessary.
Page 15-O-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall Appendix 15-R
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall Appendix 15-O
Page 15-R-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-O-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-R Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall
Appendix 15-O Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Landmark Reinforced Soil Wall
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-R-5
October 2013
Page 15-O-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall
Preapproved Appendix:
Wall Specific
Appendix: Requirements
Specific and
Requirements Details
and forfor
Details Landmark Reinforced
Landmark Soil
Reinforced Wall
Soil Appendix15-R
Wall Appendix 15-O
Page 15-R-6Design Manual M 46-03.13
Geotechnical WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page
M 46-03.08
15-O-5
December 2020 October 2013
Appendix
Appendix15-O PreapprovedWall
15-R Preapproved Wall Appendix:Specific
Appendix: SpecificRequirements
Requirementsand
andDetails
Detailsfor
forLandmark
LandmarkReinforced
ReinforcedSoil
SoilWall
Wall
WSDOT
Page Geotechnical Design Manual
15-O-6 M 46-03.08 Page
Geotechnical Design Manual 15-R-7
M 46-03.13
October 2013 December 2020
Preapproved Wall
Preapproved Appendix:
Wall Specific
Appendix: Requirements
Specific and
Requirements Details
and forfor
Details Landmark Reinforced
Landmark Soil
Reinforced Wall
Soil Appendix15-R
Wall Appendix 15-O
Geotechnical
Page 15-R-8Design Manual M 46-03.13 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page 15-O-7
M 46-03.08
December 2020 October 2013
Appendix
Appendix 15-O Preapproved
15-R Preapproved Wall
Wall Appendix:
Appendix: Specific
Specific Requirements
Requirements and
and Details
Details forfor Landmark
Landmark Reinforced
Reinforced Soil
Soil Wall
Wall
Page 15-O-8
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Geotechnical Design Manual
PageM15-R-9
46-03.13
October 2013 December 2020
Preapproved Wall
Preapproved Appendix:
Wall Specific
Appendix: Requirements
Specific and
Requirements Details
and forfor
Details Landmark Reinforced
Landmark Soil
Reinforced Wall
Soil Appendix 15-R
Wall Appendix 15-O
Page 15-R-10
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page
M 46-03.08
15-O-9
December 2020 October 2013
Appendix
Appendix15-O PreapprovedWall
15-R Preapproved WallAppendix:
Appendix:Specific
SpecificRequirements
Requirementsand
andDetails
Detailsfor
forLandmark
LandmarkReinforced
ReinforcedSoil
SoilWall
Wall
WSDOT
Page Geotechnical Design Manual
15-O-10 M 46-03.08 Page
Geotechnical Design Manual M15-R-11
46-03.13
October 2013 December 2020
Preapproved
Preapproved Wall
WallAppendix:
Appendix: Specific
Specific Requirements
Requirements and
and Details
Details for
for Landmark
Landmark Reinforced
Reinforced Soil
Soil Wall Appendix
Wall Appendix 15-O
15-R
Page 15-R-12 Design Manual M 46-03.13
Geotechnical WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual Page
M 46-03.08
15-O-11
December 2020 October 2013
Appendix
Appendix15-O PreapprovedWall
15-R Preapproved WallAppendix:
Appendix:Specific
SpecificRequirements
Requirementsand
andDetails
Detailsfor
forLandmark
LandmarkReinforced
ReinforcedSoil
SoilWall
Wall
Page 15-O-12
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Geotechnical Design Manual
PageM 15-R-13
46-03.13
October 2013 December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements and Details
for Allan Block Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
Facing Blocks –Blocks acceptable for use with this wall system include, AB Classic, and
AB Vertical. These blocks are for a facing batter of 1o, 3o, and 6o degrees. Considering the
currently approved block dimensions, the maximum vertical spacing of reinforcement
allowed to meet the requirements in the AASHTO Specifications is 2 ft.
Soil Reinforcement – Only geosynthetic reinforcement listed in the WSDOT QPL and
which has been evaluated for connection strength with the Allan Block wall system shall
be used. For walls with a face batter of 1 degrees or more (i.e., facing blocks, AB Classic,
and AB Vertical), this includes the following specific products that are approved for use
with this wall system:
Miragrid 3XT Stratagrid SG200
Miragrid 5XT Stratagrid SG350
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
Reinforcement/Facing Block Connection Requirements – Connection testing was done
for the range of blocks and geosynthetic reinforcements preapproved for this wall system.
The connection between Allan Block facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement
is essentially a frictional connection. That being the case, the connection resistance is
strongly dependent on the normal force between blocks and in the gravel in-fill inside
the blocks and less dependent on the roll or lot specific tensile strength, Tlot, as well as
the long-term effect of creep on the connection strength. However, neither Tlot for each
test (only TMARV values for the tested geogrids were provided), nor connection creep
tests, were provided. Since no connection creep tests were provided, as required in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design manual, RFCR must be used to obtain Tac. Therefore, the
long-term connection strength (i.e., Tac) equation provided in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Manual will need to be simplified to the equation shown below:
%&'()*++ (15-P-1)
𝑇𝑇"# = (15-N
,-./ 0,-1
where,
Tultconn is the ultimate connection strength from the product specific connection strength
tests, the results of which are provided in Table 15-S-1,
RFCR = creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic, and
RFD = the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
RFCR and RFD shall be as provided in the WSDOT QPL, Appendix D.
Table 15-P-1 Approved connection strength design values for Allan Block walls
Applicable Tultconn (lbs/ft)
Facing Normal Load, N
Blocks Geogrid Product (lbs/ft) Facing Batter = 1o or 3o Facing Batter = 6o
N ≤ 2474 1239 + N*Tan 26o 1193 + N*Tan 29o
Miragrid 3XT
N > 2474 2,450 2,560
N ≤ 3713 1320 + N*Tan 27o 1287 + N*Tan 29o
AB Classic Miragrid 5XT
N > 3713 3,210 3,350
and AB
Vertical Stratagrid SG200 N ≤ 2474 890 + N*Tan 34o 1383 + N*Tan 18o
N > 2474 2,560 2,190
N ≤ 3713 1079 + N*Tan 19o 1257 + N*Tan 12o
Stratagrid SG350
N > 3713 2,360 2,050
N = normal load at reinforcement layer at facing, in lbs/ft of width parallel to face.
The connection strengths provided in the table assume that crushed rock is used to
fill the interior of the blocks. Allan Block also provides the option to grout the interior
of the blocks, creating a full mechanical connection. This connection approach is not
preapproved, as connection strength data for this situation was not provided, and
furthermore, the elevated pH that could be caused by the grout could accelerate chemical
degradation. This has not been evaluated.
Approved details for the Allan Block wall system are provided in the following plan sheets.
Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details are as follows:
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to a
diameter of 4 feet.
• In plan sheet 7 of 12, the guard rail detail, the guard rail post shall either be installed
through precut holes in the geogrid layers that must be penetrated, or the geogrid
layers shall be cut in a manner that prevents ripping or tearing of the geogrid.
• In plan sheet 5 of 12, regarding the geogrid at wall corner detail, cords in the wall
facing alignment to form an angle point or a radius shall be no shorter than the width
of the roll to insure good contact between the connectors and the geogrid cross-
bar throughout the width of the geogrid. Alternatively, the geogrid roll could be cut
longitudinally in half to allow a tighter radius, if necessary.
• It is noted in ASTM C1372 that a dimensional tolerance for the height of the block
of 1/8 inch is allowed, but that WSDOT GDM Section 15-5.3.8 recommends a tighter
dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch. Based on WSDOT experience, for walls greater than
25 ft in height, some cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses
tends to occur in the bottom portion of the wall. Therefore, blocks placed at depths
below the wall top of 25 ft or more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance
of 1/16 inch to reduce the risk of significant cracking of facing blocks.
Page 15-P-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-5
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-9
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-11
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls Appendix 15-P
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-P-13
December 2020
Appendix 15-P Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Allan Block Walls
Page 15-P-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock
Positive Connection Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
Facing Blocks –Blocks acceptable for use with this wall system are the 28-inch Positive
Connection blocks. The 41-inch blocks shown in the drawings are not considered part of
the approved system.
Soil Reinforcement – Only geosynthetic reinforcement listed in the WSDOT QPL
and which has been evaluated for connection strength with the Redi-Rock Positive
Connection wall system shall be used. The following products are approved for use with
this wall system:
Miragrid 5XT
Miragrid 8XT
Miragrid 10XT
Miragrid 20XT
Miragrid 24XT
All Miragrid products for the Redi-Rock Positive Connection system will be 12-inch wide
rolls consisting of 11 longitudinal ribs. TenCate Geosynthetics will provide certification of
the wide width tensile strength of the 12-inch wide rolls.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
Reinforcement/Facing Block Connection Requirements – The connection between the
facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement is essentially independent of the normal
force between the blocks (i.e., not a frictional connection), as the reinforcement strips
wrap around the internal wall of the block as a continuous layer. The design facing/
reinforcement connection strength shall be as specified in the following table:
Table 15-Q-1 Approved connection strength design values for
Redi-Rock walls
Geogrid Product Tultconn (lbs/ft) Tlot (lbs/ft)
Miragrid 5XT 4,460 5,334
Miragrid 8XT 7,928 8,055
Miragrid 10XT 8,681 10,635
Miragrid 20XT 13,447 16,397
Miragrid 24XT 20,199 29,130
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-Q-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
TMARV • CRu (15-Q-1)
Tac =
RFCR • RFD (15-O
where,
TMARV = the minimum average where,roll value for the ultimate geosynthetic strength Tult,
CRu T
= Tultconn/Tlot, in which = the
Tultconn
MARV minimum
is the ultimate average
connection rollstrength
value for
andthe
Tlotultimate
is the lot geosynthetic str
specific ultimate CR u = strength,
tensile Tultconn/T(i.e.,
lot, in which
the lot orTroll is the ultimate
of material
ultconn connection
specific to the strength and
connection testing),ultimate tensile strength, (i.e., the lot or roll of material specific to the con
RFCR for
RFCR = creep reduction factor = creep reduction factor
the geosynthetic, and for the geosynthetic, and
RFD RFD = factor
= the durability reduction the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
for the geosynthetic.
RFCR and RFD shall be as provided
RF andin the
RFWSDOT
shall beQPL, AppendixinD.
as provided the WSDOT QPL, Appendix D.
CR D
Approved details for the Redi-Rock Positive Connection wall system are provided in the
Approved
following plan sheets. Exceptions details forrequirements
and additional the Redi-Rock Positivethese
regarding Connection wall system are
approved
details are as follows: following plan sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding
are as follows:
• Retaining wall heights up to a maximum of 33 feet.
• Retaining walls having a wall•face batter ofwall
Retaining one heights
degree to
upfive
to adegrees.
maximum of 33 feet.
Retainingavoidance
• The culvert penetration and •obstruction walls having a wall
details face batter ofup
are preapproved onetodegree
a to five deg
diameter of 4 feet. • The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are prea
• The pipe penetration details for diameter of 4 feet.
pipes oriented up to a 45 degree skew angle as
• The pipe penetration
measured from perpendicular to the wall face details forfor
are preapproved pipes
pipeoriented up to
diameters of a 45 degree sk
18 inches or less. from perpendicular to the wall face are preapproved for pipe diam
less.
• The cast-in-place concrete to be constructed around pipes that are protruding
• The cast-in-place concrete to be constructed around pipes that are
through the wall face is considered non-preapproved. Detailed stamped drawings
wall face is considered non-preapproved. Detailed stamped drawin
and stamped engineering calculations are to be submitted for approval on a project
engineering calculations are to be submitted for approval on a pro
specific basis.
• Reinforcement pullout design shall be calculated based on the def
• Reinforcement pullout design shall be calculated
reinforcement based on
provided in the default
the latest valuesoffor
edition the AASHTO LRFD
geogrid reinforcement provided Specifications.
in the latest edition of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual
Page 15-Q-2 Page
Geotechnical Design 15-O-1
Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
SETBACK = 1 5 8"
FIVE DEGREE (5°) SETBACK WALL
TYPICAL APPURTENANCE INSTALLATION WITH
REDI-ROCK WALLS (STANDARD) MOVE BLOCKS FORWARD
December 2020
DURING INSTALLATION
TO ENGAGE SHEAR
15" 7 5/8" KNOBS (TYPICAL)
LINE
10"
FORM
KNOB 10" DIAMETER
KNOB
4"
Fence or Other Appurtenance
18"
FACE
TEXTURED
4 1/2"
±5" 13 3/8" 9 1/4"
28" Top Block
28" Positive Connection (PC) Middle Block Block Setbacks
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
SETBACK = 3 8"
ONE DEGREE (1°) SETBACK WALL
(SPECIALTY) MOVE BLOCKS FORWARD
DURING INSTALLATION
TO ENGAGE SHEAR
13 3/4" 8 7/8" KNOBS (TYPICAL)
LINE
FORM
7 1/2" 7 1/2" DIAMETER
KNOB KNOB
Front View Block in Second Course Down Embedment Depth As Required 2"
(NO SCALE) (41" Middle Block Shown) To Resist Overturning Forces on
Appurtenance
18"
FACE
Side View
TEXTURED
CONNECTION OPTION #1 (NO SCALE)
Expansion Anchor or Core Into the 28" Top Block
• Spacing as Required for Appurtenance 4 1/2"
• Mass of Single Block Available to Resist
Overturning Forces 28" Top Block
±5" 13 3/8" 9 1/4"
Block in Second Course Down
(41" Middle Block Shown) 28" Positive Connection (PC) Middle Block Block Setbacks
SETBACK = 0"
ZERO DEGREE (0°) SETBACK WALL
(SPECIALTY) MOVE BLOCKS FORWARD
DURING INSTALLATION
TO ENGAGE SHEAR
13 3/8" 9 1/4" KNOBS (TYPICAL)
LINE
FORM
6 3/4" 6 3/4" DIAMETER
KNOB KNOB
2"
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Top View
CONNECTION OPTION #2 (NO SCALE) CONNECTION OPTION #3
Grout Posts in V-Shaped Opening Between Core Through Top Block and Grout Posts in V-Shaped 18"
FACE
28" Top Blocks Opening Between Blocks in Second Course Down
TEXTURED
• Spacing in Multiples of 46 1/8" Increments • Spacing in Multiples of 46 1/8" Increments
• Mass of 2 Adjacent Blocks Available to • Mass of 2 Adjacent Blocks in Second Level Down and 3
4 1/2"
Resist Overturning Forces Top Row Blocks Available to Resist Overturning Forces
±5" 13 3/8" 9 1/4"
28" Positive Connection (PC) Middle Block Block Setbacks
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
DATE:
MAY 16, 2011 FACE BATTER & FENCE DETAIL 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
1 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
Page 15-Q-3
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-Q-4
Typical Reinforced Wall Plan with 28" PC (Positive Connection) Blocks
Appendix 15-Q
No Scale
120.0
.0
115
Sta 0+00
Sta 0+25
Sta 0+50
Sta 0+75
Sta 1+00
115.0
110
.0
Redi-Rock PC Block Wall
110.0
105.0
105.0
100.0
100.0
Typical Reinforced Wall Profile with 28" PC (Positive Connection) Blocks
No Scale
Total Wall Length = 99'-8"
120.0
Existing Grade Top of Wall
Elev = 116.5 Top of Wall Top of Wall
Elev = 115.0 Elev = 113.5
115.0 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
Existing
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
Grade
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
110.0
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11' 5XT - 11'
Elevation (Feet)
105.0 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11'
8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11'
DATUM 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11'
100.0 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11' 8XT - 11'
Legend Bottom of Wall Min Embedment
28" Half Block Elev = 100.0 Proposed Finish Depth as Specified
Station Station Station Grade at Toe of Wall Station Station
0+00 28" PC Block w/o
0+25 0+50 0+75 0+100
Geogrid Reinforcement
28" PC Block w/ 12" Geogrid
5XT - 11' Reinforcement Strip (Geogrid
M. WALZ 05-16-11
Type and Length noted on Block) REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
This drawing is for reference only. DATE:
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. MAY 16, 2011 WALL PLAN & PROFILE 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design. 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
2 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Typical Gravity Wall with 41" Bottom Block Unit Typical Reinforced Wall with 28" PC (Positive Connection) Blocks
December 2020
No Scale NOTE: No Scale
One Degree or Zero Degree
Batter Angle Walls are Available
Using Blocks with 7 12" or 6 3 4"
Knobs (Specialty Items) Grade to Drain Surface Water
NOTE: Away From Wall
This structural wall section may be used only for gravity
SETBACK = 1 5 8" 12" Wide Strip of Geogrid Wrapped Through
applications at the ends of reinforced walls where the
Grade to Drain Surface Water Block and Extending Full Length (L) Back Into
required wall height is 3 blocks or less.
Away From Wall Reinforced Fill Zone (Typical)
28" PC Top Block
SETBACK = 1 5 8" Move Blocks Forward During Top Block REINFORCED FILL - WSDOT 9-03.14(4)
Installation to Engage Shear Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall
Knobs (Typical) (Geosynthetic Reinforcement)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Block 6 (L)
(Length of Geogrid Strip - Typical)
Exposed
Wall Block 5
Fill Slot and Wedge Between Blocks
with Crushed No. 57 Stone per
WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C Exposed
28" PC Middle Block Wall Block 4
Move Blocks Forward During
(Typical) Installation to Engage Shear
Bury Depth Knobs (Typical)
Free Draining Backfill RETAINED
Leveling Pad to Extend at Least 12" Behind Wall SOIL
Crushed No. 57 per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C Block 3 Free Draining Backfill to Extend
Perforated Sock Drain at Least 12" Behind Wall
As Specified by Engineer (Crushed No. 57 per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C)
41" Bottom Block Fill Slot and Wedge Between Blocks with
Block 2
(No Center Slot) Crushed No. 57 per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C
See Sheet 4 of 18
6" Concrete Leveling Pad
(Per WSDOT Standard Specifications)
Bot Block
28" PC Middle Block
Bury Depth (Typical)
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
28" PC Bottom Block
Leveling
Pad
Perforated Sock Drain
6" Concrete Leveling Pad As Specified by Engineer
This drawing is for reference only.
(Per WSDOT Standard Specifications)
This drawing is for reference only. Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site.
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design.
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design.
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
DATE:
MAY 16, 2011 CROSS-SECTION VIEWS 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
3 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
Page 15-Q-5
Appendix 15-Q
Positive Connection (PC) Details REDI-ROCK PC (POSITIVE CONNECTION) BLOCKS
Page 15-Q-6
Appendix 15-Q
Top - 28" PC Block Half - 28" Middle Block
Fill Slot and Wedge Between
Volume = 8.38 cft Volume = 5.34 cft
Blocks with Crushed No. 57
See www.redi-rock.com for Weight = ±1200 lbs Weight = ±764 lbs 16 13 16"
Stone per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C
Geogrid Connection and C of G = 15.5" 40" C of G = 14.2"
Interface Shear Test Reports. 12" Wide Strip of Geogrid Wrapped Through
Block and Extending Full Length (L) Back Into 5" 18"
Reinforced Fill Zone
13"
(Upper Block)
22 13 16" 28"
46 18"
22 5 8"
±28"
FACE TEXTURE VARIES
Middle - 28" PC Block Bottom - 28" PC Block
Volume = 10.77 cft Volume = 11.50 cft
Weight = ±1540 lbs 40" Weight = ±1645 lbs 40"
23" 23"
C of G = 14.4" C of G = 14.5"
10" Dia. 10" Dia.
4" High 4" High
Free Draining Backfill (Typ.) (Typ.)
18" 18"
Crushed No. 57 Stone per
WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C
(Lower Block) To Extend at Least 12" Behind Wall
Section View Through Blocks
46 18" 46 18"
No Scale 22 5 8" 22 5 8"
±28" ±28"
12" Wide Strip of Geogrid FACE TEXTURE VARIES FACE TEXTURE VARIES
Wrapped Through Block and
Extending Full Length (L) Back Middle - 41" PC Block Bottom - 41" Block
Into Reinforced Fill Zone Volume = 15.34 cft Volume = 17.37 cft
36 5/8" 36 5/8"
Weight = ±2195 lbs 23" Weight = ±2483 lbs
C of G = 20.7" C of G = 21.3" 23"
10" Dia. 18"
10" Dia. 18"
4" High
(Typ.) 4" High
(Typ.)
35 18" 46 18" ±40 1 2"
46 18"
±40 12"
FACE TEXTURE VARIES FACE TEXTURE VARIES
NOTES:
Isometric View of Back of Blocks Volume and Center of Gravity (C of G) calculations are based on the blocks as shown.
Center of Gravity is measured from the back of the block.
No Scale Half blocks may include a fork lift slot on one side.
Actual weights and volumes may vary.
Weight shown is based on 143 pcf concrete.
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
This drawing is for reference only. SYSTEM COMPONENT DETAILS
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. MAY 16, 2011
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design. SHEET NO. :
4 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
CAST-IN-PLACE TRAFFIC BARRIER MOMENT SLAB AND TRAFFIC BARRIER CAST-IN-PLACE TRAFFIC BARRIER MOMENT SLAB AND TRAFFIC BARRIER
INSTALLATION FOR SLOPING GRADE INSTALLATION FOR LEVEL GRADE (0° SLOPE)
STEEL TIES PER TRAFFIC BARRIER DESIGN
December 2020
#5 BARS AT 9" O.C. FINAL DESIGN MUST STEEL TIES PER TRAFFIC BARRIER DESIGN FINAL DESIGN MUST
ADDRESS SITE DRAINAGE #5 BARS AT 9" O.C. ADDRESS SITE DRAINAGE
CAST-IN-PLACE MOMENT SLAB
30'-0" SECTIONS
#5 BARS AT 8" O.C., CAST-IN-PLACE MOMENT SLAB
TOP AND BOTTOM 30'-0" SECTIONS
8'-0" MINIMUM. #5 BARS AT 8" O.C.,
TOP AND BOTTOM
2" COVER
PAVEMENT 8'-0" MINIMUM.
2" COVER
3" COVER PAVEMENT
1'-0" MIN
3" COVER
1'-0" MIN
REFER TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
2'-10" C.I.P. LEVEL-UP 1'-9"
CONCRETE STRIP SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS
REFER TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR
SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS
TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT #4 BARS
AT 11.5" O.C., TOP AND BOTTOM TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT #4 BARS
AT 11.5" O.C., TOP AND BOTTOM
DOWELS AT CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS
DOWELS AT CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS
1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM
PER WSDOT 9-04.6 1" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM
PER WSDOT 9-04.6
EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN MOMENT SLAB EVERY 90'-0". CONTRACTION JOINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN MOMENT SLAB EVERY
EXPANSION JOINT SHALL BE DOT STANDARD DETAIL. 30'-0" BETWEEN EXPANSION JOINTS.
TYPICAL FEATURES SHOWN FOR REFERENCE. CONTRACTION JOINT SHALL BE DOT STANDARD DETAIL. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN MOMENT SLAB EVERY 90'-0". CONTRACTION JOINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED IN MOMENT SLAB EVERY
TYPICAL FEATURES SHOWN FOR REFERENCE. EXPANSION JOINT SHALL BE DOT STANDARD DETAIL. 30'-0" BETWEEN EXPANSION JOINTS.
TYPICAL FEATURES SHOWN FOR REFERENCE. CONTRACTION JOINT SHALL BE DOT STANDARD DETAIL.
FORMED JOINT WITH LOW SAWED JOINT WITH
TYPICAL FEATURES SHOWN FOR REFERENCE.
MODULUS, HOT-POURED, HOT-POURED,
RUBBER-ASPHALT JOINT RUBBER-ASPHALT SEALENT FORMED JOINT WITH LOW SAWED JOINT WITH
SEALING COMPOUND MODULUS, HOT-POURED, HOT-POURED,
RUBBER-ASPHALT JOINT RUBBER-ASPHALT SEALENT
PROVIDE GREASE OR SEALING COMPOUND
EXPANSION CAP SLEEVE BOND BREAKER
ON ONE SIDE PROVIDE GREASE OR
EXPANSION CAP SLEEVE BOND BREAKER
ON ONE SIDE
112" DIA. x 18" A36 GALVANIZED OR 112" DIA. x 18" A36 GALVANIZED OR
EPOXY COATED SMOOTH DOWEL BAR EPOXY COATED SMOOTH DOWEL BAR
EXPANSION JOINT CENTERED VERTICALLY IN SLAB AT CONTRACTION JOINT CENTERED VERTICALLY IN SLAB AT 112" DIA. x 18" A36 GALVANIZED OR 112" DIA. x 18" A36 GALVANIZED OR
12" O.C. ALONG EXPANSION JOINT 12" O.C. ALONG EXPANSION JOINT EPOXY COATED SMOOTH DOWEL BAR EPOXY COATED SMOOTH DOWEL BAR
EXPANSION JOINT CENTERED VERTICALLY IN SLAB AT CONTRACTION JOINT CENTERED VERTICALLY IN SLAB AT
12" O.C. ALONG EXPANSION JOINT 12" O.C. ALONG EXPANSION JOINT
MATERIALS MATERIALS
CONCRETE FOR CAST-IN-PLACE MOMENT SLAB SHALL BE DOT STANDARD STRUCTURE MIX. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH CONCRETE FOR CAST-IN-PLACE MOMENT SLAB SHALL BE DOT STANDARD STRUCTURE MIX. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
SHALL BE 4,000 PSI OR HIGHER AS SPECIFIED. SHALL BE 4,000 PSI OR HIGHER AS SPECIFIED.
CAST-IN-PLACE LEVEL UP CONCRETE SHALL BE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C94 AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 28 DAY REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706 OR AASHTO M31 GRADE 60.
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 4,000 PSI. ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE EPOXY COATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A775 OR ASTM A934.
REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A706 OR AASHTO M31 GRADE 60.
ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE EPOXY COATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A775 OR ASTM A934. DESIGN
MOMENT SLAB SHOWN IS DIMENSIONED BASED ON AN EQUIVALENT STATIC LOAD OF 10,000 LBS PER NCHRP REPORT 663.
DESIGN MOMENT SLAB REINFORCEMENT SHOWN IS BASED ON AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, 5TH EDITION, 2010, TL-4
MOMENT SLAB SHOWN IS DIMENSIONED BASED ON AN EQUIVALENT STATIC LOAD OF 10,000 LBS PER NCHRP REPORT 663. LOADING DETAILED IN TABLE A13.2.1. AND REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN WSDOT MOMENT SLAB DESIGN MEMORANDUM DATED
MOMENT SLAB REINFORCEMENT SHOWN IS BASED ON AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, 5TH EDITION, 2010, TL-4 12/9/2011 AS PREPARED BY THE BRIDGE AND STRUCTURES OFFICE.
LOADING DETAILED IN TABLE A13.2.1. AND REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH IN WSDOT MOMENT SLAB DESIGN MEMORANDUM DATED
12/9/2011 AS PREPARED BY THE BRIDGE AND STRUCTURES OFFICE. THE SELECTION AND USE OF THIS DETAIL, WHILE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES
AND PRACTICES, IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN CHARGE OF THE PROJECT.
THE SELECTION AND USE OF THIS DETAIL, WHILE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GENERALLY ACCEPTED ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES
AND PRACTICES, IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN CHARGE OF THE PROJECT.
C. HINES 08-28-12
REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
DATE:
AUGUST 28, 2012 TRAFFIC BARRIER & MOMENT SLAB 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
5 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
Page 15-Q-7
Appendix 15-Q
Page 15-Q-8
90° OUTSIDE CORNER DETAIL 90° Inside Corner Detail
Appendix 15-Q
WITH SPECIALTY CORNER BLOCK
Overlap Blocks at Corner to
Provide Full Engagement of
SPECIALTY CORNER Shear Knobs, Typical
BLOCK
(NO SCALE)
23" ISOMETRIC VIEW
4" x 6" x 2" HIGH OVAL KNOB
CENTERED ON BLOCK
OF CORNER
(NO SCALE)
28" Redi-Rock
PC Middle Blocks
18"
4" x 6" x 2" HIGH OVAL KNOB
CENTERED ON BLOCK OR
TOP VIEW 6" DIA. KNOB
+/- 23" (TEXTURE VARIES)
13" WIDE GROOVE
46-1/8" NEAR END OF BLOCK
NOTE: Butt Face Of Overlapped
THE TOP ROW OF BLOCKS ARE SHOWN IN RED. Block Directly to side of
THEY HAVE BEEN CUTOUT IN LINE WITH THEIR Adjacent Block, Typical
28" Redi-Rock
BOTTOM GROOVES TO SHOW HOW THEY FIT PC Bottom Blocks
WITH THE KNOBS ON THE BOTTOM ROW OF
BLOCK.
10" KNOB IS FULLY ENGAGED
BOTTOM VIEW NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE IN ALL ISOMETRIC VIEW
JOINTS BETWEEN BLOCKS (TYP) OF CORNER
(NO SCALE)
SPECIALTY CORNER BLOCK
TOP VIEW OF BOTTOM TWO ROWS
41" OR 28" PC BLOCKS (NO SCALE)
(41" SHOWN)
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
This drawing is for reference only. INSIDE & OUTSIDE 90° CORNERS
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. MAY 16, 2011
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design. SHEET NO. :
6 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT FOR CONCAVE CORNERS REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT FOR CONVEX CORNERS
PRINCIPLE
December 2020
REINFORCEMENT
DIRECTION
L
GEOGRID STRIPS
L
GEOGRID STRIPS
3" OF SOIL REQUIRED
PRINCIPLE
BETWEEN OVERLAPPING
REINFORCEMENT
L
SQUARED CORNER
PRINCIPLE
DIRECTION
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
REINFORCEMENT
L
PRINCIPLE PLACE 18" HIGH PIECE OF
NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
REINFORCEMENT (WSDOT 9-33.2(2) - TABLE 7) SQUARED CORNER
DIRECTION IN JOINT BETWEEN BLOCKS (TYP.)
L
PRINCIPLE
PRINCIPLE
DIRECTION
REINFORCEMENT
REINFORCEMENT
DIRECTION
L
GEOGRID STRIPS
3" OF SOIL REQUIRED
BETWEEN OVERLAPPING
REINFORCEMENT
SERPENTINE CURVES AND
90° RADIUS CORNER
S
IU
AD
R
GEOGRID STRIPS
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
PLACE STONE IN JOINT
BETWEEN BLOCKS
ENLARGED JOINT DETAIL
L LEGEND
PRINCIPLE
GEOGRID STRIP REINFORCEMENT
REINFORCEMENT AROUND BLOCK ON CURRENT LAYER SERPENTINE CURVES AND 90° RADIUS CORNER
DIRECTION
NOTE:
90° Corners are the Only Corners that can be GEOGRID STRIP REINFORCEMENT
Constructed. All Other Corners Must be AROUND BLOCK ONE LAYER DOWN M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY:
Converted to Radius Segments. C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
DATE:
MAY 16, 2011 INSIDE & OUTSIDE RADII 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
7 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
Page 15-Q-9
Appendix 15-Q
MINIMUM RADIUS AND
CONVEX CURVES OFFSET FOR BOTTOM ROW
45° OUTSIDE CORNER
NUMBER OF HEIGHT OF RADIUS FROM
Page 15-Q-10
NUMBER OF HEIGHT OF BOTTOM ROW MIN. RADIUS DISTANCE BETWEEN RADIAL SOLUTION COURSES BLOCKS FACE OF BLOCK OFFSET
Appendix 15-Q
COURSES BLOCKS (FROM FACE OF BLOCK) BLOCKS PER SKETCH 1 1'-6" 14'-6" ± 14 3 8"
(REDI-ROCK PC BLOCKS)
2 3'-0" 14'-8" ± 14 12"
1 1'-6" 14'-6" 0.13"
3 4'-6" 14'-10" ± 14 5 8"
2 3'-0" 14'-8" 0.21" 4 6'-0" 15'-0" ± 14 7 8"
5 7'-6" 15'-2" ± 15"
3 4'-6" 14'-10" 0.28"
6 9'-0" 15'-4" ± 15 18"
4 6'-0" 15'-0" 0.36" 7 10'-6" 15'-6" ± 15 3 8"
5 7'-6" 15'-2" 0.43" 8 12'-0" 15'-8" ± 15 12"
9 13'-6" 15'-10" ± 15 5 8"
6 9'-0" 15'-4" 0.50" 10 15'-0" 16'-0" ± 15 7 8"
7 10'-6" 15'-6" 0.57" 11 16'-6" 16'-2" ± 16"
PLACE BOTTOM ROW OF BLOCKS
12 18'-0" 16'-4" ± 16 18"
8 12'-0" 15'-8" 0.63" ACCORDING TO MINIMUM RADIUS
REQUIREMENTS 13 19'-6" 16'-6" ± 16 3 8"
9 13'-6" 15'-10" 0.70" 14 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
15 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
10 15'-0" 16'-0" 0.76"
S
16 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
IU
11 16'-6" 16'-2" 0.83"
D
17 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
RA
18 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
12 18'-0" 16'-4" 0.88" 41" OR 28" PC BLOCKS 19 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
13 19'-6" 16'-6" 0.95" (41" SHOWN) 20 21'-0" 16'-8" ± 16 12"
14 21'-0" 16'-8" 1.01" DISTANCE BETWEEN
BLOCKS (IN CHART)
TOP BLOCKS TIGHT
TOGETHER OFFSET FROM
THEORETICAL CORNER FIRST ROW
24" (SEE CHART)
MIN
(BO R
TT ADIU
OM S
RO
W)
TOP VIEW
ROTATE BLOCKS AND MOVE
PLACE 18" HIGH PIECE OF
FORWARD TO FULLY ENGAGE
NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE PLACE STONE IN JOINT BOTH KNOBS BELOW
FABRIC (WSDOT 9-33.2(2) - BETWEEN BLOCKS (TYPICAL)
ISOMETRIC VIEW TABLE 7) IN JOINT BETWEEN OFFSET
BLOCKS (TYP.) SECOND ROW
CONCAVE CURVES RUNNING BOND SHIFTS ±1 1 4"
NOTES: FURTHER WITH EVERY ROW
● PLACE BLOCKS TIGHT TOGETHER
● NO MINIMUM RADIUS - BASED ONLY ON BLOCK GEOMETRY
● SMALLER RADII WILL RESULT IN MORE EXPOSED UNTEXTURED BLOCK SURFACE
OFFSET
COMPLETED CORNER ±1 1 4"
±1 14"
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
EXPOSED UNTEXTURED DATE:
MAY 16, 2011 OUTSIDE CORNER RADIAL SOLUTION 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
BLOCK SURFACE SHEET: FILE:
866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
8 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
PIPES 18" DIA. OR SMALLER INSTALLED
December 2020
AT A SKEWED ANGLE TO THE WALL
28" PC TOP 28" SERIES HALF
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BLOCK BLOCK (NON PC)
COLLAR AROUND PIPE A
24" WIDE MIN. 28" PC BLOCK
PC 28T PC 28T PC 28T PC 28T
__XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__'
PC 28M PC 28M PC 28M PC 28M
__XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__'
PC 28M PC 28M HALF
__XT-__' __XT-__' 28M
PC 28M HALF PC 28M
__XT-__' 28M __XT-__'
PC 28M PC 28M HALF
__XT-__' __XT-__' 28M
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
PC 28B PC 28B PC 28B PC 28B
__XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__' __XT-__'
CONTOUR GEOGRID ABOVE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
AND BELOW PIPE COLLAR AROUND PIPE
(1V : 4H MAX.) 24" WIDE MINIMUM
A
SECTION A-A PROFILE VIEW
CONTOUR GEOGRID ABOVE
AND BELOW PIPE
(1V : 4H MAX.)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
COLLAR AROUND PIPE PIPE INSTALLED UP TO
45° ANGLE WITH WALL
MAX.
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
18" REINFORCED
CONCRETE PIPE
GEOGRID STRIP SHOWN
REINFORCEMENT
28" PC BLOCKS
PIPES LARGER THAN 18" DIA. MAY NOT BE INSTALLED
AT A SKEWED ANGLE TO THE WALL
3D VIEW FROM BACK
J. JOHNSON 06-13-12
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
JUNE 13, 2012 CULVERT (0° TO 45° SKEW)
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
9 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
Page 15-Q-11
Appendix 15-Q
LARGE OBSTRUCTION - CONCEPTUAL DETAIL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT AROUND VERTICAL OBSTRUCTIONS
Page 15-Q-12
THREADED ROD CAST With the Redi-Rock PC Series
INTO BLOCK (TYP.)
Appendix 15-Q
ASTM A307
(2) MC 8 X 8.5 (TYP.)
ASTM A36
VERTICAL OBSTRUCTIONS
Max. Diameter = 32"
Spacing = 46 1/8" On-Center
7
8 IN. DIAMETER
THREADED ROD (TYP.)
ASTM A307
ROUND HSS 7.0 X 0.50 (TYP.)
ASTM A500 GR. B GEOGRID STRIPS
5XT OR 8XT
BACK VIEW
THREADED ROD (ASTM A307)
CAST INTO BLOCK WITH 18 IN.
EMBEDMENT AND 4X4X41
BEARING PLATE (ASTM A307)
BLOCK DETAIL
(2) MC 8 X 8.5
ASTM A36
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF BACK OF BLOCKS
7
IN. DIAMETER
8 No Scale
THREADED ROD (TYP.)
ASTM A307 GEOGRID STRIPS
Installed Every Other
MANHOLE OR OTHER Row of Blocks
LARGE OBSTRUCTION
(MAX 84 IN. LARGEST
DIMENSION)
ROUND HSS 7.0 X 0.50 (TYP.)
ASTM A500 GR. B
TOP VIEW
NOTE:
(1) ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS TO BE HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A123
M. WALZ 05-16-11
COATING THICKNESS GRADE 85. REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
(2) THE ABOVE DETAIL IS VALID ONLY FOR OBSTRUCTIONS 84" AND SMALLER AND/OR PC WALL SECTIONS THAT C. HINES 05-07-15
DO NOT REQUIRE GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT WITH TENSILE STRENGTH HIGHER THAN 8XT. MAY 16, 2011 VERTICAL OBSTRUCTIONS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
10 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Culvert Penetration Detail - Plan View UTILITIES IN THE REINFORCED SOIL ZONE
Control Joint
No Scale Control Joint
December 2020
(If Needed). Line Up Joints (If Needed). Line Up Joints
Between Units to Create
STORM OR SANITARY SEWER PIPE
Between Units to Create Remove Minimum
Control Joints. Control Joints.
Number of Blocks KEEP SUFFICIENT SEPARATION TO MEET MAX
Required to Fit Pipe GEOGRID SLOPE AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
Through Wall Concrete
(Cast-In-Place
Around Pipe) MAINTAIN 3" MIN. BETWEEN
GEOGRID AND PIPE
Steel reinforcement
shall be submitted
1V
based upon project MIN 4H
specific requirements. WRAP PIPE JOINTS WITH
NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
WSDOT 9-33.2(2) - TABLE 7
(48" WIDE MIN. CENTERED ON JOINT)
MIN 4H
Redi-Rock PC 1V
Block Wall
STORM DRAIN OR SANITARY
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
SEWER PIPE INSTALLED
PARALLEL TO WALL
SEE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR WSDOT
APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND PIPE
INSTALL GEOGRID STRIPS ABOVE AND BELOW PIPE
"DRY" UTILITIES (ELECTRIC, GAS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS)
Pipe Protruding Through Wall Leveling Pad or Lower KEEP SUFFICIENT SEPARATION TO MEET MAX
(48" Dia Concrete Pipe Shown) Courses of Redi-Rock Blocks GEOGRID SLOPE AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
Culvert Penetration Detail - Plan View MAINTAIN 3" MIN. BETWEEN
GEOGRID AND PIPE
No Scale Free Draining Backfill
to Extend at Least 12" Behind Wall 1V
Redi-Rock PC Block Wall Crushed No. 57 per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C MIN 4H
"DRY" UTILITIES INSTALLED
PARALLEL TO WALL
Concrete (Cast-In-Place Geogrid Reinforcing
Around Pipe)
Reinforced Soil
INSTALL GEOGRID STRIPS
ABOVE AND BELOW PIPE
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Pipe Protruding
Through Wall
(48" Dia Concrete
Redi-Rock International follows the recommendations of FHWA GEC 011 and
Pipe Shown)
discourages placing pipes or other horizontal obstructions behind the wall in
the reinforced soil zone. Placing pipes in this zone could lead to maintenance
problems and potential wall failure.
Reinforced Soil
M. WALZ 05-16-11
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
Geogrid Reinforcing MAY 16, 2011 HORIZONTAL PIPE OBSTRUCTIONS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
11 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
Page 15-Q-13
Appendix 15-Q
STEP FOOTING DETAILS Leveling Pad Inside Corner Plan
Page 15-Q-14
No Scale Extend Leveling
Outline of Leveling Pad (Below)
Appendix 15-Q
Pad Straight From
Each Direction to
Meet at a Corner
(Both Sides)
MIDDLE BLOCK BOTTOM BLOCK
PC Blocks (Bottom
Course Shown)
BOTTOM FOOTING DEPTH, d
BOTTOM BLOCK
BLOCK Outline of Leveling Pad (Below)
FOOTING DEPTH, d
CONCRETE FOOTING Note: Geogrid Reinforcing
Not Shown for Clarity
2" GAP (CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCE)
d/2 OR 6" (MINIMUM)
BOTTOM HALF BLOCK Leveling Pad Toe
PROFILE VIEW - CONCRETE FOOTING Width as Specified
(No Scale) Leveling Pad
Width as Specified
LEVELING PAD FOR POSITIVE CONNECTION (PC) BLOCKS Leveling Pad Outside Corner Plan
No Scale
NO SCALE Note: Geogrid Reinforcing
Free Draining Backfill
to Extend at Least 12" Behind Wall Not Shown for Clarity
Outline of Leveling Pad (Below)
Crushed No. 57 per WSDOT 9-03.1(4)C
PC Blocks (Bottom Course Shown)
CONVERT TO SOLID PIPE
BEFORE OUTLETING THROUGH
WALL
6" MAX. PERFORATED DRAIN
GRAVITY FLOW TO OUTLET
Leveling Pad
AROUND ENDS OF WALL AND
EVERY 50' ON-CENTER OR AS
Width as Specified
6" MIN. 6" MIN. SPECIFIED
IN FRONT OF IN BACK
BLOCK OF BLOCK Leveling Pad
Outline of Leveling Pad (Below)
Extend Leveling Pad Straight Toe Width as
6" Concrete Leveling Pad
(Per WSDOT Standard Specifications)
From Each Direction to Meet Specified
at a Corner (Both Sides)
M. WALZ 05-16-11
CONCRETE LEVELING PAD REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
This drawing is for reference only. DATE:
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. MAY 16, 2011 LEVELING PAD DETAILS 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design. 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
12 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
6" PRECAST CAP UNIT
ATTACH WITH EXTERIOR GRADE CONCRETE BONDING ADHESIVE
CAST-IN-PLACE COPING DETAIL THAT WILL PROVIDE A MINIMUM TENSILE BOND STRENGTH OF
300 PSI @ 7 DAYS PER ASTM C1583
NO SCALE (QUIKRETE CONCRETE BONDING ADHESIVE NO. 9902 OR EQUAL)
December 2020
SETBACK = 0"
NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE OR
GEOMEMBRANE BARRIER
BETWEEN CAST-IN-PLACE CAST IN PLACE COPING #4 STIRRUP @ 12" O.C
COPING AND TOP OF WALL SETBACK = 2 7 8" (10" KNOB)
(TYP.) #6 BARS SETBACK = 1 5 8" (7 12" KNOB)
#4 STIRRUP @ 12" O.C. POSTS @ 46-1/8" O.C. (MAX)
SEE SHEET 15 OF 17 FOR
POST DETAIL. SETBACK = 15 8"
#6 BARS GROUND 5" (TYP)
(WITH 10" KNOB)
7
30" 7
FACE HEIGHT VARIES ALONG WALL 6
7
(TYP.) 14" (MIN) TO 32" (MAX) 6
7
2 6
7
2 2 6
6 7
2 2
8
1 2 2 6
1 2 2 5
2 7
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
1 2
8
1 2 6
1 2 5
1 2 7
1 6 7
1 6 8
1 5
3
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B 4
(JUST BEFORE STEP DOWN (JUST AFTER STEP DOWN
ON TOP OF WALL) ON TOP OF WALL) 1 RETAINING BOTTOM
2 RETAINING MIDDLE
3 FREESTANDING BOTTOM
EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL
BETWEEN COPING SECTIONS. 4 FREESTANDING BOTTOM HALF CORNER
LENGTH OF COPING LOCATE AT ELEVATION CHANGES 5 FREESTANDING TOP CORNER
AB SECTIONS VARIES POSTS @ 46-1/8" O.C. (MAX)
IN WALL (20.0 FT. MAX.) 6 FREESTANDING MIDDLE
SEE SHEET 15 OF 17 FOR
7 6" CAP BLOCK - 2 SIDED POST DETAIL.
8 6" CAP BLOCK - 3 SIDED
RAILING DESIGNED TO
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
SIDEWALK OR GRASS
SURFACE ON TOP OF WALL
PER PROJECT DESIGN
FREESTANDING BLOCKS USED
WHERE BLOCK IS EXPOSED AND
TEXTURED SURFACE IS REQUIRED
ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL
AB
ELEVATION VIEW
J. JOHNSON 06-13-12
REVISED BY:
C. HINES 05-07-15
REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
This drawing is for reference only. DATE:
Final designs for construction must be prepared by a registered Professional Engineer using the actual conditions of the proposed site. JUNE 13, 2012 COPING & CAP OPTIONS 05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET: FILE:
Final wall design must address both internal and external drainage and shall be evaluated by the Professional Engineer who is responsible for the wall design. 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
13 OF 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
Page 15-Q-15
Appendix 15-Q
FINISH GRADE TO EDGE OF BLOCKS
Page 15-Q-16
TOP OF WALL TREATMENT USING REDI-ROCK TOP AND
Appendix 15-Q
GARDEN BLOCKS INSTEAD OF COPING GRASSED SWALE
SLOPE VARIES - SEE PLANS
VARIES 3'-0"
WITH CROSS-SLOPE
GRADE ON SWALE
(2'-10" MINIMUM)
8" SLOPE VARIES - SEE PLANS
30 mil PVC OR EPDM
GRADE DROPS ALONG BACK
GEOMEMBRANE
AND END OF GARDEN BLOCK
GEOGRID STRIPS
(TYPICAL)
3'-10" MIN. 24" VARIES
WITH
6" MIN. SLOPE
8"
CONCRETE SWALE
PLACE GEOMEMBRANE OR PROVIDE
MIN. OF 3" OF SOIL BETWEEN CIP
ALTERNATE GARDEN BLOCK PLACEMENT CONCRETE AND GEOGRID STRIPS
SAWCUT AMD REMOVE INSIDE GRADE SWALE CROSS-SLOPE
EDGE OF HALF GARDEN CORNER AS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE
BLOCK AND FILL WITH TOPSOIL MINIMUM 1% TO 2% FALL
(RECOMMENDED) PARALLEL TO WALL
GRADE SWALE AROUND
BLOCKS IN STEP DOWN
AREAS
GRADE DROPS ALONG SIDE
OF HALF GARDEN BLOCK
ROCK CHECK DAMS
AS REQUIRED
TOP BLOCK
HALF GARDEN CORNER BLOCKS
MIDDLE BLOCK
DRAINAGE SWALE BEHIND WALL
BOTTOM BLOCK HALF GARDEN CORNER
BLOCK AT END OF EACH
ROW (TYPICAL)
J. JOHNSON 06-13-12
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
JUNE 13, 2012 TOP BLOCK GRADING OPTIONS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
14 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
HAND RAIL FOR POSITIVE CONNECTION (PC) BLOCKS CUSTOM WEEP HOLE PIPE CAST IN BLOCK
NO SCALE SOLID PVC OR HDPE DRAIN PIPE CAST INTO BLOCK
DIA. = 3" OR 4" AS SPECIFIED ON PLANS
December 2020
LOCATE CENTER OF PIPE 10" LEFT AND 6.75" DOWN
FROM TOP RIGHT CORNER OF BLOCK
HAND RAIL
POST SPACING 46-1/8" O.C.
PIPE TO EXTEND 6" TO 8" FROM BACK OF BLOCK
FOR CONNECTION TO PERFORATED WALL DRAIN
3 FT. 6 IN.
CORE DRILL BLOCKS 1 IN.
LARGER THAN DIAMETER
OF POST.GROUT ANNULUS WITH 4" CONCRETE FIELD INSTALLED WEEP HOLE PIPE
NON-SHRINK GROUT. WALK (TYP.)
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
NOTCH ± 2.5" x 5" HOLE IN SIDE
6 IN. OF A REDI-ROCK BLOCK
FREE-STANDING UNIT
41" PC MIDDLE UNIT
NO GEOGRID REINFORCEMENT
3 FT. STRIP ATTACHED TO THIS UNIT
GEOGRID
REINFORCEMENT
28" PC MIDDLE UNIT
PLACE SOLID PVC OR HDPE DRAIN
PIPE THROUGH NOTCHED HOLE
AND GROUT PIPE IN PLACE
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
CONNECT TO PERFORATED
WALL DRAIN
J. JOHNSON 06-13-12
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
C. HINES 05-07-15
JUNE 13, 2012 HAND RAIL & WEEP DRAIN DETAILS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
15 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
Page 15-Q-17
Appendix 15-Q
POST AND BEAM PAVEMENT SECTION BELOW ELEVATION
3' MIN.
Page 15-Q-18
(FROM BACK GUARDRAIL INSTALLATION OF TOP GEOGRID LAYER
Appendix 15-Q
OF BLOCK)
POST AND BEAM GUARDRAIL
GEOGRID STRIPS
GUARDRAIL
3' MIN.
(FROM BACK
OF BLOCK) CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
(PITCH-OUT CURB SHOWN)
SECTION VIEW PAVEMENT
UPPER LEG OF STRIP (INSTALLED LOWER LEG OF STRIP (INSTALLED AT
AT TOP OF BLOCK ELEVATION) BOTTOM OF BLOCK ELEVATION)
WRAP GEOGRID STRIPS
AROUND POSTS AS NEEDED
GEOGRID INSTALLED
ON BLOCK ONE LAYER
DOWN (TYPICAL)
INSTALL POSTS OR SLEEVE
WHILE CONSTRUCTING THE
WALL
GUARDRAIL BEAM
POST GEOGRID STRIPS DIVE GEOGRID STRIPS AS
NEEDED TO INSTALL AT LEAST
SPLAY GEOGRID STRIPS IN BLOCK 3" BELOW PAVEMENT AND BASE
TO KEEP EQUAL TENSION ON ALL
MAIN REINFORCEMENT STRANDS
SECTION VIEW
J. JOHNSON 06-13-12
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES
TOP VIEW C. HINES 05-07-15
JUNE 13, 2012 POST & BEAM GUARDRAIL DETAILS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
16 of 17 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg
December 2020
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
REDI-ROCK PC CAP & CORNER UNIT BLOCKS
December 2020
Two-Sided Cap Two-Sided Curve Cap
Volume = 4.50 cft Volume = 4.25 cft
Weight = ±644 lbs Weight = ±608 lbs
6"
48"
6"
46 18" 40 12"
28 12" 28 12"
Dimensions Updated 11/20/13
Three-Sided Cap Four-Sided Cap
Volume = 4.68 cft Volume = 4.81 cft
Weight = ±669 lbs Weight = ±688 lbs
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
6" 6"
48" 49 12"
28 12" 28 12"
Two-Sided Half Three-Sided Half
Volume = 2.25 cft Volume = 2.43 cft
Weight = ±322 lbs Weight = ±347 lbs
6" 6"
23 116" 28 12" 25" 28 12"
Garden Corner Half Garden Corner
7 12" 13"
Volume = 8.26 cft Volume = 4.25 cft
7 12" 13"
Weight = ±1182 lbs 10" Weight = ±607 lbs
10"
18" 18"
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
46 18" ±23" (Limestone) ±23" (Limestone)
±24" (Cobblestone) 23 116" ±24" (Cobblestone)
NOTES:
Volume is based on the blocks as shown.
Actual weights and volumes may vary.
Weight shown is based on 143 pcf concrete.
C. HINES 05-07-15
REVISED BY: REDI-ROCK PC SERIES CAP AND
OCTOBER 8, 2014
CORNER COMPONENT DETAILS
05481 US 31 SOUTH CHARLEVOIX, MI 49720
SHEET NO. :
17 of 17 TYPICAL DETAILS PC - LEDGER 100814.dwg 866-222-8400 ● 231-237-9521 Fax ● www.redi-rock.com
Page 15-Q-19
Appendix 15-Q
Appendix 15-Q Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Redi-Rock Positive Connection Walls
Page 15-Q-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 15-R Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements and Details
for Lock and Load Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
Facing System – The wall shall be designed as a wrapped face wall system. The concrete
counterfort that attaches to the facing panel shall penetrate through the geogrid
reinforcement by only cutting transverse ribs as necessary to allow the counterfort to
connect to the facing panel, as shown in the preapproved plans. The wall facing design
shall demonstrate that the facing panel plus counterfort is stable for all limit states in
accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, the Bridge Design
Manual M 23-50, and the Geotechnical Design Manual.
Soil Reinforcement – Only geosynthetic reinforcement listed in the QPL shall be used. The
ultimate and long-term design strengths specified in Appendix D of the QPL shall be used.
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
The Lock and Load Wall system shall only be used at locations where the wall will be
above the water table.
Approved details for the Lock and Load wall system are provided in the following plan
sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details are
as follows:
• WSDOT standard materials, including backfill used for the wall, shall be used where
possible. With regard to the wall backfill, the entire reinforced zone for the wall
shall be backfilled with WSDOT Gravel Borrow, not just the area shown in the plans
(i.e., sheet 2). Where “filter fabric” is specified in the preapproved plans, it shall be a
WSDOT Standard Specification Construction Geotextile for Underground Drainage
material (Section 9-33).
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-1
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific
Appendix 15-R Requirements
Preapproved and Details
Wall Appendix: for Lock
Specific and Load Walls
Requirements Appendix
and Details for Lock 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-3
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-3
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-5
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-5
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-7
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-7
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-9
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-9
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-11
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-11
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-13
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-13
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-15
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-15
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-17
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-17
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-18 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-19
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-19
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-20 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-21
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-21
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-22 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-23
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-23
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-24 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-P
Preapproved Wall Appendix:Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements Specificfor
and Details Requirements and Details for Lock and
Lock and Load Walls Load Walls
Appendix 15-R
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 15-P-25
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-R-25
October 2013
December 2020
Preapproved
Appendix 15-R Wall Appendix:Preapproved
Specific Requirements and Details
Wall Appendix: Specificfor Lock and Load
Requirements andWalls
Details for LockAppendix 15-P
and Load Walls
Page 15-P-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Page 15-R-26 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
October 2013
December 2020
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix:
Specific Requirements and Details
for KeyGrid Walls
In addition to the general design requirements provided in Appendix 15-A, the following
specific requirements apply:
Facing Blocks –Blocks acceptable for use with this wall system are Keystone Compac
II and Compac III units (block width into the wall Wu = 1 ft for both units). These blocks
are for a facing batter of 1:64. Considering the currently approved block dimensions,
the maximum vertical spacing of reinforcement allowed to meet the requirements in the
AASHTO Specifications is 2 ft.
Soil Reinforcement – Only geosynthetic reinforcement listed in the WSDOT QPL and
which has been evaluated for connection strength with the KeyGrid wall system shall be
used. The following products are approved for use with this wall system:
Miragrid 3XT
Miragrid 5XT
Miragrid 7XT
Miragrid 8XT
Miragrid 10XT
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
Reinforcement/Facing Block Connection Requirements – The connection between the
Compac II and III facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement is essentially a frictional
connection. That being the case, the connection resistance is strongly dependent on the
normal force between blocks and in the gravel in-fill inside the blocks. The design facing/
reinforcement connection strength shall be as specified in the following tables:
Table 15-S-1 Approved connection strength design values for KeyGrid walls,
Compac II blocks
Geogrid Product Wall Height, H (ft) Normal Load, N (lbs/ft) Tultconn (lbs/ft) Tlot (lbs/ft)
H<9 N < 1074 915 + N tan 45⁰
Miragrid 3XT 9 < H < 18.9 1074 < N < 2268 1465 + N tan 26⁰ 3484
H > 18.9 N > 2268 2571
H < 15.3 N < 1837 1706 + N tan 20⁰
Miragrid 5XT 15.3 < H < 28.5 1837 < N < 3424 2020 + N tan 11⁰ 4927
H > 28.5 N > 3424 2686
H < 14.2 N < 1711 959 + N tan 42⁰
Miragrid 7XT 14.2 < H < 28.5 1711 < N < 3417 1970 + N tan 26⁰ 6317
H > 28.5 N > 3417 3637
H < 12.5 N < 1500 1064 + N tan 43⁰
Miragrid 8XT 12.5 < H < 28.2 1500 < N < 3389 1361 + N tan 37⁰ 7897
H > 28.2 N > 3389 3845
H < 8.1 N < 970 1335 + N tan 49.5⁰
Miragrid 10XT 8.1 < H < 28.2 970< N < 2903 1980 + N tan 27⁰ 10795
H > 28.2 N > 2903 3459
N = normal load at reinforcement layer at facing, in lbs/ft of width parallel to face.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-S-1
December 2020
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Lock and Load Walls
Table 15-S-2 Approved ultimate connection strength design values Tultconn for KeyGrid
walls, Compac III blocks
Approx. Wall Height,
Geogrid Product H (ft) Normal Load, N (lbs/ft) Tultconn (lbs/ft) Tlot (lbs/ft)
H<9 N < 1030 937 + N tan 44⁰
Miragrid 3XT H < 20 1030 < N < 2268 1500 + N tan 22⁰ 3484
H > 20 N > 2268 2416
H < 16 N < 1724 1305 + N tan 36⁰
Miragrid 5XT H < 30 1724 < N < 3424 2045 + N tan 16⁰ 4927
H > 30 N > 3424 3030
H < 16 N < 1681 1221 + N tan 37⁰
Miragrid 7XT H < 30 N < 3479 1642 + N tan 26⁰ 6109
H > 30 N > 3479 3339
H < 16 N < 1695 1146 + N tan 42⁰
Miragrid 8XT H < 30 N < 3380 1657 + N tan 31⁰ 7897
H > 30 N > 3380 3688
H < 16 N < 1695 1094 + N tan 45⁰
Miragrid 10XT H > 16 1695 < N < 3373 1640 + N tan 33⁰ 10795
H > 30 3373 3830
N = normal load at reinforcement layer at facing, in lbs/ft of width parallel to face.
Tac, the long-term connection strength, shall be calculated as follows:
TMARV • CRu
Tac = (15-S-1)
RFCR • RFD
where,
TMARV = the minimum average roll value for the ultimate geosynthetic strength Tult,
CRu = Tultconn/Tlot, in which Tultconn is the ultimate connection strength and Tlot is the lot
specific ultimate tensile strength, (i.e., the lot or roll of material specific to the
connection testing),
RFCR = creep reduction factor for the geosynthetic, and
RFD = the durability reduction factor for the geosynthetic.
RFD shall be as provided in the WSDOT QPL, Appendix D (i.e., RFD = 1.3). RFCR for the
connection strength shall be equal to 1.2 for connections with Compac II and Compac III
blocks based on long-term connection strength tests conducted for some of the block/
geogrid combinations tested.
Page 15-S-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Lock and Load Walls Appendix 15-S
Approved details for the KeyGrid wall system are provided in the following plan sheets.
Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved details and the wall
system in general are as follows:
• Drawings 5A and 5B: Cords in the wall facing alignment to form a radius shall be
no shorter than the roll width of the geosynthetic reinforcing.
• Applies to retaining wall heights up to a maximum of 33 feet.
• Applies to retaining walls having a wall face batter of 1H:64V.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to
a diameter of 4 feet.
• The specifications for the fiberglass pins shall match the technical requirements
submitted during the preapproval process.
• It is noted in ASTM C1372 that a dimensional tolerance for the height of the block
of 1/8 inch is allowed, but that WSDOT GDM Section 15.5.3.8 recommends a tighter
dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch. Based on WSDOT experience, for walls greater than
25 ft in height, some cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses
tends to occur in the bottom portion of the wall. Therefore, blocks placed at depths
below the wall top of 25 ft or more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance
of 1/16 inch to reduce the risk of significant cracking of facing blocks.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-S-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Lock and Load Walls
Page 15-S-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
15-T Chapter
Appendix 15-S Preapproved Wall Appendix:
15 Preapproved Wall Appendix:
and Details
Specific Requirements and Details for
for Basalite GEOWALL
Basalite GEOWALL
In addition
In addition to
to the
the general
general design
design requirements
requirements provided
provided in
in Appendix
Appendix 15-A,
15-A, the
the following
following
specific requirements apply:
specific requirements apply:
Facing Blocks
Facing Blocks –– Blocks
Blocks acceptable
acceptable for
for use
use with
with this
this wall
wall system
system include
include the
the GEOWALL
GEOWALL
Pro, GEOWALL
Pro, GEOWALL Max, Max, and
and GEOWALL
GEOWALL Max Max II.
II. Considering
Considering the the currently
currently approved
approved block
block
dimensions, the maximum vertical spacing of reinforcement allowed
dimensions, the maximum vertical spacing of reinforcement allowed to meet the to meet the
requirements in
requirements in the
the AASHTO
AASHTO Specifications
Specifications is is 2.7
2.7 ft
ft (i.e.,
(i.e., up
up to
to four
four 8
8 in.
in. thick
thick blocks).
blocks).
Blocks are set at a near vertical 1H:64V batter. Considering the currently
Blocks are set at a near vertical 1H:64V batter. Considering the currently approved approved
block dimensions,
block dimensions, the
the maximum
maximum vertical
vertical spacing
spacing of of reinforcement
reinforcement allowed
allowed toto meet
meet the
the
requirements in the AASHTO Specifications is 2 ft for the GEOWALL Pro (i.e., 2*Wuu),), and
requirements in the AASHTO Specifications is 2 ft for the GEOWALL Pro (i.e., 2*W and
2.7 ft
2.7 ft for
for the
the GEOWALL
GEOWALL Max Max and
and GEOWALL
GEOWALL Max Max II.
II.
Soil Reinforcement
Soil Reinforcement – – Only
Only geosynthetic
geosynthetic reinforcement
reinforcement listed
listed in
in the
the WSDOT
WSDOT QPLQPL and
and
which has
which has been
been evaluated
evaluated for
for connection
connection strength
strength with
with the
the Basalite
Basalite GEOWALL
GEOWALL system
system
shall be used. The following specific products that are approved for use with this
shall be used. The following specific products that are approved for use with this wallwall
system:
system:
Miragrid 3XT
Miragrid 3XT Stratagrid SG200
Stratagrid SG200
Miragrid 5XT
Miragrid 5XT Stratagrid SG350
Stratagrid SG350
Miragrid 7XT
Miragrid 7XT Stratagrid SG500
Stratagrid SG500
Miragrid 8XT
Miragrid 8XT Stratagrid SG550
Stratagrid SG550
Miragrid 10XT
Miragrid 10XT Stratagrid SG600
Stratagrid SG600
Reinforcement/Facing Block
Reinforcement/Facing Block Connection
Connection Requirements
Requirements – – The
The connection
connection between
between
Basalite GEOWALL block facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement
Basalite GEOWALL block facing units and the geosynthetic reinforcement is essentially is essentially
aa frictional
frictional connection.
connection. ThatThat being
being the
the case,
case, the
the connection
connection resistance
resistance is is strongly
strongly
dependent on the normal force between blocks and in the gravel in-fill
dependent on the normal force between blocks and in the gravel in-fill inside the inside the blocks.
blocks.
Connection testing
Connection testing was
was done
done forfor the
the range
range of
of blocks
blocks and
and geosynthetic
geosynthetic reinforcements
reinforcements
preapproved for this wall system. The design facing/reinforcement connection
preapproved for this wall system. The design facing/reinforcement connection strength strength
shall be
shall be as
as specified
specified inin the
the following
following table:
table:
Tac,, the
T the long-term
long-term connection
connection strength,
strength, shall
shall be
be calculated
calculated as
as follows:
follows:
ac
TMARV • CRu (15-T-1)
(15-S-1)
Tac = (15-R
RFCR • RFD
where,
where,
T
TMARV = the minimum average roll value for the ultimate geosynthetic strength T ,,
MARV = the minimum average roll value for the ultimate geosynthetic strength Tult ult
CR
CRuu = = TTultconn/T , in which T is the ultimate connection strength and T
ultconn/Tlot
lot, in which Tultconn
ultconn is the ultimate connection strength and Tlot lot
is
is the
the lot
lot specific
specific ultimate
ultimate tensile
tensile strength,
strength, (i.e.,
(i.e., the
the lot
lot or
or roll
roll of
of material
material specific
specific
to
to the
the connection
connection testing),
testing),
RF
RFCR =
= creep
creep reduction
reduction factor
factor for
for the
the geosynthetic,
geosynthetic, and
CR and
RF
RFD =
= the
the durability
durability reduction
reduction factor
factor for
for the
the geosynthetic.
geosynthetic.
D
RFCR
CR
and RFD
D
shall be as provided in the WSDOT QPL, Appendix D.
Geotechnical Design
Geotechnical Design Manual
Manual M
M 46-03.12
46-03.13 Page 15-S-1
Page 15-T-1
December 2020
January 2019
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Table 15-T-1 Approved connection strength design values for Basalite GEOWALL
Geogrid Geogrid Product Normal Load, N
SRW Facing Unit Product Line Designation (lbs/ft) Tultconn (lbs/ft) Tlot (lbs/ft)
GEOWALL Pro StrataGrid SG200 σN < 1427 σN*Tan(38o) + 756 3724
Wu = 12 in. σN > 1427 1892
GEOWALL Pro StrataGrid SG350 σN < 2967 σN*Tan(23o) + 1077.5 5211
Wu = 12 in. σN > 2967 2353
GEOWALL Pro StrataGrid SG500 σN < 2983 σN*Tan(30o) + 1060 6751
Wu = 12 in. σN > 2983 2814
GEOWALL Pro StrataGrid SG550 σN < 3100 σN*Tan(36o) + 1076 8247
Wu = 12 in. σN > 3100 3328
GEOWALL Pro StrataGrid SG600 σN < 3000 σN*Tan(33o) + 1252 9553
Wu = 12 in. σN > 3000 3200
GEOWALL Pro Mirafi 3XT σN < 1975 σN*Tan(38o) + 1060 3994
Wu = 12 in. σN > 1975 2603
GEOWALL Pro Mirafi 5XT σN < 3062 σN*Tan(29o) + 1339 5334
Wu = 12 in. σN > 3062 2593
GEOWALL Pro Mirafi 7XT σN < 2776 σN*Tan(35o) + 1087 6442
Wu = 12 in. σN > 2776 3102
GEOWALL Pro Mirafi 8XT σN < 3100 σN*Tan(38o) + 1178 7898
Wu = 12 in. σN > 3100 3600
GEOWALL Pro Mirafi 10XT σN < 3003 σN*Tan(36o) + 1130 10973
Wu = 12 in. σN > 3003 3312
GEOWALL Max StrataGrid SG200 (1.75σN) < 1643 (1.75σN)*Tan(37o) + 1246 3724
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 1643 (1.75σN)*Tan(12o) + 2135
GEOWALL Max StrataGrid SG350 (1.75σN) < 2777 (1.75σN)*Tan(31o) + 1471 5211
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2777 (1.75σN)*Tan(10o) + 2650
GEOWALL Max StrataGrid SG500 (1.75σN) < 2674 (1.75σN)*Tan(33o) + 1605 6751
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2674 (1.75σN)*Tan(15o) + 2622
GEOWALL Max StrataGrid SG550 (1.75σN) < 2796 (1.75σN)*Tan(41o) + 1580 8427
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2796 (1.75σN)*Tan(22o) + 2881
GEOWALL Max StrataGrid SG600 (1.75σN) < 2799 (1.75σN)*Tan(44o) + 1768 9553
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2799 (1.75σN)*Tan(14o) + 3773
GEOWALL Max Mirafi 3XT (1.75σN) < 1651 (1.75σN)*Tan(45o) + 1314 3994
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 1651 (1.75σN)*Tan(5o) + 2821
GEOWALL Max Mirafi 5XT (1.75σN) < 1941 (1.75σN)*Tan(64o) + 23 5334
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 1941 (1.75σN)*Tan(1o) + 3921
GEOWALL Max Mirafi 7XT (1.75σN) < 2700 (1.75σN)*Tan(44o) + 1611 6442
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2700 (1.75σN)*Tan(9o) + 3791
GEOWALL Max Mirafi 8XT (1.75σN) < 2763 (1.75σN)*Tan(52o) + 1294 7898
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2763 (1.75σN)*Tan(13o) + 4193
GEOWALL Max Mirafi 10XT (1.75σN) < 2226 (1.75σN)*Tan(53o) + 1240 10973
Wu =21 in (1.75σN) > 2226 (1.75σN)*Tan(26o) + 3108
GEOWALL Max II, StrataGrid SG200 (1.5σN) < 2700 (1.5σN)*Tan(15o) + 1540 3724
Wu = 18 in (1.5σN) > 2700 2260
Page 15-T-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Table 15-T-1 Approved connection strength design values for Basalite GEOWALL
Geogrid Geogrid Product Normal Load, N
SRW Facing Unit Product Line Designation (lbs/ft) Tultconn (lbs/ft) Tlot (lbs/ft)
GEOWALL Max II, StrataGrid SG350 (1.5σN) < 3600 (1.5σN)*Tan(16o) + 1650 5211
Wu = 18 in (1.5σN) > 3600 2680
GEOWALL Max II, StrataGrid SG500 (1.5σN) < 4500 (1.5σN)*Tan(24o) + 1570 6751
Wu = 18 in (1.5σN) > 4500 3570
GEOWALL Max II, StrataGrid SG600 (1.5σN) < 6300 (1.5σN)*Tan(26o) + 2125 9553
Wu = 18 in (1.5σN) > 6300 5200
Notes:
1. MSEW’s input is in lb/ft2 of surface area. Testing reports lb/ft of wall face.
2. Input is based on Wu * N, where Wu is the width of the block into the wall in ft, to get the correct input values. Using N
as the normal load in the connection test (ASTM D6638), then for MSEW, σN is determined as:
a. N for Geowall Pro is 1.0σN,
b. N for GEOWALL Max is 1.75σN,
c. N for GEOWALL Max II is 1.5σN.
d. The regressions used to generate the Tultconn equations relate the normal force on the facing blocks in lbs/ft of
reinforcement width to the connection strength, in lbs/ft. For example, for (b) above, N is carried by the surface
area of the block and therefore σN is (N lbs/ft)/(1.75 ft) to get stress in psf. Therefore, to get N from σN, use
N = 1.75σN.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-3
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Reinforcement pullout shall be calculated based on the default values for geogrid
reinforcement provided in the AASHTO Specifications.
Approved details for the Basalite GEOWALL system wall system are provided in the
following plan sheets. Exceptions and additional requirements regarding these approved
details and the wall system in general are as follows:
• It is noted in ASTM C1372 that a dimensional tolerance for the height of the block
of 1/8 inch is allowed, but that WSDOT GDM Section 15.5.3.8 recommends a tighter
dimensional tolerance of 1/16 inch. Based on WSDOT experience, for walls greater than
25 ft in height, some cracking of facing blocks due to differential vertical stresses
tends to occur in the bottom portion of the wall. Therefore, blocks placed at depths
below the wall top of 25 ft or more should be cast to a vertical dimensional tolerance
of 1/16 inch to reduce the risk of significant cracking of facing blocks.
• Applies to retaining wall heights up to a maximum of 33 feet.
• Applies to retaining walls having a wall face batter of 1:64.
• The culvert penetration and obstruction avoidance details are preapproved up to a
diameter of 4 feet.
• The cast-in-place concrete collar to be constructed around pipes that are protruding
through the wall face is considered non-preapproved. Detailed stamped drawings
and stamped engineering calculations are to be submitted for approval on a project
specific basis.
• The specifications for the fiberglass pins shall match the technical requirements
submitted during the preapproval process.
• The geosynthetic reinforcement strength calculations shall be based on the values
provided in the latest version of the WSDOT Qualified Products List, Appendix D.
Page 15-T-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
December 2020
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
Prepared for
STATE OF WASHINGTON
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
The 3 Plane units are not approved
for use on WSDOT projects. See
WSDOT Standard Specification
6-13.3(4).
This restriction applies to all TM
subsequent plan sheets that show
the 3 Plane unit shape. GEOWALL System
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
GEOWALL Pro GEOWALL Max II GEOWALL Max
Designed By: Project:
No. Date Revision B The information on this drawing is for conceptual design
�����__________ par WSDOT GEOWALL™ ---..�---t and should not be used without the signature of a
Scale: Project No: professional engineer. Details should be specific to the
��� - - - - - - - -
��� As Noted project and project site requirements.
Title:
���
��� - - - - - - - - Date: GEOWALL Details Sheet No.
1 of 12
Q �21�1t www.basalite.com
8/29/2012
Page 15-T-5
Appendix 15-T
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-7
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-9
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-11
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-13
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL Appendix 15-T
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 15-T-15
December 2020
Appendix 15-T Preapproved Wall Appendix: Specific Requirements and Details for Basalite GEOWALL
Page 15-T-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Chapter 16 Geosynthetic Design
16 .1 Overview
This chapter addresses the design of geosynthetics in the following applications:
• Underground drainage, including prefabricated drainage strips
• Soil separation
• Soil stabilization
• Permanent erosion control
• Silt fences
• Base reinforcement for embankments over soft ground
• Geomembranes
Investigation and design of geosynthetic walls and reinforced slopes is addressed in
Chapter 15.
16 .2 Development of Design Parameters for Geosynthetic Application
For underground drainage design, information regarding the gradation and density
of the soil in the vicinity of the geosynthetic drain, as well as details regarding the
likely sources of water to the drain, including groundwater, is needed. For shallow
systems, hand holes will be adequate for this assessment. For drainage systems behind
retaining walls, test holes may be needed. In general, the geotechnical site investigation
conducted for the structure itself will be adequate for the drainage design.
In general for soil stabilization and separation, hand holes coupled with Falling Weight
Deflectometer (FWD) test results will be adequate for design purposes. For extremely
soft subgrade soils, subgrade shear strength data may be needed to allow a subgrade
reinforcement design to be conducted.
For permanent erosion control, the gradation characteristics of the soil below
the geotextile layer, and measurement of the groundwater, are important to the
geosynthetic design. Test holes or test pits will be needed at key locations where
permanent erosion control geotextiles are planned to be used.
Investigation for silt fences can generally be done by inspection, as silt fence design is,
in general, standardized.
Investigation for base reinforcement of embankments over soft ground is addressed
in Chapter 9.
For geomembrane design, groundwater information and soil gradation information
is usually needed. If the geomembrane is to be placed on a slope, the geotechnical
data needed to investigate slope stability will need to be obtained (see Chapters 7, 9,
and 10).
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 16-1
October 2013
Geosynthetic Design Chapter 16
16 .3 Design Requirements
For Standard Specification geosynthetic design (underground drainage, separation, soil
stabilization, permanent erosion control, silt fences, and prefabricated drainage strips),
the Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 630, shall be used for geosynthetic design. For
situations where a site specific geosynthetic design is required, FHWA manual No.
FHWA HI-95-038 “Geosynthetic Design and Construction Guidelines – Participant
Notebook” (Holtz, et al., 1995) shall be used. For base reinforcement of embankments
over soft ground, the FHWA manual identified above shall be used for design in
addition to the requirements in Chapter 9. For geomembrane design, the above
referenced FHWA manual should be used.
16 .4 References
Holtz, R. D., Christopher, B. R., and Berg, R. R., 1995, Geosynthetic Design and
Construction Guidelines, Federal Highway Administration, FHWA HI-95-038.
Design Manual M 22-01
Page 16-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-1
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17.1.3 Field Investigation
If the available geotechnical data and information gathered from the site review is not
adequate to make a determination of subsurface conditions as required herein, then
new subsurface data shall be obtained. Explorations consisting of geotechnical borings,
test pits and hand holes or a combination thereof shall be performed to meet the
investigation requirements provided herein. As a minimum, the subsurface exploration
and laboratory test program should be developed to obtain information to analyze
foundation stability, settlement, and constructability with respect to:
• Geological formation(s)
• Location and thickness of soil and rock units
• Engineering properties of soil and rock units such as unit weight, shear strength
and compressibility
• Groundwater conditions (seasonal variations)
• Ground surface topography
• Local considerations, (e.g., liquefiable soils, expansive or dispersive soil
deposits, underground voids from solution weathering or mining activity, or slope
instability potential)
Standard foundations for sign bridges, cantilever signs, cantilever signals and strain
pole standards are based on allowable lateral bearing pressure and angle of internal
friction of the foundation soils. The determination of these values can be estimated by
Standard Penetration Test (SPT). Portable Penetrometer Tests (PPT) may be used to
obtain the soil data provided the blow count data is properly converted to an equivalent
standard penetrometer “N” value. The designer should refer to Chapter 3 for details
regarding the proper conversion factors of PPT to SPT. Every structure foundation
location does not need to be drilled. Specific field investigation requirements for the
structures addressed in this chapter are summarized in Table 17-1.
Page 17-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
Structure
Field Investigation Requirements
Type
signs, sign bridges, and Only a site review is required if the new structures are founded in new or existing embankments
strain poles, cantilever
known to be constructed of gravel or select borrow and compacted in accordance with Method B
Cantilever signals,
or C of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Otherwise, subsurface conditions should be verified
luminaires
using SPT, or PPT tests and hand augers for shallower foundations) should be performed. For
foundations within approximately 75 feet of each other or less, such as at a small to moderate
sized intersection, one exploration point for the foundation group is adequate if conditions
are relatively uniform. For more widely spaced foundation locations, or for more variable site
conditions, one boring near each foundation should be obtained. The depth of the exploration
point should be equal to the maximum expected depth of the foundation plus 2 to 5 feet.
For noise barriers less than 100 feet in length, the exploration should occur approximately
midpoint along the alignment and should be completed on the alignment of the noise barrier face.
Noise barriers
For noise barriers more than 100 feet in length, exploration points should be spaced every 200 to
400 feet, depending on the uniformity of subsurface conditions. Locate at least one exploration
point near the most critical location for stability. Exploration points should be completed as close
to the alignment of the noise barrier face as possible. For noise barriers placed on slopes, an
additional boring off the wall alignment to investigate overall stability of the wall-slope combination
should be obtained.
The following minimum guidelines for frequency of Building surface Explorationpoints
explorations should be used. Borings should be located area (ft2) (minimum)
to allow the site subsurface stratigraphy to be adequately <200 1
200 - 1000 2
Building foundations
defined beneath the structure. Additional explorations may be
1000 – 3,000 3
required depending on the variability in site conditions,
>3,000 3-4
building geometry and expected loading conditions.
The depth of the borings will vary depending on the expected loads being applied to the
foundation and/or site soil conditions. The borings should be extended to a depth below the
bottom elevation of the building foundation a minimum of 2.5 times the width of the spread footing
foundation or 1.5 times the length of a deep foundation (i.e., piles or shafts). Exploration depth
should be great enough to fully penetrate soft highly compressible soils (e.g., peat, organic
silt, soft fine grained soils) into competent material suitable bearing capacity (e.g., stiff to hard
cohesive soil, compact dense cohesionless soil or bedrock).
If no new fill is being placed, the culvert diameter is 3 feet or less, soft soil is known to not be
present immediately below the culvert, and the culvert is installed by excavating through the fill,
only a site and office review conducted as described in Chapter 2 is required, plus hand holes to
obtain samples for pH and resistivity sampling for corrosion assessment for the culvert. If new fill
(without foundation elements)
is being placed, the borings obtained for the design of the fill itself may suffice (see Chapter 9),
provided the stratigraphy below the length of the culvert can be defined. Otherwise, a minimum
of two borings should be obtained, one near the one-third or one-quarter points toward each end
of the culvert. For culverts greater than 300 feet in length, an additional boring near the culvert
Culverts
midpoint should be obtained. Borings should be located to investigate both the subsurface
conditions below the culvert, and the characteristics of the fill beside and above the culvert if
some existing fill is present at the culvert site. If the culvert is to be jacked through existing fill,
borings in the fill and at the jacking and receiving pit locations should be obtained, to a depth of 3
to 5 feet below the culvert for the boring(s) in the fill, and to the anticipated depth of the shoring/
reaction frame foundations in the jacking and receiving pits.
Hand holes and portable penetrometer measurements may be used for culverts with a diameter
of 3 feet or less, if the depth of exploration required herein can be obtained. Otherwise, SPT and/
or CPT borings must be obtained.
In addition to the exploration requirements in Table 17-1, groundwater measurements conducted in accordance with
Chapter 2 should be obtained if groundwater is anticipated within the minimum required depths of the borings as
described herein.
Field Investigation Requirements for Cantilever Signals, Strain Poles, Cantilever Signs,
Sign Bridges, Luminaires, Noise Barriers, and Buildings
Table 17-1
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-3
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17 .2 Foundation Design Requirements for Cantilever Signals, Strain
Poles, Cantilever Signs, Sign Bridges, and Luminaires - General
The standard foundation designs provided in the Standard Plans for cantilever signals,
strain poles, cantilever signs, sign bridges, and luminaires should be used if the
applicable soil and slope conditions as described herein for each of these structures
are present. If soil or rock conditions not suitable for standard foundations are
present, if conditions are marginal, or if nonstandard loadings are applied, a detailed
foundation analysis should be conducted. Design for cantilever signals, strain poles,
cantilever signs, sign bridges, and luminaires shall be performed in accordance with
the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaires, and Traffic Signals (AASHTO, 2001).
17.2.1 Design by Correlation for Cantilever Signals, Strain Poles, Cantilever Signs,
Sign Bridges, and Luminaires
WSDOT standard foundation designs for cantilever signals, strain poles, cantilever
signs, sign bridges, and luminaires are based on allowable lateral bearing pressures
and soil friction angles developed from correlation (Patterson, 1962) and many years
of WSDOT experience for the design of these types of small foundations. The original
correlation was based on the measured resistance to pull out a 1.5 inch diameter auger
through the foundation soil. The correlation reported by Patterson (1962) ranged from
a 200 lbs pullout force in “very soft soil” that was equated to an allowable lateral
bearing of 1,000 psf, to a 750 to 1,000 lbs pullout force in “average soil” equated to
an allowable lateral bearing of 2,500 psf, and to a pullout force of 2,000 to 2,500 lbs
in “very hard soil” equated to an allowable lateral bearing of 4,500 psf. For WSDOT
use, this correlation was conservatively related to SPT N values (uncorrected for
overburden pressure) using approximate correlations between soil shear strength and
SPT N values such as provided in AASHTO (1988). The allowable lateral bearing
pressures that resulted from this correlation is presented in Table 17-2. This correlation
is based on uncorrected N values (not corrected for overburden pressure).
A friction angle for the soil is also needed for the foundation design for these
structures, typically to evaluate torsional stability. See Chapter 5 for the determination
of soil friction angles, either from correlation to SPT N values, or from laboratory
testing.
Table 17-2 should be used to check if standard foundation designs are applicable for
the specific site. The values in Table 17-2 may also be used for special site specific
foundation design to adjust depths or dimensions of standard foundations (except noise
barriers) to address soil conditions that are marginal or poorer than the conditions
assumed by the standard foundation design, or to address nonstandard loadings. In
such cases, the values from Table 17-2 should be used as the allowable soil pressure
S1 in Article 13.10 of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals (AASHTO, 2001).
Page 17-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
Soil Consistency as Standard Penetration Test Allowable Lateral Bearing
Identified in Patterson (1962) Resistance, N (blows/ft) Pressure (psf)
2 750
3 800
4 900
Very Soft Soil
5 1000
6 1100
7 1200
8 1300
9 1400
Poor Soil 10 1500
11 1700
12 1900
13 2100
14 2300
Average Soil 15 2500
16 2700
17 2900
18 3100
Good Soil 19 3300
20 3500
25 4200
Very Hard Soil 30 >4500
35 >4500
Design Parameter Correlations for the Design of Signal, Signs, Sign Bridge,
and Luminaire Foundations
Table 17-2
Some additional requirements regarding characterization of marginal soil conditions
are as follows:
• Consider the soil throughout the entire depth of the proposed foundation. Where
the foundation soil is stratified, a weighted average N value should be used to
design the foundation. An exception would be where soft soils are encountered at
the ground surface, in which case the use of a weighted average is not appropriate.
• For foundations installed in embankments constructed from select or gravel borrow
compacted using Method B or C in the WSDOT Standard Specifications, it can
generally be assumed that standard foundations can be used, as such embankments
will generally have “N” values of 25 or more, which are more than adequate for
standard foundations. A standard foundation may also be used where 75% or more
of the foundation is to be placed in new fill, provided that the foundation soil below
the fill has a SPT of 8 or more. For Common Borrow compacted using Method
B or C in the WSDOT Standard Specifications, standard foundations designed
allowable lateral bearing pressures of 2,000 psf or less may be used.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-5
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
• In general, vertical loads for sign, signal, and luminaire structure foundations are
very low (i.e., 2 ksf or less) and usually do not control design. However, if it is
has a SPT ofthat
discovered 8 or very
more. soft
For Common Borroworcompacted
silts, clays, peat (say,using
N Method
= 4 orBless)
or C in
isthe WSDOT
present within
Standard Specifications, standard foundations designed allowable lateral bearing pressures of 2,000
thepsfbottom 1 to 2 feet
or less may be used. or more of the foundation, consideration should also be given
to a special
• In foundation
general, vertical loads fordesign in this
sign, signal, case to avoid
and luminaire structuredirect bearing
foundations on low
are very these(i.e.,very
2 ksf
softor soils.
less) and usually do not control design. However, if it is discovered that very soft silts, clays, or
peat (say, N = 4 or less) is present within the bottom 1 to 2 ft or more of the foundation, consideration
The allowable
should alsolateral
be givensoil bearing
to a special valuesdesign
foundation in Table
in this17-2
case toapply only bearing
avoid direct to relatively flat
on these very
conditions. If sloping ground is present, some special considerations in determining
soft soils.
the foundation depth are needed. Always evaluate whether or not the local geometry
willThe
affect the lateral
allowable foundation design.
soil bearing valuesFor all foundations
in Table 17-2 apply onlyplaced in aflatslope
to relatively or where
conditions. the
If sloping
centerline of the foundation is less than 1B for the shoulder of the slope (B =Always
ground is present, some special considerations in determining the foundation depth are needed. width or
evaluate whether or not the local geometry will affect the foundation design. For all foundations placed
diameter
in a slopeoforthe Standard
where Foundation),
the centerline the isStandard
of the foundation less than 1BPlan foundation
for the shoulder of depths
the slope should be
increased
(B = width asorfollows,
diameter ofandthe as illustrated
Standard in Figure
Foundation), 17-1:Plan foundation depths should be
the Standard
increased as follows, and as illustrated in Figure 17-1:
• For slopes 3H:1V or flatter, no additional depth is required.
• For slopes 3H:1V or flatter, no additional depth is required.
• For 2H:1V
• For 2H:1V or orflatter,
flatter,
addadd
0.5B0.5B to the depth.
to the depth.
• For 1.5H:1V
• For slopes,
1.5H:1V slopes, addadd
1.0B1.0B to the depth.
to the depth.
Interpolation between the values is acceptable. These types of foundations should not
Interpolation between the values is acceptable. These types of foundations should not be placed on slopes
be placed on slopes steeper than 1.5H:1V. If the foundation is located on a slope that is
steeper than 1.5H:1V. If the foundation is located on a slope that is part of a drainage ditch, the top of the
partstandard
of a drainage
foundationditch, thebetop
can simply of the
located at orstandard
below the foundation can simply
bottom of the drainage ditch. be located at or
below the bottom of the drainage ditch.
X
1 D = foundation depth
d = increase in foundation
B
depth due to slope
Foundation
Figure Design design
17-1 Foundation Detail detail
for Sloping Ground
for sloping ground.
Figure 17-1
Note that these
Foundation sloping
Design ground
for Signals, Signs, recommendations
Noise Barriers, do notGeotechnical
apply to luminaire
Design Manual M 46-03
Culverts, and Buildings December 2006
foundations.
Chapter 17-8
When a nonstandard foundation design using Table 17-2 is required, the geotechnical
designer must develop a table identifying the soil units, soil unit boundary elevations,
allowable lateral bearing pressure, and soil friction angle for each soil unit. The
structural designer will use these data to prepare the nonstandard foundation design.
Page 17-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
17.2.2 Special Design for Cantilever Signals, Strain Poles, Cantilever Signs, Sign
Bridges, and Luminaires
For foundations in rock, a special design is always required, and Table 17-2 is not
applicable. Fracturing and jointing in the rock, and its effect on the foundation
resistance, must be evaluated. In general, a drilled shaft or anchored footing foundation
will be required. Foundation designs based on Table 17-2 are also not applicable if
the foundation soil consists of very soft clays, silts, organic silts, or peat. In such
cases, a footing designed to “float” above the very soft compressible soils, over-
excavation and replacement with higher quality material, or very deep foundations are
typically required.
For shaft type foundations in soil, the Broms Method as specified in the AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals (AASHTO, 2001) or the procedures specified in Chapter 8 for lateral
load analysis of deep foundations (e.g., P-y analysis) should be used for conditions
where Table 17-2 is not applicable, or as an alternative to Table 17-2 based design.
For shafts in rock, nominal lateral resistance should be estimated based on the
procedures provided in Chapter 8. This means that for special lateral load design of
shaft foundations, the geotechnical designer will need to provide P-y curve data to
the structural designer to complete the soil-structure interaction analysis. For spread
footing design, the design methods provided in Chapter 8 to estimate nominal bearing
resistance and settlement should be used, but instead of the referenced load groups
and resistance factors, the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
(2002) combined with a minimum bearing capacity safety factor of 2.3 for Load Factor
Design (LFD), or 3.0 for allowable stress or service load design (ASD) should be used
for static conditions, and a safety factor of 1.1 should be used for seismic conditions,
if seismic conditions are applicable. Note that in general, the foundations for the types
of structures addressed in this chapter are not mitigated for liquefaction (see Chapter
6). For anchored footing foundations over bedrock, anchor depth, spacing, and nominal
resistance shall be assessed considering the degree of fracturing and jointing in the
rock (see Chapters 5, 8, and 12 for design requirements).
17.2.3 Cantilever Signals and Strain Pole Standards
17 .2 .3 .1 Overview
There are eight types of cantilever signal and strain poles standards that are covered
in Section J-7 of the WSDOT Standard Plans. Type PPB (pedestrian push bottom
pole), PS (pedestrian head standard), Type I/RM (vertical head and ramp meter), Type
FB (flashing beacon standard) and Type IV (strain pole standard) are structures that
generally consist of a single vertical metal pole member. Type II (mast arm standard),
Type III (lighting and mast arm standard) and Type V (lighting and strain pole
standard) have a vertical metal pole member with a horizontal mast arm. Lights and/or
signals will be suspended from the mast arm. The standard signal foundations designs
assume that the foundation soil is capable of withstanding the design lateral soil
bearing pressure created by wind and dead loads. The details on the foundation designs
can be found in Section J-7 of the Standard Plans, in the Signing Foundations Chapter
1020 and Signal Foundations Chapter 1330 of the Design Manual M 22-01.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-7
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17 .2 .3 .2 Standard Foundation Designs
The standard foundations for these structures consist of square or round shafts that vary
in diameter from 1.5 feet to 3.0 feet for square and 2.0 feet to 4.0 feet for round shaft
foundations. The standard designs assume a concrete to soil contact. For structure types
PPB, PS and I/RM, the foundation depths are quite shallow and vary between 1.5 feet
and 3.0 feet in depth. Foundation depths vary from 6 feet to 15 feet for signal structure
Types II, III, IV and V. Standard foundations for signal structures Types PPB, PS and
I are designed for 1500 psf (N ≥ 10 bpf) average allowable lateral bearing pressure.
Standard foundations for signal structures Types II, III, IV and V have been designed
for 1000 psf (N ≥ 5 bpf), 1500 psf (N ≥ 10 bpf), and 2500 psf (N ≥ 15 bpf) average
allowable lateral bearing pressure. If the foundation is placed in new compacted fill –
standard foundations may be used as specified in Section 17.2.1.
For round shafts, the standard foundation designs assume for torsional stability that
the soil to foundation contact friction angle is 30o, which is typical for concrete cast
against soil for moderate strength soils.
17 .2 .3 .3 Construction Considerations
Structures that require short round or square foundations (i.e. < than 9 feet) could be
easily formed in an open excavation. The backfill placed around the foundation in the
excavation must be compacted in accordance with the WSDOT Standard Specifications
M41-10, Section 2-09.3(1)E and using high quality soil backfill. Foundation
construction shall be in accordance with the WSDOT Standard Specifications M41-10,
Sections 8-20.3(2) and 8-20.3(4). Following the removal of the concrete forms (the
forms can be left in place if corrugated metal pipe is used), compacted backfill shall
be placed around the shaft to provide containment. If the backfill cannot be properly
compacted, then controlled density fill could be used instead.
Deep shaft foundations greater than 9 feet may require the use of temporary casing,
slurries or both. Generally in most cases, the temporary casing can be removed.
Special foundations designs may be required if the geotechnical designer determines
that permanent casing is necessary. In this situation, the structural designer must be
informed of this condition. These structures are under lateral and rotational loads.
The shear capacity of the foundation under a rotational force is reduced if steel
casing remains in the ground. It is important to note here that if the foundation
design assumes that the soil around the shaft, assuming the contractor makes an open
excavation and then backfills the excavation cavity around the formed foundation,
is properly compacted, the degree of compaction is somehow verified in the field.
The geotechnical designer needs to make sure that the construction specifications are
clear in this regard, and that the project inspectors know what needs to be done to
enforce the specifications. If the degree of compaction cannot be verified in the field
due to the depth of the open excavation and safety regulations, this needs to be taken
into consideration in the selection of soil design parameters. The specifications also
need to be clear regarding the removal of temporary forms (e.g., sonotubes) for the
foundations. If for some reason they cannot be removed due to the depth of the hole or
other reasons, sonotubes should not be used. Instead, corrugated metal pipe should be
used so that torsional resistance of the foundation is maintained.
Page 17-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
17.2.4 Cantilever and Sign Bridges
17 .2 .4 .1 Overview
Sign bridge foundation details are shown in the WSDOT Standard Plan G-2a. There
are three foundations types and they are identified as Type 1, 2 and 3. Type 1 sign
bridge foundations consist of a single 3 feet diameter drilled shaft with a shaft length
that can vary between 11.5 and 16.5 feet. The shaft length is a function of the sign
bridge span length which can vary less than 60 feet to a maximum of 150 feet. Type
2 and 3 foundations consist of massive concrete trench foundations that are 3 feet
× 10 feet in plan area with a embedment that can vary between 5.5 feet to 11.5 feet
depending on span length. All designs assume a concrete to soil contact.
There are three cantilever sign foundation types in the WSDOT Standard Plans. The
structural details are shown in Standard Plan G-3a. These foundations are similar to the
sign bridge foundations. Type 1 cantilever sign foundations consist of two 10 feet long
drilled shafts. The Type 2 and 3 foundations are a massive concrete trench foundation
that is 3 feet × 10 feet in plan area with an embedment that can vary between 8 feet and
12.5 feet. Embedment depth of the foundation is controlled by the total square feet of
exposed sign area. All designs assume a concrete to soil contact.
17 .2 .4 .2 Standard Foundation Designs
Standard foundation for cantilevered and sign bridges Types 1 and 2 have been
prepared assuming the site soils meet a minimum 2,500 psf allowable lateral bearing
pressure. Using the Table 17-2, a soil with a penetration resistance N ≥ 15 would
provide adequate support for these structures. A Type 3 foundation was designed for
slightly poorer soils using a lateral bearing pressure of 1,500 psf for structural design.
Using Table 17-2, a soil with a penetration resistance of ≥10 bpf would provide
adequate lateral resistance for a Type 3 foundation.
17 .2 .4 .3 Construction Considerations
The construction of the trench footings may be performed as a cast-in-place foundation
that is poured directly against the soils, or they could be constructed in a large open
excavation using wide trench boxes and concrete forms. If a standard foundation
design is to be used, but is installed in an open excavation, the backfill placed around
the foundation in the excavation must be compacted in accordance with Method C of
the WSDOT Standard Specifications and using high quality soil backfill.
The geotechnical designer must evaluate the stability of open excavations. Obviously,
high groundwater could affect the stability of the side slopes of the excavation. Casing
for drilled shafts or shoring boxes for the trench footing would be required under
these conditions. All of these foundations have been designed assuming a concrete to
soil contact. Generally in most cases, the temporary casing for drilled shafts can be
removed. Special foundations designs may be required if the geotechnical designer
determines that permanent casing is necessary. In this situation, the structural engineer
must be informed of this condition. These structures are under lateral and rotational
loads. The shear capacity of the foundation under a rotational force is reduced if steel
casing remains in the ground.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-9
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
It is important to note here that if the foundation design assumes that the soil around
the shaft, assuming the contractor makes an open excavation and then backfills the
excavation cavity around the formed foundation, is properly compacted, the degree of
compaction is somehow verified in the field. The geotechnical designer needs to make
sure that
Foundation the construction
Design specifications
for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers,areCulverts,
clear inandthis regard, and that the project
Buildings
inspectors know what needs to be done to enforce the specifications. If the degree of
compaction
geotechnical cannot
designer betoverified
needs make surein that
the the
field due to thespecifications
construction depth of theareopen
clearexcavation and
in this regard, and
safety regulations, this needs to be taken into consideration in the selection
that the project inspectors know what needs to be done to enforce the specifications. If the degree of of soil
design parameters.
compaction The in
cannot be verified specifications
the field due toalso need of
the depth tothe
be open
clearexcavation
regardingand thesafety
removal of
regulations,
thistemporary formsinto
needs to be taken (e.g., sonotubes)
consideration forselection
in the the foundations. If for
of soil design some reason
parameters. they cannotalso
The specifications
needbetoremoved
be clear regarding the depth
due to the removalofofthe
temporary
hole orforms
other(e.g., sonotubes)
reasons, for theshould
sonotubes foundations.
not beIf for
someused. Instead, corrugated metal pipe should be used so that torsional resistanceshould
reason they cannot be removed due to the depth of the hole or other reasons, sonotubes of thenot
be used. Instead, corrugated metal pipe should be used so that torsional resistance of the foundation is
foundation is maintained.
maintained.
17.2.5 Luminaires (Light Standards)
17 .2 .5 .1 17.2.5 Luminaires (Light Standards)
Overview
17.2.5.1
StandardOverview
luminaire (light standard) foundations consist of 3 feet diameter round
Standard
shafts.luminaire (light standard)
The foundation foundations
details are shownconsist of 3 ft diameter
in WSDOT round
Standard shafts.
Plan J-1b.The foundation
The standard
details are shown in WSDOT
foundation depth is 8 feet. Standard Plan J-1b. The standard foundation depth is 8 ft.
17 .2 .5 .2 Standard Foundation Design
17.2.5.2
StandardStandard Foundation
foundations Design
for luminaires (light standards) have been prepared assuming the
Standard foundations
site soils meet afor luminaires
minimum (lightpsf
1,500 standards) havelateral
allowable been prepared
bearingassuming theUsing
pressure. site soils
themeet a
Table
minimum 1,500 psf allowable lateral bearing pressure. Using the Table 17-2, a soil with a penetration
17-2, a soil with a penetration resistance N ≥ 10 would provide adequate support for
resistance N ≥ 10 would provide adequate support for these structures. The standard foundation design is
these structures.
applicable Theonstandard
for foundations slopes offoundation design
2H:1V or flatter is applicable
as shown in Figurefor foundations on slopes
17-2.
of 2H:1V or flatter as shown in Figure 17-2.
TheThe standard
standard foundation
foundation designs designs assume
assume for forstability
torsional torsional thatstability
the soil tothat the soilcontact
foundation to friction
angle is 30o, which
foundation contact friction
is typical angle is
for concrete 30°,
cast which
against soil is
fortypical
moderateforstrength
concrete cast against soil
soils.
for moderate strength soils.
< 1.5 ft
2 max
1 D = foundation depth = 8 ft (standard)
Luminaire Foundation Design Detail for Sloping Ground
Figure 17-2
Figure 17-2 Luminaire foundation design detail for sloping ground.
Page 17-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
17 .2 .5 .3 Construction Considerations
Luminaire foundations could be easily formed in an open excavation. The backfill
placed around the foundation in the excavation must be compacted in accordance
with the WSDOT Standard Specifications M41-10, Section 2-09.3(1)E and using high
quality soil backfill. Foundation construction shall be in accordance with the WSDOT
Standard Specifications M41-10, Sections 8-20.3(2) and 8-20.3(4). Following the
removal of the concrete forms (the forms can be left in place if corrugated metal pipe
is used), compacted backfill shall be placed around the shaft to provide containment.
If the backfill cannot be properly compacted, then controlled density fill could be
used instead.
Deep shaft foundations (i.e., special designs) greater than 9 feet may require the use of
temporary casing, slurries or both. Generally, in most cases, the temporary casing can
be removed. Special foundations designs may be required if the geotechnical designer
determines that permanent casing is necessary. In this situation, the structural designer
must be informed of this condition. These structures are under lateral and rotational
loads. The shear capacity of the foundation under a rotational force is reduced if steel
casing remains in the ground.
It is important to note here that if the foundation design assumes that the soil around
the shaft, assuming the contractor makes an open excavation and then backfills the
excavation cavity around the formed foundation, is properly compacted, the degree of
compaction is somehow verified in the field. The geotechnical designer needs to make
sure that the construction specifications are clear in this regard, and that the project
inspectors know what needs to be done to enforce the specifications. If the degree of
compaction cannot be verified in the field due to the depth of the open excavation and
safety regulations, this needs to be taken into consideration in the selection of soil
design parameters. The specifications also need to be clear regarding the removal of
temporary forms (e.g., sonotubes) for the foundations. If for some reason they cannot
be removed due to the depth of the hole or other reasons, sonotubes should not be
used. Instead, corrugated metal pipe should be used so that torsional resistance of the
foundation is maintained.
17 .3 Noise Barriers
17.3.1 Overview
There are 20 standard designs for noise barriers that are covered in WSDOT Standard
Plans D-2a through D-2t. The Standard Plans contains detailed designs of seven cast-
in-place concrete, seven pre-cast concrete, and five masonry block noise barriers.
Three foundation options are available for the cast-in-place and pre-cast concrete
barriers. They include round shafts and spread footings. The spread footing foundation
option has two designs. One design consists of an offset panel and a second design
consists of a uniform panel where the panel wall bears in the middle of the footing. The
following is a summary of the critical design elements of noise barrier walls:
• All noise barrier spread footing standard foundations have been designed assuming
an allowable bearing pressure of 2 kips per square foot (ksf).
• The diameter and length of the standard shaft foundations can also vary with soil
condition, exposed panel height and loading condition. The lengths vary from
4.75 feet to 13.25 feet, and shaft diameters vary between 1.0 to 2.5 feet.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-11
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17.3.2 Foundation Design Requirements for Noise Barriers
Foundation design for noise barrier shall be conducted in accordance with the most
current AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers,
including interims (AASHTO 1989). Currently, design of noise barriers is based on
Load Factor Design (LFD). Therefore, the load factors and safety factors specified
in the AASHTO manual for sound barrier foundation design, except as specifically
required in this chapter of the GDM, should be used.
In addition, the geotechnical designer shall perform a global stability analysis of the
noise barrier when the barrier is located on or at the crest of a cut or fill slope. The
design slope model must include a surcharge load equal to the footing bearing stress.
The minimum slope stability factor of safety of the structure and slope shall be 1.3 or
greater for static conditions and 1.1 for seismic conditions. Note that in general, the
foundations for noise barriers are not mitigated for liquefaction (see Chapter 6).
All Standard Plan noise barrier structures have been designed to retain a minimal
amount of soil that must be no more than 4 feet in height with a level backslope. The
retained soil above the noise barrier foundation is assumed to have a friction angle of
34o and a wall interface friction of 0.67φ, resulting in a Ka of 0.26 for the retained soil,
and a unit weight of 125 pcf. All standard and non-standard noise barrier foundation
designs shall include the effects of any differential fill height between the front and
back of the wall.
17 .3 .2 .1 Spread Footings
For spread footing design, the design methods provided in Chapter 8 to estimate
nominal bearing resistance and settlement should be used, but instead of the referenced
load groups and resistance factors, the AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural
Design of Sound Barriers (1989) and AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway
Bridges (2002) combined with a minimum bearing capacity safety factor of 2.3 for
Load Factor Design (LFD), or 3.0 for allowable stress or service load design (ASD)
should be used for static conditions, and a safety factor of 1.1 should be used for
seismic conditions, if seismic conditions are applicable. Note that in general, the
foundations for noise barriers are not mitigated for liquefaction (see Chapter 6).
The noise barrier footing shall be designed to be stable for overturning and sliding.
The methodology and safety factors provided in the AASHTO Standard Specifications
for Highway Bridges (2002) applicable to gravity walls in general for overturning
and sliding (FS of 2.0 and 1.5, respectively for static conditions, and 1.5 and 1.1 for
seismic conditions), shall be used to assess noise barrier stability for these two limit
states, using service loads.
The geotechnical designer will also be responsible to estimate foundation settlement
using the appropriate settlement theories and methods as outlined in Chapter 8. The
geotechnical designer will report the estimated total and differential settlement.
The soil properties (unit weight, friction and cohesion) shall be determined using the
procedures described in Chapter 5.
Noise barrier footings shall be located relative to the final grade to have a minimum
soil cover over the top of the footing of 2 feet.
Page 17-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
For the Standard Plan noise barrier footing foundation, the geotechnical designer shall
use the procedures described above to estimate the allowable bearing resistance for
the foundation with consideration to the actual site and subsurface conditions for the
wall, and to verify that the allowable bearing resistance is greater than the standard
foundation design bearing stress of 2.0 ksf. Note that the standard noise barrier
foundations have been designed to resist a PGA of 0.35g. This corresponds to a peak
bedrock acceleration (PBA) from Figure 6-6 in Chapter 6 of 0.3g and an amplification
factor of 1.18, corresponding to stiff soil.
For nonstandard noise barrier designs, use Mononabe-Okabe analysis in accordance
with Chapter 15 to determine the seismic earth pressure if the noise barrier retains soil.
17 .3 .2 .2 Shaft Foundations
In general, shaft supported noise barriers are treated as non-gravity cantilever walls
for foundation design. Shaft foundations have been designed for Standard Plan noise
barriers using two soil strength conditions. D1 and D2 trench and shaft foundations
have been designed assuming a soil friction of 32 and 38 degrees respectively. The
geotechnical designer is responsible to determine the in-situ soil strength parameters
using the appropriate field correlations and/or laboratory tests as described in
Chapter 5. The geotechnical designer provides recommendations as to which deep
foundation(s) is appropriate for inclusion in the contract plans. If the soil strength
parameters lie between 32 and 38 degrees, the foundation design based on 32 degrees
shall be used if a Standard Plan wall is to be used. If multiple soil layers of varying
strength have been identified within the depth of the trench or shaft foundation, soil
strength averaging may be used to select the appropriate standard foundation type and
depth. For example, if the average soil strength along the length of the shaft is 38o or
more, the 38o standard foundation may be used.
The standard foundation designs used for the Standard Plan noise barriers are based on
the following assumptions:
• Noise barrier standard foundation designs assume one of the following:
– The wall is founded at the crest of a 2H:1V slope with a minimum of 3 feet of
horizontal distance between the panel face and the slope break. The top 2 feet
of passive resistance below the assumed ground surface at the noise barrier
face is ignored in the development of the wall pressure diagram. For this case,
groundwater must be at or below the bottom of the noise barrier foundation.
– The wall is founded on a near horizontal slope (i.e., 6H:1V or flatter) with a
minimum of 3 feet of horizontal distance between the panel face and the slope
break. The top 2 feet of passive resistance below the assumed ground surface
at the noise barrier face is ignored in the development of the wall pressure
diagram. For this case, groundwater must be at or below 5 feet below the top of
the noise barrier foundation.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-13
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
• The standard shaft foundation designs have been designed for two different soil
conditions, assuming the slope conditions in front of the wall as indicated above.
One design assumes an average soil friction angle of 32 degrees (D1), resulting in
a design Kp of 1.45 (2H:1V slope) or 5.7 (near horizontal slope) and Ka of 0.29,
and the second design assumes an average soil friction angle of 38 degrees (D2),
resulting in a design Kp of 2.2 (2H:1V slope) or 8.8 (near horizontal slope) and Ka
of 0.22. All values of Ka and Kp reported above have been corrected to account for
the angular deviation of the active or passive force from the horizontal (in these
design cases, the correction factor, Cos (δ), where δ is the interface friction angle,
is approximately equal to 0.9 to 0.93). The standard shaft foundation designs are
based on standard earth pressure theory derived using logarithmic spiral method
for Kp and the Coulomb method for Ka, assuming the interface friction between
the foundation and the soil to be 0.67φ. A unit weight of 125 pcf was also assumed
in the design. This unit weight assumes that the ground water level at the site is
below the bottom of the noise barrier foundation. For the case where groundwater
is considered, the effective unit weight of the soil is used below the water table
(i.e., 62.6 pcf). For the shaft foundation design, it is assumed that the passive earth
pressure is applied over a lateral distance along the wall of 3B, where B is the shaft
diameter and 3.0 is the magnitude of the isolation factor for discrete shafts, or the
center-to-center spacing of the shafts, whichever is less. A factor of safety of 1.5
should also applied to the passive resistance.
• The PGA for seismic design is assumed to be 0.35g. This corresponds to a
peak bedrock acceleration (PBA) from Figure 6-6 in Chapter 6 of 0.3g and an
amplification factor of 1.18, corresponding to stiff soil. Kae, the seismic lateral earth
pressure coefficient, was developed assuming that the acceleration A = 0.5PGA.
• All standard foundation designs assume a concrete to soil contact.
• Figures 17-3 and 17-4 illustrate the assumptions used for the standard trench or
shaft foundation designs.
Special designs will be required if the site and soil conditions differ from those
conditions assumed for design.
Page 17-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
• Figures 17-3 and 17-4 illustrate the assumptions used for the standard trench or shaft foundation
Chapter 17
designs. Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
Special designs will be required if the site and soil conditions differ from those conditions assumed for
design.
Ignore top 2 ft
of passive resistance
Fore-slope is
6H:1V or flatter = 34o, Ka = 0.26
= 125 pcf, Kae = 0.38 4 ft max.
= 32o, Kp = 5.7 above and below W.T.
or, 5 ft min.
= 38o, Kp = 8.8 above and below W.T.
W.T.
= 125 pcf above W.T.
= 32o, Ka = 0.29 above and below W.T.
= 62.6 pcf below W.T. or,
= 38o, Ka = 0.22 above and below W.T.
= 125 pcf above W.T.
= 62.6 pcf below W.T.
B
Use 3Kp applied to foundation width, B, for discrete foundation units (shafts), and 1.0Kp for trench foundation.
Use FS = 1.5 applied to Kp (Kp values shown above have not been factored).
Ka is applied over foundation width, B.
Standard Foundation Design Assumptions for Shaft or Trench
Foundations, Assuming Near Level Ground Conditions and Ground
Water Above
Figure 17-3 Standard foundation
Foundation Bottom
design
Design of Signs,
Signals, Foundation
forassumptions for shaft
Noise or trench
Barriers, foundations,
Culverts, and Buildings
assuming near level ground conditions and ground
Figure 17-3 water above bottom of foundation.
Min. 3 ft bench width
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03
Culverts, and Buildings Ignore top 2 ft December 2006
Chapter 17-16 of passive resistance
Fore-slope is
2H:1V or flatter = 34o, Ka = 0.26
= 125 pcf, Kae = 0.38 4 ft max.
= 32o, Kp = 1.45
= 125 pcf
or, = 32o, Ka = 0.29
= 125 pcf
= 38o, Kp = 2.2
= 125 pcf or,
= 38o, Ka = 0.22
= 125 pcf
W.T. B
Use 3Kp applied to foundation width, B, for discrete foundation units (shafts), and 1.0Kp for trench foundation.
Use FS = 1.5 applied to Kp (Kp values shown above have not been factored).
Ka is applied over foundation width, B.
Standard Foundation Design Assumptions for Shaft or Trench Foundations,
Assuming 2H:1V Slope
Figure 17-4 Standard in Front
foundation of Wall
design and Ground
assumptions WaterorBelow
for shaft trenchFoundation
foundations,
assuming 2H:1V slope in front ofFigure 17-4ground water below foundation.
wall and
17.3.4.3
WSDOT Geotechnical Non-Standard
Design Foundation Design
Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-15
October 2013 A non-standard foundation design will be required if the site or soil conditions are not consistent with the
conditions assumed for the standard foundation designs as described in WSDOT GDM Section 17.3.4.2.
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17 .3 .2 .3 Non-Standard Foundation Design
A non-standard foundation design will be required if the site or soil conditions are
not consistent with the conditions assumed for the standard foundation designs as
described in Section 17.3.4.2. For example, if slopes steeper than 2H:1V are present
below the wall, if the soil is weaker than 32°, or if the ground water level is above
the bottom of the foundation (Figure 17-4), a non-standard foundation design will be
needed. If the foundation must be installed in rock, a non-standard foundation may also
be required.
If non-standard foundation designs are required, the geotechnical designer should
provide the following information to the structural designer:
• Description of the soil units using Unified Soil Classification System (Chapters 4
and 5).
• Ground elevation and elevation of soil/rock unit boundaries.
• Depth to the water table along the length of the wall.
• Earth pressure diagrams and design parameters developed in accordance with
Chapter 15 and this section. Soil unit strength parameters that include effective
unit weight, cohesion, φ, Ka, Kp, and Kae. For shaft foundations, passive pressures
are assumed to act over 3 shaft diameters, and a factor of safety of 1.5 should be
applied to the passive resistance.
• The allowable bearing resistance for spread footings and estimated wall settlement.
• Overall wall stability.
• Any foundation constructability issues resulting from the soil/rock conditions.
The structural designer will use this information to develop a special foundation design
for the noise barrier.
17.3.3 Construction Considerations
The presence of a high groundwater table could affect the construction of shaft
foundations. The construction of noise barriers with shaft foundations would be
especially vulnerable to caving if groundwater is present, or if have lose clean sands
or gravels. The concrete in all shaft foundations have been designed to bear directly
against the soils. Generally, temporary casing for drilled shafts should be removed.
Special foundations designs may be required if the geotechnical designer determines
that permanent casing is necessary. In this situation, the structural engineer must be
informed of this condition.
17 .4 Culverts
17.4.1 Overview
This section only addresses culverts, either flexible or rigid, that do not require
foundation elements such as footing or piles. Culverts that require foundation elements
are addressed in Chapter 8.
Page 17-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
17.4.2 Culvert Design and Construction Considerations
Culvert design shall utilize the LRFD approach. For culverts, the soil loads and design
procedures to be used for design shall be as specified in Sections 3 and 12 of the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The following design situations are
typically encountered regarding culverts:
1. The culvert simply needs to be replaced because of performance problems (e.g.,
leaking, partial collapse, or undersized), or a new culvert is needed, and open
excavation is used to remove and replace the culvert, or to install the new culvert,
and the excavation is simply backfilled.
2. The culvert simply needs to be replaced because of performance problems (e.g.,
leaking, partial collapse, or undersized), or a new culvert is needed, and the culvert
is installed by “jacking” it through the existing embankment.
3. An existing culvert is extended and new fill is placed over the culvert.
For case 1, little geotechnical design is needed. The soil conditions in the fill and
just below the culvert should be investigated, primarily to assess constructability
issues such as excavation slopes and shoring design (usually done by the contractor).
If soft soils are present near the bottom of the culvert, the feasibility of obtaining
stable excavation slopes of reasonable steepness should be assessed. The presence of
boulders in the fill or below the fill, depending on the shoring type anticipated, could
influence feasibility. However, settlement and bearing issues for the new or replaced
culvert should not be significant, since no new load is being placed on the soil below
the culvert.
For case 2, the effect of the soil conditions in the fill on the ability to jack the culvert
through the fill should be evaluated. Very dense conditions or the presence of
obstructions in the fill such as boulders could make jacking infeasible. Ground water
within the fill or the presence of clean sands or gravels that could “run” could again
make jacking problematic, unless special measures are taken by the contractor to
prevent caving. Since a stable jacking platform must be established, along with the
shoring required to form the jacking and receiving pits, deeper test hole data adequate
for shoring design must be obtained and analyzed to assess earth pressure parameters
for shoring design, and to design the reaction frame for the jacking operation.
For case 3, differential and total settlement along the culvert is the key issue that must
be evaluated, in addition to the case 1 issue identified above. See Chapter 9 for the
estimation of settlement due to new fill.
17 .5 Buildings
17.5.1 Overview
The provisions of this section cover the design requirements for small building
structures typical of WSDOT rest areas, maintenance and ferry facilities. It is assumed
these buildings are not subject to scour or water pressure by wind or wave action.
Typically, buildings may be supported on shallow spread footings, or on pile or shaft
foundations for conditions where soft compressible soils are present.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-17
October 2013
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
17.5.2 Design Requirement for Buildings
Foundations shall be designed in accordance with the provisions outlined in Chapter 18
of the 2003 International Building Code (IBC, 2002). This design code specifies that
all foundations be designed using allowable stress design methodology. Table 1804.2
from the IBC provides presumptive values for allowable foundation bearing pressure,
lateral pressure for stem walls and earth pressure parameters to assess lateral sliding.
Note that these presumptive values account for both shear failure of the soil and
settlement or deformation, which has been limited to 1 inch.
Allowable Lateral Bearing
Coefficient Resistance
Materials Foundation (psf/ft below
of frictiona (psf)b
Pressure (psf)d natural grade)d
1. Crystalline bedrock 12,000 1,200 0.70 -----
2. Sedimentary and foliated rock 4,000 400 0.35 -----
3. Sandy gravel and/or gravel (GW & GP) 3,000 200 0.35 -----
4. Sand, silty sand, clayey sand, silty
gravel and clayey gravel (SW, SP, SM, 2,000 150 0.25 -----
SC, GM, and GC)
5. Clay, sandy clay, silty clay, clayey silt,
1,500c 100 ------ 130
silt and sandy silt (CL, ML, MH and CH
a. Coefficient to be multiplied by the dead load.
b. Lateral sliding resistance value to be multiplied by the contact area, as limited by Section 1804.3 of the 2003 IBC.
c. Where the building official determines that in-place soils with an allowable bearing capacity of less than 1,500 psf
are likely to be present at the site, the allowable bearing capacity shall be determined by a soils investigation.
d. An increase on one-third is permitted when using the alternate load combinations in Section 16.3.2 of the 2003 IBC
that include wind or earthquake loads.
Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressure
(as Provided in 2003 IBC, in Table 1804 .2)
Table 17-3
In addition to using the 2003 IBC design code, the geotechnical designer should
perform a foundation bearing capacity analyses (including settlement) using the
methods outlined in Chapter 8 to obtain nominal resistance values. These design
methods will result in ultimate (nominal) capacities. Normally, allowable stress design
is conducted for foundations that support buildings and similar structures. Appropriate
safety factors must be applied to determine allowable load transfer. Factors of safety to
be used for allowable stress design of foundations shall be as follows:
Page 17-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 17 Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
*Minimum Geotechnical
Factor of Safety, FS
Load Group Method
Spread
Shafts Piles
Footings
Static shear strength analysis from soil/rock
3.0 2.5 2.5
properties, compression
Static analysis from soil/rock properties, uplift 3.0 3.0
ASD Load test conducted (number of tests
(unfactored 2.0 2.0
depends on uniformity of conditions)
DL + LL,
or service WSDOT driving formula 2.5
load level) Wave equation with PDA (min. one per pier
2.5
and 2 to 5% of the piles
PDA with CAPWAP (min. one per pier and 2
2.25
to 5% of the piles
Minimum Factors of Safety for ASD Foundation Design
Table 17-4
The results of the ASD foundation bearing capacity analyses, after reducing the
foundation bearing capacity by the specified FS from Table 17-4, and further reduced
to meet settlement criteria for the foundation (normally, no FS is applied for settlement
analysis results), should be checked against the IBC design code, and the most
conservative results used.
For allowable stress design, spread footings on sandy soils may alternatively be
designed for bearing and settlement by using Figure 17-5. When using Figure 17-5, a
FS from Table 17-4 does not need to be applied, as the bearing stresses in the figure
represent allowable bearing resistances. The design bearing resistance in Figure 17-5
has been developed assuming footing settlement will be limited to no more than 1 inch.
The N-values needed to estimate bearing resistance in the figure should be determined
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings
from SPT blow counts that have been corrected for both overburden pressure and
hammer efficiency, and hence represent N160 values (see Chapter 5).
Design
Figure 17-5 Chart
Designforchart
Proportioning Shallowshallow
for proportioning Footings on Sand
footings on sand
(After Peck, et al ., 1974)
(after Peck, et al., 1974).
Figure 17-5
Note that other issues may need to be addressed regarding the design of buildings and associated
structures. For example, significant earthwork may be required. For cut and fill design, see WSDOT
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 17-19
GDM Chapters 9 and 10. For the stabilization of unstable ground, see WSDOT GDM Chapter 13. If
October 2013
ground improvement is required, see WSDOT GDM Chapter 11. If retaining walls are required, see
Foundation Design for Signals, Signs, Noise Barriers, Culverts, and Buildings Chapter 17
Note that other issues may need to be addressed regarding the design of buildings and
associated structures. For example, significant earthwork may be required. For cut and
fill design, see Chapters 9 and 10. For the stabilization of unstable ground, see Chapter
13. If ground improvement is required, see Chapter 11. If retaining walls are required,
see Chapter 15.
If septic drain field(s) are needed, local regulations will govern the geotechnical
design, including who is qualified to perform the design (i.e., a special license may be
required). In general, the permeability of the soil and the maximum seasonal ground
water level will need to be assessed for septic system designs.
Note that in general, the foundations for the types of structures addressed in this
chapter are not mitigated for liquefaction (see Chapter 6). However, for building
foundations, liquefaction and other seismic hazards are at least assessed in terms of the
potential impact to the proposed structures. Liquefaction and other seismic hazards are
mitigated for building and other structures for which the International Building Code
(IBC) governs and mitigation is required by the IBC.
17 .6 References
AASHTO, 1988, AASHTO Manual on Subsurface Investigations.
AASHTO, 1989, AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound
Barriers (including 2002 interim).
AASHTO, 2001, AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.
AASHTO, 2002, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials, Seventeenth Edition, Washington, D.C.,
USA, 686 p.
AASHTO, 2004, LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, Third Edition, Washington, D.C., USA.
International Code Council, Inc., (2002), 2003 International Building Code. Country
Club Hills, IL.
Patterson, D., 1962, How to Design Pole-Type Buildings, American Wood Preservers
Institute, Chicago, 3rd edition.
Peck, R. B., W. E. Hanson, and T. H. Thornburn. 1974. Foundation Engineering. 2nd
ed. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, p. 514.
Bridge Design Manual M 23-50
Design Manual M 22-01
Standard Plans For Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction M 21-01
Page 17-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 18-1
October 2013
Geotechnical Design for Marine Structure Foundations Chapter 18
Page 18-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 19 Infiltration Facility Design
19 .1 Overview
Infiltration facility design includes the design of ponds, trenches and other BMP’s
designed to encourage infiltration of stormwater back into the ground. Geotechnical
design of infiltration facilities includes assessment of the groundwater regime,
soil stratigraphy, and hydraulic conductivity of the soil as it affects the hydraulic
functioning of the infiltration facility, and the geotechnical stability of the facility (e.g.,
slope stability, affect of infiltration on stability of adjacent structures and slopes, and
design of fills that must retain water for both slope stability and piping failure).
19.2 Geotechnical Investigation and Design for Infiltration Facilities
For infiltration investigation and design, the detailed requirements for the geotechnical
site investigation, soil properties needed, groundwater characterization requirements,
and design requirements are provided in the WSDOT Highway Runoff Manual (2004),
Section 4-5. For geotechnical stability, the site investigation and design requirements
provided in Chapters 2, 7, 9, and 10 are applicable.
19 .3 References
Highway Runoff Manual M 31-16, 2004
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 19-1
October 2013
Infiltration Facility Design Chapter 19
Page 19-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 20 Unstable Slope Management
20 .1 Overview
Unstable slope management provides the ability to rate and prioritize unstable slopes
for remediation in consideration of the limitations of funds available to carry out the
slope investigation. Actual design requirements for unstable slopes are provided in
Chapters 13 and 14. The methodology used to prioritize the slopes based on risk of
failure and impact to the public, and the costs and benefits of performing the needed
repairs, are provided in the Unstable Slope Management System (USMS) Guidelines,
and the article entitled, “Unstable Slope Management in Washington State” by Lowell
and Morin (2000).
In the early 1990s WSDOT implemented a new project programming approach for
The Highway Construction Program that involved prioritizing and programming
projects based on defined service objectives. One of the service objectives within The
Highway Construction Program is preserving the existing highway infrastructure in
a cost effective manner in order to protect the public investment in the system. One
of the action strategies in this service objective is to stabilize known unstable slopes.
The funding level for the unstable slope service objectives has been set at $30 million
dollars per biennium for 10 biennium (20 years). WSDOT has internally developed a
comprehensive management system that can:
• Rationally evaluate all known unstable slopes along WSDOT highway facilities
utilizing a numerical rating system for both soil and rock instabilities.
• Develop an unstable slope rank strategy, based on highway functional class that
would address highway facilities with the greatest needs.
• Provide for early unstable slope project scoping, conceptual designs for mitigation,
and project cost estimates that could be used for cost benefit analysis
• Prioritize the design and mitigation of unstable slope projects, statewide, based on
the expected benefit, and ranked rating by highway facilities functional class.
The Unstable Slope Management System (USMS) is central to the process for
management of unstable slopes. It is a SQL server database that is one of WSDOT’s
first truly interactive systems using internet technology and a GIS application.
The application and database is designed for all internal WSDOT participants in
the unstable slope management process to view and enter data pertaining to their
respective job functions.
20 .2 References
Lowell, S., and Morin, P., 2000, “Unstable Slope Management Washington State”, TR
News 207, pp 11-15.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 20-1
October 2013
Unstable Slope Management Chapter 20
Page 20-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 21 Materials Source Investigation and Report
21 .1 Overview
A geotechnical site investigation of WSDOT-owned or -leased materials sources
is required in order to determine the quality and quantity of materials available
for WSDOT construction projects. These materials include gravel base, crushed
surfacing materials, mineral and concrete aggregates, riprap, borrow excavation and
gravel borrow, and filler. A Material Source Report (MSR) provides geotechnical
documentation of the reconnaissance, exploration, sampling, laboratory testing, and
development of the mining plan for the pit site or quarry site. This report includes
a legal description of the location of the site and indicates the potential aggregate
reserves for the material source. The Material Source Report requires the stamp of a
licensed Engineering Geologist. The report is valid for the life of the material source.
Amendments to the MSR provide updates of any changes to the original Material
Source Report, such as additional phases of exploration drilling, sampling and testing,
mining development, extension of existing property boundaries of the material source,
or changes with Department of Natural Resources reclamation permits or any other
regulatory permits issued, etc. After a material source is used for project construction,
a Pit Evaluation Report form is completed by the Project Engineer and submitted to
the Regional Materials Engineer for review. The Pit Evaluation Report form is used
to identify the quantity of material removed from the source, and includes comments
about the production of the aggregate material extracted from the source for the project
construction. This form contains valuable information on the use and production of
material from the source.
Any new potential materials source sites considered need to be large enough in
acreage to meet the quantity and quality requirements of the immediate construction
project with adequate work and storage areas, but also the future construction project
needs. It is also desirable that the source has sufficient material to support future
maintenance needs in the area. When developing materials source sites, reclamation
requirements and aesthetic considerations must be evaluated, to preserve or enhance
the visual quality of the highway and local surroundings. This is especially important
along scenic highways and adjacent to residential developments. Exposed sites, such
as hillside borrow that cannot be visually reclaimed, should not be considered for
development as a material source.
21.2 Material Source Geotechnical Investigation
It is preferred that existing approved material sources be used when there are suitable
sites available within a reasonable haul distance to the project. When there are no
approved WSDOT material sources available, the Regional Materials Engineer
requests that the HQ Geotechnical Division conduct a materials source investigation.
The materials source investigation typically consists of the following elements:
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 21-1
October 2013
Materials Source Investigation and Report Chapter 21
(a) Evaluation of Existing Material Source Sites – Any existing material source data
within the project area are collected and reviewed. In project areas where materials
sites are presently located, data that should be reviewed includes:
• Site Geology, from existing mapping, reports, etc.
• Aerial photographs, LIDAR coverage
• Past quality testing and production history of the materials source sites
• Surface and subsurface drainage in the site area
• Seasonal fluctuations in the water table, including water wells located on
adjacent land that might be affected by those fluctuations, or moisture content
of the deposit
• Claims made by adjacent landowners
• Contractor claims, including final settlements
• Maintenance use of the site
(b) Geologic Field Exploration – The geologic field exploration phase of the site
investigation includes a reconnaissance level review of the material source site to
begin the process of developing an understanding of the specific geology at the
site, and how the site will be mined with consideration for existing adjacent land
use (see Chapter 2). The reconnaissance incorporates the detailed review of the
published geologic maps for the area or other published geologic or geophysical
information in the vicinity, as well as LIDAR and aerial photographs. The
reconnaissance phase review includes mapping existing outcrops and developing
the strategy for the exploration drilling and sampling program, and the mine
development of the site. During the initial reconnaissance to determine whether a
site merits detailed exploration, some specific elements considered include:
• Topography
• Geology
• Test pits
• Test probes
• Test holes
• Representative photographs of the site
• Geologic mapping of existing exposures
Typically, a minimum of three test pits or test holes should be advanced during this
phase of investigation. The site investigation should be planned and conducted in
accordance with Chapters 2 and 3. The logging of the test pits and test holes should
be in accordance with Chapter 4. To minimize exploration costs representative
samples can be collected from existing cut faces for quality testing that includes
Specific Gravity, Los Angeles Abrasion, and Degradation. A reconnaissance
geologic report should be completed describing the site geology, preliminary field
exploration and testing results. This report should be transmitted to the Regional
Materials Engineer.
Page 21-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 21 Materials Source Investigation and Report
(c) Detailed Site Exploration – At a request by the Regional Materials Engineer,
a detailed site exploration is conducted by the WSDOT Geotechnical Division.
The Engineering Geologist submits an exploration plan to the Chief Engineering
Geologist for review and concurrence prior to exploration. The test pits and test
holes are logged in accordance with Chapter 4. The Engineering Geologist selects
representative samples for quality testing. Refer to the Construction Manual
Chapter 9, for additional discussion about sampling of natural deposits. On the
basis of geologic considerations, the number, location, depth, and type of test pits
or test borings are determined. In the absence of geological examination, the test
pits or test borings are spaced roughly every 150 to 200 feet, on a grid, and extend
to the base of the deposit, or to the depth required to provide the needed quantities.
A significantly greater spacing (up to 500 feet) is used for nonexclusive leased sites
or short-term leases that WSDOT has with other agencies.
For pit site investigations, exploration equipment that allows direct observation
and sampling of the subsurface layers is preferred. The equipment can consist
of backhoes, bulldozers, large diameter augers, or the Becker Hammer reverse
circulation drilling method. Groundwater levels should be recorded during the site
investigation. Where significant seasonal groundwater fluctuation is anticipated,
observation wells should be installed to monitor water levels.
For quarry site investigations, wet rotary rock coring methods are used to
determine subsurface conditions and to obtain samples for testing. Triple-tube
core barrels are commonly needed to maximize core recovery. For riprap sources,
fracture mapping includes careful measurement of the spacing of fractures to
assess rock block sizes that can be produced by blasting. Also, identification of
the type and amount of joint infilling is noted. Core samples are reviewed by the
Engineering Geologist for assessment for quality testing for riprap or aggregates. If
assessment is made on the basis of an existing quarry site face, it may be necessary
to core or use geophysical techniques to verify that the nature of the rock does not
change behind the face, or at depth.
Geophysical methods employed for material source exploration include seismic
refraction surveys, electrical resistivity surveys, and ground penetrating radar.
Downhole techniques can also be utilized to identify fracture orientation and
condition; and software is available to interpret the fracture orientation in the
core. For electrical resistivity surveys typically poor quality rock is denoted with
low resistivity and good quality rock is denoted with high resistivity. Faults and
fault splays can also be identified using electrical resistivity. Results from these
geophysical methods supplies information that is used in developing the mining
plan for a material source.
(d) Special Considerations – The Engineering Geologist must determine the
appropriate shrink/swell factors (see Table 10-1) to convert the needed cubic yards
to yards in place (bank yards) at the proposed source. This does not address or
account for losses or wastage on construction.
The Engineering Geologist must assess the “indicated” quantity of material that
is available in the potential material source. The Engineering Geologist uses
knowledge of the mode of occurrence of the deposit in conjunction with the test
pits and test borings to determine the surface plane area of the usable material.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 21-3
October 2013
Materials Source Investigation and Report Chapter 21
The quantity of material reported as “indicated” is defined to mean that quantity
of material estimated as being present at the site, including a safety factor.
Extrapolation beneath the depth of test borings will not be made for calculation of
“indicated” quantities unless well supported by geologic considerations.
A general formula for calculation of “indicated” quantity is:
Q = (LWD) - Cbs
SF
Where Q is the quantity in cubic yards, L is length in feet, W is width in feet, D
is depth in feet, Cbs is the back slope correction, and SF is a safety factor. The
back slope correction (Cbs) depends on the slope specified in the reclamation plan
or mining plan. [Notes: Cbs = ½ (base × height) + perimeter (ft2). To convert
cubic feet to cubic yards, divide cubic feet by 27.]
The safety factor (SF) used will vary with the size and type of deposit, the history
of other deposits in the area, and the exploration equipment used. In order to
determine the SF, calculate the quantity (Q) available without a SF and apply the
appropriate SF from the following table.
Bank Yards Available Suggested
Without Safety Factor Safety Factor
0 to 30,000 cubic yards 2.00
30,000 to 60,000 cubic yards 1.70
60,000 to 150,000 cubic yards 1.45
150,000 to 300,000 cubic yards 1.35
300,000 plus cubic yards 1.25
Other considerations are: (1) Determine the surface drainage at the site, noting
areas of ponding water, swamps, sloughs, or streams. It is important to determine
flooding possibilities or surface flow after periods of heavy rainfall, during
spring snow melt, and from artesian conditions. (2) Describe the location of the
groundwater table, if known, along with seasonal variations. Identify any springs
in the area that will affect the development of the site, or if production operations
can impact the water source. (3) For aggregate sources, it is important that the
degradation and wear characteristics be determined. The history of use of the
aggregate is especially important for aggregates with Los Angeles Wear test
values greater than 25 and Degradation test values less than 45. (4) An estimate
of oversize material (greater than 10 inches in diameter) determined in percent by
volume is necessary. The estimate is given in a percent range, such as, 15 to 25
percent oversize. Also describe the largest size cobble or boulder observed during
the site investigation, as well as any glacial erratics.
Page 21-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 21 Materials Source Investigation and Report
21.3 Materials Source Report
The Engineering Geologist prepares a Materials Source Report (MSR), following
the outline presented below. The MSR provides documentation for the detailed site
exploration, sampling and laboratory testing, and subsequent development of a pit or
quarry site. The report reviews and discusses the site geology, exploration field data
and testing information, slope stability, and groundwater information that has been
acquired for the site, and indicates the mining plan for development of the site.
(a) Introduction – A brief description of the location of the site including county, state
highway, milepost, and haul road access to the site.
(b) Source Description – The source description includes the legal description of the
property location (e.g., Township, Range, Section, ¼ ¼ sections). The description
also includes the size of the material source in acres. Ownership is identified and
any pertinent lease information (e.g., leased to WSDOT for exclusive use, or
nonexclusive use). Also, any zoning restriction, or other restrictions or constraints
are identified. Stockpiles and waste piles are identified on the site plan map with
estimated cubic yards (volume).
(c) Topography, Vegetation and Climate – The general geomorphology and
topography of the area are described, including drainage features. Vegetation and
climate should also be discussed.
(d) Geotechnical Field Exploration – For quarry site investigations, the number
and location of exploratory borings advanced, and drilling methodology should
be described (e.g., core drilling with a CME 850 with auto hammer using an HQ
core barrel; retrieving a 1/2 inch diameter core sample). The total footage of core
retrieved should be identified. For pit site investigations, the number and location
of test pits, or Becker Hammer borings advanced should be identified. The test pits
and test borehole locations are presented on a site map included in an Appendix.
Copies of the boring logs and test pit logs are contained in an Appendix. Color
photographs of the rock core or pit samples are included in an Appendix.
(e) Laboratory Testing – Representative samples are selected by the engineering
geologist from the subsurface exploration drilling for laboratory testing for quality
and to verify field visual identification. The preliminary laboratory quality tests
include T-85 for Specific Gravity, T-96 for Los Angeles Wear, and WSDOT test
method T-113 for degradation. The test results are used to interpret the distribution
of the good quality and the poor quality material at the site. The test results are
depicted on the geologic cross-sections and included in a table in the Appendix.
Other tests may be performed according to the Standard Specifications Manual for
specific products to be used in the construction project.
(f) Regional Geology – The regional geologic setting includes a description of the
processes that occurred for the existing regional geology.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 21-5
October 2013
Materials Source Investigation and Report Chapter 21
(g) Site Geology – Based on the regional geologic setting, the specific geology at the
material source site should be described. Surface drainage should be identified
and described, including the identification of springs or drainages that are natural
or manmade. The depth to ground water and any seasonal changes should be
described and discussed. This information should be included as a table in the
Appendix. Natural or designed slope stability at the site should be described
and discussed.
A stratigraphy for the material source is developed from the site geology, and
from the test borings and test pits logs. Geologic cross-sections are developed
to demonstrate the distribution and quality of material available at the site.
Overburden and waste material encountered in the borings, quality test results,
and groundwater should be identified on the geologic cross-sections. Included in
the discussion of the stratigraphy should be a description of good and poor quality
rock, as identified on each cross-section, and a summary paragraph for each
cross-section.
(h) Groundwater – Ground water levels encountered during the subsurface
investigation are recorded. Where significant seasonal groundwater fluctuation
is anticipated, open standpipe piezometers are installed to monitor ground
water levels. If appropriate, dataloggers may be installed in the open standpipe
piezometers to monitor groundwater fluctuation. Rainfall gauges, or local weather
stations can be utilized to gain information about local rainfall events and their
effect on groundwater at the source.
(i) Quality of Material – The quality of the material at the site is based on the
representative samples selected for laboratory testing for quality. The quality tests
are typically Los Angeles Wear, Specific Gravity and Degradation, but can include
other tests depending on the product to be produced from the material source site.
The test results should be presented on the geologic cross-sections as well as in a
table in the Appendix.
(j) Quantity of Material – The quantity of useable material present at the site is based
on the occurrence of the deposit in conjunction with the test pits or borings to the
determined depth to a surface plane over a certain area. The quantity of material
reported as “indicated” is defined to mean the quantity of material estimated as
being present including a safety factor.
(k) Slope Stability – Slope stability analyses should be completed to indicate the
stability of the slopes of the material source during mining development, and for
reclamation.
Page 21-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 21 Materials Source Investigation and Report
(l) Mining Considerations – The mining plan indicates how the resource will be
developed and demonstrates the logic for the excavation and development of the
site. The mining plan for the site should indicate which part of the site is to be
mined first, second, third, etc. A discussion of any special problems associated with
the material present at the site, such as a description of oversize material, including
large rock encountered, or excessive overburden. The waste areas for overburden
and stripping material should be identified on the mining plan map. The location of
haul roads, gates, fences, and the elevation of the mining floor should be included
in the mining plan map. Slope angles, based on slope stability analyses, should
be designated for interim and final reclamation. For quarry sites, slopes should be
designed, based on the rock parameters mapped, and identified specifically at the
quarry. Locations of haul road, stockpile storage, waste, overburden and elevation
of the pit or quarry floor should be identified on the reclamation plan map.
(j) Appendices
• Figures:
Location MapSite Plan map, with topography, boring and cross section
locations Geologic Cross Sections, with boring locations and quality test results
Mining Plan Reclamation Plan
• Tables:
Boreholes identified with depths and laboratory quality testing results
Boreholes with Groundwater elevations
• Logs of Test Borings (edited for consistency with lab data)
• Laboratory Test Reports
• Calculations of Quantity Determinations
• Photographs of the site, photos of rock core samples, pit samples
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 21-7
October 2013
Materials Source Investigation and Report Chapter 21
Page 21-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development,
Reports, and Support for Design-Build
Projects
22-1 Overview
This chapter describes the geotechnical support needed for projects where WSDOT
intends to use the Design-Build (DB) method of contract delivery and the geotechnical
policies that govern that support.
DB differs from traditional Design-Bid-Build (DBB) projects in that the DB team is
responsible for the final design, and the means and methods needed to successfully
construct the project compatible with the design. In the DBB contract method of delivery
there can be a reasonable anticipation of potential means and methods that may be
selected by a contractor. Hence, given a 100% design, establishing a geotechnical baseline
with respect to the subsurface and site conditions that may be encountered can be more
objectively established. Of significance to the preparation of geotechnical documents for
DB is that foundation types and how they are constructed may change, retaining walls
may move affecting both height and wall types considered during the development of
the project concept, size and location of cuts and fills may change, and any effects on
adjacent sensitive structures and utilities may be significantly different than anticipated
in the Conceptual Design. Right of way (ROW) lines may also be affected as well as
temporary construction easements (TCE).
In DB, the Design-Build team is the responsible Engineer of Record (EOR) and has
the latitude in completing the majority of the project design such that it meets the
performance requirements and is in compliance with the contract documents. While the
WSDOT will always retain primary ownership of the project and its long-term operations
and maintenance, the DB contract delivery method allocates the majority of the
responsibility and risk for project design and construction to the Design-Builder to foster
innovation and creativity.
These differences relative to DBB have a fundamental effect on the type of geotechnical
support needed and how it is carried out. The geotechnical support provided by the
Headquarters Geotechnical Office or the department’s geotechnical consultants includes:
• A geotechnical investigation to identify site geotechnical conditions and to gather
the geotechnical information needed to provide a common and consistent basis
for bidding.
• Verification of the feasibility of the project Conceptual Design and identification of
areas of geotechnical risk.
• The development of geotechnical Technical Requirements to be included in the
Request for Proposals (RFP) as well as the Geotechnical Data Report (GDR) and
Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR) to be included as part of the contract.
• The development of Geotechnical Reference and other reference documents.
• Once the contract advertisement begins, a review of proposals, if requested by the
project management; this will depend on the importance and complexity of the
project geotechnical issues.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-1
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
• A review of geotechnical Alternative Technical Concepts (ATCs) for consistency with
the contract design requirements and WSDOT design policy.
• Review of geotechnical designs, plans, and other geotechnical submittals after award
and execution.
• Project office assistance when geotechnical problems occur during the life of
the project.
The chapter sections that follow address each of these areas to provide the guidance
needed by the Headquarters Geotechnical Office staff and department geotechnical
consultant staff to successfully develop and support department DB projects. Since
this chapter is for internal geotechnical staff and internal consultant staff, and the
department offices who interact with these staff, to develop and carry out DB projects,
this chapter should be excluded from the Mandatory Standards that are included in the
contract documents.
22-2 Definitions
Geotechnical documents provided as part of or in support of a DB project include the
Geotechnical Data Report (GDR), the Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR), Geotechnical
Reference documents, and other related Reference Documents. A GDR only presents
factual geotechnical and geological information obtained through site and subsurface
investigation, and laboratory testing, for the project, and should not include interpretive
information. The GDR is a contract document. The Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR)
is a contract document and a risk allocation document provided to Proposers of DB
projects that provides the primary contractual interpretation of geotechnical conditions,
in addition to the factual data provided in the GDR, for Proposers to use as the basis for
their proposals. The GBR interpretation of geotechnical conditions is based on the factual
information in the GDR plus interpretation of the geotechnical conditions that is not
strictly based on the available factual information in the GDR. The GBR is also used after
contract award for evaluating differing site conditions claims.
This GBR should not refer to any part of a reference document, as doing so will make the
reference document contractual and negate its reference document status. Geotechnical
Memoranda and other reference documents include other geotechnical information,
interpretations, and conceptual designs that were used as the basis for evaluating
the feasibility of the project Conceptual Design, and possibly alternatives to the final
project Conceptual Design, and to assess areas of geotechnical risk for the project. The
Geotechnical Reference documents are not included as Contract Documents, but are
made available to Proposers in an appendix of the RFP for information only, not to be
used as the basis for their proposal.
The geotechnical information to be included in RFP is project-specific and can include
all or only some of the documents identified above. For example, during concept
development for the project, it may be determined that the overall geotechnical risks are
minimal, warranting only the inclusion of a GDR as a contract document and incorporating
a financial allowance to manage any unforeseen risks. The level of the potential financial
allowance is a decision made by the project management with input from the HQ
Geotechnical and Construction Offices and the project geotechnical team.
Page 22-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
22-2.1 Field Investigation Requirements for Pre-Advertisement Design-Build
Project Documents
Past experience has demonstrated that an inadequate project geotechnical investigation
can lead to excessive risk both in terms of schedule and cost. Therefore, it is important to
do the right amount of geotechnical investigation to provide the subsurface information
needed to help mitigate those risks. These data can then be used to develop contract
information that will provide potential Proposers with a consistent understanding of
the site geotechnical conditions and the impact those conditions may have on the
project design and the constructability of that design. This section summarizes the level
of geotechnical investigation and analysis that should be considered prior to contract
advertisement for DB projects. Decisions regarding the level of geotechnical investigation
needed should be developed as early in the project as possible with region project office
input, including the development of a geotechnical risk profile for the project that is
mutually agreed upon by both region and headquarters offices. These early efforts will
also be useful to develop a strategy for establishing geotechnical baselines.
The level of geotechnical field investigation necessary for assessment of potential
geotechnical risks, with consideration to the baseline configuration for the project,
and for preparation of the GDR and GBR should be conducted as early in the project
as possible. The goal is to leave enough time in the project development schedule for
the Geotechnical Office, the region project office, and possibly others such as the HQ
Construction Office and region management, to identify and come to agreement on
the level of geotechnical risk WSDOT should be taking and how to allocate that risk.
The project baseline configuration geotechnical investigation shall be approved by the
State Geotechnical Engineer, or an approved designee. The State Geotechnical Engineer,
Region/Headquarters management, and the region project team will review and agree
upon the short-term (i.e., during the contract) and long-term (i.e., after the contract is
completed to the end of the design life of the facility) project performance risks when
determining the initial level of investigation required. During the execution of the field
exploration program, field findings may significantly alter those risks and require changes
to the field investigation program. The level of geotechnical investigation shall consider
the amount of information necessary to develop the Conceptual Design for the DB
project and also to provide the appropriate level of confidence in baseline statements
and thereby reduce the risk of differing site condition claims. If there is a disagreement
regarding the level of geotechnical investigation required, the issue(s) may be escalated to
the next higher management level to resolve the disagreement.
The amount of geotechnical investigation needed is project specific, and shall be
determined based on the guidelines provided herein.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-3
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
The goals of the typical geotechnical investigation for DB projects are to:
1. Identify the distribution of soil and rock types for the Conceptual Design, and
assess how the material properties will affect the design and construction of the
project elements.
2. Define the ground water and surface water regimes for the project concept
design. It is especially important to determine the depth, and seasonal and spatial
variability, of groundwater or surface water. The locations of confined water
bearing zones, artesian pressures, and seasonal or tidal variations should also
be identified. The geotechnical investigation will not be sufficient to fully define
these groundwater issues, but should be enough to identify potential groundwater
problems and risks.
3. Identify and consider any impacts to adjacent facilities that could be caused by the
construction of the Conceptual Design.
4. Identify and characterize any geologic hazards that are present within or adjacent
to the project limits (e.g., landslides, rockfall, debris flows, liquefaction, soft ground
or otherwise unstable soils, seismic hazards) that are already known or discovered
during the baseline configuration geotechnical investigation that could affect the
Conceptual Design as well as adjacent facilities that could be impacted by the
construction of the Conceptual Design.
5. Assess the feasibility of the proposed alignments, including the feasibility and
conceptual evaluation of retaining walls and slope angles for cuts and fills, and the
effect the construction of the Conceptual Design could have on adjacent facilities.
6. Assess potential project stormwater infiltration or detention sites with regard to their
feasibility, and to gather at least one year of ground water data in accordance with
storm water regulations if possible within the project development schedule.
7. Identify potential suitability of on-site materials as fill, and/or the usability of nearby
materials sources.
8. For structures including, but not limited to, bridges and cut-and-cover tunnels, large
culverts, walls, bored tunnels, trenchless technology, provide adequate subsurface
information to assess feasibility of the Conceptual Design and to help quantify risks.
9. For projects that may include ground improvement to achieve the project Concept
Design, provide adequate information to assess feasibility and to assess the potential
impacts to adjacent facilities due to the ground improvement.
10. For projects that may include landslides, rockfall areas, and debris flows, provide
adequate information to evaluate the feasibility of various stabilization or
containment techniques.
Page 22-4 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
To accomplish these goals, the typical geotechnical investigation should consist of
the following:
• A review of historical records of previous investigations and construction of existing
facilities.
• A geological site reconnaissance of the proposed alignment, focusing on all key project
features, and identification of potential hazards within and adjacent to the alignment.
• A subsurface investigation consisting of an appropriate combination of borings, cone
probes, field testing, field instrumentation (such as piezometers or inclinometers),
geophysical surveys, and laboratory testing.
As a starting point, utilize existing subsurface information from records and augment that
information with additional borings, cone probes and/or geophysical surveys to fill in gaps
in the existing information.
Typically, to produce a GDR and GBR to support a 15 to 30% project design, a 50 percent
or greater level geotechnical subsurface field investigation (including any existing
(historical) borings that can be relied upon) is typically needed relative to a full PS&E
level geotechnical investigation for final design as defined elsewhere in the GDM and
referenced documents. The actual subsurface investigation conducted for a specific
project may vary significantly from this target, however, depending on the uncertainty
in the details of the Conceptual Design, the potential for variations in alignments and
structure locations, the complexity of the site and project, the availability of preexisting
subsurface information, and the potential for risk. As stated above, the level of
geotechnical investigation undertaken should be developed collaboratively with the
Region Project Office, as well as managers in the Region and in Headquarters as needed,
based on the level of risk WSDOT should be taking.
Any new boring logs produced shall be consistent with the requirements in Chapter 4.
The geotechnical investigation may also include an assessment of the potential to
encounter hazardous waste, since that potential and its location may be strongly tied to
the subsurface stratigraphy and ground water regime. However, Environmental Services,
and/or the region, or their consultants, have the lead in such investigations, working as a
team with the Headquarters Geotechnical Office to complete that work. From a contract
standpoint, it is desirable to “baseline” the hazardous/ contaminated materials/water in
the same manner that the geotechnical project attributes are baselined. It is also desirable
from a contract standpoint that this hazardous/contaminated materials/water information
be consolidated in one place in the contract. The decision of whether this is captured in
the GBR or an Environmental hazardous/contaminated materials/water baseline report
should be coordinated with Environmental Services.
Regarding historical and subsurface investigations to assess the potential to encounter
archeological artifacts, such investigations are conducted through environmental Services,
the region, or their consultants. In general, the results of archeological investigations will
not be included in the GDR, GBR, and Geotechnical Memoranda for WSDOT DB projects,
but are contained in a separate report.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-5
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
It should be recognized that at the time of the field exploration many of the project
Conceptual Design features investigated may not be defined. The geotechnical engineer
developing the GBR will have to utilize professional judgment in addition to assistance
from the WSDOT project team to assess what project elements for the Conceptual
Design are to be investigated and where they will likely be located in order to perform
an adequate field investigation. When developing the exploration plan to investigate
the project Conceptual Design, or other specific concept alternatives requested by
the WSDOT project office, ensure that the plan is sufficient to develop an overall
characterization of the project corridor, and also sufficient as a basis for pricing the final
Conceptual Design portrayed in the RFP.
Risks to be considered that could require a more detailed investigation than what may be
considered typical shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Liquefaction and other seismic hazards.
• Very soft soils.
• Areas of previous or potential instability (e.g., Landslides, rockfall, severe erosion).
• Site and soil conditions that may affect constructability.
• High groundwater, or complex groundwater regime.
• Shallow bedrock surface that is highly variable either in depth from the surface or in
quality/strength.
The degree of investigation necessary to properly define and allocate these risks depends
on the nature of the risk, the amount of detailed geotechnical information needed to
mitigate that risk, and the impact such risks have on the potential project costs. To
determine the amount of geotechnical investigation required, consider the impact of such
conditions on the ability of Proposers to adequately estimate project costs and project
staging/scheduling. It will remain up to the Design-Builder to assess the limitations in the
exploration program provided in the RFP and perform the requisite explorations to be
compliant with the GDM and AASHTO requirements during final design.
22-3 Purpose and Content of the Geotechnical Reports Included in the
Contract Documents
In general, this section follows the guidelines provided in Essex, et al. (2007) as published
by the American Society of Civil Engineers. As specifically applied to WSDOT DB projects,
the geotechnical reports included in the contract documents shall be as described in
this section.
Geotechnical Data Report (GDR) – The GDR contains all the factual geotechnical data
gathered for the project, and shall be included as part of the project contract. The GDR
should contain the following information:
• A description of the geotechnical site exploration program, including any explanatory
information needed to understand the boring logs and in-situ field test logs.
• The logs of all borings, logs of other subsurface investigation techniques such as
cone or geophysical, test pits, and other site investigations, including any existing
subsurface geotechnical data.
• Ground water measurements.
Page 22-6 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
• A description of the geologic and seismic setting for the project corridor (at a
regional level).
• Results of all field tests conducted, including description and results.
• Installation details, logs, and measurements results of all geotechnical field
instrumentation installed for the project or existing geotechnical instrumentation and
measurement results usable for the project.
• A description of all laboratory tests conducted and the test results, as well as any
previous geotechnical laboratory test results that are relevant for the project.
Existing boring and other subsurface data that are available within the project corridor
should not be included in the GDR unless their level of accuracy is consistent with the
new subsurface data obtained for the project. This older data should be included in a
separate appendix to the RFP as an historical geotechnical reference document that is
available to proposers as background information only, not part of the contract, and not
be used to determine differing site conditions.
The GDR may also include subsurface profiles and cross-sections at key locations within
the project limits, provided that subsurface data interpretations such as interpolation
between borings to develop stratigraphy, as well as the geologic interpretation of the
strata, are not done. In this case, boring logs are presented in a way that shows spatial
relationships between the borings, but no stratagraphic interpretation of the factual data
(i.e., the boring logs) is done. This also applies to the boring logs themselves – the boring
logs should not contain geological interpretations of the soil and rock units encountered,
but should only present the factual observations and test data.
Alternatively, these subsurface profiles and cross-sections that include the stratagraphic
and geological interpretations could be included in a separate geotechnical interpretive
report (a Geotechnical Reference document) included in an Appendix to the RFP for
information only.
Regarding geotechnical field tests reports for exploration methodologies such as
pressuremeter testing or geophysical testing, even though the test report will likely
contain an interpretation of the raw test data, such test reports should still be included
with the GDR. These test interpretations are fairly standardized and are customarily
considered to be factual design data in geotechnical practice.
If there is historical information about past construction, the information should
be summarized and included in the GDR, especially, for example, if there were
geotechnical impacts such as boulders, high groundwater, soft soils, or documented
changed conditions.
Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR) – The GBR is an interpretive geotechnical document
used to establish a common understanding between the contractor and the owner
(WSDOT) of the subsurface conditions and their potential impact and effect of risk on the
design and construction of the project Conceptual Design.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-7
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
The primary focus of the GBR is to establish baselines regarding geotechnical subsurface
conditions present within the project, but specifically focused on the project Conceptual
Design as portrayed in the RFP. These baselines should clearly define the specific
geotechnical conditions the DB contractor should consider as the basis for developing
their price proposal. These baselines are also used to allocate risk between the owner
(WSDOT) and the contractor. The GBR baselines are not intended to be used for final
design. The GDR and geotechnical data generated by the Design-Builder are used as the
basis for final design. The GBR should not contain design or construction requirements;
instead, design and construction requirements belong in the RFP and associated
mandatory standards.
When establishing baselines in the GBR, it must be recognized that subsurface conditions
are inherently variable, and that variability can translate to design and construction risk.
The baseline, however, must be as clear, concise, and measurable as possible, conveying
to potential Proposers what to assume about the condition being baselined (i.e.,
essentially, a “line in the sand”) in a way that all Proposers will understand and interpret
consistently. Baselines do not necessarily need to be supported by the available technical
data. Baselines are engineering interpretations or assumptions about geotechnical
conditions that can affect the design of a project feature or its constructability, expressed
as contractual representations of anticipated geotechnical conditions (Essex, et al.,
2007). The baseline is intended to resolve, at least contractually, the uncertainty in the
geotechnical data or its interpretation. Baseline statements are not required to be factual
but should address specific risk elements that WSDOT requires the Design-Builder
to address or consider. However, baseline statements should not be overly broad or
unrepresentative of the conditions such that the risk allocation is excessively shifted to
the Design-Builder. It is important that baselines be as realistic as possible.
WSDOT DB contracts allow changes to occur. These changes could occur during the
procurement process by the use and approval of an Alternative Technical Concept, or
during contract administration by the use of the project changes to the specifications.
Both of these options are administered based on the contract documents and each
process may or may not include impacts or changes related to baseline assumptions.
Baseline statements should not be considered applicable to alternate locations of the
project features that may be proposed by the Design-Builder, or Work that is not in
conformance with the anticipated Work. To define the locations for which the baselines
are applicable, contractual baseline boundaries should be established to define the area
for which the baselines are applicable. This could either be done based on the project
Conceptual Design plan feature locations and maximum offsets from those feature
locations, or based on a maximum offset from each boring plus an anticipated variance of
strata boundaries relative to each boring, or possibly some combination of the two.
Baselines do not need to be provided for every feature in a project that could require
geotechnical considerations (e.g., fills or foundations placed on very dense moist or
dry soils, small walls, cuts and fills for which the risk and impact of failure is low). Only
the higher risk geotechnical features and issues in a project require baselines. What
specifically is to be baselined should be determined collaboratively with the project office,
and others as needed. The RFP should be clear that for items not baselined, the Design-
Builder assumes the risk for bid and design assumptions as well as constructed means,
methods, and sequences.
Page 22-8 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
Where possible, baselines should be location and, as much as possible, stratigraphic unit
specific, and applicable to the type(s) of construction anticipated with consideration to
the Conceptual Design for the project. However, baselines should also avoid getting into
specific means and methods. For example, where the need for deep bridge foundations
exists in the Conceptual Design for the project, and loose wet sand is present, the
baseline should alert proposers that caving conditions are present that may need to be
considered. However, the baseline should not tell the proposers to assume that full depth
casing will be required to get through the caving soil. An exception to this is possibly
to baseline types of construction that are likely to not be successful given the soil/rock
conditions. For example, use of sheet piles that must be driven into a soil unit that is very
dense or hard, or bouldery, or use of sump pumps in excavations where very permeable
water bearing strata will be intersected.
In order to have baselines tied to specific subsurface conditions, a description and
depth of soil and rock strata encountered in the borings should be provided. Typically,
soil and rock strata locations in each boring can be summarized in a table of specific,
interpreted, strata boundary locations in each of the borings. It must be clear that these
strata locations are to be used only with respect to the baselines (i.e., these are Baseline
Stratigraphic Units, or BSUs), and the proposers should expect the potential for those
specific soil and rock strata and their depths will need adjustment for final design once
the selected proposer conducts the final geotechnical explorations for the project.
Stratigraphic units should not be identified in the boring logs themselves, as the additional
subsurface explorations conducted by the Design-Builder for final design could require
some adjustments to the stratigraphy.
Stratigraphic profiles or cross-sections in which the boring log specific BSUs discussed
above are connected together to provide an overall two-dimensional stratigraphy should
not be provided in the GBR. However, if the location, depth, or thickness of a high risk
soil stratum in the vicinity of a specific Conceptual Design project feature such as a bridge
is highly variable, the geotechnical engineer developing the GBR may need to consider
including an assumed depth/location/thickness of the stratum in the baseline. This will be
a risk allocation decision and as such, agreement between the Geotechnical Office, the
region project design office, and possibly other offices such as Headquarters Construction
and the Bridge Office should be sought before including this type of baseline in the GBR.
For project features such as walls and major cuts or fills that are not well defined and
subject to significant changes relative to the project Conceptual Design, it may not be
feasible to establish locations of BSUs that are specific enough to establish BSU specific
baselines. In such cases, it may not even be possible to establish specific baselines, other
than for known unstable areas such as landslides, or known locations of obstructions.
The baselines may draw upon data in the GDR as well as in geotechnical reference
documents (see Section 22-5). However, the GBR should not specifically reference
Geotechnical and other related Reference Documents that are not contractual.
Specific subject areas where baselines may be developed typically include the following,
depending on the Conceptual Design and the nature of the project:
• Bridge foundation issues
• Bridge abutment and approach fill issues
• Retaining wall issues
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-9
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
• Seismic design issues, including liquefaction and its effects
• Embankment stability and settlement
• Cut stability
• Stormwater infiltration facilities
• Unstable slope issues and potential mitigation issues
• Ground improvement issues
• Utility impacts
• Noise wall foundation issues
• Groundwater issues
• Excavation and shoring issues, including potential dewatering issues
• Use of excavated materials
• Impact of poor ground, other than as specifically addressed above
• Known and potential obstructions
• Contaminated soils, though this is usually handled separately
In general, geotechnical design parameters (e.g., soil friction angles, earth pressures,
permeability values) should not be baselined. If there is a significant risk issue associated
with the selection of a geotechnical design parameter that WSDOT cannot afford to be
determined by the Design-Builder as the Engineer of Record, the specification of such
design parameters shall be approved by the State Geotechnical Engineer and the WSDOT
project managers. These geotechnical design parameters should be described or defined
in the RFP Section 2.6, and not in the GBR. Examples of this include the seismic ground
response parameters for a given site, what soils are to be considered liquefiable, high risk
troublesome soils such as glacialacustrine soils as described in GDM Section 5-13.3,
high risk landslide deposits, etc. This may be especially important for situations where
the geotechnical designer has to use considerable judgment in establishing the design
parameters, or where the design procedures and standards of practice are poorly defined.
For extremely large, complex projects, or for specific features that are long and/or
uncertain as to their specific location, size, and extent of the geotechnical work needed,
it may be too unwieldly to develop specific baselines for everything in the project that
have significant geotechnical risks. In that case, the effort and costs expended to develop
the GBR need to be strategic so that the most costly risks are addressed in enough detail
to clearly apportion those risks. This strategy should be developed in collaboration with
the project office and program managers. If it appears necessary to “scale down” the
GBR baselines to accommodate these situations, this shall be done in consultation with
the State Geotechnical Engineer and the Deputy State Construction Engineer as early
as possible in the project, so that there is adequate time to make the course corrections
needed for approval of the GBR baseline approach by the State Geotechnical Engineer
and the Deputy State Construction Engineer to be obtained so that project development
delays are avoided.
See Essex, et al. (2007) for additional guidance on developing GBRs, and their contents.
Page 22-10 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
22-4 Geotechnical and Other Reference Documents
Geotechnical reference documents include interpretive or informational documents
that should be made available to bidders, but that should not be considered part of the
contract documents. Such documents include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Geotechnical interpretive reports containing results of preliminary geotechnical design
used to establish the feasibility of the project design concept and to help quantify
geotechnical risks.
• Interpretive geotechnical background information that was used to assess the
feasibility of the project Conceptual Design or which could be used by Design-
Builders as background information in support of their geotechnical design activities
(e.g., geologic stratigraphy).
• As-built information for existing facilities within or adjacent to the project corridor
that may or may not be directly affected by the project.
• Detailed construction records for existing facilities within the project corridor.
• Historical information about the project corridor.
The RFP could include as-built information and detailed construction records for existing
facilities within the project corridor. In general it has been WSDOT policy to place the risk
for the accuracy of as-built documents on the Design-Builder. Therefore, it is important
from a contract interpretation standpoint where the as-built information is included in
the RFP (e.g., in an appendix), and how it is identified in the RFP. In general, as- built
information should not be included in the GBR or GDR, because doing so would place the
risk of their accuracy and completeness on WSDOT.
Preliminary geotechnical engineering to develop the Conceptual Design and evaluate
its feasibility during the contract development phase should be conducted. Since this
is interpretive information developed for the purpose of developing the DB project
documents, this information should not be included as part of the contract, but should be
made available to Proposers as informational via a reference document.
The focus of any geotechnical analysis or design conducted to develop a DB project
should be to evaluate feasibility, and to assess the risk of bidders having wide swings in
their bids due to geotechnical issues that have not been adequately defined. For example,
if shafts or piles are proposed as foundations for a bridge, the specific foundation loads
will not be known accurately enough during GBR and RFP development to determine
foundation depths and sizes. Therefore, detailed analysis of foundation skin friction and
end bearing resistance would be of little use. The Design- Builder would have to redo
such calculations during final design anyway. What is of more use is whether or not shaft
or pile foundations are feasible to install, considering impacts to adjacent facilities, ability
for equipment of sufficient size to access potential pier locations, etc.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-11
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
Typically, preliminary geotechnical design to assess feasibility and risk associated with
the project Conceptual Design will consist of one or more of the following preliminary
geotechnical design activities:
• Feasibility of proposed alignments with consideration to feasible slopes or
need for walls, and the potential impact of those fill or cut slopes and walls on
adjacent facilities.
• Structure foundation feasibility and risk, and potential impacts to adjacent facilities.
• Conceptual seismic hazard assessment, including site specific ground motion studies
(if appropriate for the site and project scope) and the potential for liquefaction and
associated seismic hazards caused by liquefaction.
• Preliminary assessment of other existing or potential geologic hazards such as
landslides, rockfall, debris flows, etc., as well as the conceptual feasibility of
mitigation strategies.
• Potential need for ground improvement to stabilize unstable ground, liquefaction,
and excessive settlement, including the feasibility of various ground improvement
techniques and their potential impact on adjacent facilities.
• Whether or not on-site materials will be usable as construction materials.
• Feasibility of site conditions present to infiltrate runoff water.
• Need for dewatering, its feasibility, and its potential impact to adjacent facilities.
• Any other preliminary geotechnical design activities needed to assess risks, to help
establish baselines that will be included in the GBR, to ensure feasibility of the project
Conceptual design, and to assist the WSDOT project office to develop an engineer’s
estimate for the project.
If there is potential for soil liquefaction at the site, a preliminary assessment of the depth
and extent of the liquefiable soils should be considered. A preliminary assessment of
the feasibility of potential mitigation schemes may also be considered, as well as an
assessment of the impact of liquefaction on the proposed project features, depending
on the impact to project feasibility. A more detailed liquefaction investigation and hazard
assessment may need to be included in the contract documents to ensure bidding
consistency if one or more of the following is true:
• The liquefaction hazard could affect the decision on whether to widen or replace an
existing bridge or similar structure.
• The design assumptions and parameters needed to make that liquefaction assessment
could vary significantly between proposers such that the project scope could vary
significantly (e.g., some proposers feel no stabilization is needed, while others feel that
stabilization is necessary or the bridge must be replaced rather than widened).
Similarly, for complex site conditions and large, important structures, it may be necessary
to include the results of site specific seismic ground motion or seismic hazard studies
in the contract documents rather than just as informational geotechnical reference
documents (see Section 22-6).
Page 22-12 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
22-5 Geotechnical RFP Development
The geotechnical portions of the RFP should rely heavily upon the GDM and the AASHTO
Bridge Design Specifications. Since the GDM must function as both a practice manual for
in-house staff and WSDOT’s geotechnical consultants and as a contract document for
DB projects, the RFP should clarify how to interpret the GDM for the purposes of the DB
contract, to fit the GDM within the context of the project specific contract. Furthermore,
the GDM may not cover every geotechnical design situation needed in the DB project,
and the RFP may need to include additional design provisions not covered by the GDM,
AASHTO, or other available design specifications or manuals. The RFP essentially is
contractually establishing the geotechnical engineering design requirements for the
DB project.
Table 1-2, defines words used in the GDM to convey design policy (e.g., “should,”
“shall,” “may”). These words also have important contractual implications in the RFP for
conveying whether or not the Design-Builder has any options with regard to the specific
design requirement. The GDM also identifies design policy issues and options that
require specific approval from the State Geotechnical Engineer and/ or Bridge Design
Engineer. In such cases, as it applies to DB contracts, the Design-Builder should assume
that design provisions requiring approval from the State Geotechnical Engineer and/or
the Bridge Design Engineer are not approved, but can only be considered through the
Alternative Technical Concepts (ATC) process. Since these address design policy issues,
the State Geotechnical Engineer and/or Bridge Design Engineer in this context are not to
be considered equivalent to the designer of record for the DB contractor, as decisions on
these policy issues are not within the authority of the Engineer of Record.
The GDM is written to augment or supersede the AASHTO Bridge Design Specifications;
therefore, if there is an apparent conflict between the GDM and the AASHTO
specifications or other referenced documents, the GDM should be considered to be
higher in the order of precedence than the AASHTO specifications or other referenced
design documents.
With regard to the geotechnical conditions (not design and construction requirements),
the GBR should be considered to be highest in the order of precedence in the RFP.
22-6 Geotechnical Investigation During RFP Advertisement
Often with DB, specific project elements cannot be reasonably defined at the time the
contract documents are produced. To help minimize contingency costs in the bids and
limit risk, it may be desirable to perform supplemental geotechnical investigations after
the RFP has been advertised (while the bidders are preparing proposals) to augment
the GDR and GBR. Whether or not supplemental geotechnical investigations should
be completed during the RFP process is determined by mutual agreement between
the State Geotechnical Engineer and Region/Headquarters management prior to
advertisement of the RFP. The defined term for this in the RFP is as follows: Supplemental
Geotechnical Data Report (SGDR). The Contract Document developed pursuant to ITP
Section X.X.X, that contains factual subsurface data collected prior to the Proposal
Date, and which is included in Appendix XX. Should supplemental investigation occur,
the short-listed Proposers should submit requests for additional information including
locations and depths of borings. The State will evaluate the requests and develop an
exploration program that eliminates duplication of borings in specific locations. Doing
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-13
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
this will eliminate potential conflicts between Proposers, unwanted congestion due to
the presence of multiple sets of drilling rigs and multiple crews, and to excessive costs
through elimination of duplicated efforts. An example of Instructions to Proposers (ITP)
language for a supplementary boring program is provided in Appendix 22-A.
Once the supplemental boring program is completed, the new subsurface data should be
included in the GDR through a contract addendum. If the supplemental borings conflict
with the GBR, an amendment to the GBR should be developed by the Headquarters
Geotechnical Office or the WSDOT Geotechnical Consultant who developed the GBR
and included as an addendum to the contract.
22-7 Geotechnical Support for Design-Build Projects During RFP
Advertisement and Post-Award
Regarding the geotechnical review of proposals, the focus of this geotechnical support is
to evaluate geotechnical aspects of the Proposal in terms of the scoring criteria spelled
out in the Instructions to Proposers. Whether or not geotechnical review of bidder
proposals is required will depend on the importance and complexity of the geotechnical
issues in the project, and if there are any scoring criteria focused on geotechnical issues.
Alternative Technical Concepts (ATCs) may also be proposed during the bidding phase.
Similarly, the geotechnical support needed includes the assessment of the technical
adequacy of the ATC relative to the contract design documents, or that at least the ATC
will provide a level of quality that is equal to or better than the contract Conceptual
Design and that is consistent with accepted design practice which in general is defined by
the RFP.
Once the contract is awarded, geotechnical oversight by the owner (WSDOT) is required
to ensure that the final design and its construction meet the contract requirements.
This geotechnical oversight is also needed to address unanticipated site conditions
(see Differing Site Conditions clause in 1-04.7 of the RFP, i.e., Request for Proposals,
in WSDOT projects) and potential ambiguities in the contract specifications, if such
problems occur.
From this point forward, owner (WSDOT) geotechnical support is focused on review
of contractor design and construction submittals and assisting the project office with
oversight to verify that the Design-Builder is appropriately addressing geotechnical
design or construction problems as they come up, in accordance with the contract.
The geotechnical support person must become intimately familiar with the RFP and
referenced contractual documents, as those documents dictate the focus of the
geotechnical submittal reviews. The geotechnical support person must consider
themselves to be a member of the WSDOT project team, and the findings of their review
activities are therefore provided to the WSDOT project managers for implementation.
The goal is to provide the WSDOT project management with a technical assessment as to
whether or not the Design-Builder met the contract technical requirements, verifying that
their Quality Control/Quality Assurance (QC/QA) program with regard to geotechnical
issues is being properly implemented and is effective in producing a geotechnical design
that meets the contract requirements. The purpose of the geotechnical review is not to
provide the DB contractor with QC/QA of their design, as the contractor is responsible
for their design QC/QA.
Page 22-14 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects Chapter 22
Ordinarily, the DB Contract Technical Requirements will require the Design- Builder
to define a process in their Quality Management Plan for recording, logging, tracking,
responding to, and resolving WSDOT design review comments. This process is managed
by the Design-Builder. Geotechnical comments should be incorporated into this process.
Designer preferences, or differences in opinion between the reviewer’s and the Design-
Builder’s judgments/assumptions, etc., are generally not relevant to these reviews.
The focus must be on compliance of the geotechnical design/construction with the
contract requirements.
This does not mean that the geotechnical support person is conducting these reviews
only at the “30,000 foot level.” There may be times when the geotechnical support person
must do a comparative design to figure out if the contractor’s submittal does meet the
contract intent. But in other cases, an evaluation based on the reviewer’s geotechnical
engineering experience may be sufficient. If problems in the design start to repeat
themselves, this may be an indication that either the contractor is not interpreting the
contract in a way that is consistent with how WSDOT is interpreting it, or the contractor’s
design QC/QA is not fully functional. In such cases an oversight review (i.e., a Quality
Verification, or QV, review) of the Design-Builder’s QA/QC process should be conducted,
documenting the review in the Construction Audit Tracking System (CATS), and issuing
Non-conforming Issue Reports (NCIs) as appropriate so that the problem can be properly
addressed within the provisions of the contract.
The geotechnical support person may also be involved in over-the-shoulder reviews and
design task forces of the Design-Builder’s work as it progresses. The purpose of such
reviews and involvement in the task forces is to not provide design QC/QA or technical
direction to the Design-Builder, but simply to work in a cooperative manner with the
Design-Builder to head off problems in the design before they get too far along, keeping
in mind that the focus is on meeting the contract requirements.
There may be cases where the site conditions encountered by the contractor through
additional subsurface explorations or during construction appear to differ from those in
the contract documents. Just like any other potential differing site conditions situation,
the geotechnical support person should be working with the project management team
and Headquarters Construction Office to provide a technical assessment of the claim.
22-8 References
Essex, R. J., 2007, Geotechnical Baseline Reports for Construction – Suggested Guidelines,
ASCE, Reston, Virginia, 62 pp., http://cedb.asce.org/cgi/wwwdisplay.cgi?0710539.
22-9 Appendices
Appendix 22-A Example Supplemental Geotechnical Boring Program ITP Language
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-15
December 2020
Chapter 22 Geotechnical Project Development, Reports, and Support for Design-Build Projects
Page 22-16 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Appendix 22-A Example Supplemental Geotechnical
Boring Program ITP Language
Language that may be used in the ITP regarding the availability of a supplemental boring
program is provided below. Note that in the first paragraph, this example language allows
up to 5 borings to be selected by each of the proposers (typically, three proposers),
though for proposed borings that are in close proximity of one another, borings may
be combined. This number of supplemental borings (up to 3 × 5 = 15 borings) would
typically apply to larger, more complex projects. A smaller number of borings could be
used for smaller less complex projects. Ultimately, the number of supplemental borings is
a project-specific decision that is made jointly between the Geotechnical Division and the
project team.
22-A-1 Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report
Each Proposer is entitled to obtain certain additional geotechnical information by means
of a Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report that WSDOT will conduct at WSDOT’s own
expense. Under the Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report, Proposers may request
WSDOT to perform up to five additional test borings and to provide an analysis of the
resultant samples.
A request under the Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report must be submitted no
later than the Request for Supplemental Boring Deadline set forth in this ITP. Each
request shall set forth the location (by station and offset) and highest bottom elevation
of the requested borings. Each request shall also include specific requests regarding the
frequency and depth of field vane tests; the locations of split-spoon samples and Standard
Penetration Tests; the length and diameter of rock cores; the depth of disturbed samples,
undisturbed samples, and rock cores sought by the Proposer; and the tests the Proposer
desires WSDOT to conduct in relation to the sample gathered.
WSDOT will make reasonable efforts to comply with Proposers’ requests under the
Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report, but is not obligated to conduct borings at the
precise locations requested. To the extent boring locations requested by one or more
Proposers are within 20 feet of each other, the locations will be averaged and only one
test boring will be conducted. If a Proposer’s boring is averaged with another Proposer’s
boring, neither Proposer will be allowed an additional boring for this supplemental boring
program. Survey personnel provided by WSDOT will establish the boring locations and
elevations. A qualified inspector working for WSDOT will inspect the borings. WSDOT
staff or an independent, qualified drilling contractor will perform the borings. At the
option of the Proposers, each Proposer may dispatch a maximum of one person to
observe the drilling, sampling, testing, and coring, and shall coordinate transportation of
the chosen observer to the drilling site with WSDOT. The Proposers’ on-site observers
shall not interfere with the operation of the surveyor, driller, or inspector.
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13 Page 22-A-1
December 2020
Appendix 22-A Example Supplemental Geotechnical Boring Program ITP Language
The WSDOT drill crew or drilling contractor will conduct the following sampling
and testing:
• Split-spoon samples and Standard Penetration Tests at 5-foot intervals and every
change in stratum.
• Minimum NQ-size rock cores.
• Minimum 10-foot rock cores with RQD.
• Field vane shear tests in soft clays.
• Electronic cone penetrometer testing.
• Conventional laboratory classification testing on disturbed soil samples.
• Conventional laboratory tests on rock samples.
• Such other tests requested by a Proposer and agreed to by WSDOT at WSDOT’s
sole discretion.
WSDOT will perform the test borings in whatever manner or sequence it deems
appropriate at WSDOT’s sole discretion. The Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report,
including the final boring logs and laboratory test results, will be provided to all
Proposers according to Section 1 of this ITP and is included as Appendix G9 of the RFP.
To the extent not consumed by testing, the samples resulting from the Supplemental
Geotechnical Data Report will be turned over to the Design-Builder immediately after the
Contract is awarded.
WSDOT makes no representation as to whether the Supplemental Geotechnical Data
Report will be sufficient for the Proposer to prepare its Proposal. Each Proposer must
make this determination independently based upon its own independent judgment
and experience. Failure by a Proposer to submit a request for test borings under the
Supplemental Geotechnical Data Report constitutes a conclusive presumption that
the Proposer has determined that it does not require any additional geotechnical data
to properly design, construct, and price the Work, or that it will obtain any necessary
geotechnical data at its own expense using its own forces. If permits are required for
supplemental borings (in addition to those permits already required for the Project),
WSDOT may not be able to permit the borings within the deadline.
Page 22-A-2 Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.13
December 2020
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
23 .1 Overview and General Requirements
The Geotechnical Office, and consultants working on WSDOT projects, produce
geotechnical reports and design memorandums in support of project definition, project
design, and final PS&E development (see Chapter 1). Also produced are project
specific Special Provisions, plan details, boring logs, Summary of Geotechnical
Conditions, and the final project geotechnical documentation. Information developed to
support these geotechnical documents are retained in the Geotechnical Office files. The
information includes project site data, drilling inspector’s field logs, test results, design
calculations, and construction support documents. This chapter provides standards for
the development and detailed checklists for review of these documents and records,
with the exception of borings logs, which are covered in Chapter 4, Materials Source
Reports, which are covered in Chapter 21, and Geotechnical Baseline Reports (GBR),
which are covered in Chapter 22. The general format, review, and certification
requirements for these documents are provided in Chapter 1.
The Region Materials Offices also produce reports that contain geotechnical
information and recommendations as discussed in Chapter 1 (e.g., Region Soil
Reports). As applicable, the standards contained within this chapter should also be used
for the development of these regional reports.
Documents and project geotechnical documentation/records produced by the
Geotechnical Office, and consultants working on WSDOT projects, shall meet as
applicable the informational requirements listed in the following FHWA manual:
• FHWA, 2003, Checklist and Guidelines for Review of Geotechnical Reports
and Preliminary Plans and Specifications, Publication No. FHWA ED-88-053,
Updated edition.
This FHWA manual also includes a PS&E review checklist. The PS&E review
checklist contained in this FHWA manual should be used to supplement the WSDOT
Geotechnical Office PS&E review checklist provided in Appendix 23-A. These
checklists should be used as the basis for evaluating the completeness of the PS&E
regarding incorporation of the project geotechnical recommendations and geotechnical
data included in the geotechnical report for the project.
23.2 Report Certification and General Format
Table 23-1 provides a listing of reports produced by the Geotechnical Office, the
type of certification needed to be consistent with the certification policies provided
in Chapter 1 and WSDOT Executive Order E1010.00, and the general format that
would typically be used. For formal geotechnical reports, the signatures and stamps
will be located on the front of the report. For memorandums, a signature/stamp page
will be added to the back of the memorandum. All those involved in the engineering
for the project must sign these documents (i.e., the designer(s), the reviewer(s), and
the State Geotechnical Engineer, or the individual delegated to act on behalf the State
Geotechnical Engineer), and if licensed and as appropriate, certify the documents as
summarized in Table 23-1.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-1
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
For reports that cover individual project elements, a geotechnical design memorandum
may suffice, with the exception of bridge reports and major unstable slope design
reports, in which case a formal geotechnical report should be issued. For project
reports, a formal geotechnical report should be issued. For geotechnical reports that
are sent to agencies outside of WSDOT, a letter report format will be used in place of
the memorandum format. Alternatively, a formal report transmitted with a letter may
be used.
E-mail may be used for geotechnical reporting in certain circumstances. E-mails may
be used to transmit review of construction submittals, and Region soil reports sent
to the Geotechnical Office for concurrence. E-mails may also be used to transmit
conceptual foundation or other conceptual geotechnical recommendations. In both
cases, a print-out of the e-mail should be included in the project file. For time critical
geotechnical designs sent by e-mail that are not conceptual, the e-mail should be
followed up with a stamped memorandum or report as soon as possible. A copy of the
e-mail should also be included in the project file.
For reports produced by others outside of WSDOT, the certification requirements
described herein are applicable, but the specific report format will be as mutually
agreed upon by the Geotechnical Office and those who are producing the report.
Page 23-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Who Certifies?
Primary Licensed State Geotech . Engineer (SGE), Chief
Chapter 23
+Type of Certification Designer and Technical Reviewer Foundation Engineer (CFE), or Chief
October 2013
Report General Format Required Report Writer or Supervisor Engineering Geologist (CEG)
Preliminary Bridge Memorandum PE seal, dated but not Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Report signed or if final recommendations are influenced
by the review at this level
Final Bridge Report Formal bound PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
report dated (+LEG optional) or if final recommendations are influenced
by the review at this level
Preliminary Ferry Memorandum PE seal, dated but not Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Terminals, Docks, signed or if final recommendations are influenced
etc. by the review at this level
Final Ferry Formal bound PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Terminals, Docks, report dated (+LEG optional) or if final recommendations are influenced
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
etc. by the review at this level
Retaining Wall/ Formal bound PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Reinforced Slope report dated (+LEG optional) or if final recommendations are influenced
Report by the review at this level
Line Work Report Formal bound PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
(cuts, fills, etc.) report dated, or both PE and or if final recommendations are influenced
LEG seals, depending by the review at this level
on geologic
complexity
Small Foundation Memorandum, PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Report (signals, unless otherwise dated or if final recommendations are influenced
noise walls, etc.) requested by the review at this level
Ponds, Memorandum, PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Environmental unless otherwise dated, or both PE and or if final recommendations are influenced
Mitigation requested LEG seals, depending by the review at this level
on geologic
complexity
WSDOT Geotechnical Report Certification and Format Requirements
Table 23-1
Page 23-3
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Who Certifies?
Primary Licensed State Geotech . Engineer (SGE), Chief
+Type of Certification Designer and Technical Reviewer Foundation Engineer (CFE), or Chief
Page 23-4
Report General Format Required Report Writer or Supervisor Engineering Geologist (CEG)
Structure Memorandum, PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Preservation unless otherwise dated (+LEG optional) or if final recommendations are influenced
(bridges, walls, requested by the review at this level
etc.) Reports
Rockfall, Rockslope Formal bound PE or LEG seal, Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Design Reports report signed and dated or if final recommendations are influenced
by the review at this level
Landslide Reports Formal bound PE or LEG seal, Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
report signed and dated, or if final recommendations are influenced
or both PE and LEG by the review at this level
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
seals if structures are
involved
Pit and Quarry Memo if review LEG seal, signed and Seal if licensed, Seal, as noted Seal, as noted under Certification
Reports and only; otherwise, dated, for report; seal as noted under under Certification Required, if acting as primary technical
Reviews formal bound report required for review Certification Required reviewer, or if final recommendations are
memo only if changes Required influenced by the review at this level
to interpretation or
design in the report
are recommended
Geologic hazard Can be a formal LEG seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
assessments (e.g., report or a letter dated (also include or if final recommendations are influenced
for critical area report PE seal, if structures by the review at this level
ordinance issues) involved)
Geology and Soils Usually a formal PE or LEG seal, Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Discipline and EIS bound report signed and dated, or if final recommendations are influenced
Reports or both PE and LEG by the review at this level
seals, depending on
geologic complexity
or if structures are
involved
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Chapter 23
Who Certifies?
Primary Licensed State Geotech . Engineer (SGE), Chief
+Type of Certification Designer and Technical Reviewer Foundation Engineer (CFE), or Chief
Chapter 23
Report General Format Required Report Writer or Supervisor Engineering Geologist (CEG)
October 2013
Consultant Report Letter to consultant None, unless Seal review letter if Seal review letter, Seal review letter if acting as
Reviews or memo. to Region changes to design licensed, as noted as noted under primary technical reviewer, or if final
are recommended, under Certification Certification recommendations in review letter are
in which case review Required Required influenced by the review at this level, as
letter is sealed noted under Certification Required
(signed and dated)
by PE, or LEG, or
both, depending on
geologic complexity
Emergency Work E-mail or memo. None for preliminary Seal for final design Seal for final design Seal for final design if acting as
assessment; for if licensed primary technical reviewer, or if final
final design, PE or recommendations are influenced by the
LEG seal, signed review at this level
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
and dated, or both
PE and LEG seals,
depending on
geologic complexity
and if structures are
involved
CSL Reports Memorandum PE seal, signed and Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
dated or if final recommendations are influenced
by the review at this level
Construction Memorandum PE or LEG seal, Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
Support resulting signed and dated, or if final recommendations are influenced
in engineering or both PE and LEG by the review at this level
changes (must seals, depending on
result in a change geologic complexity
order, and and if structures are
must affect the involved
engineering intent
of the contract
design)
Construction Memorandum None None None N/A
Submittals
Page 23-5
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Who Certifies?
Primary Licensed State Geotech . Engineer (SGE), Chief
+Type of Certification Designer and Technical Reviewer Foundation Engineer (CFE), or Chief
Page 23-6
Report General Format Required Report Writer or Supervisor Engineering Geologist (CEG)
Special Provisions Usually an PE or LEG seal, Seal if licensed Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer,
and Summary appendix to report; signed and dated, or if final recommendations are influenced
of Geotechnical memorandum if or both PE and LEG by the review at this level
Conditions sent separately seals, depending
on nature of Special
Provision
Construction Plans Plan sheets PE or LEG seal, None Seal Seal if acting as primary technical reviewer
signed and dated,
or both PE and LEG
seals, depending on
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
nature of plan sheets
Final Geotechnical Formal bound None required, since None None N/A
Project report all subdocuments
Documentation have been stamped
•Some judgment may be used on whether or not to use a memorandum format for small walls, line projects, and small rockfall or rockslope projects.
+Projects that require significant, non-routine, geologic interpretation to provide a correct site characterization and geologic interpretation of design properties may also
require a LEG seal.
October 2013
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
Chapter 23
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
23 .3 Geotechnical Office Report Content Requirements
Design Manual M 22-01 Chapter 610, includes lists of the geotechnical information
that should be provided in final geotechnical reports addressing various specific
geotechnical subject matters. Specifically addressed in the Design Manual M 22-01
Chapter 610 are geotechnical reports providing final recommendations for earthwork,
hydraulic structures (including infiltration facilities), foundations for signals, signs,
etc., retaining walls, unstable slopes (landslides, rockfall, etc.), rock slopes, bridge
foundations, and WSF projects.
A more detailed description of the geotechnical information and types of
recommendations that should be provided in geotechnical reports is provided in the
sections that follow. Both conceptual level reports and final reports are addressed.
23.3.1 Conceptual or Preliminary Level Geotechnical Reports
Conceptual level geotechnical reports are typically used to provide geotechnical input
for the following:
• Developing the project definition
• Development of preliminary bridge and WSF facility layouts
• Conceptual geotechnical studies for environmental permit development activities,
• Reconnaissance level corridor studies,
• Development of EIS discipline studies, and
• Geotechnical Baseline Reports (GBR) for design-build projects (see Chapter 22
for details on the GBR).
Preliminary level geotechnical reports are typically used to provide geotechnical input
for the following:
• The determination of preliminary location and size of infiltration facilities,
• Alternative analyses (e.g., TS&L for structures, preliminary grading analyses, etc.)
• Rapid assessment of emergency repair needs (e.g., landslides, rockfall, bridge
foundation scour, etc.)
Conceptual level geotechnical reports are in general developed based on a minimum
of an office review of existing geotechnical data for the site, and generally consist of
feasibility assessment and identification of geologic hazards. Geotechnical design for
conceptual level reports is typically based on engineering judgment and experience at
the site or similar sites. For preliminary level design, a geological reconnaissance of
the project site and a limited subsurface exploration program are usually conducted, as
well as some detailed geotechnical analysis to characterize key elements of the design,
adequate to assess potential alternatives and estimate preliminary costs. For conceptual
level design of more complex projects with potentially unusual subsurface conditions,
or potential instability, a geotechnical reconnaissance of the site should be conducted
in addition to the office review to assess the site conditions. Note that for preliminary
design of infiltration facilities, the seasonal ground water depth should be established
early in the project to assess feasibility (i.e., during project definition), since it usually
takes a minimum of one season to characterize groundwater conditions. A minimum
of one to two test holes, with piezometers installed, are usually required to establish
the water table depth for this purpose. Additional test holes may be needed during final
design (see Chapter 19 and the WSDOT Highway Runoff Manual).
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-7
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
These conceptual or preliminary level reports should contain the following elements:
1. A general description of the project, project elements, and project background.
2. A brief summary of the regional and site geology. The amount of detail included
here will depend on whether the report is at the conceptual or preliminary level,
and on the type of report. For example, Critical Area Ordinance reports and EIS
discipline studies will tend to need a more detailed discussion on site and regional
geology than would a conceptual bridge foundation report, an emergency landslide,
or a scour repair evaluation report.
3. A summary of the site data available from which the conceptual or preliminary
recommendations were made.
4. A summary of the field exploration conducted, if applicable.
5. A summary of the laboratory testing conducted, if applicable.
6. A description of the project soil and rock conditions. The amount of detail included
here will depend on whether the report is at the conceptual or preliminary level,
and on the type of report. For preliminary design reports in which new borings
have been obtained, soil profiles for key project features (e.g., bridges, major walls,
etc.) may need to be developed and tied to this description of project soil and
rock conditions.
7. A summary of geological hazards identified that may affect the project design
(e.g., landslides, rockfall, debris flows, liquefaction, soft ground or otherwise
unstable soils, seismic hazards, etc.), if any.
8. A summary of the conceptual or preliminary geotechnical recommendations.
9. Appendices that include any boring logs and laboratory test data obtained, soil
profiles developed, any field data obtained, and any photographs.
Special requirements for the content of discipline reports for EA and EIS studies are
provided in Environmental Procedures Manual M 31-11, specifically Chapter 420.
23.3.2 Final Geotechnical Design Reports
Final (PS&E level) geotechnical reports are in general developed based on an office
review of existing geotechnical data for the site, a detailed geologic review of the
site, and a complete subsurface investigation program meeting AASHTO and FHWA
standards, or as augmented in this manual. Final geotechnical reports should contain
the following elements:
1. A general description of the project, project elements, and project background.
2. Project site surface conditions and current use.
3. Regional and site geology. This section should describe the site stress history and
depositional/erosional history, bedrock and soil geologic units, etc.
Page 23-8 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
4. Regional and site seismicity. This section should identify potential source zones,
potential magnitude of shaking, frequency, historical activity, and location of
nearby faults. This section is generally only included in reports addressing
structural elements (e.g., bridges, walls, marine terminal structures, etc.) and major
earthwork projects.
5. A summary of the site data available from project or site records (e.g., final
construction records for previous construction activity at the site, as-built bridge or
other structure layouts, existing test hole logs, geologic maps, previous or current
geologic reconnaissance results, etc.).
6. A summary of the field exploration conducted, if applicable. Here, a description of
the methods and standards used is provided, as well as a summary of the number
and types of explorations that were conducted. Include also a description of any
field instrumentation installed and its purpose. Refer to the detailed logs located in
the report appendices.
7. A summary of the laboratory testing conducted, if applicable. Again, a description
of the methods and standards used is provided, as well as a summary of the number
and types of tests that were conducted. Refer to the detailed laboratory test results
in the report appendices.
8. Project Soil/Rock Conditions. This section should include not only a description
of the soil/rock units encountered, but also how the units tie into the site geology.
Ground water conditions should also be described here, including the identification
of any confined aquifers, artesian pressures, perched water tables, potential
seasonal variations, if known, any influences on the ground water levels observed,
and direction and gradient of ground water, if known. If rock slopes are present,
discuss rock structure, including the results of any field structure mapping (use
photographs as needed), joint condition, rock strength, potential for seepage, etc.
These descriptions of soil and rock conditions should in general be illustrated with
subsurface profiles (i.e., parallel to roadway centerline) and cross-sections (i.e.,
perpendicular to roadway centerline) of the key project features. A subsurface
profile or cross-section is defined as an illustration that assists the reader of the
geotechnical report to visualize the spatial distribution of the soil and rock units
encountered in the borings and probes for a given project feature (e.g., structure,
cut, fill, landslide, etc.). As such, the profile or cross-section will contain the
existing and proposed ground line, the structure profile or cross-section if one
is present, the boring logs (including SPT values, soil/rock units, etc.), and
the location of any water table(s). Interpretive information contained in these
illustrations should be kept to a minimum. What appears to be the same soil or rock
unit in adjacent borings should not be connected together with stratification lines
unless that stratification is reasonably certain. The potential for variability in the
stratification must be conveyed in the report, if a detailed stratification is provided.
In general, geologic interpretations (e.g., Vashon till, Vashon recessional, etc.)
should not be included in the profile or cross-section, but should be discussed more
generally in the report.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-9
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
Page 23-10 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
12. Geotechnical recommendations for rock slopes and rock excavation. Such
recommendations should include, but are not limited to, stable rock slope,
rock bolting/dowelling, and other stabilization requirements, including
recommendations to prevent erosion/undermining of intact blocks of rock, internal
and external slope drainage requirements, feasible methods of rock removal, etc.
13. Geotechnical recommendations for stabilization of unstable slopes (e.g., landslides,
rockfall areas, debris flows, etc.). This section should provide a discussion of the
mitigation options available, and detailed recommendations regarding the most
feasible options for mitigating the unstable slope, including a discussion of the
advantages, disadvantages, and risks associated with each feasible option.
14. Geotechnical recommendations for bridges, tunnels, hydraulic structures,
and other structures. This section should provide a discussion of foundation
options considered, the recommended foundation options, and the reason(s)
for the selection of the recommended foundation option(s), foundation design
requirements (for strength limit state - ultimate bearing resistance and depth, lateral
and uplift resistance, for service limit state - settlement limited bearing, and any
special design requirements), seismic design parameters and recommendations
(e.g., design acceleration coefficient, soil profile type for standard AASHTO
response spectra development, or develop non-standard response spectra,
liquefaction mitigation requirements, extreme event limit state bearing, uplift,
and lateral resistance, and soil spring values), design considerations for scour
when applicable, earth pressures on abutments and walls in buried structures, and
recommendations regarding bridge approach slabs. Detailed reporting requirements
for LRFD foundation reports are provided in Section 23.2.3.
15. Geotechnical recommendations for retaining walls and reinforced slopes. This
section should provide a discussion of wall/reinforced slope options considered,
the recommended wall/reinforced slope options, and the reason(s) for the selection
of the recommended option(s), foundation type and design requirements (for
strength limit state - ultimate bearing resistance, lateral and uplift resistance if deep
foundations selected, for service limit state - settlement limited bearing, and any
special design requirements), seismic design parameters and recommendations
(e.g., design acceleration coefficient, extreme event limit state bearing, uplift and
lateral resistance if deep foundations selected) for all walls except Standard Plan
walls, design considerations for scour when applicable, and lateral earth pressure
parameters (provide full earth pressure diagram for non-gravity cantilever walls
and anchored walls). For nonproprietary walls/reinforced slopes requiring internal
stability design (e.g., geosynthetic walls, soil nail walls, all reinforced slopes),
provide minimum width for external and overall stability, embedment depth,
bearing resistance, and settlement, and also provide soil reinforcement spacing,
strength, and length requirements in addition to dimensions to meet external
stability requirements. For proprietary walls, provide minimum width for overall
stability, embedment depth, bearing resistance, settlement, and design parameters
for determining earth pressures. For anchored walls, provide achievable anchor
capacity, no load zone dimensions, and design earth pressure distribution. Detailed
reporting requirements for LRFD wall reports are provided in Section 23.2.3.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-11
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
16. Geotechnical recommendations for infiltration/detention facilities. This section
should provide recommendations regarding infiltration rate, impact of infiltration
on adjacent facilities, effect of infiltration on slope stability, if the facility is located
on a slope, stability of slopes within the pond, and foundation bearing resistance
and lateral earth pressures (vaults only). See the Highway Runoff Manual for
additional details on what is required for these types of facilities.
17. Long-term or construction monitoring needs. In this section, provide
recommendations on the types of instrumentation needed to evaluate long-term
performance or to control construction, the reading schedule required, how the data
should be used to control construction or to evaluate long-term performance, and
the zone of influence for each instrument.
18. Construction considerations. Address issues of construction staging, shoring
needs and potential installation difficulties, temporary slopes, potential foundation
installation problems, earthwork constructability issues, dewatering, etc.
19. Appendices. Typical appendices include design charts for foundation bearing and
uplift, P-Y curve input data, design detail figures, layouts showing boring locations
relative to the project features and stationing, subsurface profiles and typical
cross-sections that illustrate subsurface stratigraphy at key locations, all boring
logs used for the project design (includes older borings as well as new borings),
including a boring log legend for each type of log, laboratory test data obtained,
instrumentation measurement results, and special provisions needed.
The detail contained in each of these sections will depend on the size and complexity
of the project or project elements and subsurface conditions. All of these report
elements may not be applicable to all geotechnical reports, especially if the report is
for a specific project element that is limited in geotechnical scope, such as a culvert
replacement, a single wall, an infiltration pond, a sign bridge, etc. In such cases,
a briefer report is acceptable. Furthermore, design memoranda that do not contain
all of the elements described above may be developed prior to developing a final
geotechnical report for the project to meet project schedule needs.
23.3.3 Special Reporting Requirements for LRFD Foundation and Wall Designs
The geotechnical designer should provide the following information to the structural
designer for Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD):
23 .3 .3 .1 Footings
To evaluate bearing resistance, the geotechnical designer provides qn, the unfactored
nominal (ultimate) bearing resistance available for the strength and extreme event
limit states, and qserv, the settlement limited nominal bearing resistance for the
specified settlement (typically 1 inch) for various effective footing widths likely to be
used for the service limit state, and resistance factors for each limit state. The amount
of settlement on which qserv is based shall be stated. The geotechnical designer
also provides embedment depth requirements or footing elevations to obtain the
recommended bearing resistance.
Page 23-12 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
To evaluate sliding stability and eccentricity, the geotechnical designer provides
resistance factors for both the strength and extreme event limit states for calculating
the shear and passive resistance in sliding, as well as the soil parameters φ, Kp, γ and
depth of soil in front of footing to ignore in calculating the passive resistance, and φ,
Ka, γ, Kae, and the earth pressure distributions to use for the strength and extreme event
(seismic) limit states for calculating active force behind the footing (abutments only –
see Section 23.2.3.4 on walls).
To evaluate soil response and development of forces in foundations for the extreme
event limit state, the geotechnical designer provides the foundation soil/rock shear
modulus values and Poissons ratio (G and µ).
The geotechnical designer evaluates overall stability and provides the maximum
(unfactored) footing load which can be applied to the design slope and still maintain an
acceptable safety factor (1.5 for the strength and 1.1 for the extreme event limit states,
which is the inverse of the resistance factor). A uniform bearing stress as calculated by
the Meyerhof method should be assumed for this analysis. An example presentation
of the LRFD footing design recommendations to be provided by the geotechnical
designer is as shown in Tables 23-2 and 23-3, and Figure 23-1. See Section 23.2.3.4 for
examples of the additional information submitted for abutment wall design.
Parameter Abutment Piers Interior Piers
Soil Unit Weight, γ X X
(soil above footing base level)
Soil Friction Angle, φ X X
(soil above footing base level)
Active Earth Pressure Coefficient, Ka X X
Passive Earth Pressure Coefficient, Kp X X
Seismic Earth Pressure Coefficient, Kae X
Coefficient of Sliding, Tan δ X X
Example Presentation of Soil Design Parameters for
Sliding and Eccentricity Calculations
Table 23-2
Resistance Factor, φ
Passive Pressure
Shear Resistance to Resistance to
Limit State Bearing Sliding Sliding
Strength X X X
Service X X X
Extreme Event X X X
Example Presentation of Resistance Factors for Footing Design
Table 23-3
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-13
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
Bearing Resistance, qn or qserv
Unfactored strength and extreme
event limit states
Service limit state at ___ in.
of settlement
Effective Footing Width, B’
Example Presentation of Bearing Resistance Recommendations
Figure 23-1
Figure 23-1 Example presentation of bearing resistance recommendations.
23 .3 .3 .2 Drilled Shafts
To evaluate bearing resistance, the geotechnical designer provides as a function
23.2.3.2of depth andShafts
Drilled at various shaft diameters the unfactored nominal (ultimate) bearing
resistance for end bearing, Rp, and side friction, Rs, used to calculate Rn, for strength
To evaluate bearing resistance, the geotechnical designer provides as a function of depth and at various
and extreme event limit state calculations (see example figures below). pFor
shaft diameters the unfactored nominal (ultimate) bearing resistance for end bearing, R the service
, and side friction,
limit state, the
Rs, used to calculate R n unfactored bearing resistance at a specified settlement, typically 0.5 or
, for strength and extreme event limit state calculations (see example figures
1.0 inch (mobilized end bearing and mobilized side friction) should be provided as
below). For the service limit state, the unfactored bearing resistance at a specified settlement, typically
0.5 or 1.0 inch (mobilized end bearing and mobilized side friction) should be provided as a function of
a function of depth and shaft diameter. See Figure 23-2 for an example of the shaft
depth and shaft diameter. See Figure
bearing resistance information 23-2 for an example of the shaft bearing resistance information that
that would be provided. Resistance factors for bearing
would be provided. Resistance factors for bearing resistance for all limit states will also be provided, as
resistance for all limit states will also be provided, as illustrated in Table 23-4.
illustrated in Table 23-4.
If downdrag is an issue, the ultimate downdrag load, DD, as a function of shaft
diameter will be provided, as well as the depth zone of the shaft that is affected by
If downdrag is an issue, the ultimate downdrag load, DD, as a function of shaft diameter will be provided,
downdrag, the downdrag load factor, and the cause of the downdrag (settlement due to
as well as the depth zone of the shaft that is affected by downdrag, the downdrag load factor, and the
vertical stress increase, liquefaction, etc.). If liquefaction occurs, the lost side friction
cause of the downdrag (settlement due to vertical stress increase, liquefaction, etc.). If liquefaction
resistance, RSdd, due to downdrag
occurs, the lost side friction resistance, R will be provided (see Chapter 8, Figure 8-31).
Sdd, due to downdrag will be provided
(see WSDOT GDM
If scour Chapter
is an 8, Figure
issue, the 8-31).and depth of the skin friction lost due to scour,
magnitude
Rscour, will also be provided (see Chapter 8, Figure 8-30).
If scour is an issue, the magnitude and depth of the skin friction lost due to scour, Rscour, will also be
Resistance Factor, φ
provided (see WSDOT GDM Chapter 8, Figure 8-30).
Limit State Skin Friction End bearing Uplift
Strength X X X
Service X X X
Extreme Event X X X
Example Presentation of Resistance Factors for Shaft Design
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03
Chapter 23-16
Table 23-4 December 2006
Page 23-14 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Table 23-4 Example presentation of resistance factors for shaft design.
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Rs (unfactored) Rp (unfactored)
Shaft Diameter = ___ ft Shaft Diameter = ___ ft
Strength and
Extreme Event
Limit States Strength and
Extreme Event
Elevation or Depth
Elevation or Depth
Limit States
Service Limit Service Limit
State at ___ in. State at ___ in.
of Settlement of Settlement
Figure 23-2 Typical shaft bearing resistance plots (all limit states).
Typical Shaft Bearing Resistance Plots (All Limit States)
Figure 23-2
If lateral loads imposed by special soil loading conditions such as landslide forces are
If lateral loads imposed by special soil loading conditions such as landslide forces are present, the
present, the nominal (ultimate) lateral soil force or stress distribution, and the load
nominal (ultimate) lateral soil force or stress distribution, and the load factors to be applied to that force
or stress, will be provided.
factors to be applied to that force or stress, will be provided.
For evaluating uplift, the geotechnical designer provides, as a function of depth,
For evaluating uplift, the geotechnical designer provides, as a function of depth, the nominal (ultimate)
the nominal (ultimate) uplift resistance, Rn. The skin friction lost due to scour or
uplift resistance, Rn. The skin friction lost due to scour or liquefaction to be applied to the uplift
liquefaction to be applied to the uplift resistance curves should be provided (separately,
resistance curves should be provided (separately, in tabular form). Resistance factors should also be
in tabular form). Resistance factors are also be provided.
provided.
The geotechnical
Geotechnical designer
Design Manual also provides group reduction
M 46-03 factors Reporting
Geotechnical for bearing
andresistance
Documentation
and uplift
December 2006if necessary, as well as the associated resistance factors. Chapter 23-17
The geotechnical designer also provides soil/rock input data for P-y curve generation
or as input for conducting strain wedge analyses (e.g., the computer program S-Shaft)
as a function of depth. Resistance factors for lateral load analysis generally do not need
to be provided, as the lateral load resistance factors will typically be 1.0.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-15
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
23 .3 .3 .3 Piles
To evaluate pile resistance, the geotechnical designer provides information regarding
pile resistance using one of the following two approaches:
1. A plot of the unfactored nominal (ultimate) bearing resistance (Rn) as a function
of depth for various pile types and sizes for strength and extreme event limit state
calculations are provided. This design data would be used to determine the feasible
ultimate pile resistance and the estimated depth for pile quantity determination. See
Figure 23-3 for example of pile data presentation.
2. Only Rn and the estimated depth at which it could be obtained are provided for one
or more selected pile types and sizes.
Resistance factors for bearing resistance for all limit states will also be provided (see
Table 23-5 for an example).
If downdrag is an issue, the ultimate downdrag load, DD, as a function of pile
diameter should be provided, as well as the depth zone of the pile that is affected by
downdrag, the downdrag load factor, and the cause of the downdrag (settlement due to
vertical stress increase, liquefaction, etc.). If liquefaction occurs, the lost side friction
resistance, RSdd, due to downdrag should be provided (see Chapter 8, Figure 8-31).
If scour is an issue, the magnitude and depth of the skin friction lost due to scour,
Rscour, should also be provided (see Chapter 8, Figure 8-30).
If lateral loads imposed by special soil loading conditions such as landslide forces are
present, the ultimate lateral soil force or stress distribution, and the load factors to be
applied to that force or stress, shall be be provided.
For evaluating uplift, the geotechnical designer shall provide, as a function of depth,
the nominal (unfactored) uplift resistance, Rn. This is usually be provided as a
function of depth, or as a single value for a given minimum tip elevation, depending on
the project needs. The skin friction lost due to scour or liquefaction to be applied to the
uplift resistance curves shall also be provided (separately, in tabular form). Resistance
factors shall be also be provided for strength and extreme event limit states.
The geotechnical designer shall also provide group reduction factors for bearing
resistance and uplift if necessary, as well as the associated resistance factors.
The geotechnical designer shall provide P-Y curve data as a function of depth.
Resistance factors for lateral load analysis do not need to be provided, as the lateral
load resistance factors will typically be 1.0.
Minimum tip elevations for the pile foundations shall be provided as appropriate.
Minimum tip elevations shall be based on pile foundation settlement, and, if
uplift loads are available, the depth required to provide adequate uplift resistance
(see Section 8.12.6). Minimum pile tip elevations provided in the Geotechnical
Report may need to be adjusted depending on the results of the lateral load and uplift
load evaluation performed by the structural designer. If adjustment in the minimum
tip elevations is necessary, or if the pile diameter needed is different than what was
assumed by the geotechnical designer for pile resistance design, the geotechnical
designer should be informed so that pile drivability, as discussed below, can
be re-evaluated.
Page 23-16 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
tip elevations is necessary, or if the pile diameter needed is different than what was assumed by the
geotechnical designer for pile resistance design, the geotechnical designer should be informed so that pile
Chapter 23 drivability, as discussed below, can be re-evaluated. Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Pile drivability should be evaluated at least conceptually for each project, and if appropriate, a wave
Pile drivability shall be evaluated at least conceptually for each project, and if
equation analysis performed and the results of the analysis provided in terms of special requirements
appropriate, a wave equation analysis performed and the results of the analysis
for hammer size and pile wall thickness, etc. The maximum driving resistance required to reach the
provided in terms of special requirements for hammer size and pile wall thickness, etc.
minimum tip elevation should also be provided.
The maximum driving resistance required to reach the minimum tip elevation shall
also be provided.
Resistance Factor, ϕ
Limit State Resistance Factor, Uplift
Bearing Resistance φ
LimitStrength
State Bearing Resistance
x x Uplift
Strength
Service x x x x
Service
Extreme Event x x x x
Extreme Event x x
Table 23-5 Example presentation of resistance factors for pile design.
Example Presentation of Resistance Factors for Pile Design
Table 23-5
Bearing Resistance (unfactored) Uplift Resistance (unfactored)
Strength and Extreme
Event Limit,
Dia. = _____ in. Strength and Extreme
Elevation or Depth
Assumptions:
Elevation or Depth Event Limit,
Dia. = _____ in.
Assumptions:
Example Presentation of Pile Bearing Resistance and Uplift
Figure 23-3 Example presentation of pile bearing resistance and uplift.
Figure 23-3
23 .3 .3 .4 Retaining Design
Geotechnical Walls Manual M 46-03 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
December 2006 Chapter 23-19
To evaluate bearing resistance for footing supported gravity walls, the geotechnical
designer provides qn, the unfactored nominal (ultimate) bearing resistance available,
and qserv, the settlement limited bearing resistance for the specified settlement for
various effective footing widths (i.e., reinforcement length plus facing width for
MSE walls) likely to be used, and resistance factors for each limit state. The amount
of settlement on which qserv is based shall be stated. The geotechnical designer also
provides wall base embedment depth requirements or footing elevations to obtain the
recommended bearing resistance.
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-17
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
To evaluate sliding stability, bearing, and eccentricity of gravity walls, the geotechnical
designer provides resistance factors for both the strength and extreme event limit states
for calculating the shear and passive resistance in sliding. In addition, the geotechnical
designer provides the soil parameters φ, Kp, and γ, the depth of soil in front of the
footing to ignore when calculating passive resistance, the soil parameters φ, Ka, and
γ used to calculate active force behind the wall, the seismic earth pressure coefficient
Kae (see Section 15.4.2.9), the peak ground acceleration (PGA) used to calculate
seismic earth pressures, and separate earth pressure diagrams for strength and extreme
event (seismic) limit state calculations that include all applicable earth pressures, with
the exception of traffic barrier impact loads (traffic barrier impact loads are developed
by the structural designer). The geotechnical designer shall also indicate in the report
whether or not the wall was assumed to be free to move during seismic loading (e.g.,
was 0.5xPGA or 1.0.xPGA used to determine Kae).
The geotechnical designer shall evaluate overall stability and provide the minimum
footing or reinforcement length required to maintain an acceptable safety factor, if
overall stability controls the wall width required. An example presentation of the
LRFD wall design recommendations to be provided by the geotechnical designer is as
shown in tables 23-6 and 23-7, and figures 23-4 and 23-5.
Parameter Value
Soil Unit Weight, ү (soil above wall footing base level) X
Soil Friction Angle, φ (soil above wall footing base level) X
Active Earth Pressure Coefficient, Ka X
Passive Earth Pressure Coefficient, Kp X
Seismic Earth Pressure Coefficient, Kae X
Coefficient of Sliding, Tan δ X
Example Presentation of Soil Design Parameters for Sliding and Eccentricity
Calculations for Gravity Walls
Table 23-6
Resistance Factor, ϕ
Shear Resistance Passive Pressure
Limit State Bearing
to Sliding Resistance to Sliding
Strength X X X
Service X X X
Extreme Event X X X
Example Presentation of Resistance Factors for Wall Design
Table 23-7
Page 23-18 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Bearing Resistance, qn or qserv
Unfactored strength and extreme
event limit states
Service limit state at ___ in.
of settlement
Effective Footing Width, B’
Example Presentation of Bearing Resistance R
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
Ecommendations for Gravity Walls
Figure 23-4
Figure 23-4 Example presentation of bearing resistance
recommendations for gravity walls.
Gravity
Wall
Earth Pressure, EH Traffic surcharge, LS
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
(a) Strength
December 2006 limit state earth pressures Chapter 23-21
Gravity *Provided only
Wall if EQ > 0.0
Total Seismic Pressure, EQ Traffic surcharge, LS*
(b) Extreme Event I limit state earth pressures
Example Presentation of Lateral Earth Pressures for Gravity Wall Design
Figure 23-5 Example presentation of lateral earth pressures for gravity wall design.
Figure 23-5
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-19
For non-proprietary MSE walls, the spacing, strength, and length of soil reinforcement should also be
October 2013
provided, as well as the applicable resistance factors.
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
For non-proprietary MSE walls, the spacing, strength, and length of soil reinforcement
should also be provided, as well as the applicable resistance factors.
For non-gravity cantilever walls and anchored walls, ultimate bearing resistance of
the soldier piles or drilled shafts as a function of depth (see Section 23.2.3.2, and
Figure 23-2), the lateral earth pressure distribution (active and passive), the minimum
embedment depth required for overall stability, and the no load zone dimensions,
ultimate anchor resistance for anchored walls, and the associated resistance factors
shall be provided. Table 23-7 and Figure 23-6 provide an example presentation of earth
pressure diagrams for nongravity cantilever and anchored walls to be provided by
the geotechnical designer. Note that for the Extreme Event I Limit State (seismic) for
anchored walls, the shape of the lateral earth pressure distribution is the same as the
Strength Limit State distribution (see AASHTO Article A11.3). Therefore, the active
lateral earth pressure for seismic loading for anchored walls may not be triangular as
shown in the figure.
Mud line or
finished grade
Water pressure, EH
Passive Resistance Earth Pressure, EH Traffic surcharge, LS
(a) Strength limit state earth pressures
Total seismic *Provided only
Mud line or pressure, EQ if γEQ > 0.0
finished grade
Water pressure, EH
EH
Passive Resistance Earth Pressure, EH Traffic surcharge, LS*
(b) Extreme event I limit state earth pressures
.
Example presentation of lateral earth pressures for non-gravity cantilever
and anchored wall design .
Figure 23-6
Page 23-20 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
23 .4 Information to Be Provided in the Geotechnical Design File
Documentation that provides details of the basis of recommendations made in the
geotechnical report or memorandum is critical not only for review by senior staff,
but also for addressing future questions that may come up regarding the basis of the
design, to address changes that may occur after the geotechnical design is completed,
to address questions regarding the design during construction to address problems or
claims, and for background for developing future projects in the same location, such
as bridge or fill widenings. Since the engineer who does the original design may not
necessarily be the one who deals with any of these future activities, the documentation
must be clear and concise, and easy and logical to follow. Anyone who must look at the
calculations and related documentation should not have to go to the original designer
to understand what was done.
The project documentation should be consistent with FHWA guidelines, as mentioned
at the beginning of this chapter, and shall be consistent with the requirements specified
in this GDM. Details regarding what this project documentation should contain are
provided in the sections that follow.
23.4.1 Documentation for Conceptual Level Geotechnical Design
Document sources of information (including the date) used for the conceptual
evaluation. Typical sources include final records, as-built bridge or other structure
layouts, existing test hole logs, geologic maps, previous or current geologic
reconnaissance results, etc.
If a geologic reconnaissance was or is conducted, the details of that review, including
any photos taken that are necessary to illustrate the conditions observed shall be
included in this documentation. For structures, provide a description of the foundation
support used for the existing structure, including design bearing capacity, if known,
and any foundation capacity records such as pile driving logs, load test results,
etc. From the final contract records, summarize any known construction problems
encountered when building the existing structure. Examples include over-excavation
depth and extent, and why it was needed, seepage observed in cuts and excavations,
dewatering problems, difficult digging, including obstructions encountered during
excavation, obstructions encountered during foundation installation (e.g., for piles
or shafts), slope instability during construction, changed conditions or change orders
involving the geotechnical features of the project, and anything else that would affect
the geotechnical aspects of the project.
For any geotechnical recommendations made, summarize the logic and justification
for those recommendations. If the recommendations are based on geotechnical
engineering experience and judgment, describe what specific information led to the
recommendation(s) made.
23.4.2 Documentation for Final Geotechnical Design
In addition to the information described in Section 23.4.1, the following information
shall be documented in the project geotechnical file (or design calculation package
submitted by a consultant, contractor, or design builder for WSDOT review as
specified in Section 23.5):
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-21
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
1. List or describe all given information and assumptions used, as well as the source
of that information. For all calculations, an idealized design cross-section that
shows the design element (e.g., wall, footing, pile foundation, buttress, etc.)
located in context to the existing and proposed ground lines, and the foundation
soil/rock shall be provided. This idealized cross-section should show the soil/rock
properties used for design, the soil/rock layer descriptions and thicknesses, the
water table location, the existing and proposed ground line, and any other pertinent
information. An example design cross-section for a deep foundation is shown in
Appendix 23-B. For slope stability, the soil/rock properties used for the design
should be shown (handwritten, if necessary) on the computer generated output
cross-section.
2. Additional information and/or a narrative shall also be provided which describes
the basis for the design soil/rock properties used. The additional details and
requirements in Chapter 5 as well as other GDM chapters, applicable to the
specific situation, regarding assessment and determination of geotechnical design
parameters shall be followed when developing and documenting justification
of the selected design parameters. If the properties are from laboratory tests,
state where the test results, and the analysis of those test results, can be found
in the final geotechnical design documentation and how those test results apply
to the specific site conditions and strata encountered, including consideration
of site geological history. If using correlations to SPT or cone data, or other
measurements, state which correlations were used, the range of applicability of
the correlation to the available measurements, the potential uncertainty in the
estimated property value due to the use of that correlation, and any corrections
to the data made. If using back-analysis based on measurable performance of
geotechnical features at the site or near the site in similar geologic conditions and
stratigraphy, provide the complete analyses and any assumptions used that are
necessary to reduce the number of degrees of freedom in the design model used.
When more than one of these approaches to defining design parameters is available
and used, the consistency of the results shall be assessed, and the logic used to
make the final selection of design parameters obtained from these analyses shall
be provided in the documentation. The uncertainty in the design parameters shall
also be considered when selecting geotechnical parameters for design. How this
uncertainty is addressed shall be documented (e.g., conservative selection of the
design parameters or increased overall level of safety used in the design, or both).
3. Identify what is to be determined from these calculations (i.e., what is the
objective?). For example, objectives could include foundation bearing resistance,
foundation or fill settlement (differential and total), time rate of settlement, the cut
or fill slope required, the size of the stabilizing berm required, etc.
4. The design method(s) used shall also be clearly identified for each set of
calculations, including any assumptions used to simplify the calculations, if that
was done, or to determine input values for variables in the design equation. Write
down equation(s) used and meaning of terms used in equation(s), or reference
where equation(s) used and/or meaning of terms were obtained. Attach a copy
of all curves or tables used in making the calculations and their source, or
appropriately reference those tables or figures. Write down or summarize all steps
needed to solve the equations and to obtain the desired solution.
Page 23-22 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
5. Identify the load and resistance factors, or safety factors, used for the design.
If it is necessary to diverge from the level of safety requirements in the GDM
and referenced manuals (e.g., AASHTO), subject to the approval of the State
Geotechnical Engineer, identify, and provide justification for, the level of safety
used for the design (e.g., load and resistance factors, or safety factors), considering
the bias and uncertainty in the design method(s) used, and the uncertainty in the
geotechnical design parameters selected for the design.
6. If using computer spreadsheets, provide detailed calculations for one example
to demonstrate the basis of the spreadsheet and that the spreadsheet is providing
accurate results. Hand calculations are not required for well proven, well
documented, and stable programs such as XSTABL or the wave equation. Detailed
example calculations that illustrate the basis of the spreadsheet are important for
engineering review purposes and for future reference if someone needs to get into
the calculations at some time in the future. A computer spreadsheet in itself is not a
substitute for that information.
7. Highlight the solutions that form the basis of the engineering recommendations
to be found in the project geotechnical report so that they are easy to find. Be sure
to write down which locations or piers where the calculations and their results are
applicable.
8. Provide a results summary, including a sketch of the final design, if appropriate.
Each set of calculations shall be signed and dated, and the reviewer shall also sign
and date the calculations. The name of the designer and reviewer shall also be printed
below the signature, to clearly identify these individuals, if their names do not appear
on the seals. Calculations and documents shall be sealed in accordance with State Law.
Consecutive page numbers should be provided for each set of calculations, and the
calculation page numbers for which the stamps and signatures are applicable should be
indicated below or beside the stamps.
These requirements also apply to preliminary designs or portions of a project
geotechnical design submitted for specific project elements.
23.4.3 Geotechnical File Contents
The geotechnical project file(s) should contain the information necessary for future
users of the file to understand the historical geotechnical data available, the scope of
the project, the dimensions and locations of the project features understood at the time
the geotechnical design was completed, the geotechnical investigation plan and the
logic used to develop that plan, the relationship of that plan to what was requested by
the Region, Bridge Office, Urban Corridors Office, Washington State Ferries Office,
or other office, the geotechnical design conducted, what was recommended, and when
and to whom it was recommended. Two types of project files should be maintained: the
geotechnical design file(s), and the construction support file(s).
The geotechnical design file should contain the following information (in addition to
the final geotechnical report):
• Historical project geotechnical and as-built data (see Section 23.3.1)
• Geotechnical investigation plan development documents
• Geologic reconnaissance results
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-23
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
• Critical end area plots, cross-sections, structure layouts, etc., that demonstrate the
scope of the project and project feature geometry as understood at the time of the
final design, if such data is not contained in the geotechnical report
• Information that illustrates design constraints, such as right-of-way location,
location of critical utilities, location and type of adjacent facilities that could be
affected by the design, etc.
• Boring log field notes
• Boring logs
• Lab transmittals
• Lab data, including rock core photos and records
• Field instrumentation measurements
• Final calculations only, unless preliminary calculations are needed to show design
development
• Final wave equation runs for pile foundation constructability evaluation
• Key photos (must be identified as to the subject and locations), including CD with
photo files
• Key correspondence (including e-mail) that tracks the development of the project –
this does not include correspondence that is focused on coordination activities
The geotechnical construction file should contain the following information:
• Change order correspondence and calculations
• Claim correspondence and data
• Construction submittal reviews (retain temporarily only, until it is clear that there
will be no construction claims)
• Photos (must be identified as to the subject and locations), including CD with
photo files
• CAPWAP reports
• Final wave equation runs and pile driving criteria development
• CSL reports
23 .5 Consultant Geotechnical Reports and Documentation Produced on
Behalf of WSDOT
Geotechnical reports and documentation produced by geotechnical consultants,
including geotechnical work conducted in support of Cost Reduction Incentive
proposals (CRIP’s), shoring submittals, and design-build projects, shall be subject to
the same reporting and documentation requirements as those produced by WSDOT
staff, as described in Sections 23.2 and 23.3. The detailed analyses and/or calculations
produced by the consultant in support of the geotechnical report development shall be
provided to the State.
Page 23-24 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Chapter 23 Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
23 .6 Summary of Geotechnical Conditions
The “Summary of Geotechnical Conditions” is generally a 1 to 2 page document
that briefly summarizes the subsurface and ground water conditions for key areas of
the project where foundations, cuts, fills, etc., are to be constructed. This document
also describes the impact of these subsurface conditions on the construction of these
foundations, cuts, fills, etc., to provide a common basis for interpretation of the
conditions and bidding. A Summary of Geotechnical Conditions is primarily used for
design-bid-build projects, as the Geotechnical Baseline Report (Chapter 22) serves the
functions described above for design-build projects.
A Summary of Geotechnical Conditions is mandatory for all projects that contain
bridges, walls, tunnels, unstable slope repairs, and significant earth work. The
Summary of Geotechnical Conditions should specifically contain the following
information:
1. Describe subsurface conditions in plain English. Avoid use of jargon and/or
nomenclature that contactors will not understand. Identify depths/thicknesses
of the soil or rock strata and their moisture state and density condition. Identify
the depth/elevation of groundwater and state its nature (e.g. perched, regional,
artesian, etc.). If multiple readings over time were obtained, identify dates and
depths measured, or as a minimum provide the range of depths measured and
the dates the highest and lowest water level readings were obtained. Also briefly
describe the method used to obtain the water level (e.g., open standpipe, sealed
piezometer, including what soil/rock unit the piezometer was sealed in, etc.). Refer
to the boring logs for detailed information. If referring to an anomalous soil, rock
or groundwater condition, refer to boring log designation where the anomaly was
encountered. Caution should also be exercised when describing strata depths. If
depths/thicknesses are based on only one boring, simply refer to the boring log
for that information. Comments regarding the potential for variability in the strata
thicknesses may be appropriate here. Also note that detailed soil/rock descriptions
are not necessary if those conditions will not impact the contractor’s construction
activities. For example, for fills or walls placed on footings, detailed information
is only needed that would support later discussion in this document regarding the
workability of the surficial soils, as well as the potential for settlement or instability
and their effect on construction.
2. For each structure, if necessary, state the impact the soil, rock or groundwater
condition may (will) have on construction. Where feasible, refer to boring log(s) or
data that provide the indication of risk. Be sure to mention the potential of risk for:
• Caving ground
• Slope instability due to temporary excavation, or as a result of a project element
(e.g. buttress, tieback wall, soil nail cuts)
• Settlement and its effect on how a particular structure or fill needs to be built
• Potential geotechnical impact of the construction of some elements on the
performance of adjacent elements that are, or are not, a part of the construction
contract (e.g., ground improvement performed at the toe of a wall could cause
movement of that wall)
• Groundwater flow and control, if anticipated, in construction excavations
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-25
October 2013
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation Chapter 23
• Dense layers (e.g., may inhibit pile driving, shaft or tunnel excavation, drilling
for nails, dowels or anchors)
• Obstructions, including cobbles or boulders, if applicable
• Excavation difficulties due to boulders, highly fractured or intact rock,
groundwater, or soft soil.
3. Where design assumptions and parameters can be affected by the manner in
which the structure is built, or if the assumptions or parameters can impact the
contractor’s construction methods, draw attention to these issues. This may include:
• Soil or rock strengths (e.g. point load tests, RQD, UCS, UU, CU tests, etc.)
• Whether shafts or piles are predominantly friction or end bearing by design
• The reasons for minimum tip elevations specified in the contract
• Downdrag loads and the effects on design/construction
• If certain construction methods are required or prohibited, state the
(geotechnical) reason for the requirement
• Liquefaction potential and impact on design/construction
4. List of geotechnical reports or information. This should include the project specific
report and memoranda (copies at the Project Engineer’s office) as well as pertinent
reports that may be located elsewhere and may be historical or regional in nature.
5. The intent of the Summary is to inform the contractor of what the geotechnical
designers know or strongly suspect about the subsurface conditions. The summary
should be brief (1 or 2 pages). It should not include tabulations of all available
data (e.g. borehole logs, lab tests, etc.). Only that data that are pertinent to the
adverse construction conditions anticipated should be mentioned. It should not
include sections or commentary about structures or project elements about which
the geotechnical designer has no real concerns. It shall also not be used to provide
contract special provision material (i.e., statements that direct the contractor to
do something). Such requirements should be included in the contract special
provisions instead.
Page 23-26 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 23-A PS&E Review Checklist
SR- C.S. Project
Region PS&E Bridge PS&E Office Copy PS&E
Reviewer Date Reviewed
Earth/Rock Work, Materials, and Geotech. Information Disclosure
Item Applicable? Comments
Geotech. Reports Listed?
Test Hole Locations Shown
(structures only)?
Test Hole Logs Provided?
Materials Source
• Source Approval
• Reclaimation Plan
• Quantities
• Disclosure of Geotechnical Data
Are Materials Specified Appropriate?
• Fill
• Backfill for Overex.
• Wall Backfill
Waste Sites
Cut Slopes
Fill Slopes
Berm or Shear Key
Soil Reinforcement
• Location
• Length
• Strength
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-A-1
October 2013
PS&E Review Checklist Appendix 23-A
Earth/Rock Work, Materials, and Geotech. Information Disclosure, Cont.
Item Applicable? Comments
Unsuitable Excavation
Ground Modification
• Wick Drains
• Stone Columns
• Vibrocompaction, compaction grouting,
etc.
• Advisory Specifications?
Settlement Mitigation
• Surcharges
• Fill Overbuild
• Light Weight Fill
• Preload Settlement Period
Rock Cuts and Blasting
• Slopes
• Special Provisions - Blasting
• Rock Reinforcement
Slope Drainage Features
Page 23-A-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 23-A PS&E Review Checklist
Bridges and Tunnels
Item Applicable? Comments
Spread Footings
• Elevations/Embed.
• Bearing Capacity
• Seals
• Overexcavation Requirements
• Soil Densification Requirements
• Advisory Specifications?
Piles
• Quantities
• Minimum Tip Elevations
• Capacity
• Pile Type and Size
• Hammer Requirements
• Special Pile Tips
• Special Material Requirements
• Pile Spacing
• Advisory Specifications?
Shafts
• Tip Elevations
• Shaft Diameter
• Casing Requirements
• Special Location Requirements for Tip
• Shaft Spacing
• Advisory Specifications?
Seismic Design
• Acceleration Coefficient
• Liquefaction Mitigation Requirements
• Special Design requirements
Abutment and Endslope Design
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-A-3
October 2013
PS&E Review Checklist Appendix 23-A
Retaining Walls
SR- C.S. Project
Item Applicable? Comments
Wall Number(s)
Wall Types Allowed
Facing Types?
External Stability
• Wall Base Embedment or Elevation
• Bearing Capacity
• Min. Wall Width
• Pile Support Requirements
• Shaft Support Requirements
• Overexcavation or Soil Densification
Requirements
• Surcharge Conditions are as Assumed?
• Slope Below Wall is as Assumed?
• Advisory Specifications?
Internal Stability
• Soil Reinforcement Strength and Spacing
Requirements
• Reinforcement Type
• No Load Zone Requirements
• Soil Design Parameters
Wall Drainage Features
Wall Backfill Type
Wall Quantities
Specifications Appropriate for Wall?
• Preapproved?
• Construction Tolerances?
Copy This Page to Wall Database Manager
Page 23-A-4 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
Appendix 23-A PS&E Review Checklist
Miscellaneous Structures
Item Applicable? Comments
Noise Walls
• Type Appropriate?
• Foundation Type
• Foundation Size and Depth
• Bearing Capacity
Signals/Signs
• Foundation Type
• Foundation Size and depth
Pipe Arches/Culverts
• Foundation Type
• Foundation Depth
• Bearing Capacity
• Camber Requirements
• Construction Staging
• Special Details
Special Utility Considerations
Instrumentation
Item Applicable? Comments
Types
Locations
Zones of Influence
Purpose and Use of Instrumentation is
Clear
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-A-5
October 2013
PS&E Review Checklist Appendix 23-A
Constructability Issues
Item Applicable? Comments
Advisory Specs. Provided?
• Obstructions?
• Special Excavation Problems?
• Wet Weather Construction
• Caving Conditions?
• Ground Water Conditions
• Pile Driveability
• Dewatering Issues
• Rock Excavation Issues
• Pit Development Issues
• Others
Construction Sequence
Temporary Slope/Shoring Requirements
Fill Placement
Soil Reinforcement Installation
Excavation Restrictions for Stability
Special Pile Driving Requirements and
Criteria
Page 23-A-6 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
December 2006
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03
and what was assumed for the design.
feature, other types of information may be needed to clearly convey to the reviewer what data was used
a foundation design calculation. Depending on the nature of the calculation and type of geotechnical
illustrates the types of information that should be included in an idealized cross-section to introduce
The following figure is an example of a design soil cross-section for a deep foundation. This figure
Foundation designation and location _________________
B
Final Design Parameters Soil Testing Summary
N = _____ Actual N values measured in layer __________________
N160 = _____ N160 values ____________________________________
Soil description = _____________ N160ave = _______ COV for N160ave = _________
D1 = _____ = ________ lab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
Su = ________ Sulab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
= ________ Gradation test results (max grain size, d50, % passing #200,
Cu, Cc, PI) ______________________________________
N = _____ Actual N values measured in layer __________________
N160 = _____ N160 values ____________________________________
Soil description = _____________ N160ave = _______ COV for N160ave = _________
D2 = _____ = ________ lab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
Su = ________ Sulab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
= ________ Gradation test results (max grain size, d50, % passing #200,
Cu, Cc, PI) ______________________________________
N = _____ Actual N values measured in layer __________________
Geotechnical Reporting and Documentation
for a Deep Foundation
N160 = _____ N160 values ____________________________________
D3 = _____ Soil description = _____________ N160ave = _______ COV for N160ave = _________
= ________ lab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
Su = ________ Sulab = _________ Test procedure used _______________
= ________ Gradation test results (max grain size, d50, % passing #200,
Cu, Cc, PI) ______________________________________
Location of boring(s) relative to shaft location ____________________________________________________________________
If correlations used to estimate , Su, and/or , indicate which one(s) were used __________________________________________
Chapter 23-37
Method used to correct N for overburden and SPT hammer energy ____________________________________________________
Type of SPT hammer, and measured SPT hammer efficiency, if available _______________________________________________
Water table depth below ground, including identification/thickness/location of confined water bearing zones = __________________
Identify sources of all data included in the form where additional details may be found ____________________________________
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08 Page 23-B-1
October 2013
Typical Design Cross-Section for a Deep Foundation Appendix 23-B
Page 23-B-2 WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.08
October 2013
You might also like
- A Short Course in Geotechnical Site Investigation PDF100% (18)A Short Course in Geotechnical Site Investigation PDF369 pages
- Cambridge International AS and A Level English Language: Paper 4100% (2)Cambridge International AS and A Level English Language: Paper 446 pages
- What Is "Ground Improvement?": Soil Improvement and Ground Modification Methods © 2015 Elsevier Inc. All Rights ReservedNo ratings yetWhat Is "Ground Improvement?": Soil Improvement and Ground Modification Methods © 2015 Elsevier Inc. All Rights Reserved5 pages
- Texas Department of Transportation Geotechnical Manual 2015100% (1)Texas Department of Transportation Geotechnical Manual 201560 pages
- Em - 1110!1!1804 Geotechnical InvestigationsNo ratings yetEm - 1110!1!1804 Geotechnical Investigations449 pages
- Verification of Geotechnical Grouting - Strategies and Planning100% (2)Verification of Geotechnical Grouting - Strategies and Planning68 pages
- Basic Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering - (Malestrom)100% (15)Basic Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering - (Malestrom)153 pages
- Load Transfer Settlement and Stability of Embankments Founded On Columns Installed by Deep Mixing MethodsNo ratings yetLoad Transfer Settlement and Stability of Embankments Founded On Columns Installed by Deep Mixing Methods35 pages
- Geosynthetic Design and Construction Guideline - FHWA 098-038100% (2)Geosynthetic Design and Construction Guideline - FHWA 098-038484 pages
- Prediction of Embankment Settlement Over Soft Soils100% (1)Prediction of Embankment Settlement Over Soft Soils210 pages
- GT1R1A - Caracterisation of Rock Masses PDFNo ratings yetGT1R1A - Caracterisation of Rock Masses PDF48 pages
- FundamentalsofGeotechnicalEngineeringandtheirApplications GeorgeKouretzis 2018edition PDF100% (1)FundamentalsofGeotechnicalEngineeringandtheirApplications GeorgeKouretzis 2018edition PDF232 pages
- A Catalogue of Details on Pre-Contract Schedules: Surgical Eye Centre of Excellence - KathFrom EverandA Catalogue of Details on Pre-Contract Schedules: Surgical Eye Centre of Excellence - KathNo ratings yet
- Geotechnical Engineering and Dams: Shaping Our WorldNo ratings yetGeotechnical Engineering and Dams: Shaping Our World6 pages
- Shear Strength of Silt and Clay EmbankmentNo ratings yetShear Strength of Silt and Clay Embankment319 pages
- Problems Associated With The Use of Compaction Grout For Sinkhole100% (1)Problems Associated With The Use of Compaction Grout For Sinkhole4 pages
- Application of Controlled Modulus Columns For Refinery and Petrochemical Tank Farm100% (1)Application of Controlled Modulus Columns For Refinery and Petrochemical Tank Farm14 pages
- URS LEVEE - GuidanceDocumentRev06 - UploadNo ratings yetURS LEVEE - GuidanceDocumentRev06 - Upload142 pages
- Module 1 Overview of Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering Practice Guidelines Version 1100% (1)Module 1 Overview of Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering Practice Guidelines Version 152 pages
- A Short Course in Foundation EngineeringNo ratings yetA Short Course in Foundation Engineering88 pages
- The California Bearing Ratio Method For The Design On Flexible Roads and Runaways-DavisNo ratings yetThe California Bearing Ratio Method For The Design On Flexible Roads and Runaways-Davis15 pages
- Alaska DOT Geotechnical Procedures ManualNo ratings yetAlaska DOT Geotechnical Procedures Manual187 pages
- (Ebooks PDF) Download Landmarks in Earth Reinforcement Proceedings of The International Symposium On Earth Reinforcement Fukuoka Kyushi Japan 14 16 November 2001 1st Edition Ochiai Full Chapters100% (14)(Ebooks PDF) Download Landmarks in Earth Reinforcement Proceedings of The International Symposium On Earth Reinforcement Fukuoka Kyushi Japan 14 16 November 2001 1st Edition Ochiai Full Chapters70 pages
- Al-Khafaji, Amir Wadi - Andersland, Orlando B.-Geotechnical Engineering and Soil Testing-Oxford University Press (1992)100% (9)Al-Khafaji, Amir Wadi - Andersland, Orlando B.-Geotechnical Engineering and Soil Testing-Oxford University Press (1992)385 pages
- Case Histories of Settlement Performance Comparisons On Ground ImNo ratings yetCase Histories of Settlement Performance Comparisons On Ground Im9 pages
- J5155124 Berne, NY Tower Geotechnical Report (Sealed) 11-6-15100% (1)J5155124 Berne, NY Tower Geotechnical Report (Sealed) 11-6-1525 pages
- 14 Comparison of Geotechnic Softwares Geo FEM Plaxis Z-SoilNo ratings yet14 Comparison of Geotechnic Softwares Geo FEM Plaxis Z-Soil6 pages
- Site Investigation and Geotechnical CharacterizationNo ratings yetSite Investigation and Geotechnical Characterization169 pages
- Climate Change Adjustments for Detailed Engineering Design of Roads: Experience from Viet NamFrom EverandClimate Change Adjustments for Detailed Engineering Design of Roads: Experience from Viet NamNo ratings yet
- Erosion in Geomechanics Applied to Dams and LeveesFrom EverandErosion in Geomechanics Applied to Dams and LeveesStephane BonelliNo ratings yet
- Disputed Earth: Geology and Trench Warfare on the Western Front 1914–18From EverandDisputed Earth: Geology and Trench Warfare on the Western Front 1914–18No ratings yet
- Geotechnical Investigations: Engineering and DesignNo ratings yetGeotechnical Investigations: Engineering and Design103 pages
- EM 1110-1-1804 - Geotechnical Investigations100% (2)EM 1110-1-1804 - Geotechnical Investigations449 pages
- EM 1110-1-1804-Geotechnical InvestigationsNo ratings yetEM 1110-1-1804-Geotechnical Investigations449 pages
- Core Tests:: Easy To Perform, Not Easy To InterpretNo ratings yetCore Tests:: Easy To Perform, Not Easy To Interpret10 pages
- How To Batch Plot Multiple Drawings at Once in Advance SteelNo ratings yetHow To Batch Plot Multiple Drawings at Once in Advance Steel5 pages
- Laporan Magang Della Charina 1401152580 S1 MbtiNo ratings yetLaporan Magang Della Charina 1401152580 S1 Mbti2 pages
- cultural differences texT selectividad practice-1 62gNo ratings yetcultural differences texT selectividad practice-1 62g2 pages
- SPORTS VOCABULARY English ESL Worksheets PDF &No ratings yetSPORTS VOCABULARY English ESL Worksheets PDF &1 page
- A Review Study On Analysis of Concrete T Beam Girder BridgeNo ratings yetA Review Study On Analysis of Concrete T Beam Girder Bridge3 pages
- Instant ebooks textbook Sport Coaching and Intellectual Disability 1st Edition David Hassan download all chapters100% (3)Instant ebooks textbook Sport Coaching and Intellectual Disability 1st Edition David Hassan download all chapters81 pages
- The Water Cycle Reading Comprehension Activity.201457474No ratings yetThe Water Cycle Reading Comprehension Activity.2014574747 pages
- Final Engine Cadet Assessment Guide PDFNo ratings yetFinal Engine Cadet Assessment Guide PDF26 pages
- 31 - Kahneman Et Al (2023) - Income and Emotional Well-Being - A Conflict ResolvedNo ratings yet31 - Kahneman Et Al (2023) - Income and Emotional Well-Being - A Conflict Resolved6 pages
- STC Square Phase 1 Questions & Answers 15No ratings yetSTC Square Phase 1 Questions & Answers 1512 pages
- 02 - Transitioning From Steady State To Dynamics PDFNo ratings yet02 - Transitioning From Steady State To Dynamics PDF24 pages
- Kumpulan Soal-Soal Asli SMM/SMPD Usu 2021 Bidang: Bahasa InggrisNo ratings yetKumpulan Soal-Soal Asli SMM/SMPD Usu 2021 Bidang: Bahasa Inggris2 pages
- Auditor Independence: Malaysian Accountants' PerceptionsNo ratings yetAuditor Independence: Malaysian Accountants' Perceptions13 pages
